i|:r 


»[i':-'!■^^'^■'': ''•'/■'•'•;,' 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA 
AT  LOS  angele; 


DICTIONARY  AND  GRAMMAR 


OF  THE 


LANGUAGE  OF  SA'A  AND 
ULAWA.  SOLOMON  ISLANDS 


BY 


WALTER  G.  IVENS,  M.  A. 


WITH  APPENDICES 


Published  by  the  Carnegie  Institution  of  Washington 
Washington,  191 8 


«7  4S 


DICTIONARY  AND  GRAMMAR 


OF   IHK 


LANGUAGE  OF  SA'A  AND 
ULAWA,  SOLOMON  ISLANDS 


BY 


WALTER  G.  IVENS,  M.  A. 


WITH  APPENDICES 


Published  by  the  Carnegie  Institution  of  Washington 
Washington,  191 8 


CARNEGIE  INSTITUTION  OF  WASHINGTON 
Publication  No.  253 


PRESS    OF    GIBSON    BROTHERS 
WASHINGTON 


X 

r/T 

W 

2 


o 
o 

s 

< 


PREFACE. 

The  two  languages,  Sa'a  and  Ulawa,  of  which  a  dictionary  is  here 
presented,  belong  to  one  of  the  Melanesian  groups  of  the  Oceanic 
family  of  languages.  Ulawa  is  the  language  spoken  in  the  ten  villages 
of  the  small  island  of  Ulawa,  the  Contrariete  Island  of  the  charts,  in  the 
southeast  Solomons.  Sa'a  is  spoken  in  its  purity  in  the  village  of  the 
same  name,  the  last  inhabited  place  on  the  southeast  extremity  of  the 
large  island  of  Malaita,  which  lies  some  30  miles  west  of  Ulawa. 

Malaita  is  composed  of  two  islands,  commonly  called  Big  and  Little 
Malaita,  separated  by  a  narrow  channel  designated  Mara  Masiki  Chan- 
nel on  the  Admiralty  chart,  but  called  Laloi  Su*u  (literally  **within-the- 
inlet")  by  the  people  who  use  the  languages  presented  here.  Sa'a  is 
situated  on  the  Malaita  coast  exactly  opposite  Ulawa,  and  there  is  con- 
stant communication  between  the  two  places  during  the  calmer  weather 
after  the  dropping  of  the  southeast  trade  winds.  The  two  languages 
are  evidently  from  a  common  stock  and  are  so  closely  allied  that  it  has 
been  found  quite  possible  in  the  present  work  to  adjust  the  various 
details  to  the  same  scheme  of  treatment,  both  as  to  grammar  and 
vocabulary. 

Of  the  two,  Sa'a  is  far  more  highly  specialized  than  Ulawa.  This 
specialization  is  shown: 

I.  In  the  use  of  nouns  in  the  singular  number,  and  particularly  of  such 

as  are  the  names  of  parts  of  the  body,  without  the  definite  article 

nga  being  prefixed. 
2-  In  the  very  careful  observance  of  the  phonetic  rule  that  the  vowel  a 

changes  to  e  in  certain  words  after  a  preceding  i  or  u  or  after  the 

verbal  particle  ko. 

3.  In  the  very  frequent  use  of  the  gerundive. 

4.  In  the  richer  vocabulary  and  in  the  employment  of  words  not  used  in 

Ulawa  in  order  to  avoid  uncertainty  in  meaning,  e.  g.,  Sa'a  imme 
house,  nime  bowl,  where  Ulawa  employs  nima  for  both;  Sa'a  domii 
to  fall  (of  persons  only)  in  addition  to  'iisii,  where  Ulawa  has  only 
'usu  for  both. 

5.  In  the  fuller  forms  of  the  pronoun  used  as  subject  of  the  verb  and  in 

the  more  particular  and  careful  use  of  the  quasi-trinal  forms  end- 
ing in  -lu. 

6.  In  the  dropping  of  an  inner  consonant  in  the  reduplication  of  stems. 

The  name  of  Contrariete  Island  is  Ulawa  and  not  Ulava  or  Ulaua,  as 
is  sometimes  found;  the  language  has  no  v  sound,  and  in  Lau,  where 
w  changes  to  q  (kw),  the  island  is  known  as  Ulaqa.  The  number  of 
persons  who  live  on  Ulawa  and  who  speak  Ulawa  is  not  more  than  i  ,200 
at  the  outside;  but  the  language  has  a  certain  and  considerable  extrinsic 
importance  in  view  of  the  fact  that  a  number  of  villages  on  Lgi,  the 
island  lying  off  the  east  coast  of  San  Cristoval,  have  Ulawa  teachers 
and  are  using  Ulawa  books. 


203220 


iv  PREFACE. 

The  true  Sa'a  speech  is  spoken  in  its  purity  at  two  villages  only, 
Sa'a  itself  and  A'ulu.  But  the  differences  between  Sa'a  and  Qaloto 
(Pwaloto),  the  language  of  the  majority  of  the  inhabitants  of  Little 
JNIalaita,  4,000  or  5,000  in  number,  are  so  slight,  amounting  largely  to 
variety  in  accent  and  intonation,  that  Sa'a  may  be  said  to  be  the  prin- 
cipal language  of  Little  Malaita. 

The  language  of  the  north  end  of  Little  Malaita  is  called  Tolo,  and 
this  is  also  the  language  of  the  south  end  of  Big  Malaita.  On  the  north 
end  of  Big  Malaita  the  language  is  known  as  Lau.  These  three  lan- 
guages, Sa'a,  Tolo,  and  Lau  are  closely  akin,  and  with  Ulawa  they  form 
a  distinct  subgroup  in  the  linguistics  of  the  Solomon  Islands.  Sa'a  and 
Ulawa  on  their  part  have  distinct  likenesses  with  the  languages  of  San 
Cristoval,  and  Lau  at  the  other  end  of  Malaita  has  several  features 
which  show  a  grammatical  connection  with  the  language  of  Florida. 

An  important  feature  in  both  Sa'a  and  Ulawa  is  the  use  of  shortened 
forms  of  the  personal  pronouns  in  the  three  persons  singular  and  of 
additional  forms  in  the  third  person  plural,  and  the  suffixing  of  these 
as  objects  to  verbs  and  prepositions.  This  is  the  practice  of  Solomon 
Island  languages  generally.  The  presence  of  the  third  personal  pos- 
sessive has  not  hitherto  been  recognized  in  the  languages  of  San  Cristo- 
val, but  doubtless  it  exists,  although  not  so  commonly  in  use  as  in 
Sa'a  and  Ulawa.  Certain  examples  seem  to  show"  its  presence  in  the 
language  of  Florida  (though  Dr.  Codrington  has  not  marked  it  in  his 
grammar  of  Florida);  anggu  and  ana  certainly  occur,  cf.  ganagana  oli 
anggu  remembering  me,  ganagana  oli  ana  remembering  him.  If  these 
are  compared  with  Sa'a  'amasi  to'o  aku  feeling  pity  for  me  and  'amasi 
to'o  ana  feeUng  pity  for  him,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  so-called  suffix  in 
Florida  is  a^iggu,  awfl,  andnot  nggu  and  na,  cf.  "Melanesian  Languages," 
page  524,  nouns. 

This  is  the  first  essay  toward  the  dictionary  of  any  Solomon  Island 
language.  The  compiler  is  fully  aware  of  the  scantiness  of  his  work. 
Probably  not  more  than  one-third  and  certainly  not  one-half  of  the 
existing  words  have  been  collected  by  him.  The  languages  are  rich 
and,  with  proper  opportunity,  many  additions  might  easily  be  made  to 
the  words  herein  set  forth. 

Of  the  linguistic  importance  of  the  Melanesian  languages  there  can  be 
no  possible  doubt.  Dr.  Codrington  in  his  book  "The  Melanesian 
Languages"  has  shown  how  certain  features  in  a  language  so  far 
removed  geographically  from  Melanesia  as  Malagasy  can  be  explained 
by  referring  to  Melanesian  habits  of  speech,  and  also  how  Melanesia  is 
in  many  ways  the  linguistic  key  to  the  proper  explanation  of  Polyne- 
sian. Mr.  A.  S.  Atkinson,  in  a  paper  read  in  1886  before  the  Nelson 
(New  Zealand)  Philosophical  Society,  said  with  reference  to  Dr.  Cod- 
rington's  "Melanesian  Languages"  that  "this  work  will  mark  an  epoch 
in  Polynesian  philology  by  showing  the  fundamental  relation  between 


PREFACE.  V 

the  Polynesian  and  the  Melanesian  hinguages."  If  this  opinion  is  cor- 
rect, and  Mr.  Atkinson  was  an  excellent  judge,  it  is  of  the  highest 
importance  that  matter  such  as  is  contained  in  this  dictionary,  the 
compilation  of  which  is  directly  the  result  of  the  lead  given  by  Dr. 
Codrington,  should  be  placed  before  scholars  in  the  hope  that  it  may  be 
of  some  further  help  in  elucidating  the  philological  problems  of  the 
Oceanic  family  of  languages. 

It  should  be  noted  that  it  has  not  been  thought  necessary  to  print  in 
this  work  many  words  common  to  the  Oceanic  family  whose  cognates 
are  set  out  in  full  in  the  Mota  dictionary. 

The  compiler  of  this  dictionary  desires  to  put  on  record  his  indebted- 
ness herein  to  Dr.  Codrington's  example,  and  wishes  to  acknowledge 
that  whatever  value  the  dictionary  may  be  found  to  possess  will  be  due 
to  his  having  endeavored  to  follow  the  lines  laid  down  in  two  of  the 
books  from  Dr.  Codrington's  pen,  "Melanesian  Languages"  and  the 
"Dictionary  of  Mota." ^ 

The  thanks  of  the  author  are  also  due  to  the  officials  of  the  Carnegie 
Institution  of  Washington  for  their  readiness  to  print  and  publish  the 
present  volume,  and  to  Mr.  William  Churchill,  Associate  of  the  Institu- 
tion, for  assistance  in  arranging  the  matter  presented  in  the  dictionary. 

W.  G.  IVENS. 

Malvern,  Victoria,  June  igij. 


LITERATURE. 


List  of  books  printed  in  the  languages  of  Sa'  a  and  of  Ulazva: 

1.  Prayer  Books  containing  Matins  and  Evensong,  Litany,  Selection  of 

Psalms  containing  about  60  Psalms,  Holy  Communion  Office  with 
Collects,  Occasional  Services,  Church  Catechism. 

2.  Hymn  Books  containing  50  Hymns. 

3.  Complete  New  Testament. 

4.  Catechism  for  the  Children  of  the  Church. 

Bibliography  of  Sa'  a  and  Ulazva  languages: 

1.  Small  grammars  in  Dr.  Codrington's  "Melanesian  Languages." 

2.  Separate  grammars  compiled  by  W.  G.  Ivens. 

Other  Matter: 

Collection  of  Folk  Lore  Tales  in  Ulawa. 


CHECK-LIST  OF  LANGUAGES. 


Araga,  Pentecost  Island,  New  Hebrides. 

BougainzHUe  Straits,  Solomon  Islands  between 
Bougain\'ille  and  Choiseul  Islands. 

Bug.,   Bugotu,  Vsabel,  Solomon  Islands. 

D.  Y..  Duke  of  York  Island.  Bismarck  Archi- 
pelago. 

Epi,  New  Hebrides. 

Ejp.  Sto.,  Espiritu  Santo,  New  Hebrides. 

Fatf.  New  Hebrides  (Efat4). 

Fagani,  San  Cristoval,  Solomon  Islands. 

Fiji  Islands. 

Fl..  Florida,  Solomon  Islands. 

Cilb.,  Gilbert  Islands,  Micronesia. 

Haw.,  Hawaii. 

Lau,  Malaita,  Solomon  Islands. 

Maisin.  CoUingwood  Bay,  New  Guinea. 

Mai.,  Malay. 

Malag.,  Malagasy,  Madagascar. 

Malaita,  Solomon  Islands. 

Malekula,  New  Hebrides. 

Malo,  New  Hebrides. 

Mao.,  Maori,  New  Zealand. 

Marsh.,  Marshall  Islands,  Micronesia. 

Mel.,  Melanesia. 

Mota,  Banks  Islands  (New  Hebrides  complex). 


Molu,  Gulf  of  Papua,  New  Guinea. 

A'^.  B.,  New  Britain,  Bismarck  Archipelago. 

N.  G.,  New  Guinea. 

Nguna,  New  Hebrides. 

A'iue,  Savage  Islands,  Polynesia. 

Omba,  Lepers'  Island,  New  Hebrides. 

Pol.,  Polynesian. 

Q.,  Qaloto,  Malaita,  Solomon  Islands. 

S.,  Sa'a,  Malaita,  Solomon  Islands  (see  follow- 
ing note). 

Sam.,  Samoa,  Polynesia. 

San  Cr.,  San  Cristoval,  Solomon  Islands. 

Ses.,  Sesake,  New  Hebrides. 

Sol.,  Solomon  Islands. 

Sla.  Cr.,  Santa  Cruz,  New  Hebrides. 

Tah.,  Tahiti,  southeast  Polynesia. 

Tanna,  New  Hebrides. 

Tolo,  Malaita,  Solomon  Islands. 

U.,  Ulawa,  Contrariete  Island,  Solomon 
Islands  (see  following  note). 

Vaturanga,  Guadalcanar,  Solomon  Islands. 

Viti,  the  language  of  the  Fiji  Islands. 

Wango,  San  Cristoval,  Solomon  Islands. 

Wedau,  Bartle  Bay,  New  Guinea. 


Note. — When  S.  or  U.  is  found  after  words  it  is  intended  to  mark  that 
word  as  peculiar  to  Sa'a  or  Ulawa  respectively;  where  no  such  notation  appears 
it  is  to  be  understood  that  the  word  is  common  to  both  languages. 


TABLE  OF  ABBREVIATIONS. 


adj.,  adjective. 

adv.,  adverb. 

art.,  article. 

(au)  marks  a  preposition  as  taking  the  suffixed 
pronouns  du,  'o,  a. 

dcf.,  definite,  definitive. 

demonst.,  demonstrative. 

determ.,  determinative. 

excl.,  exclusive  (of  personal  pronouns,  exclud- 
ing the  person  addressed). 

exclam.,  exclamation. 

genit.,  genitive. 

gerund.,  gerundive. 

incl.,  inclusive  (of  personal  pronouns,  including 
the  person  addressed). 

inter j.,  interjection. 

interr.,  interrogative. 

(ku)  marks  a  noun  as  taking  the  suffixed  pro- 
nouns ku,  mu,  na. 

met.,  metaphorical. 

metath.,  metathesis. 

melon.,  metonymy. 

n.,  noun. 

neg.,  negative. 

neut.,  neuter. 

{No)  or  (na,  ni)  marks  a  noun  as  taking  the 
suffixed  pronoun  in  the  third  singular  and 
in  the  neuter  only  of  the  third  plural. 


obj.,  object. 

onomatop.,  onomatopoetic. 
part.,  particle. 
parlic,  participle. 
pers.,  person,  personal. 
pi.,  plural. 
poss.,  possessive. 
pr.,  pronoun. 
pref.,  prefix. 
prep.,  preposition. 
prov.,  proverbial. 

redup.,  reduplication,  reduplicated. 
sing.,  singular. 
subj.,  subject. 
stiff.,  suffix,  suffixed. 
term.,  termination. 
tr.,  transitive. 
v.,  verb. 

V.  i.,  verb  intransitive. 
V.  p.,  verbal  particle. 
V.  tr.,  verb  transitive. 
voc,  vocative. 

M.  A.,    Codrington's    "Melanesian    Anthro- 
pology." 
M.  L.,  Codrington's  "Melanesian  Languages." 
T.  S.  E.  "Torres  Straits  Expedition,"  vol.  iii. 


CONTENTS. 

PAGES 

Preface "'"^^ 

Dictionary  of  Sa'a  and  Ulawa  Languages ^~" A 

Index  to  the  Dictionary 117-136 

Appendices: 

A  Brief  Grammar  of  Sa'a  and  Ulawa ■ 139-^54 

The  Lord's  Prayer  in  Twenty  Languages  as  used  in  the  Diocese 

of  Melanesia  in  the  Islands  of  the  South  Pacific ISS'IS^ 

Linguistics  in  the  Western  Pacific I57~i76 

Melanesia  and  its  People I77~i9^ 

Natives  of  Melanesia •, ,•  •. 192-198 

Some  Historical  Notes  concerning  the  Melanesian  Mission.  .  .  .    199-206 

"Yachting"  in  Melanesia 207-216 

The  Queensland  Labor  Trade 217-232 

Santa  Cruz 233-249 


ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Frontispiece.    The  Landing  of  John  Williams  at  Tanna. 

Text-figure  (p.  208).     The  Undine. 

Plate    i.  The  Southern  Cross  at  Santa  Cruz.  ^ 

2.  A.  Recruiting  Boat  at  a  Market  in  Malaita.    The  Women  m  Canoes 

are  waiting  to  exchange  their  Fish  for  Garden  Produce. 
B.  Women  Traders,  etc.,  Malaita. 

3.  A.  Sea-going  Canoe,  Malaita. 

B.  Model  of  Canoe  used  for  Bonito  Fishing,  Ulawa. 

C.  Matema,  Reef  Group. 

4.  A.  Carved  Food-bowls  and  Porpoise. 
B.  Food-bowls  from  Ulawa. 

5.  War-belts,   Bowl,   Lime-sticks,    Ear-plug,    Forehead   Ornaments, 

Water-bottle,  etc. 

6.  A.  Carvings  from  Ulawa:  Man,  Pig,  and  Dog. 

B.  Ulawa  Hair-combs. 

C.  Forehead  Ornaments  made  of  Clam  and  Turtle  Shell,  from 
Florida. 

7.  A.  Clubs  from  Malaita,  Solomon  Islands. 
B.  Clubs,  etc.,  from  Malaita  and  Ulawa. 

8.  A.  Ornaments  of  Shell  for  Forehead,  Ear,  and  Nose,  from  Malaita 

and  Ulawa. 
B.  Nose  Pendants  and  Fasteners  for  Bandolier. 

9.  Belts,  Bandolier,  Necklaces,  Armlets,  etc.,  made  of  Native  Money, 

Shells,  Dogs' Teeth,  Porpoise  Teeth. 

10.  A.  Natural    Flints    incised,    regarded    as    possessmg   Mana    and 

causing  Yams  to  fructify,  from  Solomons. 
B.  Ghost  made  of  Coral,  from  Ulawa. 

11.  A.  Young  Man  of  Nukapu. 
B.  Man  of  Qarea,  Malaita. 

vii 


DICTIONARY 

OF 

SA'A  AND  ULAWA  LANGUAGES 


DICTIONARY  OF  SA'A  AND  ULAWA  LANGUAGES. 


a  1.  personal  article  used  with  nouns  and 
verbs:  (a)  when  used  with  a  common 
noun  it  indicates  its  use  as  a  personal 
name;  ola,  thing,  a  ola.  So-and-so;  mwae, 
person,  a  mwaena,  So-and-so;  it  is 
applied  to  all  personal  names,  both 
native  and  foreign,  male  and  female, 
a  Wale,  a  John;  it  is  seen  also  in  alei, 
who?  it  is  used  to  personify;  a  wawa  ko 
'unu'unue  mu  ola  a  sae  e  hojiu  eni,  the 
mouth  speaks  of  what  the  heart  is  full, 
(b)  when  used  with  a  verb  or  adjective 
it  indicates  their  use  as  a  descriptive 
name;  ero,  to  deceive;  o  eroero,  a  de- 
ceiver. In  usage  it  corresponds  to  the 
t  of  Mota  and  Malagasy. 

a  2.  termination  of  the  verbal  noun:  halale, 
to  go  along  the  shore;  halalea,  sea-coast. 

a  3.  adverb  of  assent:  'o  te  urine?  a,  did  you 
do  thus?     yes. 

H  4.  pers.  pron.  3d  sing,  suffixed  to  verb  (with 
or  without  verbal  suffix)  as  object,  and 
to  prepositions  as  anticipatory  object 
and  used  both  of  persons  and  things,  as 
him,  her,  it;  it  does  not  change  to  e  after 
a  preceding  t  or  u  before  a  proper  name 
owing  to  the  presence  of  the  personal 
article  a;  li'oa  e  Ho  dhuiaa  Dora,  the 
spirit  protected  Dora. 

a  5.  stem  to  which  the  pronouns  kii,  mu,  na, 
etc.,  are  suffixed  in  forming  poss.  3. 
Polynesian  ha,  la. 

'a  6.  prefix  of  condition,  making  participles: 
Idngu,  to  pluck,  'aliingu,  come  out  of 
socket;  hdli,  to  break  olT,  'aluili,  broken 
ofT.     Mota  ga  3. 

*a  7.  Ulawa  v.  p.  of  present  or  general  time, 
joined  in  pronunciation  to  the  personal 
pronoun  used  as  subject,  na'a,  'o'a. 
Lau  ka,  future  particle;  Fotuna,  New 
Hebrides,  ka.  id. 

*a  'a'a  8.  exclam.  negative,  don't. 

•a  'a'a  9.  adj.  term,  suffixed  to  nouns,  verbs 
and  other  adjectives;  qiiqii,  mud; 
qiiqii'e,  muddy;  mwako,  to  pierce; 
mwakomwako'a,  prickly.  Mota  ga  5, 
Bugotu  ga,  Motu  ka,  Samoa  a. 

*S  10.  suffix,  (a)  to  poss.  2  and  3  in  sing.  1  and 
2:  ndkii'd,  ndku'e,  dku'd,  dmu'd,  ndtnu'd. 
(b)  to  pers.  pron.  dual  2  and  3:  i'emeru'e, 
kereru'e.     Probably  'a  9. 

'a  11.  stem  to  which  pronouns  ku,  mu,  na, 
etc.,  are  suffixed,  forming  poss.  1  of 
things  to  eat.  cf.  a  5.  Mota  ga  1, 
Bugotu  ga. 

'a  12.  as  fl  6;  'dnguru  from  nguru. 

*a'a  1.  exclam.  negative,  don't;  'a  8. 

*a'a  2.  a  large  green  parrot  with  red  under  the 
wings,  the  male  of  iloilo'a.  New 
Guinea  electus.  San  Cristoval  kaka, 
Maori  kaka. 


'a'a  3.  to  run.  to  be  abundant,  of  creepers; 
hahalisi  e  'a'a.  the  grass  has  spread;  hule 
e  'a'a  ha'ahia  taoha,  convolvulus  had 
crept  over  the  canoe  house.  Wango 
taga,  to  be  in  leaf. 

'a'a  4.  to  rise  up  clear,  of  the  moon:  waaro- 
waaro  e  mdnu  'a'a  mat  iUngi,  the  moon 
has  floated  clear  up  on  high. 

'a'a  S.  5.  to  throw,  to  bowl:  'a'a  lo'ohaa,  to 
contribute  money.  Wango  gaga,  to  be 
spent;  Lau  laga,  to  throw. 

'a'a  6.  adj.  suff.;  puru,  frequent;  purupuru'a'a, 
frequently;  ivdi,  water;  wdiwei'a'a, 
watery,     cf.  'a  9. 

'a'ada'i  v.  i.,  to  importune,  to  vex,  to  beg,  to 
dun. 
'a'ada'ini  v.  tr.,  to  importune  a  person. 

'a'ade  U.,  to  see.  cf.  hd'iade'i.  Wango  aadai, 
to  look. 

'a'ae  (ku)  S.,  n.,  leg,  foot.     cf.  'ae  1. 

•a'ai  U.  exclam.  hahal     'a'ai  laa,  so  there! 

'a'aila'a  adj.,  firm,  strong,  powerful;  ea'a'ila'a 
olo  mae  ana,  he  is  very  strong;  redupli- 
cated 'aila  with  'a  9. 
'a'ailahaana  strength,  its  strength. 

'a'ala  v.  i.,  to  bite;  mwaa  'a'ala,  poisonous 
snake,     'ala  3. 

'a'ala'i  v.  i.,  to  increase,  to  spread,  of  plants. 
'a'a  3. 

'a'ana  U.  v.  i.,  to  vomit. 
'a'anata'ini  v.  tr. 

aani  U.,  adverb  preceding  verb;  at  all,  ju3t 
now;  e  qake  aani  lae,  he  did  not  go  at  all; 
na'asi  aani  lae  mai,  I  have  just  come. 

'a'a'o  cf.  'a'o. 

'a'aoleanga  S.,  v.  n.,  lamentation. 

'a'aro  v.  t.,  to  come  aboard,  of  surf;  hai  naho  e 
'a'aro  melii,  a  wave  came  aboard  us. 
a'aronga  v.  n.,  surf  breaking  on  the  shore. 

'a'ari  v.  i.,  to  be  rent  asunder.  Wango  kari, 
Lau  kakari,  Florida  lahari. 

'a'atasi  v.  i.,  to  be  odd,  uneven,  in  number; 
nga  hue  e  'a'atasi,  there  is  an  odd  one. 

'a'ate  v.  i.,  to  be  dry;  hero  'a' ate,  dregs  of  grated 
coconut  after  pressing  out  the  milk. 

aau  the  season  of  the  southeast  trades,  winter, 
the  season  of  the  ripe  canarium  nuts: 
aau  kosi  repo,  the  canarium  nuts  are  just 
ripe;  aau  e  repo  kosi  holaa,  when  the  nuta 
are  ripe  the  weather  is  calm;  aau 
marawa,  the  nuts  purpling  before  ripen- 
ing, the  month  of  July.     cf.  mar  aau. 

'a'auhi  v.  tr.,  to  help,  to  come  to  the  aid  of. 
hd'i'a'auhi.  Wango  aauhi;  Mota  kakau, 
to  visit  constantly. 

ada  1.  poss.  3,  pi.  3,  among  them,  belonging  to 
them,  they  (obj.). 

'ada  2.  poss.  1.  pi.  3,  for  them,  theirs,  of  things 
to  eat. 

adaada  S.,  ataata  U.,  v.  i.,  to  progress,  to  move 
on,  to  be  in  motion. 


ADA'ELU 


ada'elu  1.  poss.,  3,  pi.  3.  among  them,  for  them, 

them  (obj.');  ada  1,  'elii. 
'ada'elu  2.  poss.  1,  pi.  3,  for  them,  theirs,  of 

things  to  eat;  'ada  2. 
adai  1.  n..  a  cluster;  a  bunch:  adai  niu,  a  bunch 

of  green  coconuts. 
'ada'i  S.  2.  v.  i.,  to  rub:  nunnrele  ko  'ada'i  melu, 

fearfulness  has  come  upon  us. 
adairi  S.  v.  i.,  to  despise,  used  with  poss.  3. 
adairinge'ini     v.     tr.     Wango    adairi,     to 

separate. 
adlao  n.,  a  creeper  used  to  make  bowstrings. 
adaoro  v.  i.,  to  crouch  {oro,  to  stoop).     In  this 

word  ao  is  diphthong. 
adaru'e  S.,  adaru'a  U.,  1 .  poss.  3,  dual  3,  among, 

belonging  to,  the  two  of  them;  used  also 

as  object  when  the  pronoun  is  separated 

from  the  verb. 
'adaru'e  S.,  'adaru'a  U.,  'adaru'i  U.,  2.  poss.  1, 

dual  3,  for  the  two  of  them,  of  things  to 

eat. 
*ade  L'.,  to  see:  e  qalco  la  ne'e  'adea,  I   saw 

nothing,      hd'i'ade'i. 
adi  V.  tr.,  to  tabu,  to  set  one's  mark  upon;  n.,  a 

tabu  mark;  huui  edi,  S.,  huu  ni  edi,  U., 

a  bunch  of  leaves  used  as  a  tabu  sign, 
adinga  U.,  v.  n.,  'ahi  edinga,  the  placing  of 

a  tabu  sign. 
2dila-(ku),  gerund, 
adiedi  1.  n.,  yellow  vascular  tissue  of  gleichenia 

fern  used  in  ornamentation  on  combs, 

spears,  etc.:  noma  adiedi,  a  spear  with 

grass  plaiting;  arapa  adiedi,  a  comb  so 

decorated. 
adiedi  2.  v.  i.,  to  have  pins  and  needles  in  the 

limbs:  'aekii  ko  ediedi,  my  legs  tingle. 
adine  S.,  n.,  of  relationship,  used  with  ro  mwa: 

ro    mwa     adine,     two     cousins-german 

regarded  as  brother  and  sister,     ddi. 
adio  n.,  a  creeper  which  grows  on  banyans,  used 

as  fishing-lines    or  to  tie  together  the 

teeth  of  combs  {arapa) :  nga  hikei  adio, 

a  coil  of  adio. 
adiu  v.  i.,  to  be  out  of  joint,     diu  1. 
ado  V.  i.,  to  share  in,  to  participate;  (a)  used 

with  poss.  3;  (b)  used  with  suff.  pron. 

ku,  mu,  na,  da,  ni,  to  befit;  adokii,   my 

deserts;  le'ii  e  adoku,  my  share,  ha'aado. 
adonga  S.,  v.  n.,  used  with  ddu  1,  heh:  noko  deu 

adonga,  I  am  making  an  attempt;  7nola 

adonga,  merely  tentatively. 
adoma'i,  adoadoma'i  U.,  v.i .,  to  think,  to  recol- 
lect; adoma'i  itioiisi,  to  decide,  to  dare; 

adoma'i  sae,  to  give  thought  to;  adoma'i 

su'ale'e,  to  be  anxious  about. 
adoma'inga  v.  n.,  thought,  recollection, 
adoma'ini  v.  tr.,  to  think  of  a  thing. 
adoma'inila-(ku)  gerund.     Wango  adomai, 

Bugotu  ado,  to  know. 
adu,  aduedu  v.  i.,  to  carve,  to  build,  to  dub  out 

planks;  ddii  i'ola,  to  build  a  canoe;  ddu 

i'olanga,  canoe  building, 
adumi  v.  tr.,  to  carve,  etc. 
aduminge  v.  n. 

adumila-fkuj,  gerund.     Wango  adu. 
'ae,  'ae'ae  (ku;,  n.,  leg,  foot;  'aeku  e  li'i,  my  legs 

are  out  of  joint;  'ae  loku,  maimed  in  the 


'ae,  'ae'ae  (continued). 

feet,  halt;  'ae  pule,  dropsical;  'aeku  ko 
ediedi,  my  foot  tingles;  'aeku  ko  sennieu, 
my  foot  hurts;  'ato  'ae,  to  move  quickly; 
huni  lengu  ha'aodohie  'aeka,  to  guide  our 
feet;  i  ngadona  'acna,  before,  at  the  feet 
of,  him;  kolune  'ae,  the  heel;  koukouli  'ae, 
the  ankle;  Idu  'ae,  be  quick;  ni'i  'ac  la'o 
i'ola,  to  board  a  canoe;  penalana  'ae, 
the  sole;  poupoii  ni  'ae'ae,  the  heel;  tdu 
'ae,  to  hurrjs  loiola  i  'ae,  to  follow  a 
master;  7imu  i  'ae,  to  gather  round  the 
feet  of.  Maori  wae,  foot;  Motu  ae,  foot; 
Bugotu  nae,  foot. 

'ae  2.  n.,  mark,  example. 

'ae  3.  n.,  source,  beginning;  mu  'aei  wala,  first 
principles;  a  'aei  meurihe,  the  source  of 
life;  'aei  henue,  the  land  of  origin;  'aei 
hohola,  the  owner  of  the  garden;  'aei 
'inoni  nemue,  thy  dependents;  'ac  hdu, 
precipice. 
'aena  because  of,  the  beginning  of;  used 
with  ana  7;  'aena  ana,  because  of;  'aena 
maa,  threshold;  'aena  papali,  the  jaw. 

*ae  4.  n.,  faeces,  ordure;  mu  'ae,  faeces;  huzii  'ae, 
excrement.  Polynesian  tae,  tutae,  faeces. 

'ae  5.  V.  i.,  to  uncover,  to  bring  to  light,  to  open 
out,  to  expose:  walana  ko  'ae  ha' adai  ana 
mu  esoesohai  dunge,  his  voice  cleaveth 
the  flames  of  fire. 
'aeli  v.  tr.,  used  of  the  action  of  the  sea, 
rain,  etc.,  in  exposing  anything. 

'ae  6.  specific  numeral;  'aeni  ue,  five  rolls  {hikei 
ue)  of  dyed  cane  for  plaiting  wristlets, 
etc. 

'ae  7.  ha'a'ae,  to  be  fleeting,  vain. 

'ae'aeniola  v.  i.,  to  commit  fornication, 
'ae'aeniolanga  v.  n.,  fornication. 

'aehota  S.  1.  v.  tr.,  v.  i.,  to  begin.  The  root 
notion  is  that  of  generation,  there  is  also 
inherent  a  notion  of  continuance;  atei  ni 
e  'aeholaa,  who  began  it?  melu  'aehota 
'unue,  we  began  to  say.     'ae  1.     hoia  1. 

'aehota  2.  v.  i.,  to  conceive;  v.  tr.,  to  generate,  to 
beget,     tala'aehola. 
'aehotalana  S.,  gerund,  the  beginning;  'ure 
'olo  mdi  i  'aehotalana,  from  the  begin- 
ning up  to  now. 

'aela,  'ae'aela  v.  i.,  to  be  bad,  no  good,  ill;  inu 
'aela,  nasty  to  drink,  not  fresh  (of 
water);  e  la  'otoi  'aela,  it  is  bad;  e  la 
'otoi  'aela  mwaani  nonola,  it  is  worse 
than  yesterday;  laehaku  e  'aela,  I  can  not 
walk  well;  e  lai  'aela,  it  is  bad;  lalona  e 
'aela;  loo  'aela,  to  be  immodest,  to  offend 
against  propriety;  in  a  depreciatory 
sen.se  e  mudimwei  'aela,  very  small,  too 
small;  e  no'i  'aela  'oto,  to  be  bad; 
ngduhana  e  'aela,  he  overeats  himself; 
'osi  kdriheni  'aela  laa,  do  not  be  such  a 
nuisance;  rako  'aela,  unpleasant,  irksome; 
e  rako  'aela  aku,  it  is  against  my  grain; 
rongo  'aela,  to  make  a  din;  noko  sape 
'aela,  I  am  ill;  sapekue  'aela,  I  am  ill; 
siho  'aela  ana,  to  spread  evil  reports  of;  e 
tala'ai  'aela,  e  tala'aeni  'aela,  it  is  begin- 


AHU'I 


'aela,  'ae'aela  iconlinucd;. 

ning  to  spoil;  e  tola  'aela  akti,  it  was  bad 
for  me. 
'aelahaana  gerund,  its  badness;  'aelahaana 

mil  i'e,  the  bad  fish, 
'aelasi  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  be  no  good,  to 
spoil;  used  with  ddu  1;  sae  'aelasi,  to 
bear  malice.  N'ot  connected  with  tata- 
'ala.  cf.  M.  L.,  p.  54;  probably  'ae  1, 
with  la  3. 

'aelulu  V.  i.,  to  step  over,  to  neglect;  used  with 
prep,  haahi;  'ae  1. 

'aena  cf.  'ae  3.     'afni.     cf.  'ae  6. 

aha  1.  n.,  a  sparrow  hawk. 

aha  2.  v.  i.,  to  cut,  to  score,  to  notch,  to  mark 
by  incising. 
ahasi  v.  tr. 
ahasila-(ku)  gerund.     Wango  aha. 

aha  3.  to  recede,  to  dry  up  (of  water). 

aha  4.  v.  tr.,  aha  lahani,  to  warn, 
aha  tahanila-(ku),  gerund. 

ahaa  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  bitter  to  the  taste;  'e'e  ahaa, 
wild  arcca  nut. 

ahaa  2.  n.,  salt  water,  salt;  me'i  ahaa,  some  salt 
water.     Bugotu  aha. 

ahala'i,  ahaahala'i  partic.  removed,  changed 
in  position;  sae  ahala'i,  ve.xed  at  heart, 
unsettled,  provoked, 
ahala'ini  v.  tr.,  to  provoke,     ha'aahala'ini. 

'ahali  partic,  broken  off  (of  boughs);  'a  6, 
hdli  1. 

ahare  awalosi  i  ahare,  the  northeast  wind. 

'aharo  1.  v.  i.,  to  conduct  a  betrothal  or  wed- 
ding ceremony. 

'aharo  2.  n.,  relations  by  marriage;  'aharo  inau, 
my  relatives  by  marriage.  Heuru, 
S.  C,  aharo. 

'aharota  v.  n.,  a  wedding  feast;  ddu  'aharota 
ana  kalena,  wedding  feast  of  his  child; 
kara  ni  'aharota,  a  large  yam  pudding 
for  bridals. 

'ahe  1.  n.,  surf,  currents  from  wind  or  tide,  tide- 
rip;  'ahe  hiru,  an  eddy;  hirune  'ahe, 
troublesome  waves;  'ahe  hirune  i 
Nielaha'u,  the  tide  rip  at  Cape  Zelce; 
'ahe  ko  hurosieu,  the  surf  whirls  me 
about;  'ahe  kosi  tola,  the  current  sets; 
'ahe  Idulett,  strong  current;  'ahe  e 
lomosie  'tola,  the  surf  buffeted  the  canoe; 
'ahe  lulu,  boiUng  tide;  'ahe  i  niu  tangalau, 
a  tide  rip  between  Ulawa  and  Sa'a;  holo 
'ahe.  to  divide  the  waves  by  incantation 
and  make  a  way  for  a  canoe. 
'ahela  adj.,  strong  current;  e  'ahela,  there  is 

a  strong  current, 
'ahesi  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  drift;  e  'ahesie,  it 

has  drifted. 
'ahesila-(ku)  gerund.     Polynesian  lahe,  to 
flow;  \'iti  7iJave,  Mota  ave,  Florida  tahe. 

'ahe  2.  v.  i.,  to  melt  away,  to  waste,  to  dis- 
appear; wa'e  'ahe,  to  waste. 
'ahela'ini  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  disappear. 

'ahe  3.  n.,  a  crab.     Mota  gave. 

'ahe  S.,  4.  'ahe  tangalau,  to  bear  bountifully  (of 
a  garden). 

'ahelidu,  'ahe'ahelidu  S..  v.  i..  to  congregate, 
'ahelidunge  v.  n.,  congregating. 


aheta  v.  i.,  to  stretch  out  the  arms  with  weari- 
ness, premonitory  of  malaria. 

'aheulao  v.  i.,  to  be  a  fornicator,  fornicating; 
tilao. 

'ahewa'a  v.  i.,  to  be  fleeting,  vanishing,  melting 
away;  'ahe  2.     wa'a  4. 

'ahi  n.,  closet,  chamber. 

'ahinga  U.,  v.  n.,  chamber;  muai  keni  ana 
'dhinga,  women  fond  of  staying  in  their 
chambers. 

'Ahi'a  the  southernmost  village  on  the  west 
coast  of  Ulawa. 

'ahi'e  S.,  'ahi'a  U.,  n.,  Malay  apple  (Eugenia 
sp.);  puli  'ehi'e.  orange  cowrie.  Mota 
gaviga,  \'iti  kaiika. 

'ahihi  partic,  crouching,  groveling  (of  a  dog); 
hihi. 

ahimawa  v.  i.,  to  \awn. 

Ahina'i  U.,  Ahina'i  amau  the  name  of  a  canoe 
in  a  story. 

'ahisu,  'ahi'ehisu  partic,  out  of  joint,  fallen 
out  of  place,  hisuhisu.  maaku  ko 
hini'i  'ehi'ehisu  'oto,  my  eyes  nearly 
fell  out. 

aho  v.,  to  be  abraded  (of  skin). 

'aho'a  partic,  separate,  apart  from;  used  with 
poss.  3;  'aho'a  aku,  far  off  me.  a  6, 
ho- a  2. 

ahoaho  {na,  ni)  U.,  n.,  the  inner  shell  of  the 
canarium  nut,  film. 

'ahola  partic,  broad,  wide,     'a  6,  hola  1. 
'aholanga  v.  n.,  breadth,  width. 

'aholo  V.  i.,  to  fish  for  garfish  (mwanole)  with 
a  kite;  sa'o  ni  'aholo,  the  kite, 
'aholonga  v.  n.,  fishing  with  a  kite,     'a  6, 
holo  2. 

ahonga  U.,  v.  n.,  making  trial,  tentative,  used 
with  tdu  1;  tola  ahonga,  to  tempt;  name 
ahonga.  taste  and  try.     malaalwnga. 

ahowa  n.,  open  space  of  sea  and  sky.  Wango 
ahowa. 

ahu  talo  ahu,  a  war  band,  fighting  company. 

ahu,  ahuahu  U.  1,  v.  i.,  to  be  complete,  perfect 
(of  numbers);  ahu  mae,  to  cease  hostili- 
ties; ma'uru  ahu,  to  be  sound  asleep; 
talo  ahu,  to  amass. 
ha'aahu  v.,  to  complete,  to  finish, 
ahusi  V.  tr.,  to  affect  completely,  to  extend 
all  over,  to  encompass;  dhusie  mu  le'ti, 
everyAvhere;  e  dhusie  hdnue,  it  has 
aft'ected  the  whole  place.  Lau  afu, 
complete;  Maori  ahu,  to  heap  up; 
ahualia,  completed;  Mota  at;  to  pile; 
Ambrym  ahu.  ten;  M.  L.,  p.  45S;  Moiu 
ahu,  to  inclose. 

ahu  2.  V.  i.,  to  bring  forth  fruit. 

ahuhu  v.,  to  fade  away,  to  droop. 

ahuhu'e  S.,  n.,  crumbs  of  food;  viu  ehuhu'ei 
ngeiilaa. 

ahui  1.  n.,  a  dancing  club;  niao  pe'e  dhui,  to 
dance  holding  the  dhui.  M.  A.,  p.  333. 
cf.  mao  hidehide. 

ahu'i  2.  determ.,  from  dhu  1.  used  as  preposi- 
tion, around,  protecting;  hule  dhu'i.  to 
come  for;  lio  ahu'i,  to  protect;  para 
dhu'i.  to  protect  with  a  fence;  puli  ehu'i, 
to  gather  in  a  crowd  round  a  person;  toto 


Ahu'I 


ahu'i  2  (continued). 

dhu'i,    to   pay   a   fine   on   behalf   of;   i 
sapena  i  Dara  dhu'i  niu,  an  apostrophe 
addressed  to  Ugi,     cf-  ha'adiihi. 
ahu'i  3.  V.  tr.,  to  wTap  up;  iihu'i  ola,  a  parcel. 
ahu  1:  Wango  ahui,  to  wrap;  Lau  afn, 
Samoa  'afu;  N'iue  aji,  to  wrap. 
Shu'i  4.   partic.    used  as  adverb,   altogether, 
completely;  ke  ahu'i  saediana  lokoloko, 
will  completely  rejoice  together. 
ahu'i  5.  n.,  ahu'i  menu,  a  lily  (Crinum  asiat- 
icum)    which    grows    on    the    beaches. 
Wango  hii  menu. 
fihu'i-(na)  6.  n.,  a  stump  of  a  tree. 
ghulili  n..  seeds  of  a  tree,  strung  in  a  bunch  and 
worn  on  the  backs  of  the  fingers  after 
the  fashion  of  castanets  in  dances,     cf. 
hidehide. 
ahululu  n.,  a  small  yam  pudding  used  in  sacri- 
fices,    dhu  1,  lulu  2. 
&httni  determ.  from  dhu  1,  used  as  an  adverb; 
entirely,  completely;  more  common  in 
Ulawa;  haunt,  metathetic. 
'ahu'o    n.,    owl;    onomatop.     San    Cristoval 

kahuko. 
ghuora  v.,  to  be  dusty,     ora  2. 
ahuqa'i  S..  n.,  a  dish  of  edible  fig-leaves  {'amusi) 
and  pounded  new  canarium  nuts  {ngdli). 
dhu'i  3. 
ahuraa  U.,  dhuraa   d&ni,  to  be  on  the  move 

before  daylight. 
ahuraka  U.,  v.  i.,  to  come  forth,  proceed  out  of. 
ahurara  v.,  to  be  abundant,  to  be  green  (of 

grass),     dhu    2.     Wango    ahiira. 
ahure  v.  i.,  to  make  holes  with  a  digging-stick 

{pi'e  2)  for  yam  planting, 
ahtireha  v.  i.,  to  be  open,  clear,  of  unimpeded 

vision,     dhu  1. 
ahureu  S.,  v.,  to  do  haphazard;  ahureu  ana 

hurunge,  to  run  uncertainly. 
'ahuri  n.,  the  conch  shell,  blown  as  a  summons; 
lahulana  'ahuri,  the  blowing  of  a  conch; 
ngaratai  'ehuri,  the  sound  of  the  conch; 
walana  'dhuri  e  talalea  walu  tala  i  Tolo, 
the  sound  of  the  conch  went  through  all 
the  villages  in  Tolo;  walowaloi  'ehuri, 
the  sound  of  the  conch.  Bugotu  tavuli. 
ahuta-(ku)  v.  n.,  all.  completely,  the  whole  of. 
dhu  1.  dhutamere'i  mango,  both  of  us, 
dhutamolu  mango,  all  of  you;  dhulana 
sapeku,  my  whole  body;  dhuleni,  all 
(things);  i'oe  dhulemu,  the  whole  of  thee; 
mdni  dhutaka,  U.,  all  of  us. 
ahutata  v..  to  be  vanished,  to  have  vanished. 

dhu  1,  tala  2. 
•ai  1.  n.,  a  tree  (more  common  in  Ulawa);  'di 
ha'angdu  keni,  ginger,  given  to  women  as 
an  ordeal;  'di  ni  haka,  U.,  papaya;  'di 
nehunehu,  a  rod,  a  stick;  'di  ni  ile,\J., 
wood  for  making  fire  by  friction;  'di  repo, 
a  pestle  for  pounding  taro  to  make  tau- 
tnanga;  hai  'ei,  U.,  alog;  hite  'di,\J.,  to  split 
firewood;  hou  'ei,  U.,  the  kidneys;  huani 
'ei,  U.,  fruit;  iduidu  mesi  'ei,  U.,  jumped 
about  on  the  firewood;  kokopa  ni  'ei,  U., 
buttress  flanges  of  certain  trees;  lolo'a 
ni  'ei,  U.,  a  thicket;  maa  ni  'ai,  U.,  a 


'ai  1  (continued). 

stake,  picket;  vtwa  'di,  U.,  firewood; 
mwai  'ei,  U.,  trees;  mivai  ngangani  'ei, 
U..  chips  of  wood;  mwai  rango  ni  'ei,  U., 
dead  trees;  pou  ni  'ei,  U..  a  log  of  wood; 
qa'ahila  ni  'ei,  U..  a  slab  of  wood;  rai  'ei, 
U.,  plank;  so'o  'di,  U..  to  pick  up  fire- 
wood; suli  'ei  i  qaoha,  ridge-pole;  tdu  'ei, 
U.,  to  break  firewood;  uleuleni  'ei,  U., 
twigs;  'ulunlu  ni  'ei,  U.,  branches,  twigs 
and  leaves;  usu  'ei,  S.,  firestick.  Mota 
tangae  (M.  L.,  p.  95),  Florida  gai, 
Malagasy  hazo. 
'ai  2.  v.  i.,  to  be  stiff,  numb;  nimeku  e  'di  'oto, 

my  hand  is  numb. 
a'i  3.  tr.  suflfix  to  verb;  sdsu,  sdsue'i. 
a'i  4.  participial  ending  used  adverbially;  ere 

ha'ihonod'i,  to  speak  revilingly. 
ai  5.  U.,  di  sun,  to  perish,  to  become  extinct. 

suu  1. 
^  6.  at  uhi,  to  clean  shoots  off  stored  yams.     cf. 

dite'i. 
'ai,  'ai'ai  7.  exclam.,  mind,  look  out! 
'ai'aa    1.    v.,    to    be    lost,    missing,    wanting. 
ha'a'di'aa.     Wango  aiaa. 
'ai'aanga  v.  n.,  destruction. 
ai'aa  2.  exclam.,  alas,  woe! 
'ai'aana  without,  unless,  failing;  used  as  ad- 
verb; 'ai'aana  ineu,  failing  me,  but  for 
me.     'ai'aa  1,  ana  2. 
aidea  v.,  to  be  in  pain. 
aideri  specific  numeral,  ten  parrot-fish  caught 

with  a  dip  net  (kdlu).     dideri  ni  i'e. 
'ai'ei'aa  adj.,  fleeting,  transitory,     'di'aa. 
'aihu  v.,  to  be  uprooted,  to  fall,  of  trees  in  a 

storm. 
'aihuri  n.,   lettuce   tree,   with  yellow  leaves, 
planted  to  mark  landing-places,     'di  1, 
huri. 
'aila  cf.  'a'aila'a. 

'ailemu  S.,  n.,  the  banyan  tree,  'di  1. 
'aili  'aili  lado,  v.  tr.,  to  graft,  lado  1. 
'aili'apaa  U.,  n.,  a  staff,  walking-stick,     'di  1, 

li  1,  'apaa. 
ailipo'u  U.,  n.,  transverse  beams,  a  cross  (late 

use),     'ai  1,  li  1,  po'upo'u. 
aini  tr.  suff.  to  verb,     d'i  3,  ni  4. 
Aio  an  island  off  the  east  coast  of  Big  Malaita. 
a'itada  S.,  thus,  in  their  style,  just  their  way. 

da  2. 
a'itana  S.,  thus,  similarly  to,  just  that  way,  like 

his  style,     na  2.     cf.  U.  aliha  2. 
aitana'i,  aieitana'i  v.  tr.,  to  beseech,  to  beg,  to 
entreat, 
aitana'inge  v.  n.,  entreaty,  prayer. 
aitana'ila-(ku)  gerund, 
aite'i  v.  i.,  to  clean  the  rootlets  off  taro,  etc. 
di  6. 
aite'ini  v.  tr. 
'aitepi  n.,  a  tree,  Barringtonia  edulis;  hoi  'eitepi, 
its    nut;    trunk    used    for    ridge-poles. 
'ai  1,  tdpi. 
'ai  walo'a  adj.,  covered  with  creepers,  entan- 
gled,    'di  1,  walo  1. 
aka  poss.  3,  pi.  1,  inch,  to,  or  on,  us;  used  as 
object  when  the  pronoun  is  separated 
from  the  verb. 


'ALA 


'aka  1.  V.  I.,  to  pull  out;  'aka  Idu,  to  pull  out 
violently,  to  defend,  to  help;  'aka  niho, 
to  pull  teeth. 
•akani  v.  tr.,  noko  'akanie  inaana,  I  gouge 

his  eyes  out. 
'akanila-(ku)  gerund.  Lau  aga,  Mota  tkaka. 
'aka  2.  posa.  J,  pi.  1,  for  us,  of  things  to  eat. 
aka'elu  1.  poss.  3,  pi.  1,  to,  or  on,  us;  used  as 
object  when  the  pronoun  is  separated 
from  the  verb, 
'aka'elu  2.  poss.  1,  pi.  1,  for  us,  of  things  to  eat. 
'akalo  1.  n.,  a  ghost,  a  spirit;  M.  A.,  p.  260.     cf. 
nraa'i.     'akalo  e  kdusie  i'ola,   a  ghost 
clutched    the    canoe    and    capsized    it; 
'akalo  ni  tnatawa,  a  ghost  of  the  open  sea. 
cf.    Ngorieru;  hdnue  ni  'akalo,  Malapa 
Island,  hades;  ko'o  'akalo,  to  tie  a  granny 
knot;   maa  ni   'akalo,   eye  of  coconut; 
Palolana    mu    'akalo,    worship    of    the 
ghosts;  ta'e  'akalo,  to  raise  a  ghost;  tola 
'akalo,  to  exorcise  spirits;  tolo  'akalo,  to 
exorcise  a  ghost.  M.  A.,  p.  137;  uunu 
ola  saana  mu  'akalo,  to  offer  burnt  offer- 
ings to  the  ghosts,     wdi  ni  'akalo,  tears. 
Wango   alaro,    Mota    talaro,     Gilberts 
lalaro,  Viti  tataro.     M.  L.,  p.  146. 
'akalo   2,   a  dead   person;  nihoi   'akalo,   dead 
man's  tooth;  para  ni  'akalo,  cemetery 
(late  use). 
akara'i,  akaru'e  S.  1.,  poss.  3,  dual  1,  to,  or  on, 
us  two,  used  as  object  when  the  pronoun 
is  separated  from  the  verb. 
'akara'i,  'akaru'e  S.  2.,  poss.  1,  dual  1,  for  us 

two  (of  things  to  eat). 
akau,  akakau  v.,  to  be  ready,  to  be  Ut,  to  be 
burning,     dau  akau,  to  prepare,  to  make 
ready;  e  akau,  is  it  alight?  hele  akau,  to 
prepare,  to  make  ready. 
akauni  v.  tr.,  ha'akauni,  to  cause  to  light. 
Wango  agau. 
akauri  v.  tr.,  v.  i.,  to  be  possessed  of,  to  be  pro- 
vided  with.     akau.     mclu   akauri   'oto, 
we  are  furnished;  mere  'asi  akauri  ihei, 
U.,  where  are  we  likely  to  get  anything? 
ha'aakaurisi  causative, 
akauringe  v.  n.,  profit,  possession. 
akaurisi  v.  tr.,  to  obtain  possession  of,  to 

provide,  to  have. 
akaurisila-(ku)  gerund. 
ake   n.,    string   fringe,    the   dress   of   married 
women  hung  suspended  from  the  waist, 
akeake  n.,  strand  of  rope,  twig,  sprig;  akeake 

ni  dili,  sprig  of  dracaena. 
akara'i  partic,  come  undone. 

'akera'ini  v.  tr.,  to  undo,  to  destroy,  to 
subvert. 
'akere  1.  partic,  untwisted, 
'akere  (na)  2.  n.,  border,  edge.  bank,     kerekere. 
'akeu  partic,  on  one  side,  overbalanced,  tilting. 

'a  6,  kdu  1. 
'ako  1.  V.  i.,  to  catch  in  the  arms,  to  grasp,  to 
wrestle, 
'akonga  v.  n. 

'ako'i  V.  tr.     Wango  agoi,  Viti  rako. 
ako  2.  honu  ako,  to  have  pulmonary  disease. 
akoako  1.  v.,  to  be  out  of  heart,  without  energy; 
hele  akoako,  to  do  listlessly. 


'ako'ako  2.  v.,  to  deprecate  wrath  by  saying 

'ako'ako  saemu;  not  used  to  women, 
akohe  v.  i.,  to  be  listless,  to  neglect  through 
laziness;  e  akohe  mwaanie,  he  neglected 
it  through  laziness. 
akoheta'ini  v.  tr. 

akoheta'i  partic,  to  neglect  through  lazi- 
ness; lae  akoheta'i  su'a  ana  maemaeha, 
run  carelessly  into  danger. 
'akolu  partic,  excited  in  mind,     'a  6. 
aku  1.  pos3.  3,  sing.  1,  to,  or  upon,  me.  used  as 
object   of    verb    when   the    pronoun   is 
separated   from   the   verb;  e  kopi  eku, 
touch  me.     Rafurafu,  S.  C,  mwane  aku, 
my  husband, 
'aku,  'aku'e  2.  poss.   1,  sing.   1,   for   me  (of 
things  to  eat). 
'aku'i  U.,  of  many  things  for  one  person  to 
eat;  honi  weieu  'dku'i,  bonito  for  me  to 
eat. 
akuu  exclam.,  pish,  humph,  pooh, 
'ala,  'ala'ala  1.  v.  i.,  to  answer;  with  poss.  3. 
to  obey,  to  give  attention  to;  nou  ka'a 
'ala  ana.  I  did  not  obey;  'ala  qd'u.  to 
nod  the  head  backward  in  assent. 
'alami  v.  tr.,  to  answer  a  person. 
'alamila-(ku)  gerund. 

'alama'ini  v.  tr.,  to  respond  to,  to  acknowl- 
edge, to  give  leave  to.  to  consent. 
'alama'imla-(ku)  gerund. 
'alama'i,  ha'i'alama'i    v.     tr.,    to    consent 
mutually.     Florida  talamagini. 
'ala  2.  V.  i.,  to  be  prosperous;  e  'ala  diana  'oto, 

it  is  doing  well. 
'ala,  'ala'ala  3.  v.  i.,  to  bite,  to  sting,  to  be  sharp- 
edged;  'ala  muniu,  to  close  in  Hke  jaws; 
'ala  tala,  to  bite  at  and  miss;  pa'ewa  ko 
'ala  tala,  last  two  days  of  the  moon. 
'ala'i  V.   tr.     Motu  karakara,  fierce;   New 
Britain    karat,    Kabadi    arasia,    Maisin 
karafe;   Mota  garagara,   to  clench   the 
teeth, 
'ala  4.  V.  tr.,  to  break  off,  to  lop.  of  branches; 
'ala  dango,  to  lop  off  limbs  of  a  tree. 
Mota  sal  1,  Wango  ala,  Maori  here. 
'ala  5.  to  cut  the  teeth,  to  get  feathers;  eke  ko 
'ala,    the    white    cockatoo    is    growing 
feathers;  to  flash  as  lightning;  wa'ariri 
ko  'ala  hitelie  salo,  the    lightning-flash 
cleaves  the   sky;   'ala  ngingita,   U..   to 
frown,    to    clench    the    teeth.     Florida 
gala;  Mota  sar,  to  pierce,  to  shine. 
'ala  6.  to  set  a  net,  to  He  in  wait  for,  to  go  the 
rounds  of  the    flying-fish    floats   (m'o); 
'ala  poo,   to  catch  pigs  in  a  net;   'ala 
pupiilu  haahi,  to  surround  in  a  dense 
body;  mae  ko  'ala,  enemies  lie  in  wait, 
'alasi  tr.,  hu'o  kire  'alasie  ka'u,  the  net  that 

they  have  laid. 
'alaa'i  v.  i.,  'alaa'ini  tr.,  to  plan,  to  lay  out 

the  plan  of,  to  shape,  to  lay  in  order. 
'alaa'inila-(ku)       gerund.     Mota     sal      2; 
Maori  /tarahou,  net. 
'ala  7.  U.,  plural  article  in  the  vocative;  'ala 

mwane,  you  men.     cf.  'alai  1. 
'ala    8.    adjective    ending;    sasu'ala,    smoky; 
tolonga'ala,  resinous,     'a  9,  la  4. 


'ALAA 


'alaa  1.  n.,  a  flock  or  covey  of  birds,  'alaa  vi 
menu,  ala  6.  Mota  /gara,  spread,  or 
sara  3,  to  gather. 

'ala'a  2.  S.,  adv.,  up,  upward;  noko  soi  'ala'a 
ana,  I  call  upon  him.  Wango  araa, 
Florida  galaga. 

alaala  n.,  croton;  alaala  pa'ewa,  a  variety  with 
red  leaves  shaped  like  a  shark's  fin. 

alaha  1.  n.,  a  chief.  In  M.  A.,  pp.  47,  51  (note), 
maelaha  appears  to  be  the  Wango  word 
maeraha.  No  such  word  occurs  in  Sa'a 
or  Ulawa.  dili  alaha,  red-leaved  dra- 
caena  used  in  incantations  and  in  draw- 
ing lots;  horana  mwa  alaha,  U.,  under 
the  power  of  the  chiefs;  huui  alaha,  a 
chiefly  family;  reoreo  alaha,  a  large 
variety  of  nautilus,  'king'  nautilus; 
mwei  la' a  alaha,  dear  lord;  niniho  alaha, 
a  large  hornet;  pepe  alaha,  a  butterfly; 
siri  alaha,  a  parrot,  Lorius  chlorocercus. 

alaha  2.  v.  i.,  to  rule;  alaha  haahi,  to  rule  over. 
ha'aalaha.     a  1,  laha. 
alahanga  v.  n.,  rule,  dominion,  chieftain- 
ship, kingdom  (late use).     Wango  araha. 

:  lahuu,  alaalahuu  v.  i.,  to  talk  in  parables,  to 
compare  in  words, 
alahuunge  v.  n.,  parables,  metaphors. 
alahuute'ini  S.,  alahuungs'ini  U.,  v.  tr.,  to 
use  parabolic  language. 

'alai  U.  1.  plur.  art.,  used  of  persons  only;  cf. 
'alei;  'alai  'inoni,  you  people;  'alai 
Mwado'a,  Mwado'a  people;  'alai  ola, 
you  people. 

'Alai  2.  n.,  northeast  cape  of  Little  Malaita, 
opposite  the  rock  Htlu  Hari  at  the 
entrance  of  Mara  Masiki  Channel. 

'alali  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  apportion  food,  'ala  6. 
Wango  arari,  to  befit. 

alalu  v.  tr.,  to  disobey,  to  mutiny  against. 

alanga,  Alanga  kaule  Selwyn  Bay,  on  Ugi,  a 
trading  station  for  copra. 

'alanga'l  S.,  'alanga'i  i'ola  ni  tolo,  fifth  and 
sixth  days  of  the  moon;  'alanga'i  hapa, 
first  quarter  of  the  moon;  'alanga'i  roa, 
third  and  fourth  days  of  the  moon. 
'ala  6. 

'alangu  partic,  out  of  its  socket,     'a  6,  Idngu. 

'Ala  Sa'a  n.,  the  northwest  Alite  mountain 
above  Langalanga.  Big  Malaita. 

'alasi  U.,  'arasi  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  fine  down  by  scrap- 
ing (of  bows,  spears,  combs,  and  other 
wooden  articles);  kira  'alasi  pasi,  they 
scrape  bows.  Niue  alali,  to  scratch. 
cf.  karasi. 

'alata'ini  v.  tr.,  to  bait  a  hook,     'ala  6. 

ale,  aleale  v.  tr.,  to  give  oneself  airs. 

aleale  1.  n.,  an  umbrella  palm. 

aleale  2.  n.,  a  frond  of  the  umbrella  palm  cut 
into  strips  and  dyed  red  with  the  root  of 
the  lettuce-leaf  tree  (kikiri),  used  for 
decorating  canoes,  combs,  spears,  etc.; 
pungui  aleale,  a  bunch  of  dyed  aleale. 

'alei,  'alai  U.,  pi.  art.,  used  of  persons  only; 
'alei  he'i  nikana  ineu,  my  family;  'alei 
'inoni,  you  people;  'alei  'inoni  ineu,  my 
relations.  Florida  lei  used  to  form 
plurals. 


alele  to  be  jubilant;  alele  ni  {ani)  kananga,  to 

rejoice  in  song. 
'alenga  adv.,  up;  iiwe  'alenga,  to  lift  up  the  eves, 
'a  6. 
'alelenga  adv.,  up;  lio  'alelenga,  to  look  up. 
'alelenga'a  adv.   1.  upward.     2.  v.  tr.,  to 
lift    up.     Mota   langa,    to   lift;    Samoa 
langa,  Viti  langa. 
alepopo  U.,  lae  alepopo,  to  go  sideways,  to  walk 

like  a  crab, 
'aleu  partic,  turned  upward;  maana  e  'aleu,  to 

have  the  whites  of  the  eyes  showing. 
'ali  1.  V.  i.,  to  lie  curled  up  as  a  snake  or  a  dog; 
mwaa  ko  'eli,  a  snake  is  curled  up  (an 
omen  of  danger,  maemaeha).     Mota  tal, 
to  go  around. 
all  U.  2.  V.  tr.,  to  cut  the  mortises  (rd'iqe'u)  on 
a  pillar;  kira  'asi  'alia  i  one,  they  mor- 
tised it  down  on  the  beach. 
'ali  3.  a  cord.     cf.  'i'eli.     Wango  ari. 
'ali  U.  4.  'ali  'ae,  the  first  piece  of  ground  planted 

in  a  garden, 
allde  to  travel  by  sea. 

alidanga  v.  n.,  1.  a  sea  journej'.     2.  a  canoe- 
load     of     voyagers,     alidanga     e     hide 
saaka'elu. 
alidangaha   U.,  v.  n.,  with   double  n.  ter- 
mination, as  2.  Wango  arida,  Lau  alida. 
alieli  1.  n.,  logs  in  a  yam  garden  marking  the 

plots  of  different  planters. 
alieli  2.  lio  alieli,  to  look  about. 
alielimui  v.,  to  abound. 
aliha  U.  1.  n.,  a  centipede.     Bugotu  lira. 
aliha-(ku)  U.  2.  alihana,  thus,  similarly,  just 
his    way;     alihamu,     just    your    way; 
alihada,    just   what   j'ou   might   expect 
from  them.     cf.  aitana,  S.,    alilana,  U. 
aliho'i  1.  v.  i.,  to  return,  to  go  back,     ali  1, 
ho'i    3.     ko    tola    aliho'i    ana    nunune, 
recovers   its   soul;    mangona   e   puuto'o 
aliho'i,  his  breath  returned;  qi'e  aliho'i, 
to  recover  health;  susu  eliho'i,  restored 
whole.     2.  adv.,  again, 
aliho'isi  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  turn  over,  to  reverse. 
Vaturanga  hoi,  again;  Florida  goi,  again; 
Wango  'aho'i,  ha'ari,  to  return, 
aliholo  1.  n.,  a  depression  in  a  mountain  ridge, 
a  pass.     2.  a  fosse  cut  on  a  ridge  to 
prevent  access  by  an  enemy,     holo. 
alihu'isi  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  turn  over,  to  reverse,  hti'i  2. 
alihu'ite'ini  Qaloto  dialect,  as  alihu'isi. 
alihu'ita-(na)  gerund,  overturning,  reversal; 
'oto  esi  elihu'ilana  mu   huuilume,   then 
shall  the  cities  be  destroyed. 
Ali'ite  North\v;st  Sister  Island,  'Olu  Malau. 
'alili  n.,  a  shellfish  (Turbo  petholatus);  musi 
ni   'elili,   its    operculum.     Mota   salili, 
Niue  alili. 
alilo'a  n.,  an  eddy  of  the  wind,     'iili  1. 
'alinge  (ku)  1.  n.,  ear;  'dlinge  ka'a  kawa'ie.  ear 
hath  not  heard;  'dlingada  e  hi'e  mwaanie 
rongo,    ears    weary    of    hearing;    hu'esi 
'elinge,    to   turn   the   ear   to;    rongo  ni 
'e  inge,  to  hear  with  the  ear;  susu  'elinge, 
an   ear-stick  ornament;  uwe  'dlinge,  to 
give  ear  to.     2.  mushroom,  large  fungus. 
Polynesian  talinga. 


ANA 


'iilinge  v.  n.,  vying;  liiiritlturu  ni  'elinge,  to  run 

races. 
alingi  v.  tr.,  dlingie  ora  ni  uunu.  to  build  up  the 

altar  of  sacrifice. 
'alingo  V.  i.,  of  the  tongue,  to  "get  round"  a 

word;     meaku    ka'a     'alingo    ana,     ni\- 

tongue  can  not  pronounce  it. 
alipono  sdsii  alipono,  thick  smoke,     pono. 
'alipuri  v.  i.,  to  follow  (of  time),     'dli  1,  pitri; 

esi  'elipuri  ana,  a  little  while  after. 
'alisuu   ma'ahn    'elisuu,    to   sleep    sound;    tna- 

'ahunge    'elisuu,    sound    sleep,     'iili    1, 

suu  1. 
'alisuute'ini  v.  tr.,  to  be  forgetful  of. 
alitana  U.,  adv.,  even  so,  thus,     alihana. 
'alite   1.  n.,  a  tree  (Catappa  terminalis);  lioi 

'elite,  its  nut;  'alite  ko  mena,  the  'dlite  is 

turning  red.     2.  n.,  a  diamond-shape  in 

ornament.     Mota  salile. 
alitehu  n.,  rubbish  heap.     Lau  tafti. 
'aliu    1.    partic,    reversed;    saena   e   'dliu,   he 

repented,     liu.     2.  v.  i.,  to  turn  round; 

'dliu  haahie  mwala,  to  turn  round  and 

face  the  people,     ha'a'dliu. 
'aliunge  v.  n.,  'dliunge  ni  sae,  conversion 

of  mind, 
'alo  specific  numeral,  of  taro,  100;  'alo  ni  hui, 

100    taro.     Espiritu    Santo    taro,    100; 

Mota  tar,  1,000. 
alo'a  1.  adj.,  suffering  from  yaws.     2.  n.,  the 

yaws;  mn  alo'a,  the  frambcesia. 
'alohi  V.  tr.,  to  anoint.     Florida  dalovi. 
alo'i  to  be  loose  (of  teeth). 
'alopi  partic,  having  a  jagged  edge. 
Alosi  the  north  end  of  San  Cristoval. 
'alo'u  1.  partic,  turned  back  upon  itself,     'a  6. 

2.  n.,  a  verse,     'alo'u  ni  wala. 
alu  1.  v.,  dlu  ana  'ape,  to  fish  with  a  seine. 
'alu  U.  2.  V.  tr.,  to  put,  to  place.     Lau  alu; 

Florida  talu,  to  put. 
*alu  U.  3.  V.  n.,  to  change  into,  to  become  (of 

ghosts);  e  'alu  ana  pa'ewa,  he  changed 

into  the  form  of  a  shark. 
aluhe  S.  1.  a  centipede. 

'aluhe  2.  partic,  untied,  loosened,     'a  6,  luhe. 
aluhi,  alueluhi  1.  v.  t.,  to  wrap  up,  to  cover  up. 

2.  n.,  a  covering,  cloak. 
aluhite-(ku)  gerund,  a  covering,  cloak. 
alunge'i  partic,  rongonga  alunge'i,  heedless. 
'alusae  U.,   v.  i..   to  meditate,  to  revolve  in 

mind,     'alu  2. 
'ama-(ku)  n.,  father,  father's  brother;  'amaku, 

voc,    father;    'amana    e    ngdungeu,    his 

father  ate  it,  a  railing  exclamation;  e 

itsulie    'amana,    he    is    like    his   father. 

Polynesian  lama. 
'amaa  partic,  outside,  at  the  door,     'a  6,  maa. 
'ama'ama  1.  v.  i.,  to  festoon  with  lycopodium 

fern.     2.  n.,  a  bandolier  of  shell  money 

{had)  strung  in  a  pattern  with  fringe  of 

human  teeth;  Hi  'ama'ama,  to  make  such 

a  belt.     3.  n.,  festive  ornaments,  belts, 

necklaces,  bracelets,  etc.;  'ama'ama  ni 

mae,  panoply,  war  decoration. 
'amadi  1.  v.  i.,  to  eat  one  thing  with  another  as 

a  relish,  as  fish  with  yams.     2.  n.,  the 

thing  so  eaten. 


amami  1.  poss.  3,  pi.  1,  excl.,  of  us,  for  us, 
belonging  to  us,  to  us,  used  as  object; 
'oke  ha'ala'inie  amami,  show  it  to  us. 

'amami  2.  poss.  1,  pi.  1,  excl.,  for  us  to  eat. 

amara  to  be  barren,  childless;  muini  e  amara, 
the  childless  women.     Wango  amara. 

'amasi,  'ama'amasi  v.  tr.,  to  feel  pity  for;  'amasi 
tneuri,   to   be  sorry   for  oneself,  to  save 
one's  skin  by  avoidance,     hd'i'amasi. 
'amasila-(ku)    gerund,    'amasileku,   woe   is 
me.     Wango  amari. 

'amasito'o  1.  v.  i.,  used  with  poss.  3,  to  hold  in 
memory.     2.  to  be  homesick,  to  pine, 
'amasito'onga   v.   n.,   remembrance,   recol- 
lection;   'amasilo'onga    amelii,    remem- 
brance of  us. 

amau  U.,  n.,  a  fig  with  edible  leaves;  mwai  keni 
ana  sili  amaunga,  women  given  up  to 
getting  amau.  Ahina'i  amau,  the  name 
of  a  canoe  in  an  Ulawa  story. 

'amaurila-(ku)  gerund,  living,  alive;  'amdurila- 
daru'e,  they  two  alive. 

amelu  1.  poss.  3,  pi.  1,  e.\cl.,  of,  for,  to,  belong- 
ing to  us. 

'amelu  2.  poss.  3,  pi.  1,  excl.,  for  us  to  eat. 

amere'i,  ameru'e  S.  1.  poss.  1,  dual  2,  of,  for, 
to,  belonging  to,  us  two;  amere'i  is 
sometimes   used    for   amelu    1. 

'amere'i,  'ameru'e  S.  2.  poss.  1,  dual  2,  for  us 
two  to  eat. 

'ami  U.,  pers.  pron.,  pi.  1,  excl.  1.  used  as  sub- 
ject, we.  2.  used  following  the  full 
form  i'ami.  3.  suffixed  as  object  to 
verbs  and  prepositions.  Florida  garni, 
Malay  kami. 

'amo'amo  U.,  to  commit  adultery. 

'amo'amonga  v.  n.,  adultery.  Wango  kanio- 
kamo. 

amolu  1.  poss.  3,  pi,  2,  of,  for,  to,  belonging  to, 
you. 

'amolu  2.  poss.  1,  pi.  2,  for  you  to  eat. 

'amu  U.  1.  pers.  pron.,  pi.  2.  used  as  subject, 
you.  2.  suffixed  as  object  to  verbs  and 
prepositions.     Lau  gamu,  Motu  amu. 

amu  3.  poss.  3,  sing.  2,  of,  for,  to,  belonging  to, 
you. 

amu  4.  V.  i.,  to  weed,  to  pull  up  weeds.  San 
Cristoval  amu. 

'amu'e  poss.  1,  sing.  2,  yours  to  eat. 

'amu'i  yours  to  eat,  of  many  things.  Motu 
aniui,  yours. 

'amumu  to  be  dumb.     Lau  amu,  dumb. 

'amuni  partic,  lost  to  sight,  sunk  below  the 
horizon,     'a  6,  mumuni. 

amusi,  amu'emusi  S.  1 .  to  eat  areca  nut  with  lime 
and  betel  pepper, 
amusinge  v.  n.,  betel-chewing. 

amusi  S.  2.  a  fig  with  edible  leaves,  placed 
under  pork  in  ovens:  also  used  to  make 
dhuqa'i.     cf.  amau,  U. 

'amute  to  be  silent,  to  withhold  speech; 
'amumu,  td  3. 

'amwada  partic,  loose  (of  teeth). 

'amwaoro  partic,  bent  down,  bowed,  'a  6, 
m7ca   1. 

amwoamwo  U.,  n.,  a  sprat. 

ana  1.  poss.  3,  sing.  3;  a  5.     (a)  used  as  object 


ANA 


lO 


Hna  1  (continued'!. 

when  the  preposition  is  separated  from 
the  verb,     (b)   to,  for,  concerning,  of, 
against,  him,  her,  it;  caUing  on   (of  a 
ghost"),  U.,  e  damn'ia  meme  ana   Kiir- 
amo,  he  chewed  areca  nut  to  Kiiramo. 
Florida  ana.     cf.  Preface. 
ana  2.  prep.,    instrumental,    used    only    with 
nouns  to  which  the  pron.  3  can  be  suf- 
fixed,   the   definite   article   may   follow 
ana;  ana  specifies  the  instrument,  ani 
the  method;  ana  nga  noma,  with  a  spear; 
e  siiunie  ani  noma,  he  killed  him  spear- 
wise;  aita  maaku,  with  my  eye;  ana  nga 
taa.   with  what?   why?     ana  sacmami. 
with  our  hearts;  ere  lole  ana  ma'unge, 
to  talk  confusedly  from  fear. 
ana  3.  prep.,  belonging  to,  from,  him,  her,  it; 
'o  da  nga  muini  ana  muini  'ie,  take  some 
from  these;  nou  da  ana,  I  got  it  from 
him;  e  mdiiri  ana  mwela,  delivered  of  a 
child. 
ana  4.  place  where;   e  hure'ila'a  ana   hdu,   it 
gushed  forth  from  the  rock;  le'u  e  lae 
ana,  the  place  to  which  he  went;  ana 
mu  'inoni,  among  men. 
ana  5.  prep.,  after,  by  the  name  of;  kite  saaie 
ana  a  ola,  they  named  him  after  So-and- 
so;    poro    (keni)    ana   a   ola,    the    man 
(woman)  named  So-and-so. 
ana  6.  adv.,  time  when;  ana  aau,  at  the  time 
of  ripe  canarium  nuts;   ana  hdlisi,   at 
harvest  time.     Mota  ana,  in  anaqarig, 
ananora;  Polynesian  ana,  of  past  time. 
ana  7.  adv.,    if,    for,    because;   ana   e   tahanie 
maamu  ne,  in  that  he  opened  your  eyes; 
ana  ke  ola  mwamwadau,  if  possible;  ana 
muni  kire  'unua,  if  they  say  it;  atia  nge 
na  ka'a  diana,  now  herein  it  is  not  good; 
ana  uri,  for  if,  of  supposititious  cases; 
anoa  ni  'ie  ana  'omu  lae  mai,  a  marvel 
it  is  in  that  ye  came.     Mao.  and,  there, 
when. 
ana  8.  tangahulu  ana,  tenth  in  a  series.     Mota 

anai,  pasopasoanai. 
'ana  9.  poss.  1,  sing.  3;  for  him  to  eat.     'a  11. 

Motu  ana. 
anaanawela  adj.,  without  blemish, 
anahi  to  succor. 

'ana'i  U.,  verb.  part.,  denoting  futurity  of 
action;  the  'a  is  attracted  to  the  pre- 
ceding o  of  pronoun  na  2  and  to  kira. 
na'a  na'i  lae  'olo,  I  shall  be  off.  Oba 
na,  M.  L.,  p.  426.  Bugotu  da,  M.  L., 
p.  550.  cf.  ke'i. 
ane  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  wonder  at,  to  marvel  at;  ane  i 
Malau,  able  to  see  'Olu  Malau;  proverb 
of  clear  weather.  Wango  ha' ane,  praise, 
'aneneadv.,  gently;  ooru 'owewe,  to  blow  gently. 

Maori  hanene,  to  blow  gently, 
ani  1.  poss.  3,  pi.  3;  of  things  only;  concerning, 
for,  from  among,  to;  used  as  object; 
ne'isae  ani,  think  upon;  nou  da  nga 
muini  eni,  I  took  a  few  of  them, 
ani  2.  prep.,  instrumental,  used  instead  of  ana 
when  no  article  follows,  but  not  used  of 
persons;  e  sdunie  ani  taa?  ani  hakis, 
with  what  did  he  kill  him?  with  an  axe; 


ani  2  (contmued).' 

ani  denotes  the  method,  ana  the  instru- 
ment; ani  is  used  of  general  and  ana  of 
particular    signification;     ani    has    an 
adverbial  force;   ani  noma,  spearwise; 
dtii  eronga,  guilefully;  holota'i  enito'ohaa, 
to  promise  in  money;  honu  eni  to'ohaa, 
filled  with  money;  hute  ani  mesinge,  born 
in  adultery;  ulo  ani  erenga,  to  lament 
with  crying;  dni  he'idinge.  at  some  future 
day;  but  when  an  adjective  follows  the 
noun  ana  may  be  used  in  the  place  of 
dni;   ana   hd'idinge  tala'ala,  in  an  evil 
day;  dni  houlaa.  at  the  feast;  laelae  dni 
'uri  isulie,  walk  in  his  footsteps;  maa 
dni   maa,   niho   dni  niho,   eye   for  eye, 
tooth  for  tooth;  e  hure'ila'a  ani  heu  pulu, 
gushed  out  of  the  stony  rock;  ani  meta- 
thetic  upon  nia.     ni   1 ;   a  4.     Florida 
nia,  instrumental;  Mota  nia. 
ani  S.  3.  prep.,  of,  belonging  to;  used  in  com- 
position; dni  suusuu,  U.,  a  cubit;  'apu 
eni  sheep,  the  blood  of  sheep;  hole  dni 
henue,  a  native  paddle;  li'oa  dni  wala- 
'imolinge,  the  spirit  of  truth;  mu  na'ohai 
jnwela  dni  'inoni,  the  first-born  children 
of  men;  qooqoota  dni  nume,  foundations 
of  the  house;  raaraa  dni  meurihe,  light 
of  life;  supi  eni  heu,  a  stone  club. 
'ano  1.  ground;  cf.  i'ano.     'ano  huu,  the  earth, 
opposed  to  'dsi,  sea;  'ano  mola,  cultivable 
ground,  deep  soil  on  top  of  the  ridges  of 
the  upper  hills,  opposed  to  qd'u  4,  the 
ground  on  the  ridges  immediately  above 
the  beach;  hai  'ano,  on  the  ground;  hoi 
'ano,  underground;  odohaana  7ne'i  'ano 
mola,    in   good    ground;   susu   'ano,   to 
make    holes    for    planting    yams.     Lau 
gano,  Mota  lano. 
*ano  2.  V.  i.,  to  pass  away,  to  disappear  out  of 
sight;  'ano  suu,  to  perish  and  become 
extinct;    'ano  tdlihuu,   to   vanish  com- 
pletely. 
anoa  n.,  a  marvel,  miracle,  vision,  apparition; 
anoa  e  wa'araa  mdi,  an  apparition  came 
into  view. 
'anomi  v.  tr.,  to  cover  with  earth,   to  bury. 
'ano   1.     ka'a  po'ote'e  ada,  ko  anomire 
mola,  no  care  is  taken  of  them,  they  are 
merely  buried,  of  the  undistinguished 
dead.     M.  A.,  p.  263. 
anu,  anuenu  to  be  loose,  unstable. 

anule'i  partic,  loosened,  waving  in  the 
wind.  Florida  anu. 
Anute  1.  the  island  of  Florida.  2.  Anute  ni 
i'e,  island  at  the  eastern  entrance  to 
Mara  Masiki  Channel.  3.  Anute  Fdine, 
North  Sister  Island  near  Aio  on  the  east 
coast  of  Big  Malaita.  Java  nusa, 
island,  cf.  Anuda,  Cherry  Island. 
'anga    1.    n.,    large   woven   basket  for   yams. 

Mota  tanga. 
'anga  2.   to  open;   'anga  wawa,  to  open  the 

mouth   to  speak.       Buogut  hangavi. 
anga'i  v.  i.,  to  carry,  to  act  as  porter. 

anga'ini  v.  tr.     Mota  anga,  to  shoot  up; 
Malagasy  anga,  lifted  up. 


II 


APE 


aogi  1.  V.  tr.,  c  la  molai  angle  holaa,  there  was 

a  flat  calm. 
Sngi,  iingiengi  2.  v.  i.,  to  be  loose,  insecure, 
shaky. 
angire'ini   v.   tr.,   to  move  backward  and 

forward  in  order  to  loosen, 
angire'i    partic,    loose,    capable    of    being 
worked  out. 
iingi,  angiengi  3.  to  jerk. 

'ango  1.  V.  i.,  to  creep,  to  crawl  (of  children). 
ha'a'ango. 
'angohi  %•.  tr.,  to  crawl  to,  to  crawl  over,  to 
creep  over;  c  'angohia  huxi  ni  kana,  he 
crawled  over  to  the  singers. 
'angohila-(ku)   gerund.     Mota  kalo  3. 
'ango  2.  V.  i.,  ango  walo,  to  roll  fiber  on  the 
thigh  into  twine;  ango  dan,  to  lengthen 
out. 
'angohi  v.  tr. 
'angohila-(ku)  gerund. 
'Snguru   partic,   fallen   out    (of   teeth,    etc.). 

'a  12,  ngurusi. 
ao  1.  n.,  a  bird,  egret   (Demiegretta  sacra); 
onomatopoetic;  ao  eke,  white  egret;  ao 
pulu,  gray  egret.     Mota  kaova. 
ao  U.  2.  qd'i  ao,  the  hermit  crab, 
'a'o,  'a'a'o  S.  3.  v.  i.,  to  catch  fish,  to  go  fishing. 
wa'owa'o,  U.     hinoii  ni  'a'a'o,  hook  for 
fishing.     Fagani    agoago. 
a'oho  V.  i.,  to  be  uprooted,  to  collapse  (of  a 
building). 
a'ohonga  v.   n.,   a  fall,   collapse.     Wango 
arobo. 
'a'o'i  U.,  partic,  broken  in  two.     'a  6,  'o'i. 
'a'ole  1.  n.,  a  flying-fish;   poro  'a'ole,  used  in 
addressing  the  fish  as  they  fly;  walopasa, 
10  flying-fish. 
'a'ole  2.  v.  i.,  to  catch  flying-fish.     The  bait  of 
the    flesh    of    crabs'    claws    (,asusu)    is 
whipped  on  a  gorge  (maai  mudi)  made 
of  turtle  shell  or  of  the  midrib  or  rachis 
of  the  sago-palm  leat,  the  line  is  tied  to 
a  float  {ti'o)  which  is  watched  {'ala  6). 
M.  A.,  p.  317. 
aonga'i  v.  i.,  to  look  fixedly,  to  stare, 
aonga'ini  v.  tr.,  to  stare  at. 
aonga'imla-(ku)  gerund. 
aopa   V.  i.,  different,  exceedingly,     ha'iaopa'i. 
dau   aopa,   to   make   mistakes,   to  err; 
e  aopa  'oto,  it  has  got  too  bad  already; 
c  sa'a  he'i  aopa  lo'u,  it  will  never  be 
different;   kire  qao  aopara  mwaanikolu, 
they  treated  them  differently  from  us; 
si'o  aopa,  to  separate. 
aori  1.  V.  tr.,  to  expose  a  body  for  burial  in  a 
canoe  or  tree,  or  to  lay  it  into  a  canoe. 
cf.  sdlu.     Wango  aora. 
aori  2.  v.  tr.,  to  approach  (of  persons). 
'apa  1.  n.,  a   part,  side,    half;  'apai  loa,  hea- 
ven, sky;  'apai    salo,    afternoon;    'apai 
hut,    100,000   taro;    'apai   niu.    100,000 
coconuts;  'apani  uhi,  U.,  100,000  >anis; 
'apani  mae,  a  fighting  party;  'apani  mae 
pe'i'emi,  to  side  with  us;     cf.  Florida 
levti  ni  mate. 
'apa  U.  2.  to  be  different. 
'apa  3.  n.,  a  leaf;  cf.  'apa'apa  1.      mu  'apai 


'apa  3  (continued). 

dango.  leaves  of  trees;  'apani  paale'o, 
nautilus  shell  cut  in  trianj^uiar  forms 
for  inlaying;  kala  'apani  paale'o.  to  cut 
such  pieces  of  shell.  Florida  gaba, 
branch.  4.  side  (not  of  persons);  ko 
aweawehie  ro  'apa  na,  walks  on  every 
side;  the  locative  i  is  added;  'apai  haha. 
Big  Malaita,  j.  e.,  downside;  'apaihenue, 
the  west  (down  side)  of  the  island;  'apai 
loa  la'au,  the  heavens;  'apai  sato,  after- 
noon. 

'apaa  n.,  a  staff. 

'apa'apa  (ku)  1.  n.,  wing,  shoulder,  leaves; 
'apa'apana  mu  menu,  birds'  wings; 
i  'apa'apana  mu  'inoni,  on  the  shoulders 
of  men;  »  qe'une  'apa'apana,  on  his 
shoulders;  mu  'apa'apai  dango,  tree 
leaves;  lere  'apa'apa,  to  flap  the  wings; 
tele  'apa'apa,  to  flutter  the  wings;  'apai 
reu,  a  leaf;  mu  'apai  reu  ana  mu  dango, 
the  leaves  of  the  trees;  mwa  'apa'apani 
'ei,  v.,  tree  leaves,  'apa  3.  Wango 
abaaba,  shoulder,  leaf;  Viti  tamba,  wing; 
Florida  gaba,  branch;  Samoa  'apa'apa, 
fin  of  a  shark;  Malay  sapa,  wing;  Maori 
kapakapa,  to  flutter;  Mota  gava,  to  flap 
the  wings. 

'apa'apa  2.  n.,  a  shed,  hut;  probably  because 
built  originally  of  leaves. 

'apa'apa  3.  'apa'apai  i'i,  a  bird,  a  swift.  Mota 
gapagapa,  a  swallow. 

'apahee  n.,  a  pig's  ham. 

'apakere  n.,  a  yam. 

'apala  U.  1.  shoulder;  qd'uli  'apala,  the 
shoulder.  2.  a  sum  of  money  {haa) 
reaching  from  finger  tips  to  opposite 
shoulder;  ida  'apala,  a  yard  and  a 
quarter.  3.  rua  'apala,  a  phase  of  the 
moon.  4.  v.  tr.,  to  carry  in  the  arms; 
e  'apalara,  kure  ke  'apala,  let  me  carry 
you.  Mota  sapan,  to  lead;  Samoa  sapa, 
sapai;  San  Cristoval  abara. 

'apalili  to  make  a  detour,  lili  1.  Florida 
labalili,  apart. 

'apalolo  U.,  n.,  the  banyan;  used  in  Sa'a  of  a 
special  variety,  'apa  3,  lolo  3.  'apalolo 
e  toll,  the  banyan  has  shed  its  leaves. 
Florida  tabalolo. 

'apani  ere  'apani,  to  talk  in  a  dialect;  ^cala 
'apani,  speech,     'apa  3. 
'apanile-(ku)   gerund.,  brogue. 

'apara'i  partic,  surprised,  frightened,  taken  at 
a  disadvantage,     ha'a'apara'ini. 

'apasu  partic,  chipped,  with  the  end  broken 

off. 
apau  side  (not  of  persons);  apau  deni,  U., 
toward  morning;  apau  one,  the  lee  side 
of  an  island,  an  inlet  west  of  Cape  Zelde; 
e  apau  'oto,  it  is  afternoon;  sato  'oto  i 
apau,  the  sun  declines.  Wango  abau, 
beside,  outside. 
ape  1.  to  run  aground,  to  prevent,  to  hinder, 
to  serve  as  a  barrier,  ha'aape.  ape 
kite,  to  curtail;  ape  hono,  ape  honosi,  to 
prevent;  ape  puri,  to  be  last,  in  the  rear, 
to  follow  after. 


APE 


12 


ape  2.  apt'  sada  S.,  ape  dao  U.,  to  be  level  (of 
country). 

ape  3.  V.  tr.,  to  encourage;  e  apea  saena,  he  en- 
couraged him. 

'ape  4.  a  net,  a  seine;  'ape  ni  menu,  nets  set  for 
birds  across  the  openings  in  a  ridge  of 
hills;  the  place  where  such  nets  are  set; 
'ape  e  Idu,  the  net  has  fish  inclosed  in  it; 
iilu  ana  'ape,  to  fish  with  a  seine;  sdii 
viaa  ana  mu  'ape.  to  mend  the  meshes 
of  the  nets.     Mota.?a/>f,  Maori  kupenga. 

*Ape  5.  the  constellation  of  the  Southern  Cross; 
ro  tnwane,  the  two  pointers  to  that  con- 
stellation.    M.  A.,  p.  349. 

api-(na)  bordering  on;  i  epina  lalo,  bordering 
on  the  garden. 

apiepi  v.  i.,  to  border  on,  to  be  contiguous  to. 
Malay  apit,  side  by  side;  Maori  apiti, 
to  place  side  by  side;  Niue  apiapi, 
narrow. 

apirawa  a  yam  with  purple  flesh. 

apiopio  a  flowering  creeper  (Hoya). 

apite'i  partic,  sore,  of  feet;  met.,  sore  at  heart. 

apo  1.  V.  tr.,  to  epilate. 

apo  2.  a  bivalve  shell  used  to  pluck  out  hairs — 
it  is  held  in  the  fingers  and  worked  like 
pincers. 

apo  3.  V.  tr.,  to  lever,  to  prize;  e  apoa  mu  lieu, 
he  prized  up  the  rocks. 

'apolo  1.  a  piece  of  shell  money  (haa);  'ele 
'apolo.  U.,  a  small  length  of  money, 
met.,  of  a  small  piece  of  garden  planted. 
Florida  polo,  up  till. 

'apolo  2.  partic,  ceased,  ended;  hota  ni  tnwane 
e  'apolo  ana  ro  Dora,  the  succession  of 
boys  ceased  with  the  two  Doras;  mae 
'apolo.  paralyzed. 

'apoloa  S.,  people,  descendants;  'apoloa  inen. 
my  people. 

apota  apola  ni  lionu,  egg  of  turtle. 

'apu  (ku)  1.  blood,  cf.  ma'dpu'a;  'dpu  e  siki 
ana,  seed  of  copulation;  'dpu  raharaha, 
an  issue  of  blood;  kokoi  'epu,  a  drop  of 
blood;  me'i  'epu,  S.,  tndsi  'epu,  U.,  blood; 
e  ngisuhie  'dpu,  to  spit  blood;  sulti  'epu, 
to  adopt  a  child. 
'apule  adj.,  bloody;  qa'u  'dpula,  U.,  a  person 
wounded  in  battle;  awalaa'i  'epule, 
bloodshot;  lili  'epule,  turned  into  blood, 
'apunge  v.  n.,  sidu  'epunge,  adoption  of 
children. 

'apu  2.  to  be  forbidden,  tabu,  to  be  final. 
ha'a'apu.  e  'dpu  laa,  U.,  why  not?  (is 
it  forbidden?);  toli  'epu,  to  observe  a 
tabu,  to  fast. 

'Apu  'Ala  a  district  on  Little  Malaita  over- 
looking Mara  Masiki  Channel. 

'apu'i  v.,  to  flatter,  to  cajole,  to  say  'ako'ako 
sae.     hd'i'epu'i. 

'apulo  panic,  returned,  turned  back  on  a 
journey,     'a  6,  pulo. 

apune  wa'i  n.,  stinging- nettle  tree,     wa'i  7. 

'apuru  partic,  crowded,     'a  6,  puru. 

'Apurunge    the    Pleiades.     M.  A.,  p.  349. 
Maori  apuru,  to  crowd. 

'aqa  1.  to  squat  on  the  heels,  to  cower  down, 
'aqahi  tr.,  to  crouch  and  await,  to  lie  in 


'aqa  1  (continued). 

wait  for;  'aqahi  lue,  shell-money  orna- 
ment in  pairs  and  worn  by  the  women  on 
breast  and  back. 
'aqaha'i   v.    i.,    to  crouch,    to   brood   over 

(of  hens). 
'aqata'ini  v.  tr.,  to  beset,  to  lie  in  wait  for. 
Mota    laqa,   crouch;    Wango    'aqa'aqa, 
Maori   ?awhi. 

'aqa  (ku)  U.  2.  n.,  belly,     cf.  'oqa. 

'aqa  3.  ha'a'aqaha'ini,  to  measure  by. 

'aqa'aqa  n.,  bay,  indentation  in  coast,     'aqa  2. 
'aqa'aqa'a    adj.,     bay-shaped.     San   Cris- 
toval  waqa,  a  cave. 

aqalao  n.,  pus,  matter  in  a  sore. 

'aqalulu  S.,  'aqaruru  U.,  n.,  coconut  beetle. 

'aqaqo  'aqaqoi  sa'o  1.  fronds  of  sago  palm.  2. 
raft  made  of  the  fronds. 

'aqelu  partic,  ov-erturned.     'a  6,  qelu. 

ara  1.  n.,  dew;  hu'ori  ara,  to  be  early  afoot. 

ara,  araara  2.  v.,  to  make  an  advance,  to  move 
forward,  to  get  on;  ko  kele  araara  la'ane, 
it  is  moving  slighth-. 
arana  tr.,  to  move  a  thing  on. 
arala-(ku)  gerund,  aralana,  its  being  moved 
forward. 

ara  3.  v.,  to  be  lost,  dispersed. 

'arai  v.  i.,  to  call  out,  to  cry  aloud.  Bugotu 
tarai. 

ara'idio  v.  i.,  to  alight  upon,  to  swoop,  of 
birds,     dio. 

arakau  n.,  fish  hawk  (Haliaster  girrenera). 
kdu  1.     Wango  arakau. 

arakoko  n.,  taro  pudding,  pounded  taro  with 
grated  raw  coconut  on  top,  considered 
poor  cooker 3'. 

aramu  U.,  v.,  to  itch. 

aranga  n.,  a  wild  duck. 

arapa  n.,  a  wooden  hair  comb;  it  is  made  of 
separate  pieces  and  not  cut  out  of  the 
solid:  a  cross-bar  is  tied  with  fibers  of 
the  creeper  adio  below  the  handle,  the 
center  piece  projects  beyond  the  others, 
which  are  bent  and  tied  tightly  to  it, 
the  flat  handle  is  frequently  inlaid  with 
pieces  of  nautilus  shell  (reoreo),  the 
teeth  of  the  comb  are  v^ery  sharp  and 
the  hair  is  teased  out  with  an  upward 
movement;  arapa  ddiedi,  a  comb  made 
in  Big  Malaita  and  ornamented  with 
dyed  plaited  cane  {ue)  and  yellow  fern 
tissue  {ddiedi)  woven  into  a  pattern  on 
the  handle,  the  ends  passing  between 
the  pieces  composing  the  comb;  arapa 
reoreo,  comb  inlaid  with  nautilus  shell. 
arapasi  v.  tr.,  to  comb  the  hair. 

arapuu  v.  i.,  to  make  land  when  at  sea,  to  reach. 
ara  2,  puu  1. 
arapuunge  v.  n.,  a  coming  to  land,  reaching 
a  destination. 

'arasi  1.  to  scrape,  to  fine  down  spears,  etc., 
by  scraping,  kara  2;  'arasi  niu,  to 
grate  coconut  with  a  roa  or  sdukai; 
'arasi  noma,  to  scrape  spears  with  ngddi. 
Mota  sarav,  to  stroke;  Niue  alati,  to 
scratch. 

'arasi  2.  v.  i.,  'arasi  moo,  to  lead  the  chorus  in 


13 


'ASI 


'arasi  2  (continued). 

a   dance;    ha'a    ni    'arasi,    ark    of    tlie 

covenant. 
arato  U.,  seeds  worn  on  the  ankles  in  a  dance. 
aratoto  v.  i.,  to  get  to  a  destination,     ara  2. 
arau  1.  n.,  a  kind  of  canarium  nut.     2.  n.,  the 

place  where  such  grow. 
'arawa    adj.,    raw,     unripe,     uncooked;    7nae 

'arawa,  to  die  suddenly  or  in  \outh;  nolo 

'arawa,  to  die  suddenly. 
'arawanga   v.    n.,   wo/o   'arawanga,   suflden 

death. 
'arawana   its   greenness,    unripeness;    'ara- 

wana  e  ngdii  diana,  it  eats  well  raw. 
'ara'arawa'a  adj.,   raw.     Wango  marawa. 
arawana  n.,atree  on  Malaita  with  large  edible 

fruit  brown  in  color. 
are,  areare  v.  tr.,  to  call  upon  a  ghost  (li'oa, 

'akalo),  to  beg.  to  importune;  arearedu 

ana  iiununge,  call  upon  me  with  sacrifice. 
arenga'i  v.  i.,  arenga'i  Ite'u,  to  use  hot  stones 

in  the  ordeal  by  fire,  calling  on  a  ghost 

to  witness  one's  innocence.  M..\.,  p.  212. 
'arenga'ini  tr.,  to  offer  prayers  and  invo- 
cations to  a  ghost. 
are  hd'iare,  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  profifer  help,  to  push 

oneself  forward, 
areareo'a    U.,    adj.,    ulcerous,    crippled    with 

ulcers. 
aree  interj.,  exclamation  of  grief  or  pain. 
areka   an   acacia   which  grows  in  abandoned 

gardens. 
arenga-(ku)  1.  duty,  part;  noko  esa  arengaku,  I 

am  doing  my  part.     Lau  arcnga. 
Arenga  2.  Arenga  Mann,  the  northwest  point 

of  Ulawa,  near  Haraina. 
arikosi  U.,  v.,  to  work  in  common,  to  have  a 

working  bee. 
arikosinga  v.  n.,  work  done  in  common. 
arikosilana  gerund,  the  working  of  it,  its 

being  done, 
ariri,  arieriri  to  tremble,  to  shiver  from  cold 

or  fear, 
ariringe  v.  n.,  trembling.     Bugotu  ariri. 
arisi  v.  tr.,  to  attack  craftily,  with  deceit  and 

guile. 
arisila-(ku)  gerund. 
ariu  n.,  kingfish. 

aro  1.  wild  ginger,     aro  pue.    'apai  aro,  ginger- 
leaf  wrapping  of  food  in  the  oven;  maai 

aro,  stalks  of  ginger. 
aro  2.  v.,  to  soar,  to  hover. 
aro  3.  poe  aro,  a  nose-stick  of  bamboo  or  shell. 
aroaro  v  ,  to  shout,  to  exult;  rike  pe'i  aroaro, 

to  rejoice  and  shout. 
'aroka  partic,  open,  wide,     'a  6,  roka. 
Arona  n.,   the  south  cape  of  Ulawa  and  the 

village  cast  of  it. 
aropu  U.  1.  n.,  snail;  hiinuaana  ngdu  aropnnga, 

a  snail-eating  place. 
aropu  S.  2.  tolo  aropu,  to  sip. 
aroqa'i  to  mix  liquids,     qa'i  2. 

aroqa'i'e  adj.,  'omu  ke  man   anga  aroqa'i'e 

httnie,  give  her  a  double  mixture. 
'aroro  1.  n.,  a  wooden  hook.     2.  v.  tr.,  to  sus- 
pend,   to    hang    on    a    hook.     Florida 

dororo. 


Aru  i  sapena  i  Aru  ni  i'e,  apostrophe  addressed 
to  San  Cristoval.     cf.  ha'addhi. 

aruhi  n.,  a  co\'ering. 

asa  V.  i.,  to  be  difficult,  mysterious,     ha'aasa. 
ha'aasa'i.     mango  asa,  to  gasp;  tnii  wei 
e  asa,  deep  waters;  rorongo  asa,  I'.,  to 
be  dull  of  hearing. 
asaasa'a  adj.,  difficult. 

asa'i  tr..  to  be  too  difficult  for;  e  asa'ieu,  it 
is  too  difficult  for  me.  Wango  asa, 
mysterious. 

asai  mango  tree;  hoi  asai,  mango  fruit;  te'ele'ei 
asai,  dry  mango  seed  used  as  a  cover  for 
the  shell  (.apo)  used  as  a  razor. 

asaka  n.,  coleus. 

asaunge  n.,  sardine,  caught  with  a  shell  hook 
(looloo,  toohe'o)  from  a  stage  built  out 
in  the  bays;  asaunge  e  ddu,  the  sardines 
have  arrived. 

'asi  1 .  sea,  salt  water,  salt;  'dsi  dodo,  deep  water; 
'dsi  ko  kokohu,  the  sea  is  booming;  'dsi 
ko  ulungaa  hdnue,  the  sea  under  the 
earth;  'dsi  mae,  lee  shore;  'dsi  malawa, 
open  sea;  'dsi  meuri,  weather  side;  'dsi 
vamo,  quiet  water  inside  a  harbor;  'ds 
rodo,  deep  water;  'dsi  rodo,  a  month 
January  (part);  hdu  ni  'esi,  a  wave; 
holosie  'asi,  to  cross  the  waves;  kohine 
'dsi,  the  face  of  the  sea;  koukou  'esi,  to 
gargle  salt  water;  liu  i  'esi,  to  travel  by 
sea;  moro  Idria  paro  i'ola  i  'esi,  you 
launch  the  canoe  yonder  into  the  sea; 
mu  suuleni  'esi,  the  paths  of  the  sea; 
mwai  nialau  i  'esi,  U.,  the  islands  of  the 
sea;  nono  'dsi,  sandfly,  gnat;  pine  ni 
'est,  booby;  piisu  'esi,  whale;  le'i  'esi,  to 
dip  and  draw  up  salt  water  in  a  bamboo; 
i  lo'nlana  'dsi,  on  the  surface  of  the  sea. 
i\Iota  tas,  Ceram  lasi,  Polynesian  tai. 

'asi-(ku)  2.  S.,  man's  brother,  woman's  sister; 
'asiku,  my  brother;  'asikii  ineu.  my 
brother;  maeni  'esiku,  my  brethren;  mu 
mwa  'asine,  brethren:  in  Sa'a  a  sister 
may  be  spoken  of  by  her  brother  as 
'asiku;  in  Ulawa  'asiku  means  a  woman's 
brother  or  a  sister-in-law;  ro  mwa  'asina, 
v.,  two  sisters-in-law,  each  calling  the 
other  'asiku  (Su'uholo  usage).  Mota 
tasiu,  Motu  laJi,  Polynesian  tahi,  tei. 

'asi  3.  \'.  tr.,  to  throw  away;  joined  with  certain 
words  it  denotes  destruction,  doing  away 
with;  dere  'asi,  U.,  to  throw  away;  ere 
'asi,  U.,  to  reproach,  to  vilify;  horo  'asi, 
to  decimate;  hu'e  'asi,  to  overturn,  to 
overthrow;  kae  'asi,  to  pluck  out  (thorn) ; 
nc'isac  'asi,  to  forgive;  ooho  'asi,  to 
break  up,  to  destroy;  sae  'asi,  to  forgive, 
to  neglect;  susu  'asi,  to  prick  and  re- 
move; 'usungc'i  'asi,  to  despatch. 
'asila-(ku)  gerund,  uunu  'asilana,  destroy- 
ing by  burning. 
'asi'a  U.,  adj.,  with  notion  of  wasted;  e 
pdina  'asi'a,  needlessly  big;  e  udiudi 
'asi'a,  rotting  away;  vga  hudi  c  inata 
'asi'a,  the  bananas  were  rotting  away 
unpicked.  Florida  asi,  lost;  Wango 
gasi;  Malo  asena,  very. 


'ASI 


14 


*asi  U.  4.  adv.,  thereupon,  consequently,  'a, 
V.  p.,  si,  illative. 

asihe  U.,  to  sneeze,  'asinge,  S.  M.  A.,  p.  226. 
Bugotu  achihe,  Maori  matihe,  Nine  tihe. 
Probably  onomatop. 

*asile  adj.,  saltish,  brackish,     'dsi  1. 

'Asiloli'a  U.,  the  name  of  a  canoe  in  a  storj'. 

'asinge  S.,  to  sneeze,  asihe,  U.;  considered  a 
sign  that  someone  is  calling. 

asire'i  v.  i.,  to  be  taken  unawares,  to  be  unpre- 
pared for.     ha'adsire'i. 

asoso  V.  i.,  to  tremble,  to  shake,  to  be  palsied. 

asu,  asuesu  1.  S.,  to  work;  dsu  hohola,  to  work 
in  a  yam  patch;  dsu  maarue,  to  serve 
two  masters;  dsu  me'i  ola,  to  minister 
at  holy  things;  dsu  nani  'inoni,  of  work 
not   faithfully   done,   eye   service;    dsu 
ramoramo'anga,  mighty  work;  dsu  susu- 
le'i,    to  work    unremittingly;    dsu  talai 
ngeulaa,   to   work   for  food;   dsu  we'u, 
hard  work. 
asunge  v.  n.,  work, 
asu'i  tr.,  to  work  at  a  thing. 
asula-(ku)  gerund.,  the  doing  of. 

asu,  asuesu  2.  v.  i.,  to  move  from  place  to  place, 
to  be  loose. 
asule'i  partic,  unstable. 

asuata  exclam.  of  disapproval. 

asuhe  n.,  a  rat;  'asuhe  e  ngero'ie,  rats  m'bbled 
it.  Mota  gasuwe,  Viti  kudhuve,  Bugotu 
kuhi. 

asu'olo'olo  v.  i.,  to  be  loose,  shaking,  to  move 
to  and  fro.     dsu  2,  'olo'olo. 

asusu  coconut  crab  (Birgus  latro),  the  flesh  of 
claws  used  as  bait  for  flying-fish. 

ata  1  S.,  a  unit;  methathetic  upon  ta'a  3.  'enile 
'ata,  just  how  many?  e  ro  'ata  tnwane, 
only  two  men. 

ata,  ataata  2.  U.,  to  progress,  to  move  on,  to 
be  in  motion,     adaada,  S. 
atana  tr.,  to  move  a  thing  slightly. 

atalawa  v.  i.,  to  be  set  wide  apart. 

atanau  v.  i.,  used  with  poss.  3;  of  a  ghost,  to 
fasten  on,  to  attack  a  person. 

'ate,  'ate 'ate  to  be  dry,  to  have  no  moisture  on; 
ngisu  'ate,  to  be  thirsty  (parched  lips); 
ngisu  'atenga,  thirst. 

'atea  S.  1.  a  coconut  water-bottle,  hou  'atea. 
2.  a  glass  bottle. 

atei  interrog.  pron.,  sing.,  who;  plural,  kiratei; 
atei  'elekale,  what  child?  atei  e  manala- 
'inie,  who  knows?  (I  can't  say);  ola 
atei,  whose  thing?  the  demonstrative 
ni  may  be  added;  atei  ni  ngeena,  who  is 
that?  satana  atei,  what  (who)  is  his 
name?     Mota  isei,  Maori  wai. 

ato  1.  to  be  in  motion;  'ato  'ae,  to  move  quickly, 
to  stride;  'ato  'ae  su'ahia,  U.,  to  leap  and 
encounter;  'ato  hdu  ilengi,  to  stone  with 
stones;  'ato  holo,  to  cross  over  the  sea; 
'ato  honosi,  to  oppose;  'ato  huni,  to  lie 
in  wait  for;  'ato  i  na'ona  huni,  to  be  in 
worse  plight,  circumstances  became 
worse  for  one;  'ato  hu'o,  to  set  a  net;  'ato 
hu'onga,  a  plot;  'ato  nime,  to  set  out 
bowls  of  food  at  a  feast;  'ato  puri,  with 
p  ss.  3,  to  turn  the  back  on. 


ato  1  (continued). 

'atoni  tr.,  'atoni  lalo,  to  plan,  to  set  out,  a 
garden;  'atoni  hu'o,  to  set  a  net;  'atoni 
ue,  to  steep  and  dye  strips  of  cane;  hu'eli 
'ato'ato,  to  wind  dyed  cane. 

'ato  2.  n.,  rafter,  generally  of  bamboo.  Mota 
gaso,  Bugotu  gaho,  Borneo  kasau,  Niue 
ato,  Maori  kaho,  ato.  thatch. 

'ato'ato  1.  n.,  hu'eli  'ato'ato,  to  wind  rolls  of 
dyed  cane. 

'ato'ato  2.  v.  i.,  to  take  a  new  canoe  on  a  tour 
around  the  neighborhood  and  to  nearby 
islands  in  order  to  raise  money;  i'ola 
'ato'ato,  a  canoe  so  taken. 

'ato'ato  3.  'ato'ato  hdu,  to  perform  the  ordeal 
with  hot  stones.  M.  A.,  p.  212.  ddu 
he'u,  id.;  sulu  'ato,  a  song  sung  as  an 
ordeal;  sulu  'atonga  v.  n. 

'atohono  n.,  a  chamber,  inner  room,  'ato  2, 
hono. 

atowaa  n.,  broad  day,  10  a.  m.  to  2  p.  m.;  hai 
atowaa  hd'ileku,  a  whole  day  long;  mu 
hei  atowaa,  the  days,  as  opposed  to  mu 
hei  rodo,  the  nights;  susu'e  atowaa,  all 
day  long. 

au  l.n.,  a  black,  poisonous  snake.    M.  A.,  p.  221. 

au  2.  pers.  pron.,  sing.,  1,  suffixed  to  verb  and 
to  preposition  as  object,  i-na-u,  M.  L., 
p.  116. 

au  3.  n.,  the  bamboo;  au  pungu,  a  large,  strong 
kind  of  bamboo;  du  qe'i,  a  variety  of 
bamboo  with  close  joints,  planted 
upright  to  retain  walls  of  houses,  also 
employed  in  making  combs;  du  rarahi, 
the  third  finger;  du  susu,  an  ear-stick 
of  reed;  du  wale,  a  flute;  hai  eu,  a  reed, 
a  length  of  bamboo;  huni  eu,  a  stool  of 
bamboo;  qirei  eu,  a  length  of  bamboo,  a 
bamboo  stalk.     Mota  au  1.     Motu  bau. 

'au  4.  'du  ta'a,  to  debouch  (of  a  path),  to  end 
in,  to  proceed  from.     Mota  au,  to  step. 

'a'u  U.  5.  exclam.  of  assent,  yes. 

aueu  1.  a  short  bamboo  plugged  at  one  end, 
used  as  a  receptacle.  2.  a  casket.  3.  a 
match-box,  dueu  ni  dunge. 

aueune  v.  i.,  to  be  discontented,  upset  in  mind. 

auhenue  1.  v.,  to  be  resident  in  a  place,  to  be  a 
native  of  a  place,  hdnue.  2.  n.,  an 
inhabitant  of  a  place;  nou  euhenue  'oto, 
I  am  acclimatized.  3.  n.,  a  neighbor; 
e  sa'a  saronie  auhenue  inge'ie,  he  will  do 
no  harm  to  his  neighbor. 

'auhora  v.  i.,  to  come  open,  to  come  apart,  to 
be  revealed,  hd'ihora'i.  salo  ko  euhora, 
the  sky  is  opened;  ddngi  esi  euhora, 
light  has  been  revealed. 

a'ulu  1.  specific  numeral,  ten  of  coconuts. 
d'ului  niu. 

A'ulu  2.  village  on  the  east  coast  of  Little 
Malaita  next  to  Sa'a.  3.  A'ulu  Peine. 
A'ulu  Talau,  northeast  end  of  Little 
Malaita. 

aunge-(ku)  dungana,  his  master;  dungani  lalo, 
U.,  master  of  the  garden. 

Auqe'i  a  hill  on  the  main  ridge  of  Little  Malaita 
in  the  Koru  district  at  the  head  of  the 
river  Walo'a'a,  near  original  home  of 
Sa'a  people. 


15 


DA'IDERI  E 


'3uru  to  be  uprooted,  to  fall  down  (of  a  tree). 

San  Cristoval  auru,  down;  Maori  auru. 
'ausala  v.  1.,  to  be  a  gadabout,  to  neglect  the 

home.     Mota  sala  1. 
'auta'a  to  proceed  from,  to  come  forth,     'au  4, 

ta'a  4. 
'Mutala  ere  'dulala,  to  speak  to  the  air,   for 

naught. 
awa  1.  to  be  a  sojourner  in  a  foreign  place;  in 

proper    names,     VVateawa.     noko    awa 

mdi,  I  am  a  stranger  here. 
awa  2.  V.  i.,  to  roar  (of  fiood,  etc.);  taa  ni  ko 

awa  m&i,  what  is  that  roaring?     pine 

awa,  the  hornbill,  from  the  rushing  noise 

made  by  its  wing. 
awaawata-(na)  gerund.;  awaawalana  naho, 

the  roaring  of  the  surf. 
awa  3.  to  be  brown  in  color;  'tisu  awa,  a  brown 

dog;  hana  awa,  a  pinkish-colored  yam. 
awa  4.  the  walking-fish  (Periophthalmus  sp.). 
awa  5.  U..  awa  lahu,  to  slip,  to  come  loose  (of 

bands) . 
awa  6.  U.,  lahanga  awa  niisi,  a  measure,  just 

on  a  fathom. 
'awa  7.  a  tree  (Xephelium  pinnatum).     Mota 

lawan,  V'iti  ndawa. 
•awa  8.  cf.  'awangi,  'awasi. 
awaa  to  be  convalescent  after  fever,  to  be  over 

the  attack. 
awaawahane  U.,  v.  i.,  to  sigh  for;  e'a  awaa- 

wahane    mola    amoro'i,    he    is    forever 

sighing  for  you  two. 
awala    n.,    a    ten,    a    tally,     ha'aawala.     nga 

awala,    a    ten;    e    ro    awala,    two    tens, 

twenty;   awala   ha'ahuu,   S.,   awala   'olo 

huu,  U.,  a  full  ten;  awala  da'adala,  an 

uneven  tally;  awala  mdia  'enila,  awala 

mwana    'enite,    how    many    over    ten; 

awala  mwana  rue,  twelve  (ten  complete 

and   two) ;    kali   awala,   ten   strings  of 

shell  money  each  a  fathom  long.     Lau 

aqala. 
awalaa'i  S.,  partic,  awalaa'i  'epule,  bloodshot, 

red  (of  eyes). 
awaleo  creaking  branches  in  a  tree. 
awalosi  1.  the  wind  between  west  and  north 

blowing  in  the  summer;  awalosi  i  ahare, 

northeast   wind;   awalosi   liatale,    north 

wind;  awalosi  i  henite,  northwest  wind; 

awalosi  i  Kela,  southwest  wind  (as  Kela 

is  the  south  point  of  Guadalcanar  this 

shows    that    the    wind     notation     rests 

upon  the  rhumb  toward  which  the  wind 

blows);   awalosi   i  one,   north-northeast 

wind;  awalosi  i  su'u  west  wind. 
awalosi  2.  a  reed   (Arundo  sp.)    with    edible 

flower-heads. 
awanganga  v.  i.,  to  open  the  mouth,  to  gape. 

Mota  wanga,  to  gape;  Lau/aga,  mouth; 

Maori   wangai,    to   feed;    Niue  fangai, 

to  feed, 
'awangi  v.  tr.,  to  e.xpose  to  the  air  (of  an  ulcer 

or  sore  place). 
awara,  awaawara  to  cry  out,  to  yell,  to  whine; 

hdu  ni  mwela  awara,  the  day  after  full 

moon. 
awaranga  v.  n.,  crying,  yelling. 


awara  (continued). 

awarasi    tr.,     to    cry    over,     to     lament. 
VVango  awara. 
'awasi  to  draw  in  the  breath  with  a  whistling 
sound   when  eating  areca   nut,    'awasi 
'e'e,  S.,  'awasi  pua,  U.     'awa  8,  itawa, 
mouth. 
'awasirahe  v.  i.,  to  groan,  to  mourn,  to  sigh. 
n.,  a  sroan  'awasi,  rahe. 
'awasirahenga  v.  n.,  groaning. 
awata'a  to  be  a  stranger  and  as  such  in  evil 
plight,     awa  1,  ta'a  1.     Wango  aa^a^a'a. 
awe,  aweawe  v.  i.,  to  walk  about. 

aweawehi  tr.,  to  travel  up  and  down  a  place; 
ko  aweawehie  ro  'apana,  walks  on  every 
side. 

D 

Before  i  d  is  pronounced  as  ch  in  the  word 

church;  adi  a-chi,  diena  chi-e-na.     In  all  other 

cases  in  pronouncing  d  the  tongue  is  pressed 

against  the  palate  and  held  there  while  the 

breath  is  forced  against  it,  then  the  tongue  is 

relaxed  and  the  breath  escapes,  the  resultant 

sound  being  equivalent  to  dr. 

da  1.  pers.  pron.,  pi.  3,  suffixed  to  nouns  and 
to  certain  verbs  and  gerundives. 

da  2.  mwane  da  na  kolu  mae,  lest  we  die.     daa. 

daa,  daadaa  S.,  v.  i.,  to  give,  to  take,  to  do. 
taa,  U.  le'une  nou  daa  'olo,  I  did  that 
already. 

dada  U.,  to  be  smooth,  to  be  flat,  level. 
ha'adada.  hd'idada,  hu'idada. 

dadada'a  U.,  adj.,  smooth,  flat,  level. 

dadanga'a  S.,   burnished,  shining. 

da'elu  pers.  pron.,  pi.  3,  suffixed  to  nouns  and 
to  certain  verbs  and  gerundives,  da  1. 
t  saada'elu. 

Daha  a  beach  in  'Olu  Su'u,  the  landing-place 
next  north  of  Sa'a  on  the  east  coast. 

dahe  v.  tr.,  to  adze  down,  to  chip  ground  with 
the  hoe.     ha'adahe. 

dahi  1.  the  golden-lip  pearl  shell;  'u'u  maai 
dehi,  a  pearl;  suu  delii,  to  dive  for  pearl 
shell.  2.  a  crescentic  breast  ornament 
for  men  cut  from  this  shell;  ddhi  raha, 
a  pearl-shell  gorget  worn  with  the 
convex  side  outward  and  the  rounded 
outer  edge  plastered  with  pulu  3.  3.  U.. 
a  phase  of  the  moon. 

dahi,  da'idehi  4.  to  be  favored,  to  be  lucky; 
ha'addhi;  to  the  reduplicated  form  the 
possessive  pronoun  is  suffixed,  and  in 
Sa'a  the  d  is  replaced  by  e  where  no  »  or 
M  precedes;  nou  dehi,  lucky  me;  de'ide- 
hieu.  de'idehire.  happy  me.  happy  they. 

dahi'e,  da'idehi'e  S..  dahidahi'a  U.,  adj., 
happy,  fortunate,  blessed. 

dahu  the  sheath  covering  the  coconut  flower, 
used  when  dry  for  tinder  or  for  fire- 
kindling. 

da'i  1.  seen  in  compounds,  dd'idiena.  daila'a, 
dd'ilama'a. 

Da'i  2.  Gower  Island,  north  of  Big  Malaita. 

da'idengi  adv.,  by  daylight,     ddngi. 

da'ideri'e  n.,  a  valley,     dari. 


DX'IDIENA 


i6 


da'idiena  I'.,  da'idiana  S.,  to  be  in  peace,  to 
be     in    safety,     diana.     ani    dinge     iii 
de'idiaita,  in  a  day  of  salvation. 
da'idiananga  v.   n.,  i'o  ni  de'idiananga,  to 
dwell  in  safety. 

da'ilama  U.,  v.,  to  be  in  peace,     n.,  peace, 
da'ilama'a  adj.,  peaceful, 
da'ilama'asi  v.  tr.,  to  be  at  peace;  e  dd'ila- 
ma'asira,  they  were  in  peace. 

da'ita'a  v.,  to  be  in  trouble,     n.,  trouble. 

dala  in  the  reduplicated  form  da'adala  used 
to  denote  numbers  above  ten,  not  a  full 
tally;  e  da'adala,  it  was  a  number  over 
ten;  aivala  da'adala,  an  uneven  tally;  nga 
muini  da'adala,  more  than  ten.  Fagani 
maiara. 

dalao  to  have  the  skin  broken;  'aekti  e  dalao, 
the  skin  of  my  leg  is  broken,  abraded. 

dalo  1.  a  littoral  tree  (Calophyllum  inophyl- 
lum);  when  growing  by  the  landing- 
places  the  dalo  is  the  scene  of  taho 
lalamoa,  the  payment  for  men  killed, 
siiu  ola.  also  as  the  place  for  offerings 
to  'akalo;  dalo  ni  me'esxi,  the  paule  tree. 
\'iti  ndilo. 

dalo  2.  uwe  dalo,  to  clear  the  throat  of  mucus. 

daluma  U.,  middle,     daniime  S. 

dama-(ku)  U.,  fellow,  mate.  cf.  sama. 
damaku,  my  fellow;  dama  diu,  of 
unequal  length. 

dama'a  rank,  row,  of  men  in  a  dance. 

damadiu  to  overlap,     cf.  dama. 

damu  U.,  v.  i.,  to  eat  areca  nut;  demtidemu 
loloria,  a  phase  of  the  moon. 
damulaa   areca   nut   and    pepper   leaf   for 

chewing,  idemu,  loo  2.  sdru'e. 
damu'i  tr.,  e  ddmit'ia  hoii  meme  ana  Kiiramo, 
he  chewed  a  ball  of  meme  calling  on 
Kiiramo.  San  Cristoval  lamu;  Lau 
kamu,  to  chew  areca  nut;  Maori  kamn, 
eat;  Samoa  samnsamu,  to  eat  scraps. 

damuteke  an  inclosure  sacred  to  an  'akalo 
inside  a  taoha  or  toohi  round  the  central 
pillar  and  fenced  with  a  heap  of  stones, 
or  outside  the  door  of  dwelling-houses, 
into  which  areca-nut  skins  or  scraps  of 
food  may  be  thrown  without  fear  of  an 
enemy  getting  them  and  using  them  for 
malign  purposes. 

dana  U.,  a  bamboo  for  carrying  water,  holes 
being  made  through  the  joints. 

dani  U.,  to  be  daylight,     ddngi,  S.     hd'idenie'i; 
ahuraa  dani,  to  be  on  the  move  before 
daylight;    apau  dent,  toward  morning; 
e  ddni  ha'ahulee,  next  day;  e  ddni  'oto, 
it  is  day;  marawa  ni  deni,  daybreak, 
da'ideni  daylight,  by  daylight, 
danita'i  haudinga  po'o  ddnita'i.  the  follow- 
ing day. 
danite'ini  tr.,  of  the  daylight  dawning  upon 
a  person.    Florida  dani,  day;    danihagi. 

danu,  da'udenu  S.,  daidenu  U.,  v.  i.,  to  bale, 
to  draw  water;  danu  oku,  to  catch  the 
palolo  worm  with  coconut  nets;  danu 
■wei,  to  bale,  to  draw  water;  oku  denu, 
name  of  a  month,  November,  when  the 
palolo  worm  appears,     idenu. 


danu  (continued). 

danu'i  tr.,   to  bale,   to  whet,   to  sprinkle 
with  water. 

danume-(ku)  middle,  waist:  with  locative  i; 
ddniimeku,  my  waist;  i  denume,  in  the 
midst;  i  denumana  lidnue,  in  the  middle 
of  the  island. 

dangi  1.  S.,  to  be  daylight,  ddni,  U.  hd'iden- 
gie'i.  Wango  deni.  ddngi  hoowa,  the 
next  day;  e  ddngi  'oto,  it  is  day;  e  ddngi 
paro,  as  soon  as  it  was  day;  idengi, 
tomorrow;  susu'c  ddngi,  every  day. 
da 'idengi  by  daylight;  mclu  hide  da' idengi 

ta'ane,  we  arrived  in  daylight. 
dangite'ini  tr.,  of  the  day  dawning  upon  a 
person;  e  dangite'ini  'cmclu,  day  dawned 
upon  us.     Lau  dani, 

dangi  2.  n.,  wind;  ddngi  ka'a  oorii  ike,  there 
was  no  wind  at  all;  hai  tnaai  dengi 
he'iliune,  the  four  winds;  qetolana  ddngi, 
qetohaana  ddngi,  a  wind  gone  down, 
qeto;  ramohaana  ddngi,  a.  gale,  ramo. 
Mota  lang,  Florida  dani,  Polynesian 
langi,  Malay  angin. 

dango  1.  S.,  n.,  a  tree;  dango  mwamwako'a,  a 
prickly  tree;  dango  ni  haka,  papaya; 
dangona  mwakana,  trees  of  the  field; 
hai  dango,  a  log;  hoi  dango,  U.  (Ahi'a 
use),  papaya;  hoi  dango,  S.,  the  kidneys; 
hiiesi  dango,  S.,  the  kidneys;  imiimine 
dango,  root  of  a  tree;  mu  'apai  reu  ana 
mu  dango,  the  leaves  of  the  trees;  rai 
dango,  S.,  a  plank;  takai  dango,  a  flower. 

dango  2.  S.,  n.,  firewood;  roto  dango,  to  cut 
firewood;  hite  dango,  to  split  firewood; 
so'o  dango,  S.,  to  gather  firewood. 
Malagasy  irawo. 

dao  U.,  ape  dao,  to  be  level,  of  country. 

dacha,  daodaoha  U.,  v.  i.,  to  be  ill. 

daohanga  v.  n.,  sickness,  illness.     Wango 
daoha. 

dara  (ku)  n.,  forehead;  daraku,  my  forehead; 
i  na'ona  dara,  on  the  forehead. 

daraha'ini  S.,  v.  tr..  to  fit  a  shell  ring  (halo)  on 
the  arm,  to  impale.     Wango  darasi. 

darasahu  n.,  a  bird,  a  tern  (Sterna  frontalis), 
having  a  white  mark  above  the  bill. 
dara,  sahii  1. 

darasi  S.,  deresi  U.,  to  draw  a  thing  out  of  its 
covering,  to  unsheathe. 

dari  ddri  mwaa,  a  torrent  running  only  in  the 
rains  and  dry  (mwaa)  at  other  times. 
dd'ideri'e. 

daro,  dadaro  1.  v.  i.,  to  hit,  to  beat,  to  strike 
with  a  stick.     2.  v.  i.,  to  cast  a  fishing- 
line  for  garfish  (mwanole),  to  whiff  for 
sardines  with  loohe'o. 
daro'i  tr.,  to  hit  a  person  with  a  stick. 
daronga'ini  U.,  tr.,  to  strike  and  overthrow. 

daru'e  pers.  pron.,  dual  3,  suffixed  to  nouns 
and  to  gerundives  and  to  verbal  nouns 
used  as  prepositions;  'amduriladaru'e, 
they  two  alive;  'amadaru'e,  the  father  of 
those  two;  'upuderu'e,  their  middle. 

dau  1.  V.  tr.  and  v.  i.,  to  do,  to  attempt,  tocause. 
to  make,  to  take,  to  get,  to  obtain;  ddu 
dunge,  ordeal  with  hot  stores.     M.  A., 


17 


DIONGA'I 


dau  1.  (continued). 

p.  212.     dduei4,top\ay  tunes;  ddu  liaahi, 
to  omit;  ddti  hahota.  S.,  to  act  the  hypo- 
crite; ddu  hen,  ordeal  with  hot  stones. 
M.  A.,  p.  210.     ddu  hono.  S.,  to  hinder; 
ddu  lalo  ana,  S.,  to  be  plunged  into  the 
midst  of;  ddu  parasi,  U..  to  hinder;  ddu 
ramoramo'a,  to  do  violence;  ddu  suu'i, 
to  importune;  ddu  wala  {ku).  to  trans- 
gress; mu  ola  nou  dcu  ivalaku  cni.  my 
offenses;  ddu  wet.  to  catch  fish  in  pools 
when  the  river  is  low;  dduddu  poo,  U.. 
to  sacrifice  pigs;  e  ddu  ni  ere,  he  made 
to  speak;  lopo'i  deu,  to  feign;  mala  kire 
manata'i  deue,  as  they  were  wont;  nou 
deu  ni  lae,   I   attempted   to    go;    sulu 
dduddu,  to  make  songs  on. 
daulana  gerund.;  mu  ola  saemu  cni  deuleni, 
the  things  your  heart  is  set  upon  doinj;. 
Wango  dau,  to  touch;  Viti  ndau,  to  do. 
dau  2.  to  come  to  rest,  to  be  stationary  (of 
canoes),     ha'addu.     ddu  suu  weu,  move 
farther  up. 
daunge  v.  n.,  i'o  ni  deunge,  to  be  a  sojourner. 
Lau  dau,  to  reach;  Samoa  lau,  to  anchor; 
Maori /aw.  to  rest. 
daure'i  U.,  v.  i.,  to  put  layers  of  sago-palm  leaf 
sewn  on  reeds  on  a  roof  to  thatch  it. 
daure'ini  tr.,  to  thatch  a  house. 
dawa    (ku)    1.  n.,    the  mouth,     ngidu,  lip,  is 
more  commonly  used  in  Sa'a  for  the 
sake  of  politeness. 
dawa  2.  v.,  to  be  toothless. 

dawari  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  chew  with  the  gums 
because  toothless. 
dede  1.  v.  i.,  to  fill  with  fluid;  dede  ha'ahonu 
ana,   fill  it  full;  kara  dede,  yam  mash 
run  into  a  bamboo  and  cooked  over  a 
fire. 
dede'i  tr.,  to  fill  with  liquid.     Lau  dedengi, 
Florida  dode. 
dede  2.  v.  tr.,   to  drip,  to  protrude;  ahutana 
'oqana  e  dede  'oto,  all  his  bowels  gushed 
out;  'apu  e  dede,  the  blood  dripped. 
dede  3.  dede  qalu,  an  arrow. 
dele  U..  v.  tr.,  to  wrap  up  a  parcel. 
deni  U.,  as  ddni:  e  deni  'oto;  ideni. 
dere  1.  U.,  to  throw  away;     with  'asi  3,  dere 

'asia,  throw  it  away. 
dere  2.  deresi  S.,  dereha'ini  U..  to  insert,  to 

sheathe. 
dere  3.  U.,  dere  unu,  to  get  in  between;  dere 
unu  ana  para,  between  the  pickets  of 
the  fence;  u'i  dere  unu,  to  pierce  with  a 
blow. 
deu  cf.  ddu. 

di  1.  with  adv.  'oto;  'oto  di,  a  long  space  of  time 
either  past  or  to  come,  forever,  from  of 
old;  may  be  reduplicated,  'oto  di  'oto  di, 
forever  and  forever. 
Di  2.  a  bay  in  'OIu  Su'u  just  north  of  A'ulu. 
diana  S.,  diejia  U..  adj.,  good,  proper,  accurate, 
beloved,  ha'adiana.  dd'idiena.  ke  haro 
diana,  when  it  is  well;  ileitana  nga  ola 
sa'a  diana,  nothing  will  be  good;  ke'i 
ne'i  meuta'a  diana,  it  will  become  quite 
strong;  koni  diana,  to  take  good  care 


diana  (continued). 

of;  e  la  'oto  i  diana,  it  is  good;  lado 
diana,  U..  to  explain;  loo  diana.  to  look 
good;  maelona  e  ngdu  diana,  when  ripe 
it  eats  well;  mwane  diena  inau,  my  dear 
friend;  ngdulana  e  diana,  it  is  good  to 
eat;  e  rako  diana,  it  causes  a  pleasant 
sensation;  sama  diana,  to  correspond 
exactly, 
diananga,  dienanga  v.  n..  goodness;  ivalu 

diananga  ineu.  all  my  goods, 
didiana'a,  didiena'a  adj.,  exceedingly  good, 
dianaha  S.,  dienala  U.,  v.  n.,  used  with  ana 
1;  dianaha  ana  mu  i'e,  the  good  fishes; 
Lau  diena,  Tolo  sieni,  Malay  dian,  dien. 
The   addition    of    the    noun    suffix    nga 
seems  to  show   that  diana  is  a  verb; 
possibly  the  na  is  a  verb  suffix  and  dia 
equates  with  Motau'ia,  good,  ha'adiana. 
didi  1.  to  be  small,  undersized,  dwarf. 
didi  2.  to  chop  with  an  axe,  to  carve,  to  quarry; 
didi  hato,  to  make  a  shell  armlet;  didi 
opa  olanga,  discrimination,  partiality. 
didie'inge  v.  n.,  opposition. 
die  n.,  a  club,  long-handled  and  straight,  used 
mostly  on  Big  Malaita.     Lifu  jia,  club. 
Die'i  U.,   Su'u  i   Die'i,   the    landing-place  at 

Mwouta  on  the  east  coast  of  Ulawa. 
dile  S.,  V.  i.,  to  slip,  to  shp  out  of  place,  to  be 
in  vain.     Florida  dila.     'aeku  e  dile,  my 
foot  slipped;  noru  dile,  to  trust  in  vain, 
to  be  disappointed, 
dilehi  tr.,  'a/a  dilehi,  to  bite  at  and  miss. 
dili  1.  n.,  a  dracaena;  dili  alaha,  a  dracaena 
with  bright  red  leaves  used  in  incanta- 
tions, also  in  drawing  lots:  a  leaf  ('apai 
dili)  is  held  in  the  fingers  and  pulled, 
the  test  is  according  as  the  leaf  breaks 
easily    or    not:    the    process    is    called 
hdhuto'o  and  ilala. 
dili  2.  n.,  mwa'a  dili  salo,  a  snake  observed  as 

an  omen.     M.  A.,  p.  221. 
dimwe  n.,  a  tree  fern. 

dinge  S.,  dinga  U.,  a  day.  ddngi,  ddni.  deni. 
ana  nga' eta  dinge.  on  another  day; 
hd'idinge  si'iri,  to-day;  nga  hd'idinge, 
S.,  nga  haudinga,  U.,  a  day;  mu  dinge 
hunge  e  liueu.  many  days  passed  over  me. 
Motu  dina.  sun,  day;  Viti  5«nao,  day. 
dingadinga  U..  to  be  clear  (of  voice);  walaku 

e  dingadinga,  my  voice  is  clear, 
dingale  a  littoral  tree  whose  hard  wood  is  used 

in  making  paddles. 

dio  V.  i..  to  swoop  (of  pigeons),  to  jump  from  an 

eminence;  dio  hunu.  to  swoop;  dio  hunu 

ni  sae,  to  be  faint-hearted;  'oke  dio  hou. 

leap  down;  urou  e  dio  i'ano.  the  pigeon 

swooped  down. 

diohi  tr.,  to  swoop  down  on;  diohi  malau, 

name  of  a  canoe  in  a  story,  literally. 

swoop  down  on  the  islands.     Wango  dio. 

diodioru  to  chatter  (of  uisi,  a  bird  observed 

as  an  omen.     M.  A.,  p.  221). 
dionga'i  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  squally  (of  wind),     dio. 
2.  n.,  a  wind  squall. 
dionga'ini  tr.,  e  dionga'ini  'emelii.  a  squall 
descended  upon  us. 


DIU 


i8 


diu  1.  to  be  uneven  in  length;  daina  diu,  to 
overlap;  maditt,  overlapping;  adiii,  to 
be  out  of  joint.  Wango  diu,  to  excel; 
Lau  madiu,  different. 

diu  2.  U.,  to  carve,  to  chip  with  blows. 

diuna  U..  adj.,  out  of  joint;  'aekii  e  diuna,  my 
leg  is  dislocated,     din. 

do  \-.  i.,  to  gather,  to  pluck;  do  rou,  to  pluck 
leaves  for  use  in  wrapping  up  kara, 
grated  yam  cooked  in  leave*  r  native 
oven.  ora. 

dodo  1.  to  sink,  to  drown,  to  be  composed,  to 
be  deep,  ha'adodo.  ' as i  dodo  hide  i  one, 
deep  water  right  in  to  shore;  sae  dodo, 
dodoHga  ni  sae.  ease  of  mind;  kara  dodo, 
grated  yam  run  into  a  bamboo  and 
cooked  over  embers, 
dodoa'ini  tr.,  to  be  of  good  comfort  con- 
cerning a  person;  saeku  e  dodoa'ini  'omii, 
my  mind  is  easy  about  j-ou.  2.  to  dip 
into  a  liquid:  to'oni  kire  dodoa'inie,  a 
cloth  dipped. 
dodonga'i  partic,  S.,  crouched  down. 
Wango  dodo,  to  sink;  Motu  dodo,  to 
subside. 

dodo  2.  dodo  'iisu,  the  columella  of  a  shell  used 
as  a  gimlet. 

dodonga  a  piece,  a  bit. 

dola  used  in  the  reduplicated  form  dodola, 
various,  mixed,  of  different  sorts. 
dolali  tr.,  to  commingle,  to  dilute,  to  insert; 
diiti  dolalie,  put  some  with  it;  hele  dolali. 
to  take  some  of  one  thing  and  some  of 
another,  to  vary;  ngaini  dolali'i,  one 
here  and  there  among  them.  Wango 
dorari,  to  mix. 

dolosi  S.,  V.  tr.,  to  question;  e  dolosieu,  he  asked 
my  name;  e  dolosie  aku,  he  questioned 
me  about  it;  ke  mdni  dolosie  satada,  let 
him  ask  all  their  names. 
dolosinge  v.  n.,  questioning. 
dolosila-(ku)  gerund. 

domana,  domani,  as  if,  like,  just  as  if;  e  domana 
nou  ka'a  lae  ike,  it  is  as  if  I  had  never 
gone;  ke  'o'o  domani  hune,  shall  be  as 
it  were  a  net.     na  5,  ni  5. 

domu,  do'udomu  S.,  to  fall  (used  of  persons 
only);  Domu  wi  mih,  Fall-from-Coconut, 
a  nickname. 

done  S.,  doni  IJ.,  a  prickly  shrub  growing  in 
old  gardens. 

donga  1.  n..  a  pair,  a  couple:  the  definite  article 
vga  may  be  prefixed;  nga  ro  donga,  two 
pair;  dongai  niu,  S.,  donga  ni  niu,  U.,  a 
couple  of  coconuts  tied  together  with 
strips  of  their  husk;  e  'asi  tolola  donga 
ni  mwiii,  wearing  a  couple  of  bags 
apiece;  e  ro  donga,  two  couple. 

donga  2.  v.  tr.,  to  lengthen,  to  draw  out,  to 
splice. 

dongadongaa«  U.,  dongadonga'a  niqe'u,  the  skull. 

Dora  the  name  of  families  of  chiefs  in  Little 
Malaita. 

dora'i  v.  tr.,  to  withhold;  hele  dora'ie  ha'alunge, 
to  break  a  promise. 

doro  hot;  used  in  compounds;  ha'adoro,  to  heat 
up  food;  madoro.  hot. 


dudu,  dududu  U.,  v.  i.,  to  move  position;  dudu 
7nei,  case  up;  dudu  weu,  ease  off;  pua 
dududu  i  Kela,  the  areca  palm  that 
drew  toward  Kela;  walo  dududu,  elastic. 
duduhi  tr.,  to  approach.  Wango  duuri, 
Florida  dudu,  to  be  near. 

dududu  U.,  large  glass  beads;  wili  dududu,  to 
string  beads. 

duidui  yellow  (vinegar)  ants  with  painful  bite. 

dumuli  S.,  hele  dumuli,  to  repress,  to  hold  down. 

dunge  S.,  dunga  U.,  fire,  firestick,  matches: 
na  5  may  be  suffixed;  dungana  e  diana, 
its  fire  is  good,  it  burns  well  (of  fire- 
wood); dunge  ko  mea,  the  fire  is  fierce; 
dunge  ko  qe'u,  the  fire  smokes;  dunga 
ni  heu,  U.,  to  undergo  the  ordeal  of 
fire;  dunge  ni  raa,  a  burning-glass;  dati 
dunge,  S.,  to  undergo  the  ordeal  of  fire; 
esoesohana  dunge,  the  fiame  of  the  fire; 
He  dunge,  to  obtain  fire  by  friction;  koru 
dunge,  to  make  a  fire;  maai,  S.  (maani 
U.),  dunge,  a  match;  niwai  keni  ana 
dunga  rakanga,  women  who  make  too 
big  fires;  mu  meameahai  dunge,  tongues 
of  fire;  mu  melahai  dunge,  flames  of 
fire;  qd'uli  dunge,  smoke;  ruru  dunge, 
to  build  a  fire;  m,u  si'i  dunge,  sparks; 
wdiwei  dunge,  to  wave  a  firestick.  Tolo 
suna,  Efate  fanga,  Malay  panas,  hot, 
Malagasy  fana. 

duru  1.  V.  tr.,  to  place  in  a  store  room  (of 
yams).  2.  a  store  chamber,  cupboard, 
generally  a  section  of  the  dwelline-house; 
laelaei  duru,  to  go  behind  the  partition, 
a  sign  of  close  acquaintanceship. 

du'u  U.,  v.  i.,  to  move  position,  cf.  dudu, 
su'u  6;  du'u  met,  ease  up;  du'u  weu,  ease 
off. 

du'una  v.  tr.,  to  move  up  in  position;  'o  du'unaa 
paro,  move  it  on  a  little. 

duuduu  adv.,  from  time  to  time,  at  intervals. 

du'u'e  backward,  to  go  backward,     du'u. 

du'uhe'ini  U.,  tr.,  to  destroy,     su'uhe'ini,  S. 


e  1.  pers.  pron.,  sing.  3;  he,  she,  it.  (a)  fol- 
lowing inge'ie  or  nge'ie  and  supplying 
the  place  of  a  verbal  particle:  nge'ie  e 
lae,  he  went;  inge'ie  nge'ie  e  lae,  it  was 
he  who  went.  Following  nouns  used 
with  verb  in  past  tense:  nemo  e  nemo, 
the  rain  it  rained.  With  nouns  having 
a  collective  force:  mu  wei  e  kone,  the 
waters  were  out  in  flood ;  kira  maeloonga 
hunie  esi  masa,  his  enemies  were  put  to 
shame.  With  interrogative  plural  pro- 
noun: kiralei,  who;  kiralei  ni  e  'untie, 
who  said  so?  (b)  By  itself  as  subject 
of  verbs:  e  'unue  ta'ane,  he  said  so.  As 
meaning  "there  is":  e  ka'a  ola,  there  is 
nothing;  e  sato  'olo,  it  is  fine  weather. 

e  2.  S.,  contraction  for  ie\  haahe  for  haahie, 
about  it;  pe'e  for  pe'ie;  nga  taa  ni  'oko 
ngarase,  what  are  you  crying  for?  par'ie 
here,  for  paro'ie. 

'e  3.  U.,  verbal  particle;  in  pronunciation  'e 
is  joined  to  the  governing  pronoun.     In 


19 


ERE 


'e  3.  (continued). 

the  sense  of.  let,  that  it  may:  ne'e  lae 
ka'u,  let  me  go.  Used  with  a  negative: 
e  qale  ola  ne'e  loosia,  there  is  nothing 
that  I  saw,  1  saw  nothing.  With  the 
preposition  muni,  as  subjunctive  or 
optative:  nau  ha'alu  muni  ne'e  lae,  I 
promised  that  I  would  go;  jnuni  'e 
lae  niai,  let  him  come;  'e  'ue,  how? 
mwane  'e'ue,  why  not?  Sa'a  ke.  cf. 
qa'ike,  ha'ike. 

*e  4.  V.  p.,  used  with  numerals  and  with  nile; 
'e  rue,  two;  'e'  'olii,  three;  'enile,  'enila, 
how  many,  'e  3.  Florida  e,  Maori  e, 
ehia,  how  many?   Epi  ve  vio,  how  many? 

'e  5.  suffixed  to  poss.  1  and  2  in  sing.  1  and  2, 
added  to  ru  in  i'emeru'e,  kereru'e. 

e'a  U.,  pers.  pron.,  sing.  3,  and  verbal  particle 
'a. 

e'asi  U..  e'a,  si.  illative. 

*e'e  S.  1.  areca  nut  (Areca  catechu);  hoi  'e'e, 
the  nut  of  the  areca  palm;  mu  'e'e,  areca- 
palm  trees;  'e'e  altaa.  wild  areca  nut; 
eaten  only  occasionally  in  Little  Malaita, 
but  generally  in  Big  Malaita. 

'e'e  S.  2.  to  be  open,  enlarged;  wawaku  ko  'e'e 
haahi  'omit,  my  mouth  is  enlarged 
against  you. 

'e'eli  L'.,  v.  i.,  to  go  astray,  to  swerve,    ha'a'e'eli 
'e'elinga  v.  n.,  a  going  astray. 

'e'engo  S.,  v.  i.,  to  chatter,  to  disturb  by 
chattering. 

'ehi'e  cf.  'dlii'e. 

eho  n..  a  round  ear  ornament  of  clam  shell  with 
a  pattern  cut  like  the  lines  of  a  compass 
and  radiating  from  the  center;  it  is  hung 
below  the  ear  by  a  string  through  a  hole 
in  the  center. 

ehoeho  S.,  to  prate,  to  be  a  tattler;  wawa 
ehoelio,  to  boast. 

ehu  native  jews-harp;  e  sare  lo'o  ehu,  he  wants 
a  jews-harp. 

'ei  1.  cf.  'at  1. 

e'i  2.  tr.  sufHx  to  verbs,  participial  ending. 
cf.  a'i  3. 

'Ei'ei  U.,  a  water  spring  at  Mwado'a,  Ulawa. 

e'ini  tr.  suffix  to  verbs,     cf.  d'ini. 

eke  the  white  cockatoo,  used  of  other  white 
birds;  ao  eke,  the  white  egret. 

'ele  U..  kele  S.,  adj.,  and  adv.,  little,  somewhat, 
just  now;  'ele  poo.  a  little  pig;  a  'ele  ola, 
little  So-and-so;  nau  si  'ele  lae  mat,  I 
have  just  come;  e  'asi  'ele  diena,  it  is  a 
little  better. 

eleele  1.  real,  proper,  good;  mu  eleelei  wala,  S., 
mwa  eleele  huu  ni  wala,  U..  real  words: 
used  also  of  yams  (m/»»)  and  of  musical 
instruments  {du  3). 

eleele  (na)  2.  n.,  top  shoots  of  trees,  etc.;  lo'o 
eleclena,  its  tip. 

'elekale  U..  a  child;  'elekale  inau.  my  child; 
'elekale  werewere,  an  infant. 

*Ele  maosi,  the  landing-place  in  the  reef  at 
Ngorangora. 

'eli,  'eli'eli  v.  tr.,  to  dig;  'eli  talana,  to  dig  his 
grave, 
'elinga  v.  n.,  digging,  yam  digging,  harvest. 


'eli,  'eli'eli  (contmucd). 
'elila-(na)  gerund, 
'elihe'ini  tr.,  to  dig  post  holes,  foundations. 

etc.;  ko  'elihe'inie  kokoro,  dug  it  deep, 
'elihe'i  v.  i..  noko  'elihe'i,  I  am  digging  post 
holes.     Mota  gil,   Malay  gali,   Borneo 
kali,  Maori  keri. 

'elu  1.  cf.  'olu,  three;  suffix  limiting  the  meaning 
and  added  to  (a)  pers.  pron..  pi.  3: 
ikira'elu,  kira'elu.  (b)  sufT.  pron..  rd, 
rd'elu.  (c)  in  Ulawa  to  stem,  ka  form- 
ing pers.  pron.,  pi.  1.  incl..  ka'elu  we. 

'elu  2.  used  in  Tolo  for  melu  we. 

'emelu  pers.  pron.,  pi.  1.  excl.;  we,  more  limited 
and  particular  in  meaning  than  i'emi. 

'emere,  'emere'i,  'emeru'e  S.  1.  pers.  pron., 
dual  1,  excl.,  we  two.  2.  pers.  pron., 
dual  1,  suffixed  to  verbs  and  preposi- 
tions as  object. 

'emi  S.,  pers.  pron.,  pi.  1,  excl.  (a)  as  subject, 
we.  (b)  with  the  full  form  i'emi;  i'emi 
emi  lae  mat,  we  have  come,  (c)  suffixed 
as  object  to  verbs  and  prepositions. 
Florida  garni,  Malay  kami. 

emu  cf.  dmti  3. 

'emu'e,  'emu'i  S.,  cf.  'dmu'e. 

ena  S.,  demonstrative,  that;  possibly  e  \,  Jia  4. 
ngeena.  ha'ike  ena.  not  that,  not  so; 
mango  ena,  finished  that,  that  ends  it; 
nge  manikulu' anga  ineu  ena  ka'a  ola 
ike,  the  glory,  mine  I  mean,  is  nothing. 

eni  cf.  dni. 

'enite  S..  'enita  U.,  how  many,  so  many,  a  few; 
the  'e  4  is  detachable,  see  nite;  the  suff. 
pron.  na  may  be  added,  ha'anite; 
'enite  'ala  haidinge,  just  a  few  days  ago; 
'enile  lusu,  what  size  (of  a  canoe),  lit., 
how  many  ribs;  'enilana  'oto  'ie,  the 
how-manyeth  is  this,  what  number; 
awala  maia  'enita,  how  many  over  ten; 
mana  'enite,  what  unit  above  ten;  ta'e 
'enita  He,  just  a  few. 

eno,  enoeno  to  lie  down;  eno  taalenga,  to  lie 
on  the  back, 
enonga  v.  n..  a  lying  down,  reclining, 
enohi  tr.,  to  lie  in,  to  lie  on;  e  enohie  hiilile, 

he  lay  on  a  mat. 
enohilana  gerund. 
ha'aenohi  causative.  Nguna  one,  Motu  eno. 

epa  1.  glandular  swellings  in  the  armpits  and 
groins.     2.  to  have  such  swellings. 

epa  3.  V.  i..  toto  epa  hdnue,  to  cleanse  well  the 
village  by  a  sacrifice.     M.  A.,  p.  137. 
epasi  tr..  to  spread  over.     Mota  epa,  a  mat. 

'epu'i  hd'i'epu'i,  to  propitiate. 

'epule  cf.  'dpide. 

ere,  ereere  1.  v.  i..  tospeak,  to  talk;  with  poss.  3. 
to  forbid,  to  bid.  to  order,  U.  ha'aere. 
ere  ana  nga  'inoni,  to  forbid  a  person; 
ere  ani  h'u  honu,  to  boast;  ere  'asi,  U., 
to  reproach,  to  vilify;  ere  'autala.  to 
speak  in  vain;  ere  ni  ha'apu  tako'ie, 
swore  by  him;  ere  haahi,  to  betroth,  to 
bespeak  a  wife;  ere  hd'ihonoa'i,  to  curse; 
ere  hd'isuru,  to  have  altercations;  ere 
hd'itohe,  to  contradict;  ere  ni  hedi 
olanga,   to   take  an  oath;   ere   laelae'i. 


ERE 


20 


ere,  ereere  1  (continued). 

talk  by  the  wayside;  ere  lole  ana 
ma'unge,  to  talk  confusedly  from  fear; 
ere  luu'i,  U.,  to  forbid;  ere  maahoosi,  to 
boast;  ere  maleledi,  to  rail  at;  ere 
mama'ila'a  ana,  to  speak  despisingly; 
ere  mamakinanga.  to  reproach;  nou  ere 
■pele,  I  spoke  inadvertently;  ere  raradi'e, 
correction;  ere  raraniaa,  insolent  speech; 
ere  ni  sae,  to  say  with  the  heart;  ere 
ta'anga,  plain  speech;  ere  taha'ira'a,  to 
speak  plainly;  ere  lalihe,  to  defend  one- 
self when  accused,  to  deny;  nou  ere 
taliheku,  I  made  my  defense;  ere 
talaa'ini,  to  curse;  ere  loli,  to  revile; 
ere  to'o,  to  be  correct  in  one's  statement; 
'o  ere  lo'o,  verily;  ere  uqe,  to  talk 
enviously;  ere  warawara'a,  clamorous; 
lopo'i  ere,  to  deceive  with  words;  toll 
ereere,  to  cease  speaking. 
erenga  v.  n.,  speech. 

eresi  U.,  tr.,  to  plan  in  speech,  to  decide 
upon;  hti'o  ni  pesi  koro  eresia,  the  war 
expedition  over  the  bows  which  they 
planned.     Motu  erena,  speech. 

ere,  ereere  2.  v.  tr.,  to  make  up  in  a  roll,  to 

coil. 

ereereta  v.  n.,  a  roll,  a  coil;  mu  ereerelai 

usuusu,  the  roll  of  the  book.     Lau  ereere. 

ereerea'ile  S.,  ereere'a  U.,  ereereta'a  U., 

rolled  up  in  a  coil,  round,  disk-shaped. 

ereha'ini  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  set  alight,  to  light  a  torch. 
ereha'i  partic,  lighted.     Lau  ere.  fire. 

'erete'a  adj.,  whitish,  pale;  hole  sa'a  hole  wa 
nga  me'i  ola  'erete'a  ke'i  i'o  i  sapeka,  the 
paddles  must  not  rattle  nor  anything 
of  light  color  be  about  our  bodies. 
Maori  kiritea,  fair,  tea,  white;  Samoa 
tea,  white. 

ero,  eroero  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  deceive,  to  tell  lies. 

ha'aero.     ko  ero,  he  is  lying;  mwane  'o 

eroau,  do  not  deceive  me;  a  eroero,  the 

deceiver. 

eronga  v.  n.,  lying,  deceit;  ko  lehie  eronga, 

in  travail  with  lying. 
erola-(ku)  gerund.,  erolana  walumalau,  the 

deceits  of  the  world. 
erota'ini  tr.,  to  deceive. 

esi  1.  e  1.  si,  illative;  est  kele  loto,  he  has  just 
washed. 

esi  U.  2.  n.,  a  ghost,  considered  harmless. 
cf.  'akalo. 

eso,  esoeso  S.,  v.  i.,  to  flare  up,  to  flame,  to 
burn,  ha'aeso.  sae  esoeso,  to  have 
indignation. 
esoesoha  v.  n.,  flame;  used  with  poss.  3; 
esoesohaana  dunge,  the  flame  of  the  fire; 
esoesohai  dunge,  flame  of  fire. 
esolana  gerund,  its  flaming. 

'eta  S.,  numeral,  one;  used  with  definite  article 
nga  and  denotes  another,  different,  'e 
4,  for  ta  cf.  ta'a  2.  nga  'eta  ola;  nga 
'eta  mu  'inoni,  various  people;  'eta 
muini,  some;  maholo  'eta  mwane  e 
ha'atau  tie,  while  the  other  was  yet  far 
off;  'eta  ina'o,  to  be  in  the  lead. 


'eta  (continued). 

'etana  ordinal,  first,  the  first  time;  'elana 
ngaile,  'etana  ngaini,  the  first  one. 
Malay  sa,  one;  Mota  tea,  indefinite 
pronoun. 

ete  ha'aete,  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  importune,  to  be  per- 
sistent. 

eu  ddu  eu,  to  play  tunes,     du  3. 

eueu  pepe  i  eueti,  a  butterfly. 

ewa  U.,  to  brandish  a  spear;  ewa  lulu,  a  measure 
of  a  yard  and  a  half. 

ewe,  eweewe  1.  v.  i.,  to  have  water  in;  e  ewe 
ta'ane,  it  has  water  in  it  (said  of  a 
bamboo).  2.  to  be  in  a  liquid  state. 
3.  n.,  flood;  ewe  e  ulungaa  mdiirihaaku, 
the  floods  have  covered  over  my  soul; 
ere  koni,  to  gather  together,  of  flood 
water. 
eweewe  (na)  n.,  juice;  mii  eweeivei  ola, 
liquid. 

H 

ha  termination  of  verbal  nouns:  mduri,  to  live; 
mdurihe,  life. 

haa  1.  shell-money  discs  made  from  the  red 
hinge  of  the  oyster  shell  {roma)\  the 
chief  places  of  manufacture  are  Langa- 
langa  in  Big  Malaita  and  Makira  in 
San  Cristoval.  The  Malaita  shells  are 
obtained  in  the  Mara  Masiki  Channel. 
The  discs  are  always  strung  on  string 
and  the  value  is  proportionate  to  the 
length  of  the  string  and  the  smallness 
of  the  discs,  'eyiile  haa,  how  many 
moneys?  to  make  a  haa  four  strings 
of  shell  discs  are  used,  the  strings  are 
kept  together  by  being  passed  through 
strips  of  tortoise  shell  hapa.  cf. 
huresoso;  haa  i  mwc'i,  money  in  the 
bag,  earnest  money,  security  paid  to 
the  parents  of  a  girl  to  insure  getting 
her  as  a  bride  for  some  lad;  haa  pdine, 
large  money  discs,  not  considered  of 
much  value;  haa  ni  siwe,  blood  money; 
haa  tahanga,  a  sum  of  money  consisting 
of  four  strings  of  haa  tied  together,  each 
string  a  fathom  long,  the  strings  are 
separated  by  strips  of  tortoise  shell; 
haa  ni  Ulawa,  small  and  valuable  shell- 
money  discs,  often  strung  in  a  kind  of 
crochet  pattern  with  malo  and  huresoso 
added  to  complete  the  design;  haa  ni 
wili,  tribute  money;  hdu  haa.  red  brain 
coral;  hune  haa,  to  display  bridal 
moneys  at  the  bride's  home;  ito  ni  haa, 
a  bunch  of  money;  lai  loosi  haa.  to  go  and 
inspect  the  money  given  for  a  bride; 
tnwaritei  haa,  a  strand  of  money;  sulu 
haa,  to  collect  money;  wili  haa,  to  thread 
shell  money;  maapoii,  a  measure  of  shell 
money,  from  finger  tips  to  elbow; 
to'ohaa  money,  both  shell  and  teeth 
(dogs  and  porpoise).     Wango  haa. 

ha'a  2.  a  platform  for  storing  yams;  ha'a  ni 
'arasi,  ark  of  the  covenant;  hd'u  ha'a,  to 
tie  the  laths  on  a  platform,  to  make  a 


21 


HA'AHIRU 


ha'a  2  (continued). 

platform;  laloi  ha'a,  within  the  garner. 
Maori  whala. 
ha'angi  v.  tr.,  to  place  yams,  etc.,  on  a  plat- 
form in  order  to  store  them,  to  put  a 
dried  coconut  on  a  platform  so  that  it 
may  shoot.     Samoa /a/a,"  Mixo  whata. 

ha'a  3.  e.xclam.,  oh. 

ha'a  4.  causative  prefi.x  applied  to  verbs  and 
less  frequently  to  nouns;  it  may  be 
duplicated  for  emphasis;  in  Ulawa  when 
ha'a  is  applied  to  a  word  beginning  with 
a  one  a  is  dropped.  Mota  vaga, 
Maori  whaka. 

ha'a  5.  prefixed  to  cardinals  to  form  multipli- 
catives;  ha'arue,  twice;  to  hunge, 
ha'ahunge,  to  multiply;  to  nite,  ha'aniie, 
how  many;   to  tail,  ha'atau,  far. 

ha'aado  v.  tr.,  to  apportion. 

ha'a'ae  v.  i.,  to  be  fleeting,  vain. 

ha'aahala'ini  v.  tr.,  to  provoke. 

ha'aahu  v.  tr.,  to  complete  a  number,  to  make 
the  tally,  to  round  off;  ha'aahu  mae,  to 
finish  fighting,  to  cease  hostilities. 

ha'a'ai'aa  v.  tr.,  to  destroy,  to  cause  to  dis- 
appear. 

ha'aakaurisi  v.  tr.,  to  provide  a  person  with 
a  thing. 

ha'aalaha  v.  tr.,  to  exalt,  to  conduct  the  cere- 
mony of  a  chief's  coming  of  age. 

ha'a'aliu  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  turn  back,  to  turn 
around,  to  convert  in  mind. 
ha'a'aliula-(ku)  gerund. 

ha'a'ango  v.  i.,  to  tie  up  creepers,  yam  vines, 
to  cause  them  to  twine, 
ha'a'angohi  tr. 
ha'a'angohila-(na,   ni)    gerund. 

ha'a'apara'ini  v.  tr.,  to  surprise,  to  startle. 

ha'aape  1.  v.  tr.,  to  make  shipwreck  of. 

ha'aapenga'ini     tr.     2.     ha'aape    sae,     to 
encourage. 

ha'a'apu  1.  v.  i..  to  make  an  oath.  2.  v.  tr., 
to  put  a  person  or  thing  under  tabu. 
3.  v.  tr.,  to  forbid. 

ha'a'apunge  v.  n.,  a  vow  to  kill  in  revenge. 

ha'aasa  ere  ha'aasa,  to  take  an  oath. 

ha'aasa'i  to  stultify;  ha'aasa'ie  hurunge,  to 
run  to  no  purpose. 

ha'aasire'ini  v.  tr.,  to  scare,  to  frighten. 

ha'aawala  v.  i.,  to  tally,  to  count  by  tens;  nou 
ha'aawala  ha'aniie,  how  many  tens  have 
I  counted? 

ha'adada  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  smooth,  to  flatten  out. 

ha'adahe  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  be  adzed  down  or 
to  be  hoed. 

ha'adahi  1.  to  cause  a  person  to  be  fortunate, 
to  thank,  to  make  presents  to,  U-  2. 
when  at  sea  to  apostrophize  the  various 
islands  in  sight,  the  phrases  being, 
Sa'a:  »  sapena  i  Sa'a  ni  menu,  the  con- 
figuration of  Sa'a  ni  menu;  Ulawa: 
i  sapena  i  Ulawa  e  rara;  Ugi:  «  sapena 
i  Dara  ahu'i  niu;  San  Cristoval :  i  sapena 
i  Aru  ni  i'e. 
ha'adahinga  U.,  v.  n.,  blessing,  happiness. 

ha'ada'i  S.,  partic,  open,  plain;  soi  ha'ada'i 
ada,  call  them  out, 


ha'ada'inge  soi  ha'adainge,  church  (late  use). 

ha'adau  v.  tr.,  to  bring  a  canoe  to  a  standstill, 
to  cause  to  be  stationary,  to  assign  a 
position  to  a  person. 

ha'adiana  S.,  ha'adiena  L'..  to  do  good  to,  to 
bless. 

ha'adodo  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  sink,  to  drown, 
to  dip. 

ha'adoro  v.  tr.,  to  heat  up  food. 

ha'a'e'eli  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  divert,  to  cause  to  go 
out  of  the  way. 

ha'aenohi  v.  tr.,  to  lay  down  a  child,  to  cradle. 

ha'aere  v.  tr.,  to  scold,  to  wrangle, 
ha'aereere  U.,  to  engage  in  talk. 

ha'aero  w  tr.,  to  make  jests  upon,  to  jest,  to 
deceive. 
ha'aeronga  v.  n.,  a  jest. 

ha'aeso  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  flame,  to  burn. 

ha'aete  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  importune,  to  be  persist- 
ent with. 

ha'aha'alu  S.  1.  v.  tr.,  to  renew,  to  make  afresh. 
2.  V.  i.,  to  make  a  covenant. 

ha'ahai  four  times. 

ha'ahalahala  v.  tr.,  to  make  firm,  to  confirm. 

ha'ahanenga'ini  1.  v.  tr.,  to  lust  after.  2. 
v.  tr.,  to  exalt. 

ha'aha'olu  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  renew,  to  make  afresh. 
ha'aha'alu,  S. 

ha'ahaora  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  abase,  to  humble. 
ha'ahaora'ala-(ku)   gerund. 

haahe  saekii  e  lae  haahe,  I  forgot  It.     cf.  haahi. 

ha'ahehe  1.  v.  tr.,  to  pretend  not  to  possess, 
to  be  niggardly  over. 

ha'ahehe  2.  v.  i.,  to  abound,  to  be  in  abun- 
dance,    honu  ha'ahehe. 

haahi  (au)  prep.,  because  of,  around,  for,  on 
account  of:  haahie  contracts  to  haahe. 
haahie  noko  lae,  because  of  my  going; 
haahi  taa,  because  of  what,  why;  dan 
haahi,  to  omit;  haahird  diana,  on  the 
good;  hatonga'i  wala  haahi,  to  accuse; 
inemauri  haahi,  to  rule  over;  lau  haahi, 
to  make  a  defense  in  words;  luhe  haahi, 
to  be  surety  for;  luqe'i  lalawa  haahi,  to 
give  a  feigned  excuse;  mwa'e  haahi,  of 
those  who  clap  their  hands  at  dances; 
mwana  haahi,  to  make  pretence;  ni'i 
nime  haahi,  to  lay  hands  on;  noko  haahi, 
to  keep  watch  over;  sae  haahi,  parsi- 
monious; salo  haahi,  to  make  a  sign  to  a 
person;  wdi  e  lama  haahi  tie  kolune 
niwakano,  water  covered  the  face  of 
the  earth, 
haahaahi  v.  tr.,  to  prize;  nga  me'i  ola  saena 

kr  haahaahe.  a  thing  his  heart  prized. 
haahila-(ku)  gerund.;  mwananga haahilana, 
a  cloaking,    glossing    over;     ani    to'oni 
haahilada,  in  clothing  themselves.     Lau 
fafi. 

ha'ahi'ito'o  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  cause  hurt  to.  punish. 
hi'ito'o. 

ha'ahili,  ha'ahilihili  v.  tr.,  to  abstain  from 
certain  foods,  to  fast. 

ha'ahirerue  in  front  of  them. 

ha'ahiru  v.  i..  to  be  slow,  behindhand, 
ha'ahirunge  v.  n..  delay. 
ha'ahirusi  tr.,  to  be  a  hindrance  to. 


HA'AHITE 


ha'ahite  n.,  an  ovenful  of  food. 

ha'ahiu  seven  times. 

ha'ahola   v.   tr.,    to  create;   ?nu   ola   ho'ahola. 
created   things. 
ha'ahola'i  tr.,  to  inaugurate.     Lau  fafola. 

ha'aholi  v.  i..  to  expose  for  sale,  to  conduct 
operations  for  barter;  used  with  poss.  3, 
meaning  to  make  merchandise  of. 
ha'aholinge'ini  tr.,  to  put  up  for  sale. 

ha'aholo  adv.,  crosswise,  transverse!}-,  astride, 
aslant.     F"agani  fagaforo. 

ha'ahonu  v.  tr.,  to  fill. 

ha'ahou  v.  !.,  to  proclaim. 

ha'ahoulana  gerund.,  a  representation  of. 
ha'ahoule'ini  tr..  to  proclaim. 

ha'ahulee  U.,  n.,  morning;  i  ha'ahulee,  e  ddni 
ha'ahidee,  tomorrow,  in  the  morning; 
hai  ha'ahulee,  a  morning;  -muni  'e  hara 
ha'ahulee,  as  soon  as  it  is  daylight;  sulia 
mwa  hai  ha'ahulee,  every  morning. 

ha'ahule'ita-(ku)  S.,  a  reaching  up  to,  attain- 
ing, requiting. 

ha'ahuni  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  be  contrary  to,  in 
opposition  to. 

ha'ahunge  S.   1.   adv..  frequcnth-.     2.   v.   tr., 
to  make  many,  to  multiply. 
ha'ahunga'a  adv.,  frequently. 

ha'ahu'o  to  be  in  good  time.  earl\-  afoot  in  the 
morning;  'omii  ke  ha'ahu'o.  be  here 
early  in  the  morning. 

ha'ahute  to  beget,  of  either  parent. 

ha'ahutanga  v.   n.,   birth,   generation. 
ha'ahutela-(ku)    gerund.,   begetting,   being 
begotten. 

ha'ahuu  1.  adv.,  complete;  awala  ha'ahuu,  a 
full  ten.     2.  w  tr.,  to  complete  the  tally. 

ha'ahuu'e  adj.,  faithful,  tried;  complete, 
tahanga  ha'ahuu'a,  U.,  a  full  fathom  (of 
money);  with  suffixed  pron.  3,  sing.; 
ha'ahuu'ana  mu  ola.  S.,  mwa  ha' ahuu' ana 
ola.  U.,  real  things,  the  correct  things; 
e  ha'ahuu'ana  'oto.  it  is  quite  the  real 
thing;  with  genitive  /,  wk  ha'ahuu'ei  ola. 
the  real  things, 
ha'ahuu'e-fku)  ha'ahiu'emu,  your  own  self. 
ha'ahuu'ani  U.,  adv.,  altogether,  com- 
pletely. 

ha'a'i'i  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  charge  undulj-  for,  to  put 
on  a  big  price. 

ha'a'inoni  v.  tr.,  to  justify  oneself,  to  find 
excuses. 

ha'ainuhi  S.  1.  v.  tr.,  to  give  drink  to,  to  cause 
to  drink.     2.  to  drown. 

ha'ai'osi  v.  tr.  1.  to  cause  to  sit  down.  2.  used 
of  ha'amalaohu,  to  cause  to  undergo  the 
novitiate.  M.  A.,  p.  234.  a  Wale- 
ha'aodo  ngaini  ka'a  ha'ai'ose  i  one,  no 
one  caused  Wateha'aodo  to  be  initiated 
down  at  the  beach. 

ha'aisi  ad\'.,  at  all,  precedes  the  verb. 

ha'aisita'anga'ini  .s.,  ha'aisitahanga'ini  U., 
V.  tr.,  to  cause  to  emerge,  to  conduct  out. 

ha'akakahuru  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  surprise,  used  with 
poss.  3. 

ha'akale  v.  tr.,  to  wait  for,  to  watch,  to  keep 
an  eye  on. 

ha'akauni  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  light  (of  fire, 
pipe,  etc.). 


ha'akena'i  U.,  exclam.,  not  used  before  women. 

cf.  he'asikena'i. 
ha'akeneta'i  V.,  ha'akineta'i   S.,   to  observe, 

to  have  a  care  for.  to  keep. 
ha'akeneta'ini  U..  ha'akineta'ini  S.,  tr. 
ha'akeni  v.  tr.,  to  marry  a  girl  off,  to  conduct 

a  betrothal, 
ha'akolo  U.,  v.  i.,  to  be  strange,  foreign;  mo  ola 

ha'akolo,  strange  things. 
ha'akoru  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  gather  people  together. 
ha'akorunga  v.  n.,  ha'akorunga  ni  'inoni,  a 

gathering  of  men. 
ha'akuku  U.  1.  to  hang  up, to  suspend.     2.  to 

lower. 
ha'alaa  S.,  adv.,  used  of  conditional  affirmation, 

the  pronoun  e  coalesces;  a  ola,  ha'alaa, 

So-and-.so  I  grant  you;  kire  ko  le  urine 

ha'alaa  e  diana,  were  they  to  do  so  it 

would  be  good;  ko  nemo,  ha'alaa,  if  it 

rains  granted;  su'uri  'unue  ha'alae  diana, 

had  you  not  mentioned  it  it  were  well. 
ha'alaelae  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  walk,  to  teach  to 

walk. 
ha'alanga  v.  tr.,  to  expose  to  the  air  in  order  to 

dry,  to  dry  nets  and  clothes, 
ha'alangi  n.,  a  house  on  piles,     cf.  ilengi.     Lau 

falangi. 
ha'alauni  v.  tr.,  to  decorate, 
ha'alede  I.'.,  v.  tr.,  to  break  in  pieces, 
ha'alete   S..  v.   tr.,  to  chasten,  to  punish,  to 

persecute. 
ha'aletehi  tr. 
ha'aletehinge  v.  n. 
ha'aletehila-(ku)  gerund. 
ha'ali'e  v.  i.,  to  be  engaged  in  cooking, 
ha'ali'anga  v.  n.,  a  cooking  of  food, 
ha'alili   v.   i.,   to  change  shape,   of  a  ghostly 

apparition;    e   ha'alili   ana    pa'ewa,     he 

took  the  form  of  a  shark, 
ha'alime  five  times. 

ha'alio  1.  v.  tr.,  to  awaken,  to  cause  to  awake, 
ha'ali'o  2.  v.  tr.,  to  strangle,  to  hang  by  the  neck. 

In  M.  A.,  p.  288,  the  woman  strangled 

was  named    Hu'e  siki  ni  nhi,  and  her 

husband  was  Olosango. 
ha'aloko  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  gather  people    together. 
ha'aloo'i  v.  tr.,  to  instruct,  to  punish,  to  make 

loo. 
ha'alounge  v.  n.,  quarreling,  bickering, 
ha'alu,  ha'aha'alu  1 .  v.  i.,  to  promise,  used  with 

ana;  e  ha'alu  ana  'olo,  he  promised  it; 

ha'alu  horana,  to  swear  by  a  person  or 

thing. 
ha'alunge    v.    n.,    a    promise;    hele   dora'ie 

ha'alunge.  to  break  a  promise, 
ha'alunge'ini  tr.,  to  make  a  covenant. 
ha'alunge'inila-(ku)    gerund.     Lau    gwalu. 
ha'alu  S.  2.  adj.,  new,  fresh,  recent;  ha'olu,  U.; 

kau  ha'alu,  heifer;   keni  ha'alu.   virgin; 

poro  ha'alu,  bridegroom. 
ha'aluha  v.  n.,  used  with  poss.  3;  ha'aluha 

ana,    its    newness.     Nguna    vau.    Nine 
fou,  Malay  baru. 
ha'aluelu  S.,  v.  i.,  ko  ere  ha'aluelu,  to  give  a 

sign  with  a  word,     'ahi  2. 
ha'amaa  v.  i.,  to  dry  canarium  nuts  (ngdli) 

in  smoke. 


23 


HA'AOPO 


ha'amaahoosi  U..  to  boast, 
ha'amaa'i    v.  i.,  to  consecrate,  to  ordain,  to 
sit  apart  for  sacred  use. 
ha'amaa'inge  v.  n.,  holiness  (late  use). 
ha'amaa'ila-(ku)  gerund.,  making  holy. 
ha'ama'ani  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  copy,  to  repeat  after. 
cj.  hd'imaani. 
ha'ama'aninge,    v.    n.,   copying,    repeating 
after. 
ha'amaa'u  I'.,  v.  i.,  to  frighten. 

ha'amaa'usi  tr. 
ha'araada  v.  tr..  to  soil. 
ha'amae  to  bray  nuts,  yams,  taro  in  a  mortar. 

ha'amaesi  tr. 
ha'amaesi  1.  to  kill. 

ha'amaesi  2.  to  watch,  as  a  cat  a  mouse. 
ha'amahoro  v.  i.,  to  cover  up. 

ha'amahorosi  tr.,  to  cause  to  pass  in  sight, 
ha'amala  \-.  i.,  to  copy;  ko  ha'ainala  po'upo'u 
ana,  to  make  the  sign  of  the  cross  on  him. 
ha'amalala-(ku)  gerund.,  doing  like, 
ha'amalaohu    v.    tr.   1.    to    initiate.      M.    A., 
p.    233.     Iiotd   vi   ni~iuant\    all   the   boys 
who  are  eligible.     2.  U.,  to  use  a  thing 
for  the  first  time,  to  hansel.     3.  to  assist 
a  novice  in  catching  his  first  bonito. 
ha'amalu  v.  i.,  to  frighten  fish  or  animals  by 
one's  shadow  falling  upon  them, 
ha'amalusi  tr. 
ha'amamakine  v.  tr..  to  inspire  with  dread, 
ha'amamalo  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  rest;  used  also 
with  poss.  3;  neke  ha'amamalo  'amiu.  I 
will  cause  you  to  rest, 
ha'amamaa'u  U.,  v.  i.,  to  cause  to  fear. 

ha'amamaa'usi  tr. 
ha'amamu  v.  i..  to  entice  fish  with  scraps  of 
food,  to  burly;  met.,  to  entice  a  person 
with  suggestions. 
ha'amamue'i  L'.,  v.  tr.,  to  scorch,     mdmu  2. 
ha'amamu'i  v.  tr.,  to  char,  to  burn  (of  food). 

miimu  2. 
ha'amanata  v.  i.,  to  train,  to  educate,  to  tame. 

ha'amanata'i  tr. 
ha'amanikulu'e   v.   tr.,   to  give  praise  to,   to 
glorify,  to  make  glorious. 
ha'amanikulu'ela-(ku)  gerund. 
ha'amanola  \.  i.,   to  give  peace  to.  to  cause 
peace;     'oAv     ha'amanola     honolamami, 
give  peace  in  our  time. 
ha'amango  1.  to  bring  to  a  finish.     2.  to  com- 
fort, to  refresh;  /io'owawgo  5ac,  to  com- 
fort the  mind. 
ha'amasa  v.  i..  to  shame,  to  make  ashamed: 

used  with  poss.  3. 
ha'amataqa  v.   i..   to  enlighten,   to  cast  light 
upon,  to  let  light  in. 
ha'amataqasi  S.,  ha'amataqali  U.,  tr. 
ha'amataqasila-(ku)  gerund. 
ha'ama'u  .">..  \".  i..  to  honor,  used  with  poss.  3. 
ha'ama'unge  v.  n.,  respect,  honor, 
ha'ama'usi  tr.,  to  terrify, 
ha'amau'o  S.,  v.  i.,  to  olTend,  to  cause  to  offend, 

used  with  poss.  3. 
ha'amauta'a  v.  tr.,  to  strengthen,  to  make  firm, 
ha'amedo  \ .  tr.,  to  steep,  to  wet. 
ha'amenamena  v.  i.,  to  be  false,  to  flatter, 
ha'amola  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  fail. 


ha'amola  Ccontinucd). 

ha'amolahi  tr.,  to  cause  to  fail,  to  cause  to 

miss,  to  make  of  no  effect, 
ha'amotaahi  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  inrtict  agony  on,  to 

persecute  cruelly. 
ha'amotaahila-(ku)  gerund, 
ha'amousi  \ .  tr.,  to  break  off. 
ha'amwadausi  \ .  tr.,  to  soften,  to  make  easy, 
ha'amwaimwei'e  S..  v.  tr.,  to  belittle,  to  make 

of  no  account. 
ha'amwaimwei'alana  gerund, 
ha'amwamwate'a  \-.  i.,  to  make  light  of,  to 

belittle;     ne'isae     ha'amwamuale'alana, 

making  light  of  it. 
ha'amwari  v.  tr..  to  enfeeble,  to  weaken  by 

sickness  or  wounds. 
ha'amwarila-(ku)  gerund, 
ha'amwasie'ini  v.  tr.,  to  laugh  at,  to  mock,  to 

jest  at. 
ha'anakusi  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  seat,  to  cause  to  sit. 
ha'ananama'ini    U.,    v.    tr.,    to    put   spiritual 

[)ower  into, 
ha'ananau  \-.  tr.,  to  instruct,  to  practise. 

ha'ananaula-(ku)  gerund.     \\'ango  ha'ana- 

nau'a.  clearly. 
ha'ananoa'i,   v.   tr.,   to  e.xercise.   to    accustom 

oneself  to. 
ha'ana'o    n.,    first    fruits,    early    yams;    tnu 

lia'ana'o.  the  first  fruits, 
ha'ana'ola'ini  U..  v.  tr.,  to  do  a  thing  first,  to 

do  before  anything  else, 
ha'anemo  S.,  ha'animo  U.,  v.  i.,  to  get  wet 

from  rain,  to  be  in  the  rain. 
ha'anemosi  S.,  ha'animoli  U.,  tr..  to  cause 

to  get  wet  with  rain, 
ha'anine  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  accustom  oneself,  to  be 

accustomed;   mii  tolaha   e  ha'anine,  the 

wonted  practices, 
ha'anipili    S.,     n.,     anguish,     pili.     ha'anipili 

e  pilingie,  he  travailed  with  anguish, 
ha'ano  n.,  a  scaffold, 
ha'anga'ingedi  v.  tr..  to  strengthen, 
ha'angau   w    tr.,    to   feed;    'ai    ha'angdu   keni, 

ginger  given  to  women  as  an  ordeal, 
ha'aoa'i  1.  v.  tr.,  to  apportion,  to  correspond 

to;    'ure'ure   ha'aoa'ie   hai  suurei   'd'clu- 

malaii.   standing  opposite   to   the   four 

corners  of  the  earth.     2.  v.  tr.,  to  fulfill, 

to  witness;  'iinti  ha'aoa'i,  'unit  ha'aoa- 

'inge,  witness, 
ha'aodo    to    straighten,    to    put    straight,    to 

direct;  a  Wale  ha'aodo.  a  proper  name, 
ha'aodohi  huni  lengu   ha'aodohie  'aeka,   to 

guide  our  feet. 
ha'aodohila-(ku)  gerund, 
ha'aohu  v.  tr..  to  cause  to  boil,  to  boil  vege- 
tables, etc. 
ha'aohusi  v.  tr..  to  distribute,  to  apportion, 
ha'aola  \-.  tr.,  to  put  to  silence;  ere  ha'aola,  to 

persuade. 
ha'a'olu  three  times, 
ha'aono  six  times, 
ha'a'o'oni  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  sink,  to  drown; 

to  subject,   to   bring   into   submission; 

'akalo  e  ha'a'o'onie,  a  ghost   took  pos- 
session of  him. 
ha'aopo  v.  tr.,  to  heat  up  food  already  cooked. 


HA'AORA 


24 


ha'aora  I".,  v.  tr..  to  shine,  of  bright  light, 
ha'aorata'ini  tr.,  to  enlighten. 

ha'apaine  v.  tr.,  to  enlarge,  to  aggrandize,  to 
exalt  oneself. 
ha'apaina'ala  (ku)  gerund. 

ha'aparasi,  ha'aqarasi  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  hinder,  to 
prevent. 

ha'apasu  v.  i.,  to  threaten,  to  threaten  the  life 
of  a  person. 
ha'apasuli  tr. 
ha'apasulinge  v.  n. 
ha'apasulila-(ku)  gerund. 

ha'apiho  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  divide  into  two  parts. 

ha'apo'e  n.,  yam  or  taro  mash:  the  yams  or 
taro  are  first  roasted  isule)  on  embers, 
then  the  skin  is  scraped  (ori)  with  a 
shell  {le'ete'ei  henu),  and  finally  the 
vegetable  is  pounded  in  a  wooden 
mortar  (uli)  with  a  pestle  ('di  repd),  the 
mess  is  then  placed  in  wooden  bowls 
(nime)  and  heated  up  with  hot  stones 
(pii),  coconut  milk  ('oni  wei)  being 
added;  ha'apo'e  uhi,  yam  mash;  ha'apo'e 
hut,  taro  mash;  maladi,  stale,  sour. 

ha'apolaha'i  v.  i.,  to  cast  away,  to  disregard, 
used  with  poss.  3. 

ha'apona  v.  i..  to  interrupt  with  questions, 
ha'aponanga  v.  n.,  questioning, 
ha'apona'i  tr.,  to  question. 

ha'aponosi  v.  tr.,  to  overgrow  and  choke  (of 
creepers). 

ha'apu  ere  ni  ha'apu  lako'ie,  swore  by  him. 
ha'apunge  v.  n. 

ha'apuli  rum  ha'apuli,  to  throng  together. 

ha'apulo  v.  i.,  to  turn  back  before  reaching 
one's  destination, 
ha'apulonga'ini  S.,  ha'apulosi  U.,  tr.,  1.  to 
accompany  a  person,  to  attend  on  the 
way  home.  2.  to  turn  a  thing  over,  to 
reverse. 

ha'apu'o  v.  i.,  to  turn  back  before  reaching 
one's  destination,  to  return, 
ha'apu'osi  S.  1.  to  accompany  a  person  on 
his  return  journey.     2.  to  return  a  thing. 

ha'aqaali  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  break  in  two  pieces. 

ha'aqaha'ini  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  lay  a  thing  along, 
to  measure  by. 

ha'aqala  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  be  empty  or 
vacant;  salo  e  ha'aqalaa  one,  the  sun 
had  caused  the  beach  to  be  deserted. 

ha'aqasi  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  encircle  with  the  arms. 

ha'aqe'u  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  be  mad. 

ha'aqini  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  steep,  to  wet. 

haara-(na)  1.  n.,  smell:  haarana  ko  wesu,  its 
smell  smells;  haarana  nga  me'i  ola,  the 
smell  of  anything;  haarani,  plural,  of 
many  things  that  smell.  Motu  harahua, 
to  be  kissed,  sniffed. 

ha'ara  2.  a  sign,  mark,  flag  (late  use).  VVango 
ha'ara. 

ha'araa  v.  i.,  to  sit  in  the  sun,  to  bask, 
ha'araahi  tr.,  to  expose  to  the  sun. 

ba'ara'i  v.  i.,  to  summon,  to  call  a  person  to 
come  and  partake  of  food. 

ha'ara'ini  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  name,  to  give  a  person 
a  name.     U.,  haora'ini. 

ha'arako  v.  tr.,  to  appease,  to  treat  gently. 


ha'arangasi  v.  tr.,  to  blow  out,  to  puff  up.  to 

distend. 
ha'ararada  v.  tr.,  to  broil,  to  fry  (late  use). 

Wango  ha'aradahi. 
ha'ararao  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  cling,  to  cause  to 

cleave  to. 
ha'area  U.,  v.  i.,  tola  ha'area,  to  send  out  a 

smell  on  all  sides. 
ha'areke  1.  to  land  passengers  or  goods  from 

a  canoe,  used  of  labor  vessels  landing 

returned    laborers.     2.    to    land    trade 

goods   which   are   left   in  charge   of   a 

native  trader. 
ha'arekenga  v.  n.,  trade  goods  landed. 
ha'arekehi  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  skip,  to  cause  to 

leap. 
ha'arepi  v.  tr.,  to  make  a  prostitute  of. 
ha'arere  v.  tr.,  to  cleanse. 

ha'arere'anga  v.  n.,  cleansing,  purification. 
ha'ariro  v.  tr.,  to  entice    with  food,  to  offer 

food   to  a  ghostly  visitor  in  order  to 

prove  that  he  is  not  human, 
ha'arodo  v.  i.,  to  darken,  to  stand  in  the  light, 
ha'aro'i  U.,  v.  tr.  to  find,  to  come  across;  lai 

ha'aro'i,  go  and  meet;  tdu  ha'aro'i,  to  find. 
ha'arongo  v.   tr.,   to  summon,  to  invite;  the 

technical    word    for   a    summons   to   a 

feast  delivered  by  a  herald   (hurulaa). 

Three  days  notice  is  given;  ha'arongoa 

a   ola,    e  ro   ha'idinge,    'olune   ni   ngeu, 

summon   So-and-so,    there   remain  two 

days,  on  the  third  is  the  feast. 
ha'arongonga  v.  n.,  an  invitation,  summons, 

calling. 
ha'aroroa'i  v.   tr.,  to  become  indebted  to,  to 

involve  oneself  with. 
ha'aruru  v.  i.,  to  conduct  a  marriage  ceremony, 
ha'arurunge  v.  n.,  a  marriage  ceremony. 
ha'arurula-(ku)  gerund.,  the  marrying  of. 
ha'asada  1.  v.  tr.,  to  flatten,  to  make  level. 

2.  adj.,  flat,  level, 
ha'asaediena  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  thank,  to  salute  in 

speech. 
ha'asaedienanga  v.  n.,  thanks. 
ha'asaedienala-(ku)  gerund, 
ha'asaemango  v.  tr.,  to  comfort,  to  settle  the 

mind. 
ha'asaemangonga  v.   n.,  comfort,  ease  of 

mind. 
ha'asato  v.  i.,  to  sit  in  the  sun,  to  sun  oneself, 
ha'asatoa'i  tr.,  to  expose  a  thing  to  the  sun 

in  order  to  dry  it. 
ha'asauni  v.  tr.,  to  vex,  to  cause  trouble  to. 
ha'asiho  v.  i.,  to  land  a  passenger  from  a  canoe, 

also  of  labor  vessels  landing  returned 

laborers. 
ha'asiholi  tr.,  to  lower,  to  let  down, 
ha'asihopulu  n.,  a  stone  sinker  for  fishing-lines, 

rounded  and  grooved  for  the  attachment 

of  the  line, 
ha'asikihi  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  detach, 
ha'asilitaha  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  emerge,  used 

with  poss.  3. 
ha'asusu  S.,   1.  to  strengthen,   to  make  firm. 

confirmation   (late  use) ;    ha'asusu    sae, 

to  confirm  the  heart. 
ha'asusula-(ku)  gerund. 


25 


HAHA 


ha'asusu  2.  v.  tr.,  to  suckle, 
ha'asusu  V  v.  i.,  to  tell  tales  about,  to  gossip, 
ha'asusunge  v.  n.,  gossip, 
ha'asusunge'ini  tr.,  to  spread  tales  about 

a  person,  to  be  a  subject  of  gossip, 
ha'asusu  4.  U..  ha'asusu  iihi,  name  of  a  month, 

March,     susu  4. 
ha'ata'eli  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  embark,  to  take  on 

board. 
ha'ata'ela'ini  U.,  tr.,  to  cause  to  arise. 
ha'ata'i  partic,  made  plain,  open;  hiinie  tala 

i'oe  ke'i  ha'ata'i,  that  thy  way  may  be 

made  plain. 
ha'ata'ini  v.  tr.,  to  show,  to  reveal,  used 

with   poss.   3;   ha'ala'inie  'etnelu,    show 

it  to  us.     Fagani  fatagi. 
ha'atakalo  v.  tr.,  to  lose,  to  lose  the  run  of, 

to  misplace,  to  cause  to  err. 
ha'atala'i  v.  tr.,  to  egg  on,  to  incite, 
ha'atalisi  U..  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  awake, 
ha'atanauhi   v.   tr.,   to  decoy  a  ghost  or  an 

animal   by  offering   food.     cf.   ha'ariro. 

Mota  vatanau. 
ha'atapala'a  U.,  v.  i.,  to  cause  to  abound, 
ha'atata'ala  v.  tr.,  to  harm,  to  cause  evil  to; 

mu  ola  ni  ha'alaia'ala  'emi.  things  that 

harm   us. 
ha'atatanga'ini  v.  tr.,  to  scatter, 
ha'atataqelu  v.  tr.,  to  throw  a  person  down 

headlong. 
ha'atataro  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  stumble, 
ha'atau  v.  i.,  to  be  far  off,  distant. 

ha'atauli  S.,  ha'atauri  U.,  determ.,  to  be 

far    off    from.     Wango    ha'atau,    Lau 

tail,  Mota  sau,  Florida  hau,  Malay  jaj<. 
ha'ateke  v.  i.,  to  cause  to  fall;  ngdu  ha'ateke,  to 

drop  crumbs  while  eating. 
ha'atengotengo  v.  tr.,  to  droop,  of  lip  or  head, 
ha'atoha'ini    v.    tr.,    to   give   oneself   airs,    to 

boast,  to  make  much  of  a  person. 
ha'atoha'inila-(ku)   gerund. 
ha'atohu  1.  v.  i.,  to  make  request  for,  to  ask 

leave,  to  ask  a  favor:  used  with  poss.  3. 

e  ha'atohu  eku,  he  asked  my  leave.     2. 

V.  tr.,  to  ask  that  a  person  or  thing  be 

granted   to  one.     e   ha'atohue   ana,   he 

asked  him  for  it. 
ha'atohunge  v.  n.,  a  making  request. 
ha'atohula-(ku)  gerund, 
ha'atola  1.  v.  i.,  to  send  a  message,  to  send  a 

thing.     2.    U.,    n.,    a    messenger:    laa 

ha'atola,  a  person  sent. 
ha'atolanga  v.   n.,   a   message,   command, 

order,  epistle  (late  use). 
ha'atola'i  tr.,  to  give  a  message  to. 
ha'atolanga'ini  tr.,  to  give  a  message  to. 
ha'atonohi  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  offer  drink,  to  cause  to 

tlrink. 
ha'atonohila-(ku)  gerund, 
ha'ato'o  v.  tr.,  to  confirm,  to  accomplish;  e 

ha'ato'oa    saeku,     he    carried    out    my 

wish, 
ha'ato'osu'a  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  stumble, 
ha'atoretore  U.,  v.  i.;  ha'atoretore  maa,  to  act 

stealthily. 
Ha'au  the  landing-place  at  Oloha,  west  coast 

of  Little  Malaita. 


ha'a'uduhi  v.  tr..  to  drip  on,  to  bespatter. 

ha'a'uku  v.  tr.,  to  lower,  to  let  down. 

ha'aulao  v.  i.,  to  act  the  wanton. 

ha'a'ulu  v.  tr.,  to  make  blind,  to  cause  to  be 
blind,  to  cause  the  eye  to  close. 

ha'a'ure  v.  i.,  to  set  up,  to  cause  to  stand. 
ha'a'ure  mauta'a. 
ha'a'uresi  tr.,  to  make  to  stand,  to  set  on 

end,  to  build  up,  to  edify. 
ha'a'uresila-(ku)  gerund. 

ha'a'urenga'ini  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  accompany  a 
person  on  a  journey. 

ha'a'ureruru  S.,  v.  tr..  to  make  peace  between, 
to  restore  friendship  between, 
ha'a'urerurunge  v.  n. 

ha'auri  v.  tr.,  to  save,  to  make  alive,  to  put 
parrot-fish,  i'a  ni  kalu,  in  a  pool  to  keep 
them  alive,  cf.  mauri.  lopo  ni  ha'auri, 
pool  of  salvation,  baptismal  font. 
ha'auringe  v.  n.,  safety,  salvation. 
ha'aurile-(ku)  S.,  ha'aurita-(ku)  U.,  gerund. 
1.  the  saving  of.  2.  the  being  saved, 
salvation;  ini  ni  ha'aurilana  'oto,  a 
person  to  be  saved.  3.  the  person  who 
saves;  a  ha'aurileku,  my  saviour. 

ha'aurine  S.,  ha'aurina  U.,  adv.,  thus,  just  so, 
that's  the  way. 

ha'a'usu  U.,  v.  i.,  to  let  fall. 

ha'a'usuli  1.  v.  tr.,  to  let  fall,  to  cause  to  drop. 

'USK    1  1. 

ha'ausuli  2.  v.  tr.,  to  teach,  to  cause  to  do  like. 

usidi.     ini  qaarongoisuli  e  ka'a  liuta'ana 

ini  ha'ausuli,  the  disciple  is  not  above 

his  master. 

ha'ausulinge   v.    n.,    teaching,   instruction. 

rnaai  ha'ausulinge,  a  lesson. 
ha'ausulila-(ku)  gerund. 

ha'awa'a    v.    i.,    to    desecrate,    to   defile;    ere 
ha'awa'a,  to  speak  blasphemy. 
ha'awaa'i  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  dishonor. 

ha'awaiteu  v.  i.,  to  engender  strife. 

ha'awali  1.  v.  i.,  to  delay,  to  pass,  of  a  short 
period  of  time.     wali.     2.  adv.,  a  short 
time.     3.  with  suff.  pron.:  'oke  ha'au-a- 
li'eu.  wait  a  little  while  for  me. 
ha'awalinge  v.  n.,  a  delay. 

ha'awarasikale  U.,  a  scorpion:  lit.,  causing  the 
child  to  scream. 

ha'awasi  v.  tr.,  to  hunt,  to  chase  wild  animals. 

ha'awaweta'a'i  v.  tr.,  to  cause  vexation  to,  to 
fash,  to  wrangle. 

ha'awe'o  to  cause  to  be  weary;  ko  ha'au-e'ora 
mola.  trouble  themselves  for  nothing. 

ha'aweweu  U.,  v.  i.,  to  quarrel,  to  bicker. 

hada  n..  a  bird,  an  eagle  (Haliaetus  leucogaster) 
used  in  Ulawa  as  an  omen.     Wango  hada. 

hadi  V.  tr.,  to  forbid  under  a  curse,  to  prevent; 
hddi  ola.  hddi  olanga,  v.  n.,  cursing; 
ere  ni  hedi  olanga.  to  swear,  to  take  an 
oath. 

hadonga  U.,  n.,  a  shellfish,  univalve,  mutton- 
fish,     hangoda.  S. 

haeta  U.,  v.  i.,  to  appear,  of  ghostly  vision?. 

haha  S.  1.  adv..  down,  not  used  of  points  of 
compass,  but  apai  haha,  the  downward 
side,  »'.  e..  Big  Malaita;  mai  i  haha, 
under  the  earth;  hoi  haha,   under  the 


HAHA 


26 


haha  (continued). 

earth,  the  downward  side;  hahani 
'ono'onoma,  a  measure,  a  yard.  2. 
prep,  ikii);  i  hahamu,  underneath  you. 
Wedau  wava,  west;  Wango  bahai, 
Samoa /a/a,  Vaturanga  vava,  Mao.  haha 
earth. 

haha  3.  v.  tr.,  to  carry  a  person  on  the  back. 
Samoa  fafa.   Nine  fafa,  Viti  vava. 

haha  4.  hahai  walo,  a  thicket. 

haha'iteli  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  distinguish,  lio 
haha'iteli. 
haha'itelila-(ku)  gerund, 
haha'itelinge'ini  tr.,  to  single  out,  to  par- 
ticularize; e  ka'a  haha' itelinge' inie  ike 
le'une,  it  was  not  confined  to  that  par- 
ticular instance. 

hahale  n..  a  cave,     hale  1. 

hahalisi  S.,  n.,  grass,     cf.  hdlisi.     Mota  valis. 

hahaore'e  U.,  adj.,  very  small,  diminutive. 
haora. 

hahari  n.,  a  bifurcation,  used  with  genitive  i 
S.,  ni  U.  hari  2.  haharii  lala,  branch- 
ing roads. 

hahi  V.  tr.,  to  cook  in  an  oven  with  leaves  and 
hot  stones:  a  layer  of  hot  stones  on 
bottom,  then  the  kara,  etc.,  and  then 
leav'es  to  cover  all.  The  floor  of  oven  is 
level  with  the  ground. 
hahinge  v.  n.,  a  cooking  in  an  oven. 
hahila-(ku)   gerund. 

hahiteli  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  distinguish,  to  separate 
between,     haha'iteli,  S. 

haho  (ku)  1.  prep.,  above;  diiige  la'i  hahona,  the 
day  after  it;  with  locative  i:  i  haho,  on 
top;  ilengi  i  haho,  in  the  sky  above. 
2.  n.,  U.,  uplands;  mwa  haho  i  Rahumaea. 
Fagani /a/o,  Lau /a/o,  Mota  vawo. 

haho  3.  n.,  a  reef  lying  off  shore. 

hahota  S.,  n.,  used  with  dan  1;  diiu  hahola,  to 
deceive,  to  act  the  hypocrite;  dda 
haltolanga,  v.  n.     haho  1. 

hahuilala  U.  1.  v.  i.,  used  with  poss.  3,  to 
exemplify.     2.  n.,  a  sign,  an  example. 

hahure'i  v.  tr.,  hdhure'i  maa,  to  lift  up  the 
eyes;  hdhure'i  'elinge,  to  incline  the 
ears. 

hahuroto  v.  i.,  to  be  clear,  of  unimpeded  vision; 
esi  ne'i  maa  hahuroto,  his  eye  became 
clear;  lio  hahuroto,  to  see  clearly. 

hahuto'o  v.  i.,  to  cast  lots,  to  test  by  lots:  a 
leaf  of  red  dracaena  ('apai  dill)  is  held 
in  the  fingers  and  pulled;  the  judgment 
is  given  according  as  the  leaf  breaks 
easily  or  with  difficulty,  cf.  ilala. 
hahuto'onga  v.  n. 

hai  1.  numeral,  four;  hai  aiuala,  forty  is  used 
as  a  unit  in  counting  men.  Mota  vat, 
Maori  wha. 

hai  2.  contraction  of  hao  i;  hai  'ano,  on  the 
ground;  hai  la'ona,  within;  hai  le'une, 
down  there;  hai  nume,  down  in  the 
house;  hai  tei,  down  where? 

hai  3.  exclamation  of  reproof;  hai  raona,  well 
I  never;  hai  mwaena,  I  say,  jou! 

hai  4.  art.,  one,  a;  probably  a  contraction  of 
hdn   4    and    »    2;    hdidinge,    a    day;  mu 


hai  4  (continued). 

heidinge,  daj's;  hdhcala,  a  word;  hdi 
naho,  a  wave,  a  breaker;  hdi  rodo,  a 
night;  hdi  holaa,  a  calm;  hdi  lama,  a 
pool;  hdi  teqe,  a  bamboo;  itga  hdi  ini,  a 
length  of  bamboo. 

hai,  haihei  5.  v.  tr.,  to  scratch  with  the  nails 
(of  birds,  dogs,  etc.);  kokoko  ko  hei,  the 
brush-turkey  scratches;  hdi  nale,  to  dig 
up  worms  for  bait  for  i'e  ni  sane. 

ha 'i  6.  participial  ending,    erehd'i.    Mota  I'ag.  2. 

ha'i  7.  suffix  to  verbs,  used  intransitively:  to 
make  it  transitive  ui  is  added,  hd'ini. 

ha'i  8.  prefix,  may  be  doubled  hd'ihe'i.  (a) 
expresses  reciprocity,  (b)  used  with 
nouns  of  relationship;  ro  ha'i  (mu  lie'i) 
ma'amana,  father  and  son;  kireruc  ha'i 
maeloonga,  they  two  are  at  enmity, 
(c)  he'i,  S.,  expresses  repetition  or  con- 
tinuance; mwane  kire  he'i  'unue  lo'u,  they 
must  not  over  say  it  again;  e  sa'a  he'i 
aopa  lo'u,  it  will  never  be  different;  ko 
he'i  sapeie,  adds  more  to  it;  ha'i  mai,  U., 
to  add  to;  kira'elu  a  ta'e  hd'i  'clie'i.  they 
embark  on  their  return  journey,  (d) 
denotes  relative  action:  hd'i  'amasi,  to 
pity.  M.  L.,  p.  531,  186.  cf.  Florida 
vei  arovi.  Motu  he.  \'iti  vei,  Florida 
vei,  Wango  ha'i.  The  pronunciation 
hd'i  may  have  been  adopted  in  order 
to  distinguish  it  from  hdi  4.  cf.  hau  1 
(Mota  vatu)    and    ha'u  6    (Mota   vau). 

ha'i  S.  9.  used  occasionally  where  Ulawa  uses 
ha'a.     cf.   hd'imaani. 

ha'i  U.  10,  V.  i.,  to  call  attention  to;  used  with 
poss.  3. 

haia  exclam.,  I  say. 

ha'i'a'auhi  v.  tr.,  to  deliver,  to  help. 

ha'i'ade'i  v.  i.,  to  make  a  spectacle  of,  to  look 
on  at. 
ha'i'ade'inge  v.  n.,  a  spectacle. 

ha'i'alama'i  v.  i.,  to  consent  mutually,  to  be 
agreed  upon  a  policy.    Wango  haiaratnai. 
ha'i'alama'inge  v.  n. 

ha'i'amasi  to  be  merciful. 

ha'iaopa'i  adj.,  different,  various;  7)iu  ola 
hd'iaopa'i,  different  things. 

ha'iare  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  proffer  help,  to  push  one- 
self forward,  e  hd'iarea  maraana,  he 
pushed  himself  forward:  not  considered 
good  form. 

ha'idada  U.,  v.  i.,  to  be  level. 

ha'idadanga  U.,  v.  n.,  used  as  verb  or  adverl): 
used  with  poss.  3  equal  to,  agreeing  with, 
sufficient,  sadanga,  S.  e  ha'idadanga 
maia,  equal  to  it;  e  ha'idadanga  ana,  it 
corresponds  to  it. 

ha'idengie'i  S.,  ha'idenie'i  U.,  partic,  until 
daylight. 

haidinge  S.,  n.,  a  day;  nga  hdidinge;  mu 
heidinge,  days;  suli  heidinge,  daily;  e 
lopoa  hdidinge,  to  set  a  day. 

ha'i'epu'i  v.  tr.,  to  propitiate  a  person,  to 
smooth  down  temper. 

ha'ihe'i  1.  reduplication  of  hd'i  8. 

ha'ihe'i  2.  S.,  hd'ihe'i  niu,  a  log  of  coconut 
wood,     hd'uhe'u,  U. 


27 


HA'ITALE 


hM'ihe'iolinge  v.  n.,  bounty. 

hS'iholota'i  v.  i.,  to  promise,  to  have  an  agree- 
ment between. 
hM'iholota'inge  v.  n.,  an  agreement. 

hii'ihouoa'i  v.  i.,  to  curse;  ere  hd'ihonoii'i,  to 
speak   rt'vilingly. 
ha'ihononga  v.  n.,  cursing. 

ha'ihora'i  V..  partic.,  to  be  (layl)reak.  if. 
'auhora. 

ha'ihoro'i  U.,  v.  i.,  to  be  at  strife,  to  fight. 
ha'ihoronga  v.  n.,  variance,  strife. 

haihu  n..  diigong,  sea-cow. 

ha'ihuni  V ..  v.  tr.,  to  desire,  to  wish  for.  huni. 
ha'ihuninga  v.  n.,  desire,  lust. 
ha'ihunila-(ku)    gerund.     Wango  haahuni. 

ha'ike  S.  1.  negative,  no:  not  used  as  negative 
particle;  demonstrative  na,  ena,  may 
be  added  for  emphasis.  2.  n.,  nothing, 
naught;  7tga  ola  laa'l  what?  ha'ike, 
nothing;  ko  ha'ike,  otherwise,  else;  ha'ike 
na,  oh  no;  ha'ike  'oto  'o'o,  never  at  all; 
ha'ike  ue,  not  yet.  ,3.  to  be  nothing, 
not  to  be;  ana  ko  ha'ike,  if  it  is  not  so; 
ntaala  ko  ha'ike,  even  if  not.  Probably 
ha'i  and  ke  1 .  cf.  qa'ike,  qa'i,  V.  Wango 
qai. 

ha'ikineta'i  S.,  v.  i.,  to  take  care,  to  be  faithful, 
to  guard  against. 

ha'ilakali  U.,  v.  i.,  to  have  sexual  intercourse 
with,     ha'ilakali  maia  a  ola. 

ha'ileku  v.  i.,  to  be  whole,  entire:  adv.,  com- 
pletely; hai  alo'icaa  ha'ileku,  whole  day 
long;  lola  ha'ileku,  to  carry  whole,  in 
one  piece. 

ha'ileledi  v.  tr.,  to  mock  at,  to  despise:  v.  i.. 
to  bo  abominable. 
ha'ileledinge  v.  n.,  abomination. 

ha'ileu  v.  i.,  to  snatch,  to  be  violent;  ko 
he'ileuleu  ana  mola,  merely  snatched  it 
with  violence. 

ha'iliu  adv.,  reciprocally;  hai  jnaai  dengi 
he'iliune,  the  four  winds;  he'u  lo'oa'i 
he'iliu.  wandering  star,  planet;  kira  'asi 
lu'ua  hd'iliu,  \' .,  they  ceased  hostilities; 
ko  saewasu  he'iliu,  angry  with  one 
another;  mdni  oaoanga  hd'iliu,  cqualitj", 
mora  ko  pu'ota'inie  erenga  hd'ilin,  you 
are  ignorant  of  one  another's  speech; 
opa  hd'iliu,  to  be  at  variance, 
ha'iliunge'ini  v.  tr.,  to  pass  a  thing  from 
person  to  person. 

hM'ilu'u  V.  tr.,  to  exhume  human  bones.   "M.  A., 
p.  262:  to  remove, 
ha'ilu'unge'ini  tr. 

ha'ima'amana  n.,  used  with  numeral  ro,  two. 
nd  7.     ro  hd'ima'amana,  father  and  son. 
ha'ima'amananga  n.,  inii  he' : ma' amananga , 
parents. 

ha'ima'ani  S..  v.  tr.,  to  copy,  to  do  like. 
ha'amaani,  V.  tigara  ha'ima'ani,  to  cry- 
in  sympathy  with. 

ha'imalahune  n.,  used  with  ro  or  inu.  nd  7. 
kireru'e  ro  hd'imalahiine,  they  two  are 
friends. 

ha'imauana  n.,  used  with  ro:  ro  hd'imauana, 
man  and  wife;  with  ineu,  etc.,  added,  ro 
hd'imauana  ineu,  my  parents,     nd  7. 


hM'imwa'eta'i  1.  v.  i.,  to  assent,  to  be  willing. 

2.  v.  i.,  to  kiss. 
haine  S..  haina  U.,  fourth,  the  fourth  time. 

nd  7. 
h&'ini  tr.  suff.;  siiti,  to  sink;  suuhe'ini,   to  de- 
stroy.    Florida  vagini. 
ha'ioa  v.  i.,  to  agree  with,  to  agree  together, 
hil'ioangi  v.  i.,  to  cackle  (of  birds),  to  imitate. 

to  follow  on  with. 
hM'iodo'i  V.  i..  to  meet  one  another, 
ha'iohe  v.  i.,  to  compete,  to  race, 
ha'i'ohi  I".,  v.  i..  to  query,  to  be  doubtful  about, 
ha'iohonginge    n.,    trial,  making  trial  of   one 

another,   fighting. 
ha'i'oli  V.  i.,  to  turn  back,  to  return,  to  take 

turn  about;   kakali  he'ihe'i'oli,  to   take 

turns   in   guarding;   lae   ha'i'oli,   to   go 

and  return. 
ha'i'olisi     antiphonally.      mutually;     lapa 

hd'i'olisi,  to  converse.    Wango  heiheiori. 
ha'iore  1.  v.  i..  to  fail  to  return,  to  stay  behind. 

lae  ha'iore. 
ha'iore  2.  v.  i.,  to  scold,  to  quarrel. 

ha'iorenga  v.  n.,  bickering, 
ha'ipani'i  U.,  v.  i..  to  strive  with,  to  contend, 

to  race, 
ha'ipani'inge  v.  n. 
ha'ipolanga  v.  n.,  insurrection,  tumult. 
ha'ipuri  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  last.    2.adv.,latest.  at  last, 
ha'ipurunga'i  U.,  partic,  close  together,  clus-. 

tcred. 
ha'iqa'aqana    n.,    grandparents    and    grand- 
children,   those  who   call   one   another 

qa'aqa:  used  with  ro,  mii,  m'jja. 
hai   raona   S..    hai   raoni   U.,   exclamation   of 

reproof. 
ha'irape'i  U.,  \-.  tr.,  to  exhort, 
ha'irara  \'.  i.,  to  be  zealous,  diligent. 

ha'irarahi  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  persuade,  importune, 
ha'irarahinga  U.,  v.  n.,  persuasion, 
ha'irareta'i  1.  v.  i.,  to  tend.     2.  n.,  a  servant, 
ha'irienga  v.  n..  a  contest;  ani  he'irienga  pe'i 

sape,  in  subduing  the  body. 
hairodo  n.,  a  night;  nga  hdirodo;  mti  heirodo, 

nights;  hdirodo  si'iri,  last  night, 
ha'iruru  U.,  v.  i.,  to  be  lumped  together,  to  be 

identical  with, 
ha'isada  v.  i.,  to  be  flat,  even.     Wango  laisada, 

agreeing  with, 
ha'isa'iri  v.  i.,  to  quarrel, 
ha'iseuni  S.,   v.  i.,  to  be  at  strife,   to  be  at 

variance,  to  fight.     M.  L..  p.  186. 
ha'isiho  U.,  v.  i.,  to  speak  against,  decry,  to 

prate;  used  with  poss.  3. 
ha'isu'esu'e  S.,  v.  i.,  to  meet  one  another, 
ha'isuhinga  U.,  v.  n.,  unction, 
ha'isuru  v.  i.,  ere  hd'isuru,  to  have  altercations. . 
ha'isusu   v.    i.,   to   be  continuous,   sustained; 

.•tae'wasu  he'isusu,  continued  anger, 
ha'isuu  V.  i.,  to  flit  from  place  to  place;  '»'i  ko 

he'isnu,  the  swift  flits  about. 
ha'itako'i  U..  v.  i.,  to  swear  an  oath, 
ha'itale  1.  v.  tr..  to  search  for;  ana  'olo  'emi  ka'a 

roro'a  hd'italea  'amu,  unless  we  seek  it 

of  thee;  lio  ha'itale  U..  to  look  in  vain 

for.     2.   V.  i..  to  get  out  of  the  way; 

ha'itale  talaku,  make  room  for  me. 


HA'ITALE 


28 


ha'itale  (continued). 

ha'italenga  v.  n.,  a  search. 
ha'italela-(ku)  gerund, 
ha'italenga'ini  tr.,  to  look  for. 
ha'itatanga'i  U.,  partic,  scattered, 
ha'itelili  S..  to  be  unruly. 

ha'itelilinge  v.  n.,  unruliness. 
ha'ite'e  adj.,  with  whole  skin,  unpeeled.      c/. 

hailcku. 
ha'iteu  v.  i.,  to  mo%-e  quickly,  to  hasten. 

ha'iteuhi  tr.,  to  deliver,  to  free, 
ha'itohe  v.  tr..  to  dispute  with,  to  refuse  to 
listen  to;  ere  ha'itohe,  to  contradict, 
ha'itohenga  v.  n.,  refusal,  disobedience. 
ha'itohela-(ku)     gerund.     Wango    haitohe, 
harilohe. 
ha'itoli  V.  tr.,  to  bury,  to  be  a-burying. 
ha'itolinge  v.  n.,  burial. 
ha'itolila-(ku)  gerund. 
ha'itolinge'ini  tr.,  to  bury, 
ha'itorangi  v.  tr.,  to  exhort, 
ha'itotori  U.,  v.  i.,  to  await,  to  expect;  ha'ilo- 
lori  susuto'o,  to  hope  (late  use);  hd'ilolo- 
ringa  susuto'o,  v  n.,  hope, 
ha'iuqeuqeni  v.  tr.,  to  complain  of. 

ha'iuqeuqeninge  v.  n.,  complaint. 
ha'iusi  U.,  v.  i.,  to  traffic,  to  barter, 
ha'iusunge'i  S.,  v.  i.,  to  send,  to  despatch, 
ha'iusunge'inge  v.  n.,  a  command, 
ha'iusunge'ini  tr.,  to  give  command  to. 
ha'iuwelina  U.,  n.,  a  man  and  his  sister's  son, 
those  who  call  one  another  uweli,  used 
with  ro,  mwa.     nd  7. 
ha'iuwesi  v.  i.,  to  use  oaths,  to  curse, 
ha'iwalo  v.  i.,  to  be  choked  with  vines;  mae 

hd'iwalo,  to  die  prematurely. 
haka  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  torn,  to  tear;  haka  to'oni,  to 
tear  clothes. 
hakasi  tr.,  to  tear  something. 
Haka    2.    n.,    the    Southern    Cross    Mission 
schooner;    palapala   ni   Haka,  omen  of 
the  Southern  Cross  coming,  a  sign  of 
rain. 
haka  3.  n.,  a  ship;  white  people,  foreign;  haka 
lude  mwane,  a  vessel  of  the  labor  trade; 
dango  ni  haka,  papaya;  hole  ni  haka.  an 
oar;    mu    haka,    white    people;    hudi   ni 
haka,  Musa  cavendishii;  ola  ni  haka,  a 
foreign  thing;  poro  ni  haka,  a  man  of  the 
ship,  white  man;  i  haka,  the  white  man's 
country;    noko    lai    haka,    I    am    going 
abroad.     Probably   Mota  aka  through 
San  Cristoval,  where   Bishop  Patteson 
first   called   and   where   the   word   was 
first  learned  by  the  peoples  of  Sa'a  and 
Ulawa. 
haka  4.  n.,  a  herd;  haka  ni  poo,  herd  of  swine. 
hakis  n.,  axe  (English). 

k^ku  1.  V.  i.,  to  go  together,  to  go  in  a  company, 
hakusi  S.,  hakuni  U.,  tr.,  to  go  with,  to 

accompany. 
hakusila-Tku)   gerund.     Wango  hagu. 
hMku  2.  n.,   the  prow  of  a  canoe,  separately 
made  and  tied  on  with  cane:  poop,     v., 
to  cut  out  the  boards  for  the  prow. 
hala  v.  i.,  to  attempt,  used  with  ni;  nou  hala 
ni  lae,  I  attempt  to  go. 


halahala  firm,  taut. 

halai  1.  to  be  bald.     2.  a  bald  person;  a  halai. 

the  bald  man. 
halaitana  the  top  of  a  hill,  lit.,  its  baldness, 
halasi  U.,  to  be  stiff,  to  stiffen,     halahala. 
halata  a  wound,  scar. 
hale  1.  a  shed,  a  yam-shed  in  a  garden,  nga  hale. 

Florida  vale,  house;  Maori  whare. 
hale  (ku)  2.  the  gums,  palate;  idemu  ke  suu  i 

halena,    the   lime   spatula   shall    pierce 

his  gums. 
hale'ite   U.,  adv.,  entirely,  only,     hdli'ile,  S. 

Lau  fala'ete. 
Halele'i  the  island  forming  Port  Adam,  Little 

Malaita. 
hali,  haliheli  1.  v.  tr.,  to  break  off  branches; 

hdli  'e'e,  to  break  areca  branches, 
'ahali  partic,  broken  off. 
halila-(ku)  gerund. 
haliheli'e  adj.,  broken  off;  ko  hile  hdliheli'e, 

breaks   in   pieces.     Wango   maharihari, 

ruined, 
hali  2.  V.  i.,  to  strive;  hdli  wala,  to  dispute;  hdli 

walanga,    S.,    v.    n.,    disputation;    ivala 

hdlinge,  v.  n.,  strife;  hdli  ana  hurunge, 

foot  racing. 
halinge  v.  n.,  strife,  bad  feeling. 
halila-(ku)     gerund.     Mota    valu,    match; 

\'iti  valu,  fight;  Malagasy  valy. 
hali  3.  stingray.     Mota  tar, Vitiroj,  Maori  wfcai. 
halidu'u'a  U.,  v.  i..  to  stumble. 
hali'ite  S.,  adv.,  entirely,  only,     hale'ite,  U. 
haliono  U.,  v.  i.,  to  close  the  eyes. 
halisi  1.  harvest,  crop,  time  of  ripening;  dango 

ni  helisi,  fruit   (nut)   tree;  mar  a  hdlisi, 

northeast  wind;  mar  a  hdlisi  i  matawa, 

north-by-east    wind.     2.    yam    season, 

year  (late  use) ;  hdlisi  kire  'elie  'oto,  last 

j-am-digging;   hdlisi  kire    ke'i   'elie,   the 

coming  yam-digging  season;  hdlisi  mei, 

next  j'am-digging;  nga  hdu  ni  helisi,  a 

year.     3.    U.,    grass,   onion    (late   use). 

Mota  valis,  grass.     4.  hdlisi  pena,  U., 

Coix  lachryma.  Job's  tears. 
halo  1.  V.  tr.,  to  bore,  to  drill.     2.  n.,  a  drill; 

halo  mac,  a  pump  drill:  the  sections  of 

shell   for   money    (haa)    are   all   bored. 

Mota  war,  to  twist. 
halo  3.  V.  tr.,  to  helve  an  axe. 
halolo  v.  i..  to  come  forcibly  into  contact  with, 

used  with  poss.   3;  e  halolo  ana  nume 

ngeena,  beat  on  that  house. 
halu  1.  n.,  some;  used  in  Sa'a  with  genitive  i, 

also  with  suffixed  pronoun  na;  mu  helui 

'inoni,  mwa  halu  'inoni,  certain  persons; 

hdluna  ngaini,   hdluna  ngaile,   U.,    one 

here    and    there.     Florida    balu,    Niue 

falu. 
halu  2.  S.,  rdui  helu,  10,000  coconuts, 
halute'i  v.  tr.,  to  paddle  and  overtake,   hdlute'i 

haka. 
halute'inge'ini  tr.    Ulawa  kdluta,  in  proper 

names.     Wango     haruta,     to     paddle; 

Fate    halusa,   paddle;    Mota  alo   3,   to 

steer;  Samoa  alo,  to  paddle;  Motu  kalo. 

New  Britain  walu,  Lifu  galu. 
hama  hatchet,  tomahawk  (English  hammer) 


29 


HARO 


hana  1.  n.,  a  yam  with  prickly  vines,  twining 
to  the  left  on  its  pole,  whereas  uhi  twine 
to  the  right;  it  is  planted  whole;  hana 
ni  Kela,  a  hana  planted  head  down- 
ward: other  varieties  are  hana  sa'o,  hana 
tapole,  hana  wai;  hdu  hana,  coral  lime- 
stone; nini  hana,  U.,  a  yam;  sikei  hana, 
a  thorn  on  top  of  the  tuber. 
hana  2.  v.  i.,  to  shoot,  with  arrow  or  gun;  hane 
takarurume'inire,  to  shoot  several  at 
one  shot. 

hananga  v.  n. 

hanasi  determ.,  to  shoot  anyone. 

hanasila-(ku)  gerund.  Florida  vanahi,  to 
shoot;  \'iti  vana,  Samoa  fana,  Xiue 
fana.  Malay  panah,  arrow. 

hanali  determ.,  to  covet;  sae  hanalinge, 
covetousness. 

hanalila-(ku)  gerund. 
hane  1.  v.  n.,  to  climb;  hane  pot  ile'u.  come  up 
here  to  me.  2.  used  of  the  bridegroom's 
party  visiting  the  bride's  party  at  a 
wedding  feast;  mwala  ko  holi  keni  ko 
hane.  ko  lai  hiine  ola,  the  people  who  are 
buying  the  bride  go  up  and  display  the 
bridal  moneys.  3.  to  rise,  to  ferment 
(of  ha'apo'e  that  has  stood  in  bowls). 
4.  to  leave  the  land  and  put  out  to  sea 
when  crossing  to  another  island,  to  aim 
at  a  point  of  land,  hdidihane. 

hanenga  v.  n.,  climbing. 

hanenga'ini  ti ..  determ.,  to  climb  and  carry. 

haneta'a  S.,  hanetaha  U.,  v.  i.,  to  climb  up. 

haneta'anga  S.,  hanetahanga  U.,  a  slope, 
a  steep  place,  a  declivity.     Fagani  fane. 

hane'i  tr.,  to  covet,  to  desire. 

hanenga  v.  n.,  hanenga  ni  sae,  saehancnga, 
covetousness. 

ha'ahanenga'ini  to  lust  after,  to  exalt. 
hanue  S.,  hanua  U.,  land,  country,  village;  in 
Sa'a  the  final  e  changes  to  a  before  the 
personal  article  a,  resulting  in  a  long 
vowel,  hanuaa  ola,  the  land  of  So-and-so. 
hdnue  huu,  solid  land,  dry  land,  heri- 
tage; hdnue  tndine,  the  place  here,  this 
land;  hdnue  e  niule,  a  place  abounding 
in  coconuts;  hdnue  e  gala,  the  village  is 
empty;  hdnue  sola,  desert;  mua  hdnua, 
U.,  villagers,  people;  niwa  hdnua  hunga, 
everybody;  apai  henue,  the  west  side  of 
an  island;  aivalosi  i  henue,  the  north- 
west wind;  »  denumana  hdnue,  in  the 
middle  of  the  island;  e  kuluhie  hdnue, 
upholds  the  earth;  lai  henue,  to  go  on 
a  journey;  ngorana  hdnue,  point  of  land, 
cape;  qd'usi  henue,  he  whose  duty  it  is 
to  approach  the  ancestor  ghosts;  sato 
€  qa'alie  hdnue,  the  sun  has  risen  on  the 
earth;  td'i  henue.  S..  in  the  uplands; 
ta'itelihana  hdnue.  boundary  of  land; 
mu  toloi  henue.  the  hills;  lolona  kdnue, 
the  hill  country;  'usu  henue,  the  first 
finger;  wai  henue,  up  in  the  village. 
H&nua  'Asi  U.,  Lark  Shoal  south  of  Ulawa, 

figures  in  folklore. 
hfinuelama  S.,  to  be  at  peace,     cf.  lama  4. 

hanuelamanga  v.  n.,  peace. 


hJLnuelama  (continued). 

hanuelamasi  tr.,  to  have  peace  among  men; 
e  hdnuelamasire,  they  were  at  peace. 

hanga  v.  i.,  to  be  jammed,  to  be  too  tight. 

hangoda  S.,  hadonga  U.,  a  haliotis  or  sea-ear, 
strung  and  used  as  a  bait  for  crayfish; 
hinui  hangoda,  its  shell. 

hao  S.,  adv.,  of  direction,  down,  west;  with 
locative  i  contracts  to  hai,  hai  one,  hat 
'ano.  hai  la'ona;  na'o  hao.  to  go  toward, 
to  go  west;  po'o  hao.  S.,  farther  west; 
poo  hao  likiteniu,  on  beyond  thee;  qdu 
hao,  to  be  going  north  or  west. 

ha'olu  U.,  ha'alu  S.,  adj.,  new,  fresh. 
ha'aha'olu.  Xguna  vau.  Wango  ha'oru, 
Bougainville  Straits  faolu,  Malay  vau, 
Malagasy  vao,  Maori  hou. 

haora,  hahaore'e  U.,  small. 

haoraha  v.  n.,  used  with  poss  3:  boyhood, 
smallness;  haoraha  ana,  the  small   size, 
haorasi  tr.,  to  be  too  small  for. 

haora'ini  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  name,  to  give  a  name  to. 

hapa  1.  a  plank,  thwart  of  a  canoe,  rdi  (rdu  i) 
hapa.  2.  plates  of  turtle  shell,  hapa  ni 
honu;  lolo  hapa.  to  bend  the  shell. 
3.  a  phase  of  the  moon;  hapa  ni  na'o, 
'alanga'i  hapa.  U.,  first  quarter. 

hara  U.,  haro  S.  1.  adv.,  of  time,  used  of  con- 
secutive time,  of  unfinished  action,  pre- 
cedes verb,  .-Uii'a  use.  muni  'e  hara 
ha'ahulee,  as  soon  as  it  is  daylight;  muni 
'e  hara  lae,  begin  to  go  gently. 

hara  S.  2.  hara  pole,  a  phase  of  the  moon,  first 
quarter,  day  before  full. 

hara  3.  v.  i.,  to  be  firm;  puu  hara,  to  get  a  firm 
footing;  susu  hara,  to  lean  firmly,  to 
rest  upon. 

Haraina  a  village  on  the  northwest  corner  of 
Ulawa. 

harasi  v.  tr.,  to  chafe,  to  scratch. 

harehare  U.,  v.  i.,  to  cram;  susu  harehare,  to 
cram  full. 

Hari  Hdu  Hari,  a  rock  at  the  east  entrance  to 
Mara  Masiki  Channel. 

hari,  hariheri  1.  v.  tr..  to  ask  about;  soi  heri,  to 
question,  to  ask  questions,  U. 
harite'inga  v.  n.,  questioning,     suka  hdriU- 
'inga.       Wango   hari   haale,       Florida 
varigohi. 

hari  2.  n.,  used  with  genitive  i  or  ni;  hdrii  tola, 
S.,  hdri  ni  tala,  U.,  side  track,  bifur- 
cation of  roads,     hahari. 

hiiriheri  S.,  n.,  a  scorpion.  Lau  farifari,  San 
Cristoval  susu  heri,  Maori  weri.     hdli  3. 

hsLrihuni,  hariherihuni  S.  1.  v.  tr.,  to  desire,  to 
wish  for.      hdri  1,  huni. 
harihuninge  v.  n.,  desire. 
harihuiiila-(.ku)    gerund. 

harihuni,  hariherihuni  2.  adv.,  at  all,  precedes 
verb. 

harikokosi  U.,  v.  i.,  to  be  straitened,  confined. 
koko  2. 

haro  S.,  hara  U.,  adv.,  of  time,  of  consecutive 
or  of  unfinished  action  or  of  future  time. 
(•/.  saro.  ke  haro  diana.  when  it  is  well; 
ke  haro  hoou-a  ka'u.  let  it  be  first  light,  as 
soon  as  it  is  light;  'oke  haro  lae.  go  gently. 


HARO'A 


30 


haro'a  U.  (Su'uholo  use),  as  hara  1. 

harua  U.,  exclam.  of  assent,  yes. 

hasi,  ha'ihesi  S.,  hasihasi  U.  1.  v.  tr.,  to  plant. 
cf.  'u'uhesi. 
hasinge  v.  n.,  a  planting. 
hasila-(ku)  gerund.     Wango  hasi,  Lau/as». 

hasi  U.  2.  maana  e'a  hiisi  i  saroha,  his  eyes  roll 
up  to  the  ceiling. 

hasi'ei'ei  S.,  twist  tobacco  in  sticks.  Wango 
hasi'ei,  a  tree;  the  first  tobacco  came  to 
Sa'a  from  Wango. 

hasikokosi  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  cause  distress  to. 
koko  2. 

hasile'ini  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  set,  place. 

Hasimo  a  bay  on  the  west  side  of  Ulawa 
between  Lenga  and  Ripoo,  the  site  of 
an  old  village. 

hasi'o  (ku)  n.,  flesh  of  body;  me'i  hesi'oi'e,  this 
flesh. 
hasi'onga  v.  n.,  ngdu  hesi'onga,  cannibalism; 
to'oni  e  mada'a  ani  hesi'onga  ani,  gar- 
ments defiled  with  the  flesh,  cf. 
hinesu.  Wango  hasi'o,  Mota  visogoi, 
Maisin  visoa,  Wedau  vioa. 
hasi'ola  adj.,  fleshy,  with  plenty  of  flesh  on. 

hasipe'ule  S.,  adj..  hard,  close  in  grain. 

hata,  hatahata  1.  v.  i.,  to  go  together,  to  accom- 
pany one  another,  tola  halahata,  to  act 
in  harmony.  2.  v.  i.,  to  set  well,  to  be 
easy,  comfortable;  tori  ineu  e  hata,  my 
yoke  is  easy.  3.  v.  i.,  to  be  gentle  (of 
wind) ;  mawa  halahata  mola,  a  gentle 
breeze.  4.  suli  hata,  40  dogs'  teeth,  a 
unit  in  reckoning  monej-.  M.  A.,  pp. 
238,  325.  5.  maraaii  wei  hata,  south- 
southeast  wind,  strong  but  with  no  rain, 
cloudy  skies.  6.  a  tree  of  hard  wood 
used  to  make  drums;  pig-proof  fences 
are  made  of  it  in  Guadalcanar.  San 
Cristoval  hata.  7.  hata  koiila'a,  to  be 
noisy,  chattering. 
hatanga     v.    n.,    fellowship,    communion, 

palea  lahanga,  to  keep  fellowship. 
hataa'i  v.  i.,  to  arrange,  to  place  one  along- 
side the  other;  hataa'i  diena  ana  mwa 
ola,  to  put  things  in  due  order;  hataa'i 
sae  talani,  to  be  careful  to;  le'u  hire 
hataa'i  heu  ana,  a  pavement. 
hataa'ini  tr.  to  cleave  to,  to  accompany, 
to  arrange. 

hatale,  hatahatale  v.  i.,  to  go  along  the  beach 
as   opposed    to   liu   i   henue,    take   the 
upper  road;  awalosi  i  hatale,  the  north 
wind. 
hatalea  v.  n.,  shore,  coast. 

hatara  v.  i.,  to   rest    upon,  to  lean,  to  press 
against. 
hataranga'ini  tr.,   to  cause  to  lean  upon. 
San  Cristoval  hatara,  to  reach. 

hatare  on  the  side  of,  toward,  used  with  suff. 
pron.  a.     hatarea  i  ola. 

hato  1.  a  large  armlet  made  of  clam-shell; 
daraha'ini  hato,  to  fit  the  shell  ring  on 
the  arm;  didi  hato,  to  make  the  shell 
ring:  a  hole  is  made  by  tapping  with  a 
piece  of  flint  tied  to  a  handle,  then  a 
stick  studded  with  flints  is  inserted  and 


hato  1  (continui-d). 

the  hole  made  larger,  the  outside  is 
rounded  on  coral  rock  and  a  groove  is 
made;  the  old  men,  and  often  the  blind, 
make  the  hato.  2.  U.,  hika  hato,  the 
moon  on  the  fifth  day. 

hato  3  (ku)  U.,  knee-cap. 

hatonga  S.    1.   suited   to,   used   with  poss.   3. 
e  hatonga  aku. 
hatonga'i  v.  i.,   to  explain,   to  set  out  in 
words;  hatonga'i  wala  haahi,  to  accuse. 
hatonga'ini  tr.,  to  cite  an  example,  to  illus- 
trate, to  give  instructions  about. 

hatonga  U.  2.  to  be  small. 

hau  1.  rock,  stone;  hoi  heu,  a  rock.  cf.  liliheu, 
sulnheu.  hau  haa,  red  madrepore  coral; 
hdu  hana,  coral  limestone;  Hau  Hari, 
a  rock  at  the  east  entrance  of  Mara 
Masiki  Channel;  hiiu  ni  iu,  twin  rocks; 
Hail  ni  Kent,  rock  at  Ali'ite  where 
female  ghosts  congregate;  hdu  ni  lilie'i, 
a  rock  from  which  men  cast  for  gar- 
fish; Hdu  Loho,  a  boat  harbor  south  of 
Port  Adam;  Hdu  Maelo,  a  rock  near 
Ngorangora  on  the  east  coast  of  Ulawa: 
prov.  raa  hitelia  Hdu  Maelo.  dry 
weather  enough  to  crack  Hau  Maelo; 
hdu  tnenu,  pumice;  hdu  mou,  an  isolated 
rock;  hdu  ngedi,  flint;  hdu  'ono'ono,  to 
swallow  stones  in  an  ordeal;  hdu  pawa. 
soapstone;  hdu  pie,  a  precipitous  wall 
of  rock;  hdu  pulu,  hard  volcanic  rock; 
hdu  pu'opu'o,  a  grindstone;  hdu  susu, 
an  immovable  rock;  hdu  suusuui  karo, 
cornerstone;  'ato'ato  hdu,  to  perform  the 
hot-stone  ordeal;  ddu  heu,  the  hot-stone 
ordeal.  M.  A.,  p.  210;  ddu  dunge, 
dunga  ni  heu,  to  undergo  the  ordeal; 
i'e  hd'u,  a  stone  fish;  ipelu  eni  heu,  to 
fight  with  stones;  kakalai  heu,  iron  rod; 
ki'iki'i  heu,  a  rod  of  iron;  lengine  hdu, 
above  the  rock;  leu  kire  hataa'i  heu  ana, 
a  pavement;  nga  odoni  heu,  a  row  of 
stones;  qd'une  hdu,  rocks  on  shore  seen 
from  the  sea;  rele  hdu,  to  grind  the 
teeth;  sae  hdu,  hard  heart  (late  use); 
e  'u'ile'inie  nga  hoi  heu,  a  stone's  throw. 
Mota  vatu,  stone;  New  Guinea  vau: 
possibly  pronounced  hau  and  not  ha'u 
in  order  to  distinguish  it  from  ha'u 
(Mota  vau). 

hau  2.  axe,  stone  axe,  iron  (late  use);  hdukile- 
kile,  a  long-handled  tomahawk  with 
iron  blade;  hdu  roroho.  a  stone  axe;  rere 
hdu,  to  sharpen  an  axe;  rere  hdunge. 
v.  n.,  a.\e  sharpening;  warei  heu,  ware 
ni  hau,  a  short  club  with  a  stone  head 
made  at  Waisisi,  Big  Malaita. 
haule  adj.,  stony. 

ha'u  3.  n.,  a  log  of  wood;  hdu  i  contracts  to  hai, 
hai  dango,  S.,  hai  'ei,  U.,  a  log;  hdu  lilt 
qana,  a  boom;  nga  hduheui  niu,  U..  nga 
hdihei,  S.,  a  log  of  coconut  wood.  Mota 
vat  3,  Batak  hau,  tree;  Malay  kayu.  M. 
L.,  p.  95. 

hau  4.  n.,  (a)  denotes  a  period  of  time;  ngahdu- 
dinga,  U.,  a  day;  nga  hdu  ni  hdlisi,  a 


31 


HELEHELE 


hMu  4  (continuf(l). 

period  of  a  year,  (b)  with  numeral 
ta'a,  S.,  ta'e,  U..  one.  it  makes  hduta'a'i. 
kduta'e,  once:  with  genitive  t,  hdu  i 
contracts  to  hat,  hdidinge,  S.,  a  day, 
hdirodo,  a  night,  (c)  a  row  of  teeth: 
rete  hdu,  to  grind  the  teeth;  rete  hdunga, 
V.  n.,  talai  heune,  a  row  of  teeth;  kulaa 
talai  heune,  to  loosen  teeth;  used  of 
things  that  are  in  succession  with 
genitive  i,  li,  ni;  hdu  ni  'est,  a  wave; 
hduliahe,  tide-rips;  hduliqongi,  one  day 
of  a  series,  cf.  au  in  Motu  and  Hula, 
Keapara  hau  prefixed  to  names  of 
things  of  length.  T.S.E.  iii,  p.  475. 
hilu  5.  U.,  used  of  phases  of  the  moon;  hdu  ni 
lemi,  full  moon;  hdu  ni  niwiia  awara.  day 
after  full  moon;  ruana  hdu,  second  day 
after  full  moon. 
h'ixx  6.  a  pandanus  with  broad  leaves  used  to 

make  umbrellas. 
hau  7.  an  umbrella  of  pandanus  leaf  sewn  in 
strips,  carried  on  journeys  and  used  as  a 
sleeping-mat,    also  to  protect  children 
when  they  are  carried  by  the  mother; 
mwela  ko  kerukeru  la'o  hdu.  the  child's 
ghost  scratches  inside  the  umbrella. 
hSu  8.  U.,  hau  ni  taretare,  outrigger. 
ha'u9.  to  plait;  hd'u  ha' a.  to  tie  laths  in  a  plat- 
form; hd'u  fnwe'i,  to  plait  a  native  bag; 
ha'u  ni'e,  to  plait  a  coconut  mat;  hd'u 
qaso,  to  plait  a  grass  armlet;  hd'u  tahe, 
to  make  a  platform. 
ha'usi  tr. 

ha'usila-(ku)  gerund.     Mota  lau,  Florida 
vau,  Samoa  fatu. 
haudinga  U..  n.,  a  day;  suli  hdudinga,  daily, 
hauheu'e  adj.,   used  as  n.,  a  precipice,  rocky 

place, 
hauho  eel,  used  in  divination;  hduho  ni  wet, 
fresh-water    eel;  hduho  i  dunga  e  'ura 
ilengi,  the  eel  in  the  fire  stood  erect; 
hduho  ni  'esi,  conger  eel. 
haukama  v.  i.,  to  be  in  opposition  to,  to  oppose, 
to    revolt:    followed    by    prep,    honosi, 
against,  with  suft".  pron.  as  object. 
haukamanga  v.  n. 
haukari  U.,  starfish. 

haule  1 .  V.  tr.,  to  nurse,  to  mind  a  child,  to  mind 

a  house;  noko  haule,  I  am  minding  the 

house;  noko  haulaa  mwela,  I  am  minding 

the  children. 

haule  2.  adj.,  stony,  rocky,  rough. 

haulihane  a  rock  from  which  a  voyage  starts, 

as  at  Waingile,  Ulawa. 
ha'ulioku  the  end  purlins  of  a  house. 
hauliu  (ku)  n.,  the  throat. 
bauni  U.,  adv.,  altogether;  precedes  the  verb; 

mctathetic  upon  ahuni. 
hauta'a'i  S..  hauta'e  I'.,  once:  the  final  '»  may 
be  the  verb  suffix,  in  which  case  the 
composite  may  be  regarded  as  a  par- 
ticiple, cf.  pele,  pele'i.  San  Cristoval, 
ta'a'i,  one. 
he  1.  exclamation  of  encouragement;  he  i'oe. 

he'o.  bravo.     2.  v.  tr.,  to  urge,  to  bid. 
he'a,  he'ahe'a  1.  to  defecate.     2.  to  rust. 


he'a,  he'ahe'a  (continued). 

he'asi  tr..  to  defecate  upon,  to  dirt  upon. 
Possibly  metathetic  upon  Mota  tae, 
Motu  lage.  Polynesian  lae.  kae. 
he'a  3.  exclamation,  with  demonstrative  na 
or  ni  added;  he'a  na,  S.,  he'a  ni,  U.,  there 
you  are. 
he'asikena'i    U.,    exclam.,    not    used    before 

women,     cf.  ha'akena'i. 
hehe  1.  U.,  hoi  hehe  ani  dunga,  tinder,  the  accu- 
mulation at  the  outer  end  of  the  groove 
caused  by  rubbing  two  sticks  together. 
He  dunge. 
hehe  2.  cf.  ha'ahehe. 
heheoku  U..  n.,  a  dove.     cf.  hiroiku. 
hehesi  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  be  obstinate,  to  dispute. 

hehesinga  v.  n..  obstinacy. 
heheunge  S.,  v.  n.,  mentioning,  speaking, 
heho  v.  i.,  to  accuse  a  person  of  causing  death 

by  magic, 
hei  1.  U.,  preceded  by  locative  i,  ihei,  U.,  itei, 
S.,  where;  e  kei  hei,  from  whence;  nga  laa 
ni  hei,  who  is  this  person, 
he'i  2.  cf.  hd'i  8:  he'i  is  often  used  in  Sa'a  when 

the  preceding  vowel  is  neither  i  nor  m. 
heko  v.  i.,  to  be  palsied,  withered,  of  limbs. 
hele  1.  V.  i.,  to  hold,  to  catch  hold  of,  to  work 
at,  to  do;  hele  dora'i,  to  withhold;  hele 
dora'ie  ha'alunge,   to  break  a  promise; 
hele  dutnuli,  to  repress,  to  hold  down; 
hele   hu'ihu'inge,   unprofitableness;   hele 
hu'isie  nga  le'u,  to  err  in  anything;  hele 
huu,  to  inherit;  hele  isuli,  to  do  accord- 
ing to;  hele  lakoma'inie,  hold  it  together; 
hele  langa'a,  to  hold   up  conspicuously; 
hele   lolomi,    to    keep   for   oneself;    hele 
tnanekosi.  to  handle  gently;  hele  manire'i, 
to  live  orderh-;  hele  vidnu  sada,  to  hold 
level,  upright;  hele  marangana,  to  take 
from  amongst;  hele  marara,  to  act  with 
diffidence;  hele  mduli,  to  do  awkwardly; 
hele  ngd'ingedi,  hold  fast;  hele  'o'i'o'i,  to 
break;  hele  ola,  to  act;  hele  'onime'i,  to 
do  cleverly;  hele  ni  oraha'a,  to  do  too 
much;  hele  pd'ipesi,  to  grasp  firmly;  hele 
ponosie  wawana,  keep  his  mouth  shut; 
hele    po'opo'oli'ili'i.    to    do    perversely; 
hele  pupupu'e,  to  keep  intact;  hele  rodi, 
to  grip,   to   hold   tight;   hele  rorodo,   to 
grant  fair  weather,  to  hold  off  squalls: 
a    phrase    used    in    incantations;    hele 
saedami,  U.,  with  poss.  3  ana.   to  have 
enough;    hele    susuli,    to    inherit;    hele 
suusuu  ana,  to  do   in   succession,  con- 
tinuously;  hele  tararuru.   take  hold   all 
together;    hele   temweri,    to    touch;    hele 
tolinge.  to  hold  in  subjection;  hele  toto, 
to  get  for  nothing;  hele  uaini'ini,  to  do 
diligently;   hele  ualamango,   to  perfect; 
'osi  hele  hinoli'a  laha  ine,  how  well  you 
have  done  it. 
helenga  v.  n.,  action,  acts. 
helela-(ku)  gerund.,  the  doing  of. 
helesi  tr..  to  hold,  to  do.  to  work  at. 
helesila-(ku)    gerund.     Wango   heresi. 
hele  2.  Florida  lele.  magic.     M.  A.,  p.  207. 
helehele    1.   containing   no  coconut   milk    (of 


HELEHELE 


32 


helehele  1  (continued). 

yam    puddings),    unleavened.     Wango 
herehere. 

helehele  S.  2.  of  phases  of  the  moon:  helehele 
mwdimwei,  seventh  and  eighth  days; 
helehele  pdine,  ninth  and  tenth  days. 

helo  a  small  fresh-water  fish. 

helu  cf.  hdlu. 

hena  S.  1.  lime,  itunu  hena,  to  burn  lime.  2.  a 
lime  box  for  use  in  chewing  betel;  hoi 
hena  holo,  a  gourd  used  for  holding  lime. 
Lau  fena. 

henu  a  fresh-water  cockle  found  in  swamps, 
shell  blue  inside,  used  to  scrape  the 
charred  part  off  sulanga  and  to  kara 
\nth. 

heota'i  v.  i.,  to  slander,  to  be  jealous  of,  to 
accuse  of  infidelity;  heota'inge,  v.  n., 
accusation  of  infidelity;  heola'ini,  tr. ; 
heota'inie  pe'ia  ola,  to  accuse  of  infidelity 
with  So-and-so. 

hera  a  courtyard;  hera  honu,  a  congregation; 
herai  usinge,  a  market-place.  Lau  fera, 
village;  \'aturanga,  S.  I.,  vera,  Wango 
herahora. 

hereho  S.,  a  hereho.  So-and-so:  a  Wango  word 
meaning  thing. 

hero  scraped  coconut,  mu  hero;  hero  'a'ate, 
dregs  of  scraped  coconut  after  straining 
the  milk. 

herohero  v.  i.,  to  be  mad,  out  of  one's  mind. 

hete'i  hete'i  maa,  to  fix  the  eyes  upon;  hcte'i 
maanga.  v.  n.,  a  fixing  of  the  eyes. 

hetela  sasa  hetela,  thin,  lean. 

he'u  1.  star,  hoi  he' u;  he'u  to'oa'i  he'iliu,  planet; 
mu  he'u  sisine,  shining  stars;  mu  he'une 
salo,  the  stars  of  heaven;  'u'ui  he'u,  a 
star.  cf.  'u'u  2.  he'u  saisasu,  U., 
comet.  Mota  vilu,  Maori  whetu,  Bou- 
gainville Straits  bito. 

he'u  2  cf.  hd'u. 

He'u'e  the  hills  at  the  head  of  the  river 
Walo'a'a.  Little  Malaita. 

heulao  v.  i.,  to  act  the  wanton,     cf.  ulao. 

heune  cf.  hdu  4. 

heutaa  U.,  mara'i  heulaa,  to  droop  (of  flowers). 

hi  tr.  suff.,  lae,  laehi. 

hi 'a  U.,  cf.  hi'e,  S. 

hide,  hidehide  v.  i.,  to  clap  the  hands;  mao 
hidehide,  to  dance  to  the  clapping  of 
hands,  not  holding  the  dhui  but  with 
ahulili  on  the  fingers, 
hideli  tr..  to  hit  with  the  hand;  hideli  to'oni, 
to  wash  clothes  by  hitting  them  on  a 
stone. 

hi'e  S.,  hi'a  U.,  v.  i.,  1.  to  be  weary;  alingada 
e  hi'e  mwaanie  rongo;  tola  hi'e,  to  be 
heavy  laden.  2.  redup.  hi'ehi'e,  to  be 
pregnant;  e  hi'ehi'e  ana  a  ola,  con- 
ceived by  So-and-so;  nikeku  e  hi'ehi'e 
aku,  my  mother  conceived  me. 
hi'e'i  tr.,  to  weigh  heavily  upon.  Wango 
hi'a,  Niue  fita,  wearied;  Maori  hia, 
difficulty. 

hihi  V.  i.,  to  crouch  (of  dogs),  hihi  lo'uloku. 
cf.  'dhihi. 

hil,  hiihii  v.  tr.,  to  be  in  a  state  of  perception; 


hii,  hiihii  (continued). 

noko  hiie  sapcku,  I  feel  my  body,  I  am 

well. 
hiinge'ini   tr.,   to   perceive,   to  apprehend, 

to  suspect. 
hiinge'inila-(ku)    gerund.     Lau  fii;   Maori 

hia,  wish;  Niue  fia,  \'iti  via. 
hi'ito'oU.  1.  V.  i.,  to  be  in  pain.     cf.  sapehi'ilo'o. 

hi'ito'onga  v.  n.,  pain. 
hi'ito'o  S.,  adv.,  to  excess;  e  pdine  'oto  hi'ilo'o. 

it  is  far  too  big.     Mota  vivlig. 
luiwala'imoli  w  i.,  to  believe,  used  with  poss.  3. 

hii. 
hiiwala'imolinge  v.  n.,  belief,  faith. 
hiiwala'imohla-(ku)   gerund. 
hika  U.,  hika  halo,  last  stage  of  the  moon. 
hikana  cf.  hike  2. 
hike  1.  a  roll  of  cane  dyed  red  (hikei  ue),  used 

to  make  bracelets  and  anklets  or  collars, 

used   also   to   ornament   spears    {noma 

ddiedi) ;  nga  hikei  adio,  a  coil  of  banyan 

creeper, 
hike  (ku)  2.  prep.,  of,  among;  ngaini  hikemiu, 

one  of  you;  nou  ka'a  lio  hikena  nga  ola, 

I  saw  nothing;  ngdii  hikeni,  to  eat  of  it. 
hike  3.  ten,  of  garfish  (mwanole) ,  hike  ni  i'e. 
hiku,    hikuhiku    v.    i.,    to    be    entangled,     cf. 

td'ihikiihikn. 
hikusi    tr.,    to   wind    around    a    thing    (of 

creepers);   nga   walo   e   /n'fewstV,  tangled 

up  by  a  creeper. 
hikute'ini  tr.,  to  wind  around,  to  whip  with 

string;  e  hikute'inia  i  deniimana,  he  tied 

it  round  his  waist. 
hilehile  v.  i.,  to  be  wounded. 
hili  V.  tr.,  to  choose  for  one's  own,  to  desire 

and  take;  to'o  hili,  with  poss.  2.  to'o  hili 

nada,  they  alone. 
hilisi  tr.,  to  pick,  to  choose,     ha'ahili;  lio 

hilisi,  to  choose;  lio  hilisie  huni  hu'e  i'oe, 

choose  her  for  your  wife. 
hilisila-(ku)    gerund.     Lau    ta'ifili   as   to'o 

hili;  Florida  vili,  to  choose;  Samoa  fili; 

'Sine  fifili;  Motu  hidi. 
hilolo  U.,  v.,  to  be  warped  by  the  sun. 
hiluhilue'i    S.,    partic,    i'o   hiluhilue'i,    to   be 

estranged. 
hinanga  U.,  kara  ni  mwane,  j-am  pudding  used 

in  sacrifices. 
hinesu  (ku)  S.,  flesh,  meat.     Fl.  vinahi. 
hini'i  adv.,  nearly,  almost;  precedes  the  verb. 

cf.  hiri'i. 
hinoli'a  U.,   adj.,  beautiful;   'osi  hele  hinoli'a 

laha  ine,  how  well  you  have  done  it. 
hinou  a  fish-hook  made  of  turtle  shell,    not 

barbed:   a  steel   hook;   hinou  ni   'a'ao, 

hook  for  fishing;  hinou  ni  semu,  a  hook 

for  deep-sea  fish;  hinou  ni  tali,  hook  for 

deep-sea  fishing;    wanawana   hinou,   to 

make  turtle-shell  hooks.     Lau  finau. 
hinu  1.  shell  of  shellfish;   hinui   hangoda,  shell 

of  haliotis.     2.  bark:  hinui  ue,  bark  of 

cane.     Mota  vimii,  skin.     3.  v.  tr.,  to 

pull    up    the   eyelid;    'o   hinua   maamu, 

peel  your  eye! 
hinuhinu  eyelid,  hinuhinui  ma'a.     cf.  hiruhiru. 
biohio  U.    1.   mwahiohio,  swayed,   bent;  tata- 


33 


HO'ITE'I 


hiohio  (continued). 

hioltio,     to     stagger.     2.     twist     trade 
tobacco. 

hi'olo,  hi'ohi'olo  v.  i.,  to  be  hungry;  olo  ana 
hi'olo,  to  be  faint  from  fasting. 
hi'olonga  v.  n.,  hunger,  famine;  hi'olonga  e 
tola,  there  was  a  famine;  hi'olonga  e 
tolea  hdnue,  hunger  was  upon  the  land. 
Florida  vitolo,  Motu  hitolo. 

hi'ona  U.  ghost,  spirit.  Wango  hi'oua, 
Florida  vigona.     M.  A.,  p.  124. 

hiri,  hirihiri  1.  v.  tr.,  to  lap  with  a  string,  to 
bind.     Mota  vir,  Viti  wiri,  Samoa  fili. 

hiri  2.  v.  tr.,  to  pay  a  fine  for,  to  make  atone- 
ment for  a  death  by  violence, 
hiritaa  v.   n.,  a  fine  paid;  soi  hirilaa,   to 
flemand  a  fine;  hiritaana  a  ola,  atone- 
ment for  So-and-so.     Motu  Iiili. 

hiri'i  adv.,  nearly,  almost:  precedes  the  verb. 
cf.   hini'i. 

hiro  V.  i.,  to  revolve. 

hirosi  tr.     Wango  laihiro. 

hiroiku  n.,  a  dove.     cf.  heheoku. 

hirori  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  kinked.  2.  v.  i.,  to  chatter 
indistinctly,     cf.  rori  4,  'irori,  kirori. 

hiru  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  busy,  engaged,  to  have  a 
press  of  work,  ha'ahiru;  'ahe  hint, 
hirune  'ahe,  troublesome  waves,  boiling 
tide- rip;  luqe'i  hiru,  to  pretend  to  be 
busy. 
hirunga'a  adj.,  used  as  n,  hindrance, 
hirue'i  partic,  liindered;  noko  hirue'i  lae, 

I  am  hindered  from  going. 
hiru'e  S.,  hiru'a  U.,  adj.;  sae  hiru' a,  a  mind 

engaged;  'dsi  pouhiru'e,  raging  sea. 
hirusi  tr.,  to  get  in  the  way  of;  okii  e 
hirusia  viaana,  the  oku  has  got  in  its 
eye:  said  of  the  migratory  plover 
(kdrikeri'ala)  which  arrives  in  November 
at  time  of  palolo  and  is  found  exhausted 
in  the  gardens  and  open  spaces. 

hiru  2.  v.,  to  be  curly,  of  hair. 

hiruhiru  U.  cf.  hinnhinn;  hiriihiru  ana  maana, 
his  eyelid. 

hisi  U.,  rai  hist,  a  stake. 

hisu  1.  V.  tr.,  to  pluck  leaves,  to  pull  fruit. 
2.  U.,  to  wean;  hisu  susu  mwaani,  to 
pluck  the  breast  from. 

hisuhisu  v.  i.,  to  be  out  of  joint. 

hite  S.,  hita  U.  1.  v.  i.,  to  spUt.  cf.  ha'ahite, 
wa'ahile;  hite  dango,  S.,  hita  'ai,  U.,  to 
split  firewood;  hilc  pewa'ali,  to  cleave; 
ape  hite,  to  curtail;  kala  hite,  to  cut 
nautilus  in  rectangles  with  notched 
ends;  'ini  hite,  the  thumb,  used  to  split 
leaves, 
hiteli  tr.,  opa  hiteli,  to  cut  up  an  animal; 
po'o  hiteli,  to  cause  to  burst;  tohu  hiteli, 
to  cleave  asunder;  raa  hitelia  Hdu 
Maelo.     Wango  hita. 

hite  2.  V.  i.,  to  hit,  to  strike:  used  with  poss.  3. 
e  hita  ana;  hite  tekala'ini,  to  strike  and 
disperse;  hite  meenasi,  to  strike  and 
break  to  pieces;  ddu  hite,  to  score  a  hit. 
Wango  hita. 

hiu  1.  numeral,  seven;  ha'ahiu,  seven  times. 
Motu  hitu,  Kiuefitu,  Maori  whitu. 


hi'u,  hi'uhi'u  2.  v.  i.,  to  turn  from  side  to  side; 
hi'uhi'u   pote,    S.,    hi'uhi'u  kape,   U.,   a 
bird,  wagtail,  fly-catcher, 
hi'une  tr.,  to  alter  the  position  of. 
hi'usi  U.,  tr.,  to  turn,  to  alter  the  nature  of, 

to  change, 
hi'utana  tr.,  to  change  the  nature  of. 
hi'ute'ini  tr.,  to  wag. 

hi'ute'i    U.,    partic,    changed,    altered    in 
position,  moved.     Mota  vusia^. 
hi'uhi'ule  adj.,  to'o  hi'uhi'ule,  spotted, 
hiune  the  seventh  time, 
ho  e.xclam.,  used  in  chorus, 
hoa,  hoahoa  1.  v.  i.,  to  make  an  incision  in. 
hoa'i  tr.,  to  cut  by  making  an  incision  in. 
hoasi  tr.,  to  cut  marks  upon,  to  carve, 
ho 'a  2.  V.  tr.,  to  take  aside,  to  separate,  cf.  hoka. 
ho'ala'i  partic,  used  as  v.  i.,  to  depart,  to 
leave,     cf.  'aho'a.     Florida  vnka,   sepa- 
rate, open;  Sesake  qoka. 
ho'asi  V.  i.,  to  use  oaths,  to  swear  b>',  to  curse; 
ho'asi  sisinge'i,  to  clear  with  an  oath, 
to    adjure;    ho'asi    sisingana    li'oa,    to 
swear  by  a  spirit. 
ho'asinge    v.    n.     Wango    hoasi,    Fagani 
fogasi. 
hoda,  hohoda  v.  i.,  to  lave  the  hands  or  face; 
hoda    maa,    to    wash    the    face;    hoda 
maanga,  v.  n. 
hodali  tr. 

hodalila-(ku)  gerund. 
hoe  exclam.  1.  used  to  sum  up  a  statement  or 
argument.     2.     expresses     disapproba- 
tion.    3.  calls  the  attention. 
hoho  V.  i.,  to  cut  undergrowth. 

hohola  S.,  dsu  hohola,  to  prepare  a  yam 
garden. 
hohoro  V.  i.,  to  barter,  to  buy,  to  sell.     cf.  holt, 
holoholo. 
hohoronga  v.  n. 
hohoto  n.,  long  wooden  mortar  used  for  pound- 
ing yams,  etc. 
hoi  1.  art.  a,  one,  used  of  things  spherical  in 
shape,  fruit,  eggs,  shells;  in  the  plural  mu, 
mwa  precede  hoi;  probably  derives  from 
hoa    with    genitive    i.     hoi    dango,    mu 
hoi  dango,  fruit,  kidneys;  hoi  huu.  fruit 
of  the  BaiTingtonia;  hoi  i'a.  hoi  i'e,  fish; 
hoi  kue,  a  hen's  egg;  hoi  knru.  a  ripe 
areca  nut;  hoi  lite,  a  seed;  hoi  madeli,  a. 
fully  ripe  coconut;  hoi  menu,  an  egg; 
hoi  sehu,  U.,  a  gourd.     Mota  «o,  Mala- 
gasy voa,  fruit. 
hoi  2.  contraction  of  hou  2  and  locative  «.     hoi 
haha,    the   downward    side,    under   the 
earth;  hoi  sacka,  in  our  hearts. 
ho'i  3.  V.  i.,  to  wind.     cf.  'dliho'i;  ho'i  ue,  to 
roll  dyed  cane  to  make  hikei  ue.     \'atur- 
anga  hoi,  to  return;  Florida  goi,  again; 
Wango  ahoi,  return, 
ho'i  4.  U.,  V.  i.,  to  gather,  collect;  mu-anc  nga 
rurukonilcni  esi  ho'i  ha'aro'iau,  that  no 
collection  be  made  in  my  presence. 
hoiliwo  S.,  houliwo  U.,  a  hill. 
ho'itana   v.    tr.,    to   alter   the  nature   of.     cf. 

hu'itana. 
ho'ite'i  partic,  changed,  altered,     cf.  hu'iU'i. 


HOKA 


34 


hoka  1.  to  come  apart.  2.  to  have  a  hole  in 
the  bottom, 
hokasi  tr.,  to  burst,  to  split.  Florida  voka, 
to  come  open;  Lau  foga,  to  burst  open; 
Maori  fiokai,  to  spread  out;  Xiue  lioka, 
to  pierce. 

hola  1.  V.  i.,  to  spread. 

holasi  tr.     Maori  hora,  jnahora,  spread  out. 

hola  2.  %•.  i.,  to  spring  forth  in  a  jet.  Florida 
vora. 

hola  3.  V.  i.,  to  begin,  ha'ahola;  holai  na'o,  in 
former  times, 
hola'i  tr.,  atei  ni  e  hola'ie,  who  began  it. 
hola'i  partic,  used  as  adv.,  precedes  the 
verb:  formerly,  at  first,  e  hola'i  na'o 
'oto  wall,  he  first  led  the  way;  non  hola'i 
'uiiue,  I  first  said  it. 

holaa  1.  V.  i.,  to  be  calm  (of  the  sea) ;  aaii  e  repo 
kosi  holaa,  when  the  nuts  are  ripe  it  is 
calm  weather.  2.  n.,  a  calm,  hdi'holaa; 
holaa  tolo'iveru'e,  a  flat  calm.  E  Holaa, 
a  rock  on  the  west  coast  of  Ulawa  near 
the  south  cape, 
holaasi  tr.,  to  be  in  calm  weather,  e  hola- 
asire;  Met.  to  be  in  peace. 

holi,  holiholi  v.  tr.,  to  barter,  to  buy.     ha'ahoU; 
hire  to'oana  kejii  mwala  ko  holie,  they 
own  the  girl  v.'ho  is  being  bought. 
holinge  v.  n.,  a  sale. 
hohholinga  U.,  n.,  a  bought  dependent. 
holite-(ku),  holiholite  v.  n.,  price,  payment, 
holilana,  the  price  of  it,  its  being  sold. 
Mota  wol,    Malay  beli,  Malagasy  vily, 
Bugotu  voli. 

holo  v.  i.,  to  divide,  ha'aholo.  cf.  maholo, 
maaUholo,  monholo.  holo  'ahe,  to  divide 
the  waves  by  incantation  and  make  a 
way  for  a  canoe;  holo  onu,  to  divide  and 
cut  short;  'alo  holo,  to  cross  over  the 
sea;  Idngii  holo,  to  break  in  two;  'o  holo 
onu'e  qongiku  hao,  thou  hast  shortened 
my  days. 
holosi  tr.  1.  to  cut  a  piece  off.     2.  to  cross 

ov'er;  holosie  'asi,  to  cross  the  sea. 
holosila  (ku)     gerund.     Wango     horo,     to 
cross;  Mota  wolos,  to  cut  across;  Lau 
folo,  Makula  foro:   Florida  polo,  when. 

holosi  v.  tr.,  to  appoint,  to  assign. 

holota'ini  detorm.,  to  make  an  appoint- 
ment, to  agree  upon,  to  arrange,  cf. 
hd'iholola'i. 

holoholo  1.  n.,  interval,  part,  portion,  thing,  U. ; 
holoholo  i  sapeku,  S.,  my  duty;  ngaite 
holoholo,  U.,  a  different  thing.  2. 
irregular,  intermittent;  mala'i  holoholo, 
intermittent  fever.     3.  U.,  v.,  to  barter. 

honi  U.,  contraction  for  hoii  ni,  a,  one,  used  of 
fish;  honi  weieu,  a  bonito;  honi  mehu,  a 
mehu  fish. 

bono,  hohono  v.  i.,  to  shut,  to  shut  a  door.  cf. 
hd'ihonoa'i;  hono  sikihi,  to  shut  off  by 
itself;  hono  sisinge'i,  to  shut  out;  e  hono 
sisingana,  shut  him  in;  ape  hono,  to 
prevent;  ddu  hono,  S.,  to  hinder;  noru 
hono,  to  be  windbound;  susu  hono,  to 
heal  over  (of  a  sore). 
honosi  v.  tr.,  used  as  prep.,  to  meet,  opposed 
to,  over  against;  'ato  honosi,  to  oppose; 


hono,  hohono  (continued). 

hulo  honosi,  to  close  up  an  aperture; 
lae  honosi,  to  go  and  meet;  si'o  honosi,  to 
interrupt  with  questions;  susu  honosi, 
to  close  in  on;  'ure  honosi,  to  oppose. 
honota-(ku)  gerund.,  protecting,  guarding; 
e  palo  honotaka,  our  mediator;  para 
honotaka,  defend  us. 
honohonota  v.  n.,  a  shutter,  an  obstacle. 
Mota  wono,  Lau  fono,  Florida  vongo, 
Malagasy /owo. 

bona  1.  n.,  a  turtle;  honii  i'e,  green  turtle;  honu 
hapa,  hawksbill  turtle;  ha  pa  ni  honu, 
plates  of  turtle  shell;  tarihoa  honu,  to 
watch  for  turtles  on  the  sands,  cf. 
karenga.  popo  ni  honu,  tailpiece  of 
turtle  shell  used  for  nose-rings  at  Santa 
Cruz;  sii'ai  honu,  a  summerset.  Nifilole 
fonu,  Malagasy  fano. 

honu  2.  v.  i.,  to  be  full,  ha'ahonu;  honu 
makeato,  full  to  overflowing;  ere  ani 
le'u  honu,  to  boast;  hera  honu,  a  con- 
gregation; i'e  honu,  a  hundred  fish- 
teeth;  honu,  honu  leu'ae,  poro  ni  tolo 
e  hule  'oto  pe'i  oqai  poo,  a  catch  said 
when  filling  a  bamboo  rata  at  a  spring, 
fill,  fill  quickly,  a  hill  man  has  arrived 
bearing  a  pig's  entrails. 
honulaa  v.  n.,  a  crowd,  a  company, 
honule'i  partic,  filled,  full.  Wango  hoyiu, 
honurai,  Florida  vonu,  Motu  honu. 

honu  3.  honu  ako,  to  have  pulmonary  disease. 

hoo  1.  exclam.,  of  contempt,  of  disbelief. 

bo'o,  bo'oho'o  2.  v.  tr.,  to  bind. 
ho'onga  v.  n.,  a  binding. 
ho'osi  tr. 

ho'osila-(ku)   gerund. 
iho'o  n.,  a  bundle.     Wango  hoo. 

bo'oho'odara  n.,  a  wreath,  a  crown,     cf.  dara. 

hoowa  S.,  n.,  morning,  between  8  and  10.  cf. 
hu'o  2;  ddngi  hoowa,  the  next  day;  ke 
haro  hoowa  kd'u,  as  soon  as  it  is  light. 

hora  (ku)  1.  prep.,  over  against,  in  order  to 
get,  for;  horana  i  ola,  over  against  such- 
and-such  a  place;  horana  nga  laa,  what 
for?  2.  U.,  ha'alu  horana,  to  swear  by 
a  thing  or  person;  3.  U.,  concerning. 
Fagani  fora,  subject  to,  under  the  rule 
of;  horana  mwa  alalia,  under  the  power 
of  the  chiefs. 

boraa'i  v.  tr.,  to  turn  round  (of  objects). 
boraa'ini  tr. 

horabora'apu'i  R.,  n.,  first  fruits  of  nuts  and 
yams.     cf.  'apu  2. 

bora'i  hd'ihora'i,  partic,  to  be  daybreak,  cf. 
'auhora. 

boro,  horohoro  v.  i.,  to  beat,  to  strike,  to  kill; 
horo  'asi,  to  destroy  utterly;  horo  ni 
loloto  i  purine  maeta,  to  kill  a  man  in 
order  that  men  may  bathe  after  cele- 
brating a  death  feast;  horo  mwamwaki, 
to  kill  wantonly;  horo  suuhe'ini,  to  kill 
out,  to  destroy;  horo  suulana,  to  kill 
in  revenge;  horo  i  tala,  to  kill  to  avenge; 
horo  tala'alasi,  to  kill  without  mercy; 
hire  lahoa  nana  mwala  e  holo. 
koronga    v.    n.    murder,    killing;    koronga 


35 


HUHUDARO 


horo  horohoro  (continued). 

maapala,    murder;    hnronga    i    lalada, 
revenge   for   them;    liorouga  talaraaraa, 
indiscriminate  slaughter. 
horotaa  v.  n.,  murder,  kilhng. 
horo'i  tr.,  hii'ihoro'i. 

hota  1.  'aehota,  lalaa'eliula,  to  begin.  Mota 
wot  a. 

hota  2.  hola  ni  mwatie,  all  the  boys  who  are 
eligible  for  ha'amalaohu;  e  tnou  ue  ena 
ngaini  ka'a  hola  ni  tnwane  lo'u,  e  tnou 
ana  IVateha'aodo,  it  is  still  in  desuetude, 
no  boys  are  initiated  into  bonito  catch- 
ing, it  ceased  with  Wateha'aodo.  M.  A., 
p.  234. 

hote  1.  V.  i.,  to  paddle,  to  row  a  boat  (late  use). 
2.  n.,  a  paddle,  an  oar;  hote  ani  henue,  a 
paddle;  hote  ni  haka,  an  oar;  hote  ni 
vionaki,  bone  of  the  cuttlefish;  pdlupelu 
ni  hote,  handle  of  the  paddle;  larasie  'asi 
ana  hote,  to  feather  the  oar. 
hotenga     v.     n.,     paddling,     rowing;     ayii 

hotenga.  by  paddling. 
hotela'ini   tr.,    to  propel  by  paddling,    by 

rowing. 
hotela-(ku)     gerund.     Mota    wose,    Motu 
hode,  Maori  hoe. 

hoto  n.,  a  gourd  used  to  hold  lime  for  betel 
chewing;  hoi  hena  hoto,  a  lime  gourd. 

hotohoto  1.  to  shake  (of  gourd  or  bottle).     2.  to 
rattle   the  spatula  in  the   lime  gourd; 
e  hotohoto  ana  lo'u  hoi  sehu. 
hoto'i,  hotohoto'i  tr. 
hotohoto'i  U.  V.  i.,  to  swing. 

hotohotomolita'a  U.,  round  in  shape,     cf.  moli. 

hoto'i  to  bore  (of  beetles  or  worms  in  wood) ; 
hoii  e  holo'ie,  it  is  wormeaten. 

hou  1.  article,  a;  more  frequently  used  in 
Ulawa;  with  genitive  tii  contracted  to 
honi,  U-;  probably  connected  with  hoi  1. 
Iwii  atea,  a  coconut  water-bottle;  hou 
kao,  a  bottom  plank  in  a  canoe;  honi 
mehu,  a  mehu  fish;  hou  mei,  an  ebb  tide; 
hou  ola,  a  thing  of  a  round  shape;  hou 
pua,  an  areca  nut;  mai  yiga  hou  pua,  give 
an  areca  nut;  houhi,  a  yam;  hou  wei,  a 
bamboo  for  carrying  water;  honi  weieu, 
a  bonito. 

hou  2.  S.,  adv.,  down:  not  used  of  direction; 
with  locative  i  contracts  to  hoi.  siho 
hou,  lae  hou,  to  descend;  hoi  sae,  in  the 
heart;  hoi  'ano,  underground. 

hou  3.  dry  rot,  worm  in  wood,  hou  e  hoto'ie. 

hou  4.   V.  i.,   to  proclaim,  to  be  proclaimed; 
e     hou     lilikeli,     hou     keli,     proclaimed 
abroad, 
houle'i  partic,  proclaimed,  made  public. 
houle'ini  tr.,  to  proclaim,  to  tell  out. 
houle'imla-(ku)    gerund.     Kagani  fou. 

hou  5.  U.,  dem.  pron.,  this,  these,  cf.  nihou. 
laa  hou,  vocative  you! 

houhou  n.,  a  bier. 

houlaa  v.  n.,  a  feast;  diiu  houlaa,  to  have  a 
feast,    hou  4. 

houlana  n.,  fame,  kingdom;  a  Wango  word 
hourana. 

Houlanga  a  proper  name. 


houliwo  U.,  hoiliwo  S.,  n.,  a  hill. 

huasa  n.,  a  crocodile.  Mota  vua,  crocodile, 
puasa  lizard;  Malagasy  buaya.  crocodile. 

Hu'atea  a  rock  off  Cape  Arona,  Ulawa. 

hudi  1.  n.,  banana;  hoi  hudi,  a  banana  fruit; 
hudi  lolaka,  a  variety  with  erect  bunch, 
plantain;  hudi  ni  haka,  introduced 
banana  (Musa  cavendishii);  hungui 
hudi,  a  bunch  of  bananas;  langisi  hudi. 
a  hand  of  bananas;  pi'e  ni  hudi,  pi'ei 
hudi,  banana  sucker;  yiga  hudi  e  mala 
'asi'a,  the  bananas  are  rotting  away 
unpicked.  Florida  vudi,  V'iti  vundi. 
Niue  fuli,  Motu   dui,  Malagasy  ontsy. 

hudi  2.  S.,  first  and  second  days  of  the  moon. 

hudihudi  n.,  a  stripe,  bruise,  weal. 

hudihudi'e  adj.,  bruised  (of  the  body). 

hue  S.,  hua  U.  (na)  1.  article,  a,  one,  used  of 
fruits  only;  huana  i'ada,  the  fruit  of 
their  womb;  huani  'ei,  U.,  fruit;  huesi 
dango,  kidney  {si  genitive) ;  kau  mei  nga 
hue,  give  me  one.  Wango  hua,  Mota 
woai,  fruit;  Motu  huahua,  fruit;  Maori 
hua,  Malay  buwah.  cf.  pue.  See  M.  L., 
p.  71. 

hu'e  S.,  hu'a  U.  2.  a  married  woman,  wife; 
women  in  general  in  distinction  from 
mwane,  male;  the  demonstrative  na, 
S.,  ni,  U.,  may  be  added,  a  hu'ena, 
the  woman,  lo'o  hu'e,  to  be  married; 
to'o  hu'anga,  v.  n.,  the  being  married; 
sike  hu'e,  to  divorce  a  woman;  sike 
hu'anga,  v.  n.,  divorce;  e  lio  hunie  hunt 
hu'e  nana,  he  chooses  her  for  his  wife; 
lio  hilisie  huni  hu'e  i'oe,  choose  her  for 
your  wife;  hu'e  kire  konie  mola,  a  con- 
cubine; la'e  hu'a  saena  e  diena,  there's  a 
good-hearted  woman. 

hu'e  3.  v.  tr.,  to  carry  suspended  from  the  head 
as  native  women  do.  Xiue  fua,  to 
carry  on  the  shoulder;  Motu  huai,  to 
carry  from  the  shoulder. 

hu'e  4.  V.  i.,  to  reverse;  hu'e  asi,  to  overturn, 

to  overthrow;  hu'e  hau,  to  dig  up  stones 

suitable  for  use  in  cooking  hdhi;  hu'e 

tekela'ini,  to  uproot  and  destroy. 

hu'eli  tr.,  hu'eli  'ato'ato,  to  wind  rolls  of 

dyed  cane, 
hu'esi  tr.   1.  to  reverse;  hu'esi  'elinge,  to 
turn  the  ear  to.     2.  to  open  a  native 
oven. 
hu'esila-(ku)  gerund. 

hu'eta'ini  U.,  tr.,  to  reverse.  Xiue  veu,  to 
uncover;  Mota  sug,  to  dig  up,  uqa.  to 
lever,  vul-uqa-uqa,  to  dig;  Wango  huke. 
reverse;  F'lorida  vuka;  Maori  hua,  lever, 
overturn;  huke,  dig  up;  Malay  bukai, 
open;  Sulu  ukai;  \'iti  Uvuka,  open. 
huehue    (na)    fruit,    mu    huehuci    ola,    fruits; 

huehuana,  its  fruit, 
huhu  1.  V.  i.,  to  leak,  to  drip,  to  spill  out. 

huhusi  tr.,   to  pour  upon.     Wango  huhu, 
spill;  Lau  fufusi,  to  sow  broadcast, 
huhu  2.  V.  i.,  huhu  la'ola'o  ana  wa'i,  to  be  in 

contortions  with  tetanus, 
huhu  3.  V.  i.,  to  pluck,  to  pick  off. 
huhudaro  U.,  v.  i..  to  smite,  strike,     daro. 


HUHUNU 


36 


huhunu  1.  V.  tr.,  to  poison  fish  with  pounded 
leaves  of  Barringtonia.  2.  n.,  dynamite 
used  to  shoot  fish  with.  Mota  vun, 
to  poison  fish;  Efate  bitnii,  death; 
Florida  hunu,  leaven. 

huhurere'a  adj.,  dazzling  white,     cf.  rere'a. 

hui  1.  n.,  taro  (Caladium  csculentum) ;  hid 
kerekere,  a  taro  shot  with  veins;  hiii  ni 
viata7va,  giant  caladium,  the  only  kind 
grown  on  Ulawa;  nisi  hui,  to  pull  taro 
for  eating;  poe  hui,  to  pull  wild  taro; 
tapali  hui,  to  cut  off  the  leaves  of  taro; 
to'oni  hui,  to  plant  taro;  'iisu  hui,  to 
grate  taro. 

hu'i  2.  S.,  adj.,  troublous,     hi'u  2.  U.;  mii  ola 
hu'ihu'i,  dangers,  difficulties,  hard  cir- 
cumstances. 
hu'ihu'inge  v.  n.,  hele  hti'ihu'inge,  unprofit- 
ableness. 
hu'isi  tr.,  to  turn  over,  to  reverse,  to  turn 
toward,    to   change   the   nature   of,    to 
harm;  ddu  hu'isi,  to  overthrow,  to  put 
to  wrong  use,  to  bring  to  naught;  hele 
hu'isie  nga  le'u,  to  err  in  anything. 
hu'isila-(ku)   gerund. 
hu'itana  tr.,  to  change,  to  alter  the  nature 

of.     cf.  ho'ilana. 
hu'ite'i,  hu'ihu'ite'i  partic,  upset,  undone, 
altered,     cf.  ho'ite'i;  e  ka'a  me'i  ola  ke 
hu'ihu'ite'i,  unchangeable;  saeku  e  hu'i- 
te'i, my  heart  is  undone.     Mota  vusiag. 

hu'i  3.  V.  tr.,  to  pour  water  on.     Mota  viivui. 

hu'idada  U.,  v.  i.,  to  be  level,  smooth,    cf.  dada. 

hu'ihu'ite  S.,  a  marvel,  a  wonder,  a  miracle. 

hu'ine'i  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  warp,  to  wrest  aside. 

hulaa  S.,  hulahula  U.,  a  spring,  fountain,  hulaa 
ni  wei,  ivdi  hulahula.  cf.  hulehiile, 
hure'i.  Florida  vuravnra,  Mota  vura, 
Viti  vure,  Niue,  Mao.  puna. 

hulaaholaa  v.  i.,  to  be  full  (of  the  moon).  Mota 
vula,  moon;  Malagasy  volana. 

hule  S.,  hula  U.,  v.  i.  1.  to  arrive;  hule  dhu'i,  to 
come  for;  htde  odo'i,  to  arrive  and  find; 
hula  talahi,  to  fail  to  find  a  person  at 
home;  'asi  dodo  hule  i  one,  deep  water 
right  up  to  shore;  lai  hule,  to  reach;  nga 
hale  €  koru  hula  i  sinaha,  the  shed  was 
full  right  up  to  the  door;  lai  hulaana, 
till,  until. 
hule'ita-(ku)  gerund.,  up  to,  reaching  to. 
ha'ahule'ita.  sa'a  hule'ilana  ike  saena- 
naunge,  never  coming  to  wisdom, 
huleta'ini  tr.,  to  come  and  seek  for. 

hule  U.  2.  to  be  in  danger,   distress;  maenga 
hulahula,  U.,  danger, 
hulesi  tr.,  to  be  dangerously  ill;  e  hulcsie, 
he  has  a  bad  attack. 

hule  3.  a  convolvulus  growing  on  the  beaches; 
hule  e  'a'a  haahia  taoha,  the  convolvulus 
had  climbed  over  the  canoe  house. 

hulehule  (na,  ni)  1.  n.,  husks,  chaff;  hulehuleni, 
the  chaff. 

hulehule  S.,  hulahula  U.  2.  n.,  water  springs, 
mu  hulehule.  cf.  hulaa,  hure'i.  Florida 
'oure,  Viti  vure,  Mota  vura,  Dyak  pura. 

hulemotaa  S.  v.  i.,  to  be  in  agony,     cf.  molaa. 

huli  1.  V.  tr.,  to  overtake,  to  overcome. 


huli  (ku)  2.  S.,  a  bed,  a  mat.     hulite,  S. 

huli  3.  huli  nume,  S.,  the  site  of  a  house,  house 
plat,  cf.talahuli.   Lau/wiZ/erca  \-illage. 

hulihuli  n.,  a  black  biting  ant. 

hulite  (ku)  S.,  a  bed,  a  mat.     huli  2.  U. 

hulo  1.  n.,  a  sponge,  a  towel  (late  use). 

hulosi  tr.,  to  wipe.     Samoa  solo,  Maori  horoi, 
Viti  vulo,  to  strain. 

hulo  2.  V.  i.,  hulo  honosi,  to  close  up  an  aperture. 

huluhilu  S.,  V.  i.,  to  make  a  sacrificial  oft'ering. 

hulumota'a  S.,  adj.,  hairy.  Mota  ului,  hair, 
Maori  huru. 

huna  U.,  hune,  S. 

hunata  v.  n.,  stakes  driven  to  moor  a  canoe, 
an  anchor  (late  use). 

hune  S.,  huna  U.  1.  to  anchor;  liki  hune,  S., 
riki  huna,  U.,  to  loosen  mooring-stakes, 
to  get  up  anchor.  2.  to  hang  up,  to 
display;  hune  haa,  to  hang  up  and  dis- 
play the  bridal  moneys  at  the  home  of 
the  bride,  to  conduct  the  initial  cere- 
mony of  a  wedding. 
hunesi  tr.  1.  to  anchor.  2.  to  display 
wedding  moneys.  Wango  huna,  Maori 
punga,  anchor. 

hune  S.  3.  a  snare,  a  gin.  lolohuna,  U.  lolosi 
hune,  to  set  a  trap;  toli  hune,  to  lay  a 
snare.     Wango  huna. 

huni  (au)  S.  1.  dative  preposition,  for,  to;  hunt 
lu'ue  mo  ola  ineu,  to  remove  mj'  goods; 
huni  lengu  ha'aodohie  'aeka,  to  guide 
our  feet;  dau  toli  huni,  to  submit  to,  to 
be  subject  to;  e  hai  lalamoa  e  mae  hunia 
Qai,  four  dead  men  for  Qai  to  pay  a  fine 
for;  e  ka'a  hunie  ike  maenga,  not  unto 
death;  kire  husingi'i  hunien,  I  have 
become  accustomed  to  it;  lae  huni'i,  go 
to  fetch  them;  le'u  noko  lae  hunie,  the 
place  whither  I  go;  lio  hilisie  huni  hue 
i'oe,  choose  her  for  your  wife;  lio  huni, 
to  choose;  e  lio  hunie  htini  hu'c  nana,  he 
chose  her  for  his  wife;  lio  huni  maa,  to 
exercise  partiality;  masi  huni,  to  commit 
adultery  with;  qdlu  huni,  to  conceive 
by  a  person;  ke  sdune  huni  ke  mae,  to  be 
well  mashed.  Mota  mun,  Ulawa  muni. 
2.  adv.,  in  order  that,  muni,  U.:  also  as 
an  optative;  huni  ke  lae  mai,  that  he 
may  come, 
hunie  adv.,  in  order  that;  himie  esi  hule 
'ulu  'ie,  that  he  should  be  born  blind 
thus.     Wango  huni.     ha'ihuni. 

huni  (ku)  3.  U.,  skin  disease,  ring\vorm;  huniku, 
my  ringworm, 
hunila,    adj.,     suffering    from    ringworm. 
Niue  matafune. 

huni  4.  ha'ihuni,  U.,  hdrihuni,  S.,  v.  tr.,  to 
desire,  to  wish  for. 

hunu  1.  v.  tr.,  to  cut  up  an  animal;  hunu  poo, 
to  butcher  a  pig;  kira  hunu  poo  mala 
ideni,  tomorrow  they  kill  the  pigs. 
Malagasy  vono,  to  kill;  Borneo  hunoh. 

hunu  2.  S.,  n.,  a  mast. 

hunu,  huhunu  3.  v.  i.,  to  poison  fish  with 
Barringtonia  leaves. 

hunu  4.  dio  hunu,  to  swoop  (of  pigeons);  die 
hunu  ni  sae,  to  be  faint-hearted,  to  faint. 


37 


HU  UTALA 


hungao-(ku)    n.,   brother-in-law,   sister-in-law. 
ntwane  or  keni  added   for  distinction; 
hungaona,  used  with  ro  ha'i  or  ro  vta: 
ro  ha'i  hungaona,  U.,  ro  ma  hungaona,  S., 
brothers-in-law,  sisters-in-law.     Wango 
hungo,  Lau  fnngo,  Maori  hiinaonga. 
hunge  S.,  hunga  U.,  many,  enough,  too  much, 
to  abound,   ha'ahunge.    mn  dinge  hunge, 
many  days. 
hungehunga'a    adv.,    frequently.     Wango 
hunga,  Maori  hunga,  a  company, 
hungehunga'a  S.,  adj.,  used  as  noun,  hillock. 

Wango  hungahunga. 
hungu,  hunguhungu  1.  to  bear  fruit.     2.  n.,  a 
bunch  of  fruit;  hungui  hudi,  a  bunch  of 
bananas. 
hunguha  U.,  v.  n.,  a  fruiting, 
hungunge    S.,    v.    n.,    a    fruiting;    kire   ko 
mwamwasu'i     eni     hungunge,     become 
unfruitful, 
hunguta  U.,  v.  n.,  a  bunch;  hungutani  pua, 
a  bunch  of  areca  nuts.     Viti  bunua,  a 
bunch   of   nuts;    Florida   vungu,    Mota 
rung,   Samoa   punupunu,   a   cluster   of 
parasitical  plants;  Borneo  bunga,  flower. 
hu'o  1.  n.,  fishing-net,  seine;    hu'o  ni  moke,  a 
casting  net;  'alo  hu'o,  to  set  a  net;  'ato 
hu'onga,  a  plot;  e  soda  ana  hu'o,  he  fell 
into  the  net;  tola  hu'o,  to  set  a  snare  for; 
•wd'i  haahie  ana   hu'o,   to  draw  a  net 
about.     Florida  vugo,  Motu  huo,  kan- 
garoo net. 
t'o  2.  ha'chu'o,  to  come  early  in  the  morning. 
mahu'ohu'o,  dawn,  early  morning. 
hu'ori  Hu'oriara,  a  proper  name.Early-afoot. 
hure  S.,  v.  i.,  mivaa  e  hure  ana,  he  was  eaten  of 

«■>■      worms, 
hure'i,  hure'ihure'i  1.  v.  i.,  to  gush  out.     cf. 
hulaa,  hulehule  2.    e  hure'i  ta'a  ana  hdu, 
to  gush  forth  from  the  rock.    Mota  vura. 
hure'i  2.  hure'i  lade,  name  of  a  month,  July. 
huresoso  n.,  white  shell  discs  used  in  ornamen- 
tation with  haa  and  malo,  used  also  to 
finish  off  the  ends  of  strings  of  money. 
huri  V.  tr.,  to  cut  in  sections;  malo  hurt,  black 
bugles  cut  from  a  creeper  and  used  in 
ornament.     Florida  vuri. 
hurihuri  U.,  to  wallow,  of  a  pig. 
huro,  mahuro  adj.,  disturbed,  upset  in  mind. 
hurosi  tr.,  to  upset  the  mind,  to  disturb,  to 
whirl  about  as  surf;  'ahe  ko  hurosieu,  the 
stream  whirls  me  about. 
hiirosila-(ku)  gerund. 
huru,  huruhuru  v.  i.,  to  run;  huru  ni  'elinge,  to 
race;  huruhuru  meumeuri'e,  to  be  living. 
hurunge  v.  n.,  running;  hdli  ana  hurunge, 

foot  racing;  ohoa  hurunge,  to  race, 
hurunge'ini  tr.,  to  run  and  carry, 
hurulaa  \-.  n.,  a  messenger. 
huruhuru  a  bridge,  a  tree  fallen  over  a  stream, 

ladder. 
husingi  v.  tr.,   to  make  accustomed;  kire  hu- 
singi'i   hunieu,  I    have  become    accus- 
tomed to  it. 


hute,  hutehute  S.  huta  U..  to  be  born,    ha'ahute. 
e  hute  talaltie  qongine,  born  out  of  due 
time;   hunie  esi  hute   'ulu'   ie,    that   he 
should  be  born  blind  thus, 
hutanga  v.  n.,  birth, 
hutaa,  hutelaa  v.  n.,  generation,  birth. 
hutela-(ku)    gerund  ,    being    born,    birth. 
Mota  wot  a;   Xiue  mafula,  emerge, 
huto    1.    cuscus,    phalangcr.      M.   A.,    p.    17. 

Wango  huto. 
huto  2.  v.  i.,  to  swarm  (of  ants,  etc.). 
hutohuto  (na)    1.   froth,   foam.     Wango  huto- 

huto,  Viti  vuto. 
hutohuto  2.  name  of  a  month,  June, 
huu  1.  n.,  a  group,  a  bunch,  with  genitive  i; 
huui  'ae,  excrement;  huui  alaha,  a  chiefly 
family;  huui  edi,  a  bunch  of  leaves  used 
as  a  tabu  sign;  hutii  eu,  a  stool  of  bam- 
boos; huti  ni  kana,  a  group  of  singers; 
huui   keu,    branching    coral;    hutii   lue. 
shoulder  of  pork;  huui  lume,  huu  lume, 
collection  of  houses,  village;  huui  sata, 
the   heel;   huui   tomwaso,   a   thicket   of 
tomwaso  bushes.     Viti  vtUu,  plenty  of; 
Maori  pu,  tribe,  bunch, 
huu     2.     adj.,     real,     permanent,     ha'ahuu'e. 
awala  'oto  huu,  U.,  awala  ha'ahuu,  S.,  a 
full  ten;  hanue  huu,  solid  land,  dry  land, 
heritage;  hele  huu,  to  inherit;  i'o  huu,  to 
abide   forever;   mwado  huu,    the  earth; 
'oyii  huu  'oto  ana,  to  be  settled  therein; 
'oto  huu,  U..  forever;  te'ete'e  huu,  forever, 
abiding,     for     good,     finally.     Wango 
hnuna,  real;  Samoa  fulu,  to  be  a  long 
time;  Mota  tur,  real;  Viti  vu,  bottom, 
root;    Niue  fu,    trunk,    cause;    Florida 
puku,  real, 
huu  3.  v.  i.,  to  be  sad;  sae  huu,  to  grieve;  sae 
huunge,   grief.     Viti   ku,   to   be   angry; 
Motu  hu,  to  look  angry. 
huu  4.  n.,  a  littoral  tree  (Barringtonia  speciosa) ; 
hoi   huu,    its    fruit;    huhunu.  roma,    to 
stupefy     fish     therewith.     Mota     vut, 
Viti  vulu. 
hu'u  5.  a  cough,  to  cough.     Mota  vur,  Viti  vu, 

Motu  hua. 
huuhuu  to  gush  forth  in  a  jet;  wdi  e  huuhuu 
'oto,  the  water  spurted  out;  huuna  wdi, 
U.,  fountain  head.     Bugotu  fuufutu,  a 
spring. 
huuilume,  huulume  S.,   a  village,     cf.   nume. 
uunu    tara'a    huuilume,    bum    up    the 
village. 
huule'ini  v.  tr.,  to  chop  down,  to  fell  a  tree; 

'aihu,  U.,  uprooted, 
huuraro  n.,  rainbow:  if  pointed  at  {usii'i)  bad 

luck  results. 

hu'usi,  hu'uhu'usi  v.  tr.,  to  detach  'oha  from 
a    tree,    to    pluck    leaves,     cf.    'u'usi. 
Wango  huusi. 
hu'utala  U.  v.  i.,  to  miss  the  mark,  to  fail,  to 
be  in  vain.     lala. 


209220 


38 


i  1.  prep.,  locative;  always  used  before  names 
of  places,  also  with  adverbs  of  time  and 
direction;  itei,  where;  i  Sa'a,  i  homva, 
in  the  morning;  i  iiganite,  when,  with  a 
preceding  c  or  o  there  is  a  contraction 
to  i:  noko  lai  haka,  I  go  abroad;  lai  Sa'a, 
up  at  Sa'a;  hai  Alalaii,  down  at  Malau; 
laelae  »  rodo,  go  until  nightfall.  Forms 
the  compound  prepositions  ilengi  on; 
isiili,  according  to.  Used  in  phrases, 
t  ladoihaana,  in  a  line  with;  t  ladohaana, 
thereby;  *  noornhaana,  relying  on, 
because  of.     Florida  i,  Viti  i. 

i  2.  prep.,  genitive,  a  variant  of  ni;  joined  in 
pronunciation  to  the  preceding  word: 
poloi  haa,  a  strand  of  shell  money; 
qirei  eu,  a  stalk  of  bamboo.  Used  to 
express  purpose:  7ioko  lai  leesie,  I  go  to 
see  it.  Expresses  condition*  e  lai  'aela, 
it  is  bad;  e  la  'oto  i  diana,  it  is  good. 
Used  of  continued  action:  hoi  i'a  e  lae 
mat  i  rarada  i  saint  one,  the  fish  came 
and  grounded  on  the  beach.  Used 
after  tala'ae,  to  begin:  e  tala'ai  'aela, 
it  is  beginning  to  spoil.  Follows  ore, 
to  fail:  melu  orei  lae,  we  almost  went. 
Bugotu  i,  Lau  i. 

i  3.  instrumental  prefix  forming  noun  from 
verb:  ikeu,  a  crook;  idenu,  a  baler; 
idemu,  a  lime  spatula,  from  kdu,  ddnu, 
damn.  Mota  i,  4;  Viti  i;  Motu  i,  in 
igui,  a  bundle;  guia,  to  wrap;  ikoko,  a 
nail;  kokoa,  to  nail. 

i  4.  prefix  to  personal  and  demonstrative  pro- 
nouns: ineu,  i'oe,  inge'ie,  inihou.  Mota 
i  in  inau;  Maori  i  in  ikoe. 

i  5.  U.,  euphonic:  sdisemu,  reduplicated  from 
samu,  saisesu  from  sasu,  daide^iu  from 
danu. 

'i  6.  verbal  suffix,  horo  horo'i:  forms  a  parti- 
ciple, pele  pele'i.  Viti  i,  Maori  i  {pao, 
paoi),  Florida  gi. 

'1  7.  suffixed  to  poss.,  1.  sing.  1  and  2  and  dual, 
used  of  many  things  for  one  person  to 
eat,  moola  dku'i;  suffixed  to  poss.  2  and 
used  of  many  things  designed  for  one 
person;  ndku'i,  for  me.  Florida  gi,  Lau 
gi,  plural  sign. 

'i  8.  a  suffix  denoting  plurality,  used  of  things 
only;  lae  huni'i,  go  fetch  them;  dolali'i, 
among  them,     'i  7. 

'i  9.  suffixed  to  pers.  pron.,  dual  1  and  2  excl. 
iemere'i,  ikara'i,  U.,  hunireru'i. 

i'a  U.  cf.  i'e,  S. 

'i'aa  v.  i.,  to  be  lost,  missing,     'ai'aa. 

i'ami  U.,  pers.  pron.,  plur.  1  excl.:  we,  ours; 
when  used  as  subject  is  followed  by  'ami. 
Lau  igami,  Mota  ikamam. 

i'amu  U.  pers.  pron.,  plur.  2:  you,  yours;  more 
general  in  application  than  i'emeln; 
when  used  as  subject  is  followed  by  'amu. 

i'ano  adv.,  on  the  ground,  down;  mai  i'ano,  on 
the  earth;  with  demonstrative  na  added, 
i'anona,  in  that  soil;  of  direction,  west; 
haka  e  lai  qai  'ano,  the  ship  went  west. 

I'au  S.,  exclam.  of  assent. 


ida  U.  ida  'apala,  a  length  of  money  from  the 
finger  tips  to  the  opposite  shoulder,  a 
yard  and  a  quarter. 

idemu  n.,  a  lime  spatula,  damn,  idemu  ni 
loo,  a  lime  spatula  used  as  a  dagger  on 
a  person  who  is  scared  (loo)  and  hard 
to  get  near  but  who  is  enticed  by  the 
offer  of  areca  nut;  idemu  ke  suu  i  kalena, 
the  spatula  shall  pierce  his  gums. 

ideni  U.  tomorrow;  kira  hunu  poo  mala  ideni, 
tomorrow  they  kill  the  pigs. 

idenu  n.,  a  canoe  baler,     ddnu. 

idengi  S.,  tomorrow,     ddngi  1. 

idu,  iduidu  1.  v.  i.,  to  count;  iduidu  nume,  to 

gad  about  (Florida  idu  vale) ;  iduidu  mesi 

'ei,  U.,  jumped  about  on  the  firewood. 

idumi    tr.,    idumia   one,    countless    (count 

the  sand). 
idumila-(ku)  gerund. 

iduidunge     v.     n.,     numbering,     number. 
Florida  idu. 

idu,  iduidu  2.  to  be  weary  of  a  thing,  to  be  ill 
at  ease.     Florida  idu. 

idu  3.  n.,  a  drill. 

idule'ini  v.  tr.,  to  move  the  position  of  a  thing, 
to  ease  a  burden. 

'ie  1.  S.,  demonstrative  pron.,  this,  these;  fol- 
lows the  noun;  adverbially  used  as  here, 
now,  thus;  hunie  esi  hute  'ulu  'ie,  that 
he  should  be  born  blind  thus;  inge'ie 
'ie,  this  is  he;  maholo  'ie,  now;  ola'ie, 
this  thing;  'oto  'ie,  now;  'oto  mola  'ie, 
just  now.     Mota  ia,  Bintulu  ia. 

i'e  S.  i'a  U.  2.  a  fish,  a  fish  (porpoise)  tooth;  hoi 
i'e,  a  fish:  mu  i'e,  mwa  i'a,  plural;  used 
metaphorically  in  Ulawa  as  an  excla- 
mation of  astonishment  at  size,  a  big 
thing,  a  whopper!  nga  i'e,  100  por- 
poise teeth  on  a  cord  forming  a  unit 
of  money;  hoi  i'a  e  lae  mai  i  rarada  i 
saini  one,  the  fish  came  and  grounded 
on  the  beach;  i'e  hdu,  a  stone  fish;  i'e 
honu,  100  fish  teeth;  i'e  'inoni,  a  fish 
caught  with  a  scoop  net;  i'e  ni  sane, 
sea-bream  {nate)\  i'e  ni  toli,  deep-sea 
fish;  Aru  ni  i'e,  honorific  phrase  of  San 
Cristoval.  cf.  ha'addhi.  honu  i'e,  a 
green  turtle;  nihoi  i'e,  porpoise  teeth; 
palapala  ni  i'a,  a  nose  ornament  of 
shell  cut  in  the  form  of  a  frigate-bird; 
qa'ui  i'e  4  porpoise  teeth;  to'o,  to'oani 
i'e,  1,000  fish  teeth;  waawaatani  i'a, 
pieces  of  fish.     Mota  iga,  Maori  ika. 

'ie  S.  'ia  U.  (ku)  3.  belly,  womb,  'iana,  S.,  'iena, 
U.,  'iana  e  maelo,  pregnant;  'ieku  e  too, 
I  am  sick  at  the  stomach.  Mota  tiana, 
pregnant;  Bugotu  tia,  Maori  tia,  Malay 
tia. 

ie'iola  v.  i.,  to  have  the  head  thrown  back. 

'i'eli  1.  v.  tr.,  to  plait.  2.  n.,  a  rope;  radu 
moumousie  mu  'i'eli,  to  break  the  rope  in 
pieces.     Lau  inali,  Mota  tali,  Maori  tari. 

i'emelu  pers.  pron.,  plur.  1,  excl.;  we,  our;  more 
restricted  in  meaning  than  i'emi. 

i'emere,  i'emere'i  pers.  pron.,  dual  2.  excl.; 
we  two,  our;  when  used  as  subject  is 
followed  by  mere  or  mere'i  respectively; 
ola  i'emere'i,  a  thing  belonging  to  us  two. 


39 


IKDRE 


i'emeru,  i'emeru'e  S.,  same  as  i'emere. 

i'emi  pers.  pron.,  plur.  1.  excl.;  we,  our;  more 

general  in  meaning  than  i'emelu;  when 

used  as  subject  is  followed  by  'emi. 
i'emiu  U..  Mwado'a  dialect  for  i'atnti. 
i'emu  U..  Mwado'a  dialect  for  i'amu. 
'ienini  demonstrative  pron.,  this;  poro  'ienitii, 

this  man;  adverb  now,  'oto  tnola  'ienini, 

just  now. 
i  epi  (na)  beside  (of  things  only);  i  epine  ora, 

i  epine  lalo,  i  epiepi  ana,  contiguous  to. 

Maori  apili,  Malay  apil,  to  place  side 

by  side. 
ihaha  1.  adv.,  below,  underneath;  nidi  ihaha, 

on  earth.     2.  prep,  with  suffixed   pro- 
noun (ku);  ihahamu,  underneath  you; 

ihahana    salo,     under    the    sky.     Lau 

fafa.     haha. 
ihaho  1.  adv.,  over,  above;  ilengi  ihaho,  in  the 

sky    above.     2.     prep.,    with    suffixed 

pronoun    (few);    ihahomu,    above    you, 

over  your  head,     halio. 
ihe-(ku)  brother-in-law,  sister-in-law;  in  Ulawa 

the  personal  article  coalesces,  aiheku. 
ihana  ro  mwaihana,  S.,  ro  aihana,  U.,  two 

brothers-in-law  or  sisters-in-law.     Motu 

ihana,  brother-in-law. 
ihei    1.    interrog.    adv.,    where,     itei,    S.     2. 

interrog.  pron.,  which,  what,  whether, 

of  two;  'o'a  sare  ngdu  ihei,  what  will 

you  eat;  with  article  ngaihei,  mwaihei, 

who.     Mota  a-vea. 
ihei  3.  S.,  the  monitor  lizard  (Varanus  indicus). 
iho'o  n.,  a  bundle;  with  genitive  i,  iho'oi  ola,  a 

bundle  of  goods,     ho'o. 
ihu  (ku)   1.  n.,  hair,  feather;  with  genitive  i. 

waraihu,  U.     ihui  menu,  birds'  feathers; 

ihui  qe'u,  hair  of  the  head;  'olo  kou'e 

ihune,    shave   his   head    close.     Vatur- 

anga  ivu,  Motu  hui. 
ihu  2.  V.  i.,  to  cut,  to  chop  down;  ihu  wweha,  to 

cut  bamboos  for  fishing-poles. 
'i'i  1.  V.  tr.,  to  judge. 
•i'inge  v.  n.,  judgment. 
♦i'ila-(ku)  gerund. 
'i'i  2.  a  bird,  a  swift;  '»'»  ko  he'isu'u,  the  swift 

flits  from  tree  to  tree;  qaateru  a  'i'i,  a 

large  snail. 
'i'i  3.  ha'a'i'i,  to  set  a  high  price. 
'i'ile'i  partic,  loud,  resounding;  ngara  'i'ile'i,  to 

cry  aloud. 
'i'iloha  U.,  to  hesitate. 
'i'ite  1.  n.,  a  round  basket  plaited  of  a  coconut 

leaf  and  used  for  holding  yams. 
'i'ite  2.  v.  tr.,  to  find  fault  with,  to  censure. 
'i'ite'i    tr.,    'i'ite'i   wala,    to    strive    about 

words;     v.    n.,    'i'ite'i    walanga,    strife 

about  words. 
'i'ite'ini  tr. 

'i'ite'imla-(ku)  gerund. 
ika'elu  U.,  pers.  pron.,  plural  1.  inch:  we,  ours; 

more  restricted  in  meaning  than  iki'a; 

when   used   as  subject  is   followed   by 

ka'elu.     VVango  igau. 
ikao  1.  the  bottom,  at  the  bottom,     kao.     2. 

with   sufiixed    pronoun    {ku),    under   a 

person,  U.,  under  a  thing. 


ikara,  ikara'i  U.,  pers.  jiron.,  dual  l.incl.:  we 
two,  ours;  when  used  as  subject  is  fol- 
lowed by  kara  or  kara'i.  Mota  ikara 
excl. 

ike  S.,  negative  particle  following  closely  the 
negatives  ka'a  and  sa'a;  when  preceding 
word  ends  in  a,  ike  is  joined  in  pro- 
nunciation, e  ka'a  olaike,  there  is 
nothing  at  all;  e  ka'a  hunie  ike 
maenga,  not  unto  death;  e  ka'a  ivala- 
'anga  ike  nga  'inoni,  it  is  not  the  voice 
of  a  man;  nou  ka'a  manala'ie  ike,  I  do 
not  know;  sa'a  hide'ilana  ike  saena- 
naunge,  never  coming  to  wisdom. 

ikeke  1.  Ulawa,  Qaloto,  adv.,  beside,  outside, 
used  of  persons  and  things;  kira  konia 
ikeke,  they  excommunicated  him;  paro 
i  keke,  alongside.  2.  with  suffixed  pro- 
noun {ku),  prep.t  beside,  alongside,  of 
motion  toward,  to;  i  kekemic,  U.,  t  siemu, 
S.,  to  you; »  kekena  lala,  beside  the  path. 
3.  adv.,  behind;  lio  ikeke,  look  behind. 
Lau  gege. 

ikereru'e  S.,  ikireru'i  U.,  pers.  pron.,  dual  3, 
they  two,  their;  when  used  as  subject 
is  followed  by  kereru'e  or  kireru'i. 

ikeu  S.,  ikau  U.,  n.,  a  stick  with  a  hook,  a  crook 
with  which  to  twitch  off  fruit  and  leaves. 
kdu  1 . 

'iki,  'iki'iki  1.  to  knock  with  the  knuckles.     2.  to 
beat  a  wooden  drum  with  a  spathe  of 
sago  palm, 
'ikinge  v.  n. 
'ikingi  tr. 

'ikila-(ku)  gerund.     Florida  gidigidi,  Mota 
ni^tgi. 

iki'e  S.,  iki'a  U.,  pers.  pron.,  plural  1.  incl.:  we, 
ours;  more  general  in  meaning  than 
ikolii,  etc.;  when  used  as  subject  is 
followed  by  ki'e  or  ki'a.     Florida  igita. 

ikira'elu  pers.  pron.  plureil  3,  they,  theirs;  more 
restricted  in  meaning  than  ikire;  when 
used  as  subject  is  followed  by  kira'elu. 

ikire  S.,  ikira  U.,  pers.  pron.,  plural  3:  they, 
theirs;  used  also  as  meaning  "and  the"; 
hahira  diana  ikire  nga  muini  lo'u  ka'a 
diana,  on  the  good  and  the  bad.  Araga 
ikera. 

ikire'i  U.,  as  ikira,  but  not  used  of  persons; 
ikire' ini,  those  are  they. 

ikireni  U.,  as  ikira,  but  not  used  of  persons. 

ikireru'e  S.,  pers.  pron.,  dual  3,  they  two, 
theirs;  when  used  as  subject  is  followed 
by  kireru'e. 

ikolu  S.,  pers.  pron.,  plural  1,  incl.:  we,  ours; 
when  used  as  subject  is  followed  by  kolu. 

ikoro,  ikoro'i  U.,  pers.  pron.,  dual  3,  they  two, 
theirs;  when  used  as  subject  is  followed 
by  koro,  koro'i. 

ikule  1.  ashore;  td'i  kulc,  on  the  shore;  lai  kule, 
to  go  up  ashore. 

ikule  2.  v.  i.,  to  hiccough. 

ikule 'i  partic,  disturbed  in  mind;  saena  e 
ikule' i,  his  mind  was  upset. 

ikure  S.,  pers.  pron.,  dual  1,  incl.:  we  two,  ours; 
when  used  as  subject  is  followed  by 
kure. 


I  LADOHAANA 


40 


i  ladohaana  S.,  thereby,     cf.  lado. 

i  lado'ihaana  S.,  joining  onto  it,  in  a  line  with. 

cf.  lado. 
ilala  V.  i.,  to  take  an  augurj-,  to  test  a  path  by 
using  dracaena  leaf  {'apai  dili)  in 
hdhuto'o.  Lau  inala,  Wango  irara,  to 
perceive. 
ilalo  adv.,  within,  inside;  in  Ulawa  ku  is  suf- 
fixed, but  for  reasons  of  deUcacy  Sa'a 
prefers  the  poss.  3,  ilalo  akii.  paro  ilalo, 
on  the  inside;  ilalo  atta  ynu  'inonl,  in 
man. 
ila'o  adv.,  in,  inside;  used  also  with  suffixed 
pronoun  na,  ni;  ila'o  i'ola,  in  the  canoe; 
paro  i  la'ona,  U.,  on  the  inside;  ila'oni, 
plural,  used  of  things  only;  ila'ona 
ma'iisu,  within  the  forest,  la'o  3. 
lie  1.  V.  i.,  to  produce  fire  by  rubbing  a  stick 
in  a  groove;  He  dunge,  a  stick  of  hard- 
wood is  rubbed  quickly  to  and  fro  in  a 
groove  made  in  a  piece  of  soft  wood, 
dust  accumulates  at  the  outer  end  of 
the  groove  and  soon  begins  to  smoulder, 
the  dust  is  transferred  to  a  piece  of 
coconut  husk  which  serves  as  tinder 
{hehe) . 
ile  2.  U.,  n.,  one,  thing  or  person;  the  articles 
nga  and  mwa  are  prefixed  and  coalesce, 
ngaile,  nga  mwaile;  ile  inaii,  my  one, 
mine;  ile  keni,  female;  ile  mwane,  male; 
He  uritaha,  what  one;  mwanganga  ni  ile, 
a  few  persons;  ta'e  'enita  ile,  just  a  few. 
ile  3.  n.,  Pandanus  odoratissimus :  hoi  'He,  its 

fruit.     Mota  gire. 
'ile  4.  stone  axe.     Lau  kila,  Florida  kila,  Motu 
Ha,  Alu,  Shortland  Islands,  kiUfela,  flint. 
ilehu  U.,   adv.,   here;   paro  Helm,   over  here; 
with  demonstrative  na,  ni,  added;  ile- 
huna,    ilehuni,    there,    in    that    place. 
Idhu  4. 
ile  e  ilele  malo,  to  gasp,  to  pant. 
ileli  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  distinguish. 
ilenimwa'e,  ileilenimwa'e  v.  i.,  to  rejoice. 

ilenimwa'enga  v^  n.,  joy.     mwa'e  1. 
ilengi   1.   adv.,   above,   on   top,   sky,   heaven, 
ashore,  inland;  ilengi  ihaho,  in  the  sky 
above.     2.  prep,  with  suffixed  pronoun 
(ku);  Hengiku,  on  me;  e  loho  ilengine, 
he  swooped  down  on  it;  ta'e  ilengine, 
mount  up  on  it. 
ile'u    S.    adv.,    here;    with   demonstrative   na 
added:  mai  ile'u,  this  way;  ko  nisi  'oto 
ile'u,  this  is  the  boundary;  ile'une,  there; 
hd'i  le'une,  down  there,     le'u. 
ili  1.  adv.,  precedes  verb;  merely,  only,  barely: 
uri   'o  ka'a   'am'amasie  kalemu  ana   'o 
ili  ta'e,  are  you  not  sorry  for  your  son 
in  that  you  alone  are  mounted? 
ili  2.  V.  tr.,  Hi  mango,  to  draw  in  the  breath. 
ili  3.  n.,  swordfish:  an  imitation  is  made  of  wood 
and  is  used  as  a  receptacle  for  dead 
bodies.     M.  A.,  p.  261. 
ilisi  S.,  V.  tr.,  to  choose.     Wango  irisi. 
'ilisi'e  S.,  adj.,  separated;  'Hisi'e  'omu,  ye  by 

yourselves. 
iloilo'a  n.,  a  large  red  parrot,  the  female  of  'a'a. 
New  Guinea  electus. 


ilolo  1.  n.,  a  bowstring,  ilolo  ni  pesi.     2.  U., 

V.  tr.,  to  string  a  bow,  kira  ilolo  pdsi. 
ilu  U.,  V.  i.,  to  sup;  ilu  piinga,  to  sup  yam  soup. 
cf.  inu. 
iluhi  tr. 
imaa  n.,  turtle-shell  barb  tied  on  the  bonito 

hook   ipasa) .     maa. 
i  maana  prep.,  on  account  of;  i  niaana  nga  ta'a, 

wherefore,  maa. 
'ime  n.,  the  bears-paw  clam  (Chamasp.);  la'o, 
a  frontlet  carved  therefrom;  'ima  awa, 
U.,  yellow  in  color;  'ima  ereie'a,  U., 
white  clam;  'ima  pulu,  U.,  dark  in 
color;  'ima  susu,  U.,  a  clam  difficult  to 
detach;  'iina  siisulu,  U.,  a  clam  easily 
detached.  Mota  gima,  Maori  kim.a. 
imiimi  n.,  a  root;  with  suffixed  pronoun  na,  ni, 

iftiiimine  dango,  root  of  a  tree, 
ina'o  adv.,  before,  formerly;  'eta  ina'o,  to  be 
in  the  lead:  with  'oto  1.,  'oto  ina'o,  for- 
merly; with  suffixed  pronoun,  ina'oku, 
before  me;  ina'ona  mti  maholo,  in  former 
times,  na'o. 
ine  1.  v.  i.,  to  take  root  (of  yams,  etc.);  esi  kele 

ine,  it  has  just  taken  root, 
ine  2.  U.,  demonstrative  pronoun,  that;  mwai 
lehu  ine,  those  places;  'osi  hele  hinoli'a 
taha  ine,  how  w'ell  you  have  done  it. 
Bintulu  ina. 
inehu'i  v.  tr.,  to  wrap  up  a  parcel  in  leaves,  to 

wrap  up  food  in  leaves  for  the  oven, 
inemae  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  an  orphan,  to  be  bereft 
of    parents.     2.    n.,    an    orphan.     Lau 
inemae.     ine  1. 
inemauri  1.  v.  i.,  to  rule,  to  govern.     2.  n.,  a 

ruler,  ine  1. 
ineu  S.,  inau  U.,  pers.  pron.,  sing.  1, 1:  used  as 
subject  only  and  followed  by  nou,  S., 
and  nau,  U.;  ile  inau,  my  one,  mine; 
Mota  inau,  Florida  inau. 
ini  1.  S.,  n.,  a  person,  one  (thing);  nga  and  mu 
may  be  prefixed:  ngaini,  muini;  ini  ineu, 
my  one;  ini  mwane,  male;  ini  keni, 
female;  ini  itei,  what  one;  ini  ni  Sa'a, 
the  Sa'a  man;  e  ro  ijii,  two  things;  ini 
qaarongoisuli  e  ka'a  liuta'ana  ini  ha'au- 
suli,  the  disciple  is  not  above  his  master; 
nga  hai  ini,  a  length  of  bamboo;  ngaini 
ta'ane,  yes,  there  is  one;  muini  ineu,  my 
ones;  mwamwangaini,  some  odd  ones, 
one  here  and  there, 
ini  2.  n.,  a  sore  under  the  foot,  pitted,  with  hard 

coating, 
ini    3.    U.    (Su'uholo    dialect),    demonstrative 
pron.  follows  noun,  that.     Plorida  ini, 
Malay  ini. 
ini  4.  U.,  prefix  to  pronouns,  inihou,  iniparo, 

iniivau.     cf.  ni  4. 
'ini  5.  V.  tr.,  to  pinch,  to  pluck  leaves,  to  crop 
with    the   fingers;    'ini   reko,    to   pluck 
hibiscus;    'ini    kite,    thumb,    used    for 
pinching    off    leaves,    etc.     Mota    gin; 
Mao.  kini,  pinch;  Motu  gini,  thorn. 
inie-(ku)    U.,    sister,    brother;    the    personal 
article  coalesces,  ainieku.     Florida  tina, 
mother, 
inihou    U.,    demonstrative    pron.    this,    these; 


41 


IPE 


inihou  (continued). 

adv.,  here;  'oto  inihou,  now;  'olo  mola 
inihou,  just  now. 
'ini'iniqaa  U.,  adj..  that  has  not  had  young 

(of  animals). 
ioiparo  U.,  demonstrative  pron.,  that,  those; 

adv.,  there. 
Mnoni  n.,  man,  human  being,  ha'a'inoni. 
ro  'inoni,  voc,  you  two  (of  husband 
and  wife);  ro  'inoni  ineu,  my  parents; 
flju  nani  'inoni,  of  work  not  faithfully 
done;  i'e  'inoni,  a  fish  caught  with  kdlu; 
i'emi  mil  tne'i  'inoni,  we  humble  people; 
Halo  ana  mu  'inoni,  in  man;  e  ka'a 
walana  ike  nga  'inoni,  it  is  not  the 
voice  of  a  man;  ki'iki'i  ni  'inoni,  a 
dwarf;  Iduleunilana  nga  'inoni,  orna- 
ments of  men;  manalana  viti  'inoni,  mu 
manala'i  'inoni,  the  nature  of  men; 
i  matolai  'inoni,  among  men;  ngeitei 
'inoni,  what  man?  ohn  'inoni  ohu  sae, 
many  men,  many  minds;  qd'idi  'inoni, 
the  name  of  a  certain  spear,  man's  head; 
o  qauqcsH  'inoni,  a  policeman;  qera- 
qeraha  ana  mu  'inoni,  exceeding  many 
people;  ride  ni  'inoni,  a  dwarf;  ri'iri'i  ni 
'inoni,  a  dwarf,  a  great  number  of  men; 
ia'ena  nga  'inoni,  every  man;  ta'ewan 
mu  'inoni,  the  common  people.  Wango 
noni,  Florida  linoni. 
'inoninga  U.,  v.  n.,  to'o  'inoninga,  possessing 
friends. 
iniwau  U.,   demonstrative   pron.,   that;   adv., 

there. 
inu,  inuinu  1.  to  drink;  inn  'aela,  not  potable; 
lale'i   inu   mola'a,    just   drink   without 
price.     2.  to  be  drowned, 
inunge  v.  n.,  drinking. 
inuhi  tr.,  ha'inuhi,  to  give  to  drink. 
inuhUa-(ku)  gerund.     Mota  un,  Motu  inna, 
Maori  inu,  Malay  miniim. 
i  noruhaana  S.,  trusting  in,  relying  on,  through. 
i  nunuhaana  S.,  through,  by,  because  of. 
i  nganite  S.,  i  ngenita  U.,  adv.,  when;  'olo  i 

nganile,  when.     Mota  a  ngaisa. 
inge'ie,  inge'i  S.,  inge'ia  U.,  pers.  pron.,  sing.  3; 
he,  she,  it,  his,  her,  its;  used  as  subject 
only  and  followed  by  e.     Mota  ineia, 
Florida  anggaia. 
inge'ieni  U.,  as  inge'ia. 

'i'o,  'i'o'i'o  1.  v.  i.,  to  sit,  to  live,  to  dwell,  to 
be;  'i'o  hiliihilue'i,  estranged;  'i'o  him, 
abide  forever;  'i'o  kd'u,  wait,  to  stay  a 
while;  'i'o  konilo'o,  rest  assured;  'i'o 
loosi,  to  await;  'oke  'i'o  kd'u  loosieii, 
wait  a  while  for  me;  mwala  ko  'i'o  loosi 
kire  to'oana  keni  mwala  ko  holie,  the 
party  waiting,  they  own  the  girl  who 
is  being  bought  in  marriage;  'i'o  mama- 
nuto'o,  to  be  at  peace;  'i'o  viamaware.  to 
be  in  safety;  'i'o  manire'i,  to  live 
orderly;  'i'o  pe'i  rae,  the  mourning  before 
burial;  'i'o  pe'i  snke,  sat  and  begged; 
'i'o  rd'irehi,  stay  under  the  lee;  'i'o 
raqasi,  to  sojourn;  'i'o  rarao,  to  be  stuck 
tight;  'i'o  rdule'i,  humble;  e  'i'o  sis- 
ingeku,  stood  in  front  of  me;  hat  dango 


'i'o,  'i'o'i'o  1  (continued). 

e    'i'o    sisinge'i,    the    tree    stood    over 
against;   'i'o  susu,   to  continue  in  one 
stay;  'i'o  suu'i,  to  be  present  with;  e  'i'o 
lohune,  he  was  his  own  master;  'i'o  toli, 
to  be  quiescent;  'i'o  to'o,  to  be  fixed, 
'i'onga  v.  n..  way  or  manner  of  life;  rara- 
maanga  ana  'i'onga  lata'ala,  rebuking  be- 
cause of  evil  ways. 
•i'ola-(ku)  gerund.,  behavior. 
'i'osi  tr.,  to  dwell  in  (country),     ha'a'i'osi. 
'i'ota'i  v.  i.,  to  set  about  a  thing;  'i'ota'i 
rongo  keninga,   to  set  about  inquiring 
for  girls  as  wives, 
'i'ota'ini  tr.,  to  set  about  doing.     Viti  tiko. 
'i'o  2.  U.,  exclam.,  who  can  say,  I  don't  know, 
i'oe  pers.  pron.,  sing.  2.  thou,  thine;  when  used 
as  subject  is  followed  by  'o.     Florida 
igoe,  Maori  ikoe. 
*i'oha,    'i'o'i'oha   v.   n.,   station,   place;   with 
suffixed    pronoun    (kn),       'i'ohana.  his 
place, 
'iola  1.  canoe,     'iola  'ato'ato,  a  new  canoe  on  a 
money-seeking  voyage;  'iola  e  qa'a  'oto, 
the  canoe  is  cracked;  'iola  la'o.  canoe 
inlaid  with  la'o;  'iola  raku,  canoe  seating 
four;  'iola  sarasara,  bonito  canoe,  inlaid 
with  reoreo;  adu  'iola,  to  build  a  canoe; 
adii  'iolanga,  v.  n.,  canoe  building:  the 
canoes  are  all  plank  built  and  have  no 
outriggers;  'ahe  e  lomosie  'iola,  the  surf 
buffeted  the  canoe;  ana  rao  'iola  i  qalo- 
qalo,  on  the  right  side  of  the  ship;  ila'o 
'iola,  in  the  canoe;  ma'ahu  mala  'iola, 
to  fast.  lit.,  to  sleep  canoe  fasliion;  moro 
tdria  paro  'iola  i  'esi,  you  ha%'e  launched 
the  canoe  yonder  into  the  sea;  ni'i  'ae 
la'o  'iola,  to  board  a  canoe;  ro  'iola  ko 
sama,  the  two  canoes  keep  abreast;  toli 
'iola,  to  steer  for.  to  lay  a  canoe  on  her 
course.     2.    metaphorically,    a    village; 
'iola  'i'emelu,  our  village,     cf.  na'oni'ola, 
purini'ola.     3.    a    tree    used    to    make 
planks    for   canoes.     Lau   ola,    Florida 
tiola,  Wango  or  a. 
iolaha  v.  i..  to  be  disturbed  in  mind,  excited, 
i'omolu  pers.  pron..  plural  2,  you,  yours;  more 
restricted  in  meaning  than  i'omu;  when 
used  as  subject  is  followed  by  molu. 
i'omoro,  i'omoro'i  pers.  pron.,  dual  2,  you  two, 
yours;  when  used  as  subject  is  followed 
by  moro,  moro'i. 
i'omoru'e  S.,   pers.    pron.,   dual   2,   you   two. 
j'ours;  w-hen  used  as  subject  is  followed 
by  'omorn'e. 
i'omu  pers.  pron..  plural  2.  you.  yours:  more 
general  in  meaning  than  i'omolu;  when 
used    as    subject    is  followed  by  'oimi. 
i'amu,  U.     Lau  igamu. 
ioo  v.  i.,  to  curdle,  of  coconut  milk  brought  to 
the  boil;  the  milk  is  boiled  in  the  half 
shell  (leu)  placed  on  embers, 
ioqo  V.  i..  to  be  dense  (of  smoke). 
ioroha  U.,  prep.,  underneath;  mat  iorohana,  on 

the  earth, 
ipata  S.,  hole  where  pigs  wallow,     upela,  U. 
ipe  V.  i.,  to  wallow  (of  pigs),     tataipeipe. 


IPEIPA 


42 


ipeipa  U..  pipe  (English). 
ipelu  S.,  ipalu  U.,  ipeipelu  v.  i.,  to  fight,  to 
make  war;  ipelii  eni  heu,  to  fight  with 
stones, 
ipelunga  v.  n.,  fighting. 
ipoipo'ala  U.,  adj.,  muddy,     'ala  8. 
ipu  n.,  a  pool  of  water  in  a  hole  in  a  tree, 
ipuri  adv.,  behind;  prep.,  with  suffixed  pron. 
(few)   after;   /  purine  maholo,  after  the 
time.     puri. 
iqe  1.  a  lake.     2.    calm   water   inside   a   reef. 
nerevere  ni  iqe  kittiwake  of  the  lagoon. 
iieki  n.  1.  tongs  of  bamboo  for  removing  hot 
stones  from  the  fire  in  cooking.     2.  a 
constellation,    the    Southern    Triangle. 
raki. 
ireune  S.,  prep.,  beside,  used  of  things;  ireiine 

wdi,  beside  the  water. 
'iri'o  n.,  porpoise;  porpoises  are  hunted  and 
the  teeth   (nihoi  i'e)   form  one  of  the 
currencies  of  the  Solomons.     Lau  kiri'o, 
Mota  ririgo. 
'iro,  'iro'iro  1.  to  look  at,  to  look  for,  to  see;  'iro 

keni,  to  look  for  a  wife.     Mota  tiro. 
•iro  2.  'iro  ni  sato,  drought. 
*Iro  3.  the  district  on  the  hills  on  the  west  side 

of  Mara  Masiki  Channel. 
'iro'iro  1.  a  pool  among  rocks  used  as  a  mirror. 

2.  a  glass  (late  use).     Mota  tironin. 
'iro'iroa'i'e  S.,  adj.,  reflecting  like  a  mirror, 

glassy. 
•irori    n.,    a    parrot    (Lorius    cardinalis).     cf. 
hirori,  kirori.     taka  'irori,  proverbiallj-, 
of  confusion  of  voices, 
'iru,  'iru'iru  1.  v.  i.,  to  blow  (of  wind).     2.  n., 
wind. 
'iruhi  V.  tr.,  to  blow  on  (of  wind).     Florida 
guri. 
i  6aa-(ku)  S.,  not  used  in  sing.  1  and  2,  where 
the  form  i  sie  is  used  instead;  at  the 
house  of,  with,  to;  i  saada'elu,  at  their 
house,  at  home. 
isi,  isiisi  1.  to  curse,  to  use  defiling  words  about. 
isiisinge  v.  n.,  cursing. 
isila-(ku)  gerund. 
isi  2.  isi  ta'a,  S.,  isi  taha,  U.,  to  come  out,  to 
emerge. 
isita'anga,     isitahanga     v.     n.,     ha'aisita- 
'anga'ini. 
isi  3.  ha'aisi,  adv.,  at  all. 
i  sie-(ku)  at  the  house  of,  with,  to.     cf.  i  saa. 
noic  lae  mat  i  sietnu,  I  have  come  to  you. 
i  sinaha,  i  sihana,  S.,  adv.,  outside  the  house. 
isipuri  v.  i.,  to  be  last, 
isuisu  1.,  V.  i.,  to  run  along  on  top  of  a  wave 

(of  a  canoe),     cf.  tataisuisu. 
isuisu  2.  V.  i.,  to  play  at  cat's  cradle. 

isuisunge  v.  n.,  cat's  cradle, 
isuisu  3.  U.,  isuisu  ni  'ei,  a  splinter, 
i  su'e  adv.,  exterior  to,  on  the  outside. 
isule'i,  isuisule'i  partic,  unstable,  moving, 
isuli  1.  adv.,  accordingly,  after,  alongside,  by. 
cf.  luluisuli.     hele  isuli,  do  according  to; 
lio    isuli,    watch;    rongo    isuli,    to    be 
obedient   to;   si'o   isuli,    to   follow   the 
footsteps  of;   sulu  isuli,   to  obey.     2. 
prep.,    with    suff.    pron.    (aw),    after. 


isuli  (continued). 

according  to;  hele  isulieu,  copy  me. 
3.  U.,  prep.,  of  motion  toward.  4.  nono 
isuli,  a  strong-smelling  herb. 

ite  1.  U.,  one,  another:  nga  is  always  prefixed, 
the  plural  article  ynwa  is  used  of  persons 
only,  ngaile  ola,  another  thing,  some- 
thing else;  ngaite  laa,  another  person; 
7iga  mwaile  'inoni,  certain  persons. 

ite  2.  a  round  basket  made  of  plaited  coconut 
leaves  for  holding  yams. 

'ite  3.  v.  tr.,  to  find  fault  with,  to  reject. 
Wango  ila,  to  reject. 

itehula-  S.,  with  poss.  3:  because  of,  through 
the  agency  of.  itehulaana  a  ola,  because 
of  So-and-so;  ilehulaamu,  through  thine 
agency. 

itei  1.  S.,  interrog.  adv.:  where.  U.,  ihei. 
2.  interrog.  pron.,  which,  what,  whether 
of  two;  itii  itei,  which  one;  'oko  sare 
ngdu  itei,  which  will  you  eat.  3.  in 
phrase  nge  ilei  ue  ena,  that  is  just  it. 
Mota  vea,  Niue  fe. 

iteitana  S.,  one,  any:  used  with  negative  verbal 
particle  ka'a,  sa'a.  e  ka'a  iteitana 
ngaini,  there  is  not  any  one;  iteitana  nga 
ola  sa'a  diana,  nothing  will  be  good. 
Mota  isei. 

ito  1.  orchid.     2.  bunch  of  money,  ito  ni  haa. 

ito  3.  V.  tr.,  to  offer,  to  make  an  offering  to 
ghosts. 

itoli  n.,  a  shell  ornament  stuck  in  the  tip  of  the 
nose,  the  man-o'-war  hawk  is  carved  on 
the  projecting  end,  which  is  turned  up 
to  represent  the  neck  and  breast  of  a 
sea-bird,     i  3. 

iwe'ite  S.,  adv.,  the  day  before  yesterday; 
i  we'ite  wau,  three  days  ago.     i  1. 

i  welita  U.,  adv.,  the  day  after  tomorrow,  cf. 
wali.    i  welita  poo  Tvau,  three  days  hence. 


ka  pron.,  plural  1.  inch:  suffixed  to  nouns  and 
denoting  possession;  nimaka,  our  hands. 

ka'a  S.,  negativ^e  verbal  particle,  used  of  both 
present  and  past  time;  ka'a  balanced 
by  wa  with  ke  is  used  as  the  negative 
correlatives  neither,  nor.  'omu  ka'a 
manata'inie  wa  'omu  ke  leesie,  ye 
neither  know  him  nor  have  seen  him; 
nou  ka'a  manata'ie  ike,  I  don't  know; 
e  ka'a  lae,  he  did  not  go;  e  ka'a  ola,  there 
is  nothing;  nou  ka'a  ola,  I  have  nothing; 
mehi  ka'a  ola  ni  ngaa,  we  have  no  food; 
ka'a  equates  with  kaka.  cf.  Mota  te, 
tete.  Maori  ka,  Mota  ga  4;  Lau  ka, 
future  particle;  Tolo  ke,  negative 
particle. 

kaakae  U.,  child,  baby.    Wango  kaakae. 

ka'alawa  v.  i.,  to  be  listless,  inert,  cf.  lalawa; 
sapeku  e  ka'alawa,  my  body  is  listless. 

kaata  cart  (English). 

kae  1.  V.  i.,  to  pluck;  kae  'asi,  to  pluck  out. 

kae,  kaekae  2.  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  deceive;  lopo'i  kae, 
to  deceive. 
kaenga  v.  n.,  deceit. 


43 


KAO 


kae,  kaekae  2  (continued). 

kaengaha  v.  n.  (double  noun  ending),  deceit. 

kaesi  tr. 

kaeta'ini  tr.  (Qaloto  dialect). 

ka'elu  1.  U.,  pars,  pron.,  plural  1,  incl.:  we, 
more  restricted  than  ki'a  in  meaning; 
with  future  particle  'e,  ka'elu,  contracts 
to  ka'el'e.  ka'eka'elu,  come  on,  let  us 
be  off;  ka'el'e  lae,  let  us  go.  2.  pers. 
pron.,  plural  1,  incl.,  suffixed  to  nouns; 
'amaka'elu,  our  father.  3.  U.,  pers. 
pron.,  plural  1,  incl.,  suffixed  to  verbs 
and  prepositions;  e  sdunika'elu,  he 
beat  us. 

kahite  S.,  iiwerikahite,  rags. 

kahu  cf.  makahu. 

ka'i  contraction  of  kd'u  i;  'o  lae  ka'i  lei,  where 
did  you  go  to. 

kaka  v.  i.,  to  be  torn,  to  be  split,     makaka. 
kakasi  tr.,  to  split. 

kakahite  v.  i.,  to  gape  open,  to  split,     kahite. 

kakahu  U.,  exclam.  of  astonishment  at  some- 
thing of  great  size;  kakahu  ni  ola,  a 
monster! 

kakahuru  S.,  v.  i.,  to  be  taken  by  surprise. 
ha' akakahiirii. 

kakalihe  n.,  a  guarding,  a  guard,     kali  1. 

kakalo  v.  i.,  to  grope  with  the  hands;  kakalo 
'ulu'ulu,  to  grope  blindly. 

kakalu  S.,  n.,  a  well  of  water,     kilu,  U. 

kakamo  U.,  v.,  to  be  stringy,  of  hana. 

kakamu  1.  v.  i.,  to  itch. 

kakamu  2.  n.,  with  genitive  ni;  fringe,  skirt. 

kakamuni  n.,  an  armlet  of  shell. 

kakapoo  n.,  a  strong-smelling  herb. 

kakata  n.,  a  handle;  kakatai  heu,  an  iron  rod; 
with  sufT.  pron.,  kakatana,  its  handle. 
Mota  kaka,  to  stretch  out  the  hand 
and  catch  hold. 

kakau  S.,  v.  i.,  to  shout,  to  cry  aloud. 

kakau'e  adj.,  prickly,     kdu  1. 

kakawe  (na)  n.,  tentacles  of  octopus,  cf.  'ahe  3. 
Mota  gave,  a  crab,  so  named  from  its 
claws;  Motu  gave,  tentacles  of  octopus. 

kala  V.  tr.,  to  cut  pieces  of  nautilus  shell 
(jreoreo)  for  purposes  of  inlaying;  kala 
'apani  paale'o,  to  cut  nautilus  shell  in 
triangular  patterns;  kala  hite,  to  cut  it 
in  rectangular  pieces  and  to  split  the 
ends  in  V-shape;  kala  toohe'o,  to  cut 
shell  hooks. 

kalani  a  fish,  i'e  ni  kalani. 

kale  1.  (ku)  n.,  a  child,  a  son,  a  daughter;  with 
personal  article  a  kale,  the  son;  kalena 
a  ola,  son  of  So-and-so;  kale  tnaJu  ineu, 
my  beloved  cliild;  kale  ni  ulao,  a  bastard; 
masi  kaleku,  my  child;  keni  kalci  Sion, 
daughter  of  Sion;  7tga  keni  mala  a 
kalemu,  a  girl  a  mate  for  your  son.  Lau 
gale,  Florida  dale,  Wango  gare.  New 
Hebrides  gari.  New  Britain  garra. 
cf.  kele. 

kale  2.  ha'akale,  to  wait  for,  to  watch,  to  keep 
an  eye  on.     cf.  kali. 

kale'a  adj.,  heavy  with  child,  to  be  in  childbirth. 

Kalenipa'ewa  the  name  of  a  canoe  in  a  story. 
Little  Shark. 


kali,  kakali,  kakakali   1.  v.  tr.,  to  watch,  to 
surround,  to  double  a  point  of  land  in  a 
canoe,     lilikeli.     kali  pele,   to   be  cap- 
sized in  rounding  a  cape  at  sea;  kali  la'a, 
to    emerge;     ddu    keli,     to    surround; 
kakdli    he'ihe'i'oli,    to    take    turns    in 
guarding;  lili  keli,  to  encircle;  e  piru  keli 
ekii,  surrounded  me;  si'o  kali,  to  spy; 
e  kali  i  'clingeku,  it  sounded  in  my  ears, 
kakalinge  v.  n.,  watching,  guarding. 
kalila-(ku)  gerund, 
kalite'i  partic,  ko  kelile'i  honolamu,  round 

about  thee, 
kalite'ioi  tr.,  to  keep  watch  over,  to  guard. 
Florida  tali,  Omba  dali,  round;  Wango 
gari,  Mota  kal,  to  stir,  tal,  to  go  around. 

kMli  2.  kali  awala,  a  sum  of  money  (haa)  made 
up  of  ten  strings  (kawe)  each  a  fathom 
long. 

kalikeli  1.  adv.,  around.  2.  prep.,  with  suflf. 
pron.  (dii),  around. 

kalinga  (na)  U.,  a  hole;  kdlingana,  its  hole. 

kalinge  S.,  n.,  a  well  of  water. 

Kalitaalu  one  of  the  legendary  persons  of  'Olu 
Malau;  his  drinking-place  {tonohaand) 
is  at  Lenga  in  Ulawa  where  he  is  reputed 
to  have  thrust  his  fishing-rod  into  the 
stream  as  it  poured  over  the  rock  into 
the  sea  and  to  have  drunk  the  drippings. 

kalite'i'a  U.,  adj.,  used  as  noun,  a  strand  of 
rope;  ro  kalite'i'a,  double  thickness. 

kalona  U.,  n.,  garden  ground  on  the  second 
range  of  hills  above  the  beach,  t  kalona; 
uhi  ni  kalona,  yams  from  this  region, 
firm  and  hard  as  opposed  to  uhi  ni  qe'u, 
which  are  more  mealy. 

kalu  1.  n.,  a  hand  net  tied  to  the  four  comers 
of  two  bent  sticks  laid  at  right  angles 
to  one  another,  a  third  stick  serving 
as  a  handle.  2.  v.  tr.,  to  use  such  a 
net  in  fishing  from  a  canoe  for  parrot- 
fish  {i'e  ni  kelu),  a  live  fish  tied  by  the 
gills  to  a  stick  is  used  as  a  decoy,  where- 
upon fish  of  the  same  sort:  come  out 
to  the  decoy  and  are  caught  in  the  net. 
The  decoy  fish  when  not  in  use  is  kept 
in  an  artificial  pond  (lopo). 
kalu'i  tr.,  to  catch  fish  with  such  a  net. 

kalu  3.  v.  tr.,  to  bend  a  bow. 

kana,  kanakana  1.  v.  i.,  to  sing.  2.  n.,  a  song. 
hiiu  ni  kana,  a  company  of  singers  at  a 
dance;  nga  odoni  kana,  a  song  sung 
straight  through;  supu  kana,  to  com- 
pose songs. 
kananga  v.  n.,  a  song;  sulu  kananga,  a  sing- 
ing of  songs;  supu  kananga,  v.  n.,  com- 
posing songs, 
kanali  tr.     Wango  gana. 

kao  1.  n.,  the  bottom  planks  of  a  canoe,  the 
keel.  ikao.  2.  with  suff.  pron.  3  pers. 
na,  kaona,  the  under  part,  the  hold,  of 
canoe  or  ship.  3.  U.,  «  kaomu,  under- 
neath you;  mwalo  suhu  kao,  a  rock  that 
pierces  the  bottom,  sunken  rock;  Pali 
kao,  a  drop  left  in  the  bottom,  dregs; 
e  ka'a  to'o  kaona,  bottomless.  Wango 
kao. 


KAOKAO 


44 


kaokao  n.,  a  halt  coconut  shell  used  for  drink- 
ing-cup  (late  use).     Wango  kaokao. 

kape  hi'uhi'u  kape,  U.,  hi'uhi'ii  pole,  S.,  to  wag 
the  tail  feathers,  a  bird  (the  wagtail). 
Maori  kapekapeta,  to  flutter;  San  Cris- 
toval,  rurukape. 

kara,  kara'i  U.  1.  pers.  pron.,  dual  1,  incl.:  we 
two.  2.  suffixed  to  noun  or  verb  or 
preposition  as  object.  3.  suffixed  to 
noun,  of  us  two.     Wango  kara. 

kara  4.  v.  i.,  to  scrape,  to  grate;  kara  uhi,  kara 
uhinge,  yam  grating;  'usu  kara,  to  grate 
yams  for  yam  pudding.  5.  grated-yam 
pudding  tied  up  in  leaves;  kara  ni 
'aharota,  large  puddings  for  a  wedding 
feast;  kara  dodo,  yam  pudding  put  into 
bamboos  and  cooked  over  the  embers; 
kara  lalemo,  yam  pudding  without 
coconut  milk;  kara  ni  mwane  Qiinanga), 
yam  pudding  used  in  sacrifices.  Mota 
gar,  cockle;  Viti  kari,  to  scrape;  Maisin 
kari,  Niue  alati. 

kara'i  adv.,  preceding  the  verb;  nearly,  almost; 
yiou  kara'i  lae,  I  almost  went. 

kara'ini  1.  adv.,  as  kara'i.  2.  prep.,  with  suff. 
pron.  (dzt).  near,  close  to.  hau  garangi, 
Wango  garangi. 

kar'e  U.,  contraction  of  kara'e,  let  us  two; 
kar'e  lae,  let  us  be  off! 

Kareimenu  a  fabulous  person,  half  boy  and 
half  shark,  changed  by  his  mother,  who 
cursed  him  because  he  frightened  his 
younger  brother  by  swimming  with  one 
arm  bent  and  held  at  his  side  so  as  to 
resemble  a  shark's  fin. 

karekare  U.,  osani  karekare,  a  cliff. 

karenga  v.  tr.,  to  watch  for  turtles  coming  up 
to  lay. 

kari  n.,  squid;  used  largely  for  fish  bait;  tala'i 
keri,  to  entice  squid  with  a  white  cowrie 
shell  ipuli)  and  red  streamers  (aleale). 
Mota  wirila,  octopus,  Motu  urila, 
Malagasy  hurita. 

Karieu  a  ghost.     M.  A.,  p.  261. 

karikeri  n.,  a  piece,  a  bit. 

kariheni,  karihani  U.,  adv.;  'osi  keriheni  'aela 
laa,  do  not  be  such  a  nuisance. 

kariwaaro  v.  i.,  to  take  a  circuitous  route. 
waaro. 

karikeri'ara  S.,  karikeri'ala  U..  a  bird,  the 
migratory  plover,  arriving  in  November 
at  the  time  of  the  palolo  worm  and 
found  exhausted  in  the  gardens  and 
open  spaces,  whence  it  is  said  oku  e 
hirtisia  maana,  the  palolo  has  got  into 
its  eye. 

karo  S.  1.  the  side  walls  of  a  house;  hdu  suusuui 
karo,  cornerstone. 

karo  2.  V.  tr.,  to  pick  canarium  nuts,  karoa 
ngdli;  karo  siritinga,  picking  up  cockles. 

karohure  S.,  karohure  e  sasa'ae  i  kaona  'asi,  the 
depths  were  troubled. 

karokaro  (ku)  side,  ribs,  of  persons.  Florida 
nggaro. 

karu  1.  v.  i.,  used  with  poss.  3;  to  clutch,  to 
hold;  kdru  ana,  take  hold  of  it;  more 
common  in  Ulawa. 


karu,  karukeru  2.  v.  i.,  to  scratch  v.-ith  the 
finger  nails;  mwela  ko  kerukeru  la'o  hd'u, 
the  child  scratches  in  the  umbrella: 
when  a  child  is  sick  a  wizard  is  called  in 
and  he  declares  that  its  soul  has  been 
stolen  away;  he  takes  leaves  of  dra- 
caena  (dili)  and  collects  the  child's  soul 
with  the  leaves  and  places  it  in  the 
umbrella  {hd'u)  where  it  is  heard 
scratching;  he  shakes  the  umbrella 
over  the  child's  body,  the  child  is  con- 
vulsed, the  soul  returns  and  the  child 
recovers, 
karumi  tr.,  to  scratch  the  body  when  suffer- 
ing from  skin  disease  or  itching.  Mota 
karu,  Maori  raku,  Malay  garut,  Samoa 
la'u,  Gi!b,  kori. 

karu  3.  v.  i.,  to  suffer  from  skin  disease. 

karu  4.  v.  i.,  to  hollow  out  a  log  for  a  drum, 
kdru  'o'o. 
karu'i  v.  tr. 
karu'ila-(na,  ni)  gerund. 

karu  oe  U.,  to  be  foolish,  to  talk  foolishly. 

karu  mehu  S.,  to  endure  hardness. 

kasu,  ka'ukesu  S.,  v.  i.,  to  'oe  rotten,  corrupt, 
kasunge  v.  n.,  corruption. 

kata  n.,  a  mortar  for  pounding  areca  nut,  used 
by  those  who  are  toothless  (dau-a). 

kau,  kaukeu  1.  v.  i.,  to  clutch  hold  of  (of  thorny 
creepers),  to  catch  hold  of  with  ikeu. 
kdu  lomolomo,  the  fourth  finger;  walo 
kaukeu,  a  thorny  creeper, 
kausi  tr.,  walo  e  kdusie,  the  thorn  caught 
him  'akalo  e  kdusie  i'ola,  a  ghost  clutched 
and  capsized  the  canoe;  ikeu,  a  crook; 
for  twitching  off  fruit  and  leaves. 
malakeu.  Maori  kakau,  stalk;  Lau 
kakau,  fingers;  Mota  kau,  Malay  kauit; 
Niue  keu,  crooked. 

kau  2.  n.,  branching  coral,  mu  keu;  huui  keu,  a 
spray  of  coral;  uunu  keu,  to  burn  coral 
for  lime  used  in  areca  chewing. 

kau  3.  cow  (English). 

ka'u  4.  adv.,  follows  verb,  (a)  forms  a  pre- 
terite, nou  lae  kd'u,  I  went,  (b)  at  the 
beginning  of  a  sentence  it  directs 
attention,  and  generally  it  makes  speech 
less  abrupt;  kd'u,  neke  leesie,  please  let 
me  see  it;  i'o  kd'u,  stay  a  while,  wait; 
kd'ti  mei  nga  hue,  give  me  one  (fruit) 
please;  kolu  ke'u,  let  us  be  off;  konia 
kd'u,  wait,  tarry  a  while;  'oke  lae  kd'u, 
you  had  better  go;  'omu  ke  mala  mwela 
kd'u,  just  become  as  little  children;  lio 
kd'u,  behold;  loo  kd'u,  look;  neku  kd'u, 
be  seated;  nge  ke  'ue  kd'une,  how  then 
will  it  be;  'oke  i'o  kd'u  loosieu,  wait  a 
while  for  me;  no'i  kd'u,  stay,  wait  a 
while;  lae  kd'u  'ohi'i,  go  fetch  it;  taa 
kd'u,  let  me  see;  tdhi  ke'u,  be  off,  get 
out  of  the  road.     Wango  gaii. 

kjlule  S.,  kaula  U.,  frigate-bird,  man-o'-war 
hawk,  nests  on  Bio  by  Ugi;  on  account 
of  its  size  and  voracity  and  of  its  asso- 
ciation with  the  bonito  the  frigate-bird 
figures  largely  in  the  art  of  the  southern 
Solomons,     poro    kdule,    mwane    kdule. 


45 


KI'E 


kaule  (continued). 

the  male  bird:  term  used  generally  in 
speaking  of  the  kdule:  rdpu  keiile,  to 
tattoo  the  frigate  bird  on  the  cheek:  the 
tattoo  takes  the  form  of  an  inverted  W 
where  the  two  points  represent  the 
curve  in  the  wing  of  the  bird.  A 
similar  W  pattern  also  called  kii'ule  i 
found  on  the  flat  blades  of  clubs 
(Guppy,  "Solomon  Islands,"  p.  74),  and 
it  may  be  that  a  further  explanation  of 
the  device  is  that  it  is  the  conventional 
representation  of  the  kdule.  Florida 
daula.  M.  A.,  p.  126. 
kaumota  n.,  adze;  in  old  days  made  of  a  stone 
attached  to  V-shapcd  handle  composed 
of  a  branch  and  part  of  the  stem  of  a  tree, 
kauwa'a  S.,  n.,  must,  mildew,  rust. 
kawa'i  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  hear;  'alinge  ka'a  kawa'ie, 

ear  hath  not  heard. 
kawe  n.,  a  string  of  shell  money  {haa),  nga 

ka'ii'c.  Wango  gawe. 
ke  1.  S.,  verbal  particle  used  of  future  time; 
saline  huni  ke  mae,  pound  it  so  that  it 
will  be  well  mashed;  ana  ke  ola  miuam- 
wadau,  if  possible;  ke  mdni  dolosie 
salada,  let  him  ask  all  their  names. 
With  the  negative  particle  ka'a:  e  ka'a 
ola  ke  Idku,  there  is  nothing  whole; 
e  ka'a  ola  nekc  leesie,  I  saw  nothing. 
Used  with  negatives  ka'a  and  sa'a  cor- 
related with  wa  in  the  sense  of  neither, 
nor:  'omu  ka'a  manala'inic  wa  'omu  ke 
leesie,  ye  neither  know  him  nor  saw  him, 
Florida  te,  of  present  time.  Lo  le  ke. 
Mota  te  1;  Ulawa  'e.  cf.  ha'ike,  qa'ike. 
ke  2.  exclam.,  used  when  one  has  made  a  wrong 

statement. 
kei  1.  n.,  a  female  (of  persons  only),  cf.  mwei; 
the  personal  article  a  precedes  and  de- 
monstrati\e  nd  is  suffixed;  a  keine,  the 
woman;  mil  keine,  the  women;  keine, 
vocative,  woman;  the  addition  of  taa 
expresses  commiseration;  kei  ta'a,  poor 
dear;  pdine,  big.  is  added  in  the  case  of 
important  persons,  kei  ta'a  pdine,  dear 
lady.  Gilbert  Islands  nei,  Lau  ni,  per- 
sonal article  preceding  the  name  of  a 
woman;  Trobriand  na,  Efate  lei,  Tangoa 
ve.  cf.  niivae. 
kei,  keikei  2.  U.,  adv.,  of  motion  from,  out  of; 
e  kei  hei,  whence;  nau  keikei  ana,  I  am 
from  thence. 
ke'i  3.  S.,  verbal  particle  used  of  definite  future. 
cf.  ke  1.  ke'i  lae  la'ane,  he  will  go  cer- 
tainly; ke'i  'ue  'oto,  how  shall  it  be  done; 
kire  ke'i  ne'i  manata'a  diana,  they  shall 
become  well  trained;  vielii  ke'i  tola  'oto, 
are  we  to  begin  to  carry?  Fagani  », 
Omba,  Maewo  ». 
keke  1.  U.,  with  locative  i;  i  keke,  beside,  out- 
side; koni  i  keke,  to  excommunicate. 
2.  with  sufT.  pron.  (kti),  to  (of  persons 
only),  Qaloto  use.  t  kekemu,  as  «  siemtt, 
in  your  house;  t  kekeita  wdi,  beside  the 
stream.  3.  adv.,  behind;  lio  keke,  look 
behind. 


keke  (roiuinui-il). 

kekea'i  S.,  kekeni  U.,  partic.     lio  i  kekea'i 

maanga,  to  bear  ill  will,  to  have  a  spite 

against,     inalakeke.     Wango  gege,   Lau 

gege,  behind;  Motu  kekena,  by  the  side  of. 

Kela  the  southern  end  of  Guadalcanar.  a-xalosi 

i    Kela,   the  southwest  wind;  hana  ni 

Kela,  a  yam  planted  head  downward; 

qaso  ni  Kela,  armlet  of  dyed  greiss. 

kele,  'ele  U.  1.  adv.,  somewhat,  a  little,  just 

now:  precedes  the  verb,     esi  kele  ine,  it 

has  just  rooted;  est  kele  lota,  just  washed; 

kele  me'i  langa,  it  lets  up  a  little.     2. 

adj.,   small,   little:   precedes  the  noun; 

kele   mwau    ineu,    my    little    boy;    kele 

mwela,  little  child;  kele  me'i  ola,  a  little 

thing;  kele  poo,  a  little  pig;  a  kele  ola. 

young  So-and-so.     (Trobably  connected 

with  kale.)     Wango  gere. 

keli  cf.  kali. 

kelu  U.,  contraction  of  kira'elu,  used  as  subject 

only, 
kemo  U.,  v.,  to  be  straight,  of  hair, 
kena'i    ha'akena'i,    he'asikena'i,    interjections, 
not  to  be  used  in  the  presence  of  women, 
keneta'ini  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  safeguard,  to  observe 
and  do.     kineta'ini,  S. 
keneta'inila-(ku)  gerund, 
ha'akeneta'ini  causative. 
keni  n.,  woman,  wife,  female:  added  to  proper 
names  to  show  sex.     ha'akeni.   keni,  mu 
keni,  vocative;  keni  ana  a  ola,  such-and- 
such  a  woman;  nga  keni  mala  a  kalemti, 
a  girl,  a  mate  for  your  son;  feewt  ha'aln,S., 
keni  ha'olu,  U.,  a  maiden;  keni  ineu,  my 
dear;  keiii  raori'i,   a  virgin;   keni  toro, 
the  lady;  keni  ulao,  a  harlot;  'ai  ha'an- 
gdti  keni,  ginger  given  to  women  as  an 
ordeal;    hdii   ni  keni,  a  rock  at  Ali'ite 
where  female  ghosts  congregate;  He  keni, 
female;  ini  keni,   female;  i'ola'i  rongo 
keninga,  to  set  about  a  betrothal;  me'i 
keni  reu,  a  lowly  woman;  tola  keni,  to 
take  a  wife.     Motu  kekeni,  Doura,  N. 
G.,   eneni;  Rotuma  heti. 
kere,  kerekere  v.  tr.,  to  incise,  to   draw,    to 
outline,  to  cut  lateral  marks  on  nautilus 
plates.       makere.      Florida    nggerc,    to 
write;  Wedau  teretcre. 
kerehi,  kerekerehi  v.  tr.,  to  look  at,  to  stare  at. 
kerekere  1.  hui  kerekere,  a  taro  shot  with  veins. 
kerekere-(na)  2.  U.,  used  with  locative  i,  of 
things   only;    beside,    by    the    side  of. 
i  kerekerena  tala,  beside  the  path, 
kereru'e  S.,  pers.  pron.,  dual  3:  they  two;  used 

only  as  subject. 
kesi   verbal   particle:   ke  and  si  illative;    nge 
laenga  kesi  lae,  then  the  journey  will 
take  place. 
keta,  ketaketa  v.  tr.,  to  annoy,  to  provoke, 
ketanga  v.  n.,  uproar,  upset. 
keta]a-i.ku)  gerund, 
ki'e  S.,  ki'a  U.,  pers.  pron.,  plural  1  incl.:  we; 
more   general    in   meaning   than    kolii   or 
ka'elu;  used    as    subject,     or    suffixed    as 
object      to      verbs      and      prepositions. 
Florida  gita,  Malay  /:// 


lEKIE 


46 


kiekie  S.,  kiakia  U.,  a  club  of  crescent-shape 

with    a    point    on    the    back.     Guppy, 

"Solomon  Islands,"  p.  74. 
ki'i,  ki'iki'i  (ku)  1.  U.,  n.,   hand,  finger,  rod, 

stem ;  susue'i  ki'i,  to  stretch  out  the  hand; 

ki'iki'i   ni   he'u,   a   rod   of   iron.     2.    a 

dwarf,  ki'iki'i  ni  'iyiotii.     Makura  wiri- 

kikin,  Tavara  nima-kiki. 
kiito  n.,  a  bird,  gray  fish-hawk  (Baza  gurneyi). 

Guadalcanar  kiso. 
Mkiri  1.  n.,  a  lettuce-leaf  tree  with  large  edible 

fruits  considered  a  cure  for  coughs;  the 

root  affords  the  red  dye  used  on  strips 

of  cane  (ue,  aleale). 
kikiri  2.,  kikiri  qe'ii,  a  ghost.     M.  A.,  p.  261. 
kikoa  n.,  a  bird,  the  black  mynah.     sikoa. 
kilekile   1.   n.,   a  small  parrot   (Trichoglossus 

massena). 
kilekile  2.  n.,  a  long-handled  tomahawk  used 

for  fighting,  with  an  iron  head;  a  Florida 

word. 
kiliqe'u  1.  n.,  a  depression  in  the  ground,  a 

grave.     2.  n.,  a  pass  in  the  hills  above 

Su'uholo,  Ulawa. 
kilokilo  V.  i.,  to  beat  the  water  with  the  hands 

in  sport  while  bathing,  making  thereby 

a  booming  noise. 
kilu  U.  1.  a  well  of  water,  a  hole  in  the  ground; 

kilu  ni  wei,  a  water  hole;  kilu  ni  ngedi, 

a  pit  where  flints  are  found.     Florida 

gilii,  grave;  Lau  kilugwou,  grave;  Wango 

girii,  ditch;  Viti  kikilo,  hole. 
kilu  U.  2.  contraction  of  kira'elu.     cf.  kelu. 
Mneta'ini,  kinekineta'ini  S.,  to  safeguard,  to 

preserve,  to  observe  and  do.  keneta'ini.U. 
kineta'imla-(ku)  gerund. 
ki'oki'o  n.,  a  bird,  the  large  kingfisher.     Santa 

Cruz  kio,  Mota  sigo,  Samoa  ti'o. 
kiraa  for  kire  a,  used  of  a  company;  kiraa  ola, 

whom  do  you  mean,  lit.,  they  the  person; 

kiraa  Wale,  Wate  and  his  companions. 
kiratei  interrog.  pron.,  plural  3:  who;  followed 

by  e  or  kire;  kiratei  e  lae  mat,  kiratei  kire 

lae,  who  went? 
kire  S.,  kira  U.,  pers.  pron.,  plural  3;  used  as 

subject  only. 
Mreru'e  S.,  pers.  pron.,  dual  3:  they  two;  used 

as  subject  only. 
kirori  n.,  a  parrot  (Lorius  cardinalis),  found  on 

the  blossoms  of  the  Barringtonia  and 

coconut,    tamed    as   a   pet.     cf.    hirori, 

'irori.     Cruise  of  the  Curacoa,  p.  380. 

Motu  kiloki. 
kiru  U.,  rai  kiru,  a  yam  with  reddish  flesh. 
kiukiu  rape  n.,  a  bird,  wagtail,     cf.  hi'uhi'u 

rape. 
ko  S.,   verbal   particle  used  of  general  time; 

si  illative  may  be  added,  kosi;  in  cases 

where  a  changes  to  e  after  a  preceding 

i  or  u  the  same  change  takes  place  after 

ko.     e    'ure'ure    ko    rarangi,    he    stood 

warming  himself;  'oto  kire  kosi  'unue, 

thereupon    they    began   to    say   it;    ko 

ha' ike,   otherwise,   else;   ko  urine,   that 

being  so.     Sesake  ko.  future  particle. 
koe,  koekoe  U.,  v.  i.,  to  make  fun  of;  with  poss. 

3,  to  jest. 


koe,  koekoa  (continued). 

koenga,  v.  n.,  koengaha  v.  n.  (double  noun 

ending).     Wango  koe,  Florida  koehoru. 
koetana'a  to  scatter  (of  a  flock  of  birds). 
kohe,  ko'ekohe  as  koe,  in  Qaloto  dialect, 
kohi  adj.,  beautiful;  e  lio  kohi,  itlooks  beautiful, 
kohikohila  U.,  adj.,  beautiful. 
koho  1.  snags,  logs  or  branches  in  a  stream. 
koho,  kokoho  2.  v.  i.,  to  be  deceitful,  to  deceive; 

ko  kokoho  haahi  wala,  deceitful  in  speech, 
kohonga  v.  n. 
kohu  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  half  grown,  unripe,  green 

(of  fruit). 
kohu  2.  U.,  V.  i.,  to  cut,  to  chop. 
kohukohu  U.,  kohukohu  laona  salo,  far-off  clouds, 
koikoi  U.,  V.  i.,  to  chew  with  toothless  gums, 
ko'ikori  a  pudding  of  pounded  taro  and  cana- 

rium  nuts;  kori. 
koine  v.  tr.,  to  adopt. 

koinala-(ku)  gerund, 
koke  V.  tr.,  to  hasten  unduly. 

kokela'i  partic,  flurried,  hastily;  nou  lae 

kokela'i,  I  came  away  without  making 

due  preparations. 
kokela'ini  tr. 
koko  1.  kokoi  epu,  a  drop  of  blood.     Wango 

kokoru. 
koko  2.  V.  i.,  to  be  narrow,  confined,     hariko- 

kosi.  Mota  koko,  Malagasy  hohota. 
koko  3.  kokoi  sa'o,  a  frond  of  sago  palm;  kokoi 

selu,  needles  of  casuarina. 
kokoho'a  a  hill, 
kokohisi  v.  i.,  to  be  narrow,  strait,  confined. 

koko  2. 
kokohono  v.  i.,  to  be  black  and  lowering,  koko  2. 

salo  ko  kokohono,  the  sky  is  lowering, 
koko'ie'i  partic,  narrow,  confined,  kokoi. 
kokolo  n.,  a  large  hermit  crab,  (Coenobita). 
kokolu  U.,  a  coconut  with  hard  flesh,  fully 

grown;  hoi  niu  kokolu,  hoi  kokolu.  kolu  4. 

Espiritii  Santo  kolo,  coconut. 
kokoluta'a  adj.,  with  corners,     kolu  2. 
kokome  n.,  round  white  shell  armlet  made  of 

trochus  {la'o). 
kokopa  U.,  kokopa  ni  'ei,  a  thin  buttress  on 

certain  trees,  such  as  the  canarium  and 

liki. 
kokorako   v.    i.,    to   crow    (of   fowls).     Mota 

kokorako. 
kokoro  V.  i.,   to  sink  deep  into,  to  be  deep. 

Mota  koro,  deep, 
kokosi  U.,  hasi  kokosi,  to  be  in  distress,     koko  2. 
kole,  kolekole  v.  i.,  to  rattle,  to  rustle;  hote  sa'a 

kole  wa  nga  tne'i  ola  'erele'a  ke'i  i'o  i 

sapeka,  the  paddles  must  not  rattle  nor 

anything  of  light  color  be  about  our 

bodies. 
kolokolo  1.  U.  V.  tr.,  to  forget,  to  fail  to  recol- 
lect,    ha'akolo. 
kolokolo  2.  n.,  a  bird  (Turacaena  crassirostris), 

a  pigeon  with  a  long  tail  and  a  crest, 

cries  at  evening  and  morning, 
kolu  S.  1.  pers.  pron.,  plural  1  inch:  we,  us;  more 

restricted  in  meaning  than  ki'e;  used  as 

subject,  also  suffixed  to  verbs  and  prep- 
ositions as  object,     kolu  mone,  let  us  be 

gone.     Mukawa  kola. 


47 


KU  I 


kolu-(ku)  2.  the  back  (of  persons),  the  outside 
(of  things);  kolune  'asi,  the  face  of  the 
sea;  wdi  e  lama  Itaahi  tie  kolune  mwakano, 
water  covered  the  face  of  the  earth; 
kolune  nime,  the  outside  of  a  bowl. 
3.  the  heel,  kolune  'ae.     Motu  dolu. 

kolu,  kokolu  4.  to  gnaw,  to  champ  with  the 
teeth. 

koluhe  V.  n.,  the  roof  of  a  liouse,  used  with 
poss.  3  ana,  koluhaana  nume.     kolu  2. 

koma  V.  i.,  to  kick;  used  with  poss.  3  as 
object. 

komu  family,  clan,  sort,  tribe  (late  use) ;  in  Sa'a 
pers.  pron.  sing  3  ne  is  suffixed;  komu 
i'emelu,  our  family;  komiina  a  ola.  So- 
and-so's  family.  Florida  komu,  village; 
San  Cristoval  kumu. 

Komukomu  n.,  the  artificial  islets  ofif  north 
Malaita.     Florida  kokomu,  islet. 

kone  V.  i.,  to  set  (of  current),  to  carry  along  in 
flow,  to  be  in  flood;  kone  e  qera,  much 
flood- waters;  ewe  kone,  to  gather  to- 
gether (of  flood-waters);  wdi  ko  kone, 
the  river  is  in  spate.  Ambrym  kone, 
to  carry. 

koni,  konikoni  v.  tr.,  to  put,  to  place,  to  set, 
to  keep,  to  adopt,  to  endow,  to  receive, 
to  entertain,  to  nourish,  koni  diana, 
to  take  good  care  of;  kotiia  kdu,  U., 
wait  a  while;  koni  i  keke,  to  excommuni- 
cate; mdnu  koni,  a  tame  bird;  hu'e  kire 
konie  mola,  a  concubine,  lit.,  wife  enter- 
tained merel\";  ne'i  koni,  to  lay  up  in 
store,  to  make  provision;  7ioko  koni'o  ana 
to'olaku,  I  endow  thee  with  my  property; 
'onime'i  koni,  to  store  up;  si'o  koni,  to 
collect  together;  tola  koni,  to  receive, 
konihe,  konikonihe  v.  n.,  a  servant,  depend- 
ant. 
koiiila-(ku)  gerund.  Florida  nggoni.  Wan- 
go  goni. 

konito'c  adj.,  assured,  in  safety;  i'o  konito'o, 
rest  in  safety,     koni. 

konokono  (ku)  n.,  throat,  gullet,  cf.  'ono'ono, 
to  swallow.  Florida  sonosono,  Wango 
gono,  Ulawa  tono,  to  drink;  Mota  gom, 
to  hold  liquid  in  the  mouth,  gonogono, 
hollow,  with  a  mouth. 

koo  V.  i.,  to  cause  to  boil  by  placing  hot  stones 
in,  stone-boiling. 
koongi  tr. 

kookoo  a  word  used  to  deter  children,  probably 
connected  with  Lau  koo  a  grandfather, 
and  having  to  do  with  religious  rites. 

kopi  S.,  v.  i.,  to  touch,  to  flick  with  the  finger; 
used  with  poss.  3  as  object,  e  kopi  eku, 
he  touched  me. 
kopi  U.,  v.  tr. 

korasi  1.  v.  tr.,  to  scatter,  to  put  to  flight; 
e  korasie  mu  na'ona'oi  mae,  he  put  to 
flight  the  ranks  of  the  foe.  2.  v.  tr.,  to 
pour  out  upon.  Mota  gora,  to  push 
away. 

kore,  korekore  U.   1.  v.  tr.,  to  sweep.     2.  a 
besom  made  of  midribs  of  sago  frond- 
lets. 
kore  3.  ruru  kore,  a  landslip,  avalanche. 


I    Korea  Lama  i  Korea,  a  lake  on  Little  Malaita 
I  above  Su'u  Peine. 

kori    1.    a   yam    pudding,     ko'ikori.     2.    plug 

tobacco  (late  use;. 
I    koro,  koro'i  U.,  pers.  pron.,  dual  3;  they  two; 

used    both    as    subject    and  as  object; 

koro  'a  mono  'oto  i    Kalona,  they  two 

live  apart  in  Kalona. 
koru  1.  V.  tr.,  to  heap  up,  to  be  heaped  up; 

ha'akoru.     koru  dunge,  to  make  a  fire; 

nga  hale  e  korti  hula  i  sinaha,  the  shed 

was  full  right  to  the  door. 
korute  S.,  koruha,  koruta  U.,  a  company,  a 

collection. 
koruhe'ini  tr.,  to  heap  up. 
Koru  2.  a  district  on  the  hills  of  Little  Malaita 

near  Au  Qe'i. 
korukoru  1.  v.  i.,  to  water  (of  the  mouth). 
korukoru  2.  n.,  a  piece,  a  morsel;  nga  koru- 

kortii  niu,  a  piece  of  coconut, 
kosi  verbal  particle  of  general  time:  ko  and  si 

illative;  'oto  kire  kosi  'unue,  thereupon 

they  began  to  say  it;  kosi  mei,  it  has 

just  begun  to  ebb. 
koso  V.  i.,  to  drift  (of  a  canoe). 

kosola'ini  tr.,  to  be  driven  by  a  storm,  to 

be  drifted, 
kosu  v.  i.,  to  be  humpbacked, 
kotaa  V.  i.,  to  chatter. 

kotaaha  v.  n.,  confusion,  ve.xation. 
kotaahi  tr.,  to  chatter  and  vex,  to  annoy. 

Mota  kota. 
kou  1.  clean-shaven  head.     cf.  lorokou'e.     suhi 

kou,  to  shave  the  head  clean. 
kou'e  clean  shaven;  'olo  kou'e  ihune,  shave 

his  head  close,     torokou'e. 
ko*u  2.  adj.,  maimed  in  foot  or  hand. 
ko'ukohu  S.,   kohukohu  U.,  with  genitive  i, 

a  piece,     cf.   ko'uko'u.     ko'ukohui  poo, 

a  piece  of  pork, 
koukou  1.  V.  i.,  to  gargle;  koukou  wei,  koukou 

'esi,  to  gargle  with  sweet  water,  with 

salt  water, 
koukou  2.  with  genitive  It,  ni.     cf.  poupou  2; 

koukouli    'ae,    S.,    koukou    ni    'ae,    U., 

ankle, 
koukou  (na,  ni)  3.  n.,  kernel  of  canarium. 
ko'uko'u  4  as  ko'ukohu. 
ko'uko'u  5  loud  noise,  bang,     kokohu.     rongo; 

ko'uko'u  ana,  to  hear  a  loud  report, 
ko'uko'uhe     v.    n.,     report,    loud    noise; 

ko'uko'uha  ana  siute,  report  of  the  gun. 
koukoule  S.,  adj.,  short,  stumpy. 
koulaa  S.,  hata  koulaa,  noisy  chattering, 
ku  1.  pron.,  sing.  1,  suffixed  to  nouns  and  to 

stem  a  forming  poss.  3.     Mota  k,  Poly- 
nesian ku. 
ku  2.  exclam.  of  contempt. 
ku  3.  V.  tr.,  to  mock  at. 
ku  4.  V.  tr.,  to  bark  at;  'usu  e  kueu,  the  dog 

barked  at  me. 
kue  S..  kua  U.  1.  n..  a  domestic  fowl;  /io»  kue.  hoi 

muaopu  ni  kue,  a  fowl's  egg.   Wango  kua. 
ku'e  S.,  ku'a  U.  2.  pron.,  sing.  1.  suffi.xed  to 

stems  'a  and  na  forming  poss.  1  and  2. 
ku'i  V.  tr.,  to  mock  at.     ku  3;  mvala  ko  ku'ie, 

men  mock  him. 


KUKA 


48 


kuka  U.,  'u'e  S.,  a  mud  crab,  kzika  ptilu. 

kukao'e  U.,  a  cry  to  call  distant  attention. 

kuku  U.,  *u'u  S.  1.  V.  i.,  to  hang  down,  to 
depend,     ka'akuku,  mivakuku. 

kuku  U.  2.  to  be  bent;  Jordan  e  kuku  eliho'i, 
Jordan  was  turned  back.  Motu 
magugu,  to  crinkle;  Maori  kuku,  pin- 
cers; Salakau,  Borneo,  kuku,  a  claw. 

kukulu  U.,  V.  i.,  to  swing. 

kule  1.  n.,  the  shore,  the  beach,  dry  land;  td'i 
kule,  on  the  beach;  lai  kule,  to  go  up 
on  to  the  beach. 

kule,  kulekule  2.  v.  tr.,  to  loosen,  to  be  loose; 
kulaa  talai  heuyie,  to  loosen  the  teeth. 
Viti  kurektire,  to  wag  the  head. 

kulu  V.  i.,  to  burj'  at  sea,  kulu  rac,  M.  A.,  p. 
262;  two  canoes  take  the  body  out  for 
burial,  the  body  is  weighted  with  stones 
and  the  knees  hunched  up  and  tied; 
after  the  committal  one  canoe  paddles 
several  times  at  a  fast  pace  around  the 
spot,  the  other  paddles  out  to  sea  taking 
a  tndngite,  q.  v. 
kulu'i  tr. 
kulu*ila-(ku)  gerund. 

kuluhi  V.  tr.,  to  sustain,  cf.  manikulu'e; 
e  kuluhie  hdnue,  he  sustains  the  land. 

kumara  sv.eet  potato  (Polynesian),  called 
occasionally  uhi  ni  haka,  the  imported 
yam;  susu  kumara,  to  plant  the  vines. 

kumu,  kumukumu  1.  v.  i.,  to  punch,  to  beat 
with  the  fist. 
kumu'i  tr. 
kumu'ila-(ku)  gerund. 

kumu  2.  v.  i.,  to  be  blunt,  dull  of  edge. 

kumuri  v.  tr.,  to  quench. 

kumwe  S.,  kumwa  U.,  v.  i.,  to  ebb,  to  go  down, 
to  abate,  to  slacken,  to  diminish,  to  wane. 
kumwesi  1.  to  shorten.     2.  kumwesie  tele, 
to  take  a  stone  wall  to  pieces. 

kure,   kurekure    1.    v.    tr.,    to   heal   sickness; 
mwane   kurekure,   a  witch   doctor, 
kuranga  v.  n.,  healing,  curing. 

kure  S.  2.  pers.  pron.,  dual  1,  incL:  we  two,  us 
two;  used  as  subject  and  also  suffixed  to 
verbs  and  prepositions  as  object. 

kure  3.  exclam.,  often  reduplicated;  kurekure, 
come  on  with  you,  let  us  (two)  be  off. 

kttru  n.,  a  ripe  areca  nut.  cf.  pue.  hoi  kuru; 
metaph.  a  full-grown  person. 

kurukuru  1.  U.,  a  wood-pigeon,  generic  term. 
2.  S.,  a  pigeon  without  wattles  on  the 
beak,  kurtikuru  ni  Malau. 

kururaqa  U.,  adj.,  deceitful  (derived  from  the 
name  of  a  person). 

kusi  cat  (English  pussy).     Samoa  ngose. 

kute,  kutekute  v.  tr.,  to  shake,  to  move 
violently. 


]a  1.  v.  i.,  to  be,  to  go;  e  la  'otoi  'aela,  it  goes 
(is)  bad;  e  la  'otoi  'aela  mwaani  nonola, 
it  is  worse  than  yesterday;  e  la  'olo  i 
diana,  it  is  good;  saeku  e  la  'otoi  wana, 
my  heart  was  hot;  e  lai  'aela,  it  is  bad. 
Tolo  ra,  to  go;  Mota  al;  Keapara  laa, 
walk;  Maisin  ra»,  come;  Trobriand  la,  go. 


la  2.  verbal  suffix;  apa,  apala. 

la  3.  noun  ending  added  to  verbs,    viae,  inaeld. 

la  4.  adjective  ending  added  to  verbs  and 
participles,     naho,  nahold,  ercerea'ile. 

la  5.  gerundive  ending,  to  which  pronoun  (ku) 
is  always  suffixed,  sau,  saicnildna, 
saunileku. 

la  6.  root  of  langa,  to  lift;  Idngi,  sky. 

laa  1.  noun  ending,  added  to  verbs,  hou,  houlaa, 
honu,  honulaa. 

laa  2.  U.,  a  person;  nga  laa  ni  hei,  who  is  this 
person?  vgaile  laa,  a  different  person; 
laa  hou,  vocative,  you;  'o  si  ta'ata'a, 
laa,  don't,  I  say;  'oto  ihei,  laa,  where  to, 
boy. 

la'a  3.  adjective  ending,     mamaela'a. 

la'a  4.  U.,  adv.  up;  suhi  la'a  ana,  lift  it  up. 

la'alapa  v.  i.,  to  complain,  to  moan,     lapata'i. 

La'alanga  Alite  Harbor,  Langalanga,  Big 
Malaita. 

la'alapasi  cf.  lapasi. 

lada  1.  V.  i.,  to  pierce,  to  thrust  through, 
ladami  tr. 
ladamila-(ku)  gerund. 

lada  2.   ladaa'ini,   to  bow,   to  bend  down;   e 
ladaa'inie  maana,  he  fell  on  his  face. 
ladama'i     par  tic,      headlong,      prostrate. 
Florida  lada,  to  bend,  to  worship. 

lade  1.  lade  mac,  deep  sea.  2.  deep-water 
anchorage  at  the  end  of  a  harbor,  i  Lade, 
e.  g.,  at  Tawaniahia.  3.  S.,  name  of 
certain  months;  hure'i  lade,  August; 
oku  lade,  September. 

lado  1.  V.  tr.,  to  knot,  to  join,  to  graft. 

ladoha  »;a  v.  n.,  a  joint;  i  lado'ihaana,  in  a  line 
with,  joining  onto;  i  ladohaana,  thereby, 
ladoha'ini  tr.,  to  join  on. 
ladola-(ku)  gerund. 

lado,  lalado  2.  v.  tr.,  to  recount,  to  tell,  to 
recite  a  tale;  lado  dicna,  U.,  to  explain; 
lado  Idliheku,  to  make  my  defense, 
laladonga  v.  n.,  story,  tale,  folk  lore, 
ladoha'ini  tr.     Florida  lada. 

lae,  laelae  v.  i.,  to  go,  to  come,  lae  mai,  lae  ■ivau; 
to  be,  e  lae  urilaa,  how  is  it;  with  loca- 
tive i,  lae  i  contracts  to  lai;  kiralei  e  lae 
mai,  who  are  coming;  kiralei  kire  lae, 
who  went?  lae  ha'i'oli,  to  go  and  return; 
lae  hd'iore,  to  staj-  behind;  noko  lai  haka, 
I  am  going  abroad;  lai  henue,  to  go  a 
journey;  lae  honosi,  to  go  and  meet;  lae 
hou,  to  descend;  lai  hule,  to  reach;  lai 
hulaana,  till,  until;  lae  kitni'i,  go  to 
fetch  them;  'oke  lae  kd'u,  3'ou  had  better 
go;  nou  lae  kd'u,  I  went;  lae  kd'u  'ohi'i, 
go  fetch  it;  lae  kd'u  poi,  come  up  here; 
nou  lae  kokela'i,  I  came  away  in  a  hurry; 
'oko  lae  mai  'ure  ilei,  where  are  you  from? 
lae  mdlumu,  go  quietly;  ngeni  nou  lae  mdi, 
that's  why  I  came;  lae  molai  rako,  go 
gently;  lae  mone,  let  us  be  gone;  kira  'a 
mune'i  lae,  were  they  to  go;  mu7ii  'e  lae, 
go  gently;  muni  'e  lae  mai,  let  him  come; 
muni  nge'ia  e  lae  mai,  if  he  comes;  lae 
ohonga,  to  go  tentatively;  lae  ni  oraha'a, 
to  go  very  fast;  na'a  lae  'oto,  I  am  going; 
e  lae  'oto  ni  mae,  he  went  like  every- 


49 


LAMA 


lae,  laelae  (continued). 

thing;  lae  po'opo'oli'ili'i,  to  go  way- 
wardly;  lae  rnola  qalaqala,  to  go  for 
naught;  ko  lae  ni  ranto,  he  goes  in  his 
miglit;  laelae  i  rodo,  to  go  till  nightfall; 
lae  rorora,  to  go  in  a  hurry;  nge'i  kc'i  lac 
ta'ane,  he  will  surely  go;  noii  lae  lakalo, 
I  am  lost;  lae  lara'asi,  to  go  straight  on; 
lai  toli,  to  be  going  to  fish  out  at  sea; 
nnmi'e  hara  lae,  begin  to  go  gently;  'oke 
haro  lae,  go  gently;  noko  hirue'i  lac,  I 
am  hindered  from  going;  ka'el'e  laelae, 
let  us  go;  le'ti  noko  lae  ana,  le'u  noko  lae 
hitnie,  whither  I  go;  noko  loona'i  lac.  I 
intend  going;  liiqe'i  lae,  to  pretend  to 
go;  mani  ni'ilana  sakanga  c  mdni  lae 
hunieu,  all  power  is  given  unto  me; 
melii  orci  lae,  we  almost  went;  e  Idu  ni 
lae,  he  made  to  go. 
laeha  v.  n.,  a  company  traveling. 
laenga  v.  n.  1.  a  journey;  tnaai  lacnga,  S., 
maani  laenga,  U.,  a  journey;  nge  laenga 
kesi  lae,  then  the  journey  will  take  place. 
2.  laenga  (ku),  U.,  laeha  (kit),  S.,  a  going: 
laengana,  his  going;  laehaku  e  'acla,  I 
can  not  walk  well. 
laehi  tr..  to  travel  through  a  place. 
laeli,  laelaeli  tr.  1.  to  cause  the  bowels  to  be 
open.  2.  laeli  wala,  to  make  an  oration; 
laeli  ualanga,  oratory,  address,  speech- 
ifying. 
laelae'i  partic,  ere  laelae'i,  talk  by  the  way 

side. 
laela-(ku)  gerund.,  laelaku,  my  going.     Lau 
lea,  to  go;  Mailu  laea,  path. 
laha  adj.,  big  (not  in  common  use);  Su'u  Laha, 
a    boat    harbor   south    of   Su'u    Peine; 
Pululaha,  a  harbor  south  of  the  west 
entrance  to  Mara  Masiki  Channel,     cj. 
alaha,  a  chief.     Mota  lava,  Florida  haba, 
Maori  raha. 
lahe  V.  tr.,  to  praise,  to  extol,     -paalahe. 
lahe'a  adj.,  praised,  blessed. 
lahela-(ku)  gerund. 
lahi,  la'ilehi  1.  to  lay  eggs.     2.  v.  tr.,  to  be  in 
travail  with;  ko  lehie  eronga,  in  travail 
with  deceit. 
laho'a  adj.,  foggy,  cloudy. 
lahu  1.  to  be  worn  out.     2.  worn  out  things, 
mu  lehui  ola;  mil  lehuni  to'oni,  ragged 
clothes.     Lau    lafu,  Wango  rahu,   old; 
Florida  ravu. 
lahu  3.  V.  i.,  to  blow  a  conch  shell. 

lahula-(ku)    gerund.,   Idhulana   'dhuri,   the 
sound  of  the  conch. 
IShu  U.  4.   n.,  place;   ildhuna,  ilehuna,   there; 
mwai  lehu  ine,  those  places.     Sa'a  le'u, 
Florida  leiu. 
lahute'i  U.,  partic,  prostrate. 
lai  1.  contraction  of  lae  i:  e  lae  id'i  Sa'a.  he 
went  to  Sa'a;  noko  lai  haka,  I  am  going 
abroad;  noko  lai  leesie,  I  go  to  see  it;  lai 
loosi  haa,  to  go  and  inspect  the  money 
given  for  a  bride;  noko  lai  Ion.   I   go 
bonito  fishing;  2.  e  lai' acla;  cj.  la  1. 
la'i  3.  participial  ending,  honu  honule'i. 


la'i  4.  suffix  to  verb,  used  intransitively;  to 

make  it  transitive  ni  is  added,  Id'ini. 
la'ini  tr.,  suffix,  la'e,  la'eld'ini. 
laka  to  play  (of  shoals  of  bonito);  mu  seu  ko 

laka,  the  bonito  play  in  schools. 
lakali  U.,  to  have  sexual  intercourse,    hd'ilakali. 
lakata'ini  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  open  the  eye. 
lakelake  U.,  tdu  lakelake,  used  with  poss.  3,  to 

give  oneself  airs. 
lakoma'ini  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  be  parallel  to,  to  lay 
on  longitudinally,     rakoma'ini,  U.     heU 
lakoma'inie,  hold  it  to,  together  with, 
on  it. 
lakoma'i  partic,  laid  out  along,  longitudi- 
nally;   rdpu    lakoma'i  Pe'i  po'upo'u,  to 
crucify;  'uri  lakoma'i,  to  tread  in  the 
steps  of. 
laku,  la'uleku  v.  i.,  to  be  whole,  entire,  safe. 
hd'ileku,  sapeldku;  e  ka'a  ola  ke  Idkii, 
there  is  nothing  whole.     Lau  lau. 
lalahu'e  adj.,  worn  out,  old.     lahu. 
lala'ini  v.  tr.,  to  stretch  out.     Wango  rarasi. 
lala'i  partic,  outstretched. 
lala'inila-(ku)  gerund. 
lalako  U.,  nanako  S.,  v.  i.,  to  be  sticky,  to  stick, 
lalamoa    n.,    a    person    killed    by    violence,    a 
victim;     momo     lalam.oa,     armlet,     cf. 
momo;  lalamoa  mduri,  a  captive;  poo  ke 
ne'i  lalamoa  ko  'olisie  'oto  a  mwaena,  a 
pig  is  the  victim  in  place  of  the  man; 
e  hai  lalamoa  e  mae  hunia  Qai,  four  dead 
men   for  Qai   to   pay  a   fine  for;   taho 
lalamoa,   to  pay  for  a   man  killed  by 
violence. 
lalani  U.,  lalani  uala,  to  make  an  oration,  to 

speechify. 
lalaunge'i  S.,  'unu  lalaunge'i,  to  tell  beforehand, 
lalawa  1.  V.  i.,  to  be  lazy,     ka'alawa.     2.  U.,  to 
be  unwilling;  luqe'i  lalawa  haahi,  to  give 
a  feigned  excuse, 
lalawanga  v.  n.,  laziness. 
lalawasi   U.,   v.   tr.,   to  reject,   to  neglect 
through  laziness. 
lalawa  3.  n.,  the  marrow;  7nu  lalawai  ola  ana 

suli,  the  marrow  of  the  bones. 
lalemo  1.  without  coconut  milk;  kara  lalemo, 
yam    pudding    without    the    milk.     2. 
unfermented. 
lalo  (ku)    1.   n.,   inside,  within;   'oto  wdi  lalo, 
inside;  lalotia  e  'acla,  it  is  bad  inside; 
lalona    e    waawaa,    nothing    inside    it; 
laloi  ha'a,  within  the  gamer;  laloi  suli, 
within    the   bones.     2.    U.,    laloku,    my 
stomach,  my  insides.     3.  dan  lalo  ana, 
to  be  immersed  in,  to  be  plunged  into. 
Mota  lolo,  Motu  lalo,  Wedau  ana,  pith; 
Wango  raro,  Gilberts  nano. 
lalo  4.  U.,  n.,  a  garden;  lalo  indu.  my  garden; 
i  epina  lalo,  bordering  on  the  garden; 
'atoni  lalo,  to  lay  out  a  garden, 
lalo'a  adj.,  roomy,  spacious. 
Laloi   Su'u    (lit.,   in   the  Su'u)    Mara   Masiki 

Channel,  which  divides  Malaita. 
lama  1.  v.  tr.,  to  cut  up  trees,  to  cut  felled  trees 
into  billets  convenient  for  burning;  lama 
tali,  to  free  a  tree  of  creepers;  met.,  to 
free  persons. 


LAMA 


50 


lama   1  (continued). 
lamasi  tr. 
lamata'ini  U.,  tr. 

lama  2.  n..  a  lake,  hai  lama;  lama  i  Korea,  Lake 
Korea,  Little  Malaita.  Mota  lama, 
open  sea;  Borneo  lama,  lake. 

lama  3.  v.  i.,  to  spread  over,  to  cover;  wai  e 
lama  haahi  tie  kolune  rnwakana,  the 
water  still  covered  the  face  of  the  earth. 

lama  L  hanuelatna,  S.,  da'ilama'a,  U.,  peace. 

laml  n.,  a  phase  of  the  moon;  hau  ni  lemi,  full 
moon;  to'ohunga  lemi,  S.,  full  moon; 
lemi  mwaa,  U.,  full  moon. 

langa  1.  v.  i.,  to  moderate  temporarily  (of  rain); 
n.,  a  spell  between  the  showers,  ha'a- 
langa;  U.  la'a  up.  n.,  kele  me'i langa,  it 
lets  up  a  little.  Lau  lalanga,  dry; 
Mota  langa,  to  lift;  Viti  langa,  Samoa 
langa,  Niue  langa,  Mao.  ranga,  lift. 

langa  2.  ha'alanga,  to  expose  to  the  air  in  order 
to  dry. 

langa'a,  langalanga'a  adj.,  up,  on  high,  clear; 
heie  langa'a,  hele  langalanga'a,  to  hold 
up  conspicuously.     Mao.  rangai,  raised. 

Langalanga  a  village  on  Big  Malaita  where 
shell  money  is  made. 

langi  ha'aldngi,  a  house  on  piles;  ilengi,  sky, 
heaven.  Mota  lang,  wind;  Maori  rangi, 
sky;  Salakau,  Borneo,  angin,  wind. 

langilengi'e  adj.,  aloft,  lifted  up.  langi.  Fate 
langilangi,  proud. 

lango  n.,  a  fly;  lango  rae,  bluebottle  fly.  Mota 
lango,  Maori  rango,  Gilbert  Islands 
nango. 

langu.  v.  i,  to  pluck  up;  hiini  lengu  ha'aodohie 
'aeka,  to  guide  our  feet;  Idngu  Iwlo,  to 
break  in  two. 
langu'i  tr.     Wango  rangui. 

la'o  1.  niinula'o,  stinging-nettle  tree,     nunu  4. 

la'o  2.  in,  inside;  with  suffixed  pronoun  na; 
locative  i  may  be  prefixed,  cf.  lalo  1. 
la'o  i'ola,  in  the  canoe;  la'ona  nime,  in 
the  bowl;  hai  la'ona,  wai  la'ona,  within, 
inside;  ni'i  'ae  la'o  i'ola,  to  board  a 
canoe;  kohukohu  la'ona  salo,  far-off 
clouds. 

la'o  3.  cone  shell,  trochus;  a  forehead  ornament 
of  trochus  or  tridachna  shell,  it  is  cir- 
cular or  oval  and  incised  with  the  device 
of  a  frigate-bird,  the  hair  is  threaded 
through  a  small  hole  in  the  la'o,  which 
then  hangs  on  the  side  of  the  forehead; 
semicircular  pieces  of  trochus  shell 
inlaid  upon  the  sides  of  large  canoes; 
i'ola  la'o,  a  canoe  thus  inlaid;  armlets 
(kokome)  are  cut  from  the  trochus. 
Florida    lago. 

la'ola'o  liuhu  la'ola'o  ana  wii'i,  to  be  contorted 
with  spasms  of  tetanus. 

la'ongi  S.,  la'oni  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  step  over,  to 
cross  over. 
la'ongila-(ku)     gerund.      Mota    lago,    Viti 
lako,  Motu  lao. 

lapasi,  la'alapasi  v.  tr.,  to  attempt  a  thing. 
Wango   raba. 

lapata'i  1.  v.  i.,  to  complain,  to  moan;  noko 
lapata'i  ulo  'oto,  I  complain  in  mourning. 


lapata'i,  la'alapata'i  2.  v.  i.,  to  be  concerned 

about,  to  endeavor,     la'alapa. 
lapi  v.  i.,  to  change  shape,  to  change  appearance 

(of    ghosts);    e    lapi    ana    pa'ewa,    he 

changed  into  a  shark. 
laqa  1.  bracken.     2.  I  Laqa,  a  district  on  the 

hills  above  Sa'a  on  the  ridges  below 

'ano  mola. 
laqi  ointment,  coconut  oil  for  anointing,     laqi 

ni  su. 
laqitaa  U.,  an  oven  of  food, 
lasu  1.  to  be  aged,     pdipeilesu'a.     2.  used  as 

an   endearing    term    to   a   young   boy, 

anglice  "old  man." 
lau,  lauleu  1.  v.  i.,  to  snatch;  lau  'ae,  be  quick, 

quickly;  'aka  lau,  to  pull  out  violently. 

2.  to  defend,  to  help;  lau  haahi,  to  make 

a  defense  in  words.     Mao.  ran,  catch, 
lauhi  tr.,  to  defend,  to  succor;  Iduhi  ola,  to 

help;  lauhi  olanga,  v.  n.,  succor. 
lauliila-(ku)  gerund.     Wango  rau. 
lau  3.  V.  tr.,  to  weed. 
lauhi  green  snail  shell  (Turbo  petholatus);  sun 

leuhi,  to  dive  for  the  shell, 
lauleu  1.  to  be  quick.     Idul.     2.  quickly.     Lau 

loulou,  Wango  raurau. 
lauleu'a  U.,  adj.,  quick,  fast. 
launa  U.,  v.  i.,  to  be  speechless,  to  lose  one's 

voice  in  sickness. 
launa'o  v.  i.,  to  go  before, 
launi,  lauleuni  1.  v.  tr.,  to  adorn.     2.  bodily 

ornaments,  mu  leuni. 
launihe  (ku)  bodily  ornaments.     Iduniheku. 
lauleunita-(ku)      U.,     v.     n.,     ornaments. 

Iduleunitana  nga  'inoni,   ornaments  of 

men. 
launga'i  U.,  to  occupy  first,  to  be  the  first 

to  live  in. 
lauwanga  S.,   the  firmament,   open  space   of 

heaven,     maalau. 
lawa  1.  spider's  web;  used  as  bait  and  made  to 

skip  on  the  surface  of  the  sea  (lilie'i)  at 

the  tail  of  a  fish  kite  (sa'o)   to  catch 

garfish  {mivanole) .     2.  a  spider.     Mota 

marawa,  Viti  lawa,  net;  viritalawalawa, 

cobweb;  Visaya  lawa,  cobweb. 
lede  U.  1.  V.  tr.,  to  break,     ha'alede,  malelede; 

lede     ola,     to     be     mischievous;     lede 

olanga,  mischief. 
ledela-(ku)  gerund. 
Lede  2.  a  boat  harbor  on  Little  Malaita  north 

of  Roasi  Bay. 
ledi,  leledi  1.  v.  tr.,  to  refuse,  to  examine  and 

reject,     maleledi,  hd'ileledi. 
ledila-(ku)  gerund. 
ledi  U.  2.  V.  i.,  to  ask,  to  question;  soe  ledi,  to 

question.     Lau  ledi. 
leesi,  leeleesi  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  see;  noko  lai  leesie, 

go  to  see  it;  kdu  neke  leesie,  please  let 

me  see  it;  nou  ka'a  to'ohuunge'i  leesie, 

I  surely  did  not  see  it;  na  ni  leesie  palonga 

aku,  and  saw  my  works;  e  ka'a  ola  neke 

leesie,  I  saw  nothing;  'omu  ka'a  mana- 

ta'inie   wa   'omu   ke   leesie,    ye    neither 

know  him  nor  have  seen  him. 
leesila-(ku)  gerund. 
lehu,  lahu  U.,  le'u  S.  1.  place;  2.  thing:  the 


51 


LILIKI 


lehu,  lahu  1  (continued). 

demonstrative  ni  may  be  added;  leliuna 
qa'ike,  not  that;  mwai  lehu  raro,  open 
plains,  glades.  Florida  leva,  portion, 
side. 

lehu  2.  suu  lehu,  a  kind  of  arrow. 

lei,  leilei  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  judge. 
leinge  v.  n.,  judgment. 
leila-(ku)  gerund. 

lekoleko  v.  i.,  to  hang  down,  to  trail  on  the 
ground. 

leko'i  U..  to  bark  (of  a  dog). 

leku  cf.  Idku. 

lele  V.  i.,  to  squint;  maana  e  lele,  he  squints. 

leledi  cf.  ledi. 

lelenga-(na)  clear,  unimpeded  (of  speech  or 
hearing);  ka'a  rongo  lelengani,  not  to 
hear  plainly;  'unu  lelengana,  to  speak 
clearly. 

lelengana  U.,  drowsy;  to'o  lelengana,  not 
aroused  from  sleep. 

Lenga  a  village  on  the  west  coast  of  Uiawa, 
i  Lenga. 

leleu  V.  tr.,  to  carry  off,  to  abduct. 

lemi  cf.  liiini. 

lengi,  langi  (.ku)  top,  above,  on;  with  locative  i. 
Id  6.  lengine  hd'u,  on  the  top  of  the 
rock;  ilengi,  heaven,  sky;  ilengiku,  above 
me;  po'oilengi,  U.,  south;  qd'i  lengi, 
east  or  south. 

lengu  cf.  Idngii. 

leo  a  tree  (Hibiscus  tiliaceus,  Pariti  tiliaceum) 
with  yellow  flowers,  the  bast  is  used  as 
cord;  tihi  leoleo,  a  variety  of  yam. 

lete  1.  V.  i.,  to  be  firm  in  opinion  or  in  state- 
ment; 'unu  lete,  to  affirm;  ne'isae  lele, 
to  be  set  in  intention. 
letehi  tr.,  to  affirm. 
letehila-(na,  ni)  gerund. 

lete  2.  V.  i.,  to  be  scared,  wild,  to  scent  danger. 
Iia'alele. 
letehi  tr.,  to  punish,  to  castigate,  ha'aletehi. 

le'u  S.  1.  place.  2.  thing.  3.  piece,  part. 
4.  with  i  sape,  'oio  may  be  added:  le'u 
i  sapeku  'oto,  my  duty;  le'u  noko  lae  ana, 
le'u  noko  lae  hunie,  whither  I  go;  le'u 
nou  saaie  nou  saaie,  what  I  know  I 
know;  le'itne  nou  daa  'oto,  I  did  that 
already;  ere  ni  le'u  honu,  to  boast;  hele 
hu'isie  nga  le'u,  to  err  in  anything;  mu 
le'u  e  niwadau,  places  easy  to  traverse; 
le'une  e  na'onga  'oto,  the  place  is  quite 
abandoned;  po'o  ni  le'u,  partly;  nga 
po'o  ni  le'u,  a  piece;  le'u  talaku,  my 
place;  mu  le'u  talahuliana,  his  wonted 
place.     U.,  Idhu,  Florida  levu. 

leu  hd'ileu,  to  snatch,  to  be  violent,    leleu. 

leuni  cf.  Iduni. 

le'uqala  S.,  a  deserted  place,  qala.  i'o  ni 
le'uqala,  to  be  deserted,  alone. 

11  1.  genitive  particle,  a  variant  of  ni  used  in 
certain  compounds,  hd'ulihanc,  Qd'uli- 
mwaa,  maalimwalo,  'dili'apaa,  koukou- 
li'ae.     Epi  ri,  Alite  Malaita,  li. 

li  2.  verbal  suffix,  lae  laeli. 

lidu,  lilidu  v.  i.,  to  crawl,  to  get  along  on  all 
fours. 


li'e  1.  n.,  ginger,  given  to  women  in  ordeala 

{'ai  ha'angdu  keni).     Florida  ria. 
li'e  2.  v.  i.,  to  change  shape,  to  throw  back,  of 

trees,  e.  g.,  oranges.     V'iti  lia,  to  trans- 
form, 
li'e  3.  ha'ali'e,  to  cook,  to  get  a  meal  ready, 
li'eli'a'a  adj.,  indistinctly,  confusedly,     li'e  2. 

ngara  li'eli'a'a,  to  give  out  an  uncertain 

note. 
lihu,  lihulihu  v.  i.,  to  travel  along  the  coast  in 

a  canoe,  to  go  by  sea  as  opposed  to  liu 

i  henue,  go  by  land, 
lihunge  v.  n.,  a  going  by  sea. 
lihue'ini  tr.,  to  convey  a  person  in  a  canoe. 

Florida  lilihi. 
lihue'ini  v.  tr.,  to  borrow  or  lend  possessions. 
lii  1.  V.  tr.,  to  make  qaso,  threading  the  money 

{wili  haa),  and  making  the  ornaments; 

to  lace. 
li'i  2.  V.  i.,  to  be  out  of  joint  (of  limbs),     'aeku 

e  li'i. 
li'ite'i  partic,  twisted  (of  ankle), 
li'isi  beyond,     likisi.     lae  li'isi,  to  go  beyond, 

to  exceed,   to  outstrip;  talo  lili'isi,   at 

irregular  intervals. 
li'ite-  cf.  likite-.     beyond,  on  the  far  side  of; 

po'o  wau  li'itemu, on  the  other  side  of  thee. 
liki,  liliki,  likiliki  1.  v.  i..  to  leap,  pola  likiliki. 

2.  to  be  nervous;  saeku  e  liki,   I  was 

nervous. 
liki  3.  riki  U.,  liki  hune,  to  pull  up  the  mooring- 

stakes  of  a  canoe,  to  get  up  the  anchor 

(late  use), 
liki  4.  a  tree,  rosewood,  the  branches  live  when 

planted,  the  trunk  has  buttress  flanges 

(kokopa) . 
likisi  V.  tr.,  to  go  beyond,  to  cross,  to  outdo, 

to    transgress;    likisi    to'i,    a    mouse. 

Florida  lilinggi,  to  border  on,  to  pass 

by;     Nguna     lingiraki,     to     leave,     to 

abandon. 
likimaa-(na)     adv.,     certainly,     undoubtedly. 

likimaana  'oto;  lisimaana,  U. 
likitaa  glandular  swelling  in  the  armpit  and 

groin;  to  have  such  swellings. 
likite-(ku)  beyond,  on  the  far  side  of;  po'o  hao 

likitemu,  on  the  other  side  of  thee. 
lili  1.  v.  i.,  to  change,  to  move  about,     ha'alili. 

lili  'epule,  to  be  changed  into  blood;  lili 

keli,  to  encircle;  lili  qana,  to  jibe  a  sail, 

to  tack  (of  a  canoe);  hdu  lili  qana,  the 

boom  of  a  sail. 
lUi  2  (ku)  back  teeth. 
lili  3.  liliheu,  Ulikeli. 

lili'a'a  adj.,  racked  with  rheumatic  pains. 
lili'e  rheumatic  pains,     lili. 
lilie'i  V.  i.,  to  cast  for  garfish  {mwanole)  with 

a  rod  and  line,  using  spider  web  (Jawa) 

as  bait,  the  teeth  of  the  fish  becoming 

fast  in  the  web;  hdu  ni  lilie'i,  a  rock 

from  which  men  cast  for  garfish. 
liliheu  stone  walls  of  taoha  or  of  toohi.     si'o 

liliheu.  to  collect  stones  for  a  wall. 
liUkeli  V.  tr.,  to  encircle;  adv.,  encircling,     kali. 
liliki  a  mousetrap  made  of  a  hollow  bamboo 

and  a  noose  hung  in  front  of  it,  a  spring 

trap,     liki  1. 


LILISI 


T)-^ 


lilisi  1.  talo  lilisi,  to  offer  a  certain  proportion 
as  a  sacrifice,  lilisi  2.  tola  lilisi,  to  walk 
about,     lili  1. 

lime  S.,  lima  U.,  five:  in  pronunciation  lima, 
U.,  tends  to  approach  nima,  hand, 
limana  fifth. 

ha'alime    five    times.     Mota    limwa,    five; 
Maori  riyna,  hand. 

lingi,  lingiling!  v.  i.,  to  pour,     malitigilirigi. 
lingisi  tr. 

lingisila-(na,  ni)  gerund.     ^Mota  ling.  Maori 
ringi. 

lio  1.  V.  i.,  to  look  to  see,  to  be  awake,  to  be 
careful,  ha' alio,  lio  dhu'i,  to  protect; 
lio  alieli,  to  look  about  one;  lio  haha- 
'itelili,  to  distinguish;  lio  hahuroto,  to 
gaze,  to  see  clearly;  lio  ha'itale,  U.,  to 
look  for  in  vain;  wou  ka'a  lio  Iiikcna  nga 
ola,  I  saw  nothing;  lio  liilisi,  to  choose; 
lio  hilisie  huni  hu'e  i'oe,  choose  her  for 
your  wife;  lio  hnyii,  to  choose:  e  lio 
hunie  huni  hu'e  vana;  lio  huni  7naa,  S., 
to  exercise  partiality;  lio  isuli,  to  watch, 
to  take  care  of  (late  use);  lio  kd'u, 
behold;  lio  keke,  to  look  behind;  lio 
i  kekca'i  maanga,  to  bear  ill  will,  to  have 
a  spite  against;  e  lio  kohi,  it  looks  beau- 
tiful; lio  maai,  U.,  to  permit;  lio  maaila- 
'ini,  to  view  with  favor;  kire  ka'a  lio 
tndngini,  they  saw  none  of  it;  lio  i 
ngaei  maa,  lio  i  ngaena  maa,  to  look 
askance  at,  to  envy,  to  be  jealous  of; 
lio  i  ngae  maanga,  jealousy;  lio  odo'i,  to 
find;  lio  qd'ulunge'ini,  to  see  indis- 
tinctly; lio  qeru  ngudu,  lio  qeru  'upu, 
to  grudge,  to  hate;  lio  saai,  S.,  lio  sae, 
U-,  to  perceive,  to  recognize;  lio  sae 
to'o,  to  favor;  lio  tala,  to  take  care,  to 
beware;  lio  talahi,  to  look  for  in  vain; 
lio  tale,  to  fail  to  see;  lio  tataileii,  to 
appear  beautiful;  lio  to'o,  with  poss.  3, 
to  find;  lio  wasawasa,  to  see  indistinctly. 
liolia-(na)  S.,  liota-(na)  U.,  v.  n.,  looks, 
appearance.     Mota  ilo,  to  see. 

li'o  2.  v.  i.,  to  hang  oneself,  ha'ali'o.  Mota 
ligo,  Motu  rio,  Maori  niko,  to  form  into 
a  bight. 

li'oa  S.,  n.,  spirit,  ghost,  M.  A.,  pp.  136.  260: 
the  word  is  li'oa  and  not  lio'a;  the  mean- 
ing is  rather  spirit  than  ghost,  though 
undoubtedly  both  meanings  appear; 
there  may  be  a  connection  with  U. 
hi'ona.  ho'asi  sisingana  li'oa,  to  swear 
by  a  spirit;  ngeitei  li'oa,  what  spirit? 
ngoria  Li'oa,  to  quench  the  Spirit; 
nanamanga  para'itana  tnu  li'oa,  power 
over  the  spirits;  uraa'i,  to  make  an 
offering  to  the  spirits. 

liei  U.,  nisi,  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  cut  off  a  piece  or  sec- 
tion.    Wango  risi,  to  shave  the  head. 

lisimaa-fna)  U.,  as  rikimaa. 

lite  (na)  n.,  seed,  kernel,     hoi  lite. 

liu,  liuliu  V.  i.,  to  come,  to  go,  to  pass  by,  to 
ply  about,  to  become  general,  hd'iliu, 
liuta'a.  liu  i  'esi,  travel  by  sea;  liu  i 
henue,  travel  by  land,  take  the  upper 
road,  ant.  halale;  liu  hono,  to  intervene 


liu,  liuliu  (continued). 

(of  time);  ngaini  sa'a  liu  ha'ahireru'e, 
none  shall  pass  in  front  of  them  (and 
overcome  them) ;  niu  dinge  hunge  e  liueu, 
many  days  passed  over  me;  liu  takalo, 
to  take  a  wrong  path;  liu  tarau,  to  con- 
tinue; tala  ni  liu,  path  to  travel  by. 
Wango  rill,  Samoa  liu,  to  turn;  Florida 
liliii,  to  change;  Mota  riu,  to  move  feet 
or  legs;  Nguna  liu,  excessive;  Viti  liu, 
to  exceed;  Mao.  riu,  to  pass  b^-. 

liuliu  adv.,  about,  to  and  fro;  e  tola  liuliu,  it 
has  become  general. 

liuliune  v.  tr.,  to  turn  over,  to  reverse,     na  4. 

liunge  v.  n.,  a  common  complaint,  a  plague. 
liunge  ni  maelaa. 

liuta'a  S.,  liutaha  U.  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  beyond,  to 
be  excessive,  used  with  poss.  3.  muini 
liuta'ana  a  rnwane  'ie  e  qao'i  ne,  more 
than  those  which  this  man  has  done; 
ini  qaarongoisuli  e  ka'a  liuta'ana  ini 
ha'ausuli,  the  disciple  is  not  above  his 
master.  2.  adv.,  excessively,  exceed- 
ingly. 

liwe  S.,  liwa  U.,  a  cave.     Lau  liqa. 

liwo  hoiliwo,  S.,  houliwo,  U.,  a  hill. 

loa  1.  S.,  V.  i.,  to  be  big,  to  be  too  big. 

loa  2.  the  heavens;  apai  loa  ta'au,  the  heavens 
above.     Bugotu  maaloa. 

lo'a  3.  adj.,  cracked. 

lo'a  4.  S.,  the  name  of  several  months;  lo'a 
tnadala.  May;  lo'a  mali'e,  April;  lo'a 
maramarawdi,  lo'a  wdi  mweiniwei, 
February;  lo'a  wdi  peine,  March. 

loamena  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  patch,  to  mend,  to  darn; 
a  patch. 

lodo  1.  to  conceive  a  child:  of  the  child,  to  be 
conceived,     nga  mwela  e  lodo,  the  child 
is  conceived. 
lodo'i  tr.,  to  imagine,  to  conceive  a  thought. 

lodo  2.  v.  tr.,  to  carve,  to  construct. 

lodosae  v.  i.,  to  ponder,  to  conceive  in  mind. 
lodo'i. 
lodosaenga  v.  n.,  plan,  meditation. 

loha'ini,  loloha'ini  v.  tr.,  to  lay  up  in  store,  to 
put  by. 
loha'inge  v.  n.,  something  put  by,  stored, 

cold  food. 
loha'i  v.  i. 

lohe  1.  v.  i.,  to  sail.     Wango  rohe. 

lohe  2.  to  fit  a  bowstring  to  a  bow. 

lohe  3.  to  mark  out  a  yam  garden;  lohea  hohola, 
he  marked  out  a  garden. 

loho,  loholoho  1.  to  fly,  to  swoop;  met.  of 
words,  to  reach;  e  loho  ilengine,  he 
swooped  down  upon  it;  walaku  e  loho 
i  saena,  my  words  reached  his  heart. 
hdu  loho,  a  boat  harbor  south  of  Port 
Adam;  mwakana  loho,  dust. 
lohosi  tr.,  to  cause  to  fly.  Wango  roho, 
Florida  lovo,  Mota  rowo,  Bougainville 
Straits,  lofu;  Motu  roho. 

loho  2.  (ku)  ke  sulu  i  lohona,  i  lohomu,  be  pleas- 
ing in  his  sight,  thy  sight. 

lo'ilohi  n.,  charcoal. 

lo'ilohi'e  adj.,  black  with  charcoal,  soiled. 

lo'ilosi  n.,  a  sponge,     losi.    Florida  loilosi. 


53 


LO'U 


loka  n.,  gall,  figures  in  folk  lore,  the  hero  throws 
gall  in  the  eyes  of  his  enemies. 

loke  n.,  the  lamprey,  found  under  rocks  near 
the  shore. 

loko   1.   V.   tr.,   to  gather  together,     ha'aloko. 
2.  to  agree,     loko  pe'i,  to  agree  with. 
lokongi  V.  n.,  friendship. 
lokota  V.  n.,  a  bundle;  lokotai  sa'o,  a  bundle 
of  sago  leaves. 

lokoloko  adv.,  altogether. 

lokoqaio  n.,  a  belt. 

loku,  lo'uloku  V.  i.,  to  be  bent,  bowed,  doubled 
up;  'ae  loku,  halt,  maimed  in  the  feet; 
hihi  lo'uloku,  to  crouch  (dogs). 
lokune  tr.,  to  bend,  to  double  back; 
e  lokunaa  nime,  he  clenched  the  fist. 
Niue  loku,  Mota  lokua,  to  fold  up. 

lola  V.  i.,  to  be  great,  mighty;  walana  e  lolo,  his 
word  is  mighty. 

lolata  n.,  courtyard;  rara  haahie  lolata  inge'ie, 
guards  his  house. 

lole  V.  i.,  to  be  confused,  dazed;  ere  lole  ana 
ma'unge,  to  talk  confusedly  from  fear. 
Maori  rare,  intoxicated. 

lolo  1.  V.  i.,  to  bend;  lolo  hapa,  to  bend  turtle- 
shell, 
lolosi  tr., lolosi  hune,  to  set  a  trap,  lolosi  hapa. 
lolota'i  partic,  bent  down,  bowed. 
lolosila-(ku)    gerund.     Wango  rosi. 

lolo  2.  n.,  red  ants,  sugar  ants,  lolo  polali. 
Viti  lolo. 

lolo  3.  V.  i.,  to  be  abundant  (of  herbage),  to 
cover  over  (of  creepers). 
lolo  4.  luhe  lolo,  to  clear  away  creepers. 

lolo'a  U.,  n.,  a  thicket;  lolo'a  ni  'ei,  a  clump  of 
trees. 

loloha'ini  cf.  loha'ini. 

lolohuna  U.,  n.,  a  snare,  a  gin.     lolo  1,  hune  3. 

lololo  n.,  a  swamp  in  which  sago  grows,  lololo 
ni  sa'o. 

loloma'ini  v.  tr.,  to  dip;  loloma'inie  nime,  to 
dip  the  hand. 

lolomi  v.  tr.,  to  grudge,  to  withhold;  hele 
lolomi,  to  keep  for  oneself. 

lolongo  n.,  mud,  swamp,     lololo. 

lolou  V.  i.,  to  resound. 

lomolomo  kdu  lomolomo,  the  fourth  finger. 

lomosi  V.  tr.,  to  buffet;  'ahe  e  lomosie  i'ola,  the 
surf  buffeted  the  canoe. 

loo  1.  V.  i.,  a  shortened  form  of  lio  to  look,  loo 
'aela,  to  be  immodest;  loo  diana,  to  look 
good;  loo  kd'ii,  look!  loo  la' a,  to  be 
immodest,  to  offend  against  propriety. 

loo  2.  V.  i.,  to  be  frightened,  to  be  on  one's 
guard,  to  be  suspicious;  idemu  ni  loo,  a 
line  spatula  for  one  who  is  scared:  when 
a  man  is  on  his  guard  (loo)  and  can  not 
be  ambushed  and  killed  he  is  won  over 
by  false  protestations  of  friendship  and 
offers  of  areca  (damulaa),  then  as  he  sits 
chewing  the  quid  (dmusi)  he  is  stabbed 
with  a  large  spatula  (idemu). 
loo'i    tr.,    to    take    counsel,    to    consider. 

ha'aloo'i. 
loo'inge  v.  n.,  plan,  intention, 
loona'ini  tr.,  to  deliberate  about,  to  intend, 
to  plan. 


loo  2  (continued). 

loona'i  v.   i.,   to  plan;  noko  loona'i  lae,   I 

intend  going, 
loona'inge  v.  n.,    plan,    meditation,     mat- 
loonga.     Wango  ro. 
looloo'a  adj..  scared, 
loohi,  looloohi  v.  tr.,  to  see,  to  look  for. 

loohinge  v.  n.,  a  searching, 
loosi  U.  1.  to  see;  nau  qa'ike  loosia,  I  saw  it  not. 
muni  ne'e  loosia,  ta'ane  na'a  'unua,  if  I 
see  him  I  shall  tell  it.     2.  lai  loosi  haa. 
to  go  and  inspect  the  money  given  for 
a  bride;  i'o  loosi,  to  await;  mwala  ko 
i'o    loosi,    kire   too'ana    keni    mwala    ko 
holie,  the  party  awaiting,  they  own  the 
girl  who  is  being  bought  (sc,  in  mar- 
riage).    3.  prep.,  with  suffixed  pronoun 
(dii),  awaiting;  in  M.  L.,  p.  155,  loosi 
is  incorrectly  assigned  to  the  preposi- 
tional sense  of  motion  to;  'oke  i'o  ka'u 
loosieu,  wait  a  while  for  me. 
loosi  4.  toll  loosi,  a  charm  set  in  the  path, 
lopalopa  v.  i.,  to  flap  (of  wings). 
lopo  1.  n.,  a  pool:  an  artificial  pool  used  to  keep 
alive  i'e  ni  kelu:  lopo  ni  ha'auri,  bap- 
tismal font,  lit.,  pool  of  salvation.     San 
Cristoval  robo. 
lopo  2.  U.,  'alo  i  lopo  muni  (fara^t).  to  oppose. 
Lopo  a  boat  harbor  on  the  east  coast  of  Ulawa. 
Lopo  Su'u  Heu  a  gorge  above  Su'uholo,  Ulawa: 

figures  in  folklore, 
lopo'i   V.   i.,   to   be   specious,   to   pretend,   to 
deceive,     lopo'i  ere,  S.,  to  deceive  with 
words;  lopo'i  kae,  U.,  to  deceive;  lopo'i 
wala,  U.,  lopo'i  deu,  S.,  to  feign, 
losi,  lo'ilosi   v.   tr.,   to  squeeze;   ni'i  losi,   to 
squeeze,    to    wring    out    water;    n.,    a 
sponge,  7nei  lo'ilosi.     Viti  losi,  a  sponge, 
loto,  loloto  V.  i.,  to  bathe;  esi  kele  lolo,  just 
washed,  i.  e.,  convalescent  after  illness; 
horo  ni  loloto  i  purine  maela,  to  kill  a 
man  after  celebrating  a  death  feast  in 
order  that  people  may  bathe  (bathing 
being   prohibited    until   some   one   was 
killed);  lolo  maai,  to  baptize  (late  use); 
loto  maainge,  v.  n.,  baptism, 
lotonga  v.  n.,  bathing, 
lotohi  tr.,  to  bathe  a  person'',  'oke  lotohi'o, 

bathe  yourself. 
lotohila-(ku)  gerund. 
lou  1.  V.  i.,  to  fish  for  bonito;  noko  lai  lou,  I  go 

bonito  fishing. 
lou  2.  V.  i..  to  emerge;  lou  ta'a,  to  come  forth, 
lo'u  3.  V.  i.,  to  contract  ceremonial  defilement 
by   walking    under   women,    by   eatiiig 
with  women  in  the  case  of  boys  who 
ha'amalaohn.     cf.      M.     A.,      p.     233. 
Polynesian   lotu. 
lo'u  4.  V.  tr.,  to  bend,  to  double  back,     malo'u. 

lo'une  tr. 
lo'u  5.  adv.  again,  anew,  also;  hahira  diana 
ikire  nga  muini  lo'u  ka'a  diana,  on  the 
good  and  the  bad;  'omu  sa'a  lio  odo'ieu 
'oto  lo'u,  ye  shall  not  see  me  again. 
Samoa  lolou,  to  bend;  Wango  rou, 
Lau  lau,  Motu  lou,  again. 


LO'U'E 


54 


lo'u'e  adj.,  used  as  n.;  a  bend,  a  v'erse;  ta'alaa 

me'i  lo'u'e,  one  verse, 
lo'uhanga'a  v.  i.,  to  be  defiled  ceremonially. 

lo'u  3. 
lo'uloku  cf.  lokii. 
loulou  S.,  'u'ulou  U.,  V.  i.,  to  thunder;  ngara 

lotdou,  to  resound. 
lounge  ha'alounge,  quarreling,  bickering, 
lousuu  a  short   string  of   money   made  of  a 
whitish    shell.    Big    Malaita    currency. 
Lau  lousuu. 
lu  ending  of  certain  forms  of  pronouns  in  the 
plural,  kolu,  tnelu,  molu;  an  abbreviation 
of  'olu,  three. 
lua  U.,  V.  i.,  to  grant.     Florida  lua. 
luana  suli  tolai  luana,  his  shoulder  blade. 
ladaa  v.  n.,  cargo. 

lude  S.,  luda  U.,  v.  i.,  to  carry  cargo,  to  be 
heavily  laden;  lude  olanga,  v.  n.,  carry- 
ing cargo;  lude  peli,  to  "blackbird,"  to 
recruit  men  without  giving  a  payment 
(holitc)    to    their    relations;    haka    lude 
niu'ane,  a  labor  vessel  recruiting  men. 
ludanga  v.  n.,  U.,  cargo, 
ludengi  tr.,  to  carry  as  cargo,  to  recruit 
men.     Wango  ruta,  Florida  luda,  luluda. 
lue-(ku)  S.,  lua-(ku)  U.  1.  neck;  lue  susu.  sore 
throat,  voice  gone;  ngora  i  hie,  to  growl; 
huui  lue,  a  shoulder  of  pork  given  to 
chiefs  as  their  portion  at  a  feast;  'aqahi 
lue,  paired  back  and  breast  ornament 
of    shell    money    for    women.     Florida 
lua,  Bougainville  Straits,  lualua. 
lue  S.,  lua  U.  2.  n.,  the  rising  tide;  lue  qera, 
high    spring    tide;    nisilana   lue,   high- 
water  mark;  salohi  lue,  a  fiddler  crab; 
'upui  lue,  high  tide. 
lu'e,  lu'elu'e  S.,  lu'alu'a  U.  3.  a  coconut-leaf 

basket  for  holding  yams. 
lueli  S.,  luengi  U.,  to  lessen  a  fire  by  removing 

some  sticks.     Mao.  ruke,  to  remove. 
luelu  ha'aluelu,  S.,  v.  i.,  to  give  a  sign. 
luelue  S.,  lualua  U.,  n.,  a  flood;  luelue  e  lake, 
the  flood  came.     Wango  ruarua,  Florida 
lualua. 
luhe  to  remove,  to  free,  to  loosen,     lakaluhe. 
luhe  haahi.  to  be  surety  for:  to  take  ofT 
clothing,    to    become  a  heathen   again 
(late    use);    luhe    lolo,    to    clear    away 
creepers.    Florida  luba,  Viti  luva,  Wango 
ruha,  Motu  ruhaia,  Mota  luka,  in  tawa- 
luka,  to  peel  off. 
luhesi  tr.,  to  loosen,  to  free,  to  let  go. 
luhesila-(ku)  gerund, 
luhu  v.  i.,  to  cut  off  branches  from  a  tree. 

luhusi  tr. 
lula  U.,  n.,  a  spear;  generic  term. 
lulu  1.  V.  i.,  to  follow:  used  with  isuli,  luluisuli. 
luluisulinge  v.  n. 
luluisulila-(ku)  gerund. 
lulu  2.  v.  i.,  to  fold;  a  Lulu-reu,  a  proper  name, 
lit.  folder  of  leaves, 
lulungi  tr. 

lulungila-(na,  ni)  gerund, 
lulu  3.  qd'ilulu,  v.  i.,  to  be  dismayed,     qd'i  2. 
lulu  4.  v.  i.,  to  back  water  with  paddles  or  oars; 
'ahe  lulu,  boiling  tide. 


lulu  5.  ora  lulu,  to  belch;  po'o  lulu,  to  fill  the 

mouth  with  food, 
luliihu  n.,  a  coconut  frond,     luluhui  niu. 
lulusane   n.,    a   gecko   lizard   with   projecting 

eyes,   the  children  catch  them  with  a 

grass  noose  or  a  coconut  leaflet  midrib, 
lume  S.,  a  variant  of  nume,  house;  htmiluvie, 

a  village, 
lumu,  lumute  S.,  moss.     Mota  lumuta,  Malay 

luviut.  Macassar  htm M,  malumu,  soft, 
lumu'e  adj.,  moss-covered. 
lumwe  S.,  lumwalumwa  U.,  to  be  long  and 

matted  (of  hair) ;  qii'une  e  lumu'e,  long- 
haired. 
lupu,   lupulupu  U.,  V.  i.,  to   strike;    lupu  ra- 

koma'ini,  to  nail  upon,  to  crucify, 
lupu'i  tr. 
lupunge'ini     tr.,     to     bump;     maelupu'e, 

bruised. 
luqe'i  V.  i.,  to  pretend;  luqe'i  laelae,  to  pretend 

to  go;  luqe'i  hiru,  to  pretend  to  be  busy; 

luqe'i  lalaiva  haahi,   to  give  a  feigned 

excuse, 
lusu  n.,  the  ribs  in  a  canoe  tied  on  to  cleats 

left   on   the   planks   forming   the   hull. 

M.  A.,   p.   295;   'enite  lusu,  what  size 

canoe,  lit.  how  many  ribs, 
lusuinume  S.,  lusuinima  U.,  a  large  seagoing 

canoe,  lit.  ribbed  like  a  house, 
lu'u  V.  tr.,  to  move  one's  habitation,     hd'ilu'u. 

huni  lii'ue  mo  ola  ineu,  to  remove  my 

goods;    kira    'asi    lu'ua    hd'iliu,    they 

ceased  hostilities.     Viti  hiku,  to  remove, 
luu'i  V.  tr.,  to  forbid,  ere  luu'i. 
luuluu  sunge  luuliiu,  elkhorn  fern. 


M 


ma  1.  adjectival  prefix  of  condition:  lingi 
malingi,  mena  mamenamena.  Mota  ma, 
Maori  ma. 

ma  2.  S.,  a  prefix  used  with  nouns  which  express 
relationship;  mwa.  ro  ma  hungaona, 
two  brothers-in-law;  ro  ma  uweline,  two 
maternal  uncles. 

ma  3.  as  ma  1:  mdliimu. 

ma  4.  a  noun  ending:  'ono  'o-no'onomd,  ndku 
vd'unekume. 

maa  1.  the  eye:  maana  e  lele,  he  squints;  maa 
noro,  to  be  angry-eyed;  maa  ngangua, 
blear-eyed  from  smoke;  maa  rodo,  blind, 
to  forget;  maaku  e  Id'iere,  I  am  dizzy; 
maana  e  waaro,  goggle-eyed;  hete'i  maa, 
to  fix  the  eyes  upon;  'o  hinua  maamu,  peel 
your  eye;  hinuhinu  (kiruhiru)  maa,  eye- 
lid; lio  i  ngaei  maa,  to  look  askance  at, 
to  envy;  maranga  i  maa,  eyebrow; 
ma'arusi  maa,  to  wink  the  eye;  mimisi 
maa,  the  mantis,  lit.  squirt  in  the  ej^e; 
nokomi  maa,  to  turn  the  eyes  away; 
para'imaa,  eyeshade;  rumu  nue  maa, 
eye  ointment;  sikili  maa,  excoecaria 
tree,  lit.  stings  the  eye;  ana  e  tahanie 
maamu  ne,  in  that  he  opened  your 
eyes;  e  Iditeia  maana,  he  closed  his  eyes; 
'oke  'ulue  maamu,  you  close  your  eyes; 


5: 


MADALI 


maa  1  (continued). 

'u'ui  maa,  the  eyeball;  '(('it  inaai  dchi, 
a  pearl. 

maa  2.  the  face;  'ato  maa,  to  turn  the  face; 
hoda  maa,  to  wash  the  face;  e  ladaa'inie 
maana,  he  fell  on  his  face;  lio  hunt  maa, 
to  exercise  partiality;  nuniiku  maa,  to 
wrinkle  the  face;  e  palingitaa  maana,  he 
set  his  face;  rdima'a,  to  cut  and  dis- 
figure the  face;  'usu  maa,  to  accuse,  lit. 
to  point  at  his  face. 

maa  3.  witii  gonitive  i  in  Sa'a,  ni  in  Ulavva;  hole, 
mesh,  opening,  outlet,  door,  gate,  maai 
nume,  S.,  maani  nima,  U.,  door;  maai 
Para,S.,  inaani  para,  U.,  gate;  qa'ulimaa, 
door  lintel;  sdii  maa  ana  mii  'ape,  to  mend 
the  meshes  of  the  nets;  laha  maa,  to 
open  the  door;  to'oni  pono  maa,  patched 
clothes;  maa  ni  qelusu,  nostril. 

maa  4.  edge,  point,  blade,  brim;  maai  mudi,  a 
gorge  for  flying-fish;  maana  nahi,  the 
edge  of  the  sword;  pulii  maai  seu,  a 
circular  piece  used  in  inlaying,  a  dot. 

maa  5.  front  of  the  house;  i  maa.  outside; 
odona  maa,  a  gate  opening  directly  in 
front  of  one;  oku  i  maa,  wall  in  front. 

maa  6.  a  stick,  a  match;  maai  aro,  a  stalk  of 
ginger;  maai   {maani)    dunge,  a  match. 

maa  7.  one,  a,  also  in  plural,  maai  laenga,  S., 
maani  laenga,  U.,  a  journey;  maai  sola, 
U.,  a  piece  of  bast  cloth;  hai  maai  dengi 
he'iliime,  the  four  winds;  kli'u  mei  nga 
maa,  give  me  one;  la'ata'a  maai  ngeu, 
one  meal. 
maai  S.,  maani  U.  v.  tr.,  to  eye,  to  watch; 
maai  ngeu,  S.,  maani  ngeu,  U.,  the 
evening  star,  so  called  because  it  shines 
at  the  time  of  the  evening  meal  which 
it  watches;  maa  shows  no  sign  of  a  break 
in  pronunciation. 
maani,  maamaani  tr.,  to  copy,  to  do  like, 
to  watch.  Mota  malai,  Polynesian 
7nala. 

maa  8.  dried  canarium  nuts,  ngdli  maa,  put 
into  a  cane  basket  (tangi)  and  kept 
above  the  fire,     ha'amaa. 

ma 'a  9.  father,  vocative:  ma' a  ivu,  mj'  dear 
fatherl     mama'a. 

maadi  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  reject. 
maadila-(ku)  gerund. 

Maadi'a  the  landing-place  for  Ripoo,  Ulawa. 

ma'ae  n.,  a  strong-smelling  fish,  caught  with 
a  bait  of  red  clay  in  which  crabs'  claws 
have  been  set. 

maahoo  v.  i.,  to  be  new  to,  to  be  a  novice  at. 

maahoosi  v.  i.,  to  boast:  ere  maahoosi. 

ma'ahu,  ma'ama'ahu  v.  i.,  to  sleep;  ma'ahu 
mala  i'ola,  to  fast;  ma'ahu  pole,  to 
dream;  nau  ma'ahu  qolca,  I  dreamt  it; 
ma'ahu  suu'i,  to  guard  at  night, 
ma'ahunge  v.  n.,  sleep,  e  lo'o  ni  ma'ahunge, 
it  is  time  for  sleep.     Motu  mafula. 

maai,  maaimaai  1.  v.  tr.,  to  permit,  to  allow; 
lio  maai,  toli  maai,  to  allow. 
maaila'ini  U.,   tr.,   lio  maaila'ini,   to  view 
with  favor. 

maa'i  2.    adj.,   holy,    sacred:   ha'amaa'i.     loto 


maa'i  2  (continued). 

maa'i,   to  baptize;   lolo  maa'inge,    bap- 
tism;    ngdu      maa'i,      ngdu     maa'inge, 

sacrificial   eating.     Mota   malai,    good; 

Tahiti  maitai.  Mao.  mailai. 
maa'i  3.  beloved;   ^nwane  maa'i  ineu,  mj'  dear 

fellow, 
maakahi  v.  i.,  to  peek,  to  pcfp,  to  peer, 
maakali  v.  tr.,  to  visit, 
maala  adv.,  even  if,  granted  that,  supposing. 

mala. 
maalau  air,  firmament,     lauwanga. 
maaliholo  the  main  doorway  of  a  house, 
maalimae  hostile  bands:  mu  maalimae.     Lau 

maaliinaea,  enemy. 
maalimwalo  a  staging  for  thatching  {lahera'i) 

erected  inside  the  house. 
maalitawa    an    opening  in   the   shore  reef,   a 

landing-place. 
maamaa  a  fastening,  a  button. 
ma'amana  ro  hd'ima'amana,  mu  he'ima'aman- 

anga. 
ma'amasa'a  adj.,  ashamed,  reverential. 
Maana  Odo  Port  Adam,  Malaita. 
maana'o  U.,  v.  i..  to  be  deserted  (of  a  place); 

a  desert  place,     na'onga. 
maani,  maamaani  v.  tr.,  to  copy,  to  do  like,  to 

repeat:    ha'amaani,    S.,    hd'imaani,    U. 

maani  mac,    to  watch  the  dance;  si'o 

maani,  to  collect. 
maapala     S.,     adj.,     unprovoked,     malicious; 

horonga  maapala,  murder. 
maapou  n.  1.  a  measure  of  shell  money,  from 

the   fingertips   to   the   elbow,   a   cubit. 

2.  a  piece,  a  bit. 
ma'apu'a  U.,  adj.,  bloody;  n.,  stripes,  bruises, 
ma'arara'i  v.  tr.,  to  provoke, 
ma'aru  U.,  v.  i.,  to  sleep,  to  twinkle;  ma'aru 

talahi,  to  go  like  winking, 
ma'arunga  v.  n.,  sleep. 
maarue  S.,  dsu  maarue,  to  serve  two  masters, 
maarusi  v.   tr.,   to  wink;  maarusi  maa,  in  a 

twinkling. 
maasilima  U.,  ttra  maasilima,  the  second  day 

of  the  moon. 
maatala  U.    1.   as  maapala.   S.,    unprovoked. 

2.  in  vain.     Lau  maabala. 
maatoli  v.  i.,  to  visit, 
maatoto  v.   tr.,  to  expect,  to  await;   maatolo 

muni,  U.,  to  await, 
maa'u  U.,  ma'u  S.,  v.  i..  to  fear,  to  be  afraid. 

ha'amaa'u. 
maa'uni  tr. 
mada  1.  n.,  dirt,  viu  mada.     ha'amada. 
mada  2.  n.,  a  fresh-water  ?hell-fish  (Nerita  sp."). 
mada'a  adj.,  dirty,  soiled;  to'oni  e  mada'a  ant 

hesi'onga.  garments  defiled  by  the  flesh, 
mada'anga  n.,  filth. 
madala  1.  the  morning  star;  madala  e  qa'a.  the 

day  star  is  rising;  nga  madala  mere  'ana'i 

qaroa  adaru'a,  when  the  day  star  rises 

we  shall  hitch  it  up  for  them.     2.  lo'a 

madala,   the  name  of  a   month.   May. 

Viti     mataka.     morning;     Bougainville 

Straits  matatala,  Orion's  Belt, 
madali,     mamadali     adj..     greasy,     slippery; 

maenga    (macmaeha)    mamadali,    fever. 


MADAII 


s>^ 


madali,  mamadali  (continued). 

Viti  dadala,  Samoa  malali,  Lau  afedali, 
Florida  madali. 

madamada  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  dirty.  2.  U.,  mada- 
mada  sidu,  a  month,  October. 

madara'a    adj.,    sweating,    perspiring;    noko 
madara'a,  I  sweat. 
madara'anga  n.,  sweat. 

madeli  U.,  a  full  grown  coconut,  hoi  madeli. 

madiu  U.,  adj.,  overlapping;  v.,  to  overlap. 

madoo  S.,  adj.,  cooked. 

madoro  adj.,  hot;  ha'adoro. 

madoronga  n.,  heat,  fever.     Malay  darah, 
hot. 

madou  U.  1.  madou  ni  wala,  a  phrase.  2. 
adj.,  broken  clean  off.     3.  cinnamon. 

madu  S.,  adj.,  beloved,  dear;  kale  madti  ineu, 
my  beloved  child. 

mae,  maemae  1.  v.  i.,  to  die,  to  be  ill,  to  be 
numb,  to  be  eclipsed,  of  moon;  mae 
'apolo,  paralyzed;  a  olako  mae.  So-and- 
so  is  sick;  a  ola  e  mae  'oto.  So-and-so  is 
dead;  e  hat  lalamoa  e  mae  hunia  Qai, 
Qai  had  the  death  of  four  men  to  account 
for;  mwane  da  na  kolu  mae,  lest  we  die; 
mae  su'esu'ela'i,  to  die  of  hunger;  roro 
mae,  to  strangle;  uhu.  mae,  a  wig;  e  mae 
'o'o,  quite  dead. 
maenga  v.  n.,  sickness,  death;  maenga  hula- 
hula,  danger;  maenga  mamadali,  fever; 
e  ka'a  hunie  ike  maenga,  not  unto  death; 
mwaanie  maenga,  from  death;  e  qa'ike 
munia  nga  maenga,  not  unto  death, 
maeta  (ku)  v.  n.,  death  feast,  death,  U.;  hire 
ngau  maetana  a  ola,  they  eat  the  death 
feast  of  So-and-so;  horo  ni  loloto  i  purine 
maeta,  to  kill  a  man  after  the  death 
feast  in  order  that  persons  may  bathe, 
maeha  U.,  maemaeha  S.,  v.  n.,  sickness; 

maemaeha  m.amadali,   fever, 
maela  (ku)  v.  n.,  danger,  death;  si'ohaa'i 

ynaela,  to  be  in  danger, 
maelaa  v.   n.,  danger,  sickness;  liunge  ni 
maelaa,  a  plague,  epidemic;  maelaa  ni 
qe'u,  meningitis. 

mae  2.  used  to  denote  excess,  with  poss.  3. 
e  'a'aila'a  'olo  mae  ana,  he  is  very  strong; 
e  lae  'oto  ni  mae,  he  went  like  anything; 
'u'u  ni  m.ae,  heavy  rain. 

mae  3.  the  lee  shore,  'asi  mae;  lade  mae,  deep 
water. 

mae  4.  to  be  well  mashed  (of  areca  nut); 
sdune  ke  mae,  pound  it  to  a  pulp. 

maesi  tr.,  to  be  ill  of,  to  die  of.  Mota  male, 
Polynesian  mate. 

mae  5.  n.,  a  fighting  column,  nga  mae;  mu 
na'ona'oi  mae,  armies,     ma'alimae. 

mae  6.  n.,  war;  ddu  mae  huni,  to  make  war  on; 
dhu  mae,  to  cease  hostilities;  ko  apani 
mae  pe'ikie,  sides  with  us;  li'oa  ni  mae, 
M.  A.,  p.  260,  a  ghost  associated  with 
war. 

mae  7.  weapons;  tapo  mae,  to  seize  weapons. 

ma'e  8.  a  pronged  spear  used  for  fishing;  uwa 
ma'e,  a  measure.  If  yards. 

maea  U.,  adj.,  holy,  sacred,  having  to  do  with 
the  ancestor  ghosts. 


maea  (continued). 

maeanga  v.  n.,  holiness  (late  use).     Wango 
maea. 

maelo  adj.,  ripe  (of  fruits);  the  suffixed  pro- 
nouns na,  ni  may  be  added,  'tana  ko 
maelo,  pregnant,  lit.,  her  belly  is  ripe; 
hdu  maelo,  a  rock  near  Ngorangora; 
raa  hitelia  hdu  maelo,  prov.,  dry  enough 
to  split  hdu  maelo:  maelona,  its  ripeness, 
when  it  is  ripe;  maelona  e  ngau  diana, 
when  ripe  it  is  good  eating;  ngdli  maelo, 
ripe  canarium  nuts,  the  name  of  a 
month,  August. 

maeloonga  n.,  enemy,  a  maeloonga,  mu 
tnaeloonga.     Wango  maeronga. 

raaelupu'e  S.,  adj.,  bruised,     lupu. 

maemaea  S.,  adj.,  used  with  the  personal 
article;  a  maemaea,  the  sick  man;  ynu 
maemaea,  the  sick. 

maemaeko'a  adj.,  gentle,     mamaeko'a. 

ma'emahe  v.  i.,  to  decorate  the  person  with 
mahe. 

maeni  S.,  article  plural  vocative,  maeni  'inoni, 
maeni  mwane,  maeni  keni;  used  also  in 
plain  statement  maeni  'inoni  ineu,  my 
own  people. 

maenoto  v.  i.,  to  be  grave,  sober,  quiet. 

maha  v.  tr.,  to  profane  holy  things,    to  use 
sacrilegiously. 
mahanga  v.  n.,  profanation. 

mahe  a  strong-smelling  herb  (Evodia  hortensis) 
used   to   decorate   the   body,    stuck   in 
armlets. 
ma'emahe  v.  i.,  to  decorate  with  mahe,  to 
festoon  in  general;  a  garland. 

mahiri,  ma'imehiri  v.  i.,  to  be  intoxicated  from 
eating  areca  fruit. 
mahiringe  v.  n.,  intoxication. 

maholo  1.  n.,  space,  interval  of  time  or  distance; 
nga  maholo,  what  a  length  of  time!  nga 
maholo  e  liu,  time  went  on;  maholo  ni 
lae  inge'ie,  his  time  for  going;  maholo 
nou  lae,  at  the  time  when  I  went; 
maholo  'eta  mwane  e  ha'ataii  ue,  while 
the  other  was  yet  far  off;  maholo  'ie, 
now;  ina'ona  mu  maholo,  in  former 
times;  ipurine  maholo,  after  the  time; 
ngoongoodo  ana  maholo,  end  of  the  time; 
maholo  ni  raori'i,  time  of  virginity;  to'o 
ta'e  maholo,  sometimes;  maholo  e  tolo,  a 
proper  time.     Florida />o/o,  when.     holo. 

maholo  2.  U.,  a  thing,  a  piece,  a  part. 

maholo  3.  v.  i.,  to  be  parted;  sae  sa'a  maholo 
wa  ke  mou,  thoughts  shall  not  be  parted 
and  shall  not  cease, 
maholota  U.,  n.,  a  piece;  maholota  ni  pua, 
piece  of  areca  nut. 

mahono  U.,  tapa  mahono,  to  interfere,  to  be  a 
busybody,     hono. 

mahoro  v.  i.,  to  appear  in  view,  to  pass  in  view. 
ha'amahoro. 

mahu  rdu  mehu,  to  abide;  kdru  mehu,  to  endure 
hardness. 

mahungaona  n.,  ro  mahungaona,  father-in-law 
and  son-in-law,  mother-in-law  and 
daughter-in-law;  mwane  male  and  keni 
female  are  added  to  distinguish  the  pairs. 


57 


MALAOHU 


mahu'ohu'o  n.,  early  morning,  dawn;  used  with 

locative  i.     hu'o. 
mShuro   adj.,    disturbed,    muddy    (of   water); 

da  miihuro  ana,  disturbed  it.     md  3. 
mahuru  adj.,  gentle,  tractable. 
mai  1.  adv.,  hither,  here,  this  way;  the  demon- 
strative  nii    may    be   added;    mat   ana 
-LValiimalau,  in  the  world;  mdi  i  'ano,  on 
the  earth;  mdi  i  haha,  on  the  earth;  mdi 
haha,  under  the  earth;  mdi  iorohana,  on 
the  earth;  'nre  'olo  mdi  i  'aeholalana, 
from  the  beginning  up  till  now;  'oko  lae 
mdi  'ure  itei,  where  are  you  from;  nou 
'ure  mdi  i  ola,  I  am  from  such-and-such 
a  place;  mdi  nga  hou  pua,  give  me  an 
areca  nut;  hdnue  mdijte,  the  place  here; 
mdi  ileu,  this  way;  mdi  i  nume,  into  the 
house;  po'o  mdi,  hither,  this  side;  qd'u 
mdi,  hither.     Mota  ma,  Polynesian  mai. 
mai  2.  ebb.  low  tide,     hou  mei,  U.     kosi  mei, 
it  is  low  tide;  mdi  rara,  dead  low  water 
at  spring  tides;  mdi  ana  waarowaaro  e 
qaa,  ebb  when  the  moon  rises;  mdi  ana 
waarowaaro  e  snu,  ebb  when  the  moon 
sets;  hdnua  e  la  ni  tola  kdu  ana  mdi  rara, 
the  people  have  gone  gathering  coral  at 
dead  low  water.     Mota  meal,  Viti  mali. 
mai,  maimei  3.,  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  help,  to  be  on  the 
side  of:  used  with  numerals  more  than 
ten  as  an  alternative  to  mana  in  the  sense 
of  and,    with;   awala   mdia   'enita,   how 
many  over  ten.     cf.  M.  L.,  pp.  151-153. 
Used  as  prep,  meaning  'with';  the  pron. 
du,  'o,  a,  etc.,  are  suffixed;  wala'a  mdia, 
speak  with  him. 
maila-(ku)  gerund.;   a  mdilaku,  my  helper. 
maila'ini  U.,  v.  tr..  lio  mdila'ini.  to  approve 
of. 
ma'i  4.  participial  ending,  oro  oromd'i.     Mota 

mag. 
ma'i    5.    suffix    to    verb    used    intransitively. 

cf.   md'ini. 
maimepusu    U..    n.,    memepusu    S.,    a    tree 
(Ficus  sp.)  with  bunches  of  flowers  on 
the  stem  as  well  as  on  the  branches; 
taka   mala   maimepusu,    to   flower   like 
this  tree, 
ma'ini  verbal  suffix,  'ono  'onomd'ini. 
maipo  U.,  v.  i.,  to  be  dirty,  unclean. 
maitale  v.  i.,  to  be  poor,  possessing  nothing. 
tale  2.     tilolada  mditalc,  the  crj'  of  the 
poor. 
maitalenga  v.  n.,  poverty, 
makahu    adj.,    soft,    mealy    (of    yams    when 

cooked). 
makaka  adj.,  broken  into  pieces,  asunder,  kaka. 
makaka'a  adj.,  as  makaka. 
makasi  v.  tr.,  to  break  into  pieces, 
makeato  to  overflow;  honu  makealo,  full  and 

running  over, 
makekesi  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  disown,  to  put  aside. 

keke. 
makemaketa  (ku)  n.,  wiles,  devices, 
makere  adj.,  gapped,  with  a  broken  edge.    here. 
makina'a  U.,  adj.,  wet.  damp. 
makulu  adj.,  resounding,  with  a  loud  noise. 
Maori  lakuru,  thud. 


mala  1 .  adv.,  as,  like,  according  to,  as  one  might 
say,  as  it  might  be.  mala  kire  manata'i 
deue,  as  they  were  wont  to  do;  mala  'oto 
nou  ka'a  helesie  ike,  as  though  I  had 
never  done  it;  mala  nga  la'a,  like  I  don't 
know  what;  mala  pdine,  to  give  oneself 
airs;  mala  e  'u'ile'inie  nga  hoi  heu,  about 
a  stone's  throw;  maahu  mala  i'ola,  to 
fast,  lit.  to  sleep  canoe  fashion;  kira  hunu 
poo  mala  ideni,  they  kill  pigs  (presum- 
ably) tomorrow;  nga  keni  mala  a  kalemu, 
a  girl  a  mate  for  your  son;  taka  mala 
maimepusu,  to  flower  like  the  mdime- 
pusu  tree. 
mala  2.  U-,  maala  S.,  granted  that,  supposing. 
3.  to  act  like,  to  become  like,  to  speak 
the  language  of.  ha'amala.  'omu  ke 
mala  mwela  kdu,  become  like  children; 
a  porona  ko  malamala  Sa'a,  So-and-so 
speaks  the  language  of  Sa'a.  San 
Cristoval  mara,  Fagani  mwara,  Omba 
mwere. 
mala  4.  prefix  of  condition,  malakeu.     Mota 

mala  2. 
malaahonga  S.,  v.  i.,  to  make  trial  of,  to  tempt: 
used   with   poss.    3.     cf.    m.ala,   ahonga, 
malaohonga. 
malaahonganga  v.  n.,  trial,  temptation. 
malaahongala-(ku)  gerund. 
Mala  5.  Florida  name  for  Mwala. 
Malade  a  village  at  the  northwest  end  of  Port 

Adam,  Malaita. 
maladi  adj.,  stale,  sour  (of  yam  and  taro  mash, 

ha'apo'e). 
mala  halisi  U.,  same  as  mara  hdlisi,  northeast 

wind. 
malahu-(ku)  n.,  friend,  namesake;  a  malahaku, 
my  friend;  malahuku,  vocative,  friend; 
used  with  hd'i  7,  ro  hd'i  malahune,  mu 
he'i  malahune,  friends.    Wango  marahu. 
Malaita  cf.  mara  3.     ita  may  possibly  be  a  con- 
tracted form  of  Lau  baita,  big. 
malaka  a  wound.     Lau  maala,  Wango  maara. 

medaka'a  adj.,  wounded. 
malakeke  U.,  adj.,  unstable,     keke. 

malakekesi    v.    tr.,    to   cause    to   spill,    to 
overturn, 
malalahu'e  S.,  adj.,  covetous, 
malamala  1.  v.  i.,  to  act  wantonly,  to  behave 
badly. 
malamalanga  v.  n.,  wantonness,  mischief, 

ill. 
malamala'anga     n.,     evil,     harm.     Mota 
mala.   bad. 
malamala  2.  to  talk  the  language  of.     mala  3. 
malamalaohe  U.,  light  in  weight. 
malamalau  a  pot  hole  in  the  ground, 
malamasi  v.  i.,  to  destroy,  used  with  poss.  3. 

malamala  1. 
malaohu  (the  ao  is  a  diphthong)  v.  i.,  to  be 
separated  for  initiation,  of  boys  who 
live  in  the  laoha  on  the  beach  with  the 
men  preparatory  to  catching  their  first 
bonito(saM).  tahetii  malaohu.  cf.tahe. 
ha'amalaohu  v.  tr.,  to  initiate,  to  assist  a 
novice  in  catching  his  first  bonito:  the 
man  in  the  front  of  the  canoe  hooked 


MALAOHU 


5« 


malaohu  (continued). 

the   fish   and    the    boy   sitting    behind 
him  grasped  the  rod  as  the  man  swung 
the  fish  into  the  canoe.     M.  A.,  p.  233. 
San  Cristoval  maraohii. 
malaohonga  U..  v.  i.,  to  make  tria!  o;.  to  tempt. 
malaahonga. 
malaohonganga  v.  n.,  triai,  temptation. 
malaohongala-(ku)  gerund. 
Ma.apa  a;i  island  in  Marau  Sound,  Guada!- 
canar;  the  hades  of  the  Solomon  Islands. 
M.  A.,  p.  260. 
malapau'a'a  U.,  adj.,  strong:  papau,  paula'a. 
malau  1.  an  island;  nialau  mou,  an  islet. 
Malau  2.  a  bay  west  of  Cape  Zelee,  Malaita. 
3.  Port  Adam.     4.  'Olu  Malau,  Three 
Sisters    Islets,    south    of  Ulavva,  called 
also   jMalau   ni    I'e,    the   home   of   the 
ghosts  and  uninhabited;  the  names  of 
the  three  islets  are.  West  Sister  Ali'ite. 
Middle  Sister  Malau  Lalo,  East  Sister 
Malau    Peine;    on    the    side    of   Ali'ite 
facing  Ulawa  is  the  rock  called  Hau  ni 
Keni,    the    women's    rock,    where    the 
female  ghosts  emerge  from  the  sea  as 
they  cross  on  their  last  journey.  M.  A.,  p. 
257 ;  maraaui  Malau,  the  southeast  wind, 
malau  5.  the  fangs  of  dogs. 
malelede  adj.,  broken  in  pieces,     lede. 
maleledi  v.  tr.,  to  rail  at,  to  rebuke,     ledi  1. 
7naleledi    oraha'a    mwaanie    ngaini,    to 
rebuke  a  man  for  sin;  ere  maleledi,  to 
rail  at;  sae  maleledi,  rage, 
maleledinge  v.  n.,  abuse. 
malengolengo   adj.,    reclining,    falling   to   one 

side,  not  upright. 
maleqeleqe  U.,  weak. 

maleqeleqenga  v.  n.,  weakness. 
maleu  U.,  uhi  maleu,  a  month,  April. 
mali  U.,  to  be  roasted;  a  Poro  Wakio  Mali,  a 
legendary  person. 
mali'a  adj.,  cooked,  roasted.     Padas,  Bor- 
neo, malia,  red. 
mali'e  S.,  lo'a  ynali'e,  a  month,  April. 
malikihki  U.,  adj.,  leaping;  'ura  malikiliki,  to 

leap, 
malimeh  adj.,  sweet.     Niue  lango  meli,   bee; 

Immelie,  sweet;  Borneo  manis. 
malingi.mamallQgi  adj., spilt,     lingi.     v.  tr.,lo 
overbalance,  to  lean;  honu  tnalingi,  full 
to  the  brim, 
malingisi  tr.,  to  cause  to  spill. 
malisi  fku)  to  be  fitting,  becoming;  e  malisiku, 
it  becomes  me;  nou  ka'a  malisi  'unue, 
I  am  not  worthy  to  tell  it. 
malo  1.  black  beads   or  bugles,  sections  of  a 
creeper,  used  with  haa  and  huresoso  in 
the  making  of  'uri   mviado,  etc.:  dark 
glass  beads  introduced  in  trade  are  also 
called  malo;  malo  hiiri,  beads  cut  off  in 
sections;  malo  uie,  beads  rubbed  down 
to  size. 
malo  2.  asthma,  to  suffer  from  asthma;  tlele 

malo,  to  gasp  for  breath. 
malopi  adj.,  with  jagged  edges, 
malo'uadj.,  bent,  crooked,    lo'ii.    Su'uMalo'u, 
a  bay  on  Big  Malaita  opposite  Aio,  a 
bay  at  the  north  end  of  San  Cristoval. 


malu,  malumalu,  mamalu  1.  v.  i.,  to  shade,  to 
ovtrshadow.  ha'amdlii.  e  main  haahe, 
jr  if  in  shadow;  saulehi  melumelu,  dusk, 
m;  lute  (ku)  shade,  i  Mclutei  Kara,  under 
the  shade  of  the  coral  tree,  a  village  on 
Ugi;  i  mehilana,  under  the  rule  of,  used 
of  the  overshadowing  power  of  chiefs. 

malu  (ku)  2.  n.,  i  melime,  under  the  rule  of,  seen 
in  proper  names  'ou'ou  i  Melune. 

maluha  U-,  v.  n.,  shade,  used  with  poss.  3. 
Mota  malu,  Maori  maru. 

malumu  adj.,  soft,  gentle;  lae  mdlumu,  go 
quietly;  sae  mdhwnmge,  v.  n.,  long- 
suffering.  Mota  malumliim,  Viti 
7naluviu. 

mama'a  vocative,  father;  a  mama'a,  of  a  par- 
ticular person;  a  mama'a  e  'unue,  father 
said  so.  2.  used  as  an  affectionate 
address  by  the  father  to  the  male  child. 
cf.  Polynesian  lamaiii  (little  father). 
ma'amana,  n.,  ro  hd'i  ma'amana,  ro 
ma'amana,  U.,  vocative,  father  and  son. 

mamadali  adj.,  running  with  sweat,  madali. 
ma'ema'eha  mamadali,  S.,  fever. 

mamadu  adj.,  gentle,  harmless,     madu. 

mamae  adj.,  fine,  well  ground;  one  mamae,  fine 
sand;  sae  mamae,  meek.  Wango 
mamae,   soft. 

mamaeko'a  adj.,  gingerly,  gently,  subdued, 
meek,     ynaeynaeko'a. 

mamaela'a  adj.,  weak,  prone  to  sickness. 
mamaela'anga  v.  n.,  sickness. 

mamahu'e  n.,  a  tree,  used  for  house  posts. 

mama'ila'a  adj.,  despisingly,  used  with  poss.  3. 
la'a  3.  ere  mama'ila'a,  to  speak  de- 
spisingly of. 

mama'ingi  U.,  v.  i.,  to  despise,  to  reject;  to 
attack,  to  be  fierce  (of  a  dog  or  a  pig), 
used  with  poss.  3;     mama'ingi  'asi,  to 
reject. 
mama'ingi'a  U.,  adj.,  disparagingly. 
mama'ingi'ala-(ku)  gerund. 

mama'iraa  v.  i.,  to  work  at,  to  labor  earnestly 
over. 

mamakare  v.  i.,  a  children's  game  of  hide  and 
seek  with  an  object  held  in  the  hands. 

mamakine  adj.,  abashed,  ashamed,  with  poss.  3. 
ha'amamakine.  ddu  mamakine  ada,  put 
them  to  shame. 
mamakinanga  n.,  ere  mamakinanga,  to 
reproach.  Gilbert  Islands  makina,  to 
fear. 

mamakola  v.  i.,  to  reject,  to  handle  shamefully, 
to  be  fierce,  savage  (of  dogs  and  pigs), 
used  with  poss.  3. 
mamakolasi  tr. 

mamala  n.,  wild  taro. 

Mamala  Wai  n.,  the  Milky  Way. 

mamalidu'a  U.,  adj.,  quiet,  peaceable,  doing 
no  harm. 

mamalo,  mamamalo  v.  i.,  to  rest,     ha'amamalo. 
mamalonga  v.  n.,  rest,  a  resting-place. 
mamaloha  v.  n.,  a  resting-place.     Wango 
maviaro,  Bugotu  mamatho. 

maraalute-(ku)  v.  n.,  shade,  shadow,  veranda. 
i  mamahitana  nume,  on  the  veranda. 
malu. 


59 


MANGO 


mamanuto'o  v.  i.,  to  be  at  peace,  free  from 

strife,  i'o  mamanuto'o.     manti  2,  to'o. 
mamango  (ku)    breath,     mango   2.     rnamango 

i  sae,  mctaph.,  heart. 
mamataku     adj.,     fearful,     dreadful,     maa'u. 

Polynesian  malaku,  fear. 
mama'u    adj.,    causing    fear,    fearful,     ma'u. 
lio  mama'u,   to   look   ugly;   mama'u,  ni 
mwane,   a  fearful   lot  of   men,   beyond 
count. 
mamau'a'a    S.,    adj.,    smooth,    with    smooth 

surface. 
mama'udi  v.  i.,  to  be  cold  (of  the  bodjO- 

mama'udinge  v.  n.,  cold.     Borneo  viadud. 

mamaurita'a  adj.,  living,  alive,     mduri,  ta'a  5. 

mama'uru'e  S.,  ma'uma'uru'a  U.,  adj.,  sleepy. 

ma'urii. 

mama'uru'anga  v.  n.,  sleepiness. 

mamaware  adj.,  freed  from,  safe,  in  safety;  i'o 

mamaware,  to  be  in  safety. 
mamenamena  adj.,   broken  to  bits,     mcnasi. 
mami  S.   1.  v.  i.,  to  taste;  mdmi  ohonga  ana, 

taste  and  try  it.     Motu  mami. 
mami  2.  pron.  plural  1  excl.  suffixed  to  noun; 

nimetndmi,  our  hands. 
mamu  1.  v.  i.,  to  entice  animals  with  scraps  of 
food,     ha'amdmu. 
mamu'i  tr.,  to  throw  scraps  of  food  to  entice 
animals, 
mamu  2.  to  be  burnt  in  cooking  (of    food). 

ha'amdmu'i. 
mana  U.,  u.sed  of  numerals  over  ten;  awala 
mana  hai,  fourteen;  7nana  'enite,  what 
unit  over  ten.     Probably  ma,   n.,   na, 
suffixed  pronoun,     cf.  Arag  ve,  Espiritii 
Santo    va,    Santa    Cruz    wa.     M.    L., 
p.  232.     Viti  ma>i!. 
manata  1 .  v.  i.,  to  be  taught,  quiet  (of  animals) , 
broken  in,  tamed,  harmless. 
manatanga  v.  n.,  wisdom,  nature,  knowl- 
edge.    Motu    manada,    gentle;   Wango 
manata. 
manata  (ku)    2.   v.   n.,   nature,   custom;  tolai 
sulie  mayiatana,  according  to  his  nature; 
manatana  mic  'inoni,  mu  manalai  'inoni, 
the  nature  of  men.     manatana  c  rako. 
Florida  manaha. 
manata'a    adj..     tame,     kind,     ha'amanata'a. 
ke'i    ne'i    manata'a    diana,    they    shall 
become  well  tamed. 
manata'i,  manate'i  (Qaloto)  v.  tr.,  to  know,  to 
be  accustomed;  nou  ka'a  manata' ic  ike, 
I  do  not  know;  ynala  kire  manata'i  dene, 
as  they  were  wont, 
manata'ini,    manate'ini    tr.,    to    know,    to 
have;  'omii  ka'a  iiianala'inie  wa  'omn  ke 
lecsie,  ye  neither  know  him  nor  have  seen 
him;  atei  e  manata' inic,  who  knows,  as 
Spanish  t  quien    sabe?     I    don't    know; 
'o  manata'iuie  hoi  niu?    nou  pti'o,  have 
you  a  coconut?     I   have  not.     Samoa 
manatu,  to  think;  Lau  manata,  Florida 
manaha. 
manawa  v.  i..  to  proclaim  oneself  the  cause  of 
the  death  of  another  by  magic.     San 
Cristoval  manawa,  to  breathe. 


maneko,  manemaneko  v.  i.,  to  be  gentle,  harm- 
less. 
manekonga  v.  n.,  gentleness, 
manekosi  IJ.,  tr.,  hele  manekosi,  to  handle 
gently.     Wango   manigo. 
mani  adv.,  entirely,  altogether:  precedes  verb; 
mdni  ni'ilana  sakanga  e  mdni  lae,  the 
complete  giving  of  power  is  completely 
given;  ke  mdni  dolosie  satada,  let  him 
ask  all  their  names;  mdni  wala,  S.,  to 
take  counsel;  mdni  dhutaka,  U.,  all  of  us; 
mdni  oaoanga  hd'iliu,  equality.     \Vans;o 
nni'ani.  article;  Lau  qaimani,  altogether, 
manikulu'e    adj.,    glorious,    resplendent,     re- 
nowned,    ha'amdnikiilu'e,     kiduhi. 
manikuluha  n.,  glory,  renown,   used  with 

poss.  3. 
manikulu'anga  n.,  glory,  praise, 
manini  olo  manini,  to  be  of  orderly  behavior, 
manire'i  1.  v.  tr.,  to  clean  up,  to  put  in  order. 
2.    partic,    skilfully;   hele   mdnire'i;   i'o 
manire'i,  to  live  orderly', 
manire'ini  IJ.,  tr. 
manire'i  ..lia-(ku)  gerund, 
manire'inge'ini  tr.,  to  work  skilfully  at. 
manola  a<.lj..  clear,   pure,  clean,     ha'amanola. 
manomanola'a,  manomanoleta  adj.,  unsul- 
lied, refined, 
manolanga  v.  n.     Wango  manora. 
manu   1.  a  bird,  insect,     mdnu  poo,  the  pig- 
bird,  with  a  cry  like  the  grunt  of  a  hog, 
a  bird  of  ill  omen;  hoi  menu,  an  egg; 
pipisi    ana    mdnu,    tail    feathers;    ihui 
menu,  feather;  7ndnu  koni.a  tame  bird. 
Sa'a     ni     menu,     cf.     ha'addhi.     Mota 
manu,  Polynesian  manu. 
manu  2.  v.  i.,  to  float;  hdu  menu,  pumice  stone; 
hele  mdnu  sada,  to  hold  level,  upright; 
mdnu  odo,  to  be  upright,  level;  waaro- 
waaro  e  mdnu  'a'a  mdi  ilengl,  the  moon 
lioated  clear  in  the  sky. 
manule'i   U.,   partic,   raised   up  on  high. 
Samoa,  Maori  manu,  to  tloat. 
mangi-(na,  ni)  'unu  mengini,  to  tell  everything 
out;  kire  ka'a  lio  mdngini,    they    saw 
none  of  it.     Wango  mangina,  at  all. 
mangite  (ku)  a  relic  of  the  dead,  an  amulet, 
hair,  bone,  etc.     cf.  kulu. 
mangitana  the  dead  body. 
mango  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  finished,  completed;  the 
adverb  'oto  may  be  added :  with  dhuta  has 
the  sense  of  all.     ha'amango.     e  mango 
'oto,  quite  finished;  mango  'oto,  that  fin- 
ished, thereupon;  melu  mango  'oto  mai,we 
are  all  here;  sae  mango,  sae  mangonga, 
ha'asaemango,  mental  satisfaction;  Shu- 
tamere'i  tnango,  both  of   us;  ahutamolu 
mango,  all  of  you;  mango  te'etc'e,  finished 
for  good  and  all. 
mangomango     adv.,     completely,     follows 
verb. 
mango,  mamango  S.,  mangomango  U.  2.  to 
breathe;    mango    asa,    to    gasp;    mango 
pdine,  to  sigh;  mango  toli,  to  faint,  be 
insensible;    Hi   mango,   to   draw   in   the 


MANGO 


60 


mango,  mamango  2  (continued). 

breath;  iole  mango,  to  hold  the  breath; 
io'o  mango,  to  have  breath. 
mango  (ku)  3.  breath,  chest;  mangoku,  my 
life;  mangoi  ola,  breath;  mangona  e  suu, 
his  breath  has  gone,  he  is  dead;  mangona 
tie  ana,  he  is  still  alive;  mangona  e 
puulo'o  (ililio'i,  his  breath  returned, 
mangoa'ini     v.     tr.,     to    be    satisfied    with; 

mango    1. 
mangomango  (ku)  n.,  breath,  chest. 
mangoni  adv.,  rich,  fat;  wdsu  mangoni,  to  emit 

a  rich  savor, 
mangulungulu  adj.,  resounding, 
mao,  maomao  1.  v.  i.,  to  dance;  mao  hidehide, 
to  dance  to  the  clapping  of  hand"?;  mao 
pe'e  dhui,  to  dance  holding  a  dancing- 
club;  'arasi  mao,  to  lead  the  chorus  in  a 
dance;  maani  mao,  to  watch  the  dance; 
ohoa  mao,  to  practise  the  dance;  sulu 
mao,  to  sing  dancing-songs. 
maonga  v.  n.,  dancing;  putilie  maonga,  to 

tread  the  dance. 
maoli  tr.,  maoli  mao.  to  join  in  the  dance. 
maolila-(ku)    gerund.     Lau    mao,    Wango 
mao. 
mao  2.  halo  mao,  a  pump  drill;  a  piece  of  hard 
palm  wood   is  tipped   with   a  flake  of 
flint    which    is   bound    tightly   on,    two 
strings  hang  from  the  other  end  and  are 
made  fast  to  a  short  stick;  these  strings 
are  then  twisted  around  the  palm  wood 
and   the   drill   revolves   as   the   strings 
unwind  and  rewind  by  pushing  down 
the  short  stick. 
ma'ohi,  mama'ohi  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  await,  to  expect. 
ohi  1.     ma'ohi  raqasi,  to  await. 
ma'ohinge    v.    n.,    expectation;    ma'ohinge 

siisiito'o.  hope  (late  use). 
ma'ohila-(ku)  gerund. 
ma'o'i  1.  adj.,  broken  in  two.     2.  n.,  a  landslip, 
'o't'o't. 
ma'o'i'o'i     altogether     broken.       Florida 
magoti. 
maomaopu'e  S.,  adj.,  well  grown,  fatted;  piisu 

maomaopu'e,  in  full  leaf. 
maoneone  U.,  adj.,  sore  smitten. 
maopaopa   adj.,    distinct,    showing    up    sepa- 
rately   (of   trees  in  a  landscape),     opa. 
mapipi  adj.,  receding  (of  water);  wdi  e  mapipi 
'ohe  'oto  td'inie  kolune  mwakana,  whether 
the  water  had  receded  off  the  face  of 
the  earth, 
mapo  1.  n.,  a  locust. 
Mapo  2.  Roasi  Bay,  Malaita. 
mapusu  U.,  adj.,  stinking,  rotten, 
maputaputa  U.,  adj.,  bruised, 
maqe  n.,  Tahiti  chestnut  (Bocoa,    Inocarpus 

edulis).     Mota  mwake,  Tahiti  mape. 
mara  1.  i  mar  a  mime,  the  front  of  the  house, 

platform  at  front  door,  courtyard. 
mara  S.,  mala  U.  2.  mara  hdlisi,  the  northeast 

wind.     Possibly  Mota  maran,   light. 
Mara  3.   (Tolo)   the  island  of  Malaita.     Sa'a 

Mwala;  Mara  masiki;  Florida  Mala. 
maraa-(ku)  1.  n.,  lone,  unaided;  ineu  maraaku. 


maraa-(ku)  (continued). 

I  by  myself;  ola  maraana,  nothing  like 
it,  superexcellent.     2.  U.,  of  one's  own 
accord;  e  hd'iarea  maraana,  he  pushed 
himself  forward. 
maraa'imuni   v.    i.,    to   do   a   thing   secretly. 

mumuni. 
maraau  the  southeast  trade  wind  blowing  from 
south-southeast  to  east-northeast  during 
the  months  from   May  to  November. 
aau.     maraau,  wei  hata,  south-southeast 
wind,  a  strong  wind  with  cloudy  days 
but  no  rain;  maraau  i  Malau,  southeast 
wind,  from  the  direction  of  'Olu  Malau; 
maraau    i    qaro,     south-by-east    wind; 
maraau  'upu'iipu,  east  wind,  blows  over 
the     middle      {'upii'upu)     of     Ulawa; 
7naraau   wei   qini,   east-by-north  wind, 
brings  rain;  maraau  ro  one,  east-north- 
east wind.     Maori  marangai,  east  wind. 
mara  halisi  northeast  wind,  fine  weather  with 
masses  of  cumulus  clouds;  mara  hdlisi 
i  matawa,  north-by-east  wind, 
mara'i  heutaa  U.,  v.  i.,  to  droop  (of  flowers). 
Maramara  'O'orou  U.,  the  name  of  a  canoe 

in  a  story. 
maramarape'a  adj.,  secure,  serene,  prosperous, 
maramarawai   lo'a   tnaramarawdi,    name   of  a 

month. 
maranga  1.  maranga  i  maa,  eyebrow. 
maranga-(na,  ni)  2.  hele  marangana,  take  from 

amongst. 
maraohu  (ao  diphthong)  a  large  food-bowl, 
maraohu'e  S.,  maraohu'a  U.,  adj.,  stale,  not 
fresh,  brackish,  water  which  tastes  of  the 
bamboo    water-carrier.     Wango    mara- 
ohua. 
marapute'i  adj.,   fallen   headlong,     rdpu. 
marara   v.    i.,   to  be   diffident,   hesitating,    to 
flinch;   hele  marara,   to  act  with  diffi- 
dence.    Mota     maragai,     to     tremble; 
Motu  hemarai,  to  be  coy. 
marare'a    adj.,    white    and    glistening,     re'a. 

Mota  maran,  light  (lux). 
marariro'a  adj.,  sumptuous,  bright. 
marawa  U.,  to  be  blackish,  purplish,  in  color; 
marawani  deni,  daybreak;  aau  marawa, 
the  nuts  getting  purple  in  color  before 
ripening;  a  month,  July.     Mota  moras. 
marea  n.,  a  small  fresh- water  fish. 
mareho  S.  (a  Wango  word),  a  mareho,  So-and 

so.     hereho. 
mari'iri'i    adj.,     broken    into    slivers.     Niue 

malipilipi. 
marou  v.   n.,   to  be  thirsty.        Mota  marou, 

Marshall  Islands  maru. 
maruda  U.,  adj.,  tender,  of  flesh  meat. 
masa  to  be  shy,  ashamed,  respectful:  used  with 
poss.  3.    ma'amasa'a,  ha'amasa.    e  masa 
aku,  he  was  shy  of  me;  masa  mwaani,  to 
be    shy    of    doing;    masa   suke,    to    be 
ashamed  to  beg. 
masanga  v.  n.,  shame,  confusion, 
masi,  ma'imesi  S.  1.  to  commit  adultery;  mdsi 
hunt,  to  commit  adultery  with;  hdnua 
ni  mdsi,  U.,  an  adulterous  place. 
mSsinge  v.  n.,  adultery. 


6i 


MAWA 


masi,  ma'imesi  1  (continued). 

meisilana  gerund.,  her  fornication, 
masi  2.  U.,  article,  a,  a  piece:  used  also  in 
diminutive     and     depreciatory     sense; 
nga    and     imvai    may    precede,     mdsi 
kaleku,  my  child;  nga  mdsi  taha,  what 
(thing);  mwai  mesi  sae,  hearts;  idiiidii 
mesi  'ei,  jumped  about  on  the  firewood. 
Wango:  cf.  si  in  hasi;  hasi  ei,  a  tree; 
hasi  noni,  a  man;  Lau  si  a. 
mfisi  3.  dwarfs,  pygmies:  probably  the  autoch- 
thons,    credited     with     being     stupid. 
San  Cristoval  masi. 
masiki    (Tolo    word).     Mara    Masiki,    Little 
Malaita.       Mota    rig,    small;     Motu 
maragi. 
mata  1.  U.,  club  (generic  term);  tahola'i  mala, 
S.,  to  wave  the  club  in  the  air.     Wango 
mata,  Viti  manda,  Wedau  mada. 
mata  2.  U.,  to  be  rotting  away;  nga  hudi  e  mata 
'asi'a,    the    bananas   were   rotting    un- 
picked. 
mata'i  to  have  an  attack  of  malarial  fever; 
noko  mata'i,  I  have  malaria;  mata'i  holo- 
holo,  intermittent  fever.     Mota  inasag. 
mataka  Qaloto  form  for  mataqa,  clear. 
matakara     adj.,     unraveled,     come     undone. 
takara. 
matakarasi  tr.,  to  unravel, 
matamata  soot. 
matanga  adj.,  forked,  branched,     tanga.     Lau 

matanga,  between,  in  the  midst  of. 
mataqa     adj.,     clear,     open,     plain,     mataka, 
ha'amataqasi. 
mataqanga  v.  n.,  clear  light,  open  space, 
mataqasi  S.,  mataqali  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  enlighten. 
Samoa  matala,  Maori  malara. 
mataraha  flotsam,  drift  coconuts,     tara  1. 
matasi  L  adj.,  with  the  point  broken  ofi". 
matasi  2.  n.,  a  small  fish. 

matawa  n.,  the  open  sea.  tawa.  i  mataica, 
the  east;  mar  a  halisi  i  matawa,  north-by- 
east  wind;  hui  ni  matawa,  the  giant  taro; 
mwai  matawa  qaroqaro,  U.,  natives  of 
Santa  Cruz;  mu  matawa  'uhi'uhi.  S., 
foreigners  with  guns.  San  Cristoval 
matawa;  Maori  tawha,  open;  Omba 
wawa,  the  open  sea;  Niue  lawana,  open; 
Araga  wa^vana,  open  sea;  Mota  wawana, 
wide  and  flat;  Malagasy  fafana. 
matola-(ku)  the  midst  of,  between,  midway; 
*  matolana  i  Uki  na  i  Ulawa,  half  way 
between  Ugi  and  Ulawa;  i  matolai  'iiiotii, 
among  men.  Wango  madora. 
Matou  a  Poro  Matou  ni  Wala,  a  ghost  in  I'lawa 

folklore. 
mau  1.  to  emerge,  to  debouch,  to  lead  (of  a 
path);  ko  mail  i  ola,  leads  to  such-and- 
such  a  place. 
mS'o,  ma'ume'u  S.  2.  v.  i.,  to  fear,  to  be  afraid. 
maa'u,  ha'amd'ii. 
ma'unge  v.  n.,  fear;  ere  lole  ana  md'unge,  to 
talk    confusedly    from    fear;    saeda    e 
qd'ilulu  eni  mc'unge,  their  hearts  were 
dismayed  through  fear, 
ma'ute'ini  tr. 
ma'ute'i  v.  i.,  to  fear;  noko  md'ute'i  rara- 


mau.ma'ume'u  (continued). 

ngana,     I    am    afraid    of    it.     Wango 

mamau,  Malay  mataut,  Maori  mataku. 

maua  U.  1.  v.  i.,  to  dye,  to  stain.     2.  n.,  a  dye: 

the  dyes  in  use  are  obtained  from  the 

bark  of  the  casuarina  (sdlu)  and  the  o'a 

(?Bischoffia  javanica)  and  kikiri. 

mauana  n.,  man  and  wife,  parents:  used  with 

ro,    ro    hd'i,    ro    maiiana,    U.,    ro    ha'i 

mauana,    S.,    man    and    wife;    ro    ha'i 

mauana  irteu,  S.,  my  parents. 

mauli,    maumeuli    left-handed,    awkward;    a 

Mduli,   a  proper  name;   hele  ynduli,   to 

do  awkwardly.     Florida  mauli,   Maori 

maui,   Viti  mawi,   Motu  lauri,   Xguna 

mauri. 

maumau'a'a,  maumau'ala  U.,  mamau'a'a  S., 

adj.,  smooth. 
maumauri'a  U.,  adj.,  alive,     mauri. 
ma'uma'uru'a  U.,  adj.,  sleepy,     ma'uru. 
ma'ume'ule   S.,   frightened,   fearful,     md'u. 
maumeuli  (ku)     left,     lefthanded,     awkward. 
mduli.     i  meumeuli,  on  the  left;  nime 
i  meumeuliku,  my  left  hand, 
maumeuli'e  adj.,  awkward, 
maumeuri'e  adj.,  living,  alive,     mauri.     huru- 

huru  maumeuri'e  to  be  living. 
ma'ume'uta-(ku)  terrible,     to'o  md'ume'ulana, 

terrifying,     md'ti. 
mau'o  S.,  to  be  offended,     ha'amdu'o. 
mauri,  maumeuri   1.   to  live,  to  be  alive,   to 
recover    health,     ha'auri.     'asi    meuri, 
weather  side  of  an  island;  lalamoa  mauri, 
a  captive;  tola  mauri,  to  capture,  used 
with  poss.  3. 
maiirihe  v.  n.,  life,  soul:  used  with  poss.  3. 
mdurihaaku,    my   soul,    my   life;    a    aei 
meurihe,     source    of    life;     raaraa    ani 
meurihe,  the  light  of  life, 
mauringe  v.  n.,  life  (abstract). 
maurisi  tr.,  to  survive,  to  escape  from, 
mauri  2.  v.  i.,  to  be  delivered  of  a  child;  e  mauri 
ana  mwela,  she  was  delivered  of  a  child. 
Java    urip.  life;    Mota    maur,    Malay 
murip,  Ponape  maur.    Lau  mori,  to  live 
may  be  connected  with  Sa'a  moli  true 
(wala'imoli)  and  with  Maioriori,  Chat- 
ham Islanders,  Maori.  New  Zcalander, 
rather  than  with  mauri.   cf.  moli. 
maurihaa'i  S.,  life,  soul.     Florida  mdurihali. 
ma'uru  U.   (dialectic),   to  sleep;  ma'uru  dhu. 
sound    asleep,     Fagani    mauru,    Mota 
maturu. 
ma'usu  U.,  bush,  forest;  i  la'ona  ma'usu,  in  the 
bush;  e  ma'usu  'oto,  it  is  all  overgrown, 
mauta'a  adj.,  firm,  hard,  exclam.,  hold  tight. 
ha'amauta'a.     hoi  meuta'a.  a  ripe  areca 
nut,  hard;  'usu  meuta'a.  to  affirm, 
mauweline  n.,  with  ro:  ro  mauweline,  uncle  and 

nephew,     uweli. 
mawa,  mamawa  \.  to  blow  strong,  to  be  a  gale; 
mawa  ta'a,  to  be  exposed  to  the  air  (of 
a  sore). 
mawaha  C.  v.  n.,  tempest,  gale.     Wango 
mawa,  wind. 
mawa  2.  a  tree,  strong  smelling  when  chopped 
and  causing  vomiting. 


MAWA 


62 


mawa  3.  v.  i.,  to  shout. 

mawataa,    mawaha    S.,    mawanga    U.,    a 

shout,  a  loud  cry;  sungie  mawataa,  to 

lift  up  a  shout. 
mawasidengi  S.,  mawasideni  U.,  a  storm  of 

wind;  mawasidengi  e  laharara'a,  a  storm 

swept  down. 
mea(ku)  1.  n.,  a  tongue,  the  blade  of  a  paddle; 

meaka'elu  to'ola  ka'elu,  our  tongues  are 

our  own;  e  rara  niea,  it  burnt  the  tongue, 

hot  (of  a  rebuke). 
meameaha   S.,   meameata   U.,   used   with 

genitive   i,    ni;   viii   meameahai   diinge, 

tongues  of  fire;  meamealani  ola,  U.,  a 

huge  thing. 
meali  v.  tr.,  to  lick. 
mealila-(ku)  gerund.     2.  v.  i.,  to  be  fierce 

(of  fire) ;  dimge  ko  viea,  the  fire  is  fervent. 

Mota  gara-mweai,  tongue;  Maisin  me. 
medo    to    be    damp,    wet.     ha'amedo.     Motu 

medu,  rain, 
me'esu,  me'eme'esu  S.,  bush,  forest,     ma'usu, 

U.     dalo  ni  me'esu,  the  paule  tree;  ola 

ni  me'esu,  an  uncultivated  thing, 
mehu  n.,  a  fish  caught  near  the  rocks;  honi 

mehu,  U.,  one  such  fish. 
me'i  S.,  article,  a,  one:  nga  and  mu  may  be 

prefixed;  also  used  in  a  diminutive  or 

depreciatory  sense,     masi,  U.     nga  me'i 

ola,  a  thing;  me'i  wala,  a  word;  mu  me'i 

wala;  a  yne'i  wala,  the  Word;  kele  me'i 

ola,  a  little  thing;  me'i  rnwakana,  dust; 

me'i  keni  reu,   a  handmaid;   i'e7ni  mu 

me'i  'inoni,  we  humble  folk. 
meimeile'ini  v.  tr.,  e  tale'i  meimeile'ini,  he  was 

in  destitution. 
melaha,    melamelaha    n.,    fierce    flame;    mu 

jnelahai   dunge,    fiames   of   fire.     Mota 

mera,   red   glow;   Maori  miramira,   red 

heat, 
melu  1.  pers.  pron.,  plural  2,  excl.,  we:  more 

restricted  in  meaning  than  ki'e.     2.  pers. 

pron.,  plural  2,  excl.:  suffixed  to  nouns, 

our:  suffixed  to  verbs  and  prepositions 

as  object,  us.     hi. 
melu  3.  n.,  a  tree,  the  quandong  (Eleocarpus 

sp.). 
melumelu  sdulehi  melumelu,  dusk. 
melumelu'a'a  adj.,  bluish,  blackish,  purplish; 

main,     shade.     Sesake      meluna      last, 

depths  of  the  sea. 
melumelu'e  S.,  adj.,  glorious, 
meme  n.,  a  ball  of  masticated  food;  hou  meme, 

chewed  areca  nut  with  betel  leaf  and 

lime. 
memela'ini  v.   tr.,   to   masticate.     Gilbert 

Islands  mama,   to  masticate  a  ball  of 

food  for  an  infant;  Viti  tnama,  to  chew; 

Niue  mama,  a  mouthful, 
memelu'a'a  as  melumelu'a'a. 
memepusu  S.,  a  tree  (Ficus  sp.).     maimepusu. 
memeso    v.    tr.,    to   break   into   powder,    pili 

m.emesoa. 
meaa  to  turn  color  (of  leaves  of  deciduous 

trees);    'alite    ko    mena,    the    'alile    is 

turning  red.     Mota  mena,  ripe, 
menanga'ini  v.  tr.,  to  do  a  thing  perfectly. 


menasi  v.  tr.,  to  break  into  pieces,  ddu  menasi, 
hile  menasi,  tnamenamena,  ha'amena- 
mena. 

mengo  a  shellfish  (Oliva  sp.). 

mere,  mere'i  pers.  pron.,  dual  1,  excl.,  we  two: 
used  as  subject  or  as  object  of  verbs 
and  prepositions;  jnere'i  is  used  also  (a) 
following  'emere'i  or  i'emere'i  as  subject, 
and  (b)  suffixed  to  nouns,     dhutamere'i. 

mere  to  be  white  in  color;  uhune  e  lai  mero,  bis 
hair  is  white. 

meru'e  S.  as  ?nere,  used  as  subject  of  verb. 

mi  1.  ('Ahi'a,  U.),  as  'ami  1. 

mi  2.  article,  used  only  in  the  phrase  mi  sala, 
a  piece  of  any  cloth. 

mi  3.    verb  suffix,  inu  inumi. 

mimi  1.  to  make  water,  urine.  2.  the  bladder. 
Mota  7neme,  to  urinate;  Polynesian 
7nimi. 

mimisi  v.  tr.,  to  spurtle  on  (of  juice,  etc.); 
e  mimisie  maaku,  it  squirted  in  my  face. 

mimisi  maa  1.  a  tree  (Excoecaria  sp.).  2.  the 
mantis,  walking-stick  insect,  which 
spurts  out  a  liquid  when  touched.  Viti 
mimi  mala,  Mota  memes  mata. 

mlnga-(na,  ni)  S.,  as  hikana;  'o  ngdu  mifigana, 
did  you  eat  of  it? 

miu  pron.,  plural  2,  suffi.xed  to  noun. 

mo  plural  article  used  with  nouns  beginning 
with  the  letter  o;  mo  ola,  mo  one,  also 
colloquially  mo  'inoni;  huni  lu'ue  mo 
ola  ineu,  to  remove  my  goods. 

moa  S.,  V.  i.,  to  vomit. 
moana  v.  n.,  its  vomit, 
moata'ini  tr. 

mode  to  be  listless,  to  faint;  saeku  e  mode,  I 
am  listless. 

moka  to  wax  old,  to  be  fusty  (of  bags,  etc.). 

moke,  momoke  1.  a  hand  net  used  in  openings 
(ta'ataha)  of  the  shore  reef.  2.  to  use  a 
hand  net;  moke  ana  pusu  'esi,  to  net 
whales;  i  sarona  moke  dmu,  in  your 
sight,  lit.,  opposite  your  net;  uselie 
moke,  to  make  a  net;  hii'o  ni  moke,  a 
casting  net. 

mola  1.  v.  i.,  to  heal  (of  a  wound  or  sore). 

mola  2.  V.  i.,  to  fail,  to  miss;  used  with  poss.  3. 
ha'amola. 
molahi  tr.,  e  molahie  'oto,  it  failed. 

mola  3.  a  numeral,  10,000,  used  properly  of 
yams,  molai  uhi;  followed  by  genitive 
i,  S.,  ni,  U.;  denotes  also  a  countless 
number;  may  be  used  for  counting  men. 
hu'e  kire  konie  mola,  a  concubine;  walu 
mola  ni  ola,  all  things. 
molata-(na)  n.,  inolatana  nga  ola,  innumer- 
able things.  Florida  mx>la,  a  great 
number. 

mola  4.  adv.,  merely,  only;  followed  by  genitive 
i.  lae  molai  rako,  go  gently;  nga 
ta'ata'a  ini  mola,  only  one  person; 
e  la'ewau  mola,  e  ta'e  mola  wau,  it  makes 
no  difference;  'oto  mola,  'oto  molana,  S., 
'oto  molani,  U.,  'oto  mola  'ie,  S.,  'oto 
mola  iniliou,  U.,  all  mean  just  now. 

mola  5.  'ano  mola,  good  ground. 


63 


MUNI 


mola'a  adj.,  free,  without  price;  tale'i  inn 
mola'a,  just  drink  without  price. 

mole  V.  tr.,  to  stain,  to  daub  with  pigments;  n., 
pigments, paint;  salo  molemole, red  clouds. 

moli  1.  n.,  wild  orange,  hotoholomolila'a. 
Mota  mwol,  Viti  moli. 

moli  2.  Sh'h  Moli,  a  boat  harbor  at  the  north- 
west corner  of  Ulawa. 

moli  3.  wala'imoli,  true,  /.  c,  to  speak  true. 
Niue  moli,  true. 

molu  pers.  pron.,  plural  2,  you;  used  as  subject 
or  as  object  ol  verb  or  preposition;  more 
restricted  in  meaning  than  'omu;  molu 
is  also  used  (a)  following  'omoln  or 
i'omolu  as  subject,  (b)  suffixed  to  a 
noun,     dhiilamolu. 

momo  V.  i.,  to  squeeze,  to  press  on  each  side; 
momo  lalamoa,  a  flat  armlet  of  tridacna 
shell,  so  called  from  its  being  used  to 
squeeze  men  to  death. 
momo'i  tr.,  to  bring  side  by  side. 

momo  2.  rubbish,  sweepings.     Motu  momo. 

momoke  moke. 

momoru  adj.,  small,  little. 

monaki  cuttlefish;  hole  ni  monaki,  the  bone 
of  the  cuttlefish. 

mone  adv.,  follows  the  verb,  na  maj'  be  added; 
gives  clearness,  explains  lae  mone,  go! 
kolu  mone,  let  us  be  gone;  qongiku  e  to'o 
vione  'olo,  my  time  is  even  now  come; 
i'oe  ni  monena,  it  is  you  indeed. 

mono  U.,  to  live  apart;  koro  'a  mono  'oto 
i  Kaloiia,  they  two  live  apart  in  Kalona. 

moro,  moro'i  1.  pers.  pron.,  dual  2,  you  two: 
used  as  subject  or  as  object  of  verb  or 
preposition:  used  in  addressing  a  mar- 
ried woman,  or  a  woman  with  a  child, 
or  a  chief,  or  even  a  party:  moro  is  also 
used  (a)  following  i'omoro  as  subject, 
(b)  suffixed  to  a  noun;  moro  tdria  paro 
i'ola  i  'esi  ka'el'e  laelae,  you  launch 
away  the  canoe  into  the  sea,  let  us  go. 

moro-(ku)  2.  n.,  buttock. 

moru'e  S.,  pers.  pron.,  dual  2,  you  two;  used 
as  subject  or  following  'omoru'e. 

morumoru  1.  U.,  small,  little,  momoru.  2. 
broken  in  pieces,  qa'a  morumoru.  Lau 
morumoru. 

mota  n.,  a  mortar  for  pounding  areca  nut;  used 
by  toothless  persons. 

motaa,  motaahi  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  cause  agony  to. 
ha'amolaahi,  hulemolaa. 
motaahinge  v.  n.,  agony. 
motaahila-(ku)   gerund. 

mou,    moumou  1.  v.  i.,  to  be    broken,     rara 
moumou.     hdu    moumou,     an    isolated 
rock;  e  to'o  mou,  it  has  ceased;  sae  sa'a 
maholo  wa  ke  mou,   thought  shall  not 
be  parted  and  shall  not  cease;  malau 
mou,   an  islet;  e  mou  ue  ana,   still  in 
desuetude. 
mousi,  moute'ini  tr.,  to  break  (of  a  rope, 
etc.).     ha'amousi.     radu  moumousie  mu 
'i'eli,  they  broke  the  rope;  adoma'i  mousi, 
U.,  to  decide,  to  dare. 
mouta-(na,  ni)  e  to'o  vioulana,  it  has  ceased. 
mousila-(ku)  gerund. 


mou,  moumou  1  (< oiitinucd). 

moute'i,    moumoute'i    partic,    one,    only. 

mwela  moute'i,  only  child;  ta'ata'a  ola 

moumoute'i,    one    thing    only;    ne'isae 

moute'i,  S.,  to  determine,  to  dare.     Mota 

mot,  Polynesian  motu. 
mou  2.  U.  (dialectic),  forest,  bush,  »  mou,  oha 

ni   mou.     ma'usu.     Mota   mwol. 
mouholo  V.  i.,  to  break  across,     holo.     saeku 

e  mouholo,  I  have  no  spirit  left. 
mouqeli  S.,   to  get  ready,  to  prepare,   to  be 

ready;  used  with  suffixed  pronouns  ku, 

mu,  nd,  da  instead  of  du,  etc.;  e  mouqe- 

liiie,  it  is  prepared, 
moutoli  V.  i.,  to  cease,  to  be  ended. 
mu  1.  pron.,  sing.  1,  suffixed  to  noun:  thine; 

nimemu,  thy  hand. 
mu  2.  plural  article,  the:  mui  is  used  with  nga 

in  nga  mui  ta'a,  what  things;  nga  mui 

tola,  paths. 
mudi  1.  midrib  of   leaf   of   coconut,  etc.;  the 

suf!ixed    pronoun    nd    may    be    added. 

mudine;  7nudii  niu,  mudii  sa'o,  midrib 

of  coconut,  of  sago;  maai  mudi,  a  gorge 

made  of  sago  midrib  or  of  tortoise  shell 

for  catching  flying-fish,  the  bait   being 

the  flesh  of  the  claws  of  the  coconut 

crab  (Birgus  latro,  dsusu). 
mudi  2.  shear  legs,  maai  mudi  S.,  Iwu  mudi  U. 
mudimudi  1.  U.,  a  bird,  yellow  honey-sucker, 
mudimudi     2.     U.,    mwimwidi    S.,    to   drip; 

7nudimudi  ura,  to  drip. 
muitu  eta  muini,  some;  hahira  diana  ikire  nga 

muini  lo'u  ka'a  diana,  on  the  good  and 

the  bad;  muini  e  mwd'i,  the  rich  people; 

muini  e  i'o  mwakule,  those  who  have 

no  ties;  muini  liuta'ana  a  mwane  'ie  e 

qao'i  ne,   more   than  those  which  this 

man  has  done,     ini  1. 
mumu  1.  U.,  mumua  qangoqango,  to  decorate  a 

nose  ornament  with  porpoise  teeth, 
mumu  2.  to  close  in  on;  'ala  mumu,  to  close  in 

like  jaws. 
mumu'i     tr.,     to     place    adjoining,     close 

together. 
mumu    3.    mumulou,    wild    men,    traditional. 

M.  A.,  p.  355. 
mumuni  1.  v.  tr.,  to  hide,  to  conceal.     2.  to  be 

hidden.     Motu /a/zitni,  Mota  tavun,  San 

Cristoval  ahuni.  Mao.  nunumi.     dmuni. 
muna'i,  mune'i  U.,  adv.,  used  in  conditional 

sentences:  subjunctive;  kira  'a  mune'i 

lae,  were  they  to  go. 
muni  U.  1.  {du)  prep,  dative,  for,  to;  e  qa'ike 

munia   nga   tnaenga,    not    unto   death; 

munia  nga  taha,  what  for. 
muni  U.  2.  adv.,  in  order  that:  used  as  optative 

with  verbal  particle  'e;  used  with  ana,  if. 

muni  'e  lae  mat,  let  him  come;  muni  'e 

(mun'e)    lae,    gently;    muni   ne'e  loosia. 

ta'ane  na'a  'unua,  if  I  see  him  I  shall 

tell  it;  tnuni  nge'ia  'c  lae  mai.  if  he  come; 

ana  muni  kir'e  'unua,   if  they  say  it; 

muni  'ua,  why,  what  for;  nau  'unua  uri 

muni  ne'e  mae  'oto,  I  thought  I  was  done 

for;    tdu    muni,    to    endeavor.     Mota 

mtm,  Sa'a  huni. 


MUKO 


64 


muno  n.,  caterpillar,  chrysalis. 

musi-(ku)  1.  U.,  finger  or  toe  nail,  mwisi,  S. 
2.  operculum,  met.,  a  piece;  miisii  elili, 
operculum  of  Turbo  petholatus. 

MW 

mwa,  mwamwa  1.  prefix  of  condition  as  7na  1. 
mwamiuanolo,  miuahiohio. 

mwa  2.  U.,  plural  article,  used  before  words 
beginning  with  a  vowel  or  with  h; 
mwai. 

mwa  3.  prefix  to  nouns  expressing  relationship, 
mu  viwa'asine,  ro  mwa'adine. 

mwa  4.    U.,  exclamation  of  surprise. 

mwaa  1.  n.,  a  snake;  mivaa  dili  salo,  a  snake 
observed  as  an  omen;  saro  ni  mwaa, 
zigzag  pattern  in  inlaying;  mwaa 
nuenuala,  glistening,  brilliant,  snake. 
Mota  mwata.  In  M.  A.,  p.  221,  mati  e 
salo  should  be  mwaa  dili  sato. 

mwaa  2.  n.,  a  disease,  lupus,  mwaa  e  Imre 
ana,  he  was  eaten  of  worms. 

mwaa  3.  lemi  mwaa,  U.,  full  moon;  oku  mwaa, 
October. 

mwa'a  4.    v.  i.,  to  be  extinct  (of  fire  or  lamp). 
mwa'asi  tr.,  to  extinguish. 

mwaadalo  to  be  innocent,  meek. 

mwa'adine  n.,  with  ro,  ro  mwa'adine,  two  first 
cousins,     'adi. 

mwaadule  earthworm. 

mwaamwaa  worm,  maggot;  mwaamwaa  puri, 
trepang,  beche-de-mer;  mwaamwaa  ni 
ngali,  U.,  woodlouse.  VVango  mwaa- 
mwaa. 

mwaamwaala  adj.,  infested  with  worms. 

mwaani  (au)  prep.,  from,  out  of,  since:  the 
pron.  sing.  3  is  suffixed  as  anticipatory 
object;  used  in  comparison  of  the 
adjective,  mwaani  ta'a,  from  what; 
'ulu  mwaani,  to  overlook;  ddu  toli 
mwaani,  to  submit  to,  to  be  subject  to; 
pola  mwaani,  to  desert  a  ship;  e  la  'oloi 
'aela  mwaani  nonola,  it  is  worse  than 
yesterday;  mwaanie  ?nu  tata'alanga, 
from  evils;  mwaanie  maenga,  from 
death;  e  pdine  mwaanie,  bigger  than  he; 
maleledi  oraha'a  mwaanie  ngaini,  to 
rebuke  a  man  for  sin;  ore  mwaani,  to  be 
left  out.     Wango  hani,  Epi  deni. 

mwa'asine  n.,  brethren;  a  mwa'asine,  the 
brother;  mu  mwa'asine,  the  brethren;  ro 
mwa'asina,  U.,  two  sisters-in-law.   'asi  2. 

mwada,  mwa'amwada  S..  mwadamwada  U.  1. 
to  beat  out  seeds,  to  thresh;  'uri  mwada, 
to  tramp  out  seeds. 
mwadamwada'i  U.,  tr. 

mwada  2.  U.,  to  lift. 

mwadamwadamu  v.  i.,  to  masticate,  to  grind 
the  teeth  (of  pig). 

mwadau,  mwamwadau  to  be  easy,  possible, 
soft,  pliable;  ana  ke  ola  mwamwadau,  if 
possible;  mu  le'ii  e  mwadau,  places  easy 
to  traverse. 
mwadausi  tr.,  to  be  easy  for  any  one. 
ha'amwadausi.  e  ka'a  mwadausieu  ni  lae, 
not  easy  for  me  to  go.    Wango  mwadau. 


mwadi  (na)  the  old  yam  from  which  the  new 
has  grown;  mwadi  ni  uhi.  mwadine,  its 
old  yam. 

mwado  U.,  ground,  soil,  'u'umwado.  i  mwado, 
on  the  ground;  mwado  huu,  the  earth; 
uruuru  mwado,  anklet  of  shell  money, 
lit.,  gather  dirt;  mwado  mwakita'a,  mud; 
wahawaha  ni  mwado,  dust;  mwado  warn, 
red  earth.  Florida  meto;  Espiritu 
Santo  metu,  dirty;  Mota  maeto;  San 
Cristoval  mato,  ground.     M.  L.,  p.  57. 

mwadola  adj.,  covered  with  earth,  dirty. 

Mwado 'a  a  village  on  the  west  side  of  Ulawa; 
Su'u  i  Teluhia,  its  boat  harbor;  'Ei'ei,  its 
spring. 

mwae  1.  S.,  n.,  person,  fellow,  man;  demon- 
strative na  may  be  added;  ta'a  6  may  be 
used  in  conjunction;  mwaena,  hey,  you! 
mu  mwaena,  you  men!  a  mwaena.  So- 
and-so,  such  a  one;  me'i  mwae,  tnwei 
fnwaena,  mwaena,  mu  mwae,  all  used  in 
exclamations;  mwae  ta'a,  poor  fellow; 
mxi  mwae  ta'a,  poor  chaps;  poo  ke  ne'i 
lalamoa  ko  'olisic  'olo  a  mwaena,  the  pig 
is  the  victim  in  place  of  the  man. 
Nggao,  Ysabel  mac;  Bugotu  mae,  mas- 
culine article. 

mw'ae,   mwa'emwa'e   2.   to  be  willing,  to  be 
diligent,  to  assent,  to  rejoice,     ha'itnwa- 
'ela'i,    ilenimwa'e.     mwa'e    haahi,    said 
of   those  who  clap   their  hands  as  an 
accompaniment  to  dances;  kire  mwa'e 
tolea,  they  consented  to  carry  it. 
mwa'emwa'enga  v.  n.,  willingness. 
mwa'esi  tr.,  to  assent  to. 
mwa'esilana  gerund.     Wango  mwae. 

mwaelo  used  with  numeral  ro;  ro  mwaelo  ana, 
his  two  wives. 

mwa'elu  adj.,  crooked,  bent.     Wango  mwaeru. 

mwa'emwa'eta  (na,  ni)  n.,  rejoicing;  ke  sulu 
i  mwa'emwa'ctani,  sing  for  joy  over. 

mwaera  adj.,  prolific,  abundant,  increasing. 

mwaero,  mwaeroero  adj.,  soft,  pliable. 

mwahi  to  be  crooked,  bent. 

mwahiohio  adj.,  swayed,  bent  by  the  wind. 
hiohio. 

mwai  1.  U.,  plural  article:  when  used  before  a 
vowel  or  h,  mwa  is  used;  in  certain  words 
the  vowels  coalesce,  e.  g.,  mwauhi,  yams. 
Used  of  reciprocal  relationship;  Wango 
mwani;  Lau  mwai. 

mwai  2.  U.,  mwei  S.,  used  with  adj.  tata'ala 
or  la'a  to  express  an  endearing  or  com- 
miserative sense. 

mwa'i  3.  n.,  a  hand-bag,  a  bag  slung  over  the 
shoulder,  haa  i  mwe'i,  earnest  money, 
money  given  as  earnest  for  the  buying 
of  a  wife;  mwela  ni  mwe'i,  a  bought 
child;  hd'u  mwe'i,  to  plait  a  bag.  4.  the 
fiber  used  in  weaving  a  mwd'i.  5.  v.  i., 
to  be  rich,  to  have  bags  of  money; 
muini  e  mwd'i,  the  rich. 

mwaidi  n.,  cockroach;  the  small  indigenous 
variety,  the  larger  imported  one. 

mwaihana  n.,  used  with  numeral  ro;  ro  mwai- 
hana,  two  brothers-in-law. 


MV/ANE 


mwaihei  U.,  interrogative  plural,  who,   what 

people, 
mwaiki  v.  n.,  to  stand  on  tiptoe,  to  reach  out  to. 
mwa'ile  cycas  (Cycas  circinalis).     Mota  mwele. 
mwaimwei  S.,  to  be  small,     ha'amwditnivei'e. 

e    mwdimwci    'aela,    it    is    very    small; 

helehele  mwdimwei,  seventh  and  eighth 

days  of  the  moon;  lo'a  wdi  mweimwei, 

February. 
mwaimweiha    v.    n.,    used    with    poss.    3; 

mwdimweihaana,   when  small,   a  small 

size. 
mwaimv/eisi  tr.,  to  be  too  small  for.     Tolo 

maim  at. 
mwaka  1.  v.  i.,  to  despise;  used  with  poss.  3. 
mwakata'ini  tr.,  to  despise,  to  make  naught 

of. 
mwakata'inila-(ku)       gerund.      Wango. 

tnwagilaini. 
mwaka  2.  green,  unripe,  not  full  grown;  uhi 

mwaka,  January. 
mwakana  S.,  n.,  ground,  earth,  me'i  mwakana. 

mwakana    loho,    dust;    mwakana     wdi, 

moist  ground;  vgangai  mwakana,  dust; 

dangona   mwakana,    trees   of    the    field; 

puulie  mwakana,  to  tread  the  earth. 
mwakano  S.,   n.,  ground;  »  mwakano,  on  the 

ground;  kolune  mwakano,  the  surface  of 

the  earth;  wdi  e  lama  haahi  ue  kolune 

mwakano,   the  water  covered   still   the 

face  of  the  earth;  wdi  e  mapipi  'ohe  'oto 

lainie    kolune    mwakano,    whether    the 

water  had  receded  off  the  face  of  the 

earth, 
mwakano'a    covered    with    earth,    dirty. 

Probably   connected    with    'ana,  earth. 

Lau  gano,  Mota  tano,  earth, 
mwakatereha'ini  tr.,  to  flout,  to  put  to  scorn. 

mwakitereha'inila-(ku)  gerund, 
mwaketo  U.,  adj.,  crooked,  bent. 
mwakita'a  U.,  adj.,  clayey;  mwado  mwakita'a, 

mud. 
mwako  1.  v.  i.,  to  pierce,  to  prick. 

mwakoli  tr.;  ana  e  fnwakolie  'aeku,  the  spike 

of  the  ona  has  got  into  my  foot. 
mwakolila-(ku)   gerund. 
mwako  2.  v.  tr.,  to  set  open;  7iou  mwakoa  maa, 

I  set  a  door  open, 
mwakomwako'a  U.,  adj.,  prickly. 
mwakule   S.,   adj.,   with  no   ties,   unattached, 

bare;    follows    the    verb;    m.uini    e    i'o 

mwakule,  they  have  no  ties. 
mwakuku  adj.,  loose,  slack. 
mwala  1.  n.,  people;  nga  mwala,  a  people,  nation; 

mwala   inen,    my   people;    mwala    'itrei 

tei  ni  'ie;  mwala  ko  ku'ie,  people  mocked 

him. 
Mwala  2.   Malaita;  called  also  in  Lau  Mala  and 

in  Tolo  Mara, 
mwalamwala'a  adj.,  ashamed. 
mwali   to  foregather  at  a  harbor  waiting   to 

embark.     Viti  melo. 
mwalo    1.   n.,  a  sunken   rock,    a  reef;    mwalo 

suhu  kao,  a  rock  that  pierces  the  bottom. 

Mota  mwalo. 
mwalo  2.  maalimwalo.  a  platform,  a  staging. 
mwamwadilita  U.,  adj.,  without  blemish. 


mwamwadolfcta  i'o  mwamwadolela,  patient. 

mwamwakaula'a  adj.,  of  medium  lightness 
cf.  tnwamwate. 

mwamwaki  S.,   wantonly;   horo  mwawwaki,  to 
kill  wantonly. 
mwamwakinge  v.  n.,  wantonness. 

mwamwako'a  S.,  adj.,  prickly,  diin;;o  mwa- 
mwako'a. 

mwamwanoto  adj.,  quiet. 

mwamwanga  S.,  a  few;  used  with  ini  2. 

mwamwangaini  odd  ones,   some  here  and 
there. 

mwamwasu  U.,  wala'anga  mwamuasu,  up- 
braiding words. 

mwamwasu'i  S.,  partic,  of  none  etTect,  in  vain; 
kire  ko  mwamwasu'i  eni  hungunge,  they 
become  unfruitful. 

mwamwate  S.,  to  be  of  light  weight,  ha'amwa- 
mwalc'a.  Viti  mamada,  light;  N'iue 
tnama. 

mwamwatekola  n.,  dust,  flue,  rubbish. 

mwana  1.  v.  i.,  to  cover,  to  feign,  to  pretend. 
mwana  haahi,  to  make  pretence, 
mwananga   v.    n.,    mwananga   kaahilana,  a 

cloaking, 
mwanamwana    n.,    a    covering,   hatchway 
closure,  deck. 

mwana  2.  S.,  used  to  express  the  numerals 
above  ten  {pe'i  2);  used  also  with  units 
to  express  the  tens,  mana  U.,  awala 
mwana  'enite  'oto,  how  many  more  than 
ten;  awala  mwana  rue,  ten  and  two, 
twelve;  iotola  mwana  hai,  440.  Viti 
jnani. 

mwanamwana'a  adj.,  decorated. 

mwane  1.  n.,  a  male,  man,  boy;  added  to  proper 
names  and  to  certain  other  words  to 
denote  sex  distinction,  nga  nnuane,  a 
man;  mu  mwane,  the  males;  mwane,  mu 
mwane,  ro  mwane,  all  used  as  exclama- 
tions; mwa7ie  poo,  mwane  'iisu,  barrow 
pig,  dog;  a  mwane  kenlurion,  the  cen- 
turion; mwane  ineu,  my  dear  fellow; 
mwane  ana  a  ola,  such-and-sucii  a  fellow; 
mwane  ana  a  Uqe,  the  man  called  Uqe; 
matna'u  ni  mwane,  a  fearful  lot  of  men, 
beyond  count;  hota  ni  mwane,  all  the 
boys  who  are  eligible  for  ha'amalaohu; 
He  mwane,  ini  mwane,  male;  mwane 
kurekure,  a  witch  doctor;  haka  hide 
mwane,  a  vessel  in  the  labor  trade; 
mwane  niaa'i  ineu,  my  dear  fellow;  tiri 
qa'une  nge  mwane,  I  mean  that  the  head 
is  the  male;  sdu  mwane,  to  commit 
murder;  sda  mwanenga,  murder.  2. 
used  to  denote  sex.  ola  mwane,  male; 
mwane  kdule,  male  frigate-bird;  e  lai 
mwane  diana,  fine,  beautiful.  3.  belong- 
ing to  males,  holy,  ola  ni  mwane;  nume 
ni  mwane,  church;  kara  ni  mwane, 
yam  pudding  (hinanga)  used  in  sacri- 
fices. Gilbert  Islands  v:ane,  Floritia 
mane,  Malay  mon,  omani,  manesh. 

mwane  4.  adv.,  lest,  mwane  da  va  kolu 
mae,  lest  we  die;  mwane  e  'tie,  why 
not;  mwane  'o  ro' urohuW inie  ngaralakti, 
hold  not  thy  peace  at  my  tears;  mwane 


MWANE 


66 


mwane  4  (continued). 

'o  opaopaa  Li'oa  mwaani'emi,  take  not 

the  Spirit  from  us. 
mwanemwane  1.  male  (of  trees),  not  producing 

fruit;  dango  mwanemwane,  a  staminate 

tree.     2.  (ku)  n.,  testicles. 
Mwanipue  a  village  at  Sa'a,  site  of  the  present 

mission  school. 
mwanole   garfish,   caught  by  trolling  from  a 

rock  or  by  means  of  a  line  at  the  tail  of 

a  kite  {sa'o  ni  'aholo)  flown  from  a  canoe, 

the  bait  is  spiderweb  {lawa)  or  a  piece 

of  tow.     lilie'i,  to  cast  for  garfish;  hike, 

ten  garfish.     Fagani  mwarore. 
mwanganga     U.t     a     few.     mwamwanga,     S. 

mwanganga  ni  He,  a  few  persons. 
mwaohe  adj.,  pliable. 
mwaolaola  adj.,  shaky,  ricketj-,  not  firm. 

mwaolaolanga  n.,  sedition, 
mwaopu  n.,  egg;  hoi  mwaopn  7ii  kue,  the  egg 

of  a  fowl, 
mwaora  to  run  (of  vines). 
mwaoroha'i    partic,    bent,    bowed,    stooping. 

San  Cristoval  mwaoro. 
Mwarada  a  village  on  the  west  coast  of  Ulawa; 

Waingile,  a  rocky  promontory  there, 
mwaramwara  (na)  n.,  a  stalk,  a  twig, 
mwarau  adj.,  thin, 
mware'a  U.  1.  adj.,  in  good  health;  sapeku  e 

qd'i    mware'a,    I    am    not    feeling    well. 

2.  lively,   animated   (of  speech);  mwai 

keni    e'asi    qale   wala'awala'a    mware'a, 

what  drawling  women, 
mwarete  U.,  hou  mwaretei  qd'u,  skull. 
mwari  to  be  ailing,  noko  mweri.     ha'amwdri. 

mwdri  taha,  U.,  to  recover  from  wounds. 
mwarita'a  U.,  a  wounded  person.     Wango 

mari,  a  wound. 
mwarite  coir,  fiber  of  coconut;  mwarilei  niu, 

sennit;  mwaritei  haa,  a  strand  of  shell 

money. 
mwarohi  U.,  adj.,  easy,  possible;  'ura  mwarohi, 

to  be  possible, 
mwasi,   mwa'imwesi  S.,    mwasimwasi  U.,   to 

laugh;   mwdsi   mwaani,    to   laugh   at  a 

person, 
mwasinge  v.  n.   laughter, 
mwasie'ini  to  laugh  at,  to  laugh  to  scorn. 

ha'amwdsie'ini. 
mwasuhurete  U.,  a  chink,  a  crack,     mwa  1. 

suhu. 
mwau  S.,  n.,  a  boy,  lad,  nga  mwau;  kele  mwau 

ineu,  my  little  boy;   mwaune,  vocative, 

boy. 
mwaumwe  S.,  to  be  naked, 
mwaumweule  adj.,  foolish. 
mwa'uu  adj.,  disorderly;  sae  mwa'uu,  mutiny, 

rebellion. 
mwei  S.,  mwai  U.,  used  with  tata'ala  or  ta'a  in 

commiseration,   of  males,   as  kei  is  of 

women;  mwei  ta'a  alaha,  dear  lord  (of 

persons  in  authority). 
mwela  n.,  child,  nga  m.wela,  mu  mwela;  ta'ata'a 

mwela  moute'i,  an  only  child;  mwela  ni 

mwe'i,  a  bought  child;  tnwela  ni  nume, 

a  son  of  the  house;  hdu  ni  mwela  awara, 
day  after  full  moon;  kele  mwela,  little 


mwela  (continued). 

child;  nga  mwela  e  lodo,  a  child  is  con- 
ceived, 'omu  ke  mala  mwela  kdu,  become 
as  children;  e  mduri  ana  mwela,  to  be 
delivered  of  a  child;  tangoni  mwela,  all 
the  children. 
mwemwela    plural.     Motu    mero,  memero. 

mweta  foliage  plant  (Coleus  sp.). 

mwidimwidi  S.,  mudimudi  U.,  to  drip. 

mwine  to  be  thin  (of  liquids). 

mwirimwiri  skirts,  fringes. 

mwisi  (ku)  U.,  musi  S.,  finger-nail,  toe-nail. 
Savo  karakara  bisi,  Mota  pisui,  fingers; 
Nifilole  bisi  nime. 

mwomwona  to  be  rich,  fat  (of  viands).  Samoa 
momona. 

Mwouta  a  village  on  the  east  coast  of  Ulawa; 
its  landing-place  is  Su'u  i  Die'i. 

N 

In  certain  words  there  is  a  change  of  n  to  I; 

Sa'a  danume  middle,  Ulawa  daluma.     cf.  also 

ni  and  li  genitives.     M.  L.,  p.  212. 

na  1.  copulative,  and;  with  uri  thus,  na  uri  I 
mean,  that  is,  used  in  explanations. 
na  taa,  U.,  but. 

na  2.  U.,  pers.  pron.,  used  with  the  verbal 
particles  'a,  'anai.  na'a  lae  'oto,  I  am 
going;  na'a  nai  lae,  I  shall  go;  nge  na'asi 
tduri,  then  said  I. 

na  3.  used  in  numeration,  mii  poo  na,  mu  menu 
na,  pigs,  birds,  e  hane  niu  na,  he 
climbed  for  coconuts  and  — ;  e  hali  pua 
7ia,  he  broke  off  areca  nuts  and  — .  Used 
in  phrases:  ha'ike  na,  oh  no;  su'uri  na, 
not  so;  ko  urine  ta'ane  na,  even  suppos- 
ing it  were  so. 

na  4.  verbal  suffix;  ara  arand,  qao  qaona,  hi'u 
hi'une,  lo'u  lo'une. 

na  5.  demonstrative  suffix,  follows  noun  and 
adverb,  that,  there,  these,  those;  may 
be  joined  to  preceding  word;  mwaend, 
you  fellow;  a  porottd,  the  person;  urine, 
urinena,  thus;  ile'une,  there,  that  place; 
viiiini  liuta'ana  a  mwane  'ie  e  qao'i  ne, 
more  than  those  which  this  man  has 
done;  ana  e  tahanie  maaniu  ne,  in  that 
he  opened  your  eyes;  nge  ke  'ue  kd'u  ne, 
how  then  will  it  be.  At  times  equiva- 
lent to  the  and  that,  me'i  aland,  the 
thing;  hdnue  mdine,  this  land;  talai 
heiine,  row  of  teeth.     Malay  ne. 

na  6.  pron.,  sing.  3  suffixed  to  noun,  equivalent 
of  genitive,  nime,  hand;  nimand,  his 
hand;  i  reune  wdi,  by  the  side  of  the 
water;  he'une  salo,  stars  of  heaven; 
dangond  mwakana,  trees  of  the  field; 
hirune  'ahe,  troublesome  waves.  Mela- 
nesia na  passim,  Malay  nga,  Malagasy 
ny. 

na  7.  noun  ending,  used  with  nouns  which 
express  relationship;  ro  hd'i  malahune, 
ro  hd'i  nikana,  mu  he'i  maamana.  Maori 
na  (laina),  Niue  na  (hoana),  Viti  na 
(tamana). 

na  8.  stem  of  nakue,  nana,  etc.,  with  a  general 


67 


NE 


nil  8  (continued). 

notion  of  appertaining,  possessing.  Mota 

no  1,  Florida  ni. 
na'a,  na'asi  U.,  pers.  pron.,  and  verbal  particle 

with    illative;    I,    I    am,    I    thereupon. 

muni  ne'e  loosia,  la'ane  na'a  'unua,  if  I 

see  him  I  shall  tell  it;  nge  na'asi  liitiri, 

then  said  I. 
naanaa  for  ngaangaa,  eat,  used  to  children, 
nilda,  niida'elu  poss.   2,   plural  3;  for  them. 

nd  8. 
nahi  U.,  knife  (English). 
naho  surf,  wave;  hdi  naho,  a  wave;  e  ro  hdi  naho, 

two  waves;  mu  he'i  naho,  waves;  awaa- 

walana  naho,  roar  of  surf;  papa  naho,  a 

breaching     fish;     qa'awa'ali     naho,     a 

breaker. 
naho 'a  S.,  nahola  U.,  rough  sea  on  the  coast; 

e  nahola,  it  is  rough.     Mota  nawo,  sa 

water. 
nahunehu  U.,  'at  nehunehu,  a  rod,  a  stick. 
na'i    verbal    suffix    used    intransitively,     loo 

loona'i.     Mota  nag. 
naihi  S.,  nahi  U.,  knife  (English). 
na'ini  transitive  suffix,  loo  loona'ini. 
naka,  naka'elu  poss.  2,  dual  1,  incl.:  for  us 

two.     7id  8. 
nakara'i  poss.  2,  dual  1,  incl.:  for  us  two.    nd  8. 
nako  V.  i.,  to  strengthen;  nakolana  mu  suuraa'i, 

strengthening  the  corners. 
naku,  nakuneku  U.,  to  sit;  the  form  neku  is 

employed  without  a  preceding  i  or  u. 

neku  kd'u,  be  seated.     Used  in  Sa'a  to 

signify  session  at  a  feast;  mwala  ko  neku, 

the  people  seat  themselve.-'. 
nakuma  v.  n.,  U.,  na'unekume  S.,  a  seat. 
nakusi     determ.,     to    occupy     a     place. 

ha'andkusi.     Wango  nagu. 
naku'e  S.,  naku'a  U.,  poss.  2,  sing.  1,  for  me. 
naku'i  poss.  2,  sing.  1,  for  me  (of  many  things), 
nala'i,  nanala'i  U.,  to  rub  in  the  hands,  as 

leaves.     Wango  worn. 
namami  poss.  2,  plural  1,  excl.:  for  us. 
name  U.,  v.  i.,  to  taste;  name  ahonga,  to  taste 

and  try. 
nameli     tr.     Mota    nam,     Wango    namo, 

Florida  nami,  Sulu  anam,  Malay  nanam- 

iivei,  Maori  tami,  to  smack  lips. 
namelu  poss.  2,  plural  1,  excl.:  for  us. 
namere'i  poss.  2,  dual  1,  excl.:  for  us  two. 
namo  1.  a  landlocked  harbor;  i  Qd'una  Namo, 

North  Cape,  Ulawa. 
Namo   2.    an    inlet   of    Port   Adam,    Malaita. 

Samoa    namo,    a    place   in    the    lagoon 

abounding  in  fish;  Gilbert  Islands  namo, 

a  harbor;  Mota  namwo,  lagoon  in  reef. 
Namona  i  Su'u  Namona,  i  Natnona.  the  open- 
ing in  the  reef  at  Sa'a. 
namu'e  S.,  namu'a  U.,  poss.  2,  sing.  2:  for  thee, 
namu'i  as  ndmu'e,  but  used  of  many  things 

for  one  person, 
nana  poss.  2.  sing.  3:  for  him,  her,  it;  e  lio  hunie 

huni  hu'e  nana,  he  chose  her  for  his  wife, 
nanako  S.,  to  be  sticky,  to  stick,     lalako,  U. 
nanakumae    to    be    gentle,    harmless,     ndku, 

maenolo. 
nanama  to  be  powerful. 


nanama  (continued). 

nanamanga  v.  n.,  power;  nanamanga 
para'itana  mu  li'oa,  power  over  the 
spirits. 
nanama'ini  tr.,  to  put  power  into,  ha'ana- 
nama'ini.  Mota  mana,  an  invisible 
spiritual  force  or  influence;  Polynesian 
mana  id.  (metathetic). 

nanamu  to  travel  fast,  to  be  swift. 

nanau  to  be  taught,  to  be  wise,  ha'ananau. 
sae  nanau,  S.,  to  be  wise  of  heart;  sae 
nanaunge,  wisdom.  Florida  naunau, 
Wango  ha'ananaua,  Mota  vatanau,  to 
learn,  to  teach. 
nanauhi  v.  tr.,  to  approach,  draw  up  to, 
draw  near,  go  up  to.     Wango  nanau. 

nani  poss.  2,  plural  3,  neuter:  for  them  (things); 
nani  rato,  for  the  elders;  dsu  nani 
'inoni,  of  work  not  faithfully  done. 

nanoa'i  U.,  to  accustom;  ha'ananoa'i. 

nano'i  U.,  to  produce  pain  (of  an  arrow,  omo). 

nanga  1.  the  barb  of  an  arrow.  2.  the  fin  of  a 
fish,  hoi  nanga. 

nangaii'a  U.,  flashing  (of  lightning). 

nangaliro'a  U.,  flashing  (of  lightning),  cf. 
rangariro'a,  S. 

nao  1.  numeral,  a  hundred  (of  yams),  nga  nao 
ni  nhi. 

na'o,  na'ona'o  (ku)  2.  front,  before;  »  na'oku 
(face,  time)  before  me;  na'ona  dara, 
forehead;  na'ona  i'ola,  the  bow  of  a 
canoe;  hapa  ni  na'o,  first  quarter  of  the 
moon;  holai  na'o,  in  former  times;  lo'o 
na'o,  front  teeth;  mu  na'ona'o  i  mae, 
armies;  e  korasie  mu  na'ona'o  i  mae,  he 
put  to  flight  the  ranks  of  the  enemy. 

na'o  3.  v.  i.,  to  precede,  to  guide,  to  lead. 
e  hola'i  na'o  'olo  wau,  he  went  away 
first;  a  ola  e  na'oku  'oto.  So-and-so 
preceded  me;  'o  na'o  naka'elu,  lead  us 
on;  na'o  talana,  lead  the  way  for  him. 

na'o  4.  with  locative  i;  ina'o  of  old,  'oto  ina'o, 
holai  na'o,  formerly. 

na'o  5.  to  approach,  to  steer,  to  go  toward. 
na'o  susuhire,  draw  toward  them;  na'o 
susu  ana,  to  make  straight  on  toward; 
na'o  uri,  steer  this  way;  na'o  hao,  keep 
her  away, 
na'ohi  tr.,  to  steer. 
na'ohila-(ku)  gerund. 

na'ola'ini  tr.,  to  do  first,  ha'ana'ola'ini. 
Mota  nagoi,  face;  Santa  Cruz  nao, 
mouth. 

na'o  (ku)  6.  a  widow,  na'ona  a  ola,  So-and- 
so's  widow.     Mota  naro. 

na'onga  a  deserted  place,  i  na'onga,  at  the 
old  garden  or  deserted  village;  le'unge 
e  na'onga  'oto,  the  place  is  quite  deserted. 

nate  a  worm  found  in  the  beach  sand  and  used 
as  bait  for  sea  bream  {i'e  ni  sane); 
hdi  nate,  to  scratch  up  sand  looking  for 
the  worms. 

nau  1.  U..  pers.  pron.,  sing.  1.     I. 

nau  2.  a  fruit  tree.     Mota  nalu. 

na'unekume  S.,  n.,  a  seat.     ndku. 

ne  1.  pers.  pron.,  sing.  1.  I.  used  with  verbal 
particles  ke,  ke'i,  S.,  and  'e,  U.,  with  all 


IfE 


68 


ne  1  (continued). 

of  which  it  coalesces  as  with  illative  si. 
kau,  neke  leesie,  please  let  me  see  it; 
nekesi  lae  si'iri,  I  shall  go  to-day;  7tge 
nesi  teuri,  thereupon  I  said;  ne'e  lae 
ka'u,  let  me  go;  nan  'unua  uri  wuni 
ne'e  mae  'oto,  I  thought  I  was  done  for; 
na  nesi  ne'i  'atnamu  'oto,  and  I  shall  be 
your  father;  noko  he'i  lae  lo'u  mei  na 
nesi  leesi'o  lo'ii,  I  shall  come  back  and 
shall  see  thee  again. 

ne  2.  demonstrative,     cf.  na  4. 

ne'e  1.  S..  contraction  for  ne'ie;  ne'e  kii'u,  wait 
a  bit,  stay. 

ne'e  2.  U.,  pers.  pron.,  sing  1,  ne  and  verbal 
particle  'e.  e  qale  ola  ne'e  adea,  I  saw 
nothing;  muni  ne'e  loosia,  ta'ane  na'a 
'unua,  if  I  see  him  I  shall  tell  it. 

ne'ene'e  U..  v.,  to  whine. 

ne'i,  ne'ine'i  S.  1.  v.  tr.,  to  place,  to  put,  to 
appoint,  ne'i  koni,  to  lay  up  in  store, 
to  make  provision;  ne'i  siwe,  to  appoint 
a  sum  as  blood  money.  2.  to  become, 
to  turn  into,  to  be:  ko  ne'ie  'oto  i'oe,  if 
it  be  thou;  poo  ko  ne'i  lalamoa  ko  'olisie 
'oto  a  mivaena,  the  pig  becomes  the 
victim  instead  of  the  person;  na  nesi  ne'i 
'amamu  'oto,  and  I  shall  be  your  father. 

ne'isae  S.,  v.  i.,  to  think,  to  call  to  remem- 
brance; ne'isae,  exclamation,  like  any- 
thing! ne'isae  'asi,  to  forgive;  ne'isae 
lete,  to  be  set  in  intention;  ne'isae 
moute'i,  to  determine,  to  dare;  ne'isae 
su'ete'e,  to  be  anxious  about;  ne'isae 
t'dlihe,  to  reach  in  thought;  ne'isae 
to'ole'e,  to  be  anxious, 
ne'isaenga  v.  n.,  thought,  remembrance. 

nekesi  cf.  ne  1. 

nemo  S.,  nimo  U.  1.  n.,  rain,     ha'anemo.     hoi 
neino,   a  rain  squall;    nemo   raaraa,   S. 
nimo  raaraa,  U.,  drizzling  rain,  sim  and 
rain.     2.  v.  i.,  to  rain,  nenemo. 
nemosi  tr.,  to  rain  upon. 

nena  S.,  demonstrative;  a  ola  nena,  that  thing. 

nengenenge'a  adj.,  glistening  white. 

nerenere  n.,  a  sea-bird,  the  kittiwake;  nerenere 
ni  iqe,  kittiwake  of  the  lagoon. 

nesi  pers.  pron,  sing.  1 ;  ne  with  illative  si. 

ni  1.  genitive,  of;  sape  ni  'inotii,  men's  bodies; 
rata  ni  mwane,  elderly  male.  (a) 
expressive  of  purpose:  ini  ni  ha'aurilana 
'oto,  a  person  to  be  saved ;  hire  hala  ni  lae, 
they  attempted  to  go;  e  dau  ni  ere,  he 
made  to  speak;  e  ka'a  mwadausieu  ni 
lae,  not  easy  for  me  to  go;  lala  ni  liu, 
path  to  travel;  hinou  ni  'a'a'o,  hook  for 
fishing;  walo  ni  pa'asahu,  a  hook  for 
pa'asahu.  (b)  expressive  of  condition, 
lae  ni  ramo,  go  in  might;  ngiiu  ni  pole, 
eat  to  satiety;  lae  ni  oraha'a,  to  go  very 
fast;  lae  'oto  ni  mae,  go  like  everything. 
May  be  rendered  by  with  or  in:  rongo 
ni  'elinge,  to  hear  with  the  ear;  ere  ni  sae, 
to  say  with  the  heart;  na  ni  leesie 
palonga  aku,  and  saw  (in  seeing)  my 
works,  (c)  used  after  tala'ae,  U., 
iala'ae  ni  lae,  begin  to  go.     (d)  added 


ni  1  (continued). 

to  verbal  suffix,  a'ini,  ha'ini,  etc.,  transi- 
tive force.  Mota  nia,  with;  Florida  ni; 
Fate  ni.     cf.  genitive  li  1. 

ni  2.  interrogative,  (a)  used  to  call  attention, 
ni  mwaena?  I  say,  you.  (b)  in  the 
sense  of  is  that  so.  (c)  added  for 
emphasis  to  atei,  itei,  S.,  ihei,  U.,  nga 
taa,  S.,  7iga  taha,  U.:  nga  taa  ni  'oko 
ngarase,  what  are  you  crying  for; 
mwala  'urei  tei  ni  'ie,  whence  are  these 
people?     Viti  li. 

ni  3.  demonstrative  attached  for  emphasis  to 
nouns  in  Ulawa,  to  pronouns,  adverbs 
to  si'iri  and  uri  2;  may  be  reduplicated. 
ngcni  nou  lae,  and  so  I  went;  7igaini  ni 
eni  jisie,  ngaini  ni  eni  hohoro,  one  to  his 
merchandise,  another  to  his  trading; 
a  poroni.  So-and-so;  a  laani.  So-and-so; 
ingc'i  ni  e  qaoa,  he  it  is  who  did  it; 
ienini,  this.     Wango  ni. 

ni  4.  a  detachable  prefix  to  pronouns,  nihou, 
niparo,  niivau,  U.  niu  'inoni  mangoi 
ola  mola  ni  kire,  S.,  men  are  but  breath; 
'oto  lo'ohuu  ni  ngeena,  it  is  so  in  truth; 
'omu  ka'a  to'oto'olamiu  ike  ni  'omu,  ye 
are  not  your  own.  Santa  Cruz  ni  (ia 
ninge) ;  Florida  ni. 

ni  5.  suff.  pron.,  plural  3,  neut.     i  lalani. 

ni  6.  verbal  suffix,     sdii  sduni. 

ni'e  n.,  a  sleeping-mat  made  of  coconut  leaf; 
ha'u  ni'e,  to  plait  a  coconut  leaf  into  a 
sleeping-mat. 

Nielaha'u  Cape  Zelee,  the  southeast  cape  of 
Malaita;  'ahe  hirune  i  Nielaha'u,  its 
tide-rip. 

nihisi  v.  tr.,  to  refrain;  noko  nihisie  nimekii,  I 
refrain  my  hand. 
nihisila-(ku)  gerund. 

niho  (ku)  n.,  tooth,  cf.  alo'i,  'amwada, 
'angiirii.  nihoi  i'e,  porpoise-teeth  cur- 
rency; ngdngddi  niho,  to  gnash  the 
teeth;  e  rdpu  ngurusie  nihona,  knocked 
his  teeth  out;  e  sisie  nihona,  he  bared 
his  teeth  in  a  grin. 

nihou  U.,  demonstrative  pron.,  this,  here: 
pronounced  sometimes  niheu. 

ni'i,  ni'ini'i  1.  v.  tr.,  to  give,  to  present,  with 
poss.  1,  to  feed  ni'i  ana.  ni'i  nime 
haahi,  to  lay  hands  on;  ni'i  'ae  la'o  i'ola, 
to  board  a  canoe;  ni'i  suu,  ni'i  toto,  to 
make  a  free  gift. 
ni'inge  v.  n.,  a  gift,  a  giving,  grace  (late 

use);  e  honu  eni  ni'inge,  full  of  grace. 
ni'ila-(ku)  gerund,     mdni  ni'ilana  sakanga 
e  yndni  lae,  the  complete  giving  of  power 
is  completely  given. 

ni'i  2.  ni'i  losi,  to  squeeze,  to  wring  out  water. 

nike  (ku)  mother,  aunt;  for  the  vocative  leilei 
is  generally  used;  with  the  personal 
article  a  nike  mother,  i.  e.,  our  mother 
in  speaking  of  a  particular  person. 
nikei  ola,  S.,  nikeni  ola,  U.,  a  big  thing, 
lit.,  a  mother  thing;  nikand,  S.,  nikend, 
U.,  ro  hd'i  nikand,  ro  hd'i  nikend,  wife 
and  child,  mother  and  child;  ro  hd'i 
nikand  ineu,  my  wife  and  child. 


69 


NORU 


nima  U.,  nume  S.,  house;  nima  indu,  my  house; 
maana  nima,  U.,  door;  ouleni  nima,  a 
row  of  houses;  sa'osa'oha'i'a  ani  nima, 
zii  upper  story  in  a  house,  a  doubled 
house. 

nime,  ninime  S.,  nima,  nimanima  U.  (ku),  1. 
hand,  arm,  foreleg  ot  animals,  nimana 
mil  'inoni,  men's  hands  (collective 
sense),  nimanimada  nga  mwa  'inoni,  U.; 
talarta  mu  ninimci  'inoni.  talana  nimana 
mil  'inoni,  men's  handiwork;  to'o  ro 
nime,  with  just  one's  two  hands,  ».  e., 
unarmed;  e  lokunaa  nime,  lie  clenched 
the  fist;  loloma'ini  nime,  to  dip  the 
hands;  nime  i  metimeuliku,  my  left  hand; 
nihisie  nimeku,  refrain  my  hand;  ni'i 
nime  haahi,  to  lay  hands  on;  ngdungeu 
nime,  armlet;  penatana  nime,  the  palm; 
siiiisuune  nime,  elbow;  laalengasie  nime- 
mu,  open  your  hand  out  fiat;  ngdu  i 
nimana  7iga  keni,  to  live  with  a  woman, 
lit.,  to  eat  from  the  hand  of  a  woman. 

nime  S.,  nima  U.  2.  food  bowl;  nime  sarasara, 
a  large  bowl  for  feasts;  'alo  nime,  to  set 
out  bowls  of  food  at  a  feast;  kolune  nime, 
the  outside  of  a  bowl;  la'ona  nime,  in  the 
bowl. 

nimo  U.,  nemo  S.,  rain,  lioi  nimo.     ha'animo, 
nimonimo. 
nimoli  tr.,  to  rain  on. 

nine  ha'anine,  S.,  to  accustom  oneself,  to  be 
accustomed  to. 

nini-Cna,  ni)  U.,  n.,  kernel;  ninina,  its  kernel, 
its  seed;  nini  hakis,  an  axe;  nini  uhi,  a 
yam;  nini  nana,  a  hana  tuber. 

niniho  n..  a  hornet;  ninilio  alaha,  a  large  kind 
of  hornet. 

niniko'a  adj.,  trembling,  wincing,  shivering 
from  cold  or  fright. 

ninginingi  a  small  bat. 

niparo  U.,  demonstrative  pron.,  that,  these, 
there;  follows  the  noun. 

nisi,  ninisi  v.  tr.,  to  divide,  to  be  the  boundary; 
ko  nisi  'olo  ile'u,  this  is  the  boundary; 
nisi  hw,  to  pull  taro  for  eating, 
nisite  (na)  v.  n.,  boundary,  limit;  nisilana 

liie,  high-water  mark. 
nisila-(ku)  gerund.     Florida  ngiti. 

nite  S.,  nita  U.,  ha'anile,  ha'anila  how  often; 
'enite,  'enitana,  how  many.  Mota  visa, 
Motu  nida,  Florida  ngiha,  Niue  fiha. 

niu  the  coconut  palm  (Cocos  nucifera),  its  nut 
nga  hoi  niu;  nga  7tiu,  niu  niu,  coconut 
trees;  niu  tangalau,  a  heavily  laden 
coconut  tree;  'ahe  i  niu  tangalau,  a  tide- 
rip  between  Ulawa  and  Sa'a;  niu  test, 
a  variety  of  nut  with  thin  skin;  niu 
iveru,  a  short-stemmed  coconut  with 
yellowish  fronds  and  reddish-skinned 
fruit;  hduheui  i  niu,  U.,  nga  hdihei  niu, 
S.,  a  log  of  co.:onut  wood;  nga  koru- 
korui  niu,  a  chip  of  coconut  meat;  niu 
kokolu,  a  hard-fleshed  coconut;  luluhui 
niu,  a  coconut  frond;  mudii  niu,  midrib 
of  the  leaflet;  mwaritei  niu,  sennit;  pota 
niu,  to  crack  a  nut;  qela  ni  niu,  1,000 
nuts;  sdukai  niu,  to  grate  coconut;  udi 


niu  (continued). 

m  niu,  100,000  nuts;  niu  madeli,  a  fully 
ripe  nut;  'oni,  coconut  milk;  teu,  half 
coconut  shell;  opu,  the  early  stage  of  the 
nut  when  the  shell  has  not  hardened; 
poupou,  a  green  nut;  hoi  qito,  a  sprouting 
nut;  Tdui  helu,  10,000  nuts;  suhuli,  to 
make  an  opening  in  a  green  nut;  taho 
ta'a,  to  put  a  nut  with  the  corpse  in  a 
canoe;  uhu,  to  lui.-ik  nuts;  'ulu'ulu,  a 
dry  nut;  'unu,  the  flower  spathe.  Poly- 
nesian niu. 

niu  ni  taoha  a  palm  (Nipa  fruticans). 

niu'e,  niuniu'e  adj.,  tasting  of  coconuts  (aa 
swine   flesh) . 

niule  adj.,  possessing  coconuts;  hdnue  e  niuU, 
a  place  abounding  in  coconuts. 

niui  (ku)  n.,  a  nest.     Florida  -niku,  Mota  nigiu. 

niweu  U.,  demonstrative  pron.,  that,  those, 
there;  follows  the  noun. 

no  S.,  pers.  pron.,  sing.  1,  used  with  verbal 
particle  ko.     noko  I. 

no'i,  no'ino'i  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  put,  to  place;  no'i 

kd'u,  wait  a  while,  stay.     2.  to  become, 

to  be;  e  no'i  'aela  'oto,  it  has  become  no 

good. 

no'ila-(ku)  gerund.     Viti  noi,  to  dwell  in. 

no'iteu  U.,  v.  i.,  to  delay,     cf.  ddu  2. 

noko  1.  v.  i.,  to  guard,  to  keep  watch  over, 
noko  haahi. 
nokomi  tr.  1.  to  guard.     2.  U.,  to  turn  away, 
to  avert;  nokomi  maa,  to  turn  the  eyes 
away. 

noko  2.  cf.  no. 

noma  S.,  n.,  a  spear,  generic  term;  noma  ddiedi, 
a  spear  with  grass  plaiting  on  it. 

none  V.  i.,  to  place  the  face  against,  to  kiss,  to 
sniff;  nono  wdsu,  to  smell. 
nononga  v.  n. 
nono'i  S.,  nonohi  U.,  tr. 
nono'ila-    S.,    nonohila-    U.    (ku)    gerund. 
Florida  nonginongi. 

nono  'asi  n.,  gnat,  sandfly. 

nono  isuli  n.,  a  strong-smelling  herb. 

nonola  yesterday,  the  locative  t  may  precede. 
nonola  nga  rodo,  the  night  before  last; 
nonola  wau,  the  day  before  yesterday; 
nonola  'oto  wau,  three  days  ago;  e  la 
'otoi  'aela  mwaani  nonola,  it  is  worse 
than  yesterday.  Mota  nora,  Florida 
nola- 

nonoro'a  S.,  adj  ,  red.     noro. 

nonowasu  v.  i.,  to  snitT  at,  to  smell;  used  with 
suffixed  pronouns  ku,  mu,  nd;  e  nono- 
u'ds'.ine,  he  smelled  him. 
nonowasuli  tr.,  to  track  by  smelling,  to  get 
the  scent  of. 

nonganonga  U. ,  n.,  nonganonga  tano,  a  ripple. 

no'one  adv.,  even,  also:  follows  the  word 
qualified;  to'olamu  no'one  ada,  thine 
they  are. 

noonoo  (na,  ni)  n.,  tips  of  shoots  of  creeoers. 

nooruhaana  »  nooruhaana,  relying  on,  because 
of.     cf.  noru. 

noro,  nonoro'a  to  be  red. 

noru,  no'unoru  S.,  norunoru  U.,  v.  i.,  to  trust, 
to  rely;  noru  dile,  S.,  to  be  disappointed 


NORU 


70 


noru,  no'unoru  (continued). 

of  one's  hope;  noru  hono,  to  be  wind- 
bound  (of  a  sailing  party), 
noruhe'ini  tr. 
noruhe'i  v.  i.,  noii  sa'a  noruhe'i  pele,  I  shall 

not  be  confounded. 
i  noruha  v.  n.,  used  with  poss.  3;  relying  on, 
because  of.     Florida  noru. 
noruto'o  used  with  poss.  3;  to  trust,  to  rely 
on.     to'o. 
noruto'onga  trust. 
noto  V.   i.,   to  cease,  to  desist,  to  be  quiet. 
mwarnwanoto,   maenoto.     nolo   nguu,  to 
cease    speaking;    noto    'arawa,    to    die 
suddenly;  noto  'arawanga,  sudden  death. 
VVango  ngoto. 
nou  S.,  pers.  pron.,  sing.  1;  used  as  subject  of 

verb. 
nue,  nunue  v.  i.,  to  anoint;  rumu  nue  maa,  eye 

ointment, 
nuenuala    adj.,    glistening,    brilliant;    mwaa 

nuenuala,  a  glistening  snake. 
nuku,  nunuku  v.  i.,  to  kink,  to  have  corruga- 
tions in,  to  shrivel,  wrinkle;  mikti  dara, 
to  wrinkle  the  forehead;  nuku  maa,  to 
wrinkle,  to  screw  up,  the  face, 
nukumi  tr.,  to  crease,  to  fold. 
nukunukula  U.,  adj.,  shriveled  up. 
nume  S.,  nima  U.,  n.,  a  house;  nume  ineu,  my 
house;  nume  ni  mwane,  church;  »  numaa 
ola,   at  So-and-so's  house;   nume  qala, 
name  of  a  cicada   (empty  house),   its 
presence  taken  as  a  sign  of  death,  a  bad 
omen;    hai    nume,    in    the   house;   huli 
nume,  house  site,   plat;    huui    lume,  a 
collection    of    houses,    village;    iduidu 
nume,  to  go  from  house  to  house,  to 
gad  about;  koluhaana  nume,   roof  of  a 
house;  maai  nume,  door;  mara  nume,  in 
front  of  the  house,   courtyard;   mat  i 
nume,  within  the  house;  i  mamalutana 
nume,  on  the  veranda;  mwela  ni  nume, 
child  of  the  house;  pipisine  nume,  eaves 
of    the    house;    mu    poopootana    nume, 
foundations  of  the  house;  pungui  nume, 
a  group  of  houses;  riridine  nume,  eaves 
of  the  house;  ko  ru'u  i  nume,  goes  back 
into  the  house;  ko  sisilihie  mu  nume, 
goes  into  houses;  talaa  nume,  a  besom; 
to'utohu  nume,  to  build  a  house;  poo  ni 
nume,  domesticated  pig;  wai  nume,  in 
the  house.     Mota  imwa,  San  Cristoval 
rumwa,  Wedau  numa,   Malay  luma. 
nunu  1.  V.   i.,   to  quake   (of   ground),   to   be 
unstable,  loose  (of  a  post).     2.  v.,  and 
n.,  earthquake,  nga  nunu  e  nunu,  there 
was     an     earthquake.     Wango     nunu, 
Maori  ruru. 
nunu  3.  (ku)  n.,  shadow  (of  persons),  reflection, 
likeness,  life,  soul.     M.  A.,  p.  252;  ko 
tola   'dliho'i   ana   nunune,   recovers   its 
soul;  talo  nunu,  to  photograph;  nunu 
e  tola,  there  was  an  earthquake. 
i  nunuha  used  with  poss.  3;  because  of, 
owing  to.     Florida  nunu,  Malo  nunu, 
Bougainville  Straits  notio,  Wango  nunu. 


nunu  4.  nunuli,  to  sting  (of  the  stinging  trees) 

nunula'o  and  apune  iva'i. 
nunu'e    pulu    nunu'e,    to'o    nunu'e,    spotted, 

specked.     Wango  nunu,  dust. 
nunuhe'i  S.,  v.  i.,  nunuhe'i  qe'u,  to  enter,  to 

be  entangled  in. 
nunula'o  n.,  stinging-nettle  tree,  with   large 

leaves,  often  planted  as  a  fence,    nunu  4. 
nunuli  to  sting,     nunu  4. 
nunulu  v.  i.,  to  wither  (of  trees,  etc.).     Mota 

nun,  to  shed  leaves. 
nunurete  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  feeble,  to  tremble  from 

weakness,     nunu  1,  rele.     2.  n.,  trem- 
bling, fear, 
nusi  U..  lahanga  awa  nusi,  a  measure,  just  on 

a  fathom, 
nuto  1.  n.,  a  squid,  caught  by  spearing  with 

a  hair  comb  (arapa)  fastened  on  a  rod. 
nuto,  nutonuto  2.  'o'o  nuto,  to  bow  the  head. 

KG 

The  palatal  nasal  and  has  the  sound  of  wg 
in  singer. 

nga  1.  article,  demonstrative,  a,  the;  used  in 
the  singular  number  only;  in  Sa'a  as  a 
rule  nga  is  not  used  of  parts  of  the  body, 
but  in  Ulawa  it  is  freely  used;  nouns  in 
the  singular  may  be  used  without  nga 
except  when  there  is  a  sense  of  any  or  a. 
nga  taa,  S.,  nga  taha,  U.,  what;  ngaini, 
S.,  ngaile,  U.,  some  one;  nga'eta,  S., 
ngaite,  U.,  another,  a  certain;  ngaihei, 
U.,  who. 

nga  2.  noun  ending,  added  to  verbs,  adjectives 
and  other  nouns:  mae,  to  die;  maenga, 
death;  mamaela'a,  weak;  mamaela'anga, 
weakness;  ngdngddi  niho,  to  gnash  the 
teeth;  ngdngddi  nihonga,  gnashing  of 
the  teeth.     Maori  nga. 

ngaa,  ngaangaa  v.  tr.,  to  eat;  naanaa,  used  to 
children;  e  ngaa  'oto,  did  he  eat  it;  melu 
ka'a  ola  ni  ngaa,  we  have  no  food,  lit., 
thing  of  eating. 

ngaangaa  1.  v.  i.,  to  spread  (of  ulcers).  2.  v.  i., 
to  crack  with  a  loud  noise  (of  trees  about 
to  fall). 

ngadi  1.  n.,  flint;  me'i  ngedi,  S.,  mdsingedi,  U., 
a  flint;  hdu  ngedi,  flint  rock;  kilu  ni 
ngedi,  a  hole  in  which  flints  are  found. 
2.  an  axe;  ngddi  weuive,  a  stone  axe 
(grandfather's  axe).  Motu  nadi,  stone; 
Florida  nagi.  Guppy  "Solomon  Is- 
lands," p.  77. 

ngSdi,  nga'ingedi  3.  v.  i.,  to  be  firm;  suesuelaa 
e  ngddi,  the  foundation  is  firm;  hele 
nga'ingedi,  to  hold  fast.     Wango  nasi. 

ngado  (na,  ni)  i  ngadona  'aena,  before  him,  at 
his  feet. 

ngae  (ku)  1.  suli  qeri  ngae,  suit  qeri  i  ngaena, 
backbone.  2.  lio  i  ngaei  maa,  S.,  lio 
i  ngaena  maa,  U.,  to  look  askance  at, 
to  envy;  lio  i  ngae  maanga,  n.,  envy. 

nga'eta  S.,  ngaite  U.,  some,  one,  another,  a; 
'eta.  He.  nga'eta  po'o  ni  nime,  the  other 
hand;  ana  nga'eta  dinge,  on  another  day. 

nga'i  verb  suffix  used  intransitively:  usu  ttsu- 
nge'i.     ngd'ini. 


71 


NGE 


ngaihei  U.,  interrog.  pron.,  who:  plural 
mwaihei.  ngaihei  e  lae  mdi,  who  came 
here;  kira  mwaihei,  who  are  they. 

ngaile  U.,  article,  one.  a:  ile.  la' ana  ngaile. 
every  one;  'etana  ngaile,  the  first;  wala'a 
iva'ewa'e  ana  ngaile,  to  speak  excessively 
to  one. 

ngaini  1.  S.,  article,  one,  a.  ta'eta'ena  ngaini, 
every  one;  iteilana  ngaini  ka'a  lae  mdi. 
no  one  came;  'etana  ngaini,  the  first 
one;  e  ka'a  iteilana  ngaini,  there  is  not 
any  one;  ngaini  sa'a  liti  ha'ahireru'e, 
none  shall  pass  in  front  of  them  (and 
overcome  them);  maleledi  oraha'a 
mwaanie  ngaini,  to  rebuke  a  man  for  sin. 

nga'ini  2.  verb  suffix  of  transitive  force,  hit 
hiinge'ini.     Mota  ngai. 

ng^'ingedi  to  be  strong,  to  be  firm,  ngddi, 
ha'angd'ingedi. 

ngaite  U.,  article;  ngaile  holoholo,  a  different 
thing;  ngaite  laa,  another  person. 

ngali  1.  n.,  canarium  nut;  ngdli  maa,  smoked 
nuts  stowed  in  a  tangi.  cf.  repo.  ngdli 
maelo,  the  month  of  August,  the  time 
of  ripe  nuts;  karoa  ngdli,  to  pick  the 
nuts;  kokopa,  buttress  flanges  on  the 
lower  trunk  of  the  tree;  koukou,  kernel 
of  the  nut;  qa'akora,  the  outer  skin  of 
the  nut.     Mota  ngai,  Solomons  ngali. 

ngali,  ngalingeli  U.  2.  v.  tr.,  to  shake,  to  dis- 
turb, to  move  about  restlessly,  to  move 
one's  position. 

ngSlute  S.,  mu  ngelulei  ola,  all  and  sundry 
things. 

nganite  S.,  ngenita  U.,  time  when,  with  loca- 
tive »,  inganite,  when,  at  what  time; 
used  of  future  or  past  time.  Florida 
ngiha,  Mota  ngaisa,  Lau  angita. 

□ganga  a  crumb,  used  with  genitive  ».  S.,  ni, 
U.;  crumbs,  shavings,  dust,  small  pieces. 
mu  ngangai  ngeulaa,  crumbs  of  food; 
ngangai  mwakana,   dust  of   the  earth; 
mwai  ngangani  'ei,  chips  of  wood. 
ngangadi,   ngangangadi   v.    tr.,   to   creak,   to 
grate,  to  grind  the  teeth;  ngangadi  niho, 
to  grind  the  teeth,  ngangadi  nihonga, 
V.  n. 
ngangau  to  spread  (of  ulcers),  to  blaze  (of  fire) ; 
maa  ngangau,  blear-eyed  from  smoke  of 
cooking  fires. 
ngara,  ngarangara  v.  i.,  to  cry,  to  buzz,  of 
mosquito;  ngara  'i'iU'i,   to  cry  aloud; 
ngara   li'eli'a'a,    to   give    an    uncertain 
note;  ngara  loulou,   to  resound;  ngara 
mango  ta'a,  U.,  to  sob;  ngara  tahela'i 
ana,   to  call  upon  him  with  weeping; 
ngara   uloulo,   to  weep  bitterly;   ngara 
welewele'a,  to  have  a  solid  sound, 
ngaraha  U.,  v.  n.,  cry. 
ngaranga  v.  n.,  weeping. 
ngarata  v.  n.,  sound;  ngaratai  'ehuri,  sound 

of  the  conch, 
ngarasi  tr.,  to  cry  for,  to  cry  on  account  of. 
ngarala-(ku)     gerund,     mwane    'o    ro'uro- 
hutc'itiie  ngara'aku,  hold  not  thy  peace 


ngarala  (continued). 

at  my  tears.     Florida  ngaraha;  to  cry 
out. 
ngilsi  1.  V.  i.,  to   be   tough    (of   food).    Lau 

ngasi,  hard, 
ngasi,  nga'ingesi  S.,  ngilsingilsi  U.  2.  to  chew, 
to  roll  about  in  the  mouth.  Wango 
ngasi. 
ngMu,  ngSungeu  1.  v.  tr.,  to  eat;  with  poss.  3, 
ngdu  ana,  to  eat  of;  ngdu  hikena,  ngdu 
hikeni,  to  partake  of;  ngdu  i  nimana 
nga  keni,  to  hve  with  a  woman,  lit.,  to 
eat  from  the  hand  of  a  woman;  ngdu 
tapaika,  to  smoke  tobacco;  ngdu  maa'i, 
a  sacrificial  feast,  ngdu  maa'inge;  ngdu 
'inoninge,  cannibalism;  ngdu  ni  pole, 
to  eat  to  satiety;  ngdu  qc'u  suu,  to  gorge, 
lit.,  to  eat  till  the  head  drops;  ngdu 
saedami,  to  eat  to  repletion;  ngdu 
teketeke,  nga  mala  eke,  to  drop  crumbs 
while  eating;  'o'a  sare  ngdu  ihei,  what 
will  you  eat;  ta'ata'a  maai  ngeu,  one 
meal;  maai,  S.  (maani,  U.),  ngeu,  the 
evening  star,  lit.,  meal  watcher;  kire 
ngdu  maetana  a  ola,  they  eat  the  death 
feast  of  So-and-so;  maelona  e  ngdu 
diana,  when  ripe  it  eats  well;  'o  ngdu 
mingana,  did  you  eat  of  it;  olo  ngdu,  to 
fast,  to  abstain  from  food, 
ngiluhe  S.,  v.  n.,  a  feast;  ngauha,  U.,  a  feast, 

food. 
ngjluhe-(ku)  gerund.;  ngduhana e pdipeine, 
he  is  a  great  eater;  ngduhana  e  'aela,  he 
overeats;   suPungie   ngduhana,   to  offer 
food  to. 
ngaolaa  v.   n.,   food,   things  to  eat,   me'i 
ngeulaa,     mu     ngeulaa;     mu     ngangai 
ngeulaa,  crumbs  of  food, 
ngaunge  v.  n.,  an  eating,  a  meal;  taataa 

maai  ngeunge,  one  meal. 

ngaula-(ku)   gerund.;  ngdulana  e  diana,  it 

is   good   to   eat.     Wango   ngau;   Mota 

ngau,  to  chew;  Motu  gauai,  Maori  ngau. 

ngiu  2.  vocative,  used  of  children  of  each  sex: 

ngdu,  lad!    'alai  ngeu,  U.,  you  boys;  ro 

ngdu,  you  two  children. 

ngaungeu  nime  armlet  made  of  haa,  huresoso, 

malo. 
nge  pers.  pron.,  sing.  3,  he,  that;  1.  used  before 
proper  names:  ngea  Awao,  that  man 
Awao.  'oto  ngea  Dora  esi  teuri,  then  said 
Dora.  2.  a  shortened  form  of  inge'ie: 
'amamu  nge  ilei,  where  is  that  father  of 
yours;  ngeatei,  ngea  ola,  whom  do  you 
mean?  3.  added  for  explanation:  uri 
qa'une  nge  mwane,  I  mean  that  the  male 
is  the  head;  so  nge,  well  then;  nge.  nga 
laa  ni.  heyl  what's  that?  ngeni  'oto 
ngeena,  yes,  that's  it;  ngeni  nou  lae, 
that  is  why,  thereupon,  I  went;  vtwai 
keni  ana  wala'anga  ngeni,  what  women 
for  talking;  ohe  nge  e  urine,  possibly 
that  is  so;  nge  laenga  kesi  lae,  then  the 
journey  will  take  place;  nge  ke  'ue  kd'u 
nc,  how  then  will  it  be? 


NGEENA 


72 


ngeena  demonstrative  pron.,  that:  follows  noun 
or  pronoun;  inge'i  ngeena,  that  is  he;  vga 
ola  taa  ngeena,  what  is  that  thing?  ngc. 
nge'i  pers.  pron.,  sing.  3,  he.  she,  it:  a  shortened 
form  of  nge'ie;  used  as  subject  followed 
by  e.  nge'i  'oto  e  'iinue,  it  was  he  who 
said  it;  nge'i  nou  ka'a  lae,  that  is  why 
I  did  not  go. 
nge'ie  S.,  nge'ia  U.,  pers.  pron.,  sing.  3,  he,  she, 
it:  used  as  subject  followed  by  e;  three 
forms  of  the  pronoun  may  be  used 
together  for  emphasis:  inge'ie  nge'i 
e  'iinue,  it  was  he  who  said  it;  in  Sa'a 
the  final  e  becomes  a  before  the  personal 
article  a  and  a  long  vowel  results,  nge'ie 
ni,  that  is  it;  nge'ia  i  Arona,  nge'ia 
'ulehu,  it  is  at  Arona,  the  'ulehu,  I  mean; 
nge'ia  a  ola  e  'imtia,  he,  So-and-so,  said 
it.  Mota  neia. 
ngeitei  S.  1.  interrog.  pron.,  what:  used  pre- 
ceding noun,  ngeitei  'inoni,  what  man? 
ngeitei  li'oa,  what  spirit?  2.  ngeitei  uc 
ena,  that  is  just  it,  just  so. 
ngengede-(na,m)  ngengedena,  its  end.     Wango 

ngeyigede. 
ngeni  cf.  nge. 
ngenita  U.,   used  with  locative  /  as  nganilc, 

q.  V. 
ngerengereta  adj.,  of  a  checked  pattern. 
ngero  v.  i.,  to  chew,  to  nibble  (of  rats.  etc.). 
ngero'i  tr.,  'asuhe  e  ngero' ie,  the  rat  gnawed 
it. 
ngeu  cf.  ngau. 

ngi^verb  sufifLx  of  transitive  force,  raa  raangt. 
ngidu  (ku)  U.  1.  the  lip  (of  persons);  by 
metonymy  in  Sa'a  the  mouth,  tero 
ngidu,  to  pout  the  lip.  2.  ngidu  'upu, 
ngingidii.  'upu,  to  hate;  ngidu  'upiinge. 
hatred.  Mota  ngusui,  Florida  gidu, 
Y'ltx  ngnsu,  Motu  udu,  Sa'a  ngudu. 
ngingidu'e    the    native    bee.    honey.     Florida 

midua. 
ngingite  'ala  ngingile,  to  clench  the  teeth, 
ngisu,  ngingisu  S.,  ngisungisu  U.,  to  spit;  hoi 
ngisu,  spittle,  lungs;  'otto  ngisu,  to  water 
at  the  mouth;  sae  ngisu,  the  lungs. 
ngisunge  v.  n.,  spitting, 
ngisuhi  tr.,  to  spit,  to  spit  on;  e  ngisuhie 

'apu,  he  spat  blood, 
ngisuhe'ini  tr..  to  spit  on.     M.  L..  p.  91, 
Maisin  kasufe. 
ngisu  'ate  U-.  to  be  thirsty;  ngisu  'atenga,  n., 

thirst, 
ngo'a  adj..  blunt,  with  the  point  broken  off; 
nga  ngoongoo  ni  sale  e  ngo'a,  the  tip  of 
the  cloud  was  broken  off. 
ngoli  v.  tr..  to  destroy  a  man's  property  after 
his     death,     huni     ngolie     to'oto'olana. 
M.  A.,  p.  263.     su'e  ngoli,  to  fall  back- 
ward and  break  the  neck. 
ngoHte  V.   n.,   a  destruction  of  property: 

wrongly  spelt  in  M.  L..  p.  263. 
ngo!ila-Cku)  gerund.     Florida  boli. 
ngoongoo    (na,  ni)  U..  end:   with   locative   i; 
ngoongoona,    its    end,    skirts;    paro    i 
ngoongoo,  at  the  edge;  i  ngoongoo  ana 


ngoongoo  (continued). 

walumalau,    S.,    at    the    world's    end; 
i  ngoongoo  ana   Kahua,  Cape  Keibeck. 
San  Cristoval.     Fagani  ngo,  lip;  Santa 
Cruz  ngo,  nose.     cf.  M.  L.,  p.  84. 
ngoongoodo  S..  end;  ngoongoodo  ana  maholo, 

end  of  the  time, 
ngora  (na,  ni)  1.  a  point  of  land,  a  cape,    ngo- 
rana    hdnue.     Mota    ngaregi,   point   of 
land.      2.  Hp.  cf.  ngidu;  ddu  (tdu,  U.) 
ngora  'upu,   to  hate,   lit.,   swollen  lip; 
ngora  'upunge,  n.,  hatred. 
ngora,  ngongora  3.  to  snore,  to  grunt,  snort; 
ngora    i    hie    (ku),    to    growl.     Mota 
ngora,  Maori  ngorongoro. 
ngorangora  1.  an  isthmus,  a  cape. 
Ngorangora  2.  the  village  at  the  northeast  end 
of  Ulawa;   Wdi  ni   Tehulu,  its  lagoon; 
'Ele  Maosi,  its  landing  place. 
ngori  V.  tr..  to  quench;  ngoria  Li'oa,  to  quench 

the  Spirit. 
Ngorieru  an  'akalo  ni  malawa  armed  with  gar- 
fish, seen  off  Qa'ulo.     M.  A.,  p.  259. 
ngudu  S..  lip.     cf.  ngidu,  U.     Ho  qeru  ngudu. 
to   grudge,    to   hate;    qa'u   ngudxi,    the 
blackfish.     Mota    ngusui,     lip;     Poly- 
nesian ihu.     M.  L..  p.  85. 
ngulu  to  resound;  mwangulungulu,  resounding, 
nguru,    ngunguru,    ngungunguru    S.,    nguru- 
nguruU.,  1.  togrowlorroar  (of  animals), 
to  mumble  or  groan  (of  persons). 
nguruhi  tr.,  to  growl  at  (of  dogs).     Maori 
nguru,  to  grunt;  Bugotu  nguunguru,  to 
growl;  Niue  ngungulu. 
nguru  2.  pola  nguru,  U..  name  of  a  month, 
September, 
ngurusi  v.  tr..  to  knock  out  some  (of  things 
in  a  row),     'anguru.     e  rapu  ngurusie 
nihona,  knocked  his  teeth  out.  said  of 
a  young  child  when  the  teeth  of  his 
elder  brother  fall  out. 
nguu  V.  i..  to  answer,  to  make  response, 
nguuhi  tr. 

nguuhila-(ku)      gerund.     Wango     nguuhi; 
Samoa  ngu,  to  growl. 


'0  1.  exclamation  of  dissent. 

'0  2.  pers.  pron..  sing.  2.  thou;  used  as  subject 
of  verb  either  by  itself  or  following  i'oe; 
suffixed  to  verbs  and  prepositions  as 
object.     Florida  o. 

oa  1.  V.  i.,  to  share  in.  to  be  fulfilled,  to  come 
to  pass,  to  be  fitting,  to  suit,  to  be 
suited  to,  to  permeate,  ha'aoa'i,  hd'ioa. 
melii  oa  'oto  ana,  we  share  in  it;  mu 
maholo  e  oa  'olo,  the  time  is  fulfilled; 
e  oa  ana,  it  is  suited  to  it;  tolo  oaoa,  to 
permeate. 
oala-(ku)  opposite  to,  over  against,  corre- 
sponding to.  concerning;  papanguru- 
nguru  oalana,  mutterings  concerning. 
oaoanga  v.  n..  a  sharing  in;  mdni  oaoanga 

hd'iliu,  equality. 
oangi  tr.,  to  follow  suit,     hd'ioangi. 


73 


OKU 


oa  (ku)  2.  a  pair,  fellow;  oaku,  my  fellow,  my 
mate;  oa  ni  ola,  a  pair  of  things;  oa  ni 
pull,  two  cowries.     Samoa  oa,  a  pair. 

Oa  3.  the  two  islands  at  the  south  end  of  San 
Cristoval;  Oa  Raha.  Santa  Anna,  C)a 
Riki,  Santa  Catalina.  Spelt  wrongly 
as  Owa. 

o'a  4.  a  tree,  the  bark  used  for  purposes  of 
staining;  the  red  juice  is  extracted  by 
pounding  and  squeezing  and  is  mi.xed 
with  charcoal. 
o'a'i  V.  tr..  to  stain  with  o'a.  Samoa  'o'a. 
Bischoffia  javanica;  'o'a'i,  to  dye  with 
its  stain. 

'o'a  5.  to  settle  (of  birds),  to  squat  on  the 
haunches.  Samoa  to'a,  to  settle;  Mota 
toga,  Niue  tokai. 

'o'a  6.  U.,  'o  2,  thou,  'a  7,  verbal  particle. 

'O'au  an  island  in  the  Mara  Masiki  Channel. 

oda'i  u'd'i  oda'i,  to  quarrel. 

odo,  odoodo  1.  to  be  straight,  to  go  forward. 
ha'aodo,  hd'iodo'i.  lamwaodo.  e  odo  'oto 
ta'au,  he  went  straight  on;  7nanu  odo, 
to  be  level,  upright;  e  odo,  that's  right 
(Mwouta,  U.,  use);  sulu  odoodo,  to  go 
straight. 
odoodonga  v.  n.,  straightness,  uprightness, 
odoha  V.  n.,  used  with  poss.  3.  odohaana 
me'i  'ano  mola,  in  good  ground;  mu 
odohaana  wala.  words  to  the  point; 
odohaana  mu  ola,  correct,  exact  things; 
odohaana  i  ola,  opposite  to,  off,  such- 
and-such  a  place;  'uri  odohaana  tala, 
walk  straight  along  the  path. 

odo  (na,  ni)  2.  odona  maa.  a  gate  opening 
directly  opposite  a  person;  nga  odoni 
kana,  a  song  sung  straight  through;  nga 
odoni  heti,  a  row  of  stones;  odoni  sae, 
moral  uprightness. 

odo'i  V.  tr.,  to  meet,  to  come  across,  lio  odo'i, 
to  find;  hule  odo'i,  to  arrive  and  find; 
tnha  odo'i,  to  come  upon. 

odonga  U.,  dmi  odonga,  to  make  trial  of. 

odota'i    partic,     just,    fair,    righteous;    sulu 
odota'i,  to  act  righteously. 
odota'inge  v.  n.,  justice,  righteousness. 

o'e,  o'eo'e  U.,  to  be  crazy,  delirious. 

'oha  betel  leaf  (Piper  betle),  both  leaves  and 
catkins  are  eaten,  'oha  ni  me'esti 
(ma'usii,  moii,  U.),  a  wild  variety;  piite 
ni  'oha,  a  packet  of  betel  leaf;  sili  'oha, 
to  get  betel  from  the  bush;  hu'usi,  to 
pluck  leaves  of  betel. 

oha'i  to  be  capsized;  7nclH  oha'i  'oto,  we  are 
capsized. 
oha'ini  tr.,  to  cause  to  capsize. 

ohe  1.  V.  tr.,  to  drive  away. 

'ohe  2.  adv.,  perhaps,  possibly,  most  likely; 
or  it  may  be  used  at  the  beginning  of  a 
sentence,  of  supposititious  cases,  iva 
'ohe,  unless;  so  'ohe,  perhaps;  wdi  e 
mapipi  'ohe  'oto  la'inic  kolune  mu-akano, 
whether  the  water  had  receded  oft'  the 
face  of  the  earth. 

ohera  v.  i.,  to  race,  to  compete,     ha'iohe. 

•ohi  1.  (au)  v.,  after,  for,  to  fetch;  lae  kd'u 
'ohi'i,  please  go  bring  it;  tdti  'ohi,  U..  to 


'ohi  1  (continued). 

seek;  tola  'ohi,  to  search  for.     Florida 

gohi,  varigohi;  Maori  ohia,  to  long  after. 

'ohi  2.  U.,  hd'i'ohi,  to  be  doubtful  about,  to  ask 

questions. 
'ohi'a  U.,  adv.,  perhaps,  most  likely, 
ohisi  perineal  bandage,  T  bandage  of  pandanus 

leaf  worn  by  men. 
oho  v.  i.,  to  fight,  to  strive  with,  to  attempt. 
ohoa   hurunge,    to   race;    oJioa   mao,    to 
practice  the  dance, 
ohotaa  v.  n.,  a  battle. 

ohongi  tr.,  to  make  trial  of,  to  practice. 
hd'iohonginge.  VVango  ohongi;  Niue 
oho,  to  rush  at. 
ohonga  U.,  n.,  lae  ohonga,  to  go  tentatively; 
mala  ohonga,  to  tempt;  mala  ohonganga 
(double  n.  ending),  temptation,  trial; 
mdmi  ohonga  ana,  taste  and  try  it. 
ohu  1.  V.  i.,  to  be  boiling,  to  boil  (of  water). 

ha'aohu. 
ohu  2.  various,  different;  e  ohu  'oto  adarti'i.  U., 
there  is  a  difference  between  the  two; 
ohu  'inoni  ohu  sae,  many  men  of  many 
minds, 
ohusi  V.  tr.,  to  differentiate,  to  distribute. 
ha'aohusi.     Florida    or  it    ni    tinoni,    a 
crowd  of  men. 
'ohu  3.  n.,  sugar  cane;  'ohu  nunu.     M.  A.,  p. 
21.     Mota  tou,  Motu  tohu,  Florida  tovu. 
oi  1.  exclamation,  aha. 

'o'i  2.  V.  tr.,  to  break,     ma'o'i.     'o'i  ri'iri'i,  to 

break  in  pieces;  hele  'o'i'o'i,  to  break; 

tale'i  'o'i'o'i,  to  trouble  oneself. 

'o'i'o'i  n.,  mu  'o'i'o'i,  sections  of  roof  for 

thatching.     Florida  goli. 

oka  1.  U..  to  eat  areca  nut  along  with  betel 

leaves  and  lime, 
oka  2.  to  eat  food  raw.     Viti  ndroka,  Niue  ota, 

Maori  ota. 
oka,  okaoka  3.  v.  i.,  to  destroy  gardens  (of 

pigs);  poo  okaoka,  a  mischievous  pig. 
oke,  okeoke  1.  v.  tr.,  to  draw,  to  drag, 
okenga  v.  n. 
okeni  tr.     Wango  oge. 
'oke  2.  'o,  thou;  ke,  verbal  particle,     cf.  'o'a  6. 
oko  1.  a  band,  a  creeper  used  in  tying, 
oko  2.  a  tree  (Acacia  sp.) ;  tarasi  oko,  a  cuckoo, 
oko,  okooko  3.  black  (earth)  pigment  used  for 
the  teeth,  the  idea  being  that  the  gums 
are  hardened  thereby, 
'oko  4.  'o,  thou:  A:o,  verbal  particle,  cf.  'oke,  'o'a  6. 
okooko  a  basket,  a  receptacle;  okooko  ni  pasa, 

basket  containing  bonito  hooks, 
okolu  okolu  te7va,  eleventh  and  twelfth  day  of 

the  moon, 
oku  1.  n.,  a  marine  annelid,  palolo  (Eunice 
viridis,  the  epitokal  segments),  oku  e 
hirusia  maana,  said  of  the  migraton," 
plover,  cf.  kdrikeri'ala.  2.  names  of 
certain  months:  oku  lade,  September; 
oku  viwaa,  October;  oku  denu,  Novem- 
ber; oku  peine,  December.  3.  summer 
time,  as  distinguished  from  aau,  winter. 
4.  names  of  certain  days  of  the  month: 
qd'i  oku,  toohuungci  oku.  S.,  second  and 
third  davs  after  full  moon. 


OKU 


74 


oku  5.  the  end-walls  of  the  house;  okii  i  maa, 
■wall  in  front;  oku  i  furi,  wall  behind; 
haulioku,  end  purlins  of  the  house. 
oku  6.  swollen  stomach. 

ola  n.,  thing;  the  noun  ending  may  be  added; 
with  the  personal  article  a  ola,  the  person 
So-and-so,  such  a  one;  ro  ola,  man  and 
wife,  and  as  vocative,  you  two  married 
folk;  in  phrase  ko  ola,  if  it  be  so.  a  ola  ko 
mae.  So-and-so  is  sick;  a  ola  ko  mae  'oto. 
So-and-so  is  dead;  a  kele  ola,  young  So- 
and-so;  komiina  a  ola,  So-and-so's  fam- 
ily; keni  ana  a  ola,  such-and-such  a 
woman;  kira  a  ola,  whom  do  you  mean; 
saai  ola,  to  know  things,  to  be  wise;  ola  a 
Elija  e  na'o  'oto  mat,  how  that  verily 
Elijah  came  before;  kele  me'i  ola,  a  little 
thing;  e  ka'a  olaike,  there  is  nothing  at 
all;  hele  ola,  to  act;  hoti  ola,  a  thing  of  a 
round  shape;  mu  ola  hu'ihti'i,  dangers, 
difficulties;  iho'oi  ola,  a  bundle;  ww 
lehui  ola,  worn-out  things;  lede  ola, 
mischievous;  noii  'ure  mdi  i  ola,  I  am 
from  such-and-such  a  place;  mangoi  ola, 
breath;  vieameatani  ola,  a  huge  thing; 
molatana  nga  ola,  innumerable  things; 
ana  ke  ola  mwamwadau,  if  possible; 
ola  ni  mwane,  a  sacred  thing;  me'i  olana, 
the  thing;  nikei  (nikcni)  ola,  a  big  thing; 
oa  fit  ola,  a  pair;  odohaana  mu  ola,  cor- 
rect, exact  things;  odohaana  i  ola,  oppo- 
site to,  off,  such-and-such  a  place;  mu 
qa'atai  ola,  shreds;  si'ohaa'i  ola,  to  be  in 
a  poor  way;  ta'ela'i  i  ola,  beginning  from ; 
mu  le'itesi  ola,  flesh;  m.u  tale'i  ola  mola, 
inferior  things,  nga  ola,  pooh !  absurd !  nga 
ola  taa,  what?  noti  ka'a  to'oana  nga  ola,  I 
have  nothing. 

olanga,  ere  ni  hedi  olanga,  to  take  an  oath; 
lauhi  olanga,  succor;  lede  olanga,  mis- 
chief; hide  olanga,  carrying  cargo;  saai 
olanga,  wisdom,  knowledge;  tari  olanga, 
riches. 
ole  V.  tr.,  to  scrape  with  a  shell,  to  get  the  skin 

off  yams,  etc. 
'oil  V.  i.,  to  return,  to  relapse,     ha'i'oli.     tnelu 
'oli    'oto,    we    have    returned;    mu    ola 
'oli'oli,  changes;  'oli  ana,  to  succeed  to 
a  thing,  to  inherit. 

'olinge  V.  n.,  return,  ha'ihe'i'olinge,  v.  n., 
bounty. 

'olisi  tr.  to  change,  to  alter;  'olisi  lo'okaa, 
to  exchange  money,  to  buy;  poo  ke  ne'i 
lalamoa  ko  'olisie  'oto  a  mwaena,  the  pig 
is  the  victim  in  place  of  the  man. 

'olisila-(ku)  gerund. 

'olite-(ku)  n.,  used  as  preposition,  in  place 
of.  noko  lae  'olitana,  I  come  in  his 
place. 

'oli'olite  v.  n.,  heir;  a  'oli'olite,  the  heir. 
Wango  ori,  Mota  kel. 
'olie'i  V.  i.,  to  return,  to  turn  back,  to  go  home; 
kira'elu  'a  ta'e  ha'i  'olie'i,  they  embark 
on  their  return  journey. 

'olie'inga  U.,  v.  n.,  return, 
olo,  oloolo  1.  V.  i.,  to  swim. 

oloolonga  v.  n.,  swimming. 


olo,  oloolo  1  (continued). 

olohi  tr.,  to  swim  for  and  get. 
oloha'ini  to  swim  with,  holding.     Florida 
olo,  Wango  oro. 

olo  2.  V.  i.,  olo  ngdu,  to  abstain  from  food;  olo 
ngaunge,  fasting;  olo  ana  hi' olo,  to  be 
faint  from  fasting;  olo  manini,  to  be  of 
orderly  behavior. 

'olo,  'olo'olo  3.  V.  tr.,  to  cut  the  ends  off;  'olo 
qd'u,  to  cut  hair;  'olo  kou'e  ihune,  to  cut 
the  hair  off  the  whole  head. 
'olo'i  tr.,  to  sever  the  shoots  of;  nga  'oha 
na  kira  'olo'ia  'oto,  the  betel  plants  from 
which  they  cut  off  the  shoots.  Mota 
goro  2. 

Oloha  a  village  on  the  west  coast  of  Little 
Malaita,  its  landing-place  Ha'au;  the 
language  of  Oloha  is  Tolo,  the  speech 
of  the  people  of  the  Mara  Masiki  Chan- 
nel; it  was  known  to  Bishop  Patteson, 
who  made  a  small  sketch  of  its  grammar. 

'olo'olo  v.  i.,  to  reel,  to  stagger;  dsu  'olo'olo,  to 
be  loose,  unstable. 
'olo'oloa'i  V.  i.,  to  stagger  about.      Mota 
gologolo,  Malagasy  horohoro. 

oloolonga  U.,  n.,  a  company,  a  party. 

olopa'i  U.,  n.,  a  yam  with  fruit  on  the  vine. 

'olu  1.  numeral,  three;  'olune,  third,  third  time; 
ha'a'olu,  three  times.  Mota  tol,  Poly- 
nesian tolu. 

'olu  2.  S.,  dialectic  for  ti7olu. 

omi  V.  tr.,  to  suck,  to  smoke  tobacco. 

ominge    v.   n.,    sucking,    smoking.     Maori 
momi. 

omo  n.,  arrow;  nanga,  the  barb  of  an  arrow; 
to'onga'i  omo,  to  draw  an  arrow. 

'omolu  pers.  pron.,  plural  2:  you;  used  as  sub- 
ject, or  attached  to  verb  or  preposition 
as  object;  more  restricted  in  meaning 
than  'omtt. 

'omu  pers.  pron.,  plural  2:  you;  used  as  sub- 
ject, or  attached  to  verb  or  preposition 
as  object;  used  following  the  longer 
form  i'omu, 

'omoro,  'omoro'i,  'omoru'e  S.,  pers.  pron.. 
dual  2;  used  as  subject,  or  attached  to 
verb  or  preposition  as  object. 

ona  1.  fresh-water  limpets  with  poisonous 
spines;  ona  e  mivakolieu,  the  shellfish 
spiked  my  foot. 

ona  2.  a  deep-sea  fish. 

onanala  adj.,  lumpy  (of  tdumanga,  taro  pud- 
ding), rough  (of  a  road). 

one  n.,  sand,  beach;  one  mamae,  fine  sand;  one 
piruu,  S.,  one  qiriiu,  U.,  black  sand,  such 
as  is  found  on  the  beaches  at  San  Cris- 
toval;  apau  one,  the  lee  side  of  an  island; 
'asi  dodo  hule  i  one,  deep  water  right 
in  to  shore;  awalosi  i  one,  the  north- 
northeast  wind;  idutnia  one,  U.,  count- 
less; maraau  ro  one,  the  east-northeast 
wind;  kira  'asi  usuli  one,  they  went 
then  along  the  beach;  e  urihana  nga 
one,  like  the  sands,  of  countless  num- 
bers; 'u'ui  one,  a  grain  of  sand, 
one'a  S.,  onela  U-,  adj.,  sandy.  Mota  one, 
Maori  one. 


75 


ORE 


'on!  1.  to  remain,  to  be  settled;  'otii  huu  'oto 
ana,  dwell  therein  forever. 

•oni  2.  V.  i.,  to  repeat,  to  go  over  again  (of 
words);  ko  'oni  ana  ta'ata'a  me'i  ivala 
ngeena,  repeated  the  same  words.  San 
Cristoval  onioni,  a  tale. 

'oni  3.  coconut  milk  strained  from  the  scraped 
riesh  of  the  nut  mixed  with  a  little  water, 
extracted  by  squeezing  and  used  in  the 
cooking  of  various  vegetables;  when 
without  coconut  milk  the  yam  mash  is 
known  as  helehele.  tola,  to  curdle,  pit 
'oni,   to  make  coconut  milk;   'oni  ivei 

(a)  coconut  milk  boiled  thin  into  oil; 

(b)  a  dish  of  pounded  yam  mash  with 
coconut  oil. 

'onime'i  1.  v.  i.,  to  pack,  to  stow;  'onime'i  koni, 
to  store  up.     2.  partic,  well,  cleverly; 
hele  'onime'i,  to  do  cleverly. 
'ooime'ini   tr.,    hele   'onime'inie,    to   do   it 
well;  to  stow.     Wango  orimaini. 
'oni'oni  adv.,  always. 

'ooioninge  v.  n.,  a  tale  oft  repeated,  folklore. 
'onisae  S.,  v.  i.,  to  change  the  mind,  to  repent. 

'onisaenga  v.  n.,  repentance, 
'oniteu  v.  i.,  to  delay, 
ono   1.  numeral,   six;  onona,  sixth,  the  sixth 

time;  ha'aono,  six  times. 
'ono,  'ono'ono  2.  v.  i.,  to  swallow,  konokono. 
'ono  ngisu,  to  water  at  the  mouth;  'ono 
pola,  to  swallow  whole;  hoi  'ono'ono,  a 
pill;  hdu  'ono'ono,  stones  to  swallow  in 
ordeal.  M.  A.,  p.  212. 
'onomi  tr. 

'onoraila-(ku)  gerund. 

'onoma'ini  tr.     Florida  sonomi,  Mota  nolo. 
to    swallow;    Maori    korokoro,    throat; 
Motu  hadonoa. 
'ono'onoma  n.,  gullet,     hahani  'ono'onoma,  a 

measure,  a  yard. 
onu  Iwlo  onu,  to  divide  and  cut  short. 

onu'e  adj.,  S.,  cut  off  short;  'o  holo  onu'e 
qongiku  hao. 
'ongo     n.,     mangrove.     Florida     tongo,     \'iti 

ndongo. 
'o'o  1.  exclamation,  of  dissent. 
'o'o  2.  n.,  a  wooden  drum;  the  inside  is  hol- 
lowed out  (kdrii)  through  a  narrow  slit 
on  the  side,  the  drum  when  played  is  set 
upon  the  stem  of  a  tree  fern  as  a  pedes- 
tal, the  drumstick  is  a  piece  of  sago- 
palm  frond,  the  part  of  the  drum  hit  is 
the  center  portion  just  above  the  open- 
ing. When  a  feast  {houla)  is  being  pre- 
pared the  drums  are  kept  in  a  house 
made  for  the  purpose.  Drumming  is 
kept  up  constantly  till  the  feast  is  over. 
Drums  are  beaten  after  a  murder,  kire 
hero,  para  ni  'o'o,  a  set  of  drums;  ri'i, 
small,  treble:  taha  'o'o,  tenor  or  middle 
size;  loli,  bass;  ikiikingi  'o'o,  sulu  'o'o,  to 
beat  the  drums.  Wango  oo,  Bugotu  koko. 
'o'o,  'o'o'o  3.  to  stay,  to  remain  behind,  to  be; 
'o'o  ni  tehinge,  to  be  in  flight.  Lau  loo, 
Nguna  toko. 
'o'o  4.  adv.,  utterly,  quite,  e  mae  'o'o,  he  is 
quite  dead;  ha'ike  'olo  'o'o,  never  at  all. 


'o'oha'ini,  'o'ohi  v.  tr.,  to  draw  near  to. 
ooho  1.  V.  i.,  to  take  down;  ooho  'asi,  to  destroy, 
to  break  up  (of  a  house);  ooho  toli,  to 
descend,  to  fall  headlong, 
ooho'i  tr.,  to  take  to  pieces  (of  a  house), 
oohosi  tr.,  to  take  down,  to  detach.     Wango 
ohosi. 
ooho  2.  V.  i.,  to  desist  from,  to  cease. 
'O'olo'u  an  island  in  Mara  Masiki  Channel, 
'o'omae  U.,  to'oni  'o'omae,  mourning  attire, 
'o'oni  U.,  V.  i.,  to  sink,     ha'a'o'oni. 
'o'onuto,  'o'onutonuto  to  incline  the  head,  to 

bow.     nuio  2. 
'o'orou  U-,  Maramara  'O'orou,  the  name  of  a 

canoe  in  a  story. 
ooru  1.  to  blow  (of  winds).     2.  n.,  the  wind. 
ooru    ko   ooru,    the    wind    blows;    ooru 
pe'ipesi,  to  blow  strong, 
ooruhi  tr.,  to  blow  on  (of  the  wind). 
'o'oru'e  S.,  adj.,  short.     U.,  poru. 
opa,  opaopa  1.  to  divide,  to  separate,  to  dis- 
tinguish, to  take  away  from,    rnaopaopa. 
susu   opa,   ornamental  ridge   covering; 
mwane    'o   opaopaa    Li'oa  mwaani'emi, 
take  not  the  Spirit  from  us;  opa  ha'iliu, 
to  be  at  variance;  opa  hiteli,  to  cut  up 
an  animal;  opa  sae,  to  be  at  variance; 
didi   opa   olanga,    discrimination,    par- 
tiality, 
opasaelaku    gerund.,    my  transgression, 
opanga  v.  n.,  division. 
opa  2.  V.  tr.,  to  adopt  children, 
'opa  U..  3.  for  'oqa,  stomach. 
opo,  to  heat  up  food  once  cooked,     ha'aopo. 
opu  1.  green  coconut  in  its  early  stage  with 
little  ffesh  and  with  the  shell  still  soft. 
2.  the  heart. 
opuopu  uhi  opiiopu,  U.,  the  name  of  a  month, 

February. 
'oqa  (ku)  belly,  bowels,  stomach,    'aqa.    M.  L., 

p.  55.     Florida  toba,  Mota  toqai. 
'oqa'oqa  U.,  a  bay,  indentation  of  the  coast, 
ora  1.  oven,  altar;  ora  ni  uunu,  the  altar  of 
burnt  offering;  t  epine  ora,  beside  the- 
altar. 
ora  2.  U.,  ashes:  dhiiora,  dusty. 
ora  3.  U.,  to  flame,  to  burn  brightly,     ha'aora. 

Wango  ora. 
ora  4.  a  boar  pig. 
ora  5.  ora  lulu,  to  belch, 
oraa  v.  i.,  to  flow. 

oraha'a  1.  adj.,  excessive,     hele  ni  oraha'a,  to- 
do  too  much;  lae  ni  oraha'a,  to  go  very 
fast.     2.  v.  i.,  to  sin,  to  contravene  the 
public   standards   of    morality.     3.    n., 
sin,  inu  oraha'a,  ddu  oraha'a;     tnaleledi 
oraha'a  mwaanie  ngaini,  to  rebuke  a  man 
for  sin;  sae  'asilana  oraha'a,  forgiveness 
of  sins. 
oraha'ala  adj.,  sinful;  aoraha'ala,  the  sinner, 
oraha'anga  n.,  sin.     Wango  oraoraa. 
oraora  1.  a  holy  person,  one  in  touch  with  the 

ghosts. 
oraora  2.  refuse,  dung.     cf.  ora  2. 
ore  1.  V.  i.,  to  remain  behind,  to  be  omitted; 
V.  tr.,  to  leave,     ha'iore.     ore  mu'aani, 
to  be  left  out;  ruana  ke'i  area,  the  other 


ORE 


76 


ore  1  (continued.) 

shall  bi  left;  kire  ngdu  area,  they  did 
not  eat  it  all. 
creore  n.  with  genitive  i,  ni,  oreorei  ola,  an 

empty  case,  a  shell. 
oreta  (ku)  v.  n.,  an  end.     e  'unu  oreta  ana 
mil   wala,    he   spoke   and    finished    the 
words;    kesi   oreta   ana   utinu    'asilana, 
whose  end  is  burning;  oretana  mil  'inoni, 
the  rest  of  the  men. 
oretalana  ana  i  oretalana,  finallj'. 
oretanga  v.  n.,  the  finish,  final  end.     Motu 
ore,  arena,  remnant. 

ore  2.  used  with  genitive  i,  ni;  almost,  nearly, 
just  failing  to.  melu  orei  lae,  we  nearly 
went. 

ore  S.,  ura  U.,  3.  fresh-water  prawn,  ore  ni  wei. 

ore  S.,  4.  crayfish,  ore  ni  'esi.  Mota  ura,  Maori 
koura. 

ore  5.  ha'iore,  to  scold,  to  quarrel. 

orea  to  chatter  (of  thi  bird  wisi),  wist  ko  orea. 
M.  A.,  p.  220. 

ori,  oriori  v.  tr.,  to  peel;  ori  uhi,  to  peel  yams; 
yams  are  peeled  with  a  shell  held 
between  the  thumb  and  index  finger, 
the  motion  being  away  from  the  body 
and  not  toward  it  as  with  Europeans. 
Viti  ori,  to  cut;  Fate  ori,  Motu  oria. 

oro,  orooro  v.  i.,  to  bend  down,  to  stoop,  to 
lean  over;  oro  i  'ano,  to  stoop  to  the 
ground. 
oroha'i,    oroma'i   v.    i.,  to  bend  down,  to 
stoop,  to  slant.     7nwaoroha'i. 

oropa  (ku)  U.,  ulcer;  oropaku,  the  ulcer  on  my 
body. 

orooro  n.,  the  beetle  that  bores  the  yams. 
orooro'a  adj.,  eaten  by  yam  beetles. 

oru  n.,  grasshopper,  locust. 

osa  S.   1.  (ku)  ulcer;  iiweli  osa,  cerumen,  wax 
in  the  ear.     2.  to  be  rotten, 
osanga  v.  n.,  corruption. 

osani  karekare  U.,  cliff. 

osi  1.  to  cut,  to  score. 

osi  2.  nimeku  e  osi,  my  arm  has  gone  to  sleep, 
pins-and-needles  feeling. 

'osi  3.  'o,  thou;  si,  illative. 

osiosi  to  be  lukewarm,     wawai  osiosi. 

osiosita'a  adj.,  striped,  streaked. 

'0  si'u'e  exclamation  of  assent,  yes;  used  in 
response  to  a  negative  question  where 
English  calls  for  no.  'uri  ngaini  ka'a 
'unue?  'o  si'u'e,  did  no  one  speak?  yes 
(scilicet,  no  one  did  speak). 

ote  n.,  open  bush-land  just  above  the  beach. 

'oto  1.  adv.,  follows  the  verb;  is  used  to  denote 
the  preterite;  expresses  finality;  ex- 
presses emphasis;  the  demonstrative 
na  or  7ii  may  be  added;  used  to  connect 
the  narrative  and  to  show  consecutive 
action,  then,  thereupon;  marks  cessa- 
tion of  action;  used  to  denote  a  few,  of 
things  just  beginning  or  a  few  things 
left,  kire  lae  mango  'olo,  they  all  went; 
melu  ke'i  tola  'oto,  are  we  to  begin  to 
carry?  ineu  'oto,  it  is  I;  inge'ie  'olo  itei, 
where  is  he?  nou  sa'a  lae  'oto,  I  shall  not 
go;   ngaini   'oto  ka'a  qaoa  nga  le'u,  no 


'oto  1  (continued). 

one  at  all  did  anything;  'oinii  sa'a  lio 
odo'ieu  'olo  lo'u,  ye  shall  not  see  me 
again;  'oto  'ure  7ndi.  up  till  now;  ngaini 
'oto  amelu,  one  of  us;  wa  'oto  amolu,  or 
one  of  you;  mivaanie  'olo  me'i  olana, 
from  that  very  thing;  e  honu  eni  ni'inge 
na  'oto  ani  wala'imolinge,  full  of  grace 
and  truth;  to'olaka'elu  'oto,  our  own 
property;  mala  'olo  nou  ka'a  helesie  ike, 
as  though  I  had  never  done  it;  'oto 
inganite,  when?  'oto  wdi  na'ona.  right 
before  his  face;  'olo  i  qe'unc,  right  on  his 
head;  'oto  ina'o,  formerly;  'oto  qdni,  of 
old;  'oto  di,  S.,  'oto  huu,  U.,  forever;  'oto 
waite,  long  ago;  'olo  ihei,  laa,  where  to, 
lad?  'olo  mola,  'olo  molana.  at  this 
present,  now;  nga  liwe  'otona,  it  was  a 
cave;  'oto  nou  si  teuri,  then  said  I;  kire 
si  rohu,  ka'a  sdunie  'oto,  they  then  ceased 
and  left  off  beating  him;  kire  ka'a  hata- 
hata'inie  'olo,  they  no  longer  accom- 
panied him;  e  ro  'ala  ini  'oto,  just  a  few 
as  yet;  e  ta'a  kele  le'u  'oto,  only  a  little 
piece  left;  ko  nisi  'oto  ile'u,  this  is  the 
boundary;  e  no'i  'aela  'oto,  it  has  become 
bad;  nonola  'oto  wau,  three  days  ago; 
e  ngaa  'oto,  did  he  eat  it?  'oni  huu  'olo 
ana,  to  be  settled;  ha' ike  'oto  'o'o,  never 
at  all;  e  pele  'olo,  it  is  of  no  avail;  ini  ni 
ha'aurilana  'oto,  a  person  to  be  saved; 
ko  ne'ie  'oto  i'oe,  if  it  be  thou;  na  nesi 
ne'i  'amamti  'oto,  and  I  shall  be  your 
father;  e  holai  na'o  'oto  wau,  he  led 
the  way  first;  a  ola  e  na'oku  'oto.  So- 
and-so  preceded  me;  na'a  lae  'olo,  I  am 
going;  e  la  'otoi  'aela  mwaani  nonola,  it 
is  worse  than  yesterday;  koro  'a  moyto 
'oto  i  Kalona,  they  two  live  apart  in 
Kalona;  e  molahie  'oto,  it  failed;  e 
ma'usu  'oto,  it  is  all  overgrown;  wdi  e 
mapipi  'ohe  'oto  ta'inie  kolune  mwakano, 
whether  the  water  had  receded  off  the 
face  of  the  earth;  e  7nango  'oto,  it  is 
quite  finished;  mango  'oto,  thereupon; 
melu  mango  'olo  mdi,  we  are  all  here; 
'ure  'oto  mdi  i  'aeholalana,  from  the 
beginning  up  to  now;  e  lae  'oto  ni  mae, 
he  went  like  everything;  e  'a'aila'a  'oto 
mae  ana,  he  is  very  strong;  'oto  'ie,  now; 
'oto  mola  'ienini,  just  now;  'olo  inihou. 
just  now;  ke'i  'ue  'oto,  how  shall  it  be 
done?  'oto  kire  kosi  'unue,  then  they 
said  it;  poo  ke  ne'i  lalamoa  ko  'olisie  'oto 
a  mwaena,  the  pig  is  the  victim  in 
place  of  the  man;  awala  'olo  huu,  U.,  a 
full  ten;  wdi  e  huuhuu  'oto,  water  gushed 
forth;  'olo  wdi  lalo,  in  the  inside;  yioko 
lapata'i  ulo  'oto,  I  lament  with  crying; 
le'une  nou  daa  'oto,  I  did  that  already; 
likimaana  'olo,  certainly.  Wango  olo, 
oto  hu,  forever;  Vaturanga  noho;  Maori 
noho,  to  sit. 

oto  2.  {ku)  cooked  food  taken  on  a  journey. 
mu  olo.  otona  laeha,  food  for  a  journey. 
Lau  oso,  Samoa  oso,  Viti  odho,  Maori  o, 

'oto  di  used  of  indefinite  space  of  time,  past  or 


11 


PAPA 


'oto  di  (continued). 

future,  forever,  from  of  old.  'olo  di  'olo 

di,  forever  and  ever. 
'oto  'ie  S.,  'oto  inihou  U..  adv.,  now;  'olo  mola 

'ie  (,'ieiiini),  just  now,  this  minute, 
•otomi  V.  tr.,  to  spear,  to  pierce  with  a  spear. 
'oto  'o'o  adv.,  for  all  time,     ta'ala'a  ola  'oto  'o'o, 

one  and  only  one. 
ou  1.  pine  ni  oil,  Nicobar  pigeon;  ground-pigeon. 
•o'u  2.  the  sandy  land  just  above  the  beach. 
'O'u  3.  the  site  of  a  former  village  south  of 

Su'uholo,  Ulawa.     Wango  gohu. 
'ou'ou  n..  champion,  chief,  great  person.     In 

M.  A.,   p.  49,   Ro  ute'i  sen  'ou'ou,  are 

said    to    be    brothers    of    Qa'ido    pdinc, 

whereas  they  were  only  two  warriors,  ro 

ramo  mola.     Mota  wowut. 
oute  U.,  oiileni  nima,  a  group  of  houses. 


paa  ?.,  n.,  bait,  mc'i  paa. 

paalahe  v.  tr.,  to  praise,  to  bless,  to  apostro- 
phize an  island  as  in  ha'addhi;  paalahe'o, 
lucky  you,  blessed  are  you. 
paalahenga  v.  n.,  praise,  blessing. 
paalahela-(ku)  gerund. 

paalahea  with  personal  article,  a  paalahea, 
So-and-so. 

paale'o  n.,  breadfruit,  'apani  paale'o,  nauti- 
lus shell  cut  in  triangular  pieces  for 
inlaying.     San  Cristoval  qareo. 

pa'asahu  n.,  a  small  fish  caught  among  the 
shore  rocks;  hinou  ni  pa'asahu.  a  hook 
for  pa'asahu. 

pa'e  n.,  yam  poles;  v.  tr.,  to  pole  yams. 

pa'elana  gerund.;   pa'elana  Jwhola,   poling 
up  a  yam  garden. 

pa'ewa  1.  n.,  a  shark,  e  lapi  ana  pa'ewa, 
changed  into  a  shark.  2.  alaala  pa'ewa, 
a  croton  with  leaves  like  a  shark's  fin. 
3.  pa'ewa  ko  'ala  tala,  S.,  the  last  two 
days  of  the  moon.  Mota  pagoa,  shark; 
New  Guinea  paowa,  Mailu  baea,  Florida 
bagea,  Gilbert  Islands  bakoa. 

pSi,  paipei  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  drive,  to  chase.  Wango 
bat. 

p^naa  U.,  dialectic  for  quinaa. 

paine  S.,  paina  U..  big,  loud,  to  grow  big. 
ha'apaine.  e  paina  'asi'a,  needlessly 
big;  helehele  paine,  ninth  and  tenth  days 
of  the  moon;  kei  la' a  paine,  poor  lady; 
lo'a  wai  peine,  March;  mala  paine,  to 
give  oneself  airs;  tnango  piiine,  to  sigh; 
e  paine  jnwaanie,  bigger;  ngduhana  t 
pdipeine,  he  is  a  great  eater,  lit.,  his 
eating  is  big; 
painanga  v.  n.,  bigness,  size, 
painesi  v.  tr..  to  be  too  big  for. 
painaha  used  with  poss.  3;  pdinahaana,  its 
full  size,  adolescence.  The  root  appears 
to  be  pai  on  compari^Jon  with  paipei- 
lesu'a,  U.,  big;  and  na  is  probably  a 
verbal  suffix.  Alite  baila,  Lau  baila, 
Ceram  maina.     M.  L.,  p.  80. 

paipeilesu'a  I'.,  very  large,     pdina,  Idsu. 

paipeina'a  adj.,  ven,'  big. 


pa'ipesi  S.,  pilsipesi  U-,  strong,  firm;  hele 
pd'ipesi,  to  grasp  firmly;  ooru  pe'ipesi, 
to  blow  strong. 

pala  to  be  light  in  color;  niu  pala,  a  coconut 
with  light-colored  leaves;  Poo  pala,  a 
white  pig. 

palapala  1.  an  omen,  sign;  palapala  ana  haka, 
a  sign  of  the  ship  (Southern  Cross) 
coming,  the  particular  palapala  in  this 
case  is  a  shower  of  rain. 

palapala  2.  U-,  palapala  ni  i'e,  a  nose-ornament 
of  shell  cut  to  represent  the  frigate-bird 
(Cruise  of  the  Curagoa,  p.  254). 

palapala  3.  to  be  gray  in  color,  whitish;  qduku 
e  palapala,  my  hair  is  gray. 

Palaule  an  inlet  west  of  Cape  Zelee  in  the  bay 
known  as  'Olu  Su'u,  the  other  two  inden- 
tations being  Apauone  and  Hulihuli. 

pale  1.  V.  tr.,  to  preserve,  to  keep,  to  main- 
tain; palea  kalanga,  to  keep  fellowship. 

pale  2.  U.,  Ngorangora  dialect  for  qale,  nega- 
tive particle. 

pale  3.  U.,  v.,  to  chirp,  of  crickets. 

pali  S.,  pali  kao,  a  drop  left  in  the  bottom, 
dregs.  Florida  hali,  part;  Lau  ball, 
side. 

palili  v.  i.,  to  turn  aside.     Lau/aK. 

palingite  v.  tr..  to  set;  e  palingitaa  maana,  he 
set  his  face. 

palo,  palopalo  v.  tr.,  to  do,  to  act  officially,  to 
worship;  e  palo  honotaka,  our  mediator, 
palonga  v.  n.,  act,  worship;  o  palonga,  the 
officiant;  na  ni  leesie  palonga  aku,  and 
saw  my  works;  mu  palonga  rorodo'a, 
works  of  darkness. 
palola-(ku)  gerund,  palolana  mu  'akalo, 
worship  of  the  ghosts. 

palopalo'a  n.,  time,  season. 

palupelu  1.  the  handle  of  a  paddle,  pdlupel-.i 
ni  hole.  2.  U.,  the  buttress  flange  of  a 
tree. 

palupelu  3.  sae  ni  peltipelu,  red  hot. 

pani  1.  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  drive  away,     hd'ipdni. 
panile'ini  tr.,  to  drag,   to  draw  aside,   to 

cause  to  drift  out  of  the  course. 
panile'inila-(ku)  gerund. 

pani  2.  U.,  n.,  the  side  walls  of  a  house;  qd'uli 
peni,  purlin. 

panitora  v.  tr.,  to  eject,  to  drive  out. 

panga  v.  i.,  to  wonder;  used  with  poss.  3.   hunt 
'omu  kesi  panga  ant,  that  ye  may  marvel 
thereat, 
pangara'ini  U.,  pangata'ini  S.,  tr. 
pangara'inila-(ku),   pangata'inila-(ku') 
gerund. 

pangupangu  raha  U.,  big,  huge. 

panguu  to  be  dumb.     nguu.     Mao.  hangu,  ngu. 

pao  V.  tr.,  to  make  plaited  armlets  of  haa,  etc. 

paonga  S.,  battlefield.     U.,  qaonga. 

papa  V.  i.,  to  break  by  a  sharp  blow;  papa  hdu, 
to  break  stones  by  dashing  one  against 
the  other;  papa  naho,  a  fish  that  leaps 
into  the  air  dashing  apart  the  water, 
papali  tr..  to  break  by  dashing  down, 
papata'ini  tr.,  to  break  in  pieces. 
papata'iiiila-(ku)      gerund.     Maori     papa, 
Motu  papa,  to  burst. 


PAPAKU'A 


78 


papaku'a  U..  adj.,  foolish,  demented. 

papali  (ku)  n.,  cheek;  'aena  papali,  jaw.  Lau 
ball,  side  (of  position);  Viti  mbalu, 
cheek;  Maori  paparinga,  Wango  baba, 
Bougainville  Straits  papala. 

papangurunguru  to  murmur,  to  grumble, 
mutter;  papangurunguru  oalana,  mut- 
terings  concerning,     nguru. 

papau  U.,  to  be  firm,  hard,     malapau'a'a. 

para,  parapara  v.  i.,  to  fence,  to  guard;  noko 
para,  I  am  making  a  fence;  para  hono- 
taka.  defend  us;  para  diiu'i,  to  protect 
with  a  fence;  dere  iinu  ana  para,  between 
the  pickets  of  the  fence;  jnaai  para,  S., 
viaana  para,  U..  a  gate. 
para'i  tr.,  to  defend,  to  protect. 
para'ila-(ku)  gerund,  ko  'ure  para'ilana 
walutnalau,  defends  the  earth.  Wango 
bara;  Mota  pala,  set  across;  Espiritu 
Santo  pala,  fence. 

para  n.,  para  ni  'o'o,  a  set  of  drums. 

para'i  ki'iki'i  U.,  paw,  of  dog. 

para'imaa  hat,  sunshade  of  plaited  coconut 
leaf  worn  when  fishing. 

para'i  nima  U.,  knuckle. 

para'ita  1.  U.,  the  inclosure  outside  the  men's 
house  (toohi)  planted  with  dili  and  make; 
areca  skins  are  thrown  into  it  for  safety 
to  insure  their  not  being  used  in  witch- 
craft. 

para'ita-(ku)  2.  n.,  a  para'iteku,  my  defender. 
nanamanga  para'ilana  mil  li'oa,  power 
over  the  spirits. 

parakoko  U-,  suli  parakoko,  rib  of  the  body. 

parangasi  v.  tr.,  to  maintain  one's  innocence 
when  accused,  to  make  pretence,  to 
bluff,  to  defy,     ngdsi. 

parapara  S.,  n.,  side,  loins;  used  with  poss.  3; 
parapara  aku,  my  loins.  Mota  para- 
para,  beside,   sidewise. 

parasi  (au)  U.  1.  prep.,  against,  around,  in  the 
way  of.  ha'aparasi.  ddu  parasi,  U., 
to  hinder.  2.  v.  tr.,  to  protect,  to 
fence,  to  inclose.     Wango  parasi. 

par'ie  c/.  paro  'ie,  this  side. 

parikota  U.,  to  bs  separated,  divided,  disturbed 
in  mind.     Florida  ball,  side. 

paro  adv.,  bej'ond ;  paro  'ie  (contracts  to  par'ie) , 
this  side;  paro  i  la'ona,  on  the  inside, 
paro  uri,  over  there;  niparo,  iniparo, 
U.,  that;  e  ddngi  paro,  as  soon  as  it  was 
day;  'o  du'una  paro,  move  it  on  a  little; 
moro  tdria  paro  i'ola  i  'esi,  you  launch 
the  canoe  into  the  sea;  po'o  paro, 
beyond;  qd'u  paro,  beyond.  Florida 
pari,  Sesake  palo,  Mota  kalo,  San 
Cristoval  baro. 

pasa  TJ..  1.  paa  S.,  n.,  bait  for  fish,  mdsi  pasa. 
M.  A.,  p.  316. 

pasa  2.  bonito  hook  for  trolling,  usually  made 
of  the  clam  {'ime)  with  a  tortoise-shell 
barb  (imaa).  okooko  ni  pasa,  basket 
containing  pasa. 

pasi  n.,  a  bow.  cf.  kdlu,  lohe.  ilolo  ni  pesi,  a 
bowstring,  to  string  a  bow;  tdku  ana 
pdsi,  to  grasp  a  bow.  Gilolo  pusi, 
Amboyna  husul,  apusa,  Mota  us. 


pasie'ili  to  be  stiff  (of  the  body). 

pasihi  n.,  a  small  fish. 

pasipesi  U.,  pa'ipesi  S.,  strong,  firm. 

pasu  1.  ha'apasu,  v.  i.,  to  threaten  the  life  of. 

pasu  2.  to  sprout;  pdsu  maomaopu'e,  in  full 
leaf.     San  Cristoval  basu. 

pau  1.  to  jam,  to  be  stuck,     papau. 

pau  2.  pdusi,  S.,  pdungi,  U.,  to  be  master  over. 
rakapdu. 

pa'u  3.  a  corpse  inclosed  in  the  image  of  a 
swordfish  {Hi)  carved  in  wood  and  kept 
in  the  house.     M.  A.,  p.  261. 

paula'a  U.,  adj.,  firm,  hard,     papau. 

paule  n.,  a  tree  which  grows  on  the  hills,  also 
known  as  dalo  ni  me'esu,  dalo  of  the 
forest,  makes  good  masts  for  boats. 

pa'uwa'ata  n.,  a  two-handed  crescentic  club 
from  San  Cristoval,  "head-splitter." 
Guppy,  "Solomon  Islands,"  p.  74. 

pawa  hdu  pawa,  soapstone. 

peapea  (ku)  n.,  footmark,  sole  of  foot,  U.. 
example.  Ta'a  Pea,  a  female  ghost  who 
causes  yams  to  fructify.   M  alay  pea,  foot. 

pee,  peepee  1.  v.  i.,  to  drive  away;  pee  poo,  to 
drive  swine  out  of  gardens. 
peesi  tr.     Wango  beesi,  Maori  pei. 

pe'e  2.  contraction  of  pe'ie  with  him,  with  it, 
withal,  and. 

pei  1.  U.,  n.,  a  mortar  for  braying  areca  nut. 

pe'i  2.,  S.,  V.  tr.,  to  assist,  to  help;  used  in  the 
sense  of  and;  the  equivalent  of  mwana  of 
units  above  ten;  pe'ie  often  contracts 
to  pe'e;  not  a  preposition  of  relationship 
as  stated  in  M.  L.,  p.  151.  e  i'o  pe'i 
suke,  he  sat  and  begged;  rdpu  lakoma'i 
pe'i  po'upo'u,  to  crucify;  i'o  pe'i  rae, 
the  mourning  before  burial;  saeda  ka'a 
tararuru  pe'ie,  their  hearts  were  not 
whole  with  him. 
pe'ini  tr.,  to  be  associated  with;  pe'inie, 
moreover,  and;  ta'e  pe'inie,  but,  never- 
theless. Wango  bei,  F agani  fagi,  fagini, 
Qaloto  ha'ini,  haufai,  faint,  Mota  vag  2. 

peinuhi  U.,  to  go  secretly.  Wango  binihu, 
secret. 

pele  V.  i.,  by  mischance,  by  mistake,  in  error, 
of  no  avail;  e  pele  'oto,  it  is  of  no  avail, 
it  is  all  up;  nou  deu  pele,  I  did  wrong; 
nou  ere  pele,  I  spoke  inadvertently; 
kali  pele,  to  capsize  in  rounding  a  cape; 
nou  sa'a  noruhe'i  pele,  I  shall  not  be 
confounded. 
pelenga  v.  n.,  ddu  pelenga,  error,  mistake. 
pelenga'ini  tr.,  ddu  pelenga'inie  nga  le'u,  to 
do  a  thing  in  error. 

pele'i  adv.,  precedes  verb:  by  mischance;  ko 
pele'i  tarohia  governor,  if  it  come  by 
chance  to  the  governor's  ears. 

peli,  pelipeli  v.  tr.,  to  steal,  to  rob,  to  steal 
from   a   person,   to   kidnap,    to  recruit 
labor    without    paying    a    commission 
(holile)   to  the  relatives  of  the  person 
recruited;  e  pelieu,   he  stole  from  me; 
lude  peli,  to  steal  labor  recruits. 
pelinge  S.,  v.  n.,  theft. 
peliha  U.,  v.  n.,  theft. 
pelila-(ku)  gerund.     Mota  palu. 


79 


PONGAPONGA 


penapena  n.,  a  roller;  v.  i.,  to  roll  out  tanj 
puddings. 
penasi  v.  tr.,  to  roll  out,  to  flatten  out. 

penata  (ku)  n.,  sole  of  foot,  palm  of  hand, 
penatana  'ae,  penatana  nime.  Florida 
pera  ni  lima,  Mota  tawerai,  Ambrym 
vera,  Malekula  feran,  hand;  Malagasy 
tanana,  hand.     M.  L.  p.  75. 

pepe  n.,  butterfly,  moth;  pepe  alaha.  a  large 
butterfly;  pepe  ni  weieu,  a  butterfly 
(Ornithoptera  cassandra);  pepe  i  etieu, 
a  butterfly.  Solomon  Islands  bebe, 
Polynesian   pepe. 

pepela'ini  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  drift. 

peta  U.,  n.,  house  post.     Mota  Pete. 

peto  U.,  qeto  S.,  to  be  feeble,  weak,  cowardly. 

pe'u  n.,  tarantula,  rndsi  pe'u,  U.;  called  ramo 
champion  from  its  watchfulness  and 
from  the  difficulty  of  hitting  or  spearing 
it. 

pe'ule  n..  a  bird,  the  curlew. 

pewa'ali  v.  tr.,  to  rend.  wa'a.  hile  pewa'ali, 
to  cleave. 

pie  1.  hdti  pie,  a  precipitous  wall  of  rock,  a 
cascade. 

pi'e  2.  a  palm  whose  laths  are  used  as  cross- 
pieces  for  platforms.  3.  a  digging-stick 
made  of  pi'e. 

pi'e  (na,  ni)  3.  a  sucker  of  a  tree;  pi'ei  hiidi, 
banana  sucker. 

piho  ha'apiho,  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  divide  into  two 
parts. 

pii  1.  to  cook  with  hot  stones,  stone  boiling. 
M.  A.,  p.  316.     pi'i  'oni,  to  make  coco- 
nut oil  in  a  wooden  bowl  (nime). 
piinge  v.  n.,  yam  soup;  ilu  piinga,  U-,  to 

sup  yam  soup, 
piingi  tr. 

pii  2.  V.  i.,  to  strain  the  milk  from  scraped 
coconut  (hero)  with  the  net  (unu)  of  the 
coconut  leaf. 

pii  3.  lite  pii,  torrential  rain. 

pile  1.  the  young  areca  nut  in  its  earliest  edible 
stage. 

pile  (na)  2.  the  roe  of  fish.     Motu  bela,  spawn. 

pili,  pilipili  v.  i.,  to  press,     ha'anipili,  S.      pili 
tnemeso,  to  break  into  powder;  piliroro'i. 
to  pre53  down  tight; />;7t /t'^e;,  to  oppress, 
to  tread  down. 
piliha  U.,  V.  n.,  distress. 
piling!  tr. 
pilila-(ku)  gerund.     Wango  biringi. 

pilomo  to  be  dented,  to  have  a  gapped  edge, 
to  be  pitted. 

pine  S.,  pina  U.,  the  name  of  several  large  birds; 
pi)ie  awa,  the  hornbill,  so  called  from 
the  rushing  sound  (awa)  of  its  wings 
in  flight;  pine  ni  'est,  the  booby;  pine 
ni  ou,  the  Nicobar  pigeon  (Geophilus 
nicobaricus).     Florida  bina. 

piola  adj.,  thick. 

pipisi  1  (na,  ni).  the  eaves  of  a  house,  pipisine 
name.     2.  pipisi  ana  mdnu,  tail  feathers 
of  a  bird. 
pipisu  n.,  a  bird,  the  shiny  starling  (Callomis 

metallica),  building  in  colonies. 
piru  1.  V.  i.,  to  close  upon;  e  pirii  keli  eku,  sur- 


piru  (continued). 

rounds  me.  2.  n.,  an  ornamental  collar 
made  of  dogs'  teeth  strung  on  cords 
with  intervening  sections  of  shell 
money  (haa).  3.  v.  tr.,  to  make  such 
a  collar;  e  pirue  mu  'usu  ineu,  he  made 
my  dogs'  teeth  into  a  collar. 

pirupiru  U.,  a  sacred  grove,  altar.  San  Cris- 
toval  birubiru. 

piruu  S.,  qiruu  U.,  black,  grey,  of  sand  as  on 
San  Cristoval,  one  piruu. 

pito  S.,  qito  U.,  v.  i.,  to  grow. 

poe  1.  poe  rare,  to  plait  a  mat  out  of  green 
coconut  leaves  (rare). 

poe  2.  U.,  poe  hui,  to  pull  wild  taro,  hut  ni 
tnalawa.     Mota  koe. 

poe  3.  to  cram. 

poe  4.  poe  aro,  a  nose-stick  of  bamboo  or  shell. 

poe  5.  U.,  poe  i'a,  a  poisonous  fish. 

po'e  6.  to  sprout. 

po'e  7.  ha'apo'e,  n.,  yam  or  taro  mash. 

poepoe  to  sigh,  to  heave  a  sigh,  to  gasp. 

poi  1.  S.,  adv.,  up,  hither;  lae  kati  pot,  come 
up  here;  hane  poi  ile'u,  climb  up,  come 
up,  here  to  me;  'omu  ke  ha'ahu'o  poi, 
be  here  early  in  the  morning;  po'o  poi, 
up  here.     Wango  poi,  hither. 

poi  2.  to  be  concerned  about;  used  with  poss.  3. 

pola,  polapola  v.  i.,  to  jump,  to  assault,  to 
attack;  pola  likiliki,  to  leap;  pola 
mwaani,  to  desert  a  ship;  pola  nguru,  a 
month,  September;  pola  tala,  U.,  to 
fail;  'otio  pola,  to  gulp,  to  swallow  whole, 
polahi  tr.,  to  leap  on,  pounce  on,  to  assault. 

ha'apolahi,  ha'ipolanga. 
polahila-(ku)  gerund. 

polaha'i  ha'apolaka'i,  v.  tr.,  to  cast  away,  to 
disregard. 

polahiroa  to  meddle  in. 

polahiwasa  to  gad  about,  to  be  a  busybody. 

polale  n.,  a  bird,  swamp-hen  (Porphyrio  sp.). 
destructive  to  gardens. 

polali  lolo  polali,  red  ant,  sugar  ant. 

pole  S.,  qole  U.,  ma'ahu  pole,  v.  i.,  to  dream, 
V.  tr.,  to  dream  of;  ma'ahu  polenga,  n., 
;i  dream,  dreaming. 

pole,  polepole  2.  U.,  polepolci  sesu,  smoke. 

polo  poloi  haa,  a  strand  of  .«hell  money,     'apolo. 

polopolo  U.,  wart. 

pona  1.  a  fount:iin,  spring  of  water.    Nine  puna. 

pona  2.  ha'apona,  to  interrupt  with  questions. 

pono,  ponopono,  popono  v.  i.,  to  close,  to  mend, 
to  be  closed,  stuffed  up;  simouke  ineu 
e  popono,  my  pipe  is  stuff^ed  up;  sisi 
pono.  to  be  closed  over  (of  a  sore); 
to'oni  pono  inaa,  patched  clothes; 
e  popono  papau  i  purida,  closed  up 
tightly  behind  them, 
ponosi  tr.,  to  stop  up,  to  close,  to  dam; 
Jdu  ponosi,  to  put  the  lid  on;  hele 
ponosie  wawana,  keep  his  mouth  shut. 
ponosila-(ku)  gerund,     ha'aponosi.      Mota 

u'ono.  Florida  pono. 
ponopono  n.,   lid.  stopper,  cork  of  bottle 
Oate   use). 
pongaponga  to  be  loose,  to  fit  badly. 


PONGI 


80 


pongi,  pongipongi,  qongi  U-,  1.  v.  tr.,  to  promise; 
n.,  a  promise, 
ponginge  S.,  pongipongite  S.,  poagiha  U., 

V.  n.,  a  promise. 
pongila-(ku)   gerund. 

pongi  (ku),  qongi  U.  2.,  n.,  a  time,  season; 
Pongiku,  mj'  appointed  time;  i  ponginc, 
in  its  day.     Mota  qong. 

poo  1.  n.,  a  pig,  boar,  barrow:  any  kind  of 
quadruped;  poo  ha'aholo,  a  sheeted  pig; 
poo  viae,  a  dead  pig,  given  as  the  people's 
portion  {tolinge)  at  a  feast;  poo  nidiiri, 
a  Hve  pig;  poo  noro,  the  planet  Mars. 
M.  A.,  p.  349.  poo  pala,  a  white  pig; 
poo  pulu,  a  black  pig;  poo  okaoka,  a  mis- 
chievous pig;  poo  e  sude,  the  pig  rooted; 
poo  tori,  an  ear-marked  pig;  ddudaii 
Poo,  uunu  poo  saana  mu'akalo  to  sacrifice 
pigs  to  the  ghosts;  haka  ni  poo,  herd 
of  swine;  hunit  poo,  to  cut  up  a  pig; 
kele  poo,  a  little  pig,  shoat;  ko'u- 
kohui  poo,  a  piece  of  pork;  kakali  niunia 
nga  poo,  met.,  for  a  human  victim; 
manu  poo,  a  bird  observed  as  an  omen, 
called  pig-bird  from  its  note;  poo  kc 
ne'i  lalatnoa  ko  'olisie  'olo  a  mwaena, 
the  pig  is  the  victim  in  place  of  the  man; 
luiisi  ni  poo,  a  wild  pig;  iipela,  a  hog- 
wallow.     Mota  qoe. 

poo  (ku)  2.  n.,  navel. 

poo  3.  to  prop;  hdu  ni  poo,  a  prop,  a  log  to 
prop  with. 
poota,  poopoota   (na)   v.  n.,  a  foundation, 

niu  poopoolana  nume. 
poongi   tr.,   to  prop  up,   to  support  with 
props;  poongiei  kao,  prop  it  underneath. 
poongila-(ku)  gerund. 

po'o  4.  side  (of  position)  po'o  hao,  S.,  farther 
west;  po'oi  lengi,  U.,  south;  po'o  mdi, 
S.,  po'o  me'i,  U.,  hither,  on  this  side; 
po'o  paro,  beyond;  po'o  poi,  S.,  up  here; 
po'o  piiri,  at  the  rear,  after,  during  one's 
absence;  po'o  i  sinaha,  outside;  po'o 
wau,  on  the  far  side;  i  welila  po'o  wau, 
three  days  hence. 

po'o  5.  n.,  a  part,  piece;  po'o  ni  le'u,  partly; 
nga  po'o  ni  le'u,  a  piece;  nga'ela  po'o  ni 
ninime,  ni  papali,  the  other  hand,  the 
other  cheek.     Wango  ho. 

po'o,  po'opo'o  6.  to  care,  to  be  concerned  about; 
used  with  poss.  3. 

po'o  7.  po'o  hileli,  to  cause  to  burst. 

po'o  8.  po'o  lulu,  to  fill  the  mouth  with  food. 

poola  adj.,  possessing  pigs,  hdnue  e  poola. 

poona  a  village,  a  section  of  a  village  gathered 
around  a  chief's  house,  Ulawa,  Qaloto. 

poonga'ini  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  carry,  to  act  as  porter, 
poonga'i  v.  i. 
poonga'inila-(ku)  gerund. 

poopoo  n.,  a  shrine. 

po'opo'oli'ili'i  to  be  wayward,  perverse;  lae 
po'opo'oli'ili'i,  hele  po'opo'oli'ili'i,  to 
act  perversely,     li'i  2. 

poopoota  (na,  ni)  n.,  foundation.  ^oo3.  qooqoola. 

po'osu'a'a  concerned  about,  po'o  5.  non 
ka'a  po'osu'a'a  ike  ana,  I  am  not  con- 
cerned about  it. 


po'ote'e  to  concern  oneself  about;  used  with 
poss.  3.  ka'a  po'ote'e  ada,  ko  'anomire 
mola,  cared  not  for  them,  just  buried 
them,  of  the  undistinguished  dead. 
M.  A.,  p.  263. 

popo,  poponga  1.  to  be  tight,  close-fitting; 
tolanga  e  poponga,  a  burden  awkward 
to  carrJ^ 

popo  (ku)  2.  buttock;  popo  ni  honu,  the  tail- 
piece of  shell  on  the  back  of  the  hawk- 
bill  turtle,  much  prized  at  Santa  Cruz 
and  used  to  make  nose-rings. 

popo  3.  popo  ana,  the  white  (of  egg). 

popo  4.  v.  tr.,  to  carve;  kira  'asi  'unua  'e  popoa 
hoi  i'a  hdu,  they  said  he  was  to  carve 
a  fish  in  stone. 

popolo'u,  popopolo'u  V.  i.,  to  be  afraid. 
popolo'unge  v.  n.,  fear,  fright. 

popopo'a  adj.,  square-shaped. 

poposane'a  adj.,  riddled  v.'ith  borings  of  the 
white  ants  (sane). 

pore  n.,  an  armlet  plaited  of  grass. 

poro  1.  male,  husband,  person;  a  porona,  S., 
a  poroni,  U.,  the  person  So-and-so;  in 
the  folklore  the  men's  names  generally 
begin  with  poro,  a  Poro  hdnua  raha,  a 
ghost,  Mr.  Big- land;  a  Poro  jnatou  ni 
wala,  a  ghost;  Poro  waiiru  i  'esi,  a 
legendary  person,  Mr.  Fall-into-the-sea. 
a  porona  ko  malamala  Sa'a,  So-and-so 
speaks  Sa'a;  poro  ni  haka,  white  man, 
lit.,  man  of  the  ship;  poro  ha'alu,  a 
bridegroom;  poro  repo,  poro  pdine,  used 
of  important  persons;  poro  kdule,  male 
frigate-bird;  lo'o  poro,  to  have  a  hus- 
band, to  be  married;  to'o  poronga, 
marriage. 

poro  2.  poroi  rare,  a  small  mat  plaited  from 
green  coconut  leaves  used  as  a  dustpan 
or  for  holding  rubbish. 

poru  U.,  to  be  short,  little  in  stature,     'o'oru'e. 

peso  to  be  matted,  tangled  (of  hair),  curly. 
qd'une  e  poso. 

posiki  to  rebound,  to  ricochet. 

pota,  potapota  v.  i.,  to  break  by  knocking  one 
thing    against    another;    pola    niu,    to 
crack  a  coconut. 
potali   tr. 

potalila-(na,    ni)    gerund.     Mota    wota    3, 
Florida  pola,  Mao.  pota. 

potaa  U.,  rubbish  heap,  refuse,  dung. 

pote  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  replete  with  food,  to  have 
had  sufficient  to  eat;  ngdti  ni  pole,  to 
eat  to  satiety. 
potenga  v.  n.,  repletion;  potenga  ni  sape, 
bodily  repletion;  potenga  haaki,  plenty 
to  eat. 

pote  2.  used  of  phases  of  the  moon;  hara  pote, 
S.,  saro  pote,  U.,  the  day  before  full 
moon. 

pote  3.  n.,  a  louse;  uruuru  pote,  uruurii  qe'u,  to 
clean  the  hair  of  lice.  Wango  bote, 
Nengone  ote. 

pote  S.,  (ku)  qote  U.,  4.  buttock;  hi'uki'u  pote, 
a  bird,  wagtail. 

potepote  U..  a  pimple. 

potoi  U.,  a  firestick,  mdsi  potoi. 


8i 


PURA 


pou  1.  a  block  of  wood,  a  log,  hdi  pou.  pou 
ni  'ei,  U.  Maori  pou,  Samoa  pou,  post, 
pou  2.  V.  i.,  to  become  hard,  firm  in  consist- 
ency, to  set,  to  congeal  (of  liciuids),  to 
heal  over  (of  sores),  to  be  solid  (of 
waves);  siisii  pott,  to  run  high  without 
breaking  (of  waves). 
pouhiru'e  adj.,  raging  sea;  sasa'ae  e  pouhirii'e, 

a  raging  sea  is  stirred  up. 
poulolo  U.,  n.,  the  cross-beams  of  a  house, 
poupou  1.  a  green  coconut.     Wango  poupou, 

fruit,  poupou  kua,  hen's  egg. 
poupou  (ku)   2.  U.,  poupou  ni  'ae'ae,  poupou 

ni  uli,  heel.     Wango  poupou. 
po'upo'u    3.    crossed    .sticks,    a    cross;    rdpu 

lakoma'i  pc'i   po'upo'u,   to   crucify, 
po'uru'uru  S.,   qo'uru'uru  U.,  v.   i.,  to  kneel 
down,  to  stoop,  to  bend  down,    'tiru'iiru. 
po'uru'urunge  v.  n.     Wango  boiiru. 
pue  S.,  pua  U.,  areca  nut,  hoi  puc,  hou  pua; 
huufiulani     pua,     a     bunch     of     nuts; 
niaJtolota  ni  pua,  a  piece  of  areca;  tndhiri, 
to   be   intoxicated    from   eating   areca; 
hou  meme,  the  quid  of  areca,  betel  and 
lime;  hoi  meuta'a,  a  hard  ripe  areca  nut; 
mota,  S.,  pei,  IJ..  a  mortar  for  pounding 
areca  nut;  oka,  damn,   to  chew  areca; 
pile,  a  young  nut  just  edible.     Borneo 
hua,   fruit;   pue  is  probably  connected 
with  hue  1.     M.  L.,  p.  71. 
pule   1.  n.,  a  young  girl;  a  pulena,  the  girl; 
pulena,  vocative,  you  girl;  kele  Pule  ineu, 
my  little  girl. 
pule    2.   to   be   dropsical;    'ae   pule,   dropsical 

swelling  of  the  leg.     Mota  pura. 
puli  1.  a  cowrie  shell;  puli  'ehi'e,  orange  cowTie; 
oa  ni  puli,  a  pair  of  cowries;  talai  puli,  a 
string    of    cowries    for    the    forehead. 
Samoa,  Xiue  pule,  \'iti  mbuli. 
puli  2.  V.  i.,  to  crowd,  to  throng,     ha'apuli- 
puli  dhu'i,  to  throng  round;  ruru  puli, 
U.,  to  gather  in  a  crowd, 
pulitaa  U.,  v.  n.,  a  crowd,  a  throng,  a  mob, 
a  company. 
pulo  1.  V.  i.,  to  turn  back,  to  return,     ha'apulo. 
tnelu  pulo  i  ola,  we  only  reached  such- 
and-such    a    place;    pulo   sa'asala   ana, 
came    short    of    it,    failed    to    reach; 
td'ipulopulo,  to  come  short  of. 
pulosi  tr.,  to  turn  about,  to  turn  over,  to 
twist.     Wango  huro,  Florida  pulo. 
pulo  2.  n.,  a  bowstring,  pulo  ni  pesi. 
puloki  (English  bullock)  susu  ni  puloki,  cow's 

milk. 
pulongo  S..  v.  i.,  to  forget,  to  be  forgetful, 
pulongosi  tr. 

pulongota'ini   tr.,    Qaloto.     Wango   buron- 
gosi. 
pulopulo  to'o  pulopulo,  specked. 
pulu  1.  to  be  black;  pulu  nunu'e.  stained;  hdu 
Pulu,  volcanic  rock;  kuka  pulu,  a    mud 
crab;  poo  pulu,  a  black  pig;  rodohono 
pupulu,  pitch  dark. 
pulu  2.  gall,  used  in  witchcraft  to  cause  sleep 
to  enemies;  dere  pulu  haahi,  to  throw 
gall  over  them. 


pulu  3.  pitch,  gum.  native  cement;  a  nut,  sate 

(Parinarium    laurinum)    is    scraped    on 

rough  coral  rock  and  darkened  in  color 

by  a  mixture  of  charcoal   (lo'ilohi)  and 

the  juice  of   o'a,    the    cement    hardens 

almost    immediately;     pulu    tnaai    seu, 

circular  pieces  of  shell  used  in  inlaying; 

soo  pulu,  to  gather  cement  nuts. 

pulu'i  v.  tr.,  to  calk  with  native  cement. 

Mota  pulu,  Polynesian  pulu. 

Pululaha  a  district  on  Little  Malaita  at  the 

west  entrance  to  Mara  Masiki  Channel. 

pulupulu  n.,  a  firefly;  it  is  regarded  as  the  soul 

of  a  dead  person  and  is  killed  when  it 

comes  into  a  house,     maaku  e  takara 

pulupulu,  my  eyes  saw  stars.     Wango 

huruburii. 

pulupulu'e  adj.,  black;  natives  as  distinguished 

from  white  people,     mwala  pulupulu'e. 

punipuni  v.  i.,  to  smear  the  face  with  juice  of 

areca  nut  when  chewing,  to  smear  the 

body  with  lime,  to  decorate  the  body 

with   strong-smelling  herbs.     San  Cris- 

toval  buni,  Maori  pani,  to  paint. 

pungu  1.  to  be  deaf;  a  pungti,  the  deaf  person. 

Wango  bungu. 
pungu  2.  a  bunch;  pungui  aleale,  a  bunch  of 
dyed  aleale  tied  on  a  comb  for  decora- 
tion or  hung  on  the  bows  of  a  canoe; 
pungui  nume,   a  cluster  of  houses;   an 
pungu,  a  large  strong  bamboo, 
pupungu  v.  i.,  to  cluster  in  a  bunch,     cf. 
hungu.     Florida     punguti,     to     cluster 
round, 
pu'o  1.  to  be  ignorant,  to  be  heathen  (late  use), 
to  have  none;   'o  manala'inie  hoi  niu? 
nou  pu'o.  have  you  a  coconut?    I  have 
not;  tola  mala  pu'o,   to  behave  like  a 
heathen, 
pu'onga  v.  n.,  ignorance,  heathenism, 
pu'ota'i  V.  i.,  to  forget;   noko   pu'ola'i   ulo 

'oto,  I  forget  to  cry. 
pu'ota'ini  tr.,  to  be  ignorant  of.  not  to  have; 
ynoro  ko  pu'ota'inie  erenga  hd'iliu,  you 
do  not  know  one  another's  speech, 
pu'o  2.  v.  i.,  to  return,  to  come  back,     ha'apu'o. 
pu'o,  pu'opu'o  3.  v.  i.,  to  revolve,  to  turn  round; 
hdu  pu'opu'o,  a  grindstone, 
pu'osi,  pu'opu'osi  tr. 
pupu  1.  to  rest  assured;  saeku  e  pupu  'oto  ana, 
I  rest  assured  of  it;  pupu  to'o,  to  rely; 
used  with  poss.  3,  to  rely  on. 
pupu  2.  ta'ipupu'e,  tangled, 
pupu  3.  U.,  hoi  pupu,  the  Southern  Cross  con- 
stellation. 
pupulu  Ptilu  1;  rodohono  pupulu,  pitch  daik; 
'ala   pupulu   haahi,    to   surround    in   a 
dense  body. 
pupulue'i  V.  tr.,    to   darken  the  mind,  to 
vex;  e  pupulue'ie  saena,  his  mind  was 
disturbed, 
pupungula  U..  adj..  marked  with  a  rash, 
pupupu  to  be  whole,  intact,  safe,  i'o  pupupu. 
Wango  bubu,  Florida  mabubu. 
pupupu'e  adj.,  whole,  entire;  hele  pupupu'e, 
keep  intact. 
pupute  S.,  puputa  U..  a  bundle,  a  sheaf, 
pura  U.,  pule  S.,  to  be  dropsical. 


PURAPURA 


82 


purapura  U.,  si'o  purapiira,  irregularly. 

puri  (ku)  back  of,  behind  the  back,  the  stern. 
ha'ipuri.  e  ro  ini  est  puri  met.  at  the 
last  came  two  persons;  ape  puri,  to  be 
last,  in  the  rear;  'ato  puri,  to  turn  the 
back  on;  jyiwaamwaa  puri,  trepang, 
beche-de-mer;  oku  i  puri,  back  wall  of 
house;  po'o  puri,  in  the  rear,  after;  su'e 
puri,  to  fall  backward  and  break  the 
neck;  susu  puri,  last  born,  youngest 
child;  toli  puri,  to  turn  the  back  on,  to 
leave;  purine,  after  that:  used  with 
locative  /,  behind,  at  the  back  of,  after, 
at  last;  purina  lua,  U.,  nape  of  neck; 
t  purine  tnaholo,  after  the  time  when; 
i  puritmi,  in  your  absence;  i  purine 
maeta,  after  the  death  feast;  qa'i  purina, 
behind,  in  the  rear;  ini  (laa)  i  puri,  the 
youngest;  isipuri,  to  be  last.  Motu 
tnuri,  Maori  7nuri. 

Purihaha  a  village  on  the  hill  at  Sa'a. 

purimv/ane  n.,  the  last  born,  youngest  son. 

puri  ni  'iola  1.  the  lee  side  of  an  island,  lit.,  the 
stern  of  a  canoe. 

Puri  ni  'Iola  2.  a  district  on  the  west  side  of 
Little  Malaita. 

puru  to  be  close,  thick,  frequent,  hd'ipurunga, 
'apurunge.  maenga  kosi  puru,  deaths 
are  frequent;  puru  hero,  a  dish  of 
pounded  taro  with  grated  coconut 
{hero)  on  top,  a  Qaloto  dish  esteemed 
poor  cookerj'.  Florida  bum,  the  Plei- 
ades; burungi,  to  crowd. 

purupuru'a'a  adj.,  frequent;  lae  purupuru'a'a, 
to  go  frequently. 

pusu  1.  V.  i.,  to  spurt  out,  to  squirt;  pusu  'est, 
a  whale, 
pusue'ini,  pusule'ini,  pusuli  tr.,  to  splash 
a  person,  to  spurtle  on.     Florida  piihii, 
Mota  pupus. 

pusu  2.  n.,  a  latrine,     mapusu. 

puta  maputapula,  U.,  bruised. 

pute  S.,  puta  U.,  a  bundle,  a  sheaf;  pule  ni  'oha, 
a.  packet  of  betel  leaf. 

puu  1.  V.  i.,  to  tread,  to  stamp,  to  rest,  to  stand 
firm,  to  rely  on. 
puuli  tr.,  to  pounce  on,  of  birds,  to  strike 
with  the  talons;  puulie  rnaonga,  to  tread 
the  dance;  puuli'  mwakana,  to  tread 
the  earth.     Wango  buuri. 

puu  2.  n.,  mason  bee,  wasp. 

pu'u  3.  mangrove  borer. 

puuhara  to  Ftard  firm,  to  get  a  footing,  hala- 
hala. 

puulisi  'uri  puulisi,  to  tread  under  foot. 

puupuulisi  poo  a  prickly  shrub. 

puuto'o,  puupuuto'o  to  rely;  used  with  poss.  3, 
to  rely  on.  7nangona  e  puuto'o  Uliho'i, 
his  breath  returned. 


The  sound  represented  by  Q  is  that  of  pw; 
there  is  an  interchange  of  q  and  p  in  certain 
words,  which,  however,  is  not  critical  of 
dialectic  difference  between  Sa'a  and  Ulawa, 
qeto,  S.,  pelo,  U.,  pongi,  S.,  qongi,  U.,  qale,  U., 
pale,  Ulawa-Ngorangora. 


qa'a,  qa'aqa'a  1.  v.  i.,  to  break,  to  crack,  to 

be  cracked;  'tola  e  qa'a  'olo,  the  canoe 

is  wrecked;  qa'a  morumoru,  broken  to 

pieces. 
qa'asi  tr.,  S.,  dau  may  be  prefixed,     ddu 

qa'asi,  to  break;  tere  qa'asi,  to  peck  and 

break, 
qa'asilana  gerund.,  the  breaking  of  it. 
qa'ali     tr.,     U.,     tau    may     be     prefixed. 

ha'aqa'ali. 
qa'ata'ini  tr.,  to  break  to  one's  detriment; 

e  'olii  'iola  e  qa'ata'inieu,  three  times  I 

suffered  shipwreck. 
qa'ata  v.  n.,  with  genitive  i;  mu  qa'atai  ola, 

shreds. 
qa'a  2.  to  rise  (of  the  heavenly  bodies);  waaro- 

waaro  e  qa'a  'olo,  the  moon  has  risen; 

7ndi   ana  waarowaaro  e  qa'a,   ebb  tide 

at  moonrise;  madala  e  qa'a,  the  day  star 

is  risen;  qa'aqa'a  u-weha,  U.,  a  phase  of 

the  moon, 
qa'ali  tr.,  sato  e  qa'alie  hdnue,  the  sun  has 

risen  on  the  earth. 
qa'ala-(na)  gerund;  qa'alana  sato,  east, 
qa'ahita  U.,  n.,  a  slab;  qa'ahila  ni  'ei,  a  slab  of 

wood. 
qa'ahulu'e  adj.,  ruffled  (of  the  surface  of  the 

sea),    having   goose  flesh.     Mota  ului, 

hair;  Maori  hum. 
qa'akora  (na)  the  outer  skin  of  the  canariura  nut. 
qa'alinge  n.,  echo,     'alinge. 
qa'aqa  (ku)    n.,    grandmother   or   grandchild; 

the  personal  article  a  may  be  employed, 

a  qa'aqa;  ro  hd'i  qa'aqana,  grandmother 

and  grandchild,  the  two  between  whom 

subsists  the  relation  qa'aqa. 
qa'aqa'a  with  genitive  li;  qa'aqa'ali  naho,  a 

wave,  a  breaker, 
qaaqi'a  U.,  adj.,  stale  or  brackish  (of  water); 

tono  qaaqi'a,  to  taste  brackish. 
qaaqi'a'a  U.,  adj.,  mawkish, 
qa'aqito  v.  i.,  to  sprout,  to  spring  up  (of  plants). 

pito. 
qa'arakau  U.,  v.  i.,  to  break  with  a  loud  noise, 

as  a  bamboo  bursting  or  a  gun  firing, 
qa'arete  n.,  a  blister,     hou  qa' arete,  U. 
qa'arongo,  qa'aqa'arongo  v.  i.,  to  hearken,  to 

listen,  to  pay  attention. 
qa'arongonga  v.  n.,  listening. 
qa'arongoisuli   1.  v.  tr.,   to  listen  to,   to  pay 

attention  to.     2.  n.,  a  listener,  a  dis- 
ciple; ini  qa'arongoisuli  e  ka'a  liuta'ana 

ini  ha'ausuli,  the  disciple  is  not  above 

his  master, 
qa'asuulana  n.,  the  brink,  cliff. 
qa'ateru  n.,  a  snail;  qa'ateru  a  'i'i,  a  very  lairge 

snail. 
qaeqae  (ku)  n.,  armpit.     San  Cristoval  qaeqae. 
qa'i  1.  V.  tr.,  to  lever,  to  prize.     2.  to  stir  round, 
qjl'i  3.  U.,  negative  particle  used  of  indefinite 

time,   a  short  form  of  qa'ike.     sapeku 

e  qa'i  mware'a,  I  am  not  in  good  health; 

nou  qe'i  sare,  I  am  unwilling.     Wango 

qai,  Florida  bei. 
qa'i  4.  U.,  to  be  club-footed. 
qa'i  5.  sane  qa'i,  a  termite  of  a  brownish  color 

used  as  burly  for  the  sea-bream. 


83 


OAri 


qS'i  ao  U.,  a  large  hermit  crab,     ao  2. 

qjl'i  oku  second  day  after  full  moon. 

qa'ike  U.,  negative  adverb,  used  also  as  nega- 
tive particle;  probably  composed  of 
qd'i  3  and  ke  1.  wa  qa'ike,  or  else, 
otherwise;  lehuna  qa'ike,  not  that;  nau 
qa'ike  loosia,  I  did  not  see  it;  e  qa'ike 
tnunia  nga  maenga,  not  unto  death. 

qa'ilenl  S.,  the  seventeenth  day  of  the  moon. 
cf.  qd'i  oku,  the  sixteenth. 

qa'ilulu  v.  i.,  to  be  dismayed,  qa'i  2.  saeda 
e  qd'ilulti  erti  me'unge,  their  hearts  were 
dismayed  through  fear. 

qaiaaa  garden  ground  near  the  beach,  used  for 
planting  hana.     pdinaa. 

qaito  (na)  n.,  a  twist  made  out  of  a  leaf,  gener- 
ally a  leaf  of  wild  ginger  (aro),  used  as 
a  stopper  for  bamboo  water-carriers,  a 
cork. 

qake  U.,  negative  particle,  used  of  present  or 
past  time,     qa'ike. 

qala  v.  i.,  to  be  empty,  to  be  void  of  people. 
ha'aqala.  hdnue  e  qala,  there  is  no  one 
in  the  village;  nume  qala,  a  cicada  which 
presages  death,  lit.,  empty  house. 
qalasi  tr.,  to  be  left  without  friends,  to  be 
alone;  e  qalasire,  there  is  no  one  with 
them.  Nguna  niaso  qalo,  wilderness; 
Wango  qara.  empty. 

qalaqala  mere,  empty;  for  naught,  U.  lae  mola 
qalaqala,  to  go  for  nothing,  ineffectually; 
moola  qalaqala,  things  empty,  valueless. 

qale  (Ulawa,  Su'uholo  dialect)  negative  par- 
ticle, pale,  qake.  e  qale  ola  ne'e  adea, 
I  saw  nothing;  mwai  keni  e'asi  qale 
wala'awala'a  itnvare'a,  what  drawling 
women. 

qali,  qiiliqeli  1.  to  deceive,  to  be  mistaken;  nou 
qeliqclieu,  I  was  mistaken. 

qali  2.  U.,  qali  ka'o,  a  drop  left  in  the  bottom. 
pali. 

qali  3.  qdli  toutou,  canoe-shaped  drawings  used 
in  ornamenting  la'o,  etc.     toutou. 

qaloqalo  (ku)  the  right  hand;  with  locative  t, 
i  qaloqalo,  on  the  right  hand  (late  use); 
position  is  shewn  by  hao,  la'au,  paro, 
lengi,  'ano,  etc.  ana  rao  'iota  i  qaloqalo, 
on  the  right  side  of  the  ship. 

Qaloto  the  hill  district  above  Sa'a.  M.  \., 
p.  50. 

qalu  dede  qalu,  an  arrow. 

qalu  V.  i.,  to  be  with  child;  qalu  huni,  to  conceive 
by  a  person. 

qalusu  (ku)  nose,  beak  of  a  bird;  qdlusu  'upu'e, 
S.,  a  wood-pigeon  with  large  wattles  on 
the  beak  (Carpophaga  rufigula);  au  susu 
qelusu,  a  bamboo  nose-stick.  Fagani 
burusu,  Wango  qarisu,  Mota  ?ngusui, 
lip.     M.  L.  p.  85. 

qana  1.  n.,  a  pandanus  with  large  leaves  which 
are  split  down  to  make  mats.  2.  n.,  a 
sail;  lili  qana,  to  jibe;  lidu  lili  qana,  a 
boom.     Wango    qana. 

qani  adv.,  long  ago;  precedes  the  verb;  'oto 
qdni,  formerly;  melu  qeni  lae  'oto  mdi, 
we  came  here  a  long  time  ago.  Fagani 
qani,  already;  Florida  dania. 


qanio,  qaniqenio  U.,  v.  i.,  to  play,  to  have  a 
game, 
qanionga  v.  n.,  a  game,  play. 
qMnu  n.,  a  snare,  gin;  v.  tr.,  to  snare, 
qango  1.  n.,  mucus,     'uru  qango,  S..  'usu,  qango, 

U.,  to  wipe  the  nose. 
qango  (na,  ni)  2.  tops  of  taro  used  for  planting, 

qangoi  hui. 
qango  3.  U.,  qangoi  sa'o,  a  measure,  from  finger 
tips  to  wrist. 

qango  4.  marrow,  qango  laloi  suit. 

qangoqango  n.,  a  nose-stick,  an  ornament  of 
clam  shell  stuck  in  the  nostril,  bored  at 
the  outer  end  and  decorated  with  por- 
poise teeth.  (One  is  shown  in  The 
Cruise  of  the  Curacoa,  p.  246.)  mumua 
qangoqango,  U.,  to  apply  the  teeth 
decoration. 

qao,  qaoqao  S.,  1.  v.  tr.,  to  do,  to  do  to  a  person; 
to  lay  hands  on  a  person,  to  appoint,  to 
ordain  (late  use);  to  worship,  to  prac- 
tice religion,  rnu  ola  kire  ko  qao  'emi 
eni,  the  things  they  do  to  us;  rnuini 
liula'ana  a  mwane  'ie  e  qao'i  ne,  more 
than  those  which  this  man  has  done; 
qao  olanga,  n.,  worship,  prayers. 

qao,  qaohi  2.  tr.,  to  cover,  to  overlay. 

qaoha  n.,  ridgepole;  suli  'ei  i  qaoha,  a  ridge- 
pole; susu  qaoha,  to  sew  sago  leaves  for 
a  ridge  covering. 

qaoha'i  v.  i.,  to  be  capsized,  to  capsize;  melu 
qaoha'i  'oto,  we  are  capsized, 
qaoha'ini  tr.,   to  overturn,   to  overlay,  to 
lay  on  top;  qaoha'inie  kd'u  haahie,  lay 
it  over  it. 

qaohi  n.,  a  bird,  the  white-breasted  fish-hawk. 

qaola'i  S.,  qaola'i  walanga,  v.  n.,  deceit,  lying. 

qaona   v.   tr.,   to   lay  hands  on  officially,    to 
appoint,  to  ordain  (late  use). 
qaonanga   v.    n.,    qaonanga   ani   nimc,    the 
laying  on  of  hands,     qao. 

qaonga  U.,  battlefield,     cf.  paonga. 

qao  ola  v.  i.,  to  do  officially,  to  do  sacrifice,  to 
worship,  to  pray;  a  qaoqao  ola,  the 
officer,  the  officiant;  qao  olanga,  v.  n., 
worship,  prayer. 

qaqa  1.  v.  i.,  to  lay  eggs.  2.  female  (of  animals), 
used  to  show  sex  as  opposed  to  mwane, 
male;  'usu  qaqa,  a  bitch,  slut;  poo  qaqa, 
a  sow. 

qaqahe  U.,  v.  i.,  to  walk  about;  keni  qaqahe,  S., 
a  harlot.  Wango  qaqahe  uwa,  sole  of 
the  foot. 

qaqahinu  U.,  to  have  glandular  swellings  under 
the  arms. 

qaqaitengili  U.,  v.  i.,  to  be  abandoned,  left 
desolate  of  inhabitants. 

Qaqalaha  the  middle  boat-harbor  of  the  three 
between  Roasi  Bay  and  Port  Adam, 
Little   Malaita. 

qaqasu  (na)  knot  on  a  tree,  knot  in  bamboo. 

qara  v.  i..  to  be  old.  to  be  past  child-bearing 
(of  women). 

qarero  S.,  to  play,  to  have  games, 
qareronga  v.  n.,  play,  sport. 

qiiri  1.  n.,  a  small  frog. 

qari  2.  suli  qcri  i  ngaena.  backbone. 


OARO 


84 


qaro  1.  v.  tr.,  to  catch  in  a  noose,  to  lasso,  to 
hitch;  met.,  to  kill,  qaro  kaahi,  to  put 
a  hitch  on;  qaro  pa'cu-a  mala  mwai 
mataua.  to  catch  sharks  in  a  noose  like 
the  Santa  Cruz  people,  :M.  A.,  p.  294. 
nga  madala  vure  'ana'i  qaroa  adaru'a, 
when  the  day  star  rises  we  shall  hitch  it 
up  for  them,  i.  e.,  to  kill.  2.  n.,  a  noose, 
a  hitch,  maai  qaro.  maraau  i  qaro, 
south-by-east  wind.  Maori  koro.  3. 
qaro  haa,  an  armlet  made  of  haa,  liurc- 
soso  and  malo  strung  in  a  pattern. 
qaroqaro   mwai   matawa  qaroqaro,   the   Ulawa 

name  for  Santa  Cruz  men. 
qasaora  S.,  n.,  dust,  ashes,     ora  U. 
qasile  S.,  to  run  (of  mucus  in  the  nose,  of  water 

in  the  eyes). 
qaso  armlet  plaited  of  dyed  cane  or  grass;  qaso 
ni  Kela.  an  armlet  of  dyed  grass  from 
the  western  Solomons  received  through 
Guadalcanar  (Kela) ;  hd'u  qaso,  to  weave 
an  armlet;  icse  qaso,  to  plait  an  armlet; 
Hi  qaso.  to  make  an  armlet  of  shell 
money, 
qasu,  qa'uqesu  v.  tr.,  to  tie  up,  to  bind,     a 

qd'uqcsu  'inoni,  a  policeman. 
qate  n.,  a  large  frog. 

qa'u  (ku)  1.  the  head,  top,  chief;  hou  qa'u,  U., 
skull;  qa'u  'apula,  U.,  a  wounded  person, 
lit.,  bloody  head;  qa'une  hdu,  the  rocks 
on  shore  as  seen  from  sea;  qd'usi  heniie, 
the  head  of  the  community,  the  person 
whose  duty  it  is  to  approach  the  ances- 
tral ghosts;  qd'ui  i'c,  four  porpoise 
teeth;  qd'uli  'inoni,  the  name  of  a  cer- 
tain spear;  qd'une  e  liimwe,  with  long 
hair;  qd'idimaa,  door  lintel;  i  Qd'una 
Namo,  the  north  cape  of  Ulawa;  qd'u 
ngudu,  blackfish;  qd'uku  e  palapala,  my 
hair  is  gray;  qd'u  ni  saivalo,  four  flying- 
fox  teeth;  qd'u  teroliu,  the  second  finger; 
qd'u  ni  lolinge,  the  chief  portion  at  a 
feast;  qd'iini  uru,  a  phase  of  the  moon; 
qd'ui  'usu,  four  dogs'  teeth,  a  unit  in 
counting;  qd'u  ni  mala  pe'i,  to  consult 
with;  ihui  qe'ii,  hair  of  the  head; 
Kikiri  qe'u,  a  ghost;  maelaa  ni  qc'u, 
meningitis;  'oto  i  qe'une,  right  on  the 
head;  rd'iqe'u,  the  top  of  a  house  post; 
ruuqe'u,  a  stump;  e  leile'inie  qd'une,  he 
moves  his  head  from  side  to  side;  to'o 
qd'u,  to  carry  on  the  head;  uwe  qd'u,  to 
lift  the  head;  hou  mwarelei  qd'u,  the 
skull;  i  qe'una  'apa'apana,  on  his 
shoulder. 
qfi'u  2.  used  as  adverb  of  direction;  qd'u  mei, 
hither;  qd'u  wau,  U.,  qd'u  paro,  qd'u 
niparo,  U.,  over  there,  beyond;  qd'u 
hao,  S.,  qd'u  toli,  S.,  going  north  or  west; 
qd'u  la'au,  S.,  qd'i  {qd'u  i)  lengi,  U., 
going  south  or  east;  qd'i  'ano,  U.,  west; 
qd'i  Purina,  U.,  behind  him;  qd'i  puri, 
U.,  in  the  rear;  to'oha'i  qe'u  ana,  to  be 
entangled  in.  Mota  qatui,  Niue  patu, 
chief. 


qa'u  3.  V.  i.,  to  smoke  (of  fire);  dunge  ko  qe'u, 

the  fire  smokes;   qd'uli  dunge,   smoke; 

qd'uli  dunge  ana.  its  smoke. 

qa'ula-(na,  ni),  gerund.,  ga'z</awa,^its  smoke. 

qa'u  4.  garden  ground  on  the  hills  immediately 

above  the  beach,  the  yams  grown  there 

are  tough  and  are  mainly    scraped  to 

make  kara. 

Qa'uli  'Inoni  a  village  of  Little  Malaita  at  the 

head  of  the  Walo'a'a  River. 
Qa'ulimwaa    the    west    entrance    into    Mara 

Masiki  Channel. 
qa'ulipeni  U.,  the  top  of  the    side-wall  of  a 

house,  purHn. 
Qaulipesi,  Qa'ulipoo  names  of  two  sections  of 

the  village  {poona)  at  Mwado'a. 
Qa'ulo  Bauro,  name  of  the  east  end  of  San 

Cristoval,  Alosi  the  west. 
Qa'ulopaine  (in  M.  A.,  p.  48,  wrongly  spelled 
Pau-ulo)  the  ancestor  eleven  generations 
back  of  Sinehanue-'ou'ou  of  Sa'a,  who 
died  in  1900  and  whose  son  Halutala  is 
now  chief  at  Sa'a.     The  genealogy  is 
as    follows:    Qa'ulopaine  begat  Taheri- 
'usu-'ou'ou,  who  begat  'Ou'ou  i  Kela, 
who  begat  Sinehanue  paine,  who  begat 
Dorahanue    paine,    who    begat    VVate- 
herohero.      Wateherohero     had      only 
daughters  and  bought  (adopted)  Dora 
maesingedi,     who     begat     Wate'ou'ou. 
who  begat  Sinehanue-'ou'ou,  who  begat 
Dora  hoeniseu,  who  was  the  father  of 
Sinehanue-'ou'ou.       Wate'ou'ou       also 
begat   Halumwane,    who   begat   Wate- 
'ou'ou,  who   begat   Halukeni  (female), 
who   is    now    living.     Wate'ou'ou    also 
adopted  Irokalani,  who  in  recent  times 
was   the   head   of   the   heathen   party. 
Wateherohero  had  a  daughter  Halutoro, 
whose  son  was  Walakulu,   who   begat 
Soiolo,   who   begat   Halutoro   (female), 
who  married  Taheri'usu;  their  adopted 
daughter  was  Uqeho'i,  whose  daughter 
Halutoro   is   living.     Dora   maesingedi 
also  begat  Lapaite'e,  who  begat  Dora- 
wewe,    who    begat    a    daughter   Wate- 
'ou'ou keni,  now  married  to  P.  Marita- 
lalo    of    Ulawa.     For    Dorawewe    see 
M.  A.,  p.  50;  the  young  chief  referred 
to  in  the  note  is  Sinehanue-'ou'ou. 
qa'ulunge'ini  S.,  v.  tr.,  lio  qd'ulunge'ini,  to  see 
indistinctly. 
qa'ulunge'i  partic,  indistinct,   of  irregular 
outline. 
qa'unge  n..  a  generation.     Lau  gwounge. 
qa'ungudu  blackfish. 
qa'uqe'ute  fierce  black  smoke,     qd'u  3. 
qa'uroro  a  knot  in  a  line  or  rope,  hou  qa'uroro, 

U.     Motu  qatua,  a  knot. 
qa'u  sua  ngdu  qd'u  suu,  to  gorge,  to  eat  till 
the  head  drops. 
ngdu  qe'u  suunge  n.,  gluttony, 
qa'uto'u  V.  i.,  to  incline  the  head,  to  bow,  to 

duck  the  head.     Wango  qoutou. 
qa'uiilunge  1.  v.  i.,  to  pillow;  used  with  poss.  3; 
qd'uulunge  ana,   to  make  a  pillow  of. 


8s 


RAATA'I 


qM'uuIunge  (continued). 

2.  n.,  a  pillow,  usually  a  piece  of  wood. 

3.  n.,  a  headland  in  a  yam  garden. 
qS'ulunge'ini  v.  tr.,  to  support  as  a  pillow. 
qe'i  du  qe'i,  a  bamboo  with  close  joints. 
qela  1.  a  thousand,  of  coconuts,  qela  ni  niu. 
qela  2.  v.  i.,  to  place  alongside,  to  lay  parallel. 

U..  V.  tr.,  to  place  upon. 
qelaa'ini  tr. 
qeli  1.  to  be  raveled. 

qeli  qeliqeli  2.  v.  tr.,  to  deceive,  cheat;  kie  ko 
tale'i  qeliqeliki'e  tnola,  we  merely  deceive 
ourselves,     qdli  1 . 
qelo,  qeloqelo  v.  tr.,  to  betray. 

qelola-(ku)  gerund.  Florida  pero. 
qelu,  qeluqelu  1.  to  roll,  to  cause  to  turn  over. 
tataqdnqelu.  2.  to  accuse,  to  put  the 
blame  on,  to  charge  with  immorality; 
qelu  u-ala  ilengine  ngaini,  to  accuse 
anyone;  qelu  ola,  to  accuse;  qelu  olanga, 
accusation. 
qelusi  tr. 

qelusila-(ku)    gerund.     Mota   wil,   Malay, 
Dyak,  Tagalog  giling,  V'iti  iviri. 
qera  to  be  in  flood,  to  be  in  abundance,  gener- 
ally of  flood  waters;  kone  e  qera,  much 
flood  waters;  lue  qera,  spring  tide. 
qeraqeraha  v.  n.,  used  with  poss.  3;  qera- 
qeraha  ana  mu  'inoni,  exceeding  many 
people. 
qeru  U.,  n.,  lip;  qeru  'upu,  to  hate,  lit.,  swollen 
lip,  stuck  out  lip;  Uo  qeru  'upu,  lio  qeru 
n^udu,  to  grudge,  to  liate. 
qeruqeru  U.,  n.,  lip. 
qesa'a  S.,  adj.,  wet,  damp. 
qeto  to  be  feeble,  weak,  cowardly. 

qetola-(na,  ni)  U.,  gerund.;  qelolana  ddngi,  a 

wind  decreased  in  force,  gone  down, 
qetoha  S.,  v.  n.,  used  with  poss.  3;  qelo- 
haana  ddngi,  a  wind  decreased  in  force, 
qetonga  v.  n.,  weakness,  cowardice, 
qetosi  tr.,  to  be  unable  to  do  through  weak- 
ness.    Florida  helo,  still,  calm. 
qe'u  1.  to  be  foolish,     ha'aqe'u. 

qe'unge  v.  n.,  foolishness;  wdi  ni  qe'unge, 
strong   drink    (late  use).     Wango   qeu, 
Mota  qure. 
qe'u  2.  to  be  deaf  and  dumb;  a  qe'u,  the  deaf 

mute;  qe'u  ereere,  dumb. 
qe'u  3.  nunuhe'i  qe'u.  to  enter,  to  be  entangled 

in.     qd'ii  1. 
qe'uqe'u'a'a  adj.,  foolish,  silly. 

qe'uqe'u'a'anga  v.  n.,  foolishness;  wdi  ni 
qe'uqe'u'a'anga,  strong  drink. 
qi'e  S..  qi'a  U..  to  be  in  good  health,  to  be  fat, 
chubby;  qi'e  dliho'i,  to  recover  soundness 
of    health.     Nguna    qia,    well,     good; 
Mota  wia,  good;  New  Guinea,  hie. 
qi'eqi'ala  adj.,  fat,  whole,  healthy. 
qiiqii  S.,  n.,  mud,  slush. 

qiiqii'e  adj.,  muddy,  slushy. 
qilo'a  adj.,  springy,  pliable. 
qini'a  U.,  adj.,  wet,  damp,     ha'aqini.     maraau 
wei    qini.    east-by-north    wind    (brings 
rain),     Lau  gwini. 
qire  n.,  a  stalk  of  bamboo,  nga  qire.  qirei  eu. 
qiruu  U.,  piruu,  S.,  one  qiruu,  black  sand. 


qisi  V.  i.,  to  spurt,  to  splash. 

qisihi  U.,  qisili  S.,  tr.,  to  splash  a  person. 
Samoa  pisi,  Motu  pisili. 

qito  S.,  pito  U.,  to  sprout,  to  shoot,  to  begin  to 
grow;  hohola  e  qito,  the  yams  have 
sprouted.  2.  n.,  a  growing  coconut, 
hoi  qito.  3.  n.,  a  sprout;  qitona,  its 
sprout.     Wango  qilo. 

qole  U.,  pole  S.,  to  dream,  ma'ahii  qole.  nau 
ma'ahu  qolea,  I  dreamed  it;  ma'ahu 
qolenga,  v.  n.,  a  dream.  Mota  qore, 
Florida  viaturu  bole,  to  dream. 

qongi,  qongiqongi  U.,  pongi  S.  1.  v.  tr..  to 
promise,     rodi  qongi,  to  plight  troth. 

qongi  (ku)  S.  2.  n.,  a  season,  time,  t  qongina 
a  ola,  in  So-and-so's  day;  ana  qongine, 
in  its  season;  hduliqongi,  one  day  of  a 
series;  'o  holo  onu'e  qongiku  hao,  thou 
hast  cut  short  my  time;  qongi  ko  sisiho 
'oto,  the  time  is  at  hand;  e  hute  lalahie 
qongine,  born  out  of  due  time,    pongi  2. 

qooqoota  S.,  foundation,  poopoota.  qooqoota 
ani  nume,  foundations  of  the  house. 

qote  (ku;  U.,  pote  S.,  n..  buttock. 

qo'uru'uru  U.,  po'uru'uru  S..  to  kneel, 
qo'uru'urunga  v.  n.,  kneeling. 


ra  1.  suffixed  pron.,  plural  3,  used  of  persona 

only;  attached  as  object  to  verbs  and 

prepositions;  in  Sa'a  when  ra  is  used  of 

a  body  of  people  or  a  company,  and  i  or 

u  precedes,  the  d  of  rd  does  not  change 

into    e,    hahird    diana,    on    the    good. 

Mota  ra  2. 
ra  2.  forms  part  of  rdru'e.  rdru'i.  rd'elu,  etc. 
raa,  raaraa  1.  v.  i.,  to  shine  brightly,     ha'araa. 

nemo  raaraa,  S.,  sun  and  rain,  a  sun 

shower. 
raahi  tr.,  to  scorch  (of  the  sun), 
raangi  tr.,  to  shine  on,  to  give  light  to,  to 

enlighten.     2.     n.,     the     sun's     light, 

radiance,  bright  light;  dunge  ni  raa,  a 

burning-glass;     siiuhai     raa,     drought. 

Wango  raraha.  Florida  raraha,  Maori  ra, 

the  sun. 
raa  3.  the  name  of  a  month,  Januarj-. 
Raa  4.  a  rock  near  Arona,  southeast  cape  of 

Ulawa.     cf.  hdu  maelo. 
raapea  a  needle  made  of  the  midrib  of  the  sago 

leaf  (mudi  sa'o). 
raaraa  n..  sunlight,  radiance,  brilliancy;  raaraa 

ani  meurilte.  the  light  of  life. 
ra'aranga-(ku)  n.,  1.  the  light  of  the  sun,  light; 

ra'arangaku.     my     light,     met.,     glory; 

ra'arangana    sato,     light    of    the    sun. 

2.  md'ule'i  ra'arangana.  to  be  in  awe  of 

it.     ranga.  cf.  rara. 
ra'aranga  3.  because  of,  on  account  of;  used 

with  poss.  3. 
ra'aranga'a  adj..  lightened  by  the  rays  of  the 

sun;  used  of  dazzling  Hght. 
ra'arara  U.,  adj.,  nimo  ra'arara,  sun  and  rain. 

rara. 
raata'i  partic,  regularly,  frequently;  'emi  ka'a 

are'o  raata'i,  we  do  not  call  upon  thee 

regularly. 


RADE 


86 


rade  n.,  a  reed,  tnaai  rade.     Florida  ade. 
radu  1.  V.  i.,  to  break  up;  radu  mo'umo'usie  mti 

'i'eli,  break  the  ropes  in  pieces. 
radu  2.  U.,  v.  tr.,  hum  raduaii,  to  run  stretching 

out  the  body. 
rae  1.  n.,  a  corpse;  used  in  Sa'a  with  poss.  3; 
rae  ana  a  ola,  the  corpse  of  So-and-so; 
in    Ulawa   with    suffixed    pronoun    na, 
raena,  his  corpse.     In  M.  A.,  p.  260,  the 
spelling  is  wrongly'  given  as  ra'e.     kiilu 
rae,  to  bury  at  sea;  lango  rae,  a  blue- 
bottle fly;  i'o  pe'i  rae,  S.,  the  mourning 
before  burial.     M.  A.,  pp.  261,  262. 
ra'e  2.  n.,  a  palm  used  for  making  spears;  ra'e 
ni  tolo,  a  spear  with  grass  plaiting,  made 
on  Big  Malaita  near  Waisisi. 
ra'elu  sufT.  pron.,  plural  3;  attached  to  verbs 

and  prepositions  as  object, 
ra'era'e  carefully,  thoroughly. 
raha   adj.,    big;    not    in    common    use.     laha. 
Oa  Raha,  Santa  Anna  Island  at  south 
end  of  San  Cristoval;  pangupangu  raha, 
U.,  big,  huge;  a  Poro  Hdnua  Raha,  U., 
name  of  a  ghost,  Mr.  Big-land.     Florida 
haba,  Borneo  raya. 
raharaha  'apii  raharaha,  an  issue  of  blood. 
rahe  v.  i.,  to  be  weary  from  work,  to  work  hard, 
to  work  to  no  effect. 
rahenga  v.  n.,  hard  work,  weariness  of  body. 
San  Cristoval  rafe. 
rahito'u  v.  i.,  to  be  downcast  (of  eyes),     lo'u. 
raho  n.,  layers  of  thatch  made  of  sago  leaf 
sewn  on  bamboo  laths  with  walewalc; 
siki  raho,  a  beetle,  held    upside  down 
against  a  strip  of  sa'o  leaf. 
rahoraho  (ku)  U.,  and  Qaloto,  n.,  sides,  ribs 

(of  persons).     Wango  ragaraga. 
rai  1.  contraction  of  rdu  i. 

rai  2.  to  clear  undergrowth  with  intent  to  make 
a  garden. 
raingi  tr. 

raite'ini  tr.,  to  clear  the  undergrowth  away 
from  a  thing, 
ra'i  3.  v.  tr.,  to  adopt  a  child,  to  keep  a  tame 
animal,  to  keep  a  turtle  in  a  bowl,  to 
nourish;  honii  kira  rd'ia,  the  turtle  they 
kept;  a  Warahumika  rd'i  i'a,  a  legendary 
person. 
ra'inge  v.  n.,  an  orphan,  an  adopted  child. 
ra'ila-(ku)  gerund, 
ra'i  4.  ra'i  sen,  a  platform  on  the  beach  used  in 

connection  with  bonito  (sou). 
ra'i     5.     verbal     suffix     used     intransitively. 

taherd'i,  taraure'i. 
ra'iqe'u  n.,  the  top  of  a  pillar  or  house  post 
cut  into  a  hollow  to  hold  the  ridgepole. 
raimaa    to    cut    and    disfigure    the    face    in 

mourning, 
ra'ini  verbal  suffix  used    transitively,     larau- 

re'ini. 
ra'irehi   to   be   under   the   lee,   sheltered;   i'o 
rd'irehi,     to     stay     sheltered.     Florida 
rahi,  hidden. 
ra'irehi'e  adj.,  sheltered. 
ra'isinge  n.  weapons,  tackle,  mu  re'isinge. 
raka  U.,  v.  i.,  excessive,     dunga  e  raka,  too 
big  a  fire;  mwai  keni  ana  dutiga  rakanga. 


raka  (continued). 

women  who  make  too  big  fires;  e  pdina 
raka,  excessively  big;  iiwe  raka,  to  break 
with    a    loud    noise.     Wango    rakahi, 
excessive. 
rakahi  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  melt  (of  fire),  to  heat 

and  soften. 
rakapau  v.  i.,  to  defend,  to  protect;  used  with 
poss.    3    and    with    preposition    haahi. 
pdii  2. 
rakerake  U.,  n.,  a  rib  of  the  body, 
raki  v.  i.,  to  catch  with  tongs, 
rakisi  tr. 
ireki  n.,  tongs. 
rako  1.  V.  i.,  to  give  a  sensation  to;  used  with 
poss.    3.     e    rako    diana,    it    causes    a 
pleasant  sensation,  it  is  pleasant;  rako 
'aela,  rako  ta'a,  to  be  unpleasant,  irk- 
some; e  rako  'aela  aku,  it  goes  against 
my   grain;   rako   'aelanga,   n.,    trouble, 
feeling  of  unpleasantness. 
rako  2.  v.  i.,  to  be  quiet,  gentle,  docile,  easily 
entreated,     ha'arako.     manatanaerako, 
he  is  gentle  in  disposition;  ddii  rako,  to 
keep   quiet;    ioli   rako,    to    be    patient, 
enduring. 
rakonga   v.    n.,     gentleness;    sae   rakonga, 
gentleness,     docility     of     temper;     toli 
rakonga,  patience. 
rako  3.  adv.,  gently,     lae  molai  rako,  go  gently, 
rakoma'i  S.,  partic,  longitudinally. 
rakoma'ini  S.,  lakoma'ini  U.,  to  place  longi- 
tudinally   upon,    to    affix;    lupii    rako- 
ma'ini, to  nail  upon,  to  crucify. 
rakoma'i  U.,  v.  tr.,  wala'a  rakoma'ia  ta'ane 
lolaha,  to  make  advances  in  word. 
raku  n.,  a  canoe  holding  four  men,  'iola  rakii. 
rakuhe  (na)  n.,  fat,  caul  fat;  rakuhana  poo,  lard, 
rama,  ramarama  n.,  flotsam,  floating  matter 

collected  in  a  tide-rip. 
Ramarama  the  village  in  the  south  end  of  Port 

Adam,  Malaita. 
rame  n.,  the  edible  catkins  of  the  male  su'e  tree, 
ramo  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  strong,  to  be  renowned  in 
fighting,  to  be  a  champion;  ramo  suusuu, 
to  be  strong  forever.     2.  n.,  a  champion, 
a  fighting  man;  ko  lae  ni  ramo,  goes  in 
his  might. 
ramonga  v.  n.,  strength  of  body,  prowess; 
dan  ramonga  ana  ngaini,  to  treat  any 
one  with  violence. 
ramoha  S.,  v.  n.,  strength;  used  with  poss.  3 

ana.     raynohaana  ddngi,  a  gale. 
ramola-(na)    gerund.,    used    in    Ulawa    as 

ramoha. 
ramo'i  tr.,  to  force,  to  apply  violence  to. 
ramoramo'a    adj.,     mightily;     ddu    ramo- 
ramo'a,    to    force,    to    compel,    to    do 
violence;  used  with  poss.  3. 
ramoramo'anga    n.,     dsu    ramoramo'anga, 
mighty  work. 
ranga  v.  i.,  to  rise  (of  the  moon),     ra'aranga  1. 
ranga'a  adj.,  risen;  waarowaaro  e  ranga'a, 
the  moon  is  up. 
rangariro'a  S.,  adj.,  sparkling,     cf.  nangaliro'a. 
rangasi   ha'arangasi,   v.   tr.,    to  blow  out,    to 
distend. 


87 


RARATA 


rango  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  withered,  dry.  ripe  (of 
yams  when  tlie  vine  withers).  2.  n., 
mwai  rango  ni  'ei.  dead  trees;  the  mark 
of  a  garden,  the  larger  trees  were  not 
felled  but  were  killed  by  fire. 
rarango  n.,  S.,  a  dead  bough,  a  spike,     a 

horn  (late  use). 
rangorango  U.,  as  rarango.     Wango  rango- 
rango. 

rao  1.  (na,  ni)  n.,  side  (of  things);  ana  rao  'iola 
i  qaloqalo,  on  the  right  side  of  the  ship; 
f  raona  wdi,  U.,  by  the  side  of  the  stream. 

rao,  rarao  2.  v.  i.,  to  be  stuck,  to  cling  to;  used 

withposs3.     ha'ararao.     yiimekue  rarao 

'oto  ana,  my  hand  clung  fast  to  it.  i'o 

rarao,  to  be  fast,  stuck  tight,  firm. 

raohi  tr.,  to  cling  to,  to  adhere. 

raoha'ini  tr.,  to  place  in  conjunction  with, 

to  attach, 
raoha'ipartic.inconjunctionwith,  joined  to. 

rao  3.  exclam.,  'olie  rao,  used  of  matters  of 
uncertainty  when  unwilling  to  commit 
oneself  to  a  positive  statement;  rao  kirc 
sa'a  sili  'oto,  they  certainly  shall  not 
enter.  The  demonstrative  na  is  added 
in  questioning,  raona,  is  it  not  so? 
hat  raona,  S.,  hai  raoni,  U.,  expresses 
disapprobation;  well  I  never. 

raomae,  raraomae  S.,  to  act  craftily. 
raomaenga  v.  n.,  craftiness,  wiles. 

raori'i  n.,  a  virgin,  male  or  female;  keni  raori'i, 
a  virgin;  maholo  ni  raori'i,  time  of 
virginity. 

rape  kiukiu  rape,  a  wagtail,     hi'uhi'u  kape. 

rape'i,  raperape'i   U.,   to  stake,   to  prop,   to 
strengthen. 
rape'ita  (ku)  n.,  a  prop,  a  being  strength- 
ened;    rape'ilana,     to     strengthen     it. 
cf.  sape'i. 

raporapo  n.,  cross  sticks,  generally  of  waowao 
on  a  platform  (lahe). 

rapu,  ra'urepu  S.,  rapurapu  U.,  v.  i.,  to  strike, 
to  hit,  to  tattoo,  rdpu  kdide,  to  tattoo 
the  frigate-bird  on  the  cheek;  rdpii 
lakoma'i  pe'i  po'upo'u,  to  crucify;  e  rdpu 
ngurusie  nihona,  knocked  his  teeth  out. 
rapusi  tr. 
rapute'ini  tr.,  to  collide  with;  c  rdpule'inic 

lolohola,  he  laid  the  measure  along. 
rapute'i  partic.     qa'une  e  rdpute'i  i   'ano, 
his     head     bumped     on     the    ground; 
e  rapute'i  salo  molemoU,  a  red  sky. 
rapusila-(ku)  gerund.     Florida  labu,   Bou- 
gainville Straits  lapu. 

Rapuanate  a  legendary  hero  of  the  Three 
Sisters  Islands;  his  thigh  bone  is  cur- 
rently reported  to  be  in  some  place  on 
Malau  Piiina. 

raqa    U.,    v.    i.,    to    be    deceitful,     kururaqa. 
siho  raqa  ana,  to  exaggerate, 
raqatanga    v.    n.    (double    noun    ending), 
deceit. 

raqasi  S.,  temporarily;  i'o  raqasi,  to  sojourn; 
ma'ohi  raqasi,  to  await. 

raqaraqa'a  U.,  temporarily. 

rara,  ra'arara  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  hot,  pungent  (of 
condiments);  with  preposition  liaalii,  to 


rara  1  (continued). 

be  zealous,  to  guard,  to  exercise  super- 
vision over,  to  be  jealous;  used  with 
poss.  3,  to  be  greedy,  to  look  after  one's 
own  ends,  hd'irara.  e  rara  mea,  it 
burnt  the  tongue,  met.,  it  was  unpleas- 
ant, it  was  hot  (of  words  of  rebuke); 
sato  e  rara  mea,  the  sun  shone  with 
scorching  heat;  meaku  e  rara,  my  tongue 
is  parched;  mc'i  sae  e  rara,  earnestness; 
rara  haahie  lolala  inge'ie,  guards  his 
house;  e  rara  ana,  he  looks  after  his 
own;  i  sapena  i  Ulawa  e  rara,  apos- 
trophe addressed  to  Ulawa.  cf.  ha'addhi. 
Wango  rara,  Viti  rara,  powerful. 

rara  2.  v.  i.,  to  be  shriveled  up,  withered,  ripe, 
parched  (of  trees  and  gardens);  rara 
inoumou,  ripe  and  falling  to  pieces; 
mdi  rara,  dead  low  water  at  spring  tides. 

rara  3.  of  days  of  the  moon;  rara  talait,  S., 
twenty-first    and    twenty-second    days. 

rara  4.  the  coral  tree  (Ery thrina  indica) ;  winter, 
the  time  of  flowering  of  this  tree;  » 
Melulei  Rara,  name  of  a  village  on 
Ugi  (lit.,  in  the  shade  of  the  coral  tree). 

rara  5.  takarara,  come  undone. 

rarada  U.  1.  v.  i.,  to  come  to  land,  to  ground; 
hoi  i'a  e  lae  mdi  i  rarada  i  saini  one,  the 
fish  came  and  grounded  on  the  beach. 

rarada  2.  sae  rarada,  indignation. 

rarada  3.  ha'ararada,  v.  tr.,  to  broil,  to  ir\' 
(late  use). 

raradi'e  S.,  ere  raradi'e,  correction. 

raradu  v.  i.,  to  stretch  the  arms. 

rarahi  1.  v.  tr.,  to  importune,  to  urge,  with 
ddii,  S.,  tdu,  U.,  e  tdii  rarahira. 

rarahi  2.  du  rarahi,  the  third  finger. 

rara'i  1.  U..  v.,  to  be  rippled,  of  the  surface  of 
the  sea. 

rara'i  2.  U.,  to  be  beautiful. 

raramaa  v.  i.,  to  reprove  openly,  to  be  insolent, 
wilful,  barefaced;  ere  raramaa,  insolent 
speech, 
raramaanga  v.  n.,  open  rebuke,  insolence; 
raramaanga  ana  i'onga  tata'ala,  rebuke 
for  lasciviousness;  i'o  raramaanga,  las- 
civiousness.     Wango  raramaa. 

raramea  v.  i.,  to  be  hot,  scorching;  sato  e  rara- 
mea,  the  sun  is  burning  hot. 

raranga  n.,  the  spine  of  the  sea-urchin. 

raranga'a  adj.,  open,  exposed  to  the  sun,  of 
situation. 

rarangana  noko  me'ulc'i  rarangana,  I  am  afraid 
of  it. 

rarango  cf.  rango. 

rarangi,  rararangi  1.  v.  i.,  to  warm  oneself  at  a 
fire;  e  'iirc'ure  ko  rarangi,  he  stood 
warming  himself.  Mota  rara  2,  Polj-- 
nesian  rara. 

rarangi  2.  v.  tr.,  to  be  close  to,  to  surround. 

rarapuupuu  frequently,  often. 

Rararo  Cape  Hartig,  Little  Malaita,  west  of 
Cape  Zelee. 

rarasi  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  shriveled,  withering, 
palsied.  2.  U.,  a  phase  of  the  moon,  the 
last  quarter. 

rarata  n.,  a  skull. 


RARE 


88 


rare  1.  a  sleeping-mat  plaited  of  coconut  leaves; 
hd'u  rare,  poe  rare,  to  plait  such  a  mat. 
2.  V.  tr.,  to  singe  a  pig  with  dry  coconut 
leaves;  an  ordeal  wherein  the  accused 
standing  on  a  platform  is  singed  with 
dry  coconut  leaf.     M.  A.,  p.  212. 

rareta'ini,  ra'erareta'ini  v.  tr.,  to  tend,  to  care 
for,  to  do  chores, 
rareta'i  v.  tr.     hd'irareta'i. 
rareta'inila-(ku)  gerund. 

raro  1.  S.,  adv.,  precedes  the  verb,  used  of  con- 
secutive action;  then,  consequent  upon, 
constantly,  ko  raro  ma'ohie  kd'u,  thej- 
are  still  awaiting  it. 

raro  2.  U.,  mwai  lehu  raro,  open  places,  glades. 

raro  3.  raro  suue'i,  to  turn  a  bag  inside  out. 

raroni  v.  tr.,  to  hurt,  to  do  harm  to;  e  sa'a 
raronie  auhenue  inge'ie,  he  will  do  no 
evil  to  his  neighbor. 

raru'e  S.,  raru'i  U.,  pers.  pron.,  dual.  3,  suflfixed 
to  verbs  and  prepositions  as  object. 

rata  a  bamboo  water-carrier;  te'i  rata,  to  fill  a 
bamboo  with  water.  San  Cristoval 
rata. 

ratawaari  U.,  half  and  half,  neither  one  thing 
nor  the  other. 

rate  ta'alakai  rate,  lakatakai  rate,  down  (of 
nestlings) . 

rato  1.  V.  i.,  to  be  full  grown,  of  full  age.     2.  n., 
a  full-grown  person,  an  elder;  nm  rato 
ni  mwane,  old  men;  mu  rato  ni  keni,  old 
women;  nani  rato,  for  the  elders. 
ratonga  v.  n.,  full  growth. 

rau  1.  n.,  a  leaf  used  as  a  wrapper  for  food  to 
be  cooked;  mwarau,  thin;  'apai  reu,  a 
leaf;  mu  'apai  reu  ana  mu  dango.  the 
leaves  of  the  trees;  a  Lulu  reu,  a  proper 
name  (lit.,  folder  of  leaves).  Mota 
nau,  Polynesian  rau. 

rau  2.  S.  (na,  ni),  bank,  side,  of  things;  with 
locative  i  beside,  ro  rdui  wei,  the  two 
banks  of  the  stream;  t  reune  wdi.  beside 
the  stream.     Wango  rau,  Florida  lau. 

rau  3.  n.,  a  plank;  used  with  genitive  i.  rdureu. 
rdi  hapa,  a  thwart;  rdi  dango,  S.,  rdi  'ei, 
U.,  a  plank;  rdi  hist,  a  stake. 

rMu  4.  V.  tr.,  to  scrape  up,  to  gather  up  with 
the  hand.     Mota  rau. 

rau  5.  V.  i.,  to  heal  over  (of  a  wound).  6.  n.,  a 
scab  over  a  wound,  a  scar. 

rSu  7.  v.  i.,  to  adhere,  to  abide;  rdu  mehu,  to 
abide, 
raungi  tr.,  to  adhere  to,  to  abide  in. 
rauhe'ini  tr.,  to  be  constantly  in  a  place, 
rausi  tr.,  to  adhere  to  and  spoil;  e  ka'a  me'i 

ola  ke  rdusie,  pure,  undefiled. 
rauhe'i  v.  i.,  to  frequent;  e  tale'i  reuke'i  'oto 
ana,  he  frequented  it. 

rau  8.  V.  i.,  to  be  humble,  lowly;  me'i  keni  reu 
a  lowly  woman, 
raute'i  partic,  humble,  i'o  rdule'i. 

rJlu  9.  rdui  helu,  10,000  coconuts,     cf.  'apai  niu. 
Rjluehu  the  pinnacle  rock  at  the  east  entrance 

to  Mara  Masiki  Channel. 
rauka  n.,  trigger  of  a  gun  (English  lock). 
rtt'ur«pu   1.  jellyfish,  Portuguese  man-o'-war. 
rdpu.     2.  a  whip. 


raururu  to  abide  constantly,  rdu  7.  Wedau 
rau  nutna,  to  cohabit. 

re  cf.  rd  1. 

re'a  adj.,  white,  rere'a,  marare'a,  rere, 
huhurere'a.     Viti  rea,  albino. 

reke  v.  i.,  to  jump,  to  leap,    ha'areke,  ha'arekehi. 

reko  esculent  hibiscus. 

renga'a  adj.,  glistening. 

reoreo  the  chambered  nautilus,  hoi  reoreo; 
pieces  of  the  shell  cut  in  various  patterns 
are  used  for  inlaying,  reoreo  alaha,  a 
large  variety  of  nautilus;  kala  reoreo, 
kala  hile,  kala  'apani  pa'aleo,  to  cut 
nautilus  shell  for  inlaying;  toli  reoreo,  to 
inlay  with  nautilus. 

repa,  rerepa  v.  i.,  to  be  elliptical  in  shape,  said 
of  the  shinbone,  which  is  often  distorted, 
owing  to  rheumatism. 
reparepata'a  U.,  rounded  in  shape. 

repi  n.,  a  harlot,     ha' are  pi.     Florida  rebi. 

repo  1.  V.  i.,  to  be  ripe,  full  grown;  aau  kosi 
repo,  the  nuts  are  just  ripening;  aau  e 
repo  kosi  holaa,  when  the  nuts  are  ripe 
the  weather  is  calm.  2.  a  fully  grown 
person,  repo  ni  mwane,  an  adult  man; 
repo  ni  keni,  an  adult  woman;  poro  repo, 
used  of  a  person  in  authority. 
reponga  v.  n.,  full  age. 
repoha  v.  n.,  used  with  poss.  3:  repohaana, 

ripeness,  old  age. 
'ai  repo  a  tree  used  to  make  pestles  for 
pounding  yams  and  taro. 
j  repo  3.  V.  tr.,  to  suspend,  to  hang  up  (of  things). 

rere  1.  v.  tr.,  to  sharpen  by  rubbing,  ha'arere. 
rere  hdu,  to  sharpen  an  axe;  rere  hdunge, 
axe-sharpening. 
rere'a  adj.,  white,  clean,  sharpened;  prob- 
ably connected  with  rere.  cf.  re'a, 
M.  L.,  p.  97,  re'are'a  does  not  appear; 
in  Viti  rea  albino  the  final  a  is  probably 
adjectival. 

rere  2.  quicksands;  i  rere,  the  beach  at  A'ulu. 
saisai  rere,  a  shoal,  bank,  at  sea. 

rere'a  adj.,  clean,  white,     ha'arere'a. 

rerede  1.  v.  tr.,  to  slip,  to  slide.  2.  U.,  a  land- 
sUp. 

rereha  (na)  U..  rerehana  wdieu,  a  school  of 
bonito. 

rerepata'a  S.,  adj.,  rounded  in  shape. 

rerepono  v.  i.,  to  be  thick,  closely  matted,  of 
bush.     pono. 

rereqeluqelu  U.,  v.  i.,  to  be  laid  low,  recum- 
bent,    qelu. 

rete  rele  hdu,  to  gnash,  to  grind  the  teeth;  rete 
hdunge,  gnashing  of  teeth,     nunurete. 

reu  cf.  rdu. 

ri  U.,  li  S.,  verbal  suffix,     ha'atauri. 

ride  U.,  ride  ni  'inoni,  a  dwarf. 

rienga  hd'irienga,  v.  n.,  a  contest. 

rihu'e  n.,  a  cliff.     Wango  rihua. 

rihunge'ini  v.  tr.,  to  pray  to  (a  Wango  word 
introduced  in  early  days). 
rihunge'inge   v.   n.,   prayer.     Florida  liu- 
livuti. 

ri'i  the  treble  drum  in  the  para  ni  'o'o. 

riirii  1.  n.,  locust,  cicada,  its  shrilling  is  taken 
as  a  bad  omen. 


89 


RORO'A 


ri'jri'i  (ku)  2.  S.,  n.,  finger.  3.  ri'iri'i  ni  'inoni 
(a)  a  dwarf,  (b)  a  great  number  of  men. 
4.  'o'i  ri'iri'i,  v.  tr.,  to  break  in  pieces; 
'oke  'o'i  ri'iri'ire,  thou  shalt  break  them 
in  pieces.  V'aturanga  ririki,  Florida 
nggiringgiri,   Makura  wiri-kikin,   liand. 

rike,  rikerike  S.,  v.  i.,  to  rejoice,     ruke  U. 
rikanga   v.    n.,   sae   rikanga,    rejoicings   of 
heart.     \'iti  rika,  to  jump. 

riki  1.  adj..  small;  Oa  Riki,  Little  Oa  Island. 

riki  U.  2.  liki  S.,  riki  huna,  to  loosen  the  bands 
holding  a  canoe,  to  take  up  anchor. 

Ripoo,  Ripu,  Rupoo  S..  a  %'illage  on  the  west 
coast  of  Ulawa:  Maadi'a,  its  landing- 
place. 

riridi  (na)  eaves  of  house;  riridine  nume,  i  riri- 
dine,  under  the  eaves. 

ririholo  U.,  a  gap  in  the  hills,  a  pass. 

riro  ha'ariro,  v.  tr.,  to  entice  with  food. 

ro  numeral,  two;  used  only  in  composition; 
used  also  in  exclamation  of  a  large  num- 
ber; forms  part  of  the  pers.  pron.  moro, 
koro.  e  ro  ola,  two  things;  e  ro  'ala, 
only  two  things;  e  ro  ini.  two  things;  ro 
ola,  vocati\e,  you  two,  of  husband  and 
wife;  ro  mwane,  you  two.  exclamation  of 
surprise  or  vocative;  ro  mwane,  the  two 
pointers  of  the  Southern  Cross,  M.  A., 
p.  349;  ro  'inoni,  you  two.  of  husband 
and  wife;  ro  'inoni  ineu,  my  parents;  ro 
hd'i  ma'amana,  ro  rna'amana,  father  and 
son;  maraaii  ro  one,  east-northeast  wind. 

roa  n..  black-lip  pearl  shell  used  as  a  coconut 
scraper;  it  forms  part  of  a  man's  ordi- 
nary baggage. 

roaroa  windmill  made  of  coconut  leaf,  a  child's 
plaything.  Hedle>-,  Funafuti  Exjjed.,  p. 
3o4. 

rodi  V.  tr..  to  confirm,  to  make  firm,  to  grip; 
hele  rodi,  to  grip,  to  hold  tight;  rodi 
qongi,  to  plight  troth. 

rodo  1.  n.,  night,     ha'arodo,  hd'irodo.     i  rodo, 

at  night,  by  night;  laelae  i  rodo,  to  go 

till  nightfall;  nga  rodo,  last  night;  si'iri 

i  rodo,  tonight.     2.  v.,  redup.,  rorodo; 

e  rodo  'olo,  it  is  night;  nga  rodo  e  rodo, 

the  night  fell;  hd'irodo  e  rodo,  last  night; 

maa  rodo,   to  be  blind.     3.   to  forget; 

sae  rorodo,  U.,  v.  tr„  to  forget. 

rodosi  V.  tr..  to  be  benighted,  e  rodosi' emelu . 

lodoma'ini  S.,  rodoha'ini  tr.,  to  be  benighted. 

rodoma'i,  rodoha'i  partic,  till  nightfall;  lae 

rodoma'i,     go     till     nightfall.     Florida 

rorodo,  blind;  Omba  dodo,  cloud;  viala- 

dodo,   blind;   Malo,   N.   H.,   bong  dodo, 

night;  Wango  rodo,  night. 

rodo  4.  S..  the  name  of  a  month,  'dsi  rodo, 
February. 

rodohono  1.  v.  i.,  to  become  dark,  to  be  pitch 
dark.  hono.  e  rodohono  pupulu.  mid- 
night, pitch  dark;  saeku  e  rodohono,  I 
lost  consciousness.  2.  n..  darkness,  of 
day  or  night;  tne'i  rodohono. 
rohu,  ro'urohu  v.  i..  to  be  silent,  to  cease 
speaking;  toli  rohu,  to  cease  speaking. 
rohute'ini  tr.,  to  ignore,  to  hold  one's 
peace  at;  mwane  "o  ro' urohule' inie  ngar- 
alaku,  hold  not  thy  peace  at  my  tears. 


roka,  'aroka  adj.,  open,  set  open  wide. 

rokasi  v.  tr.,  to  open,  to  open  out,  to  unfold. 

rokasUa-(na)  gerund. 

rokata'i  partic.  open,  unfolded. 

roma  1.  an  oyster  shell  found  in  Mara  Masiki 
Channel,  the  red  part  at  the  base  is 
employed  in  the  making  of  shell  money 
(.haa). 

roma  2.  v.  i.,  to  poison  fish  with  Barringtonia, 
etc. 

rongo,  rorongo  S.,  roogorongo  U.,  v.  tr.,  to 
hear,  to  listen,  to  hear  tidings  of. 
ha'arongo,  qa'arongo.  ka'a  rongo  lele- 
ngani,  not  hearing  clearly;  e  rongo  'oto 
mola  ana  walana,  listened  to  his  word; 
MOM  rongoa,  I  heard  it;  rongo  'aela,  U.,  to 
make  a  din,  to  chatter  and  disturb; 
rongo  keni,  to  inquire  about  a  girl  as  a 
wife  for  a  boy.  to  betroth;  rongo 
keninge,  v.  n.  i'ota'i  rongo  keninga,  to 
set  about  a  betrothal;  rongo  ni  'elinge, 
to  hear  with  the  ear;  rongo  odoodo,  U., 
with  poss.  3.,  to  hear  tidings  of;  rongo 
isuli,  to  be  obedient  to;  qa'arongoisuli. 
rongonga  v.  n..  hearing. 
rongola-(ku)  gerund.  Mota  rongo,  to 
apprehend;  Maori  rongo,  to  hear;  Lau 
ro,  to  hear. 

rongorongo  U.  1.  n.,  a  measure,  from  the  finger- 
tips to  the  right  ear.  U.  2.  n.,  nga  rongo- 
rongo ni  ola,  a  multitude  of  things. 

ro'o  U..  ro'o  rua,  to  wind  a  fishing-line  on  a 
board. 

rorahi  v.  tr.,  to  hasten  a  person  unduly,  to  be 
too  soon  for.     r  or  or  a. 
rorahila-(ku)  gerund. 

rori  1.  V.  tr..  to  ram,  to  load  a  gun.  2.  n..  a 
ramrod. 

rori  3.  v.  tr..  to  take  the  pith  from  laths  of 
palm  wood,  rori  pi'e. 

rori,  ro'irori  4.  v.  i.,  to  babble,  to  prattle. 
kirori,  hirori,  'irori. 

roro  1.  V.  i..  to  be  tied  tightly,  to  incur  a  debt, 
to  render  oneself  liable;  roro  mae,  to 
strangle;  roro  to'oni,  a  belt  to  hold  up 
clothes. 
roro'i  tr.,  to  tie  tightly,  to  draw  tight,  to 
brace,  to  hold  tight;  pili  roro'i,  to  press 
down  tight. 
roroa'i  tr.,  to  have  incurred  a  debt,  to 
involve  oneself,  to  be  placed  in  invid- 
ious case,     ha'aroroa'i. 

roro  (ku)  2.  bosom,  the  belly  of  a  snake; «  rorona 
Abraham,  on  Abraham's  bosom, 
roroma'i  roroma'i  sae,  used  with  poss.  3  and 
locative  »;  «  roroma'i  sae  ana,  on  his 
bosom.  Mota  rorol,  to  carry  on  the 
bosom. 

roro  3.  roro  waaro.  to  be  diffused  (of  coloring 
matter  in  water),     waaro. 

roro'a  1.  adj.,  set  on  edge  (of  teeth). 

roro'a   2.   adj..   liable,   at   fault,     ha'aroro'a'i. 
e  sa'a  roro'a,  there  will  be  no  fault;  all 
right;   muel  roro'a,  we   implicated  our- 
selves. 
roro'anga  n..  debt,  fault. 

roro'a  3.  adv..  precedes  verb,     nou  sa'a  roroa' 


RORO'A 


90 


roro'a  3  (continued). 

lae,  I  shall  certainly  not  go;  ana  'oto  'emi 
ka'a  roro'a  ha'ilalca  'atnii,  unless  we 
seek  it  of  thee. 

rorodara  n.,  a  fillet,  band  around  the  head, 
crown  (late  use),     dara. 

rorodo  1.  to  be  lowering  (of  clouds).  2.  n.,  a 
black  cloud;  helc  rorodo,  to  keep  off  the 
clouds  by  magic,  to  provide  fine  weather. 
3.  U.,  sae  rorodo,  to  forget. 

rorodo'a  1.  belonging  to  darkness,  cloudy;  mu 
palonga  rorodo'a,  deeds  of  darkness. 
2.  U..  a  dark  cloud,  masi  rorodo'a. 

roroho  hdu  roroho,  a  stone  axe.     Wango  roroho. 

rorora  hastily,  in  a  hurry,  rorahi.  lae  rorora, 
to  go  in  a  hurry;  kire  tola  rorora  ana 
tahinge,  they  fled  precipitately. 

rotani  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  rub  in  the  hands. 
rotanila-(na)  gerund. 

rotarota'i  U.,  v.,  to  shuffle  the  feet. 

roto  1.  to  cut  into  lengths  (of  wood) ;  roro  dan  go, 
to  cut  up  firewood.     2.  n.,  a  piece,  a 
part;  nga  roto,  a  part,  partly. 
roto'i  tr. 

roto  3.  ivalo  roto,  the  match-box  bean,  Queens- 
land bean. 

rotoa'ini  tr.,  to  rub  out  seed  with  the  hands. 
Wango  roto. 

rou  1.  V.  i.,  to  hum  native  songs,  singing  in  a 
monotone.     Mota  raw. 

rou  2.  a  large  leaf  (Heliconium  sp.),  used  to 
wrap  up  for  food  for  cooking;  do  rou,  to 
gather  leaves  for  use  in  cooking.  Viti 
rourou,  taro  leaves  cooked. 

ru  variant  of  ro,  tw-o;  cf.  proper  names,  Rupoo, 
Ru'apu;  added  to  personal  pronouns, 
dual,  kireru'e,  'onioru'e,  raru'i.  lu;  ru 
poo  'emi  ngeu,  we  had  two  pigs  to  eat. 

ruana  second,  the  second  time,  anew;  'oto 
ruana  'esi  teuri,  then  the  second  time 
he  said;  ruana  ke'i  area,  the  other  shall 
be  left. 

rue  S.,  ruaU.,  numeral,  two;  used  with  'e,  'erue; 
reduplicated  ruerue.  'ala  ruerue,  two- 
edged.  Mota  nirua,  Motu  rua,  Poly- 
nesian rua. 

ruerua'a  adj.,  doubting,  sae  ruerua'a,  doubt- 
ful mind;  sae  ruerua'anga,  doubt, 
double-mindedness;  saeku  e  ruerua'a 
suu'i'omu,  I  am  in  doubt  concerning  you. 

ruke,  rukeruke  v.  i.,  to  be  joyful;  more  com- 
mon in  Ulawa.    rike, 
rukenga  U.,  rukanga  S.,  v.  n.,  joy,  glee. 

rumu  (na,  ni)  n.,  oil,  grease;  rumu  ni  su,  oint- 
ment; rumii  nue  maa,  eye  salve.  Wango 
rumu,  Viti  lumu,  oil. 

rumu'e  S.,  rumu'a  U.,  adj.,  oily,  greasy. 

ruru,  rururu  to  gather  together,  to  collect,  to 
enroll,     ha'aruru,  hd'iriiru.    ruru  dunge, 
to   build    a   fire,    to   gather   the   sticks 
together;  ruru  puli,  ruru  ha'apuli,  U.,  to 
throng;  ruru  wala,  to  make  an  agreement, 
rurunge  v.  n.,  a  gathering  together, 
ruruhi  tr.,  to  throng,  to  press  upon, 
ruruhe'ini  tr.,  to  gather  together, 
rurute'i  partic,  gathered  together.     Wango 
ruru,  Maori  ruru,  to  draw  together. 


ruru  2.  U.,  ruru  kore,  landslip,  avalanche. 

ruru'e  S.,  ruru'e  hule,  a  phase  of  the  moon. 

ruruha    U.,    n.,    a    company,     ruru.     Wango 
ruruha. 

ru'u  V.  i.,  to  draw  back,  to  retire;  ko  ru'u  i 
nume,  retires  into  the  house. 
ru'usi  V.  i.,  to  shrink,  to  shrivel,  to  con- 
tract, to  slough.  Lau  ruu,  enter; 
Wedau  ruui,  enter;  Florida  rugu,  Mota 
luk,  to  bend;  Viti  luku,  to  clench  the 
hand. 

ruuqe'u  U.,  uruqe'u  S.,  a  stump,  ruuqe'u  ni  'ei. 


saa-  (ku)  1.  S.,  noun  used  as  preposition;  at  the 
house  of,  with,  to  (of  motion  to),  to 
(of  offering  or  sacrifice  to) ;  in  the  singu- 
lar used  in  third  person  only,  in  other 
persons  singular  sie-  is  used;  the  locative 
i  may  be  prefixed,  lae  ka'u  saana,  go 
to  him,  go  to  his  house;  inge'ie  saada'elu, 
he  is  at  home;  uunu  ola  saana  mu  'akalo, 
offer  burnt  offerings  to  the  ghosts;  loho 
i  saana,  flew  to  him;  maurihe  e  ran 
saana  nume  'ie,  salvation  has  come  to 
this  house. 

sa'a  2.  S.,  negative  particle  used  of  future  time, 
also  as  dehortative;  sa'a  balanced  by 
wa  is  used  as  the  negative  correlatives 
neither-nor;  probably  sa'a  is  compound- 
ed of  sa  and  'a  4.  cf.  ka'a.  nou  sa'a 
lae,  I  shall  not  go;  'o  sa'a  lae,  you  shall 
not  go;  hole  sa'a  hole  wa  nga  me'i  ola 
'crete'a  ke'i  i'o  i  sapeka,  the  paddles 
must  not  rattle  nor  anything  of  light 
color  be  about  our  bodies;  ngaini  sa'a 
liu  ha'ahireru'e,  none  shall  pass  in  front 
of  them;  sae  sa'a  maholo  wa  ke  niou, 
thoughts  shall  not  be  parted  and  shall 
not  cease.  Espiritu  Santo  sa,  negative 
particle;  Bugotu  sa;  Viti  sa,  future 
particle. 

Sa'a  3.  the  last  village  on  the  southeast  coast 
of  Little  Malaita  three  miles  from  Cape, 
Zelee.  i  Sa'a  ni  menu,  cf.  ha'adahi. 
M.  A.,  p.  48. 

saai,  saasaai  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  know,  to  read,  saai 
bukanga,  reading;  saai  ola,  to  know 
things,  to  be  wise;  saai  olanga,  wisdom; 
saai  'ulu,  to  repeat  by  heart;  atei  ke  saai 
suuheni,  who  can  enumerate?  le'u  nou 
saaie  nou  saaie,  what  I  know  I  know; 
lio  saai,  to  perceive;  'oke  saaiaa  mwane 
•waune,  say  that  person's  name. 

saanau  n.,  a  young  unmarried  man,  a  youth,  a 
widower. 
saanauha  (ku)  youth;  in  sing.  3  the  poss  3 
ana  is  used :  saanauhaana,  its  youth,  his 
youth,  youthfulness. 

sa'asala  to  be  clear,  without  support,  not 
touching  the  ground,  sala  3.  pulo 
sa'asala,  to  turn  back  before  reaching. 

sada  S.  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  fitting,  proportionate  to; 
used  with  poss.  3.  U.,  dada,  ha'asada, 
hd'isada.  e  sada  amelu,  fit  for  them; 
sada  pe'ini,  equal,  equivalent  to.  2.  level. 


91 


SAISESU 


sada  (continued). 

flat,     niu  le'u  e  lai  sada,  flat  places;  ape 
sada,  to  be  level;  hcle  mdnu  sada,  to  hold 
level,    upriKlit.     Wango  laisada. 
sadanga   S.,    v.    n..    fitting,    proportionate,   e 

sadanga  ana. 
eae  (ku)  1.  n.,  heart,  mind,  chest,  liver:  mwai 
mesi  sae,  hearts,  cf.  lodosae,  ne'isae, 
'onisae.  sae  esoeso,  to  have  indigna- 
tion; sae  hanalinge,  covetousness;  sae 
hdu,  hard  heart  (late  use);  sae  hiru'a,  a 
mind  engaged;  sae  huti,  sae  liuungc, 
grief;  sae  maUledi,  rage;  sae  mdlumunge, 
long  suffering;  sae  mamae,  meek;  sae 
mango,  mental  satisfaction;  sae  tnwa'uii, 
mutiny,  rebellion;  sae  nanau.  wise  of 
heart;  sae  nanaunge,  wisdom;  sae  ngisu, 
lungs;  ohu  'inoni  ohu  sae,  many  men, 
many  minds;  sae  ni  pelupelu,  red  hot; 
sae  rakonga,  gentleness;  me'i  sae  e  rara, 
earnestness;  sae  rarada,  indignation; 
sae  rikanga,  rejoicing  of  heart;  sae  rorodu, 
to  forget;  sae  rtierua'a,  doubt;  sae  susu, 
confident;  sae  taha,  happy;  sae  tata'ala 
hum,  to  be  evilly  disposed  toward;  sac 
to'o,  to  desire;  saeku  e  hu'ile'i,  my  heart 
is  undone;  saeku  e  lae  haahe,  I  over- 
looked it;  saeku  e  liki.  I  am  nervous; 
saeku  e  mode,  I  am  listless;  saeku  e 
mo'uholo,  I  have  no  spirit  left;  saeku 
'olo  ana,  I  love  it;  saeku  e  rodohono,  I 
lost  consciousness;  saeku  e  la'ela'i,  I  am 
excited;  saeku  e  lotongo,  I  have  heart- 
burn; mu  ola  saemu  eni  deuleni,  tlu' 
will;  'unu  tahanie  saemu,  lay  bare  your 
mind;  la'e  liu'a  saena  e  diana,  there's  a 
goodhearted  woman;  hoi  saeka,  in  our 
hearts;  hata'ai  sae  talani,  to  be  careful 
to;  mamango  i  sae,  metaph.,  the  heart; 
odoni  sae,  moral  righteousness;  opa  sae, 
to  be  at  variance;  t  roroma'i  sae  ana, 
on  his  bosom. 

sae  2.  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  talk  about,  kire  saea  wala. 

sae  3.  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  know,  to  read,  as  saai.  lio 
sae,  to  perceive;  lio  sae  lo'o,  to  favor. 

sae  'aela  to  begrudge,  to  bear  malice, 
sae  'aelasi  tr. 
sae  'aelanga  v.  n.,  malice,  spite. 

sae  'asi  v.  tr.,  to  put  out  of  one's  mind,  to 
forgive,  to  neglect. 
sae  'asilana  oraha'a  forgiveness  of  sins. 

saedami  U.,  satisfied,  enough,  to  repletion; 
hele  saedami,  to  have  enough;  vgdu 
saedami,  to  gorge,  to  eat  to  repletion. 

saediana  S.,  saediena  U.  1.  to  rejoice,  to  be  of 
gooti    mind    toward,     ha'asaediena.     2. 
to  love,  used  with  poss.  3. 
saediananga  n.,  goodness, 
saedienanga  n.,  love. 

sae  haahi  S.,  to  be  sparing,  parsimonious,  to 
grudge. 

sae  hanali,  saesaehanali  v.  tr.,  to  covet, 
saehanalinge  v.  n.,  covetousness. 
saehanalila-(na)  gerund. 

saehanenga  n.,  covetousness,  hanenganisar. 

saehuu  to  grieve,  to  be  sad. 
saehuunge  n.,  grief. 


saemango  ha'asaemango,  v.  tr.,  to  comfort,  to 
settle  the  mind. 

saenanau  S.,  to  be  well  instructed,  wise. 

saenanaunge  n.,  wisdom;  sa'a  hule'itana  ike 
saenatiaunge,  never  coming  to  wisdom. 

saeni  1.  v.  tr.,  to  grudge,  to  keep  back,  to 
withhold,  to  spare.  2.  U.,  to  prize,  ta 
think  much  of. 

sa'esape'a  adj.,  in  peace,  in  safety,     sape. 

saetaha  to  have  a  clear  mind  about,  at  ease  in 
mind;  saeku  e  lalia,  my  mind  is  clear 
about  it. 

saeto'o  to  wish,  to  want,  to  like;  used  with 
poss.  3. 
saeto'oa'i  v.  tr.,  to  want,  to  covet, 
saeto'oa'ilana  coveting  it. 

sae  unuhi  v.  tr.,  to  bear  a  grudge  against,  to 
be  spiteful  to. 
sae  unuhinge  v.  n.,  grudge,  spite. 

saewasu,  saesaewasu  v.  i.,  to  be  angry,  to  sulk; 
ko    saewasu    lie'iliu,    angry    with    one 
another;    saewasu    hd'isusu,    continued 
anger,  grudge. 
saewasunge  v.  n.,  anger, 
saewasuli  tr.,  to  be  angr>-  with  a  person, 
saewasulana  his  wrath. 

sahali  1.  v.  tr.,  to  put  layers  of  leaves  under 
anything  for  its  protection,  as  at  the 
bottom  of  an  oven.  2.  to  hire,  as  a 
canoe;  metaphor,  of  lining  it  with 
money.     Fagani  tafari. 

saho  n.,  native-grown  tobacco. 

sahu  1.  U.,  lime,  a  lime  gourd;  hoi  sehu,  U.,  a 
lime  gourd;  hoi  sehu  holo.  lime  gourd; 
e  hotoholo  ana  lo'u  hoi  sehu,  to  rattle  the 
spatula  in  the  gourd;  uunu  sdhu,  to 
burn  lime.  2.  a  death  charm  (toli 
loosi)  prepared  with  lime  and  placed 
in  a  path.     Motu  ahu,  lime;  Wango  ahu. 

sahuru  to  be  mildewed,  mouldy. 

saie  S.,  a  tree  (Parinarium  laurinum);  the  nut 
(/lot  seie)  is  used  for  cementing  canoes, 
etc.,  the  kernel  is  grated  on  coral  stone 
and  plastered  on  the  joint  of  the  wood, 
a  stain  composed  of  the  bark  of  o'a  and 
charcoal  {lo'ilohi)  is  then  spread  over 
the  sdie. 

sailo  n.,  a  crab. 

saini  1.  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  put  on,  to  draw  down,  as  a 
shell  ring  on  the  arm;  saini  mwado,  to 
throw  dust  over  anyone. 

saini  2.  saini  one,  with  locative  /,  on  the  beach; 
hoi  i'a  e  lae  mdi  i  rarada  i  saini  one,  the 
fish  came  and  grounded  upon  the  beach. 

sa'iri  hd'isa'iri,  v.  tr.,  to  quarrel, 
saisai  rere  a  bank,  a  shoal,  at  sea. 
saisemu  U.,  a  creeper  cut  into  lengths  and  the 
bark  peeled  off  and  dried;  when  dry  it 
is    cut    into    strips    and    twisted    into 
fishing-lines,    the   twisting  is  done  on 
the  thigh  with  a  to-and-fro  movement 
of  the  hands,  beginning  with  the  palm 
flat  and  ending  with  the  palm  turned 
toward  the  body;  the  »  is  inserted  for 
euphony,     cf.  i  5,  sdmu. 
saisesu  U.  1.  n.,  a  waterspout.     2.  n.,  a  gale  of 
wind,  a  squall. 


SAISESU 


92 


saisesu  U.  3.  v.  i.,  to  smoke  (of  fire),  redup.  of 
siisu,  i  5.  dunga  e  saisesu,  the  fire  smokes. 
saka  1.  V.  i.,  to  be  strong,   to  be  powerful. 
M.  A.,  p.  192.      2.  V.  i.,  to  be  hot  (of 
condiments). 
sakanga  v.  n.,  strength,  power;  ddu  sakanga 
ana.  to  pin  one's  faith  to.  to  make  a  lot 
of;  mdni  ni'ilana  sakanga,  the  complete 
giving  of  power, 
sakahi   v.   tr.,   to   strengthen,    to   enable. 
Aneityum  cap,  hot.  fire;  Motu  kakakaka, 
red;  Maori  kaka.  red  hot. 
sakasaka'a  adj.,   firmly,   vigorously,   success- 
fully; ddu  sakasaka'a,   to  do  actively; 
hele  sakasaka'a  ana,  do  it  with  vigor. 
sala  1.  the  paper  mulberry  tree  (Broussonetia 
papyrifera).     2.   cloth   made  from   the 
bast  of  that  tree.     3.  European  cloth. 
maai  sala,  a  piece  of  bast  cloth;  mi  sala, 
a    piece    of    any    cloth.     V'iti    sala,    a 
wrapper. 
sala,  sa'asala  S.,  sasala  U.,  4.  desolate,  unin- 
habited, wilderness;  hdnue  sala,  desert. 
sale  V.  tr.,  to  clear  ground  for  a  yam  garden, 
salenga  v.  n.,  a  clearing  for  a  garden.    Mota 
sara.  open  space,  court. 
salema'i,  sasalema'i  U..  v.  i..  to  be  wise. 

salema'inga  v.  n..  wisdom. 
salinga'ini  U.,  sangile'i  S.,  to  unload  a  canoe. 
salo  1.  n.,  sky,  heavens,  clouds,  charcoal  draw- 
ings on  canoes  at  bow  and  stern  repre- 
senting clouds;  mu  salo,   the  heavens; 
i  salo,  in  the  clouds,     salo  ko  kokohono, 
the  sky  is  lowering;  salo  molemole,  red 
clouds;  i  hahana  salo,   under  the  sky; 
mu   he'une  salo,   the   stars  of   heaven; 
kohukohu    la'ona   salo,    far-off    clouds; 
nga  ngoongoo  ni  salo  e  ngo'a,  the  tip  of 
the   cloud   was   broken   off;   e   rdpute'i 
salo  molemole,  a  red  sky;  tane  la'i  salo, 
up  in  the  sky.     Wango  aro. 
salo  2.  V.  i.,  to  beckon,  to  invite  with  signs; 
salo  haahi,  to  make  a  sign  to  a  person: 
in  beckoning  with  the  hand  the  palm  is 
held  down. 
salobi  tr.,  salohi  lue,  a  crab,  lit.,  beckon 
the  tide  (Gelasimus  sp.).     Mota  alovag, 
Gilbert     Islands    alofi,    Wango    arohi, 
Samoa  Va/o,  Motu  he-kalo. 
salu,  sa'uselu  1.  S.,  v.  i.,  to  be  painful,  to  hurt. 
sapesdlu.  'aekii  ko  selu,  my  leg  hurts  me. 
salunge  v.  n..  pain, 
salu  2.  the  ironwood  (Casuarina  equisetifolia). 
kokoi    selu,    casuarina    needles;    bodies 
when    exposed    for    burial    (aori)    are 
covered  with  these  needles;   from   the 
scraped  bark  of  the  tree  a  stain  is  made, 
this    is    the    coloring    matter    seen    on 
fishing-lines  from  Santa  Cruz. 
sama  v.  i.,  to  correspond  to,  to  come  in  proper 
order,  to  be  abreast  of;  sama  diana,  to 
correspond   exactly,    to   be   in   keeping 
with;  ro  'tola  ko  sama,  the  two  canons 
keep  abreast  of  one  another, 
samanga'ini  tr.,  to  lay  in  order,  to  arrange. 
cf.  dama. 
BAmo  to  stutter.     Viti  sami,  to  Usd. 


samu  1.  n.,  a  creeper,  the  bark  is  used  for 
fishing-lines,     sd'isemu.     2.     v.     i.,    to 
fish  for    deep-sea  fish;  hinou  ni  semii, 
the  hook. 
sane  the  white  ant;  hoi  sane,  its  nest;  sane  'ala, 
the  destructive  white  ant,   capable  of 
giving  a  sharp  bite  {'ala);  sane  qa'i,  an 
ant  of  a  brownish  color  used  as  burly 
for    sea-bream    {i'e   ni    sane).     Samoa 
ane,  Mota  gan. 
sane'a  adj.,  eaten  by  white  ants.     Samoa 
anea. 
sangile'ini  S.,  salinga'ini  U.,  to  unload  a  canoe, 
sangoni  v.  tr..  to  nourish,  to  adopt  a  child. 

Lau  sango. 
sa'o  n.,   the  sago  palm    (Sagus  sp.);  sa'o  ni 
'aholo,  a  kite  made  of  sago-palm  leaves 
for  fishing  for  mwanole  with   a  cobweb 
lure  (lawa).     M.  A.,  p.  318.     ddu  sa'o, 
to  get  sago  leaves  for  thatching;  kokoi 
sa'o,  a  frond  of  the  sago  palm;  lokotai 
sa'o,  a  bundle  of  sago  leaves;  lololo  ni 
sa'o,  swamp  in  which  sago  grows;  mudii 
sa'o,  midrib  of  the   leaf;  qangoi  sa'o,  a 
measure,  a  hand's  breadth;  Idhi  sa'o,  to 
cut  sago  leaves;    tdri  sa'o,  to  split  the 
sides  of  leaves  to  make  arrows  (lopa) ; 
use  sa'o,   to   stitch   leaves   for   thatch; 
raapea,   the   midrib   used   as  a  needle; 
wede,    to   take   out    the    midrib   before 
sewing  thatch.     Borneo  sago. 
sa'oni  v.  tr.,  to  catch  mwanole  with  the  kite; 
'oto  e  sa'onia  mwanole,  then  he  caught 
garfish.     Mota  sao  2,  Polynesian  hao. 
sa'oha'ini  v.  tr.,  to  double,  to  place  in  tiers,  to 
fit  a  thing  on. 
sa'oha'i  partic,  sa'oha'i  ro  ola,  double,  in 
two  tiers. 
sa'olu  egg  of  bird,  hoi  sa'olu  ni  menu.     Mota 

toliu,  Florida  tolu. 
sa'osa'oha'i'a  U.,  adj.,  double,  in  tiers;  sa'osa- 
'oha'i'a  ani  nima,  an  upper  story  in  a 
house,  a  doubled  house. 
saosaola   1.  adj.,   yellow,   turmeric.     2.  n.,  a 
tree  with  yellow  pods  which  curve  in  a 
circle  and   are  worn  as  ornaments  in 
the  ear. 
sape  (ku)  1.  n.,  the  body,  trunk,  mass,  figure, 
color,  appearance;  sape  ni  'inoni,  men's 
bodies;  sape  we'o,   to  be  bodily  tired; 
sapeku  e  ka'alawa,  I  am  listless;  sapekii 
e  qd'i  mware'a,  I  am  not  in  good  health; 
noko  hiie  sapeku,  I  am  well,  lit.,  I  per- 
ceive my  body;  potenga  ni  sape,  bodily 
repletion;  e  to'o  sape,  to  have  the  shape, 
the  appearance,  of.     2.    used  in  apos- 
trophizing the  various  islands  with  the 
locative  i:  i  sapena  i  Sa'a  ni  menu,  cf. 
ha'addhi.     Wango    abe.     3.     n.,     duty, 
belonging  to,  part:  le'u  i  sapeku,  S.,  my 
duty;  holoholo  i  sapeku,  U.,  my  duty. 
Florida  sape,  place,  bed. 
sape  4.  sapeldku.     sa'esape'a. 
sape'i,  sasape'i  S..  v.  tr.,  to  add  to,  to  increase 
in  number,     cf.  rape'i. 
sape'ita-(na)  v.  n.,  sape'itana,  the  increase 
of  it,  its  being  increased. 


93 


sAn 


Bapelkku  to  ho  safe,  unliarmed.     Idku. 

sapelakunge   n..    safety,    being   unharmed, 
uncircumcision  (late  use). 
sapemawa  to  be  free  from  harm,  unhurt,  mawa. 

sapemawanga  n. 
sapesalu  S.,  to  be  in  pain,     sape  hi'ilo'o,  U. 

sapesalunge  n.,  pain, 
sapo,  sasapo  v.  i.,  to  chew. 
sapoli  tr. 

sapolila-(ku)  gerund. 
sara  U.,  nitna  sara,  a  large  food-bowl  used  at 
feasts,  the  contents  of  which  are  assigned 
as  the  portion  of  particular  persons. 
sarasara  'tola  sarasara,  a  canoe  kept  for  bonito 
fishing,  adorned   with   inlay  of  nautilus 
shell. 
sare  v.  i.,  to  wish,  to  want;  noti  qe'i  sare,  V., 
I  am  unwilling;  nou  sare  lae,  I  wish  to 
go;  'o'a  sare  ngdii  ihei.  what  will  you  eat? 
sare'i  S.,  v.  i.,  to  be  unwilling;  nou  sere'i,  I 
won't. 
sare'ini  tr.,  to  reject. 
sare  to'o  to  wish,  to  desire;  may  be  used  with 
poss.  3.     e  sare  to'o  ana,  he  wants  it; 
e  sare  to'o  ehu,  he  wants  a  jews-harp; 
e  sare  to'o  eku,  he  wants  me  for  his  wife. 
saro  1.  V.  i.,  to  face,  to  turn  oneself;  saro  mat, 
turn   this  way;   e  saro   watt,   he  faced 
about.     Mao.  aro,  front. 
Baro  (ku)   2.  over  against,  reposing  on:  with 
locative     i.     i     sarona     Abraham,     on 
Abraham's  bosom;  i  sarona  moke  amu, 
in  your  sight,  lit.,  opposite  your  net. 
saroha  v.   n.,   used  with   poss.   3,   ana.     i 
sarohaana,    over   against,    opposite    to; 
»   sarohaana   u'di,    on    the    face    of    the 
waters;  sarohaana  li'oa.  under  the  care 
of  the  spirit.     Mota  sarova.  meeting. 
saro  3.  saro  ni  mwaa,  zigzag  pattern  in  inlaying 
made   by   putting  triangular  pieces  of 
nautilus  shell  face  to  face,  the  end  of 
each    piece   in   the   center   of   the   one 
opposite,     cf.  first  and  second  patterns 
in  Guppy  "Solomon  Islands,"  p.  138. 
Baro  4.  S.,  adv.,  used  of  consecutive  motion, 
precedes  the  verb;  thereupon,     ko  ngeu 
mango    kesi    saro    'ttnuc,    when    he    has 
eaten  he  will  say  it;  kire  sa'a  ngdu  wa 
ke  inu  na  kire  ka'a  saro  sdunie  'olo,  they 
will  not  eat  or  drink  till  they  have  killed 
him. 
saro  pote  U.,  a  phase  of  the  moon,  day  before 

full  moon. 
Saroha  with  locative  /.•  i  saroha,  in  the  roof 

between  the  layers  of  thatch, 
saru'e  adj.,  used  as  noun,  a  charm,  incantation, 
mu  seru'e.     M.  A.,  p.  192.      e  walangia 
ani  seru'a.  he  muttered  magic  over  it. 
saru'i  v.   tr.,  to  use  a  charm  on,  to  make 
magic;   ddmulaa  kire  saru'e,   areca   nut 
which  they  had  used  magic  on. 
sasa  1.  V.  i.,  to  fence  with  logs  against  pigs. 
sasa  2.  sasa  helela.  thin,  lean. 
sasa'ae  to  be  disturbed,  stirred  up;  karohure 
e  sasa'ae  i  ka'ona  'asi,  the  depths  were 
troubled;  sasa'ae  e  pouhiru'e,  a  raging 
sea  is  stirred  up. 


sasaha  i  ku)  n.,  thigh,  lap.     Borneo  paha,  thigh. 

sasa  hetela  U.,  to  subside  (of  swellings  on  the 
body). 

sasala  U.,  for  sa'asala  and  sala  4. 

sasali  I'.,  v.  tr.,  to  strain  with  the  net  (unu)  of 
the  coconut  leaf. 

sasangota'a  adj.,  light  colored,  fair,  light 
hair. 

sasapou  a  log  placed  on  top  of  the  fence  in  front 
of  the  canoe  house  (taoha),  a  common 
place  for  sitting. 

sasara  (ku)  a  limb,  member  of  the  body,  branch 
of  a  tree;  mn  sasarai  sape,  the  limbs  of 
the  body.  San  Cristoval  rara,  branch; 
Malay  dahan. 

sasate  (ku)  jaw,  chin,  beard.     Wango  talele. 

sasu,  sa'usesu  S.,  saisesu  U.,  1.  v.  i.,  to  smoke 
(of  fire).  2.  n.,  smoke;  sasu.  ana  wdi, 
steam;  sdsu  alipono,  dense  smoke. 
Mota  asu,  Xiue  ahu. 

sasu  3.  loli  sesu,  to  cast  unripe  fruit  (of  trees). 

sasu'ala  adj.,  smoky;  e  sdsu'ala,  it  is  smok- 
ing. 

sasue'i  v.  tr.,  said  of  smoke  impeding  one's 
vision;  dtinge  e  sdsue'ieu,  the  smoke  of 
the  fire  got  into  my  eyes;  e  sdstie'ie 
maakti,  the  smoke  got  into  my  eyes. 

sata  (ku)  1.  n.,  a  name;  satana  atei,  what  (who) 
is  his  name;  ke  mdni  dolosie  satada,  let 
him  ask  all  their  names;  to'ohuunge'i 
satana,  his  real  name. 

sata  2.  hunt  sata,  the  heel. 

sataa'i  v.  tr.,  to  chafe,  to  rub. 

sate  sale  unu,  to  overlap,     sasate. 

sato  sun,  sunshine,  fine  weather,  ha'asato. 
e  sato  'oto,  it  is  fine  weather;  salo  'oto  i 
apati,  the  sun  declines;  sato  e  qa'alie 
hanue,  the  sun  has  risen  on  the  earth; 
sato  e  rara  viea,  the  sun  was  scorching; 
apai  sato,  afternoon;  'iro  ni  sato, 
drought;  mwaa  dili  sato,  a  snake  ob- 
served as  an  omen;  qa'alana  sato,  the 
east;  ra'arangana  sato,  the  light  of  the 
sun;  suulana  sato.  the  going  down  of  the 
sun.  Florida  aho.  Lau  saso,  Maori 
aho,  Mota  loa.     M.  L.,  p.  93. 

satoa'i  v.  tr.,  to  expose  to  the  sun's  rays,  to 
dry  in  the  sun,  to  air,  to  be  exposed  to 
the  sun. 

sau,  sauseu  1.  v.  i.,  to  kill,  to  pound  taro,  to 
ram.  to  blow  strong  (of  wind);  sau 
niwane,  to  commit  murder,  sdu  mua- 
nenga,  n.,  murder. 
sauni  tr..  to  kill,  to  beat,  to  thrash,  to  hurt, 
to  punish,  ha'asduni,  hd'iseuni.  sdune 
hiini  ke  mae,  pound  it  so  that  it  be  well 
mashed;  'aeku  ko  seunieu,  my  foot  hurts 
me. 
saunila-(ku)  gerund. 

sau  2.  S.,  n.,  a  bonito,  hoi  seu.  Ro  ute'i  seu, 
a  proper  name.  M.  A.,  p.  49;  mu  seu 
ko  laka,  the  bonito  play  in  schools;  rd'i 
seu,  a  platform  on  the  beach  used  in 
connection  with  bonito  fishing;  Piilu 
maai  seu,  circular  shell  inlaid. 

sau  3.  V.  i..  to  darn,  to  mend  holes  in;  sdu  maa 
ana  mu  'ape,  to  mend  the  meshes  of  the 
nets. 


SAUKAI 


94 


saukai  1.  v.  i.,  to  grate  coconut  on  a  scraper, 
saukai  niu.  2.  n.,  a  coconut  scraper, 
made  of  a  tree  trunk  with  two  branches 
for  legs  and  the  butt  resting  on  the 
ground;  a  piece  of  clam  shell  with  ser- 
rated edge  is  lashed  to  the  upper  end 
of  the  trunk;  a  man  sits  astride  the 
saukai  holding  a  half  coconut  (ten),  rubs 
the  meat  over  the  clam  shell,  and  the 
grated  nut  falls  into  a  bowl  (nime) 
placed  below.  M.  A.,  p.  338.  Florida 
taiikai. 

saulehi  n.,  evening,  dusk,  from  about  4  o'clock 
on;  e  saulehi  'oto,  it  is  dusk;  i  seulehi,  in 
the  evening;  saulehi  melumehi,  dusk. 
Florida  nulavi,  IMota  rairav,  Motu 
adorahi,  Wango  suurahi. 

saiimaata-(na,  da)  U.,  n.,  used  as  verb,  to  know; 
nau  qa'ike  saumaalana,  I  don't  know  it. 

Sau  mwa'elu  the  landing-place  in  the  rocks 
opposite  Mwado'a,  Ulawa. 

saunge'ini  v.  tr.,  to  put  the  handle  on  an  axe. 

sa'usemu  S.     cf.  samu. 

sa'usesu  S.,  n.,  a  whirlwind,  waterspout,  a 
squall  of  wind.     sdsu. 

sawa  n..  a  fish,  mullet,  found  in  the  lake  at 
Korea  and  in  the  lagoon  at  'Olu  Malau. 
melu  lai  tola  sawa  i  Malau,  we  went  to 
get  mullet  at  the  Three  Sisters. 

sawalo  n.,  the  flying  fox,  a  tooth  of  the  flying 
fox  used  as  money,  qd'u  ni  sawalo, 
four  flying-fox  teeth,  a  unit  in  counting. 

sawaoli'e  S.,  adj.,  darkened,  black  with  clouds. 

sawaru,  sasawaru  v.  i.,  to  whisper. 

sawarunge  v.  n.,  a  whisper,  whispering, 
sawarunge'ini  tr.,  to  whisper  anything. 
sawarunge'inila-(na)  gerund. 

sese  v.  i.,  to  fence,  to  protect;  used  with  prep. 
ahu'i. 

seu  cf.  sdu. 

si  1.  illative;  then,  thereupon;  used  with  the 
verbal  particle  ko  as  kosi,  or  without  it. 
'oto  kire  kosi  teuri,  thereupon  they  said; 
'oke  lae  mdi  'osi  teuri,  when  you  come 
here  say  this;  nge  nesi  'unue,  then  said 
I;  tnu  rato  e  ngdu  na  kire  si  mae,  the 
fathers  ate  and  are  dead.  2.  adv.,  first, 
first  time,  just,  only;  noko  si  lae  yndi  'ie, 
this  is  my  first  time  here;  nou  si  kele 
hele  mola,  I  only  just  touched  it;  tnaholo 
nou  si  lae  wan,  when  I  first  went. 

si  3.  U.  dehortative;  don't,  'a  si  ta'ata'a,  laa, 
don't,  I  say.     Lau  si,  negative  particle. 

si  4.  genitive;  in  certain  phrases,  tawa- 
sipua.  tangisi  hudi,  a  hand  of  bananas; 
qd'usi  henue,  the  head  of  the  community. 

si  .5.  verbal  suffix;  mae,  to  die;  maesi,  to  die  of. 

sie-(ku)  1.  n.,  used  as  preposition;  at  the  house 
of,  with,  to  (motion  toward),  to  (offering 
or  sacrifice  to);  used  in  Sa'a  only  in  the 
first  and  second  singular,  for  the  rest 
saa  is  used;  in  Ulawa  used  in  all  persons; 
the  locative  i  may  be  prefixed,  ro  'u'u 
maana  siena  a  Ta'a  Pea,  his  two  eye- 
balls to  Ta'a  Pea  (a  curse) ;  i  siedaelu,  in 
their  house,  at  their  home.  Nengone 
se,  with;  Sesake  se,  si,  here;  there. 


si'e  U.  2.  negative  particle,  used  of  future  time. 

also  dehortative.     'o  si'e  lae,  do  not  go. 

Savo  sika,  sia,    prohibitive;  Vaturanga 

jika. 
sihana  S.,  with  locative  i,  out  of  doors,  oustide. 

sinaha. 
siho,  sisiho  1.  v.  i.,  to  descend,  to  disembark, 

to   land,     ha'asiho.     siho   hou,    to    de- 
scend; siho  i  one,  to  land  on  the  beach. 

siho  toli. 
siho  2.  to  be  at  hand,  to  befall,  to  happen; 

qongi  ko  sisiho  'oto,  the  time  is  at   hand, 
siholi  tr.,  to  course  through  (of  disease), 

to  assault;  e  siholie  sapeku,  it  went  all 

through  my  body. 
sihola'i  partic,  passed  through.    Mota  siwo. 
siho  3.  v.  i.,  to  relate,  to  tell  a  tale;  used  with 

po3s.  3.     siho  'aela  ana,  to  spread  evil 

reports  of;   siho   'aelalamami,   gerund., 

our  evil  report;  siho  raqa  ana,  U.,  to 

exaggerate, 
sihosihonga  v.  n.,  a  tale,  gossip, 
sihoa'i  partic,  mu  sikoa'i  wala,  mere  words, 

just  a  tale. 
siholi  siholi  wei,  south  wind,  gentle  breeze  with 

fair  weather. 
sihopulu  ha'asihopulu,  a  stone  sinker  for  a  fish- 
line, 
sii  1.  V.  i.,  to  break  wind.     Viti  dhi.     2.  to  fly 

(of  sparks),   to  flare   (of  fire);  mu  sii 

dunge,  sparks, 
si'iri  to-day,  now;  ni  demonstrative  may  be 

suffixed  and  locative  i  prefixed,     i  si'iri, 

i  si'irini,  to-day;  si'iri  'ie,  in  this  day; 

haidinge  si'iri,  today;  nekesi  lae  si'iri, 

let  me  go  to-day;  si'iri  i  rodo,  to-night, 
sikare  n.,  a  variety  of  yam. 
sike  1.  v.  tr.,  to  reject;  'asi  3  may  be  added. 

sike    hu'e    to    divorce    a   woman;    sike 

ku'anga,  n.,  divorce;  sika  'asi,  to  reject. 

Florida  sika. 
sike  2.  n.,  a  thorn;  sikei  hana,  thorn  on  top  of 

the  tuber  of  the  spiny  yam.     Viti  sika, 

needle. 
sikera'ini  v.  tr.,  to  reject,  to  condemn, 
sikeri  1.  v.  tr.,  to  plait.     2.  n.,  a  rope  plaited 

flat,  a  wick  (late  use). 
siki  I.  V.  i.,  to  come  loose,  to  become  detached; 

mei  'epu  e  siki  ana,  his  seed. 
sikihi  tr.,  to  undo,  to  untie,  to  detach,  to 

take  off.     ha'asikihi.     e'a  sikihia  qd'una 

uhi,  she  takes  off  the  heads  of  yams; 

hono  sikihi,  to  shut  off  by  itself;  susu 

sikihi,  to  cast  off,  to  reject, 
sikite  V.  n.,  mu  sikitei  ola,  flakes,  chips. 

Wango  sigi,  Florida  siki,  Viti  singi,  to 

move, 
sikile'ini  tr.,  to  detach,  to  set  free,  to  loose, 
sikile'i  partic,  detached;  v.  i.,  to  rebound, 
sikite 'ini  tr.,  to  detach, 
siki  2.  V.  i.,  to  tap,  to  touch  with  the  fingers. 

siki  raho,  a  beetle  which  is  caught  and 

held  upside  down  on  a  piece  of  thatch 

(raho)  which  it  raps  (siki). 
sikihi  tr.,  to  infect,  to  carry  contagion  to 

person  after  person. 
sikili   tr.,    to   twang  with   the  fingers;    to 


95 


SO'O 


slki  2  (continued).  I 

spurtle  on;  sikili   maa.    a  tree  (Excoe- 
caria    sp.)    found    in    estuaries,    which 
when  cut  squirts  out  a  juice  dangerous 
to  the  eyes, 
sikoa  a  bird,  the  black  mynah.     kikoa. 
sUi,  sisili  1.  v.  i.,  to  enter;  rao  kire  sa'a  sili  'olo, 
they  certainly   shall  not  enter.     2.   to 
go  into  the  bush  after;  sili  'oha,  to  get 
betel  from  the  bush. 
silinge  v.  n.,  an  entry, 
silihi  tr.,  to  enter,  to  go  into;  ko  sisilikie  mu 

mime,  enters  into  houses. 
silihe'ini  tr.,  to  sheathe,  to  insert.     Samoa 
sili.  to  lodge  in;  Wango  siri,  to  enter; 
Nguna  sili,  to  be  under;  Mota  sir,  to 
draw  along;  Florida  sili;  Fate  sili. 
siliihi  V.  i.,  to  patch  a  thatched  roof  with  sago 

leaves. 
silitaha  U..  v.  i.,  to  emerge,     ha' asililaha. 
sime  U.,  sume  S.,  sandfly. 
simouke  S.,  pipe  (English  smoke). 
simwe  v.  tr..  to  flay,  to  skin 
sina  U.,  sea-urchin. 

sinaa  v.  i.,  sinaa  ulii,  to  clean  the  roots  off 
newly  dug  yams. 
inaha  used  with  locative  i:  i  sinaha,  out  of 
doors,     sihana.     nga  hale  e  koru  hula 
i  sinaha,  the  shed  was  full  right  to  the 
door;  po'o  i  sinaha,  outside. 
sinata  U.,  n.,  a  tabu  mark. 
sinei  rara,  dusk. 

sineli,  sisineli  1.  v.  tr.,  to  lighten,  to  give  light 
to;  V.  i.,  to  shine,  hoi  he'u  e  sisineli 
niei,  the  star  has  shone  out.  2.  moon- 
light; i  sineli,  by  moonlight. 
sineliha  v.  n.,  used  with  poss.  3,  ana;  sine- 
lihaana,  its  light.  Lau  sinali,  moon; 
Florida  hinari. 
sinola    specific    numeral,     1,000     (of    yams). 

inolai  uhi. 
singe  n.,  a  littoral  tree  (Tournefortia  argen- 
tifolia)  much  frequented  by  a  butterfly 
(Euplcea    sp.)    v.hich    becomes   intoxi- 
cated and  falls  to  the  ground. 
si'o  1.  V.  i.,  to  collect,  to  gather,     si'o  aopa,  to 
separate,  to  refine;  si'o  honosi,  to  inter- 
rupt with  questions;  si'o  koni,   to   col- 
lect; si'o  liliheu,  to  collect  stones  for  a 
wall;  si'o  maani,  to  gather  together, 
si'ohi  tr. 

si'ohila-(ku)   gerund.     Wango  sio. 
si'o  2.  V.  i.,  to  track;  si'o  isuli,  to  follow  the 
footsteps  of,  to  require  reparation  for, 
si'o   kali,    to   spy;    si'o   purapura,    U., 
irregularly. 
si'o  3.  V.  i.,  to  practice  magic;  si'o  hu'isi,  to  do 
harm  to. 
si'onga  v.  n.,  magic. 

si'ohi  tr.,  to  bewitch.     San  Cristoval  siofi. 
si'ohaa  1.  v.  i.,  to  be  in  evil  plight,  to  be  desti- 
tute.    2.  n.  (ku),  si'ohaaku  e  tala'ala,  I 
am  in  evil  plight. 
si'ohaanga  v.  n.,  destitution. 
si'ohaa'i    tr.     si'ohaa'i    maela.    to    be    in 
danger;  si'ohaa'i  ola,  to  be  in  a  poor  way. 
Lau  sikofa. 


si'okoni  v.  tr.,  to  collect,  to  harvest. 

si'okoninge  v.  n.,  harvest, 
si'ola  exclamation  of  assent,     cf.  si'u'e. 
sipe  V.  i.,  to  prick,  to  let  pus  out  of  a  sore, 
sipengi  tr. 

sipengila-fna)  gerund.     Mota  sipe,  to  take 
out;  F'lorida  sipa. 
siri  n.,   a  parrot,     siri  alalia,   Lorius  chloro- 
cercus;  siri  'u'u,  a  lory  that  hangs  head 
downward, 
siriu  U-,  n.,  a  cockle,     cf.  kenu.     mwai  keni 
ana    karo    siriunga,    what    women    for 
collecting  cockles. 
sisi  1.  V.  tr.,  to  grin  like  a  dog,  to  bare  the 
teeth;  e  sisie  nikona,  he  bared  his  teeth 
in  a  grin. 
sisi  2.  sisi  pono,  to  be  closed  over  (of  a  sore). 
sisile  n.,  a  shellfish. 
sisimidi  S.,  mudimudi  U.,  a  bird,  the  yellow 

honey  eater. 
sisinge-(ku)  S.,  noun  used  as  preposition;  in 
the  way  of,   preventing,     e  hono  sisi- 
ngana,    shut    him    in;    e    i'o   sisingeku, 
stood  in  front  of  me;  ho'asi  sisingana 
li'oa,  to  swear  by  a  spirit;  e  ho'asi  sisi- 
ngemu,  bound  you  with  an  oath, 
sisinge'i  partic,  used  as  adverb;  over  against, 
in  front  of.     hdi  dango  e  i'o  sisinge'i,  a 
tree  stood  in  the  way;  ho'asi  sisinge'i. 
to  clear  with  an  oath;  hono  sisinge'i,  to 
shut  out. 
sisiri  sisiri  hapa,  a  bird,  swallow. 
si'u'e   S.,    si'u'a   U.,    e.vclamation   of   assent. 
si'u'e   'oto,   'o  si'u'e,  ta'ane  si'u'e,  cer- 
tainly, verily, 
siute   gun,   rifle   (English  shoot),     ko'uko'uha 

ana  siute.  report  of  a  gun. 
siwe  1.  numeral,  nine. 

siwana  ninth,  for  the  ninth  time.  Lau 
siqa,  Florida  hiua,  Viti  dhiia,  Tonga 
hiva,  Indonesia  sio. 
siwe  2.  blood-money,  haa  ni  siwe.  ne'i  siwe, 
to  put  out  a  sum  as  blood-money;  tola 
siwe,  to  kill  and  earn  the  blood-money, 
so  exclamation,  to  call  attention;  so  nge,  well 

then;  so  'ohe,  perhaps. 
soasoa  native  arrowroot,  grows  on  the  beaches, 
soda  v.  i.,  to  encounter,  to  fall  into  danger; 
used  with  poss.  3.     e  soda  ana  hu'o.  he 
fell  into  the  net.     Florida  sodo.  to  meet; 
Viti  sola,  to  meet, 
soe  U..  soe  ledi,  to  question, 
soi,  soisoi  1.  V.  tr.,  to  call,  to  summon,     .sot 
ha'ada'inge,     S.,     soi     ha'ata'inge,     V., 
church,  ecclesia. 
soinge  v.  n.,  a  calling;  tde  soinge,  to  raise 
a  cr>-. 
soi  2.  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  ask,  to  question;  soi  heri,  to 
question;   e   soia   ada,   he  asked   them 
about  it. 
soi  3.  V.  i..  to  demand;  soi  lotonga.  soi  hirita'a, 
to  demand  a  fine. 
soinga'ini  tr.,  to  call,  to  summon, 
songo  n.,  white  shell  discs  tied  as  ornament  on 

the  knee  or  round  the  wrist, 
so'o  V.  i.,  to  find,  to  pick  up,  to  collect;  so'o 


SO'O 


96 


So'o  (continued). 

dango,  S.,  so'o  'ai,  U.,  to  pick  up  fire- 
wood; so'o  iete,  to  build  a  stone  fence, 
so'ohi  tr. 

so'ohila-(ku)  gerund.     Fl.  sodo,  collect, 
su   V.   tr.,   to  anoint;   laqi  ni  su,    coconut-oil 
ointment;  riimn  ni  su.  ointment,  salve, 
suhi  tr.,  to  plaster  the  hair  with  lime. 
suhinge  v.  n.,  anointing. 
sulula-(ku)  gerund, 
su'a  U.  1.  V.  i.,  to  move  backward,  to  retire, 

to  retreat.     Wango  sua. 
su'a  U.  2.  su'ai  honu,  a  summerset. 
sualaa  U.,  a  foundation,     suesuelaa.     a  Poro 
Sualaa     Hdriua,    a    legendary    person. 
Mr.  Foundation-of-the-Earth. 
sude  V.  tr.,  to  root  up  the  earth  (of  pigs),  poo 

e  sude.     Mota  sula,  Wango  sua. 
su'e  S.,  su'a  U.  1.  a  tree  planted  in  the  villages. 
the  leaves  and  the  catkins  (rame)  and 
berries  are  edible,  the  bark  is  used  in 
Santa  Cruz  for  making  fish-lines. 
su'e,  su'esu'e  2.  v.  i.,  to  encounter,  to  meet; 
used  with  poss.  3.     kire  su'a  ana,  thej' 
met  him. 
su'ehi  tr.,  to  encounter  difficulty,  to  have 
hard  work,  to  paddle  against  wind  or 
tide,     'ato    'ae   su'ahia,    to    leap    and 
encounter;  kire  ko  su'ehire,   they   lord 
it  over  them. 
su'ela'i    partic,    ke'i   su'ela'i   mola   haakie 
qd'une,   will    recoil    on   his   own    head. 
ha'isu'esu'e,     po'osu'a'a.     Nguna     sua, 
Wango  sua,  Lau  suasua,  encounter, 
su'e  3.  S.,  used  with  locative  /;  i  su'e,  out  of 

doors,  outside,  e.xternal. 
su'e  4.  S.,  n.,  a  spear. 

su'e  S.,  su'a  U.  5.  v.  i.,  to  move  backward,  to 

retreat,  to  retire;  su'e  puri,  to  go  back; 

su'e  ngoli,  to  fall  backward  and  break 

one's  neck. 

su'esu'e    S.,    su'a    U.,   su'esu'e    ni    honu,    a 

summerset. 
suesuelaa  S.,  sualaa  U.,  n.,  a  foundation, 
su'esu'ela'i  partic,  7nae  su'esu'ela'i,  to  die  of 

hunger,  to  starve. 
su'ete'e     S.,     su'ate'e     U.,     ne'isae     su'ete'c, 

adoma'i  su'ate'e,  to  be  anxious  about. 
suhi,  su'isuhi  S.,  suhisuhi  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  shave 
the  head  or  face;  suhi  kou,  to  shave  the 
head  clean, 
suhinge  v.  n.,  shaving, 
suhila-fku)  gerund. 
suhu  1.  a  bung,  plug,  bung-hole.     2.  v.  i.,  to 
fall  through  a  thing;  e  'uri  suhu,   his 
foot  went  through;  mwalo  suhu  kao,  a 
rock  that  pierces  the  bottom, 
suhuli  tr.,  to  make  an  opening  in  a  green 
coconut,  to  take  the  plug  out  of   a  ca- 
noe, 
su'isuli  (ku)  S.,  n.,  a  bone.     suli. 
su'isungi  v.  tr.,  to  broil  on  a  fire.     Mota  tun. 
su'isungi'e  S.,  n.,  a  hill. 

Buke,  susuke  S.,  suka,  sukasuka  U.,  to  ask 
for,  to  beg,  to  borrow,  to  ask  permis- 
sion; suka  hdrile'i,  U.,  to  question;  suka 
hdrite'inga,     questioning;    suke    talana. 


suke  (continued). 

to  ask  on  his  behalf;  masa  suke,  to  be 
ashamed  to  beg;  e  i'o  pe'i  suke,  sat  and 
begged. 
sukanga  v.  n. 
suku  (na)  the  vent  of  a  fish.     Viti  bnku,  tail, 
sulaapoe  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  cause  to  lodge, 
sulahita  U.,  to  be  firm,  rigid. 
sule  S.,  sula  U..  v.  tr.,  to  roast  on  the  embers. 
ko  sulaa  mu  uhi,  roasts  yams. 
sulanga  v.  n.,  a  roasting,  yams  roasted  in 
the  coals,     ngdii  sulanga,  the  food  eaten 
at  a  betrothal  consisting  of  roasted  yams. 
suli  (au)  1.  prep.,  after,  according  to;  not  used 
as  dative  as  stated  in  M.  L.,  p.  151. 
suli  heidinge,  daily;  lae  mdi  sidieu,  come 
after  me;  tolai  suli  u'ala,  to  obey  com- 
mands.    Mota  sur. 
suli,  su'isuli  S.,  susuli  U.  2.  n.,  a  bone;      suli 
qeri  ngae,  suli  qeri  i  ngaena.  the  back- 
bone; suli  tolai  luana,  his  shoulder-blade; 
laloi  suli,  within  the  bones;  mu  lalawai', 
ola  ana  suli,  the  marrow  of  the  bonesa 
qango  laloi  suli,   the  marrow.        Mot?, 
suriu,     Florida    hull,     Borneo    tulan 
Nine  hui. 
suli  3.  suli  'ei,  wall-plate  of  a  house;  snli  'ei  i 

qaoha,  ridgepole. 
suli  4.  suli  hata,  forty  dogs'  teeth,  a  sum  of 
money    considered    equivalent    to    ten 
fathom    strings    of    shell    money    {haa 
tahanga). 
suliteru  a  bone  needle. 

sulu  1.  V.  i.,  to  lift,  to  carry  up  canoes  to  land, 
to  start  on  a  sea  journey,  to  launch  a 
canoe;  sulu  haa,  to  collect  money;  sulu 
la'a  ana,  to  hft  it  up;  sulu  'epu,  to  adopt 
a  child;  sulu  'epunge,  n.,  adoption;  sulu 
walanga,  gossip;  mu  tale'i  sulu  walanga, 
mere  gossip:  sulu  walanga  ta' elate,  bab- 
bling words. 
suluha  U.,  V.  n.,  a  landing. 
sulu'i  tr. 

sulu'ila-(ku)  gerund.     Wango  suru. 
sulu,  susulu  2.  to  sing,  to  make  music;  sulu  'ato, 
a  song  sung  as  an  ordeal;  sulu  'atonga, 
ordeal    singing;    sulu    dduddu,    U.,    to 
make  songs  on;  sulu  kananga,  singing 
of  songs;  sulu  tnao,  to  sing  in  company 
with  men  dancing;   sulu   'o'o,   to  beat 
drums.     Mota  sur.  to  sing. 
suluhe  (ku)  n..  song;  siduheku,  my  song. 
stilu'i  tr.,  to  sing  a  song. 
sulula-(ku)    gerund.;    sululana,    its    being 
sung. 
sulu,  susulu  3.  V.  tr.,  to  follow,  to  do  according 
to;  sulu  isuli,  to  obey,  to  walk  according 
to;   sulu   odoodo,   to   go   straight;   sulu 
odota'i,  to  act  righteously. 
sulu  4.   with   poss.   3   ana,   to   please,     sulu   i 
lohona,   lohomu,   pleasing   in   his  sight, 
thy  sight. 
sulu  (na,  ni)  5.  liquid,  water,     madamada  sulu, 
October.     Nguna  sulu,  Mota  sur  tnata, 
tears. 
sulu'e  adj.,  with  liquid,  watery,  containing 
too  much  water. 


97 


suu 


Buluheu  1.  the  stone  walls  of  taoka. 

Suluheu  2.  the  artificial  islets  off  the  coast  of 
Malaita.     Lau  sulufou. 

suluta'e  U.,  v.  i.,  to  rise  up,  arise. 

suluta'enga  v.  n.,  a  rising  up.  resurrection. 
Wango  surutae. 

sume  S.,  sime  U.,  n.,  a  sandfly.  Alite  sitmi, 
mosquito;  New  Guinea  kimu,  simunika, 
sumoniku. 

snnge  sunge  luuliui,  elkhorn  fern. 

Bungi  S.,  V.  tr.,  sungie  mawalaa,  lift  up  a  shout. 
Florida  sungi. 

supi  n..  a  short  club,  diamond-shaped,  with  a 
broad  face  and  a  rib  down  the  center. 
Wango  subi,  Bugotu  snpa. 

supu  V.  tr.,  to  compose  (of  songs),  supu  kana. 

supungi  S.,  V.  tr.,  to  offer,  to  intreat;  supungie 
ngiiuhana.  to  offer  food  to. 

supu'upu  (na)  S..  v.  tr.,  to  build. 

suraa'i,  susuraa'i  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  revenge,  to 
retaliate,  to  repay  injuries;  mwane  'o 
susuraa'ie  mu  oraha'a  i'eini  hujii'emi, 
deal  not  with  us  after  our  sins. 

suru  1.  V.  tr.,  to  suspect,  to  have  suspicions 
about. 

suru,  susuru  2.  v.  i.,  to  plane,  to  scrape  with 
a  flint  or  shell  or  glass, 
surumi  tr. 

susu  (ku)  1.  n.,  breast,  paps,  dugs  of  animals, 
milk;  susii  ni  puloki,  susu  tti  keu,  cow's 
milk;  tori  susu,  to  wear  over  the  left 
shoulder  as  a  bandolier.  Mota  sus, 
Wedau  susu,  Maori  u. 

susu,  sususu  2.  V.  i.,  to  suck  the  breast,  to 
have  children  at  the  breast,  ha'asusu. 
susu  puri,  to  be  the  last  born;  a  susu 
puri,  the  youngest  child. 

susu  3.  V.  i.,  to  prick,  to  pierce,  to  impale,  to 
sew.  susu  'asi,  to  take  out  (of  a  thorn) ; 
susu  'elinge,  an  ear-stick;  susu  hara,  to 
lean  firmly  on  a  staff;  susu  kumara,  to 
plant  sweet-potato  vines;  susu  opa. 
ornamental  ridge  covering;  susu  qaoha, 
to  sew  sago  leaves  for  a  ridge  covering; 
du  susu  qelusu.  a  nose-stick;  susu  sikihi, 
U-,  to  cast  out,  to  reject, 
susu'i  tr. 

susu'ite  V.  n.,  a  seam,  sewing,  an  awl; 
ta'ata'a  maai  su'isu'ile,  one  seam. 
Mota  sis.  sus,  to  pierce:  susur,  to  sew-; 
Samoa  lui,  Viti  lutui,  Niue  tui,  Motu 
turi. 

susu  4.  V.  i.,  to  be  solid,  whole,  unbroken,  to 
heal  up,  to  close  over.  ha'asusu, 
hd'isusu.  susu  eliho'i,  to  be  filled  up 
(of  rounded  shape),  restored  whole; 
susu  harehare,  to  cram;  susu  hono.  to 
heal  over  (of  an  ulcer);  susu  houosi,  to 
close  in  on;  susu  pou,  to  rear  up  without 
breaking  (of  waves) ;  'ae  susu,  swollen 
leg;  hdu  susu.  an  immovable  rock; 
i'o  susu,  to  continue  in  one  stay;  lue 
susu,  throat  stuffed  up,  voice  gone;  sae 
susu,  to  be  confident;  sae  susungc,  n., 
confidence,  to  be  of  firm  mind  toward, 
to  reject;  saemu  e  luana  kc  susu  ha'ahirc, 
be  stern  towards  them  in  thy  wrath. 


susu  5.  V.  i.,  to  approach;  na'o  susu  ana,  to 
make  straight  on  toward, 
susuhi  tr.,  to  approach;  na'o  susuhire,  draw 
toward  thcin. 

susu  6.  ha'asusu,  to  gossip,  to  tell  tales  about. 

susu  7.  susu  'ano,  to  choose  ground  for  a  yam 
garden. 

susua'ili  S.,  susua'ili  huni,  to  suggest  to  a 
person,  to  urge. 

susu'e  adj.,  throughout;  susu'e  alowaa.  all  the 
day  long;  susu'e  ddngi,  every  day,  in 
the  daytime. 

susue'ioi  tr.,  to  stretch  out,  to  hold  out  in  the 
hand. 
susue'i  partic,  stretched  out;  susue'i  ki'i, 
U.,  to  stretch  out  the  hand.     Mota  sis, 
to  point. 

susuhaa'i  v.  tr.,  to  plant  a  yam  garden. 

susuhara  to  lean  firmly,  to  rest  upon. 

susuhono  V.  i.,  'ulu  susuhono,  stone  blind. 

susuimi  v.  i.,  to  have  roots,  to  be  rooted,  imiimi. 

susu'ite  n.,  a  scam,  an  awl,  a  pricker. 

susule'ini  v.  tr.,  to  affirm,  to  maintain. 

susule'i  partic,  firmly,  fixedly,  forever. 
dsu  susule'i,  to  work  unremittingly; 
toli  susule'i,  to  endure  firmly,  to  be 
steadfast. 

susuli  (au)  1.  prep.,  in  succession  to.  suli  1. 
hele  susuli,  to  inherit.  2.  v.  i.,  to  follow 
along;  melu  susuli  uwo,  we  kept  along 
the  ridge;  a  Poro  Susuli  Uwo,  a  legend- 
ary person,  Mr.  Follow-the-Ridge. 

susuli  3.  U.,  n.,  a  bone. 

susumaa  a  projection  from  the  ridge  of  a 
house,  a  pinnacle. 

susungi  1.  V.  tr.,  to  approach,  to  draw  near  to. 

susungi  2.  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  cook  on  embers,  to 
broil,     su'isungi.     Wango   susungi. 

susuru'u  a  pent-house,  a  lean-to. 

sususu  1.  tdumanga  sususu,  taro  pudding  not 
cut  up  into  squares  but  left  whole. 
susu  4. 

sususu  2.  a  disease  of  the  lower  limbs  accom- 
panied by  swelling. 

susuto'o  V.  i.,  to  be  firm,  assured  in  mind,  i'o 
susuto'o.  ma'ohi  susuto'o,  kd'ilotori 
susuto'o,  to  hope  (late  use). 

suu  1.  V.  i.,  to  sink,  to  go  down,  to  dive,  to 
dip  (of  the  sun),  to  die  out,  to  become 
extinct;  suu  dehi.  to  dive  for  pearl  shell; 
suu    Icuhi.    to    dive    for    turbo    shell; 
di  suu,   U.,    to   die   out,    to   perish,   to 
cease;  hdnuc  e  suu,  the  village   is  unin- 
habited; mdi  ana  waaroauaaro  e  suu,  ebb 
when  the  moon  sets;  mangona  e    suu, 
his  breath  has  gone,  he  is   dead;  ngau 
qe'u  suu,  to  gorge,  lit.,  to  eat  until  the 
head  drops;  uununge  suu,  burnt  offering, 
suuhi  tr..  to  dive  for. 
suuhilana  gerund, 
suulana  sato  the  going  down  of  the  sun; 

with  locative  /.  the  West, 
suue'ini  tr.,  to  go  down  and  leave  (of  the 

sun), 
suuhe  (ni)  v.  n.,  alei  ke  saai  suuheni,  who 
can    enumerate.     Wango   suu,   Florida 
hu,  Mota  sus. 


suu 


98 


suu  2.  suu  taa,  to  appear  above  the  horizon; 
suu  tai  len^i,  to  rise  up;  idemu  ke  suu 
i  halena,  the  lime  spatula  shall  pierce 
his  gums. 
suu  3.   to  revenge,   to  repay;  suu  olanga,  n., 
revenge;  ni'i  suu,  to  make  a  free    gift 
expecting  no  return;  ni'i  suunge,  v.  n. 
suula-(ku)    gerund.,   J-oro  suulana,   to  kill 
in   revenge  for:    e  sa'a   hdrihunie  lo'tc 
suulana.     Wango  suu. 
suu  4.  suu  lehu,  a  certain  kind  of  arrow, 
s  uu  5.  harbor,  bay.    landing-place,     awalosi 
i  su'u,  the  west  wind;  i  su'u  naniona, 
the  opening  in  the  reef  at  Sa'a;  i  Laloi 
Su'u,  Mara  Masiki  Channel;  'Olu  Su'u, 
the  three  inlets,  a  name  for  a  number  of 
inlets. 
su'ule-(ni)   mu  su'uleni  'est,  the  paths  of 
the  sea.     San  Cristoval  sugu. 
su'u  6.  S.,  V.  i..  to  move  position;  su'u  weu, 
su'u  mei,  i'o  su'u  weu,  ddu  su'u  weu. 
dudu.     ha'isu'u. 
suue'i  v.  tr.,  raro  suue'i,  to  turn    inside  out 

(of  a  bag). 
suuha  U.,  suuhai  raa,  drought. 
suuhe'ini  v.  tr.,  to  destroy,  to  kill  out.      horo 

suuhe'ini. 
Su'uheu      Lopo     Suuheu,     a     gorge     above 

Su'uholo. 
Su'uholo  a  village  on  the  east  coast  of  Ulawa; 

its  landing-place  is  i  Su'u  maea. 
su'ule'i  U.,  to  bulge,  to  project, 
suu'i  (au),  suusuu'i  (au)  prep.,  around,  about. 
ddu  suu'i,  to  intreat,  to  importune,  to 
compel;  i'o  suu'i,  to  be  present  with; 
maahii  suu'i,  to  guard  at  night;  tola  suu'i, 
to  importune;  'ure  suu'i,  to  attend  on, 
to  serve;  saeku  e  ruerua'a  suu'iomu,  I 
am  in  doubt  concerning  you.     Wango 
suusuui. 
Su'u  Moli  a  boat    harbor  at  the  northwest 

corner  of  Ulawa. 
Su'u  Peine  a  harbor  on  the  west  coast  of  Little 
Malaita;  su'u  peina,  U.,  a  boat  harbor 
at  Su'uholo. 
suuraa'i,    suure,    suurei,    suusuure    (na)    S., 

foundation,  corner. 
su'uri  dehortative;  don't;  used  also  in  sup- 
posititious cases,  su'uri  na,  not  so; 
'oke  su'uri  lae,  do  not  go;  huni  'oke 
su'uri  'unue  ha'alae  diana,  had  you  not 
mentioned  it  it  were  well;  ta'c  walo  'ie 
ke  su'uri,  save  for  these  bonds;  ke  su'uri 
urine,  God  forbid. 
Su'urodo     the     Mara    Masiki    Channel,     cf. 

Laloi  Su'u 
suusuu  (ku)  1 .  elbow,  corner,  angle;  hau  suusuui 
karo,  corner  stone;  suusuu  nime,  elbow; 
iini  suusuu,  U.,  a  cubit.     Mota  susiu. 
suusuu  2.  hele  suusuu  ana,  to  do  in  succession, 
continuously;  ramo  suusuu,  to  be  strong 
forever, 
suute  1.  V.  tr.,  to  wind  a  fishing-line.     2.  (nd, 
ni)  n.,  a  place  on  a  fishing-rod  for  wind- 
ing the  line. 
Buwa  U.,  v.  i..  to  back,  retire,  to  draw  back. 


ta  1.  U.,  to  speak;  tduri,  tdurilaha,  of  reported 

speech,  to  speak  thus. 
fa  2.  noun  suffix;  mae,  maeld;  waa'i,  waa'ile. 
ta    3.    adj.,    prefix    of    condition;    tahiruhriu, 
tahisuhisu.     lata  1.     Mota  <a,  Maori /a. 
taa  1.  noun  suffix;  horo,  horotaa;  puli,  pulitaa. 
taa,  taataa  2.  U.,  daa  S.,  to  give,  to  take;  to 
receive,   to  do.     taa  kd'u,   let  me  see, 
wait  a  bit.     Wango  haa.  Nine  ta. 
taa  2.  S..  interrogative  pron.;  a  shortened  form 
of  taha;  what?  why?    nga  mui  taa,  what 
things?  horana  nga  taa,  what  for?  mala 
nga  taa.  like  I  don't  know  what;  nga  taa, 
what?  nga  taa  ni  'o  ere  urini,  why  did 
you  say  this? 
ta'a,  ta'ata'a  3  S.,  n.,  numeral,  one;  ta'a  ta'e, 
a   one-man  canoe;  ta'ata'a  mwane,  one 
person;  'enite  ola?  ta'ata'a,  how  many 
things?  only  one;  ta'ata'a  ola  'oto  'o'o, 
one  and  only  one;  nga  ta'ata'a  ini  mola, 
only  one  person;  e  ta'ata'a  mwane,  one 
and  the  same  person;  ta'ata'a  ini,  one 
person    at    a    time,      hduta'a'i,    once. 
Nine  taha,    Bugotu   sa,   San   Cristoval 
ta'a'i,  Polynesian  tahi. 
ta'a  4.  S.,  contraction  of  taha.  adj.,  out.     isi 
ta'a,  to  come  out;  au  ta'a,  to  debouch; 
ulu  ta'a,  to  emerge;  ere  ta'anga,  plain 
speech;  kali  ta'a,  to  emerge;  lou  ta'a, 
to  come  forth;  suu  ta'a,  to  appear  above 
the  horizon;  e  hnre'i  ta'a  ana  hau,   to 
gush  forth  from  the  rock;  mawa  ta'a,  to  be 
exposed  to  the  air  (of  a  sore.)  Lau  tafa. 
ta'a  5.  adj.,  suffix;  rerepata'a,  osiosita'a. 
ta'a    6.    adj.,    bad;    used    in    commiserating. 
tata'ala.     mwae   ta'a,    poor   fellow;    mu 
mwae    ta'a,    poor    fellows;    rako    ta'a, 
unpleasant,     irksome;     kei    ta'a,    poor 
dear  (of  women);  kei  ta'a  pdine,  dear 
lady;  loo  ta'a,  to  be  immodest,  to  offend 
against  propriety;  mwei  ta'a  alaha,  dear 
lord.     Lau /aa,  Mota  talas,  Wango  ta'a, 
Malay  jahat. 
ta'a  7.  U.,  adversative,  but;  commonly  nata'a; 

probably  ta'a  3. 
ta'ahu  U.,  v.  i.,  to  pull  up  weeds  in  a  garden. 

Wango  tagu. 
taalenga  face  upward;  eno  taalenga,  to  lie  on 
one's  back. 
taalengasi  v.  tr.,  to  lay  flat,  to  lay  face 
upward;  taalengasie  nimemu,  open  your 
hand  out  flat. 
taalengasila-(ku)  gerund.     Samoa  talianga, 
to  lie  on  one's  back, 
taalu  n.,  shoal  water,  a  coral  patch;  i  Taalu,  a 
patch  of  shoal  water  off  the  east  coast 
of  Ulawa.      Kalitaalu,  a  proper  name; 
tonohaana    a    Kalitaalu,    his    drinking- 
place  at  Lenga,  Ulawa:  he  was  one  of 
the  legendary  people  of  'Olu  Malau. 
ta'ana,  ta'ata'ana  U.,  pron.,  every,  each;  ta'ana 
nga    'inoni,    each    man;    ta'ana   ngaile, 
every  one.     Florida  lalana. 
ta'ane  1.  adv.,  certainly,  indeed;  follows  the 
verb,     ineu  ta'ane,  yes,  me:  I  am  here 


99 


TAHALAA 


ta'ane  1  (continued). 

indeed;   ta'ane   si'u'e,    certainly;    neke'i 
lae  ta'ane,    I    am  surely   going.     2.   in 
Ulawa  used  in  conditional  affirmation, 
as  ha'alaa,  S.     muni  ne'e  loosia,  ta'ane 
na'a  'untia,  if  I  see  him  I  shall  tell  it; 
ko  urine  ta'ane  na,  S.,  even  supposing 
it  were  so. 
Ta'a   Pea  a   female  ghost  who  makes  yams 
fruitful;  her  name  was  given  in  Ripoo, 
Ulawa.  to  a  natural  formation  in  Hint. 
This  was  placed  in  the  yam  gardens. 
ta'asi,    taata'asi   v.    tr..    to   throw   away,    to 
„..  remove,     taa  1;  asi  3.     Wango  taari. 

taataa  1.  v.  i.,  to  defecate.     Samoa  lata,  to 
'f.'         have  the  bowels  relaxed, 
ta'ata'a  2.  S.,  numeral,  one,  a.     la'ata'a  me'i 
lo'u'e,  one  verse;  la'ata'a  maai  ngeu,  one 
meal;  ta'ata'a  mwela  moute'i,  only  child; 
ta'ata'a  ola  moumoute'i,  one  thing  only. 
ta'ataha  n.,  an  opening  in  the  shore  reef,  a 
chasm,     laha  1.     ukui  ta'ataha,  a  break 
in   the  reef,   a  canoe   passage.     Maori 
tawha,  chasm. 
ta'ataka  ta'atakai  rate,  takatakai  rate,  U.,  the 

down  of  nestlings. 
ta'atala   n.,  a  line,  a  row;  ta'alalai  niu,  a  ro%v 
of  coconut  trees;  uku  ni  ta'atala,  a  row, 
a  line. 
ta'atara  1.  successive;  mu  ivala  ta'atara,  tradi- 
tion; 'unu  ta'atara,  to  relate  in  order, 
ta'atara  2.  ta'atara  wdi,  the  dragon-fly  (Libel- 

lulasp.).     tarasi. 
ta'atarau  mu  wala  ta'atarau,  gossip,     tarau. 
taate'i  S.,  v.  i.,  to  be  at  a  loss,  to  be  ignorant, 
to  be  unwise, 
taate'inge  v.  n.,  fault,  ignorance, 
taate'inge'ini  v.  tr.,  to  deny,  to  repudiate. 
taate'inge'imla-(ku)  gerund.     Florida  tate. 
taatewe  S.,  to  be  at  fault. 

taatewenga  v.  n.,  a  fault. 
ta'au  S.,  adv.,  of  place,  demonstrative  ne  may 
be  added;  onward,  further,  east,  south. 
apai  loa  ta'au,  the  heavens  above;  e  odo 
'oto  ta'au,  he  went  right  on;  po'o  ta'au, 
farther  east;  qd'u  ta'au,  go  east  or  south. 
ta'e  1.  U..  numeral,  one;  Sa'a  prefers  ta'a  but 
has  to'ota'e.     ta'a  ta'e,  one-man  canoe; 
ta'e  hu'a  saena  e  diena,  there's  a  good- 
hearted  woman;  to'ota'e  ola,  to'ota'e  ini, 
one  here  and  there;  e  ta'e  ro  ola,  only 
two;  nga  ta'e,  exclamation.     Probably 
metathetic  upon  'eta. 
ta'e  2.  adv.  of  direction,  up,  inland;  when  used 
with  locative  t  contracts  from  ta'e  i  to 
ta'i.     ta'i  Sa'a,  up  at  Sa'a;  ta'i  Icngi,  up 
above,  in  the  sky;  'ure  ta'i  tolona  hdnue, 
from    out    of    the    hills.     Mota    sage, 
Motu  dae,  Maori  ake. 
ta'e  3.  V.  i.,  to  rise  up,  to  stand. 
ta'e  4.  V.  tr.,  to  raise  up.     ta'e  'akalo,  to  raise 
a  ghost.     M.  A.,  p.  219.     Lau  take,  to 
stand. 
ta'e  5.   V.  i.,  to  embark;  kiraelu  'a  ta'e  hd'i 
'olie'i,    they    embark    on    their    return 
journey;  ta'e  ilengine  horse,  to  ride;  ta'e 
ha'aholo,  to  be  astride;  ta'a  ta'e,  one- 


ta'e  5  (continued). 

man  canoe;  ta'e  hat,  four-man    canoe; 
ta'e  'olu,  three-man  canoe.     Ta'e  'Olu, 

Belt  of  Orion.  

ta'eli  tr..  to  embark,  to  get  into  a  canoe. 

ha'ata'eli. 
ta'elila-(na,  ni)  gerund. 
ta'e  6.  S.,  adversative,  but,  probably  ta'e  1. 
ta'e  walo  'ie  ke   su'uri,  save    for  these 
bonds;  ta'e  pe'inie,  nevertheless.     Araga 
take. 
ta'ela'i  1.  v.  i.,  to  set  out,  to  arise,  to  start. 
ta'e   2.     ta'ela'i  i  ola,   beginning   from. 
2.  to  be  e.xcited;  saeku  e  ta'ela'i,  I  am 
excited. 
ta'ela'ini  tr.,  to  cause  to  arise, 
ta'ena,  ta'eta'ena  S..  pron.,  each,  every,    ta'e  1. 
ta'ena   nga   'inoni,   every   man.     Motu 
taina,  some, 
ta'ero  v.  i..  to  dribble  (of  spittle) ;  waive  ko  ta'ero 

ana,  he  dribbled  at  the  mouth, 
ta'etate  v.  i.,  to  chatter;  sulu  walanga  ta'etate. 

'tis  naught  but  idle  chatter, 
ta'ewau    wantonly,    carelessly,    any    how.     e 
ta'ewau  mola,  e  ta'e  mola  wau,  it's  all 
one,  it  makes  no  difTerence;  ta'ewau  mu 
'inoni,  S.,  the  common  people, 
taha,  ta'ataha  1.  to  be  open,  to  have  a  channel, 
to  emerge;  taha  maa,  to  open  the  door; 
kire  taha  maa  'oto  nge  mclu  lae,  we  left 
as  they  were  opening  their  doors  (at 
daylight);  taha  ana  nga  'inoni,  to  pay 
a  visit  to  a  person;  taha  odo'i,  to  come 
upon,  to  find;  taha  'o'o,  the  tenor  drum 
in  the  para  ni  'o'o,  the  first  notes  are 
struck  on  it;  mwdri  taha,  to  recover  from 
wounds;  sae  taha,  happy;  sae  tahanga, 
happiness;   saeku   e  taha,   my   mind   is 
clear  about  it;   'unu  ta'ataha,   to  pro- 
nounce   aloud;    wdi   e   taha,    the    river 
mouth  is  open,  navigable, 
tahani  S..  tr.,  to  open,  to  be  a  pioneer;  ana 
e  tahanie  rnaamu  ne,  in  that  he  opened 
your  eyes;  'unu  tahanie  saemu,  lay  bare 
your    mind,     (b)     to    emerge,    to    go 
through;  tahanie  'asi,  get  through  the 
surf,     (c)    aha   tahani,    tola   tahani,    to 
warn. 
tahangi  U..  tr.,  tahangia  hdlisi,  to  eat  the 
first  fruits  of  the  harvest;  tahangia  wdpu. 
to  be  the  first  to  clear  a  piece  of  thick 
bush  and  thereby  acquire  a  right  over 
the    land:    prov..     to    be    a    pioneer. 
ha'aisita'anga'ini,   ha'aisitahanga'ini. 
San    Cristoval   tafa,   Lau   tafa,    Tanna 
tafa,  outside;  Maori  tawha. 
taha  2.  interrogative  pron..  what,  more  com- 
mon in  Ulawa;  nga  taha.  what?    inge'ia 
taha  'oto.  U-.  that  is  it,  just  so;  nga  mdsi 
taha.  what  thing?    munia  nga  taha.  what 
for?    'osi  hele  hinoli'a  taha  ine,  how  well 
you  have  done  it.     Mota  sava,  Maori 
aha.     M.  L.,  p.  133. 
taha'ira'a  adv..  clearly,  plainly;  ere  taha'ira'a, 

to  speak  distinctly, 
tahalaa  n..  an  opening  in  a  reef,  a  way  out. 


TAHANGA 


lOO 


tahanga  n.,  a  fathom;  v.  tr.,  to  measure  a 
fathom,  lahanga  awa  nusi,  U.,  a  meas- 
ure, just  a  fathom  long;  haa  tahanp^a, 
a  sum  of  money,  ten  strings  each  a 
fathom  long,  the  sum  equivalent  to 
40  dogs'  teeth  {stdi  halo). 
tahanga'ini  v.  tr.,  to  set  wide  open,     ha'aisita- 

hanga'ini,  ha' aisila' anga  ini . 
taharara'a  mawasidengi  e  laharara'a,  a  storm 

swept  down, 
tahaunutara   through,    from   one   side   to  the 

other;  used  with  poss.  3.  iinu  3. 
tahe  1.  n.,  a  platform;  hd'ti  take,  to  make  a 
platform;  tahe  ni  malaoliu,  a  platform 
on  which  ceremonies  are  conducted  in 
connection  with  malaohu,  a  boy's  catch- 
ing his  first  bonito. 
tahe  2.  v.  i.,  to  be  abundant;  hohola  e  tahe,  the 

garden  produced  abundantly. 
tahe  3.  to  flow,  to  be  in  motion  (of  water) .    'ahe. 
luelue   c   tahe,    the   flood    came.     Poly- 
nesian tahe,  to  flow. 
tahe   4.    tahe   'upu'iipu,   to   be   halfway   in   a 

journey, 
tahe  U.  5.  tahe  tongo,  to  sip. 
tahela'ini,   ta'etahela'ini  v.   tr.,   to  lift  up  to 
view,  to  exalt,  to  mount,  to  ascend. 
tahela'i  partic,  up,  upward;  ngara  tahela'i 
ana,  to  call  upon  him  with  weeping, 
tahera'i  v.   i.,   to  thatch  with  layers  of  sago- 
palm  leaf  iraho). 
tahera'inge  v.  n.,  thatching, 
tahera'ini  tr. 
taheri  v.  tr.,  to  wear  across  the  shoulder  as  a 
bandolier,     a    Taheri    'Usii,    a     proper 
name. 
tahi,  ta'itehi  v.  i.,  to  flee;  tdhi  ke'ii,  be  off,  get 
out  of  the  way. 
tahinge  v.  n.,  flight;  'o'o  ni  tekittge,  to  be  in 
flight;  kire  tola  rorora  ana  tahinge,  they 
fled  precipitately, 
tahisi  tr.,   to  escape  from;  tapo  tdhisi,  to 
grab  and  miss.     Lau  tafi. 
tahi  2.  to  rend;  tahi  sa'o,  to  cut  sago  leaves. 
tahikuhiku  U.,   adj.,   tangled,   raveled,     hiku- 
tahile'ini  v.  tr.,  to  flee  away  and  carry  with  one. 
tahirchiro  n.,  a  large  fish  that  swims  round  in 

circles,     hiro. 
tahisuhisu,  tatahisuhisu  said   of  a  canoe,    to 

run  along  on  the  top  of  a  wave. 

taho  1.  to  purchase  a  man,  to  buy  a  dependent. 

2.  to  pay  money  to  one  who  avenges  a 

death;   ke'i  taho  nana  mwala  e  horo'ia 

mwaena,   will    make    payments    to   the 

people  who    killed    .So-and-so,    M.  A., 

p.  243.     kire  tahoa  nana  mwala  e  horo, 

they  paid   up  to  the  people  who  had 

killed;  tahoa  lalamoa,  to  pay  for  a  man 

killed   by   violence,     cf.    dalo.     3.   taho 

ta'a,  the  ritual  placing  of  a  coconut  in 

a  canoe  containing  a  dead  body,  M.  A., 

p.  136:  taha,  there  should  be  taho. 

taho  4.  taho  ta'a,  used  with  poss.  3,  to  arrive  at. 

tahola'i  v.  i.,  to  wave  in  the  air  as  a  sign  of 

triumph;  tahola'i  mata,  to  wave  the  club. 

tahola'ini  tr. 


tahu  awa  tahu,  U.,  to  slip,  to  come  loose  (of 

bands) . 
tahu'i  V.  tr.,  to  take  to  pieces.     Florida  tavuti, 

to  remove, 
tahule  S.,  n.,  a  mosquito. 

tahulu  the  black  mussel  employed  in  the  manu- 
facture of  bonito  hooks  {te'i).  Wdi  ni 
Tehulu,  the  lagoon  at  Ngorangora, 
Ulawa. 
ta'ifl.  prefix  of  condition,  td'iere.  2.  contrac- 
tion of  ta'e  i,  up  at;  noko  lai  td'i  Sa'a,  I 
am  going  up  to  Sa'a;  td'i  kule,  shore, 
beach,  dry  land,  dinge  ta'i  hahona,  the 
day  after.  3.  participial  ending:  rdpii, 
rdpiite'i.  4.  verb  suffix  used  intransi- 
tively: aile'i,  md'ute'i.  Islota  tag. 
ta'iere  adj.,  dizzy,  faint;  maaku  e  td'iere,  I  am 

giddy. 
tai'esi  neap  tide.     Maori  tai,  laia. 
ta'ihikuhiku  S.,  tangled,  raveled. 
ta'ini   verbal   suffix,    used   transitively,     rdpit, 
rdpiite'ini;  wdi  e  mapipi  'ohe  'oto  td'inie 
kolune  mwakano,  whether  the  water  has 
receded  off  the  face  of  the  earth, 
ta'ingelu  S.,  ta'ingalu  U.,  adv.,  all  together, 
ta'ingelute  n.,  used  as  adv.,  all  together, 
ta'ipulo  adj.,  reversed. 

ta'ipulosi  v.  tr.,  to  reverse, 
ta'ipulopulo  U.,  adj.,  to  come  short  of. 
ta'irara  adj.,  to  be  earnest  over,  to  use  per- 
suasion. 
ta'iraranga  n. 
taitei  I.  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  close  the  eyes,  e  tditeia 

maana. 
ta'itei  2.  v.  i.,  to  deny;  used  with  poss.  3. 
ta'iteli  n.,  flowering  hibiscus  of  many  varieties. 
ta'itelihe-(na)   n.,  a  border,     tali    1.     td'iteli- 

hana  hdnue,  boundary  of  land. 

ta'itelihite  to  be  split,  to  have  cracks  in.    tali  1. 

ta'itesi  S.,  n.,  flesh  meat;  mu  te'ilesi  ola,  flesh. 

taka,  ta'ataka  1.  v.,  to  come  into  flower;  taka 

7nala    mdimepiisu,    to    flower    like    the 

rndimepusu.     n.,  takai  dango,  a  flower; 

ta'atakana,  its  flower.     Wango  taga,  to 

be  in  leaf. 

taka  2.  prefix  of  spontaneity,     takahihe.     Mota 

tava,  Maori  taka,  takahe;  Malagasy  tafa. 

taka   3.    taka  'irori,  proverb   of   confusion   of 

voices. 
takalo,  ta'atakalo  S.,  takatakalo  U.,  to  be  lost, 
astray,  to  go  astray,     ha'atakalo.     nou 
lae  takalo,  I  am  lost;  liu  takalo,  to  take 
a  wrong  road. 
takalonga  v.  n.,  an  error, 
takaloha'ini  tr.,  to  mislay.     Maori  ngaro. 
Nine  ngalo,  lost. 
takaluhe  to  be  loosened,  to  come  loose. 
takara  1.  to  come  unraveled,     matakara.     2. 
to    abound,    to    prosper.     3.    maaku   e 
takara  pulupulu,  I  saw  stars, 
takarasi    tr.,    to    unravel,    to    unwind,    to 

unlace. 
takarara  to  come  undone, 
takararuru  in  a  bunch,  together,     hele  takaruru, 

hold  in  a  bunch;  taka  2. 
takarurume'ini   tr.;   hane  takarurume'inire,  to 


lOI 


TALO 


takarurume'ini  (continued). 

shoot  a   number  at    one    shot.     Mota 
lakar,  to  take  between  the  fingers. 

takihe-(ku)  a  relative,  a  member  of  the  same 
family;  o  tUkiheku,  a  kinsman  of  mine. 

tako,  tatako  to  bewail,  to  lament,     hii'ilako'i. 
takonga  U.,  takola  S.,  v.  n.,  lamentation, 
takosi  tr. 

tako'i-(au)     prep.,    toward    (of    persons    and 
things),  of  swearing  by.     ere  ni  ha'apu 
tako'ie,  swore  by  him. 
tatako'i    v.    tr.,    to    approach    a    person. 
melu  latako'ie  paro. 

taku,  ta'uteku  v.  i.,  to  receive,  to  entertain; 
used    with     poss.    3.     tdkii    ana    pdsi, 
grasp  a  bow. 
takuhi  S.,  takusi  U.,  tr. 
takuhila-(ku)  gerund, 
takume'ini  U.,  tr.,  to  dun. 

takume  S.,  n.,  a  yam  with  fruit  on  the  \ine. 

takuruhi  S..  v.  tr.,  to  crowd. 

tala  1.  n.,  path,  road,  way;  tala  itieu,  my  path; 
tala  ni  liu,  path  to  travel;  Tala  Odo,  the 
main  ridge  of  Little  Malaita;  hdrii  tala, 
S.,  hdri  ni  tala,  U.,  forks  of  the  road; 
t  kerekerena  tala,  beside  the  path;  maai 
tala  rue,  street  corner;  nga  mui  tala. 
paths;  'iiri  odohaana  tala,  walk  straight 
along  the  path;  walu  tala  ni  Tolo,  all 
the  villages  of  Tolo.  Mota  sala, 
Florida  hala,  Maori  ara. 

tala  2.  (ku)  n.,  place,  room,  dsu  talai  nge'ulaa, 
work  for  food;  'eli  lalana,  dig  his  grave; 
hd'itale  talaku,  make  room  for  me;  horo 
i  tala,  to  kill  in  revenge;  horonga  i  talada, 
revenge  for  them;  holi  talaku,  buy  my 
footing;  le'u  talaku,  my  place;  lio  tala, 
beware;  na'o  talana,  lead  the  way  for 
him;  e  to'o  talaku,  room  for  me.  Florida 
talana,  put  it. 

tala,  ta'atala  3.  n.,  a  row,  a  string;  talai  heune, 
a  row  of  teeth;  talai  puli,  a  string  of 
white  cowries;  kulaa  talai  heune,  to 
loosen  the  teeth. 

tala  4.  to  miss,  to  fail,  ddu  tala.  hu'utala. 
pa'ewa  ko  'ala  tala,  the  shark  bites  at 
and  misses  (the  last  two  days  of  the 
moon);  pola  tala.  U.,  to  fail.  Mao.  hara. 
talahi  tr.,  e  hute  lalahie  qongine,  born  out 
of  due  time.     Wango  tara,  Viti  dhala. 

tala  5.  V.  tr.,  to  sweep;  talaa  nume,  a  besom. 

talaa  a  littoral  tree  of  hard  wood. 

tala'ae  v.  i.,  to  begin;  used  with  genitive  i,  ni. 

e   tala'ai    'acla,    c   tala'aeni    'aela,    it    is 

beginning  to  spoil;  tala'ae  ni  lae,  begin 

to  go. 

tala'aeha-(na)    U.,   n.,    the    beginning    of, 

because  of. 
tala'ae  (na)  S.,  beginning  from. 

tala'aehota  S.,  v.  i.,  to  begin,     'aehota. 

talaiihu'e  v.  tr.,  to  guard,  to  protect,  to  catch 
a  ball.     dhu. 

tala'aela'a  v.  i.,  to  frolic,  to  play. 

talahi  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  miss,  hula  talahi,  U.,  to  fail 
to  find  a  person  at  home;  lio  talahi.  U., 
to  look  for  in  vain;  ma'aru  talahi,  to  go 
like  winking. 


talahuli  the  place  of;  with  poss.  3.  tala  2. 
i  talahuli  emu,  in  your  right  place;  mu 
le'u  talahuliana,  his  wonted  place. 

tala'i  V.  tr.,  to  entice,  ha'atala'i.  tala'i  keri, 
to  catch  octopus. 

tala'ilisi  continuously;  huni  palo  lala'ilisi 
huni'o,  to  worship  Thee  continuously. 

talama'i  v.  i.,  to  prepare  for  a  feast,  to  collect 
materials,     talama'i  wala.  U.,  to  act  as 
mediator. 
talama'inge  v.  n. 
talama'ini  tr. 

talani  hataa'i  sae  talani,  to  be  careful  to.     tala  2. 

talau  1.  U.,  to  be  alight  (of  fire),  to  blaze,  to 
spread  (of  ulcer),  rara  talau.  twenty- 
first  and  twenty-second  days  of  the 
moon.     F"lorida  talau,  continually. 

talau,  tatalau  2.  v.  i.,  to  walk  along  a  log. 
latalauhe.     San   Cristoval   tatarau. 

tale  (au)  1.  U.,  prep.,  to,  toward  (of  persons 
and  things);  lae  lalea.  go  to  him;  tale  i 
ola,  on  the  side  of  w  hat  you  may  call  it. 
Malo  tele. 

tale  2.   V.   i.,   to  lack;  melu  tale  ola.  we  lack 
things, 
talenga    S.,    talengaha    U.    (double    noun 
ending),  v.  n.,  a  shortage,  famine. 

tale  3.  to  miss,  to  look  in  vain  for.  hd'itale. 
lio  talea,  S.,  to  fail  to  see. 

tale'i  mere,  inferior;  mu  tale'i  ola,  inferior 
things,  merely,  wantonly;  nou  tale'i 
lae  tnola,  I  just  went  for  no  reason;  tale'i 
teu,  to  act  wantonly;  tale'i  tcunge,  wan- 
ton mischief;  tale'i  'o'i'o'i,  to  trouble 
oneself;  e  tale'i  meimeile'ini,  he  was  in 
destitution;  tale'i  inu  mola'a,  just  drink 
without  price. 

tali  1.  V.  i.,  to  be  bounded  by,  to  end,  to  begin. 
td'itelihe.  lai  teli,  up  to,  until.  San 
Cristoval  tari,  to  reach;  Florida  taligu, 
back,  again;  Xiue  tali,  until,  since. 

tali  2.  lama  tali,  to  free  a  tree  of  creepers;  tali 
ivale,  to  strip  the  skin  of  cane  (wale). 

tiilihe  (ku)  n.,  ere  tali  he,  to  defend  oneself  in 
speech,  to  deny,  ere  (lado)  tdliheku,  make 
my  defence;  ne'isae  Idlihe,  to  reach  in 
thought. 

talihite  cf.  td'itelihite. 

talihuu  'ano  Idlihuu,  to  sink  out  of  sight,  to 
go  down  for  good. 

talili  V.  tr.,  to  transgress,  to  work  wickedness. 
hd'itelili. 
talilinge  v.  n.     Wango  tariri. 

talimaa  v.  i.,  to  start,  to  come  to  an  end; 
talimaa  ana  tnaholo  'ie,  S.,  from  now  on; 
taliinaa  'olo  nihou,  U.,  up  till  now. 

talisi  U..  v.  i.,  to  be  awake,  to  wake  up. 
ha'atdlisi. 

talo  1.  a  shield  made  of  wood. 

talo  2.  a  tree  whose  bark  is  used  for  cerements. 

talo  3.  V.  tr.,  to  tithe;  talo  dhu.  to  amass; 
e  taloa  huehuana  dangona  nruakana.  he 
gives  tithes  of  tlie  trees  of  the  field;  talo 
lilisi,  to  offer  a  certain  portion  as  a 
sacrifice. 

talo  4.  U..  talo  wau  i  'esi,  to  follow  the  coats 
by  sea. 


TALO 


I02 


talo  5.  talo  nimu,  to  photograph, 
talo  6.  U.,  V.  i.,  to  spread  (of  news).     S.,  taro. 
taloha  (na),  tataloha  (na)  v.  n.,  news, 
taloha'ini  tr.,  to  spread  news,  to  proclaim. 
taloha'i    v.    i.    and    partic.     Wango    taro, 
Samoa  tala. 
talo  7.  talo  Wist,  at  irregular  intervals, 
talo  8.  talo   ahu,   a  fighting  company,   a  war 

band,     talo  1. 
talohi  V.  tr.,  to  guard  against  a  blow,  to  ward 

off,  to  shield, 
talo'ili  U.,  taro'iri  S.,   a    paddle-shaped    club 
with  a  long  handle,  used  also  as  a  shield. 
Guppy,  "Solomon  Islands"  p.  74. 
taluhi  1.  to  draw  out  water,  to  draw  at  a  well. 
cf.  ddnu.     2.  U.,  Su'u  i   Teluhi'a,  the 
boat  harbor  at  Mwado'a,  Ulawa. 
tamwa  prefix  of  condition.     Mota  lama. 
tamwaodo  v.  i.,  to  be  clear,  straightforward, 
tanauhi  ha'atanauhi,  v.  tr.,  to  decoy  a  ghost  or 

animal  by  food, 
tane  S.,  adv.,  of  place;  tane  mat,  here;  lane  wau, 

there;  tane  ta'i  salo,  up  in  the  sky. 
tanga  (ku)  n.,  the  crotch  of  the  legs,     matanga. 
Mota  sanga,  Sulu  sanga,   branch;  Viti 
sanga. 
tangaa  n.,  a  span;  v.,  to  span  with  the  hand. 

Viti  dhanga. 
tangahulu  numeral,  ten:  used  only  in  counting; 
tangakulu  ana,  tenth.     Mota  sangavul, 
Florida     hangavidu,     Maori     ngahuru, 
Niue  hongofulu. 
tangalau  1.  numeral,  one  hundred:  used  with 
genitive    i,    ni.     tangalai    mwane,    an 
hundred  men.     San  Cristoval  tangarau. 
tangalau  2.  niu  tangalau,  a  heavily  laden  coco- 
nut.    'Ahe  i  Niu  Tangalau,  a  tide-rip 
between  Ulawa  and  Sa'a. 
tangatanga  n.,  a  forked  stick,     tanga. 
tangi  1.  a  basket  made  of  split  cane  to  hold 
canarium  nuts  for  drying  in  the  smoke 
{ngdli  maa). 
tangi  2.  a  hand  of  bananas,  used  with  genitive 

si,  tangisi  hudi.     Mota  tingiu. 
tangi  3.  to  cleave,  to  rive,  to  split  a  log  in  two. 
tango  S.,  used  with  genitive  ni;  tangoni  mwela, 

all  the  children. 
tao  v.  i.,  to  be  upset  (of  the  stomach);  'ieku 

e  tao,  I  am  sick  at  the  stomach, 
taoha  n.,  men's  club-house  on  the  beach  used 
for  stowing  canoes.  Wrongly  spelt  oha 
in  M.  A.,  p.  174.  hule  e  'a'a  haahia 
taoha,  the  creeper  had  climbed  all  over 
the  club-house;  niu  ni  taoha,  a  palm 
(Nipa  fruticans).  Wango  oha. 
taotaoro  n.,  a  tree  from  San  Cristoval  planted 

in  the  villages  for  shade, 
tapa,  ta'atapa  1.  v.  i.,  to  cut  with  a  blow,  to 
reap;    tapa   tekela'ini,    to    cut    off    and 
destroy;  nahi  ta'atapa  korn,  a  sickle. 
tapali  tr.,  tapali  hut,  to  cut  off  the  stems 
of    taro.     San    Cristoval    taba,    Maori 
tapa,  tapahi. 
tapa    ta'atapa  2.  tapa  ha'i'olisi,  to  exchange 

words,  to  converse. 
tapa  3.  prefix  of  condition,     tapa'oli,  tapausu. 
Mota  tava,  Lau  taba. 


tapaa  a  tree  of  soft  wood  used  for  making  food 

bowls,  the  milk  tree  of  North  Queens- 
land. 
tapaika   tobacco   (English);   ngdu  tapaika,   to 

smoke  tobacco, 
tapala'a    U.,    adj.,    abounding,     ha'atapala'a. 

Wango  tabarasi. 
tapaliu  V.  i.,  to  pass  by,  to  pass  across,  to  cross, 
tapa'oli  V.  i.,  to  exchange,  to  ransom. 

tapa'olite     (ku)     v.     n.,     tapa'oliteku,     in 

exchange  for  me. 
tapa'olisi  tr. 
tapa'olisila-(ku)  gerund, 
tapausu  V.   i.,   to  pierce,  to  go  right  through; 

used  with  poss.  3. 
tapi  U.,  V.  tr.,  to  chop,  to  cut  down,     'aitepi. 

San  Cristoval  tabi. 
tapo  V.  i.,  to  grab,  to  catch  hold,  to  lay  hands 

on;  tapo  niae,   to  seize  weapons;  tapo 

tdhisi,  to  grab  and  miss. 
tapoli  tr. 

tapolila-(ku)  gerund, 
taqaosi  S.,  to  happen  to,  to  do  harm  to. 
taqaruru  U.,  bronze-wing  dove,     'aqa  1. 
tara  1.  v.  i.,  to  drift  at  sea,  to  be  set  by  currents. 

mataraha. 
tara  2.  adj.,  prefix,     tararuru. 
tara  3.  v.  i.,  to  skim,  to  pass  over  the  surfaceo 

ta'atarawdi,  to  skim  the  water,  dragon-fly. 
tara'a  adj.,  7iunu  tara'a  huuilume,  burn  up  the 

village. 
tara'asi  continuously,  straight  on;  lae  tara'asi, 

to  go  straight  on. 
tarakoni  v.  tr.,  to  collect,  to  gather  together, 
tarapiu  to  be  blistered  (of  hands  or  feet). 
tararuru  v.  i.,  to  be  gathered  together,  to  be 

associated  with,  to  be  united  with;  hele 

tararuru,  take  hold  all  together;  saeda 

ka'a  tararuru   pe'ie,   their  hearts  were 

not  whole  with  him.     Wango  taruru. 
tarasi  v.  tr.,  to    skim  along  the   surface   of; 

tarasie  'asi  ana  hole,  feather  the  oar. 
tarasi  oko  a  bird,  cuckoo. 

tarasimwa'a  adj.,   skinned,   broken   (of  skin), 
tarau,  tatarau  v.  i.,  to  go  straight  on,  to  con- 
tinue;  continuously,     liti  tarau,   to  go 

straight  ahead.     Florida  talau. 
tarauhe'ini  U.,   v.   tr.,   to  continue  with,   to 

persevere  in.     talau.     2.  to  light  a  lamp, 
taraure'i    partic,    continuously,    continually; 

to  continue  on,  to  go  straight  on.     ■■->   i^ 
taraure'ini  U.,  v.  tr.,  used  as  a  preposition; 

right  on  through,  throughout. 
tari,  ta'iteri  1.  v.  tr.,  to  gain,  to  obtain,     tdri 

olanga,  U.,  tari'e  olanga,  S.,  riches. 
tari  2.  v.  i.,  to  stick  fast  in  a  tree  or  a  noose. 

Mota  tali,  a  rope;  Maori  tari,  a  noose, 
tari  3.  U.,  V.  tr.,  to  launch  a  canoe;  moro  tdria 

paro  'iola  i   'esi,   you   two  launch  the 

canoe  into  the  sea. 
tari  4.  tari  sa'o,  to  split  the  sides  off  sago-palm 

leaves  to  make  bird  arrows  (topa). 
tarie'ini  wala  U.,  to  commit  fornication. 

tarie'ini  walanga  v.  n. 
tariho  v.  tr.,  to  watch  for  turtles  coming  up 

to  lay,  tarihoa  honu. 
tariki  U.,  to  stride. 


I03 


TAUTO'O 


taro,  tataro  S..  talo  U.,  to  spread  (of  news),  to 

proclaim. 
taroha,  tataroha  (na)  v.  n.,  news;  tarohana 

e  taro  poi,  the  news  has  reached  here, 
tataroha'i'e  adj.,  used  as  n.,  news, 
tarohi  tr.,  to  come  to  one's  ears, 
taroha'ini  tr.,  to  proclaim. 
tarohainila-(ku)  gerund, 
taro'iri  S.     cf.  talo' Hi,  U. 
taroisuli  U.,  to  add  to. 
tasi  1.  V.  i.,  to  slip,  to  slide,  to  glance  off. 
tSsi  2.  V.  i..  to  strip  off  the  outer  skin;  tiiu  test, 

a  thin-skinned  variety  of  coconut. 
tata    1.    adjectival    prefix   of   condition,     tata- 

qeluqelu.     VVango  la,  Florida  ta,  Viti  ta. 
tata  2.  V.  i.,  to  scatter,     dhutala,  tataa'ini. 
tataa  S.,  to  fade  away,  to  wither. 
tataa'ini  v.  tr.,  to  scatter,  to  sow  broadcast,  to 

shake    out,    to    unfurl;    tataa'i  'asi,  to 

shake  off;  ere  tataa'ini,  to  curse.     Wango 

adaraini. 
tata'ala  adj.,  bad.     ta'a  6,  la  4.     ha'atata'ala. 

raramanga  ana  i'onga  tata'ala,   rebuke 

because  of   lasciviousness;  si'ohaaku  e 

tata'ala,  I  am  in  evil  plight, 
tata'alanga    n.,    evil;    mwaanie    mu    tata- 

'alanga,  from  evil, 
tata'alaha    n.,    used    with    poss.    3.     lala- 

'alahaana  mu  i'e,  the  bad  fish,  lit.,  its 

badness  the  fish, 
tata'alasi  with  ddu,   hele,  to  do  harm  to; 

horo  tata'alasi,  to  kill  without  mercy. 
tatahana  S.,   adv.,   in  a  little  while,   almost; 

tatahana   'oto   muini   ke'i   helesie,   some 

almost  did  it. 
tatahiohio  to  stagger  about.         » 
tatahiruhiru  headlong. 

tataipeipe  v.  i.,  to  wallow,  to  roll  about  in  a  fit. 
tataisuisu  to  run  along  atop  a  wave  (of  a  canoe) . 
tataiteu  S.,  Ho  tataiten,  to  appear  beautiful. 
tataku  S.,  to  be  effeminate;  hele  tatakii,  to  be  a 

novice. 
tatalau  1.  as  talau  2.     2.  U.,  in  succession;  hele 

taialau,     to     do    in     succession;     'mm 

tatalau  ana,  to  rehearse  in  order. 
tatahoradiU.,  adj.,  falling,  of  a  meteor,     tata  1. 
tatalauhe  v.  n.,  a  means  of  crossing  over,  a 

bridge,  a  log  over  a  stream. 
tatale  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  go  through  or  carry  (of  the 

sound    of    a    conch);    walana    'dhuri    e 

tatalea  walu  lata  i  Tola,  the  sound  of  the 

conch  went  through  all  the  villages  in 

Tolo. 
Tatamwane  o  Tatamwane,  a  proper  name,  lit., 

scatter  men. 
tatanga  n.,  used  as  v.  i.,  to  be  scattered,  dis- 
persed. 
tatangasi   tr.,   to  be  scattered  over;   tata- 

ngasie  mu  ote,  scattered  over  the  low- 
lands. 
tatanga'ini    tr.,    to    scatter,    to    disperse. 

ha'atatanga'ini. 
tatanga'i  partic.     hd'itatanga'i. 
tatangalungalu  U.,  to  be  excited, 
tataqeluqelu     headlong,     head     over     heels. 

ha'atataqelu. 
tatara  S..  'unu  tatara,  wala  tatara,  tradition. 


tatara'a  adj.,  straight,     tara'a. 

tataraaraa  horovga  tataraaraa,  indiscriminate 
slaughter. 

tatarau  'unu  tatarau,  gossip. 

tatarisi  U.,  the  monitor  lizard  (Varanus 
indicus). 

tataro  v.  i.,  to  stumble,  ha'atataro.  'aeku 
e  tataro  ana,  my  foot  stumbled  thereon. 

tatate'ete'e  v.  i.,  to  bump,  to  collide. 

tatau  U.,  V.  i.,  to  hurry,  to  hasten;  kira'elu  'asi 
tateu  weu,  they  then  scurried  away. 

tatawero'a  S.,  adj.,  for  naught,  in  vain, 
unprofitably. 

tatawisi,  tatawisiwisi  v.  i.,  to  run  along  on  the 
top  of  a  wave,  to  speed  along. 

tau  U.,  dau  S.  1.  v.  i.,  to  do,  to  act,  to  make,  to 
be  about  to  do,  to  endeavor,  e  tdu  ni 
lae,  he  made  to  go;  tdu  muni,  to  en- 
deavor; tdu  ha'aro'i,  to  find;  tdu  'ei,  to 
break  firewood;  tdu  'ae,  to  hurry;  tdti 
lakelake,  to  give  oneself  airs;  tdu  rarahi, 
to  urge,  to  incite;  tdu  rarahinga,  impor- 
tunity; tale'i  teu.  S.,  to  act  wantonly; 
tale'i  teunge,  mischief;  no'iteu,  to  delay; 
'oniteu,  to  delay;  hd'iteu,  to  hasten. 

tau  2.  v.  i.,  'ape  e  tdu,  the  net  has  fish  enclosed 
in  it. 

tUu  3.  tdu  ta'a,  to  issue,  to  arrive  at;  used  with 
poss.  3.  e  tdu  ta'a  ana.  it  issued  in; 
raa  tdu  ta'a  mala  sato,  shine  out  like  the 
sun;  tdu  taha,  M.  A.,  p.  136.  'au  4. 

tau  4.  ha'atau,  v.  i.,  to  be  far  off,  distant. 

tauhe  S.,  n.,  a  feast. 

taule'ini  v.  tr.,  to  get  ready  things  for  a  journey, 
to  make  preparations, 
taule'i  V.  i. 
taule'inge  v.  n.,  preparation. 

tauma'i,  taume'i  U.,  conjunction,  used  in  sup- 
posititious cases;  if,  supposing  that. 
ana  kira  'a  tdume'i  lae,  supposing  that 
they  go. 

taumanga  n.,  a  pudding  made  of  pounded  taro 
and  coconut  milk  (oni)  cut  up  into  little 
squares;  the  taro  is  first  roasted  on  the 
coals,  then  pounded,  then  rolled  flat 
and  the  coconut  milk  added,  the  squares 
are  then  rolled  in  leaves  and  roasted; 
tdumanga  sususu,  taro  pudding  not  cut 
into  blocks  but  left  whole. 

tilunge'ini,  tauteunge'ini  v.  tr.,  to  persecute. 
taunge'inila-(ku)  gerund. 

tauri,  tauritaha,  taurini  U.  1.  v.  i.,  to  speak  thus, 
to  do  thus;  used  of  reported  speech. 
nge  na'asi  tduri,  then  said  I. 
tauri,  tauteuri  2.  v.  tr.,  to  sew,  to  stitch;  tduri 
to'oni,   to  sew   clothes;   tduri  to'oninge, 
V.  n.     tdurilana,  gerund, 
tauteurite  v.   n.,  a  seam,  a  sewing;  maai 
teutrurite,  a  seam, 
ta'utepunge  n.,  slander. 

tauten  S.,  adv.,  carelessly,  wantonly,  unguard- 
edly, blasphemously.  Wango  tautau. 
Tauto'o  U.,  a  Pore  Tauto'o,  a  legendary'  person 
belonging  to  Su'uholo  and  killed  at  San 
Cristoval  in  a  raid.  His  head  is  said  to 
have  arrived  back  at  Su'uho'o  by 
magic  {sdru'a)  and  to  have  been  found 


TAUTO'O 


104 


Tauto'o  (continued). 

on  the  beach.  A  representation  of  him 
cut  in  coral  formed  one  of  the  sacred 
things  at  Su'uholo. 
tawa  an  opening  in  the  shore  reef,  used  in  the 
names  of  landing-places.  maalUawa. 
maiau-a.  Tawaodo.  Tawaideu,  Tawa 
ni  Mae,  Tawa  ni  'Ehi'e;  names  of  liar- 
bors.  Mao.  awa.  channel. 
Tawaine  an  inlet  in  'Olu  Su'u,  west  of  Cape 

Zelee. 
Tawana  a  small  pass  just  south  of  Roasi  Bay, 

Little  Malaita. 
tawari  v.  i.,  to  strike  out  with  the  hands  in 

swimming. 
Tawasipua  U.,  a  landing-place  at  'Olu  Malau. 
tawau  n.,  a  shrine,  a  sanctuary.     San  Cristoval 

lau-ao. 
te  S.,  to  speak,  to  say,  to  do;  used  of  reported 
speech,     tiiuri.     e  teuri,  he  said;  e  leiiri 
taa,  what  did  he  say.  nge  nest  teuri,  then 
said  I;  neke  teurine  la'ane,  I  shall  cer- 
tainly do  thus, 
tea  1.  V.  i.,  to  make  speeches,  to  cry  out  in  a 
loud    voice,    to    declaim.     Lau    tea,    to 
speak.     2.  to  bark,  of  a  dog. 
teangi  tr.,  to  bark  at,  to  bay. 
teanga'i  U.,  v.  i.,  to  offer  prayers  to  a  ghost, 
teanga'inga  v.  n.,  prayer,  worship, 
teanga'ini  tr. 
tee,  teetee  1.  v.  i.,  to  tick,  to  tap,  to  smite,  to 
hammer,  to  throb, 
teeli  tr..  teeli  pelo,  to  ring  the  bell, 
te'e,   te'ete'e   2.   adv.,  for  good,   completely; 
te'ete'e  hiiu,   for  good,   finally,   forever, 
abiding;  mango  te'ete'e,  finished  for  good 
and  all. 
te'ela'i  partic,  mango  tc'da'i,  quite  finished. 
Lau  tee  fuu. 
te'e  3.  poo  te'e,  kire  ka'a  poo  te'e  ada,  they  did 
not    trouble   about    them;   su'asu'ate'e, 
to  be  anxious  about.     Lau  tete,  manala 
tetea,  to  be  anxious. 
te'e   4.    hd'ite'e,    with   whole   skin,    unpeeled. 

te'ete'e  2. 
te'ela'i  v.  i.,  to  set;  7nelu  te'ela'i  'ae,  our  feet 
stand;  mala  nga  poo  ko  te'ela'i  ana,  even 
if  a  beast  come  into  contact  with  it. 
te'ela'ini  tr.,  ko  susue'inie  nimana  le'ela'inie 
ngidune,    stretched   out   his   hand   and 
touched  his  lips. 
teetee  1.  a  sacred  inclosure  planted  with  dili 
at  the  door  of  the    dwelling-house  or 
toohi  or  an  inclosure  made  round   the 
central  pillar  into  which  scraps  of  food 
or  fruit  skins  may  be  thrown  without 
fear  of  their  being  used  for  purposes  of 
witchcraft. 
te'ete'e    (ku)    2.    n.,    skin,    bark,    husk,    rind. 
hd'ite'e.     te'ete'ena  sapeku,  skin  of   my 
body.     2.    n.,    a    marine    shell.    Santa 
Cruz  be. 
tehe  n..  a  bird,  the  chicken-hawk.     San  Cris- 
toval tehe. 
tei  S.  1.  n.,  the  place  where;  with  locative  i, 
itei.     U.,   hei.     itei  ngeena,  what  place 
is  that?  'o  'ure  ilei,  where  are  you  from. 


tei  1  (continued). 

whence  come  you?  'oka  lai  tei,  whither 

are  you   going?  hai  tei,   down  where? 

mwala  'urei  tei  ni  'ie,  from  whence  are 

these  people.     Mota  vea,  Maori  hea. 
te'i  2.  to  draw  water;  te'i  wei,  to  draw  water; 

te'i   weinge,    a   drawing   of   water;    te'ie 

rata,  to  fill  the  bamboo   water-carrier; 

noH  te'ie  i  'Ei'ei,  I  drew  water  from  the 

spring  'Ei'ei.     Mota  tav. 
te'i  3.  n.,  the  bonito  hook,  made  of  tdliulu  or 

hapa  or  roa  or  'ime.  used  with  a  rod  in 

the  bow  of  the  canoe. 
teile'ini  v.  tr.,  to  wag,  to  m.ove  from  side  to  side. 

e  teile'inie  qd'une,  he  wags  his  head, 
te'inge'ini  v.  tr.,  to  proffer,  to  call  attention 

to,  to  point  out. 
teitei  mother,  aunt;  used  in  the  vocative;  used 

in  affectionate  address  by  a  parent  to 

female     child,     cf.     mama'a.     a     teitei, 

mother,  when  speaking  of  a  particular 

person;    teitei   ineu,    my    dear   mother. 

Mota  veve,  Efate  tete,  Alite  tetelia,  Lau 

te. 
teke   V.    i.,    to  fall,    to   drop   to   the   ground. 

ha'aleke.     ngdii  teketeke,  to  drop  crumbs 

of    food    when    eating,    to    eat    like    a 

cockatoo. 
tekela'ini   tr.,   used   with   preceding   verb,    as 

diin,  kite,  tala.  etc.;  to  knock,  to  sweep 

and  lose;  hu'e  tekela'ini,  to  uproot  and 

destroy;  tapa  tekela'ini,  to  cut  off  and 

destroy. 
tekela'i  partic,  fallen  and  lost,  misplaced 

and  lost.     Florida  taga,  Wango  tegeraini. 
tekuruhi  S.,  v.  tr.,  to  close  in  on  a  person. 
temweri  U.,  hele  temiveri,  to  touch, 
tengotengo  v.  i.,  to  droop,  to  fall  to  one  side, 

to  hang  loose,     ha'atengolengo. 
teo  V.  i.,  to  be  humble,  lowly,  helpless;  used 

with    poss.    3.     muini    e    teo    ada,    the 

humble;    i'o   ni   teo,    to   be    humble    in 

demeanor. 
teqe  n.,  a  bamboo,  hdi  teqe. 
tere  1.  v.  i.,  to  peck;  tere  qa'asi,  to  peck  and 

break, 
tere  2.  to  flap;  tere  'apa'apa,  to  flap  the  wings. 

terehi  teterehi,  tr.,  to  fan.     tetere. 
tereha'ini  cf.  mwakatereha'ini,  to  flout,  to  put 

to  scorn. 
tero  V.  i.,  to  hang  down,  to  depend;  to'oni  e  tero 

i    'ano,    robes    hanging    down    to    the 

ground;  tero  ngidii.  to  pout  the  lip. 
teroliu  excessive,  beyond  what  is  fitting;  qd'u 

leroliii,  the  second  finger. 
tern  cf.  suliteru,  needle. 

tete  I.  V.  tr.,  to  pull  out  the  contents  of  a  bag. 
to  rifle;  tete  'asi,  to  empty  out  contents. 
Florida  tete.  Mota  sese. 
tete  2.  to  give  money,  to  make  a  subscription. 
tete  3.  to  flutter;  tele  'apa'apa. 
tete  4.  to  be  spilled;  hena  e  tete  'uru'uru,  the 

lime  is  spilled.     Fagani  tete,  loose, 
tete  5.  V.  tr.,  to  lead  by  the  hand. 
tete  6.  a  stone  fence;  so'o  tete,  to  build  a  stone 
fence;   kumwesie  tete,   to  take  down   a 
stone  wall. 


lO: 


TOLI 


tete  7.  S..  pili  tele,  to  oppress,  to  tread  clown. 

tetela-(ku)  gerund.,  with  ku.  mtt.  na.  etc., 

pili    telelara,    or    pili    letelada,    oppress 

them. 

Tetele    the    ridge   at   the    head    of    the   river 

Wa'o'a'a. 
tetelenga  U.  a  tabu. 
tetere  n.,  a  fan. 

tetewa'a  S.,  adj.,  %ery  long,  very  tall.     lewa. 
teu  n.,  the  half  shell  of  a  coconut,     cf.  siiukai. 
teuri,  teurine,  teuritaa.  cf.  te,  nge  nesiteuri,  then 
said  I ;  'olo  nge  a  Dora  esi  leuri.  then  Dora 
said;   'olo  nou  si  teuri,  then  said  I. 
tewa  to  be  long,  tall;  okolu  lewa,  twelfth  day 
of  the  moon, 
tewanga  v.  n.,  length,  height.    Wango  leu'a. 
tewatewa  IJ.,  very  tall,  very  long. 
toha  to  rejoice. 

toha'ini  tr.,  to  give  oneself  airs,  to  be  proud, 

to  speak  well  of.     ha'atohai'ni. 
tohala'i  partic,  rejoicing  in  spirit. 
tohala'inge  v.  n.,  rejoicing;  i'o  ni  lohala  inge, 
to    be    rejoicing;    lolaha    ni   tohala'inge, 
exultation. 
tohe,    ha'itohe    to    dispute.     Wango   tohc,    to 

deny,  to  reject. 
toho,  totohoS.,  tohotohoU.,  1.  to  measure  with  a 
rod,  to  measure. 
tohola-(ku)  gerund. 

totohota  S.,  tohotohota  I'.,  v.  n.,  a  measure; 
e  rdpiite'inie  lolohota,  he  laid  the  measure 
along.     Mota  towo. 
toho  2.  V.  i.,  to  quarrel,  to  scold. 
tohu,  to'utohu  S.,  tohutohu  U.  1.  v.  tr.,  to  chop 
down,    to    fell;    tohti    hileli,    to    cleave 
asunder,  to  rive. 
tohula-(ku)  gerund.,  ro  maai  tohiilana,  two 

choppings. 
tohule'ini  tr.,  to  chop  down,  to  fell. 
tohu  2.  v.  tr.,  to  build  a  house;  noko  to'utohu 
nnme,   I  am  housebuilding;  noko  lohue 
n\:,a  nnme,  I  am  building  a  house. 
tohula-(ku)  gerund. 
tohu  (ku)   S.  3.  used  to  express  initiative  in 
action,  of  one's  own  accord,     ha'atohu. 
tohuku,  of  my  own  accord;  e  i'o  tohune, 
he  lived  free,  under  no  restrictions,  his 
own  master;  'ure  tohune,  to  desire. 
tohule'ini  1.  v.  tr.,  to  chop  down,  to  fell.     2. 

V.  tr.,  to  point  at,  to  accuse. 
to'i  V.  tr.,  to  suspend,  to  hang  up;  likisi  to'i,  a 
mouse, 
to'inge   V.    n.,    something   hung   up.     San 
Cristoval  toki. 
toki  U.,  V.  tr.,  to  hold  fast,  to  grasp  tightly. 
tola,  totola   1.   V.   i.,   to  carry,     ha'atola.     tola 
lii'f,   to  be   heavy   laden;   tola  siwc,   to 
kill    and    earn    the    blood-money;   tola 
miiuri,  with  poss.  3,  to  carry  captive;  tola 
hd'ileku,  to  carry  in  one  piece;  sidi  tolai 
hie,  shoulder-blade;  ka  tola  dliho'i  ana, 
to  recover.     2.  tola  keni,  to  marry;  tola 
keninge,    marriage;    tola   rue,    tola    'olu, 
to  have  two.  three,  wives.     3.  to  be  in 
the  doing,  in  the  making,  being  carried 
out.     4.  to  obey,  to  give  attention  to; 
used  with  poss.  3.     tolai  suit,  to  obey; 


tola  (continued). 

tolai  suli  wala,  to  obey  orders;  totola  i  'ae, 
to  follow  a  master;  tola  koni,  to  receive; 
tolai  suite  manatana,  according  to  his 
nature.  5.  to  affect  adversely;  nunu  e 
tola,  there  was  a  famine;  hi'olonga  e  tola, 
there  was  a  famine;  e  tola  'aela  aku,  it 
was  bad  for  me.  6.  to  set  (of  a  current) ; 
'ahe  kosi  tola,  there  is  a  strong  current. 

7.  to  act;  tola  mala  pu'o,  to  behave  like 
a  heathen;  tola  hti'o,  to  lay  a  snare;  tola 
lilisi.  to  walk  about;  tola  tahani,  to 
proclaim;  tola  ahonga,  with  poss.  3,  to 
tempt;  totola  'ohi,  to  search  for;  tola 
stiu'i,  to  importune;  hire  tola  rorora 
ana  tahinge,  they  fled  away  precipitately. 

8.  tola  'akalo,  to  exorcise  spirits;  tola 
ha'area,  U.,  to  send  out  an  odor  on  all 
sides;  e  tola  liuliu,  it  has  become  general. 

9.  to  curdle  (of  coconut  milk  oni). 
tolanga  v.  n.,  a  burden,  a  carrying;  lolanga 

e  poponga,  a  load  hard  to  carry. 
tolala-(ku)  gerund.,  carrying.     Wango  tora. 

tolaa'i  V.  tr.,  to  entreat,  to  importune,  to  vex. 
tola. 

tolaha  (ku)  v.  n.,  custom,  way,  manner, 
example,  kind,  disposition;  tolaha  ni 
tohala'inge,  exultation. 

tolaka  a  banana  with  the  fruit  bunch  growing 
erect,  a  plantain;  hudi  tolaka,  a  plan- 
tain. 

tolana  S.,  tolani  U.,  tolana'i,  tolangani  U., 
adv.,  immediately,  forthwith;  precedes 
verb.     Wango  tora. 

tole,  totole  v.  tr.,  to  fetch,  to  carry,  to  bring, 
with  directives  mdi  and  wau;  to  affect, 
to  be  the  matter  with;  kire  mwa'e  tolea, 
they  consented  to  carry  it;  hi'olonga  e 
tolea  hdnue,  famine  was  over  the  land; 
tole  soinge,  to  raise  a  cry;  tole  mango,  to 
hold  the  breath.     San  Cristoval  tore. 

toll,  to'itoli  S.,  totoli  U.  1.  v.  i.,  to  sink,  to  go 
to  the  bottom,  hd'itoli.  2.  to  fish 
w4th  lines  in  deep  sea;  hinou  ni  toli.  a 
hook  for  deep-sea  fishing;  i'e  ni  luli, 
deep-water  fish;  lai  toli,  to  be  going  to 
fish  out  at  sea.  3.  to  shed  leaves; 
'apalolo  c  toli,  the  banyan  has  shed  its 
leaves;  toli  sesu,  to  cast  unripe  fruit. 
4.  expresses  downward  motion;  si  ho 
toli;  Ho  toli  mei,  look  down  here;  ooho 
ioli,  to  fall  headlong;  qd'u  toli,  to  be 
going  north  or  west.  5.  to  lay  a  snare; 
toli  hune,  to  set  a  snare;  toli  loosi,  toli 
loosingc,  a  charm  set  in  the  path;  toli 
sehu,  a  death  charm  prepared  with  lime 
and  set  in  the  path;  toli  ttraa'inge,  to 
offer  sacrifice;  toli  puri,  used  with  poss. 
3,  to  leave,  to  turn  the  back  on;  toli 
'tola,  with  ana  or  »,  to  steer  for,  to  lay 
a  canoe  on  a  course;  toli  reoreo,  to  inlay 
with  nautilus  shell.  6.  of  enduring 
state;  i'o  toli,  to  be  quiescent;  toli 
susule'i,  to  endure;  toli  maai,  to  allow; 
ddu  toli  huni,  ddu  toli  muaani,  to  be 
subject  to,  to  submit  to;  toli  lo'o, 
to   be   patient;   toli  rako,   patient;   toli 


TOLI 


1 06 


toll  (continued). 

rakonga,  patience;  loli  rohii,  to  cease 
speaking;  mango  toll,  to  faint;  toll  ereere, 
to  cease  speaking;  ynoidoli,  to  cease. 
7.  ere  loli,  to  revile.  8.  to  refrain  from 
certain  foods  in  mourning;  toli  ola,  toli 
uhi,  toli  ttgeulaa.  9.  the  bass  drum  in 
para  ni  'o'o.  10.  toli  'epu,  to  fast,  to 
observe  a  tabu;  hdnua  e  toli  'epu 
isulira'elu,  the  village  was  fasting  on 
their  account. 

toliaa  V.  i.,  to  leave  off,  to  cease,  to  desist. 

toli'asi  V.  tr.,  to  yield,  to  renounce,  to  remit, 
to  grant,     toli'asilana,  gerund. 

tolimaa  S.,  a  mark,  sign,  proof. 

tolinge  (ku)  a  portion,  a  share  (of  food  at  a 
feast);  qd'u  ni  tolinge,  the  chief  portion 
of  food. 

tolingi  1.  v.  tr.,  to  assign  a  portion  of  food  to 
a  person  at  a  feast.  2.  to  permit,  to 
grant.  3.  hele  tolingi,  to  hold  in  sub- 
jection.    4.  to  inlay  with  shell. 

tolo  (na)  1.  a  hill;  the  hiil  country,  mu  toloi 
henue,  the  hill  folk;  'ure  la'i  lolona  hdnue, 
from  out  of  the  hills;  i  Tolona  Hdnue, 
a  district  of  Little  Malaita;  mu  Tolona 
Hdnue,    the    people    of    that    district. 

2.  i  Tolo,  in  strangers'  country.  Big 
Malaita;  mu  Tolo,  people  of  Su'u  Rodo 
or  of  Big  Malaita;  ra'e  ni  Tolo,  a  spear 
covered  with  plaiting  of  colored  grass. 

3.  to  be  a  bushman,  to  be  ignorant, 
uncouth,   nou  tolo,    nou   tolona    hdnue. 

4.  the  languages  of  Big  Malaita,  e  tnala 
Tolo.  Wango  toro,  hill;  Maori  loro- 
puki,  mound;  Viti  koro,  heap  of  sand; 
Mailu  oro,  hill;  New  Guinea  lolo,  lola, 
kola;  Florida  tolo,  to  rise  up.     cf.  totolo. 

tolo  5.  'u'u  tolo,  a  piece  of  bread. 

Tolosi  a  district  of  Little  Malaita  above  Mara 

Masiki  Channel, 
tomwa,  tomwatomwa  v.  i.,  to  walk  on  tiptoe, 

to  limp, 
tomwaso  a  shrub  with  large  leaves  which  grows 

in  clearing;  huui  tomwaso,  a  thicket  of 

the  shrub. 
tono,  totono   U.,   v.   i.,   to  drink,   to  drown. 

ha'alonohi,  konokono.     tono  qaaqi'a,  the 

water     tastes    brackish;     toiiohaana    a 

Kalitaalu,  Kalitaalu's  drinking-place  at 

Lenga,  Ulawa. 
tononga  v.  n. 

tonohi  tr.,  to  drink  anything. 
tonola-(ku)  gerund. 
tongo  1.  v.  i.,  to  begin  to  rise,  to  turn  (of  tide); 

e  tango  'oto,  the  tide  has  turned;  'esi  kele 

tongo,  the  tide  is  rising  a  little.     2.  lake 

tongo,  U.,  to  sip. 
tongolili  V.  i.,  to  straggle,  to  be  long  drawn  out, 

one  after  another,  irregular.     Mota  HI, 

astray,  fall  away  from. 
too,  tootoo  1.  to  be  shallow  (of  the  sea);  mu 

le'u  e  tootoo,  shallows,  shoals. 
to'o,  to'oto'o  2.  to  hit,  to  encounter,  to  succeed, 

to  have,  to  be  rich,  to  heal  up.     ha'ato'o. 

ddu  to'o,  with  poss.  3,  to  hit;  sae  to'o, 

with  poss.  3,  to  desire,  to  v/ish  to  have;  ' 


to'o  2  (continued). 

to'o  eleelena,  its  tip,  the  top;  lo'ohaa,  mu 
to'ohaa,  money;  to'o  hu'e,  to  have  a 
wife;  to'o  hji'anga,  marriage  (of  a  man); 
e  ka'a  to'o  kaona,  bottomless;  to'o 
mango,  to  have  breath;  to'o  ola,  to'o 
olanga,  to  have  possessions,  prosperity; 
to'o  poro,  to  have  a  husband;  to'o 
poronga,  marriage  (of  a  woman);  to'o 
qd'u,  to  carry  on  the  head;  to'o  sape,  to 
have  the  shape,  the  appearance  of; 
e  to'o  talaku,  room  for  me;  hire  to'oana 
keni  mwala  ko  holie,  they  own  the  girl 
who  is  being  bought.  3.  to  be,  to  be 
fixed,  to  set  (of  colors  in  dyeing);  i'o 
to'o,  to  be  fixed;  i'o  konito'o,  to  remain, 
to  rest  assured;  e  to'o  mou,  e  to'o  mou- 
tana,  to  cease,  to  be  broken  off;  toli 
to'o,  to  be  patient;  ere  to'o,  to  be  correct 
in  statement;  'o  ere  to'o,  verily;  to'o 
lelengana,  not  aroused  from  sleep;  lio 
to'o,  to  find;  lio  sae  to'o,  to  favor;  e  to'o 
i  saena,  it  came  into  his  mind;  qongiku 
e  to'o  nione  'oto,  my  time  has  come; 
to'o  md'ume'utana,  terrifying;  to'o 
nunu'e,  spotted,  speckled;  to'o  pulo- 
pulo,  specked.  4.  to  be  related  to; 
melic  to'o  ada,  they  are  our  relations. 
5.  to'o  hilt,  with  poss.  2,  to'o  hilt  nada, 
they  alone  apart  from  others.  San 
Cristoval  too. 
to'ohi  tr.,  to  desire,  to  be  set  upon  (of  the 
mind);  saeku  e  to'ohie,  my  heart  is  set 
upon  it. 
to'o  6.  prefixed  to  numerals,  at  a  time;  to'o 
ta'e  ini,  one  at  a  time,  singly;  to'o  ta'e 
ola,  objects  singly;  to'o  ro  ola,  objects 
by  twos;  lo'o  ro  nime,  with  just  one's 
two  hands,  unarmed;  to'o  ta'e  maholo, 
sometimes;  to'o  'enite  'oto,  how  many 
altogether?  Mota  sogo,  Samoa  to'a. 
to'o  7.  1,000  (of  fish  teeth),  to'oani  i'e.     Lau 

too,  1,000. 
to'o  8.  to  desire,     sareto'o. 
to'oa'i  1.  V.  i.,  to  be  desirous;  sae  to'oa'i  ola, 
avarice. 
to'oa'ila-(ku)    gerund.,  sae  to'oa'ilana, 
coveting. 
to'oa'i  2.  hd'u  to'oa'i  he'iliu,  wandering  stars, 

planets. 
to'ohaa  money,  whether  shell  or  teeth  of  dogs 
or  porpoises,  mu  to'ohaa.     'olisi  to'ohaa, 
to  exchange  money  for  goods,  to  buy. 
to'oha'i  to'oha'i  qe'u  ana,  to  be  entangled  in, 

to  be  mixed  up  in. 
toohe'o  small  hooks  of  shell  (roa)  used  without 
bait    for   catching    sardines    (asaunge); 
the  fishing  is  conducted  from  a  stage 
built  out  in  the  water  (haa) ;  kala  toohe'o, 
to  cut  the  hooks. 
toohi   men's  club-house    in    the   village;   the 
unmarried    men    sleep    and    eat   there, 
strangers  are  entertained  in  it  and  the 
married     men     foregather     there,     cf. 
para'ita. 
to'ohi'uhi'ula'a   adj.,    spotted,    variegated   in 
color. 


107 


TOTONGA 


o'ohuu  1.  V.  i.,  to  be  true,  real;  mu  ola  'olo 

to'ohuu,  real  true  things;  e  to'ohuu  'oto, 

it  is  a  fact.     2.  S.,  exclamation,  truly. 

to'ohuunge   (ku)   S.,   n.,   being   true;  to'ohuu- 

ngemti,    your    very    self;    to'ohunngana 

me'i  ola,  the  real  thing. 

to'ohutinge'i  S.   1.  adv.,  expresses  certainty, 

precedes    the    verb,     nou    to'ohuunge'i 

lae,  I  surely  went;  nou  ka'a  to'ohuunge'i 

leesie,  I  surely  did  not  see  it.     2.  adj., 

real,     to'ohuunge'i     lemi,     full     moon; 

to'ohuunge'i   oku,    third    day   after   full 

moon;  to'ohuunge'i  salana,  his  real  name. 

to'ola-(ku),      to'oto'ola-(ku)      n.,      property; 

to'olamu   no'one   ada,    thine    they    are; 

to'olana    'oto,    his    property;    meaka'elu 

to'ola  ka'elu,  our  tongues  are  our  own; 

noko  koni'o  ana  to'olaku,  I   endow  thee 

with  my  property;   huni  ngolie  lo'oto- 

'olana.to  destroy  his  property  after  death. 

to'oliu  U.,  V.  i.,  to  exceed,  exceedingly. 

to'olupu  U.,  with  poss.  3,  to  hit,  to  come  into 

contact  with.     lupu. 
to'oma'i  v.  i.,  to  gaze  at,  to  stare. 

to'oma'ila-(ku)  gerund. 
to'oni  1.  to  clothe,  to  put  on,  to  wear;  to'oni 
haahi  sape,  to  clothe  the  body;  to'o7ii 
ana  mu  to'oni,  to  clothe  with  clothes. 
2.    to   pack,    to   stow.     3.    n.,    clothes, 
vestiture.     hideli  to'oni,  to  wash  clothes 
by  pounding;  mu  lehu  ni  to'oni,  worn- 
out    clothes,    rags;    to'oni    pono    maa, 
patched  clothes;  to'oni  'o'omae,  mourn- 
ing clothes;  roro  to'oni,  a  clothes  belt; 
tauri    to'oni,     to     sew     clothes,     tduri 
to'oninge,    v.    n.     Mota   sogon,    Fagani 
togoni,  Florida  hogoni. 
to'oni  4.  V.  i.,  to  plant  taro,  to'oni  hui. 
to'onunu'e  adj.,  spotted,  speckled. 
toonga  U.,  n.,  mark,  seal,  tabu  mark, 
to'onga'i  to'onga'i  omo,  to  draw  an  arrow  on  a 

bow. 
to'onga'ini  v.  tr.,  to  dip,  to  insert, 
to'ongi  v.  tr.,  to  dip,  to  dye. 
to'oqa'u  with  poss.  3,  to  carry  on  the  head. 
to'ora-(na,  ni)  U.,  laa  e  to'orana,  a  rich  man. 

to'ola. 
to'ora'ini  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  appease. 
toorao  S.,  toowao  U.,  a  pigeon  with  crest  and 
long  tail  (Turacaena  crassirostris)  which 
cries  in  the  morning  and  the  evening, 
to'orodo  U.,  blue,  black,  dark  in  color,     rodo. 
to'osu'a  U.,  with  poss.  3,  to  stumble,  to  be 

offended,     ha'ato'osu'a. 
to'ota'e  one  at  a  time;  to'ota'e  ola,  one  thing 

here  and  there, 
to'ote'e    S.,    to    be    careful,    anxious;    ne'isae 

to'ote'e,  to  be  worried, 
tootoo  1.  a  small  shell  hook  used  for  whiffing 

sardines. 
to'oto'o  2.  V.  i.,  to  be  rich,     to'o  2. 
to'oto'oa'i  S.,  mu  to'oto'oa'i  wala,  real  words, 

fit  and  proper  words. 
topa  1.  n.,  a  bird  arrow  made  from  the  midrib 
of   the    sago-palm    leaf.     cf.   tdri  sa'o. 
topa  2.  V.  tr.,  to  cut  into  slices;  topa  uhi,   to 
slice  yams  for  planting. 


topo    v.    tr.,    to   appoint,    to   assign;    e   topoa 

hd'idinge,  to  appoint  a  day. 
topo'i  U.,  v.  i.,  to  omit,  to  fail  to  do;  e  topo'i 

'unua,  to  fail  to  say. 

torangi  v.  tr.,  to  urge  on,  to  incite,     hd'ilorangi. 

toretore  U.,  ha'atoretore  maa,  to  act  stealthily. 

tori  1.  v.  i.,  to  cut  the  end  off,  to  earmark  pigs; 

to  circumcise   (late   use) ;   tori    poo,    to 

earmark  pigs;  poo   tori,  an    earmarked 

pig.     Maori  tori. 

tori  2.  n.,  a  stick  with  which  to  carry  burdens, 

a  yoke;  tori  ineu  e  hata,  my  yoke  is  easy. 

tori  3.  V.  tr.,  to  wear  over  the  left  shoulder  as 

a  bandolier. 
toro  1.  n.,  the  daughter  of  a  chief;  toro  i'cmelu, 
our  chief's  daughter;  keni  toro,  the  lady. 
toro  2.  V.  tr.,  to  exalt,     cf.  tolo. 

torola-(ku)  gerund. 
toro  3.  V.  i.,  to  thrust;  toro  wawa,  to  shoot  out 

the  lips.     Maori  toro. 
toro,  totoro  4.  to  transfix  with  a  spear. 
toromi  tr. 

toromila-(ku)  gerund. 
Toro 'a  the  hill  at  the  head  of  the  river  Walo'a'a. 
Torokou  the  village  on  the  hill  above  Sa'a. 
torokou'e,  totorokou'e  n.,  a  hill,  eminence,  kou. 
toteu  v.  i.,  to  cackle  (of  fowls). 
toto  1.  V.  tr.,  to  pay  a  fine,  to  pay  a  fine  to  a 
husband's  relatives  when  his  wife  leaves 
him;   hu'ena  kire  totoa,   they  paid  the 
fine  for  the  woman;  tolo  epa  hdnue,  a 
sacrifice   on    behalf   of   a   sick    person. 
M.  A.,  p.  137.     toto  'akalo,  to  exorcise 
a  ghost;  toto  dhu'i,   to  pay  a  fine  on 
behalf  of;  ni'i  toto,  to  make  a  free  gift; 
hele  toto,  to  get  for  nothing, 
totonga  v.  n.,  a  fine,  a  ransom.    Niue  totongi. 
toto  2.  v.  i.,  to  be  lacking;  nga  me'i  ola  e  toto 

'aniiu,  lacked  ye  anything? 
toto  3.  to  dry  up,  to  soak  into;  mu  ivei  e  toto 
mango  'oto,  the  water  has  dried  right 
up;  toto  oaoa,  to  permeate;  toto  aropu, 
S.,  to  sip.  Motu  dodo,  to  subside; 
Viti  toto,  to  saturate. 
toto  4.  v.  i.,  fitting,  proper;  maholo  e  tolo,  the 

proper  time. 
toto  5.  maa  tolo,  to  expect,  to  await. 

totori  U.,  tr.,  maa  totori,  to  await,    hd'itotori. 
totorila-(ku)  gerund.     Wango  totori. 
toto  6.  prefix  of  condition,     tototala,  totoweru'e. 
toto'ala  adj.,  resinous,  glutinous.     Polynesian 

toto,  blood. 
toto'atala  S.,  adv.,  in  vain,     tala  2. 
totohi  1.  to  sink  into,  be  absorbed  in,  of  liquids. 
tolo  3.     2.  U.,  tr.,  to  sip.     cf.  toto  aroPu. 
totohoa  n.,  noise,  sound. 

totola  specific  numeral,   400,   of  dogs'   teeth; 
lotola  ni   'usu,   400   dogs'   teeth;   totola 
mwana  hai,  440  dogs'  teeth, 
totolo  V.  i.,  to  cry  aloud. 

totolonga'ini  tr.,  to  cry  to  a  person, 
totolonga'i  tr.     Wango  totoro. 
totoniho  n.,  a  tree,  its  yellow  berries  arc  eaten 

by  pigeons, 
totonga  (na,  ni)  1.  n.,  resin,  sap,  glue,     toto'ala, 

Polynesian  toto,  blood. 
totonga  2.  a  fine,  ransom,     toto  1. 


TOTONGA'ALA 


io8 


totonga'ala   adj.,    resinous,    gummj'.     tolo'ala. 

totongisu  1 .  V.  i.,  to  water  at  the  mouth,  ngisu. 
2.  U.,  to  sip. 

totongo  V.  i.,  to  smart;  saeku  e  tolongo,  I  have 
heartburn. 

totopulu  n.,  the  black  ground-lizard  (Nanno- 
scincus  fuscus).     pulii  1. 

totoqini  U.,  v.  i.,  to  soak  into,  to  soak  up.    qini. 

totori  U.,  V.  tr.,  to  expect,  to  await,  cf.  tolo  5. 

totoro  1.  a  fish  spear,  a  goad.  2.  the  crest,  the 
comb,  wattles,  of  birds,     toro  2. 

tototala  adv.,  in  vain,  to  no  purpose,  toto- 
'atalai  S. 

totowa'e  wasted,  lost,     toto  6. 
totowa'enga  n.,  waste,  futility. 

totoweru'e  holaa  totoweru'e,  fiat  calm. 

tou  1.  n.,  a  bird,  the  bittern. 

Tou  2.  the  name  of  a  ghost  at  Sa'a,  "the 
pecker";  a  piece  of  wood  carved  in 
the  likeness  of  the  head  and  neck  of 
a  bittern;  it  is  reputed  to  have  the 
power  of  causing  death;  it  is  never 
carelessly  pointed  at  any  one,  but  car- 
ried over  the  shoulder  with  the  beak 
to  the  rear;  when  laid  down  the  head 
is  faced  away. 

to'u  .3.  V.  i.,  to  be  lame,  to  be  crippled  in  the 
feet,  unable  to  bend  the  limbs. 

to'u  4.  qd'ulo'u,  to  bow  the  head;  rahilo'u, 
downcast;   'ttruto'ti,   to  bend  the  knee. 

to'u  5.  i  lo'ulana  'dsi,  on  the  surface  of  the  sea. 

toutou  n.,  the  prow  of  a  canoe,  tied  with  cane 
to  the  hull;  qdli  toutou,  canoe-shaped 
drawings  cut  on  la'o. 


ua  I',     cf.  tie. 

ualapoa  U.,  v.  i.,  to  crack  with  a  loud  noise. 

udi,  udiudi  v.  i.,  to  be  rotting,  wasting;  udiudi 
'asi'a,  rotting  away. 

udi  S.,  specific  numeral,  100,000,  of  coconuts, 
udi  ni  niu. 

'udu,  'udu'udu  to  drip,     ha'a'uduhi. 

'udu'uduhe  v.  n.,  a  drop,  drippings; 
' udu' uduha  ana,  droppings  from.  Flor- 
ida tudu,  Borneo  tudo. 

ue  S.,  ua  U.  1.  adv.,  yet,  as  yet,  still,  to  spare. 
ha'ike  ue,  not  yet;  e  lae  ue,  not  returned 
yet;  e  ro  'ata  ini  ue,  as  yet  only  two; 
kire  ue,  some  left;  e  mou  ue  ena,  still  in 
desuetude;  wdi  e  lama  haahi  ue  kolune 
tnwakano,  water  still  covered  the  face 
of  the  earth;  mangona  ue  ana,  he  is  still 
alive;  ngeitei  ue  ena,  that's  just  it; 
F"lorida  tua,  already,  again,  in  addition; 
Mota  tuai;  possibly  pronounced  ue  and 
not  'ue  to  distinguish  it  from  'ue  4. 
cf.  hau  1. 

ue  S.,  ua  U.  2.  of  price  in  bargaining;  ue  ta'a, 
for  how  much?  uaana  nga  taa,  for  what? 
ue  holt,  for  sale. 

ue  S.,  ua  U.  3.  rattan  cane;  'atoni  ue,  to  dye 
strips  of  cane;  hikei  ue,  a  roll  of  cane, 
dyed  red  for  plaiting  into  bracelets; 
hinui  ue,  the  bark  of  cane,  dyed  red; 
ho'i  ue,  to  roll  dyed  cane  into  bundles. 


•ue  S.,  'ua  U.  4.  how,  why;  used  with  'e  4. 
'e  'ue,  how;  'e  'ue  'olona,  how  is  it;  molu 
'uara,  what  did  you  do  to  them;  mwane 
'e  'ue,  why  not;  'e  'ua  ata,  exclamation  of 
disapproval;  ke  'ue  'oto,  how  shall  it  be 
done;  muni  'ua,  why,  what  for;  nge  ke 
'ue  kd'u  ne,  how  shall  it  be. 

'ue  S.,  'ua  U.  5.  of  course;  ana  ngaini  ka'a 
ha'ara'i  'emelu  'e  'ue,  why,  because  no 
one  has  summoned  us;  ta'ata'a  me'iolana 
'e  'ue,  why,  it's  just  that  very  thing;  nge 
itei  'ue  ena,  that's  just  it.  Lau  uta, 
Florida  gua,  Wango  uai  Efate  gua,  how. 

'u'e  S.,  kuka  U.  6.  the  mud  crab 

uhi  1.  me'i  uki,  S.,  houhi,  U.,  a  yam  (Dioscorea 
sp.) ;  muuhi,  tnwauhi,  plural,  coalescent 
vowels;  uhi  ni  kalona,  upland  yams, 
of  good  quality;  uhi  leoleo,  a  variety 
of  yam;  tihi  nialeu,  April;  tihi  mwaka, 
January,  lit.,  yams  unripe;  uhi  opuopu, 
U.,  February,  lit.,  yams  rounded  in 
shape;  uhi  ni  qe'u.  yams  from  near  the 
beach,  inferior  in  quality;  kara  uhi,  to 
grate  yams;  molai  uhi,  10,000  yams; 
mwadi  ni  uhi.  the  mother  yam;  nga 
nao  ni  uhi,  100  yams;  nini  uhi,  a  yam; 
olopa'i,  U.,  a  yam  with  fruit  on  the 
vine;  e'a  sikihia  qd'una  uhi,  she  takes 
off  the  heads  of  yams;  sinaa  tihi,  to 
clean  the  rootlets  off  yams  newly  dug; 
sinolai  uhi.  100  yams;  sulaa  mu  uhi,  to 
roast  yams;  sustihaa'i,  to  plant  a  yam 
garden;  idkume,  a  yam  with  fruit  on 
the  v-ine;  topa  uhi,  to  slice  yams  for 
planting;  walona  mu  uhi,  yam  vines. 
Florida  uvi,  Niue  ufi,  Mao.  uhi. 

uhi  2.  warts  on  the  hands. 

'uhi,  'uhi'uhi  3.  v.  tr.,  to  blow  with  the  mouth, 
to  shoot  with  a  gun,  to  buzz;  mu 
matawa  'uhi'uhi,  white  men:  lit.,  men 
of  the  sea  who  blow  with  their  mouths, 
owing  to  the  idea  that  guns  were  blown 
in  order  to  discharge  them, 
'uhinge  v.  n. 
'uhila-(ku)  gerund. 

'uhile'ini  tr.,  to  breathe  on.  Wango  uhi, 
Viti  iivu,  Mota  pupus,  vuv;  Maori  puhi, 
Maisin  vuvu. 

uhu  (ku)  S.,  ihuU.  1.  hair;  uhu  wae,  awig;  uhune 
e  lai  mero,  his  hair  is  white.    Motu  hui. 

uhu  2.  to  husk  coconuts, 
uhu'i  tr. 

Uhu  3.  the  cape  on  Big  Malaita  northwest  of 
Pwaulimwaa,  ngorangora  i  Uhu,  the 
lagoon  shoreward  is  also  called  Uhu. 

'u'i,   'u'i'u'i  v.   tr.,   to  throw   (of  a  spear,   a 
stone,  etc.). 
'u'inge  v.  n. 

'u'ile'ini  tr.,  mala  e  'u'ile'inie  nga  hoi  heu, 
about  a  stone's  throw.  Florida  tupi, 
Mota  vivir. 

Uki  Ugi,  an  island  off  the  east  coast  of  San 
Cristoval. 

uku  n.,  a  row,  a  laj^er;  ukui  heu.  a  layer  of 
stones;  uku  ni  ta'alaha,  a  channel  in 
the  reef,  a  chasm;  uku  ni  ta'atala,  a 
row,  a  line.     Wango  uku,  a  generation. 


I09 


'UPUTANA 


'uku  2.  ha'a'ukti.  to  lower,  to  let  down. 

ulao      harlot,      keni     ulao.     'aheulao,     heidao, 

ha'anlao.     kale  ni  ulao,  bastard, 
ulapo  U.,  V.  i.,  used  with  poss.  3;  to  be  ignorant 

of. 
Ulawa   i  sapena   i    Ulawa  e  rara,  apostrophe 

addressed   to  Ulawa.     ha'addhi. 
'ule-(ku)  U.,  n.,  brother,  sister.     Florida  kula. 
'ulehu  a  fish  ((Jligonis  gigas). 
uleule  S.,  ulaula  U.,  n.,  sinew,  tendon,  vein; 
ulculeni    'ei,    U.,    twigs.     Maori    uaiia, 
sinew, 
uli  1.  n.,  a  tree  (Spondias  dulcis);  hou  uli,  its 

fruit.     Mota  us,  ur;  Oceanic  uri. 
uli  2.  U..  koukou  ni  uli,  ankle;  poupoti  ni  uli, 

heel. 
uli  3.  V.  tr.,  to  rub,  to  massage;  ulie  sapena  ani 
heu,  to  apply  hot  stones  to  the  body  as 
a  foment, 
uli  4.  uli  'ei,  a  wooden  mortar  for  braying  yams, 

etc. 
ulo,  uloulo  1.  to  lament;  ngara  uloulo.  to  weep 
bitterly;  noko  pu'ola'i  ulo  'oto,  I  forgot 
to  cry;  tioko  lapata'i  ulo  'oto.  I  complain 
with  lamentation, 
uloulonga  v.  n. 

ulola-(ku)  gerund.,  ulolada  miiitale,  the  cry 
of  the  poor. 
ulo  2.  V.  tr.,  to  wrap  up,  to  make  a  parcel  of. 
uloulo'ite  (na)  v.  n.,  a  wrapper,  cover,  husk, 
chaff. 
*ulu  1.  to  be  blind,     ha'a'idu:  a  'ulu,  the  blind 
man;  saai  'ulu.  to  recite  by  heart;  hunie 
esi  htite  'ulu  'ie.  that  he  should  be  born 
blind    thus;    kakalo    'ulu'ulu,    to    grope 
blindly  with  the  hands;  'ulu  susiihono. 
stone  blind. 
'ulu  2.  V.  tr.,  to  close  the  eyes;  'oke  'ulue  maamu. 
you  close  your  eyes;  'ulu  mwaani,  'ulu 
haahi.  to  overlook.     Wango  kuru. 
ulu  3.  V.  tr.,  to  carry  in  the  arms. 
ulu  4.  V.  tr.,  to  wade;  ulu  holo,  to  wade  across; 
ulu  la'a.  to  emerge, 
'uluhe'ini  tr.,  to  wade  and  carry  a  person 
across  the  water.     Wango  uru. 
uluone  a  sandy  tract  above  the  beach. 
ulunge  1.  V.  tr.,  to  serve  as  a  pillow;  ulungaa 
qd'u,  to  pillow  the  head;  'dsi  ko  ulungaa 
hdnue,    the    sea    under    the   earth;  hclc 
ulunge,  to  uplift;  ewe  e  ulungaa  mduri- 
haaku.  the  floods  have  covered  my  soul. 
2.  a  pillow, 
ulunge'ini  tr.,  to  serve  as  a  pillow.     Mota 
ulunga. 
ulunge'ini  tr.,  to  sell;  ko  ulunge' inielo'olo'olana. 
he  sold  his  goods. 
ulunge'i  v.  i. 
'ulu'ulu  1 .  a  full-grown  coconut,  hoi  'ulu'ulu,  viu 

'ulu'ulu.     kuru. 
'ulu'ulu   2.    U.,    'ulu'ulu   ni   'ci,    twigs,   leaves. 

branches. 
uluulu'a  U.,  adj.,  leafy. 
uma  U..  incisor  teeth. 

umu  1.  U.,  native  oven;  a  fire  is  made  inside  a 
ring  of  stones  level  with  floor  of  house. 
Mota  urn,  Motu  amu. 
umu  2.  to  gather;  umu  i  'ae.  to  gather  round 
the  feet  of. 


umu  3.  V.  i.,  to  weed, 
umu  4.  umu  kuru,  to  mutter, 
unehi  (nS)  n.,  the  scales  of  fish;  v.,  to  scale  a 
fish.     The    final    hi    was    probably    a 
verbal     suffix     originally.     Motu  una, 
unahi;  Gilbert  Islands  ina;  Samoa  una, 
unaji;  Maori  unahi. 
'unu,  'unu'unu  1.  v.  tr.,  to  say,  to  bid,  to  tell, 
to  assign,  to  suppose,   to  reckon,     noti 
'unue  uri,    1   thought   that;   nau   'unua 
uri  muni  ne'e  mae  'olo,  I  thought  I  was 
done  for;  nou  hola'i  'unue,  I  first  said 
it;  'olo  kire  kosi  'unue,  thereupon  they 
said  it;  topo'i  'unu,  to  neglect  to  say; 
'unu     lalaunge'i,     to     tell     beforehand; 
'unu  lelengana,   to  speak   clearly;   'unu 
lete,  to  affirm;  a  mama' a  e  'uni-e,  father 
said  so;  '««!<  inengini,  to  tell  everv'thing 
out;  muni  ne'e  loosia,  ta'anc  na'a  'unua, 
if  I   see  him   I   shall  tell  it;    ana  muni 
kir'e  'unua,  if  they  say  it;  e  'unu  oreta 
ana    mu   wala,    he    spoke   and    finished 
his   words;    'unu   la'alara,    to   relate    in 
order;     'unu    la'alaha.     to     pronounce 
aloud;    'unu    tahanie    saemu,    lay    bare 
your    mind;    'unu    latalau    ana,    to    re- 
hearse in  order;  'mmm  latara,  tradition; 
'unu  talarau,  gossip. 
'unula-(ku)  gerund.     Wango  unu. 
unu   2.    n.,    the  fibrous  spathe  of   a  coconut 
frond    used    (sasali,    U.)    for    straining 
milk  (oMi)  from  grated  coconut.     Samoa 
unu,  to  strain. 
unu  3.  sate  unu,  to  overlap;  dere  unu,  U.,  to 
get    in    between;    dere    unu    ana    para, 
between  the  pickets  of  the  fence;  '«"« 
dere  unu,  to  pierce  with  a  blow;  taha- 
unutara,  through  from  one  side  to  the 
other. 
unume'i  partic,  frequently,  experienced;  hele 
unume'i  ana,  to  do  a  thing  in  a  masterly 
fashion;    sapesdlu    unume'i,    to    suffer 
many  things. 
u'o  1.  n.,  the  green  lizard. 
u'o  2.  n.,    fishing-float    for   flying-fish.     Mota 

ulo,  Maori  pouto.     M.  A.,  p.  317. 
upe  U.,  n.,  a  hole  in  a  tree  where  water  lodges 

in  the  rains. 
upeta  U.,  ipata  S.,  a  wallowing-place  for  swine, 

upeta  ni  poo. 
'upu,  'upu'upu  1.  to  swell;  ngora  'upu,  lau 
ngora  'upu  muni,  to  hate;  ngidu  'upu, 
to  hate;  qeru  'upu,  lio  qcru  'upu.  to 
grudge,  to  hate.  2.  the  center,  middle. 
take  'upu'upu,  to  be  half  way  over  in  a 
journey;  'upui  lue,  high  tide;  i'upu'upui 
dan  go,  among  the  trees;  i  'upuderu'e. 
midway  between  the  two;  maraau  i 
'upu'upu,  the  east  wind.  Maori  tupu, 
to  grow;  Viti  tumbu.to  swell;  'W.olntuhu. 
to  swell;  Mota  tou,  to  grow. 
'upu'e   adj.,   used   as   n.;   a   s^velling,    a   boil. 

qdlusu  'upu'e,  a  wood-pigeon, 
'upuni  adv.,  some  time  ago,  long  ago;  precedes 
the  verb,  melu  'upu  nilae,  we  went  long  ago. 
'uputana  with  locative  «;  »  'upulana  hdnue,  in 
the  center  of  the  land. 


UQE 


no 


uqe,  uqeuqe  v.   i.,   to  complain,   to  have  ill 
feeling  toward;  ere  uqe,  to  talk  enviously; 
ere  uqanga,  malicious  talk. 
uqanga  v.  n.,  envy, 
uqesi   tr.     ha'iuqeuqeni.     Wango  uqa. 

lira  U.,  1.  crayfish,  prawn,  ore  3.  Mota  lira, 
Maori  koura. 

ura  U.,  2.  ura  maasilima,  the  second  day  of 
the  moon. 

uraa'i  S.,  v.  i.,  to  make  an  offering  to  'akalo  or 
li'oa;  uraa'i  ola,  tiraa'i  olanga,  making 
offerings;  uraa'i  saana  inu  'akalo. 
uraa'inge  v.  n.,  an  offering,  a  sacrifice; 
ioli  uraa'inge,  to  offer  sacrifice.  San 
Cristoval  urai. 

urate  uratei  ola,  a  piece,  a  crumb. 

'lire  S.,  'ura  U.,  'ure'ure  1.  v.  i.,  to  stand  up. 
ha'a'ure.  'tire  honosi,  to  oppose;  e 
'ure'ure  ko  rarangi,  he  stood  warming 
himself;  ko  'ure  para'ilana  walumalau, 
defends  the  earth;  'ure  sim'i,  to  attend 
on,  to  serve.     Mota  tur,  Viti  tu,  tura. 

'lire  2.  used  of  motion  from  and  equivalent 
to  place  whence,  'urei  Sa'a,  from 
Sa'a;  'urei  tei,  where  from,  whence; 
melu  'uraana,  we  are  his  offspring; 
'omu  ka'a  'ure  ike  ana  pulitaa  ineu,  ye 
are  not  of  my  flock;  'olo  'ure  mai,  up 
till  now,  henceforth;  nou  'ure  ani  'eta 
hdnue,  I  am  a  stranger;  'ure  tohune,  to 
desire;  'ure  ta'i  lolona  hdnue,  from  out 
of  the  hills;  'ure  'olo  mai  i  'aehotalana, 
from  the  beginning  up  till  now;  'oko 
lae  mai  'ure  itei,  where  are  you  from, 
whence  come  you;  nou  'ure  mai  i  ola, 
I  am  from  such-and-such  a  place; 
mwala  'urei  tei  ni  'ie,  from  whence  are 
these  people. 

'ure  3.  mwimwidi  'ure,  S.,  mudimudi  'ura, 
U.,  to  drip. 

*ure  4.  to  come  into  leaf;  mu  'ure'urei  dango, 
shootsof  a  tree;  'ure'urena,  its  top  shoots. 

Urehi  S.,  a  local  spirit.     M.  A.,  p.  124. 

•ureipesi  first  fruits,  betrothal  money. 

'urenga'ini  v.  tr.,  to  accompany  a  person  on 
a  journey,  to  set  him  on  his  way. 
ha'a'ureytga'ini. 

'ureruru  S.,  to  be  in  accord,  concord,  ha'a'ure- 
ruru. 

uretohu  (na)  S.,  nou  sa'a  uretohune  nga  ola,  I 
shall  not  desire  anything. 

'uri,  'uri'uri  1.  v.  tr.,  to  tread  on,  to  pace,  to 
measure,    to  stamp   on;   'urie  maonga, 
to  tread  the  dance, 
'uri'urite  v.  n.,  a  pace,  a  foothold. 
'urila-(ku)  gerund.     Florida  turi. 

uri  2.  adv.,  thus;  used  also  of  reported  speech; 
na,  ni,  are  added,  e  te  uritaa,  uri  'oke 
lae,  what  did  he  say?  that  you  were  to 
go?  na  uri,  I  mean,  that  is;  nau  'unua 
uri  muni  ne'e  mae  'oto,  I  thought  I  was 
done  for;  uri  qa'une  nge  mwane,  I  mean 
that  the  male  is  the  head;  uri  ana,  if, 
that  is  (in  explanation);  paro  uri,  over 
there;  wa  uri,  of  an  objection  advanced; 
na'o  uri,  to  go  on  this  course;  uri  mala, 
as  if. 


uri  3.  ha'auri,  v.  tr.,  to  save,  to  make  alive. 
mduri. 

uriha-(mu,  na,  da)  like,  as  if;  urihana,  like 
him,  just  his  way;  e  urihana  nga  one, 
like  the  sands;  urihada,  their  style. 

urine  S.,  urina  U.,  urini  U.,  adv.,  thus,  ha'a- 
urine,  ha'aurini.  ko  urine,  that  being 
so;  ko  urine  ta'ane  na,  even  supposing 
it  were  so;  ke  su'uri  urine,  God  forbid. 

urinena  S.,  adv.,  therefore,  thus,  on  that 
account;  isulie  e  urinena,  wherefore. 

uritaa  S.,  uritaha  U.,  interrog.  adv.,  how,  what 
sort  of.  e  te  uritaa,  what  said  he;  He 
uritaha,  what  one;  e  lae  uritaa,  how 
did  it  go? 

urou  S.,  a  wood-pigeon  with  large  wattles 
(Carpophaga  rufigula).     qdlusu   'upu'e. 

'uru  1.  V.  i.,  to  collect,  to  wipe,  'uru  sane,  to 
gather  ants  as  burly  for  sea-bream; 
'uru'uru  mwado,  an  anklet  of  shell 
money,  etc.,  strung  on  a  cord,  lit., 
collect  dirt;  'uru'uru  pote,  to  clear  the 
head  of  lice;  'uru  qango,  to  wipe  off 
mucus,  to  clear  the  nose;  a  Poro  'ura 
matawa,  the  man  who  tours  the  sea, 
a  legendary  ghost  said  to  moke  ana 
pusu  'esi,  catch  whales  in  a  hand  net. 
Mota  surimg,  Mao.  muru. 

uru  2.  qd'uni  uru,  U.,  a  phase  of  the  moon. 

uru  3.  white  fleecy  clouds;  evening  clouds 
painted  in  wavy  lines  on  the  prow  of  a 
canoe. 

'uru  4.  'uru'uru  (ku),  knee. 

'uruto'u  to  stoop,  to  bend  the  knee,  to  kneel. 
San  Cristoval  ruru,  Viti  duru,  Florida 
tuluru,  Samoa  tuli. 

'uru'uru  tete  'uru'uru,  to  spill,  to  dribble  out, 
as  lime  from  a  gourd.  Fagani  tele, 
Mota sur-mata,  tear;  Tonga,  tulu;  Borneo 
turu,  to  drip;  sulu,  liquid. 

use,  useuse  v.  i.,  to  plait,  to  weave;  use  qaso,  to 
plait  armlets  of  dyed  cane;  tise  sa'o, 
to  stitch  sago  leaves  on  a  reed  for 
thatch. 
useli  tr.,  uselie  moke,  to  make  a  hand  net. 
uselie  'ae,  to  plait  an  anklet  of  dyed 
cane  (we)  on  the  leg. 

usi,  usiusi  v.  tr.,  to  barter,  to  hold  a  market, 
usinge   v.   n.,   bartering,   marketing;  herai 

usinge,  market-place. 
usi'e  adj.,  used  as  n.,  hera  i  usi'e,  market- 
place. 

usu,  usuusu  1.  v.  tr.,  to  push,  tapausu, 
usutaha.  molu  usu,  push;  usu  'asi 
mwakule  ana,  to  reject  him  ignomin- 
iously.  2.  to  write.  3.  n.,  a  writing, 
a  letter,  mu  usuusu;  mu  maai  usuusu, 
alphabetic  characters. 
usuusue'ini  tr.,  to  pole,  to  shove,  to  push, 

to   compel. 
usue'ini  tr.,  to  send,  to  dispatch, 
usunge'i  v.  i.    usunge'i  'asi,  to   dispatch. 

hd'iusunge'i. 
usunge'inge     v.     n.,     a     commandment, 

ordinance, 
usunge'ini  tr.,  to  send,  dispatch. 
usunge'imla-(ku)  gerund. 


Ill 


UWOLA  INI 


U8U  4.  U..  one;  kd'u  met  nga  usti,  give  me  one; 

usu  indu,  mine. 
usu  5.  S.,  usii  'ei,  a  firestick. 
'usu,   'usu'usu  6.   V.   i.,   to  rub,   to  daub,   to 
scrape,    to  wipe,    to  grate;    'usu   kara, 
to  grate  yams;  'usu  hui,  to  grate  taro. 
7.  ag  rater;  'usuri,  tr.,  to  wipe.     Wango 
usu,  Lau  HSU,  Florida  guduri. 
'usu,  'usu'usu  8.  V.  i.,  to  point,  to  accuse;  to 
point  at  the  rainbow  brings  bad  luck. 
'usu  henne,  the  first  finger;  'usu  meuta'a, 
to  affirm;  'usu  ilengine  ngaini,  to  accuse 
any  one;  'usu  maa  (ku),  to  accuse, 
'usu'i  tr.,  to  point  at;  suisui,  M.  A.,  p.  192, 
should  be  'usu'usu'i. 
'usu  9.  n.,  a  dog;  'usu  qaqa,  a  slut;  'usu  e  kueu, 
the  dog  barked   at  me.     Mota   kurut, 
Maori  kuri. 
'usu  10.  n.,  a  dog  tooth;  the  two  teeth  in  the 
upper    jaw    immediately     behind    the 
canines   are   used   as   money.     M.   A., 
p.    325.     qd'ui    'usu,    4    dogs'    teeth; 
tolola  ni  'tisu,  400  dogs'  teeth;  piru  ni 
'usu,  a  necklace  of  dogs'  teeth;  e  pirue 
mu  'usu  ineu,  he  made  my  dogs'  teeth 
into  a  necklace. 
'usu  11.  V.  i.,  to  fall  down;  in  Sa'a  not  used  of 
persons,   in  which  sense  it   is  replaced 
by  domu.     ha'a'usu,  ha'a'usuU.    Florida 
kutu. 
'usu  12.  U.,  to  wipe  off  mucus,  'usu  qango.    uru. 

Mota  surung. 
'usule  adj.,  possessing  dogs, 
usuli  tr.,   to  copy,   to  follow,   to  succeed  to. 
ha'austdi.     kira  'asi  usuli  one,  they  went 
along  the  beach;  e  usulie  'amana,  like 
his  father.     San  Cristoval,  usuri,  follow; 
Malekula  usuri,  to  go  along  the  coast; 
Mota  usur,  to  pass  on. 
usutaha  U.,  to  emerge. 

usuusu  S.  1.  usuusu  atia,  because  of,  through, 
owing  to.  2.  handiwork;  iisuusuana 
nimeku,  my  handiwork;  usuusu  ana 
dhutana  manatanga  a  God,  all  the  powers 
of  the  godhead. 
utakora  U.,  v.  i.,  to  burst. 
ute  1.  V.  tr.,  to  rub,  to  polish;  nialo  ute,  beads 

rubbed  down  to  size, 
ute  2.  ute  pii,  heavy  rain.     Lau  uta,  Viti  udha, 

Polynesian  uha. 
ute'i  to  gut  fish,  ro  ute'i  seu.     M.  A.,  p.  48. 

ute'ini  tr. 
uto-(na)  n.,  pith,  core.  Mota  utoi;  Maori  uho, 
heart  of  a  tree;  Motu  udo,  navel;  Samoa 
uso,  pith,  heart  of  a  tree,  umbilical 
cord. 
'u'u  S.,  kuku  U.  1.  to  hang  down,  to  depend; 
siri  'u'u,  a  lory  that  hangs  upside 
down. 
♦u'u  (na)  2.  a  round  object,  a  lump  in  pounded 
food;  'u'u  tola,  a  piece  of  fish;  'u'ui  one. 
S.,  'u'una  one,  U.,  a  grain  of  sand;  'u'ui 
he'll,  S.,  'u'u  ni  he'u,  U.,  a  star;  'u'ui 
sehu,  U.,  a  lump  in  the  lime  of  betel 
chewing;  'u'ui  maa,  eyeball;  ro  'u'u 
maana  siena  a  Ta'a  Pea,  his  two  eye- 
balls to  Ta'a  Pea  (an  imprecation) ;   'u'u 


u'u'  (continued). 

maai  dehi,  a  pearl;  'u'u  ni  mae,  heavy 
rain.     Florida     pugu     ni     pari,     dust; 
Maori  puku,  knob. 
'u'u-(na)  3.  real;  'u'une  hdnue,  the  real  land. 
4.     beginning,     source,     inge'i    ni    'oto 
'u'une,  he  is  the  source.     Florida  puku, 
real. 
'u'uhesi  S.,  to  stand  firm. 
'u'u'i-(na)  n.,  tail  of  an   animal.     Viti  mbui, 

Maori  hiku,  Malo  uijie,  Samoa  i'u. 
'u'ule  n.,  a  tree  of  hard  wood.     Florida  gugula. 
'u'ulou  U.,  loulou  S.,  to  thunder, 
'u'umwado  U.,  dust. 

uunu,  uunuunu  1.  v.  tr.,  to  bum  in  the  fire, 
to  roast  on  the  embers;  used  with  saa, 
sie,  to  sacrifice,  uunu  hena,  uunu  keu, 
uunu  sdhu,  to  burn  lime;  ora  ni  uunu, 
altar  of  burnt  offering;  uunu  poo  saana 
mu  'akalo,  offer  burnt  offerings  of  pigs 
to  the  ghosts,  tiunu  rae.  M.  A., 
p.  263,  to  cremate  a  corpse.  Only  one 
case  known,  that  of  Taramaesipue 
is  the  one  mentioned, 
uununge   v.    n.,    burnt   sacrifice;    uununge 

SHU,  whole  burnt  offering, 
uunuhi  tr. 

uunuhila-(ku)   gerund, 
uunu  2.   to  raise  cicatrices   on  the   arms   by 
burning.     Maori  lunu,  roast;  Lamanak 
(Borneo)  tunu. 
uunu  3.  a  large  tree-lizard  (Corucia  zebrata). 
uunuhi  V.  tr.,  to  envy,  to  grudge,  to  vex,  to 
grieve;  sae  uunuhi,  to  bear  a  grudge,  to 
be  spiteful  to. 
uunuhinge  v.  n.,  a  grudge,  sae  uunuhinge. 
'u'usi  1.  V.  tr.,  to  detach  the  betel  vine  from 
the  stem  of  a  tree  by  pulling  it  all  down. 
hu'usi.     2.  V.  i.,  to  slip  off,  to  become 
detached, 
uwatohuna  U.,  air,  atmosphere. 
uwe  S.,  uwa  U.  1.  v.  tr.,  to  lift  up;  uwaa  qd'u, 
lift  up  the  head;  uwe  'alinge,  to  give  ear 
to,  to  prick  up  the  ears;  uwe  'alenga. 
to  look   up.     2.    to  brandish  a  spear; 
uwa  ma'e,  U.,  a  measure,  a  yard  and 
three-quarters. 
uwe  3.  to  inclose  (of  a  net),     uwe  haahi.     kire 
ho   uwaa    'olo   la'eta'ena   nga    i'e,   they 
inclosed  every  kind  of  fish. 
uwe  4.  t(7ve  dalo,  to  clear  the  throat. 
uwe  5.  U.,  uwe  raka,  to  break  with  a  loud  noise. 
uwe  6.  icweli  osa  cerumen,  wax  in  the  ear. 
uweha  a    fishing-rod;   qa'aqa'a    uweha,   U.,   a 

phase  of  the  moon, 
uweli    (ku)    U.,    well    S.    1.    maternal    uncle. 

hd'iuweline,  mauweline. 
uweli  2.  V.  tr.,  to  castrate, 
uwerikahite  tatters,  rags,     kakahite. 
uwesi  to  curse,     hd'iuwesi. 
uwo  1.  a  ridge  of  hills;  melu  susuli  uwo,  we  kept 

along  the  ridge. 
uwo-(na)  2.  pith.     ulo.     Nine  uho. 
uwota  V.  i.,  to  appear  on  the  horizon;  niu  toloi 
henue   'esi   uwota,   the   hills  appear  on 
the  horizon.     Mota  wota. 
uwola'ioi  tr.,  to  rear  up  on  high,   to  uplift. 
uwo   1. 


WA 


112 


W 

wa  adversative  conjunction,  or;  used  at  the 
end  of  sentence  to  express  doubt  or 
ignorance;  used  with  uri  to  denote  an 
objection  raised;  in  correlation  with  the 
negative  particles  ka'a  and  ka'a  in  the 
sense  of  neither— nor.  'ohe  ke'i  lae 
mdi  wa,  will  he  come  do  you  think? 
7va  uri  'o  'untie,  but  you  said;  kire  ka'a 
manaia'inie  wa  kire  ke  leesie.  neitherknow 
him  nor  have  seen  him;  wa  'ohe,  unless. 
waa,  waawaa  1.  to  be  empty,  hollow,  to  have 
open  doors,  to  have  a  hole  in;  lalona 
e  waawaa,  nothing  inside  it,  to  be  open 
(of  a  door) ,  to  be  desolate  (of  a  place) ; 
qdlusune  e  waawaa,  his  nostril  is  pierced. 
wa'a  2.  to  be  split,  to  be  cut  into  sections;  to 
split,  wa'a  uhi,  to  cut  up  yams  for 
planting;  mu  wa'a,  sections  of  yams  for 
planting. 
wa'ali  tr. 

wa'alila-(na)  gerund.     San  Cristoval  waa; 
Maori    mawawa   cracked;  Mota  waka, 
open. 
wa'a  3.  to  be  profaned, 
wa'a  4.  'ahewa'a,  to  vanish,     ha'awa'a. 
wa'ahite   v.    i.,    to   be   cracked,    to    split    (of 
timber);  n.,  a  crack, 
wa'ahiteli  tr.,  to  split,  to  divide. 
wa'ahitelila-(ku)   gerund. 
waa'i,  waawaa'i  v.  tr.,  to  reward,  to  hire;  waa'i 
'iola,  to  hire  a  canoe, 
waa'ite  (ku)  n.,  reward, 
wa'ali'e  adj.,  to  be  daj'break;  n.,  daybreak, 
dawn;    i    wa'ali'e,    at    dawn.     Wango 
waaria.     wa'a  2. 
wa'alinga  U.,  to  give  attention,  to  turn  the 

ear  to.     'alinga. 
wa'araa  to  appear  (of  a  vision) ;  atioa  e  wa'araa 

mdi,  an  apparition  came  into  view, 
wa'arao  a  very  strong  creeper  used  in  lashing 

canoe  planks;  wire  nails, 
wa'arara  U.  1.  to  be  timid,  nervous. 
wa'arara  2.  to  be  cold,  chilly  (of  weather). 
wa'arau'a  U.,  cold  (of  the  body). 
wa'ariri  S.,  to  flash  (of  lightning);  n.,  lightning. 

mangaW  a. 
waaro  around,  about,  of  position;  kdri  waaro. 
to  go  a  roundabout  way;  roro  waaro,  to 
be  diffused  (of  coloring  matter  in  water) ; 
maana  e  waaro,  goggle-eyed. 
waarowaaro  1.  the  moon.  2.  a  month.  3.  a 
biscuit,  waarowaaro  e  ranga'a,  the 
moon  is  up;  waarowaaro  e  qa'a  'olo,  the 
moon  has  risen;  waaroivaaro  e  mdnu 
'a'a  mdi  ilengi,  the  moon  floated  clear  in 
the  sky;  mdi  ana  waaro7vaaro  e  qa'a,  ehh 
tide  when  the  moon  rises;  mdi  ana 
waarowaaro  e  suu,  ebb  tide  when  the 
moon  sets. 

The  names  of  the  months  in  Sa'a 
beginning  from  July,  the  harvest 
season,  are:  ngdli  maelo,  hiire  i  lade; 
aau;  oku  lade;  oku  mwaa;  oku  denit; 
oku  peine  (cf.  Viti  mbalolo  levu) ;  raa; 
'dsi  redo;  lo'a  wdi  mweimwei;  lo'a  wdi 


waarowaaro  1  (continued.) 

peine;  lo'a  mali'e;  lo'a  madala;  hutohuto. 
In  Ulawa,  beginning  from  August, 
they  are:  ngdli  maelo;  pola  nguru; 
jnadamada  sulii;  oku  i  lade;  oku  denu; 
oku  peina;  uhi  mwaka;  uhi  opiiopu; 
ha'asusu  uhi;  uhi  repo;  uhi  maleu; 
'elinga;  aau  maraiva. 

The  phases  of  the  moon  in  Sa'a  are 
designated:  waarowaaro  e  ranga'a;  hudi; 
alanga'i  roa;  alanga'i  i'ola  ni  tolo; 
helehele  mwdimwei;  helehele  pdine;  okolu 
tewa'a;  hara  pole;  ruru'e  hule;  qa'ileni; 
to'ohuunge'i  lemi;  rara  talau  {hidaaholaa, 
full);  pa'ewa  ko  'ala  tala;  qa'i  oku; 
to'ohuunge'i  oku. 

In  Ulawa  they  are:  waarowaaro  e 
ranga'a;  hika  halo;  'ura  maasilima; 
rua  'apala;  dahi;  alanga'i  hapa;  hapa 
ni  na'o;  saro  pole;  hdu  ni  lemi,  lemi 
mwaa  (full);  hdu  ni  nnvela  awara; 
ruana  hdu;  qa'uni  'uru;  danu  oku; 
demudemu  totoria;  qa'aqa'a  inveha;rarasi. 
waato  n.,  a  digging-stick  used  in  making  holes 

for  yam  planting.     Wango  riwaato. 
waawaata     1.     an     opening,     hole,     aperture, 
waawaata  2.  U.,  waawaalani  i'a,  pieces  of  fish. 

Maori  waivala,  small  lumps, 
wadi,  wa'iwedi  -S.,  wadiwadi  U.,  to  whistle. 
wadu-(na,  ni)  n.,  point,  tip. 
wa'e  1.  to  waste,  wa'e  'ahe.     2.  to  do  in  vain, 
to    ruin    oneself;    used    with    poss.    3. 
lotowa'e.     kire    wa'e     ada,     they     ruin 
themselves. 
wa'eta'ini  tr.,  to  waste. 
wa'eta'i  partic,  wasted,  put  to  no  good  use. 
wa'eli  tr.,   to  do  damage  to;   to  pull  up 
growing    coconuts    that    have    rooted 
themselves  after  falling  from  the  tree. 
wa'ewa'e    U.,    adv.,    excessive,    very,    much; 
follows  the  verb,     wala'a  wa'ewa'e  ana 
ngaile,  to  upbraid  anyone  excessively, 
Wango  waewae. 
waha  to  be  foggy,   dim,   to  darken;   n.,   fog, 
vapor,  mist,     waha  haahie  maada,  make 
their  eyes  dim. 
wahawaha  U.,  wahawaha  ni  nnvado,  dust. 
wahawaha'a  adj.,  dim. 
wai  1.  water,  me'i  wei,  mdsi  wei.     2.  fluid,  urine. 
3.    bamboo     water-carrier,     nga     wdi; 
coconut  or  bamboo   water-bottle,  glass 
bottle,  hou  wei.     4.  tears,  wdi  ni  'akalo; 
wdi  hulahula,  a  spring,  a  fountain;  wdi 
e  huuhuu  'olo,  water  gushed  forth;  wdi 
ko  kone,  the  river  is  in  spate;  wdi  ni 
qe'unge,   strong  drink;  wdi  e  laha,   the 
river  mouth   is  open;    Wdi   ni    Tehulu, 
the  Ngorangora  lagoon,  Ulawa;  wm  wei 
e  lolo  mango  'olo,   the  streams  are  all 
dried  up;  ddu  wei,  to  catch  fish  in  low 
water  pools;  hulaa  ni  wei,  a  spring,  a 
fountain;  huuna  wdi,  U.,  fountain  head; 
i  kekena  wdi,  beside  the  stream;  kiln 
ni  wei,   a  well;  koukou  wei,   to  gargle 
sweet  water;  lo'a  wdi   mweimwei,  Feb- 
ruary; lo'a  wdi  peine,  March;  Mamala 


113 


V/ALENGA'I 


wai  (continued). 

Wdi,  the  Milky  Way;  mwakana  wiii, 
moist  ground;  wdi  wawai,  cold  water; 
wai  e  mahuro,  the  water  is  muddied,  i 
raona  wdi,  i  renne  wdi,  beside  the  stream ; 
ro  rdui  wci,  the  two  banks  of  the  stream; 
sdsu  ana  wdi,  steam;  siholi  wei,  the  south 
wind;  ta'alara  wai,  a  dragon-fly;  tdluhi, 
to  draw  water  at  a  well;  tc'i  wei,  to  draw 
water.  Lau  qai.  Polynesian  wai.  M. 
L.,  p.  96,  kuai  should  be  qai. 
wMi  5.  contracted  form  of  wdu  i;  wdi  r,Hme,  in 
the  house;  maraan  wei  liata,  qini;  wdi 
la'ona,  within,  inside;  'oto  wdi  lalo,  in  the 
heart;  'oto  wdi  na'ona,  right  before  his 
face.  Tanna  wei,  to  fare  into  the  house. 
wa'i,  wa'iwe'i  6.  to  drag,  to  pull,  to  draw,  to 
pain;  wd'i  haahie  ana  hu'o,  to  draw  a 
net  about;  wd'i  oda'i,  U.,  to  quarrel, 
to  fight, 
wa'ini  tr. 

wa'inge  v.  n.,  pain. 
wa'inila-(ku)  gerund, 
wa'i  7.  tetanus;  kuhu  la'ola'o  ana  wd'i,  to  be 

contorted  with  tetanus  spasms. 
waieu  U.,  n.,  a  bouito;  honi  weicu,  one  bonito; 
rerehana    wdicii,    a    school    of    bonito; 
Pepe  ni  weieu,  a  butterfly  (Ornithoptera 
Cassandra).     San  Cristoval  waiau. 
Waili  a  creek  in  Mara  Masiki  Channel  used 
for  the  ordeals  by  swimming.     M.  A., 
p.  213. 
Waingile  a  rocky  promontory  near  Mwarada, 

Ulawa. 
wa'ini'ini  S.,   with   diligence;   hele  wa'ini'ini, 

to  do  diligently. 
wairo-(na)  U.,  n.,  a  brim. 
waite  S.,  1.  adv.,  of  old,  a  long  time  ago,  some 

days  ago;  'olo  waite,  long  ago. 
wa'ite  S.,  walita  U.,    2.  adv.,  the  day  before 
yesterday;  t  we'ite,  two  days  ago;  wd'ile 
wau,  three  days  ago. 
waiteu,  waiweiteu  v.  i.,  to  quarrel,     ha'awditeu. 

waiteunge  v.  n. 
waiwei  1.  to  wave  to  and  fro  (of  a  fire-stick), 

wdiwei  dunge. 
waiwei  2.  to  collect;  wdiwei  to' a  ro  me'i  lo'ohaa, 
collect  the  two  pieces  of  money  from 
everyone. 
waiwei'a'a  adj.,  watery,  with  too  much  water, 

thin  (of  soup). 
wakala'i  v.  i.,  to  appear  above  the  horizon  (of 

a  canoe  coming  into  sight). 
waki,  wa'iweki  v.  i.,  to  hang  up  in  festoons 
(of  skulls  hung  up  in  taoha);  used  with 
poss.  3.     e  wa'iweki  ana,  he  hung  it  up 
as  a  decoration. 
wakio  a  bird,  the  gray  osprey;  a  Poro  Wakio 

Mali,  a  legendary  person. 
wala  (ku)  1.  a  word,  speech,  voice,  language; 
mc'i  wala,  S.,  hdi  wala,  U..  nga  hdiwala, 
U.,  a  word,  the  word;  a  me'i  Wala,  S., 
the  Word;  walaku,  my  word,  hire 
saea  wala,  they  talked  about;  qd'u  ni 
wala  pe'i,  to  consult  with;  walana  e  lola, 
his  word  is  great;  hatonga'i  wala  haahi, 
to  accuse;  ko  kokoho  haahi  wala,  deceitful 


wala  (continued). 

in  speech;  laeli  wala,  to  make  an  oration; 
laeli  walanga,  oratory,  address;  lalani 
wala,  to  make  an  oration;  lopo'i  wala, 
to  feign;  madou  ni  wala,  a  phrase;  muni 
wala,  S.,  to  takt-  tounscl;  a  I'oro  Matoit 
ni  Wa!a,  a  ghost  in  folklore;  mti  odo- 
haana  wala,  words  to  the  point;  qelu 
wala  ilengine  ngaini,  to  accuse  any  one; 
rum  wala,  to  make  an  agreement;  mu 
sihoa'i  wala,  mere  words,  just  a  tale; 
sulu  walanga,  gossip;  jnu  tale'i  sulu 
walanga,  mere  gossip;  sulu  walanga 
ta'elate,  babbling  words;  mu  wala 
ta'alara,  tradition;  mu  wala  ta'atarau, 
gossip;  talama'i  wala,  to  act  as  mediator; 
tarie'ini  wala,  to  commit  fornication; 
walana  dhuri,  the  sound  of  the  conch; 
wala  talara,  tradition;  tolai  suli  wala,  to 
obey  commands;  lo'olo'oa'i  wala,  fit 
and  proper  words.  2.  v.  i.,  to  speak, 
used  with  qualifying  words;  mdni  wala, 
to  consult,  to  take  counsel ;  wala  odoodo, 
S.,  to  speak  in  one's  own  defence,  to  deny; 
with  poss.  3.  3.  ddu  wala,  to  be  at 
fault,  to  transgress;  nou  deu  walaku, 
I  transgressed.  Wango  hara,  mouth; 
Mota  valai,  mouth;  Tubetube,  N.  G., 
wala,  word. 

wala  4.  v.  i.,  to  be  scared,  to  be  on  the  alert, 
to  have  learned  a  lesson,     kire  wala  'oto. 

wala'a,  wala'awala'a  U.,  adj.,  used  as  verb; 
to  speak,  mwai  keni  e'asi  qale  wala'a- 
wala'a mware'a,  what  drawling  women; 
wala'a  wa'ewa'e  ana  ngaile,  to  upbraid 
excessively  any  one. 
wala'anga  U.,  v.  n.,  speech;  wala'anga 
mwamwasn,  upbraiding  words. 

walanga  v.  n.,  words,  speaking;  'i'ile'i  walanga, 
strife  about  words;  qaola'i  walanga, 
deceit,   lying. 

wala'asi  to  speak. 

walaha  (da,  ni)  n.,  speech,  sound  of. 

walahalinge  n.,  dispute,  strife,     hdli. 

wala'imoli,   to  be  true   (lit.,   to  speak   true); 
exclamation  of  assent,   verily;  hiiwala- 
'imoli,  to  believe, 
wala'imolinge  n.,  truth.     Niue  molt,  true; 
Efate  ta-moli,  real  man. 

walamango  prepared,  ready;  hele  walamango, 
to  get  ready,  to  perfect;  i'o  walamango, 
to  be  ready. 

walangi  U.,  v.  tr.,  to  address  with  words;  e 
walangia  ani  seru'a,  spoke  an  incanta- 
tion over  it. 

walawala  U.  1.  adv.,  in  excess,  too  much. 

walawala  2.  v.  i.,  to  have  the  tongue  hanging  out 
by  reason  of  the  heat  (of  dogs),  wana- 
wana. 

wale  1.  du  wale,  a  reed  flute.  2.  a  thomless 
cane,  the  bark  used  to  sew  the  leaves 
of  thatch  on  to  reeds  or  to  fasten  the 
layers  of  thatch  on  to  the  bamboo 
rafters;  tdli  wale,  to  strip  the  bark  of 
the  cane. 

walenga'i  to  carry  burdens;  walenga'i  heu,  to 
carry  stones. 


WALI 


114 


wali  a  space  of  time,  long  ago.  ha'awali.  'oto 
'ure  wali,  from  of  old. 

walita  U.,  wa'ite  S.,  day  after  tomorrow,  with 
locative  i;  i  welita,  two  days  hence; 
t  welita  po'o  watt,  three  days  hence. 
Florida  valiha,  Samoa  alivu,  Maori 
kareha,  Malay  lusu. 

walo  1.  a  creeper,  rope,  string,  line,  vine. 
ha'iwalo.  walona  mu  uhi,  yam  vines; 
hahai  walo,  a  thicket;  nga  walo  e  hikusie, 
the  creepers  twined  round  it;  7valo 
kdukeu,  a  thorny  creeper;  walo  ni 
pa'asafm,  a  fishing-line  for  pa'asahu; 
waloni'u'i,  a  sling;  ta'ewalo  'iekesu'uri, 
save  for  these  bonds;  walo  roto,  match- 
box bean.  2.  ten  strings  of  shell  money. 
3.  ten  coconuts  made  into  copra  and 
strung  together  in  halves.  Florida  gala, 
Wango  waro,  Motu  varo. 

walo  4.  susu  walo.  an  abscess;  to  suffer  from 
abscesses. 

Walo'a'a  the  river  that  discharges  into 
Roasi  Bay,  Little  Malaita;  Tetele,  the 
ridge  on  which  it  rises;  Toro'a,  the  hill 
at  its  head. 

walokaukeu  a  thorny  creeper. 

waloliu,  walowaloliu  to  travel  about,  to  make 
excursions. 

walopasa  ten  fiying-fish. 

walowalo  walowaloi  'ehuri,  the  sound  of  the 
conch  shell. 

walu  numeral,  eight;  used  also  to  express  an 

indefinite  number,    waluola,  everything; 

walu  mola  ni  ola,  all  things;  walu  tala 

ni  Tolo,  all  the  villages  of  Tolo. 

waluta-(na,    ni)     walutana    nga    ola,     S., 

waluteni  ola,  U.,  everything. 
walune  eighth,  the  eighth  time.     Lau  qalu, 
Florida  alu,  Viti  walu. 

walumalau  the  world,  all  the  islands,  malau. 
ko  'ure  para'ilana  walumalau,  defends 
the  earth. 

wana,  wanawana  v.  i.,  to  sparkle,  to  shine,  to 
be  incensed;  saeku  e  la  'otoi  wana,  my 
heart  was  hot.     Lau  qanga,  lightning. 

wanawana  1.  v.  i.,  to  scrape  and  clean,  to  file; 
wanawana  hinou,  to  make  shell  hooks. 

wanawana  2.  S.,  same  as  walawala  2. 

wanga  U.,  to  have  fever,  malaria. 
wangaha  n.,  an  attack  of  malaria. 

wangawanga  S.,  to  be  bright,  to  sparkle. 
wanawana. 

wa'o,  wao'wa'o  U.  \.  to  catch  fish,  to  go 
afishing. 

wa'o  U.  2.  a  mast,  hou  wa'o. 

wa'oni'a  U.,  adj.,  damp,  dew. 

waowao  1.  n.,  a  shrub  growing  on  the  beach, 
has  white  flowers,  grows  best  on  rocky 
soil;  the  sticks  are  used  as  seat  of  plat- 
forms. 

waowao  2.  (na,  ni)  tentacles,  feelers. 

waowaolu  wild  dog. 

wgpo  forest  land  which  may  be  cleared  for 
gardens  and  thus  becomes  the  property 
of  him  who  clears  it.  tahangie  wdpn, 
to  clear  forest  country,  met.,  of  difficult 
work  just  started. 


wara  to  be  very  large,     kira  wara. 
Warahunukaa  Warahumika  Rd'i  I' a,  a  legend- 
ary person. 
waraihu,  U. .  ihu  S. ,  hair,  feathers.  San  Cristoval 
waraihti. 

waratiku  U.,  hair,  feathers. 

warawara'a  adj.,  ere  warawara'a,  clamorous. 

ware  U.  1.  v.  tr.,  to  destroy,  to  be  mischievous, 
to  pull  up  self-rooting  coconuts. 

ware  U.  2.  adv.,  nearly,  almost;  precedes  the 
verb. 

ware  3.  warei  heu,  ware  ni  hdu,  a  short  club 
used  in  central  Malaita  on  the  west 
coast;  it  is  carried  on  the  back,  depending 
from  the  neck;  its  stone  head  is  lashed 
to  the  haft  with  cane  and  the  haft  is 
inlaid;  this  is  the  club  mentioned  by 
the  Spanish  discoverers,  see  the  Journal 
of  Gallego  in  Guppy's  Solomon  Islands, 
p.  219;  the  port  m.entioned  in  the  note 
is  probably  Waisisi. 

wariha  (na,  ni)  S.,  'tinu  weriheni,  to  tell  clearly. 

warihiteli  v.  tr.,  to  burst  open.     hite. 

waru  1.  V.  i.,  to  be  scorched,  to  burn,  to  get 
burnt;  mu  nume  e  waru  'oto,  the  houses 
are  burned  down;  mwado  waru,  U.,  red 
earth;  niu  waru,  a  coconut  with  short 
stem,  yellowish  fronds,  and  reddish- 
skinned  nut;  i'e  waru,  a  fish  of  red 
color  caught  in  shore  reef, 
waruhi  tr.,  to  bum. 
waruhila-(ku)  gerund.     Lau  saru. 

waru  2.  v.  i.,  warn  ta'a,  to  emerge,  to  show  up 
clear,  to  reach  a  place;  tala  ko  weruta'a 
i  Sa'a,  the  path  emerges  at  Sa'a;  'dpu 
e  wdrnta'a  ana  qalusuku,  blood  gushed 
from  my  nose.     Lau  qalu. 

waruna  U.,  adv.,  as  if. 

warupe  U.,  to  be  stringy,  of  hana. 

waruweru'a  U.,  adj.,  red. 

wasawasa'a  adj.,  indistinct,  blurred;  lio 
wasawasa'a,  to  see  indistinctly. 

wasi  1.  V.  i.,  to  be  wild,  not  tame;  n.,  a  wild 
animal,  ha'awdsi.  wdsi  ni  poo,  U.,  a 
wild  pig;  nga  wdsi,  mu  west,  a  wild  pig 
in  contradistinction  to  nga  poo  ni  nume, 
the   domesticated   swine.     Florida   asi. 

wasi,  wa'iwesi  2.  v.  tr.,  to  wash  clothes,  wdsi 
lo'oninge  (English  wash). 

wasi,  wa'iwesi  3.  wa'iwesi  hemie,  to  visit  the 
villages. 

wasu,  wa'uwesu  \.  v.  i.,  to  smell,  to  smell  of; 
wdsu  'aela,  to  stink;  nimeku  e  wasu  i'e, 
my  hand  smells  of  fish;  wdsu  mangoni, 
to  emit  a  rich  savor;  nonowdsu,  to  sniff 
at,  to  smell, 
wasuli  tr.,  to  smell  too  strong  for. 
wasulana  its  smell. 

wasu  2.  saewasu,  to  be  angry,  to  sulk. 

watamea  U.,  to  crackle  (of  fire),     mea. 

Wate  a  proper  name  very  common  on  Little 
Malaita. 

wate,  wa'ewate  to  distribute  food  at  a  feast 
after  making  an  oration, 
watenga'ini  tr. 

watenga'i  v.  i.     Wango  wate,  donate;  Lau 
lali  qale,  to  make  an  oration. 


II 


WOWALA'A 


■wSu  1.  adverb  of  place,  there;  ne  or  n»  may  be 
added;  when  followed  by  the  locative  i, 
wan  i  contracts  to  wiii.  a  mwane  wdune, 
S.,  that  person;  wdi  nume.  in  the  house; 
i  we' He  wau,  three  days  ago;  »  welila 
poo  wdu,  three  days  hence;  e  Jwlai  na'o 
'oto  wdu,  he  has  gone  on  some  time  ago; 
nonola  wdu,  day  before  yesterday; 
nonola  'oto  wdu,  three  days  ago;  talo  wdu 
i  'est,  to  follow  the  coast  by  sea.  Wango 
wou,  Lau  go,  Dobu  wa. 

wa'u  2.  to  be  excessive  (of  pain,  work,  plague); 
ko  esu  we'u,  me'i  esunge  we'u,  strenuous 
work. 

vauru  U.,  to  fall,  to  stumble  and  fall;  a  Poro 
Wauru  i  '  Esi,  a  legendary  person, 
Mr.  Fall-at-Sea. 

•wjluwe    (ku)    grandfather,    grandchild;    ngddi 
weuwe,  a  stone  axe  (grandfather's  axe) . 
wauwana  n.,  used  with  »««  he'i;  mil  he'i 
weuwana,  grandfather  and   grandchild, 
wauwananga  n.,   mu  he'i  weiiwananga,   de- 
scendants (double  noun  ending). 

wauwau  U.,  to  dispute,  to  squabble. 

■wawa  (ku)  n.,  mouth;  in  Sa'a  ngidii  is  used  of 
the  mouth  of  persons,  wawa  ehoeho, 
to  boast;  hele  ponosic  wawana,  keep  his 
mouth  shut;  toro  wawa,  to  shoot  out 
the  lips.  Mota  vava,  to  speak;  Maori 
waha,  mouth;  Lau /aga,  Maisin  kawa. 

wawae  to  be  empty;  ola  wawae  mola,  only  a  shell. 

wawai  to  be  cold;  to  be  cool,  of  water,  wdi 
wawai;  sapeku  e  wawai,  my  body  is  cool; 
e  wawai  osiosi,  lukewarm. 
wawainge  v.  n.,  moisture. 

Wawake  Manu  a  ghost  of  the  open  sea.  'akalo 
ni  matawa.  M.  A.,  p.  197.  inge'i  i 
sapena  rihue  i  Qe'ulo,  hole  sa'a  hole  wa 
nga  me'i  ola  erete'a  ke  i'o  i  sapeka,  he  is 
near  the  cliffs  at  Qa'ulo;  paddles  must 
not  rattle  nor  anything  white  be  on 
our  bodies. 

wawala  v.  i..  to  carry,  to  act  as  porter. 

wawanu'e  adj.,  sharp  (of  edge). 

TPawe  froth  from  the  mouth,  to  slobber;  luawe 
ko  ta'ero  ana,  the  spittle  dribbles  down. 

waweta'a  adj.,  vexed,  fashed,     ha' awaweta' ai. 

wede  to  take  out  the  midrib  of  the  sago  leaf 
before  sewing  the  leaves  for  thatch. 
wede'i  tr. 

■weesi,  weeweesi  v.  i.,  to  fish,  to  catch  a  fish, 
to  get  shellfish    at    low    spring    tides 


weesi  (continued). 

(mat  rara);  noko  lai  weesi,  I  am  going 

fishing. 
weesinge    S.,    v.    n.,    fish    caught;    ngUu 

weesinge,  to  eat  things  caught  (fish  or 

flesh),  as  a  relish  with  vegetables, 
weesingaha  U..  v.  n.,  double  noun  ending; 

as  weesinge. 
weewee  S.,  a  baby,  infant,  tnu  weewee.     a  Wee 

contraction  of  a  Dora  weewee. 
v/elewele  a  rod,  a  stick,  maai  welewele,  S.,  hit 

welewele,  U. 
welewele'a  adj.,  ngara  welewele'a,  to  have  a 

firm,  solid  sound;  to  ring  solid. 
well   (ku)    S.,   uweli  U.,   n.,    maternal   uncle; 

a  weli,  my  uncle. 
we'o,  we'owe'o  v.  i.,  to  be  tired,     ha'awe'o. 

sape  we'o,  to  be  bodily  tired, 
we'onga   v.    n.,   weariness;   sape  we'onga, 

physical  weariness, 
werewere    small    (of    children),     cf.    weewee. 

mwela  werewere,  an  infant.     Mota  were, 

to  make  an  inarticulate  sound, 
wete  1.  V.  i.,  to  hit;  e  wete  i  sapeku,  it  struck  my 

body.     2.    to  reach;   wete  i  ola,   reach 

such-and-such   a   place.     Wango   wele- 
wele, firm. 
weweu   U.,    v.    i.,    to    squabble,     ha'aweweu. 

Maori  wawau. 
wili   1.  V.  tr.,  to  give  tribute,   to  contribute 

money  to  a  chief  at  a  feast;  haa  ni  wili, 

tribute  money;  wili  to'ohaa,  wili  lo'oka- 

anga,  contributing  money, 
wilinge  v.  n.,  a  giving  of  tribute, 
wililana  gerund, 
wili  2.  to  string,  to  thread;  wili  dududu,  to 

string  beads;  wili  haa,   to  string  shell 

money, 
wili  3.  to  chip,  to  flake,  to  break  off  chips  of 

flint. 
winiwini  1.  v.  tr.,   to  handle  shamefully,   to 

maltreat. 
winiwiiiila-(ku)  gerund. 
winiwini  U.   2.   carefully;   hele  winiwini  ana, 

deal  carefully  with  it. 
wiro  a  steering-paddle,  a  rudder. 
wisi  a  small  gray  bird,  observed  as  an  omen. 

wisi  ko  area,  the  wisi  chatters.    M.  A., 

p.  221. 
wowo  (ku)  the  shinbone. 
wouwou  a  wooden  ear-plug. 
wowala'a  S.,  ntwala  e  wowala'a,  glorious. 


INDEX. 


a  hai  4.,  masi,  me'i,  nga,  ta'a  3.,  ta'ata'a,  ta'e  1. 

abandon  lae  mwaani,   qaqaitengili,   toli'asi. 

abhor  ha'ileledi,  leledi. 

abide  naku,  i'o,  i'o  konito'o,  i'o  susu,  'o'o  3. 

able  mwadausi,  nanama,  saka. 

aboard  la'o  'iola,  ni'i  'ae  ila'ona  'iola,  ta'e  ana 

haka,  ta'eli  'iola. 
abode  leu  tala,  leu  talahuli. 
abound    ahurara,    alielimui,    hunge,    takara, 

tapala'a. 
abo:it  ana,  haahi,  i  maana,  ra'arangana;  kali. 
above  haho,  i  haho,  i  lengi;  liuta'a,  liutaha. 
abraded  aho,  dalao. 
abreast  hora,  i  odoha,  sama. 
abroad  kiili,  lilikeli. 
abscess  epa  1.,  likita'a,  mwaa  2.,  oropa,  osa, 

qaqahinu,  sususu,  susu  walo,  'upu'e. 
absorb  totohi,  totoqini. 
abundant  'a'a  3.,  lolo,  nivvaera,  tahe  2. 
abuse  ere  leledi,  ere  mama'ila'a,  ere  mama'ingi, 

ha'asa'eri;  n.,  maleledinge. 
accident  dau  (tau)  pele. 
accompany  ha'ipulonga'ini,  haku,  hata,  'uren- 

ga'ini. 
accomplish  ha'aahu,  ha'aoa'i,  ha'ato'o. 
according  ha'idadanga  ana,  isuli,  sada  ana. 
accumulate  koni,  si'okoni,  tarakoni. 
accurate  diana,  hahuroto,  mangine,  warihana. 
accuse  qelu,  tohule'ini,  'usu  8.  'usu  maa. 
accustom  ha'anina,  husingi,  manata'i,  nanoa'i. 
ache  hi'ito'o,  salu  1.,  wa'i. 
acid  ahaa. 

ackttowledge  'alama'ini. 
across  ha'aholo. 

act  arikosi,  dada,  dau,  hele,  qao,  tau,  taa  2. 
active  dau  sakasaka'a. 
add  maai  1.,  pe'i,  sape'i,  taroisuli. 
admire  ane. 

adopt  koine,  koni,  opa,  ra.'i,  sangoni.  sulu'i. 
adorn  ha'alauni,  launi. 
adornments  liiuni,  iSunihe. 
adrift  ahesi,  hatara,  kone,  tara;  mataraha. 
advance  ara  2.,  dudu,  nanauhi,  'o'ohi,  susungi. 
adversary  niaeloonga. 
adult  rato,  repo. 

adultery  'aino'amo,  masi  1.,  tarie'iniwala. 
adze  dahe,  v.;  kaurnota,  hau. 
afar  'aho'a,  ha'atau. 
afirm  une  lete. 
affix  lakoina'ini,  rakoma'ini. 
afflicted  ha'alete,  ha'amotahi,  si'obaa. 
affright  ha'amamakine,  ha'amausi. 
afloat  raanumenu. 
afoot  liu  i  henue,  liu  i  tala. 
afraid  maa'u,  mii'ume'u,  popolo'u,  qi'ilulu. 
afresh  hii  8.  'i  lo'u  5.,  iilioh'i. 
after  huni,  'ohi,  i  puri,  isuli,  po'o  puri,  qa'i  pari. 
afternoon  apau,  apai  sato. 
afterwards  mango  ena,  mango  urina. 
again  aliho'i,  lo'u  5. 
against  hatare,  honosi.  parasi,  suli. 
aged  lasu,  repo. 


ago  ina'o,  'oto,  'oto  di. 

agree  loko.  ruru  wala,  sama  diena. 

aground  ape  1 . 

ague  mata'i,  wanga. 

aid  liiuhi,  maai  1.,  pe'i. 

aim  hana  2. 

air  maalau,  mango,  ooru,  uwatohuoa. 

akin  takihe-. 

alarm  ha'aasire'i,  ha'aparasi. 

alight  'o'a  5.,  puu. 

alight  adj.,  akau,  eso. 

alike  ha'idadanga,  ha'isada,  sada. 

alive  mauri,  maumeuri'e,  mamaurita'a. 

all  ahuta-,  hauni.  miini,  mango. 

allot  'alali,  ha'aado,  ni'i,  wate. 

allow  Ho  maai,  maai  1.,  toll  'asi,  tolimaai. 

almost  hini'i,  kara'i. 

aloft  'ala'a,  'alenga,  la'a,  ilengi,  ta'e. 

aloyie  hale'ite,  hali'ite,  hahaiteli. 

along  i  epine,  i  suli,  suli. 

aloof  'aho'a. 

aloud   ha'ada'i,   ha'ata'i,   ilengi,    paine,    toto- 

longa'ini. 
already  'oto,  qani,  'upuni. 
also  lo'u  5. 

alter  hele  aopa,  hi'une,  hi'usi,  hu'isi. 
altercate  ere  ha'isuru,  ha'aere,  w^teu.  weuweu. 
alternate  ha'iolisi. 
altogether  ha'ahuu'ani,  ha'ahuu'ei,  hauni,  mini, 

mangomango,    to'uhuungana,   to'ohuu- 

nge'i. 
always  'oni'oni,  suli  he'idinge. 
amidst  i  denume,  i  matola-. 
amiss  pele,  tala  4.,  tototala. 
among  hike,  i  matola,  i  saa-,  i  sie-. 
amulet  mangite. 
ancestor  wauwe. 
anchor  hau  ni  hune,  hunata. 
and  na,  mana,  pe'i,  mwana. 
anew  ha'alu  2.,  ha'olu,  lo'u  5.,  ruana. 
anger  ha'iore,  saewasu. 
angle  suusuu  1. 
ankle  koukou  li  'ae, 
anklet  'uru  mwado. 
annoy  aite'ini,  ha'asauni,  kotaahi. 
anoint  nue,  su. 
another  nga'eta,  ngaite. 
answer  'ala,  'alama'ini,  'alami. 
ant  duidui,  hulihuli,  lolo,  sane. 
antennae  kakawe,  waowao  2. 
anticipate  kokela'ini,  rorahi. 
anxious  adoma'i  su'asu'ate'e,  ikule'i,  ne'isae 

to'ote'e. 
any  ngaile,   ngaini,   nga  mwaile,   nga  muini, 

ta'ana,  ta'ena,  iteitana. 
apart  'aho'a,  auhora,  hoka,  siki  1. 
apiece  ado,  oa  1. 
apparition  anoa,  haeta. 
appear  haata'i,   haeta,  manumenu,  suu  ta'a, 

uwota. 
appease  ha'arako,  to'ora'ini. 
apply  raoha'ini. 
117 


APPOINT 


Il8 


appoir.t  ha'a'uresi,  holosi,  holota'ini,  topo. 
apportion  'alali,  ha'ado,  ni'i,  opa,  wate. 
approach  aori  2.,  duduhi,  nanauhi,  'o'oha'ini, 

'o'ohi,  susuhi. 
areca  'e'e,  kuru,  miiuta'a,  pile,  pua. 
arm  nima,  nimanima,  nime,  ninime. 
armlet    hato,    kakamuni,    kokome,    ngaungeu 

nime,  pore,  qaro  haa. 
armpit  qaeqae. 

around  haahi,  honota-,  kali,  kalikeli,  parasi. 
arrange  koni,  ne'i,  samanga'ini,  si'o  koni. 
arrive  arapuu,  hule  1. 

arrow  dede  qalu,  omo,  oa  4.,  suulehu,  topa  1. 
as  domana,  mala  1.,  urihana,  waruna. 
ascend  hane,  haneta'a,  tahela'i. 
ashamed  mamakine,  masa. 
ashes  ora  2.,  qasaora. 
aside  'e'eli,  liu  aopa,  palili. 
ask  dolosi,  ha'atohu,  hari,  soi,  suke. 
assault  arisi,  polahi,  puuli,  siholi. 
assemble  ahelidu,  loko,  ruru. 
assent  'alama'ini,  'alaqa'u,  mvva'emwa'e. 
assert  unu  lete,  usu  meuta'a. 
assign  ha'aado,  holosi  3. 
assist  maai,  pe'i,  pe'ini. 
asthma  malo. 

astray  'e'eli,  takalo. 

astride  ta'e  odoodo,  ta'e  ha'aholo. 

astinder  makaka. 

at  hai  2.,  i  1.,  ta'i  2.,  wai  5. 

at  all  ha'aisi,  ike,  'oto  'o'o. 

atonement  hiri,  tapa  olisi,  uraa'i. 

attach  raoha'ini,  lakoma'ini,  rakoma'ini. 

attack  mama'ingi,  polahi. 

attain  hulaana,  su'aana,  tau  taha,  usu  ta'a. 

attempt  dau  adonga,  dau  ni,  hala. 

aunt  nike,  teitei. 

avenge  horo  i  tala,  suu  ola. 

avoid  peinuhi. 

awake  ha'alio,  ha'atalisi,  liolio,  talisi. 

away  mwaani,  wau. 

awe  maute'i  ra'aranga-. 

awhile  ha'awali,  ka'u  4. 

awkward  maumeuli'e. 

axe  hau  2.,  'ile  4.,  ngadi. 

babble  ro'irori. 

baby  'elekale,  mwela  werewere,  weewee. 

back  kolu,  puri;  adv.,  aliho'i,  'oli,  'olie'i,  ha'i'oli; 

taalenga 
backbone  8uli  odo,  suli  qeri  i  ngae. 
bad  'aela,  tata'ala;  kasu,  mapusu,  osa. 
bag  anga,  mwa'i. 
bait  paa,  pasa;  'alata'ini,  v. 
bake  hahi,  haali. 
bale  pute;  v.,  danu. 
baler  idenu. 
bald  halai. 
ball  hou  meme. 

bamboo  iiu,  dana,  qirei  eu,  rata. 
banana  hudi,  piei  hudi. 
band  walo. 

bang  kokohu,  makulu;  n.,  koukouhe. 
bank  'akere,  keke,  rao. 
barb,  nanga. 


bare  mwakule,  qala. 

barefaced  raramaa. 

barely  asa,  asa'i,  hini'i,  ili  1.,  kara'i,  orei  2. 

bargain  hohoro,  'olisi,  usi. 

bark  te'ete'e  «.;  ku,  leko'i. 

barren  amara,  qala. 

barter  ha'aholi,  hohoro,  holi,  usi. 

bashful  masa,  mamasa'a. 

bask  ha'araa. 

basket  anga,  ite,  lu'alu'a,  lu'e  3.,  mwa'i,  tangi  1. 

bat  ninginingi,  sawalo. 

bathe  loto. 

battlefield  paonga. 

bawl  arai,  awara,  kakau,  tea. 

be  i'o,  la  1.,  lae,  'o'o  3. 

beach  i  kule,  i  one,  one,  qa'une  hau. 

beak  qalusu,  wavva. 

bear  anga'i,   hele,   karu,  walenga'i;  ha'ahute, 

hungu. 
beat  daro,  hide,  horo,  rapu,  sauni;  lili  qana. 
beating  daro'ilana,  maai  repusilana. 
beautiful  hinoli'a,  kohi,  mwane  diana,  rara'i. 
because  ana  7.,  'aehotalana,  i  tehulaana,  i  nunu- 

haana,  tala'aehana. 
beckon  'ala  qa'u,  salohi. 

become  ne'i,  no'i;  malisi. 

beetle  manu,  orooro'a. 

before  hola'i  na'o,  i  na'o. 

beforehand  kokela'i,  rorahi. 

beg  'a'ada'ini,  aitana'i  ha'atohu. 

beget  'aehota,  ha'ahute. 

begin  'aehota,  tala'ae;  adv.  si  1. 

beginning  'aehotalana,  tala'aehana. 

beguile  ero,  kae. 

behave  i'o,  naku,  'o'o  3.,  tola. 

behavior  i'ola-,  i'onga. 

behind  i  puri. 

belch  ora  lulu. 

believe  hiiwala'imoli. 

belly  'aqa  2.,  i'e  3.,  'oqa. 

belong  ana  3.,  to'oana,  to'ola-. 

below  haha  1.,  i'ano,  i  haha,  i  oroha-,  i  ka'o. 

belt  lokoqaio,  roro  to'oni. 

bend  lolo  1.,  lo'u  4.,  lo'une,  oroha'i,  oroma'i; 
n.,  'alo'u,  lo'u'e. 

beneath  i  'ano,  i  haha,  i  kao. 

bent    'amaoro,     malo'u,     matou,     mwahiohio, 
mwaoroha'i. 

beseech  aitana'i,  tola  suu'i. 

beset  'aqata'ini. 

beside  i  epine,  i  keke,  i  raona,  i  reune,  isuli. 

besom  korekore,  tala  5. 

betel  oha,  oha  ni  me'esu. 

betray  qelo. 

betroth  aharo,  ngau  ni  sulanga,  rongo  keni. 

between  i  matola. 

beware  lio  tala. 

bewilder  lole,  pangara'ini,  pu'o. 

bewitch  si'ohi. 

beyond  li'ite,  likite,  'oto  wau,  po'o  wau,  qa'u 
ni  paro,  qa'u  wau. 

bid  ha'atola,  hii'iusunge'i,  'unu. 

big  piiine,  paipeina'a,  pangupangu  raha,  loa  1. 

bill  qalusu. 

bind  hiri,  hoo,  qasu. 

bird  miinu. 

birth  ha'ahutanga,  hutela. 


119 


CATCH 


bit  iihuhue'i  ola,  dodongo,  'ele,  karikeri,  kele 

me'i,  ko'ukohui  poo,  maapou,  inasi  2., 

me'i,  musii  'elili,  'u'u  tolo,  waawaatani 

i'a. 
bite  'ala  3.,  sapo. 
bitter  ahaa. 

black  lo'ilohi'c,  pulu,  pulupulu'e,  sawaoli'e. 
bladder  mimi. 
blade  maa  4. 
blame  'i'ite  2.,  'i'ite'ini. 
blast  esoesoha,  inawaha. 
blaze  eso,  ngangau,  talau. 
bliss  diihi,  dji'idehi'e,  ha'adahi,  ha'adiana. 
blind  ha'a'ulu,  'ulu. 
blister  qa'arcte,  tarapiu. 
block  hiiu  3.,  hai  4.,  ape  bono. 
blood  apu. 

bloody  apule,  lili  'epule. 
blossom  taka. 

blow  mawa,  ooru,  'uhi  3.;  n.  maai  repusilana. 
blue  melumelu'a'a,  pulupulu'e,  to'orodo. 
blunt  kumu,  ngo'a. 
boar  ora  4. 

board  hapa,  riii  dango,  rai  'ei,  rai  hapa,  raureu. 
boast   ere   ani   leu    honu,    ha'atoha'ini,    wawa 

ehoeho. 
body  sape. 

boil  ha'aohu,  koo,  ohu  1.,  pii;  n.,  'upu'e. 
bond  walo. 
botie  su'isuli,  susuli. 
boom  hau  lili  qana. 
border  'akerena,  i  keke,  i  ngoongoo,  i  raona, 

i  reune. 
bore  halo,  hoto'i. 
born  hute. 

borrow  lihue'ini,  suke. 
bosom  roro  2.,  roroma'i  sae,  saro. 
both  ahutana  ro  ola. 
bottle  hou  'atea,  hou  wei. 
bottom  kao. 
bough  sasara. 

bound  pola  liliki,  reke;  ho'o. 
boundary  honohonota,  nisita,  ta'itelihana. 
bow  n.,  pasi;  v.,  qa'utou,  'o'onuto. 
bowels  'oqa,  sae. 

bowl  nime  2.,  nime  sarasara,  maraohu;  v.,  'a'a  5. 
bowstring  ilolo,  pulo  2. 
boy  'elemwane,  mwane,  mwau,  mwela,  mwela 

inwane,  mwemwela,  plural, 
boyhood  haoraha-,  mwiiimweiha. 
brace  rape'i,  roro'i;  n.,  ro. 
brackish  'iisile,  maraohu'e,  qaaqi'a. 
brain  qango  3. 

branch  liiluhu.  sasara,  'ulu'ulu  2. 
breadfruit  pa'ale'o. 
break    aaro,     'ala    4.,     ha'alede,     ha'amousi, 

ha'aqa'ali,     hiili,     hite,     lede,     makasi, 

mousi,    nisi,    papali,    papata'ini,    pota, 

qa'ali,  qa'asi,  radu. 
breast  susu,  roroma'i  sae. 
breath  mango  2.,  mangoi  ola. 
breathe  mamango,    mangomango   2.,    nialo   2.. 

poepoe. 
breed  ha'ahute. 

bride  hu'e  ha'alu,  keni  ha'alu  (ha'olu). 
bridegroom  poro  ha'alu  (ha'olu). 
bridge  tatalauhe,  huruluiru. 


bright   marariro'a,   raa,   rere'a.    wana,   wanga- 

wanga. 
brilliant  huhurere'a,  inararc'a,  nuenuala,  rara- 

nga'a. 
brim  maa.  4.,  wairona. 
bring  tola,  tole. 

brink  qa'asulilana,  i  raona,  i  reune. 
bristle  n.,  uhu,  waraihu,  warauhu. 
broad  'ahola,  lalo'a. 
broil  susungi  2.,  su'isungi,  uunu  1. 
broken    'a'o'i,    ma'o'i,    mari'iri'i,    Itingu    holo, 

madou  2.,  makaka,   makaka'a. 
brood  v.,  aro  2. 
broom  korekore,  tala  5. 
brother  'asi-2.,  'ule-. 

brother-in-law  'asi-,  ihe-,  ro  aihana,  ro  mwaihana. 
brow  dara,  na'ona  dara. 
bruised  hudihudi'e,  maelupu'e,  maputaputa. 
brush  kore,  tala  5. 
bubble  hutohuto,  ohu  1. 
bud  'ure  4. 
buffet  hideli,  lomosi. 
build  dau  nime,  tiiu  nima,  ha'auresi,  tohu  nime; 

soo  tete. 
bulge  suule'i. 
bump   lupunge'ini,    taate'e,    tatate'ete'e,    to'o- 

lupu. 
hunch  adai,  hungu,  hunguha,  hunguta,  huu. 
bundle  lokota,  ihoo,  putaputa,  pute. 
burden  ludsia,  ludanga. 
burn   eso,    ha'amamu'i,    mamu,    raahi,    talau, 

uunu  1.,  wiiru. 
burrow  'eli.  hai  5. 
burst  qa'a,  utakora. 
bury  'anomi,  aori,   'eli  tala,  ha'itoli,   ha'itoli- 

nge'ini. 
bush  'ai  1.,  dango,  ma'usu,  me'esu,  mou,  tolona 

hanue. 
busy  hiru,  hirunga'a. 
busybody  polahiwasa. 
but  ta'a  7.,  ta'e  6.,  ta'e  pe'ini. 
butterfly  pepe. 

buttock  moro  3.,  popo  2.,  qote. 
buy  holi,  holoholo  3..  hohoro,  usi. 
by  ana  2.,  ani  2.,  i  keke,  i  raona,  i  reune,  i  saa. 

i  sie,  i  suH. 

cackle  tatarao,  toteu. 

call  arai,  awara,  ha'ara'i,  soi. 

calm  holaa. 

can  mwadausi. 

cane  'ohu  3.,  ue  3..  wale. 

canoe   'iola,   'iola  sara,   lusuinume,    ta'a   ta'e, 

ta'e  hai,  ta'e  'o!u. 
capsize  'akeu.  kausi,  oha'i,  qaoha'ini. 
careful     ha'akenjta'i,     hii'ikeneta'i,     keneta'i, 

kineta'i,  raerae. 
careless  tiiutcu,  ta'ewau. 
cargo  ludaa,  ludanga. 
carry  anga'i,   anga'ini,   'apala,   hu'e  3.,   lude, 

poonga'ini,  tola,  to'o  qa'u,  walenga'ini, 

wawala. 
can't  adu,  adumi,  diu  2.,  didi. 
cast  'a'a  5.,  'asi   3.,  daro,   dere,  'u'i,  'uile'ini, 

sikera'ini. 
castrate  uweli. 
catch  kausi,  talaahu'e,  tapoli. 


CATERPILLAR 


1 20 


caterpillar  muno. 

cave  hahale,  liwe. 

caidk  pulu'i. 

cause,  v.,  dau   1.,  ha'aola,   tau;   «.,   'ae'aena, 

'aehotalana,  tala'aehana. 
cease   mou,   moutoli,   noto,   rohu,   toli   ereere, 

to'o  moutana,  toli  rohu,  suu  1. 
cement  pulu  3. 
centipede  aliha,  aluhe. 
chafe  harasi,  rotoa'ini,  sataa'i,  uli  3. 
chamber  ahi,  'atohono. 
champ  kokolu,  sapoli. 

change  iilu,   ha'alili,   hi'usi,   ho'itana,   ho'ite'i, 
hu'isi,    hu'itana,    hu'ite'i,    lapi,    lie    2., 
'oli,  'olisi. 
channel  ta'ataha,  taha,  tahalaa,  ukui  ta'ataha. 
charcoal  lo'ilohi. 
charge   ha'atolanga'ini,    'usu  ilengi,  'usu  maa; 

rori. 
charm  n.,  mangite,  sahu  2.,  si'onga;  v.,  saru'i, 

toli  loosi,  walangi. 
chase  pai  1.,  piini.  pee  1. 
chatter  'e'engo,   diodioru,   kotaa,   orea,   rongo 

'aela. 
cheat  ero,  kae. 
cheek  papali. 
cheer  ha'aape,  ilenimwa'e,  rike,  ruke,  sae  dodo, 

sae  rukeruke. 
chest  duru,  toitoi;  mango  2.,  sae. 
chew   daweri,    koikoi,    kokolu,    ngasi,    ngero'i, 

sapoli. 
chief  alaha,  inemauri,  rato. 
child  'elekale,  'elekale  werewere,  kale,  mwela, 

mwela  werewere,  weewee. 
child-bearing  ha'ahute  mwela,  kale'a. 
chin  sasate. 
chink  waawaata. 

chip  dahe,  didi,  diu,   tere,  wili;  n.,  masi  'ei, 
ngangai   dango,    ngangani    'ei,    sikitani 
'ei,  sikitei  dango. 
chipped  'apasu. 

choose  hili,  'ilisi.  Ho  hilisi.  Ho  huni. 
chop  huule'ini,  kohu  2.,  tapa,  tapi,  tohu  1. 
chorus  hji'ioangi. 
cinnamon  madou. 
circuit  kali,  kari  waaro. 
clam  'ime. 
clap  hide. 
clasp  ako. 
clatter  kole. 
claw  ki'iki'i. 

clay  'ano  mola,  mwado  waru. 
clean  rere'a;  v.,  ha'arere'a. 
cleanse  hoda. 

clear  ahureha,  dingadinga,  hahuroto,  haha'iteli, 
langalanga'a,    manola,    mataqa,    tam- 
waodo;  v.,  rai,  sale. 
cleave  hite,  hite  pewa'aU,  tangi,  tohu  1.,  tohu 

hiteli,  wa'ali;  hataa'ini,  rauhe'i. 
cleft  ta'ataha,  tahalaa. 
clench  lokune,  rete  hau. 
clever  saai  ola,  salema'i. 
cliff  haneta'anga,  hanetahanga,  osani  karekare, 

qa'asulilana. 
climb  hane,  hane'i,  hanenga'ini. 
cling  lalako,  nanako,  rauhe'ini. 
clip  olo  3. 


close  ahu'i  2.,  dau  keli,  ha'apuli,  hohono,  para 
ahu'i,    ponosi;    mumu.    adj.,    kara'ini, 
puru,  purupuru'a'a. 
close-cut  kou. 
cloth  mi  sala,  sala. 
cloud    mamala    wai,    rorodo,    rorodo'a,    salo, 

uru  3. 
clouded  kokohono,  rorodo,  rorodo'a. 
club  ahui   1.,  die,   kiakia,   mata,   pa'uwa'ata, 

supi,  taroiri. 
club-foot  qa'i  4. 
clump  huu  1.,  lolo'a  ni  'ei. 
coarse  wara. 

coast  v.,  hatale;  n.,  hatale'a. 
cobweb  lawa. 
cockatoo  eke. 

cockle  hadonga,  henu,  mengo,  hangoda. 
cockroach  mwaidi. 
coconut  niu;  kokolu,  madeli,  opu,  poupou  l.t 

'ulu'ulu  1. 
coil  ere  2. 

collect  sio  1.,  sio  koni,  sio  maani. 
color  sape. 
comb  arapa. 
combine  loko. 

come  dudu,  hule,  lae,  susuhi,  su'u  6. 
come  out  au  ta'a,  mau.  tau  ta'a.  usu  taha. 
command  ha'atolanga'ini,  usunge'ini. 
comtnon  ta'ewau,  tauteu. 
compact  sa'oha'ini. 

companion  dama,  maila-,  oa  2.,  pe'ile-. 
company     alidanga,     aUdangaha,     herahonu, 

puHtaa,  koruhe,  laeha. 
compassion  'amasi,  ha'i'amasi. 
compensate  hiri  2.,  toto  1. 
complain  uqe,  ngara  tahela'i. 
compete    ahu    1.,    mango    1.,    mangomango, 

mouqeli. 
conceal  mumuni. 
conceive  'aehota,  lodo. 
concerned  poi  2.,  po'ote'e. 
concerning  ana,  haahi,  ra'arangana. 
conch  'ahuri. 
condition  tolaha. 
condemn  'i'i  1.,  lei. 
conduct    v.,   ha'apulonga'ini,    na'o,   tole,   'ure- 

nga'ini;  n.,  tolaha. 
confess  ha'ahou,  unu  tahanga'ini. 
confident  sae  moute'i,  sae  susu. 
confirm  ha'asusu,  ha'ato'o,  rape'i. 
cmifused  lole,  pu'o,  qa'ulunge'i,  wasawasa'a. 
consent  'alama'ini,  mwa'emwa'e. 
conspicuous  langa'a,  langalanga'a. 
constantly  'oni'oni,  tarau,  taraure'i. 
consult  mani  wala,  qa'u  ni  wala. 
contend  ha'itohe,  ha'ipani'i,  haukama. 
continue   konito'o,    susu   4.,    suusuu,    taraasi, 

tarao,  tarau,  tarauhe'ini. 
contort  huhu  laolao  ana  wa'i. 
contract  rarasi,  ruusi. 
contradict  ere  ha'itohe. 
contribute  tete,  wiH. 

convey  ha'apulonga'ini,  tola,  'urenga'ini. 
cook  ha'ali'e,  ha'aopo,  hahi,  koo,  sule,  susungi; 

su'isungi,  uunu. 
cooked  mali'a,  madoo. 
cool  wa'arara,  wa'arau'a. 


121 


DIFFER 


copy  ha'amaani,  M'imaani,  ha'amala,  maani, 

malamala  3. 
coral  hau  haa,  kSu  2. 
cord  'ali  3..  i'eli,  walo. 
core  nini,  uto. 
cork  qaito. 

corner  suraa'l,  suusuu. 
corpse  lalamoa,  qa'u  'apula,  rae. 
correct  ha'aodo,  odo. 
cough  hu'u  5. 
counsel  loo'inge. 
count  idu  1. 
country  hanue. 

courtyard  'amaa,  lolata,  mara  nume. 
covenant     n.,    ha'alunge,    ha'iholota'lnge;    v., 

ha'alu. 
cover  v.,  aluhi,  mwana  1.,  ponosi,  qaoha'i;  n., 

maa,  ponopono. 
covet  sae  hanali,  sae  to'oa'i  ola. 
covetous  malalahu'e. 
cower  'aqa  1. 
coury  puli  1.,  puli  'ehi'e. 
crab  ao  2.,  'ahe  3.,  kuka,  qS'i  ao,  'u'e  6. 
crack  kokohu,  makulu,  ngaangaa  2.,  qa'a  1., 

qa'arakau,  ualapoa. 
cracked  lo'a  3.,  qa'a,  wa'ahite. 
crackle  watamea,  sii. 
crafty  raomaenga. 

cram  poe  3.,  susu  harehare,  to'oni  2. 
crash  makulu,  ngara  loulou. 
crawfish  ore  ni  'esi,  ura. 
crawl  'ango  1.,  lidu. 
creak  awaleo,  ngangadi. 
crease  hirori  1. 
create  ha'ahola. 
creep  ango,  huto  2. 
creeper  walo. 
cripple  lilidu,  to'u  3. 
crocodile  huasa. 

crook  ikeu,  mudi  2.,  tangatanga. 
crooked  mwa'elu,  mwahi,  mwaketo. 
crop  v.,  'ini  5. 
cross  v.,  holosi,  la'oni,  la'ongi,  likisi,  tapaliu, 

ulu   holo;   adv.,   ha'aholo;   n.,   ailipo'u, 

po'upo'u. 
crotch  tanga. 
croton  alaala. 

crouch  adaoro,  'iihihi,  'aqa  1.,  hlhi. 
crow  kokorako,  tatarao. 
crowd  ha'apuli,  ruungi,  takuruhi;  n.,  honulaa, 

mwala,  pulitaa. 
crown  halaitana,  ho'odara,  rorodara,  'ure'urena. 
crumb  ahuhu'e,  nganga,  urate. 
crush  hite  menasi,  pili. 

crushed  malelede,   mamenamena,  ma'o'i'o'i. 
cry  arai,  awara,  kakau,  ngara,  ulo. 
cuckoo  tarasioko. 
cull  hu'usi,  'ini. 
cup  kaokao. 
cupboard  duru. 
cure  kure  1. 
curl  ali,  lolosi. 

curse  ere  ha'ihonoa'i,  hadi.  isi,  uwesi. 
curve  repa. 
cuscus  huto  1. 
cut  aha  2.,  hoa  1.,  huri,  kala,  kohu  2.,  lisi,  nisi, 

topa,  tori  1. 


cuttlefish  monaki. 

daily  suli  haudinga,  suli  he'idinge. 

dam  n.,  koho;  v.,  ponosi. 

damage  mala  masi,  wa'eli,  ware. 

damp  makina'a,  qesa'a,  qini'a,  waoni'a. 

dance  mao  1. 

danger  maelaa,  siohaa'i  maelaa. 

dare  adoma'i  mousi,  ne'isae  moute'i. 

dark     rodo,    rodohono;     rodoha'i,     rodoraa'i, 

rorodo'a. 
darken  ha'arodo. 
darkish  marawa,  maramarawa'a. 
dash  papata'ini,  pola. 
daub  mole,  'usuri. 

daughter  'elekeni,  kele  keni,  pule,  teitei. 
daughter-in-law  hungao-,  keni. 
dawn  ha'ihora'i,  mahu'ohu'o,  wa'ali'e. 
day  atowa,  diini,  diingi,  ha'idinge,  haudinga. 
daybreak  maravvani  deni,  mahu'ohu'o,  wa'ali'e. 
dazzle  marare'a. 
dead  mae. 
deaf  pungu. 

deal  hohoro,  holi;  'alali,  ha'aado,  ni'ini'i,  wate. 
dear  diena,  maa'i  2.,  madu. 
dearth  hi'olonga,  talenga. 
death  maenga,  maeta. 
debt  roro'a,  roro'anga. 
decay  kasu,  osa. 

deceit  eronga,  kaenga,  raomaenga. 
deceive  ero,  kae,  lopo'i,  qali. 
deck  ma'emahe;  n.,  mwanamwana. 
declare  ha'ahou,  ha'ata'ini,  hou  4.,  'unu  1. 
decorate  ha'alauni,  launi,  murau. 
decoy  ha'atanauhi,  ha'amamu. 
deep  asa,  dodo,  kokoro,  lade  mae. 
defecate  he'a  1. 
defend  ere  talihe,  lau  haahi,  para'ite-,  talohi, 

'ure  aliu'i,  'ura  parasi. 
deficient  ore  1.,  tale. 

defile  ha'awa'a,  lo'u  3.,  louhanga'a,  maha. 
defy  parangasi,  haukama. 
degrees  duuduu,  raqaraqa'a. 
delay  ha'ahiru,    ha'awali,    hirusi,    'oniteu;    n., 

hirunga'a. 
delirious  'oe'oe. 

deliver  ha'i'a'auhi,  ha'iteuhi,  luhelolo. 
dense  pono,  rerepono. 
deny  ere  talihe,   taate'inge'ini,   ulapo,   wala'a 

odoodo. 
descend  siho,  sihola'i,  siho  toli. 
descendant  wauwe. 
desert  n.,  hanue  sala,  hanua  sasala,  maana'o, 

na'onga;  v.,  pola  mwaani,  tahi. 
desire  ha'ihuni,  harihuni. 
desist  noto,  rohu,  toli  6.,  toliaa. 
desolate  i'o  ni  leu  qala,  maana'o,  na'onga,  sala 

4.,  si'ohaa,  waa  1. 
despise  adairi,  hii'aela,  mama'ila'a,  mama'ingi, 

mwaka  1. 
destroy  duuhe'ini,  ngoli,  suuhe'ini,  ware. 
detach  sikile'ini. 
device  loo'inge,  loona'inge. 
dew  ara  1.,  waoni'a. 
diarrhea  tao. 
die  ai  suu,  mae,  suu  1 . 
differ  aopa. 


DIFFICULT 


122 


diffirCidt  asa. 

diffident  marara. 

dig  ahure,  'eli,  'elihe'i. 

diligent  ha'airara,  mwa'emwa'e,  rara  1. 

dim  wahawaha'a,  wasawasa'a. 

diminish  kumwe,  lueli,  luengi. 

din  'e'engo,  kotaa,  rongo  'aela. 

dip  ha'adodo,   loloma'ini,  suu   1.,   toongi;  «., 

aliholo,  ririholo. 
dirt  'ano,  mwado,  mwakana,  mwakano,  qiqi. 
dirty  mada'a,   mwadola,   mwakano'a,   qiqi'e. 
dish  nima,  nime. 

disobey  alalu,  ha'itohe,  lalawa,  siire'i. 
disorderly  mvva'uu,  teroliu. 
dispositio7i  manata.  manatanga. 
dispute  ha'aere,  haore,  ha'isuru,  waiteu,  wala- 

hali,  wauwau. 
distant  'aho'a,  ha'atau.  j 

distinct  maopaopa. 
distinguish  haha'iteli,   hahiteli,   ileli,   Ho  saai, 

opa. 
distress  ha'aletehinga,  motaahinge,  si'ohaanga; 

v.,  motaahi,  kotaahi,  hasi  kokosi. 
distribute  ha'aado.  ha'aohusi,  ni'i,  wate. 
disturb    hurosi,    ikule'i,    iolaha,    sasae;    adj., 

mahuro. 
dive  suu  1. 

diverge  aliu,  'e'eli,  liu  aopa. 
divide  hiteli,  opa,  nisi. 
divine   dau   dunge.    dunga   ni   hau,    hahuto'o, 

ilala. 
dizzy  ta'iere. 

do  arikosi,  da,  dau.  hele,  palo,  qao,  ta,  tau. 
docile  manata,  rako. 
dodge  talohi. 
dog  'usu  9. 
door  hohono,  maa. 
dot  pulu  maai  seu. 
double  lo'u  4.,  kalitei'a,  saoha'ini. 
doubt  adoma'i  ruarua'a,  ne'isae  ruerua'a,  sae 

rucrua'a. 
dove  heheoku,  hiroiku,  taqaruru. 
down  hao,  hou,  i'ano,  qa'i  'ano,  siho. 
down  n.,  ta'atakai  rate. 
drag  oke,  panile'ini,  wa'i. 
dragon-fly  ta'atara  wai. 
draw  oke;  kere;  taluhi. 
dread  niniko'a. 

dream  ma'ahu  pole,  ma'ahu  qole. 
dregs  hero,  pali  kao. 
drift  hatara,  kosola'ini,  tara. 
drill  halo;  n.,  halo,  idu  3. 
drink  ilu,  inu. 
drip    ha'auduhi,    mudimudi    'ura,    mwimwidi 

'ure,  'udu;  n.,  'udu'uduhe. 
drive  pani,  panitora,  pee. 
drizzle  nemo  ra'arara. 
droop  ahuhu,  mara'i  heutaa,  tengotengo. 
drop  domu,  ha'ausuli  1.,  teke,  tete,  toll,  toli 

sesu,  'usu  11. 
dropsy  pule,  pura. 
drought  'iro  ni  sato. 
drown  ha'adodo,  ha'a'o'oni,  ha'ainuhi,  ha'ato- 

nohi. 
drowsy  mamauru'e. 

drum  'o'o  2.,  para  ni  'o'o,  ri'i,  taha  'o'o,  toli  9.; 
v.,  'iki  2. 


drumstick  kokoi  sa'o. 

dry  adj.,   'a'ate,   'ate'ate,   raiigo,   rara  2.;   t'.^ 

ha'alanga;  ha'amaa,  ha'araa,  rarasi. 
duck  n.,  aranga. 
duck  v.,  ha'adodo,  qa'uto'u. 
dull  kumu,  rorodo'a. 
dumb  'amumu,  panguu,  qe'u  ereere. 
dun  'a'ada'ini. 
dung  'ae,  oraora  2. 

duration  di,  ha'awali,  qani,  wa'ite;  n.,  maholo. 
dusk  saulehi  melumelu. 
dust    mwakano    loho,    mwamwatekola,    'u'u- 

mwado,  wahawaha  ni  mwado. 
dusty  v.,  ahuora. 
dwarf  didi  1.,  ki'iki'i  ni  'inoni,  masi  3.,  ride  ni 

'inoni. 
dwell  naku,  i'o,  i'o  ni  deunge,  'o'o  3. 
dwindle  kumwe. 
dye  'atoni,  to'ongi. 
dysentry  'apu. 

each  ta'ena,  ta'ana,  iteitana. 

eagle  hada. 

ear  'alinge. 

ear  ornament  au  susu,  eho,  wouwou. 

early  ha'ahu'o,  mahu'ohu'o 

earnest  n.,  ha'a  i  mwe'i;  ha'irara. 

earth  'ano,  mwado,  mwakana,  mwakano. 

earthquake  nunu  1. 

east  i  matawa,  i  qa'alana  sato,  ta'au,  ta'e. 

easy  mwadau. 

eat  'amadi,  ngaa,  ngangau,  ngau,  oka. 

eaves  pipisi,  riridi. 

ebb  kumwe,  mai  2. 

echo  qa' alinge. 

eddy  'ahe  hiru,  ali  lo'a. 

edge  api,  keke,  maa  4.,  rau  2.,  wairona. 

eel  hauho. 

egg  apota,  hoi  kue,  hoi  menu,  mwaopu,  saolu. 

eject  'asi  3.,  dere,  'u'ile'ini. 

elastic    mwaeroero,    mwaohe;    n.,   walo   lala'i, 

walo  dududu. 
elbow  suusuu  1. 

eloquent  ere  taha'iraa,  saai  ere. 
elsewhere  ana  nga'eta  le'u,  ana  ngaite  lehu. 
embark  ni'i  'ae,  ta'e  4.,  ta'eli  'iola. 
ember  lo'ilohi. 
embrace  ako'i,  'apala  4. 
emerge  au  ta'a. 

empty  oreorei  ola,  qala,  waawaa,  wawae. 
enable  nanama'ini,  sakaahi. 
enclose  dau  keli,  hono  sisinge'i,  para  ahu'i,  tau 

kali. 
encounter  dau  to'o,  ha'iodo'i,  ha'isu'esu'e,  soda. 
encourage     ha'aape     sae,     ha'amauta'a     sae, 

ha'asusu   sae. 
end  ha'amangolana,  ngoongoo,  to'o  moutana; 

v.,  ha'amango,  nisi,  talimaa;  ha'a'uresi. 
endeavor  dau  ni,  hala  ni,  tau  muni. 
endure  i'o  susu,  i'o  susule'i,  toli  sesu. 
enemy  maeloonga,  'apani  mae. 
energy  v.,  ha'irara,  hele  winiwini;  n.,  sakanga. 
engaged  hiru. 
enlighten  ha'amataqali,  ha'amataqasi,  raangi. 

sineli. 
enlightenment  mataqanga  ni  sae. 
enough  adona,  ha'idadanga,  hunge,  sada. 


123 


FIT 


enquire  dolosi,  soi,  soi  heri. 

entangled  'aiwalo'a,  ta'ipupu'e;  v.,  hikusi.  tiiri 

2.,  to'oha'i  qe'u. 
enter  sili. 
entice       ha'amamu,      ha'ariro,       ha'atanauhi, 

mamu. 
entire  ha'ileku,  laku.  mangomango,  pupupu. 
entrails  'oqa. 

entreat  aitana'i,  tolaa'i,  tola  suu'i. 
envelope  v.,   ahu'i,   ulo;   n.,   hulehule,     uloulo- 

'itana. 
envy  Ho  i  kekeni  maa,   lio  i  ngaei  maa,   sae 

unuhi. 
equal  n.,  dama;  adv.,  ha'idadanga,  sada. 
err  aopa,  'e'eli,  pele,  takalo. 
error  dau  pelenga,  takaloha. 
establish  ha'a'ure'si. 
eternal  huu  2.,  'oto  di. 
even  ha'idadanga,  sada;  noone. 
evening  siiulehi. 

ever  huu  2.,  'oni'oni,  'oto  di,  'oto  'o'o. 
every  ahuta-,  ta'ana,  ta'ena. 
everything   ahutana   mu   ola,    ta'ana  nga   ola, 

ta'ena  nga  ola,  walumolani  ola,  walu- 

tana  nga  ola. 
everywhere  iihusie  mu  le'u. 
evil  'aela,  da'ita'a,  tata'ala. 
exact  odohana,  odohaana. 
exalt  tahela'ini,  toro  2. 
example  'ae,  peapea,  tolaha. 
exceedingly}  aopa,  hi'ito'o,  liu,  liuta'a,  oraha'a, 
f     1.,  to'oliu,  wa'ewa'e,  walawala, 
excessive     Jwa'u,  hunge. 
exchange  hii'ilu'u,  'olisi. 
excite  'akolu,  ikule'i,  iolaha,  ta'ela'i,  tatanga- 

lungalu. 
excrement  'ae,  huui  'ae. 
excuse  ha'a'inoni,  lopo'i  ere,  lopo'i  kae,  lopo'i 

wala'a. 
exhort  ha'itorangi,  torangi. 
expect  totori,  maa  toto,  ma'ohi. 
expire  mango  suu,  toli'asi  mango. 
explain    hatonga'ini,    lado  diena,    'unu    taha- 

nga'ini. 
extend  ahusi,  lala'ini. 
exult  manawa,  tahola'i  mata. 
eye  maa;  v.,  ha'akale,  ha'amaesi  2. 
eyelid  hinuhinui  maa,  hiruhiru  ana  maa. 
eyebrow  maranga  i  maa. 

face  maa,  na'o;  v.,  na'o,  saro. 

fade  ahuhu. 

faggot  iho'oi  dango,  iho'oi  'ei. 

fail  huutala.  pele,  mwamwasu'i,  tala,  tototala. 

faint  mango  toli,  olo  ana  hi'olo,  ta'iere. 

fair  eke,  erete'a,  sasangota'a;  odo. 

faith  hiiwala'imolinge. 

fall  'aihu,   'auru,  anguru,  domu,  lada,  mara- 

pute'i,    rapute'i,     teke,     toli,   'usu  11., 

wa'uru. 
false  ero,   ha'akae,   ha'amenamena,   kae,   rao- 

maenga. 
falsehood  eronga,  kaenga. 
fame  houla-,  taloha,  taroha. 
family  komu. 

famine  hi'olonga,  talenga,  talengaha. 
famish  mae  su'esu'ela'i. 


famous  hou  keli,  hou  lilikeli,  manikulu'e. 
fan  n.,  tetere;  v.,  terehi. 
far  'aho'a,  ha'atau. 

fast    liiuleu,    lauleu'a,    nanamu.    tatawisiwisi; 
miiuta'a,   papau,   pa'ipesi,   pasipasi;  v., 
ha'ahili,    ma'ahu    mala    'iola,    ma'ahu 
(lalawala,  olo  ngau,  toli  ola,  toli  ngeulaa. 
fat  mangoni,  mwomwona,  qi'e;  n.,  rakuhe. 
father  'ama-,  ma'a,  mama'a. 
fathom  tahanga. 
fatigue  rahe,  we'o. 
fault  diiu  wala,  roro'a. 

favor  lio  maai,   lio  nanama'ini,  lio  sac  to'o. 
favorite     kale    madu,     mwane    diena,    mwane 

maa'i. 
fear  maa'u,  ma'u,  ma'u  ra'aranga. 
feast  houlaa,  ngauhe,  tauhe. 
feather  ihu.  waraihu. 

feeble  mamaela'a,  peto,  qeto,  qake  mware'a. 
feed  ha'angau,  ni'i,  sangoni. 
feel  hii. 

feign  lopo'i  deu,  lopo'i  teu. 
fellow  dama,  oa  2. 
female  keni,  qaqa  2. 
fence  liliheu,  para,  sasa,  suluheu,  tete  6.,  v., 

para,  sese,  sio  tete. 
ferment  hane  3. 

fern  dimwe,  laqa,  sunge  luuluu. 
fester  oropa,  osa. 
festoon  'ama'ama,  mahe,  waki. 
fetch  lae  'ohi,  'ohi  1.,  tola,  tole. 
fever    daohanga    madoro,    maenga    mamadali, 

madoronga,  mata'i,  wanga. 
few  mwamwanga,  mwanganga. 
fiber  mwarite,  saisemu,  siimu,  su'e,  walo. 
fierce  mama'ingi,  mamakola,  melaha. 
fight  ha'ihoro'i,  ha'iseuni,  oho,  wa'i  oda'i. 
figure  sape. 
fill  dede'i,  ha'ahonu. 
film  ahoaho. 
filth  mada'anga. 
fin  nangananga. 
final  ha'amangolana. 
find  odo'i,  ha'aro'i,  soohi. 
fine  hiritaa;  sato. 

finger  ki'iki'i,  ri'iri'i;  1st,  'ini  hite;  2nd,  'usu 
henue;  3rd,  qii'u  teroliu;  4th,  au  rarahi; 
5th,  kau  lomolomo. 
finish  ha'amango,  mango  1. 
fire  dunge;  hana  2. 
firebrand  potoi,  usu  'ei. 
firefly  pulupulu. 
firewood  'ai,  dango. 

firm    halahala,    mauta'a.    nga'ingedi,    papau, 
sulahita,     susu     4.;     v..     ha'amauta'a, 
ha'asusu  1. 
first  'etana,  hola'i,  holai  na'o;  v.,  ha'ana'ola'ini, 

na'ola'ini. 
first  born  hola'i  hute,  na'ohai  kale,  na'ohana  kale. 
first  fruit  ha'ana'o,  horahora'apu'i. 
first  time  aani,  hola'i,  si  2. 
fish  i'e  2.;  v.,  'aholo,   'a'o,  dciro  2.,  hunu  3., 
kalu,  lilie'i,  lou  2.,  ma'ae,  moke,  samu, 
toli  2.,  wa'o,  weesi. 
fist  lokunaa  nime. 

fit  adj.,  ha'idadanga,  hatonga,    mSlisi,   sada; 
r.,  daraha'ini,  sa'oha'ini. 


FLAKE 


124 


fiake  sikite;  r.,  didi.  wili. 

flame   esohaana   dunge,    meameahana   dunge. 

inelahai  dunge;  v.,  eso,  mea  2.,  ora  3., 

talau. 
flank  parapara,  rahoraho. 
flap  hideli,  lopalopa. 
flare  eso,  sii  2. 
flash  nangali'a,  nangariro'a. 
flat  dadada'a,   hu'idada;   ape  dao,   ape  sada; 

sada. 
flatten  ha'adada,  ha'asada,  penasi,  taalengasi. 
flatter  apu'i,  ha'arako. 
flay  simwe. 
flea  pote  3. 
flee  tahi. 

flesh  hasi'o,  hinesu,  ta'itesi. 
fleshy  hasi'ola. 
flick  kopi. 

flinch  marara,  niniko'a. 
fling  'asi  3..  dere,  'u'i 
float  manu  2.;  n.,  u'o. 

fl^ck  'alaa,  haka  4.,  koruhe,  korutaa,  pulitaa. 
flog  daro,  rapusi. 
flood  kone,  luelue. 
flotsam  mataraha,  ramarama. 
flx)w  'ahe   1.,   kone,   lue  2.,  oraa,  ramarama, 

tahe  3. 
flower  taka  1. 
fluid  rumu,  sulu  5.,  wai  1. 
flutter  loho,  tere  'apa'apa.  tete  'apa'apa. 
fly  n.,  lango,  lango  ni  rae. 
fly  v.,  loho. 
foam  hutohuto. 
fold  lulungi,  nukumi. 
follow  'ahe  isuli,  lulu  isuli,  sulu  isuli,  susuli, 

'usuli,  totola  i  'ae. 
food  ngauha,  ngaulaa. 
fool  herohero,  karu  oe,  papaku'a,  qe'u  1. 
foot  'a'ae,  'ae,  peapea. 
foothold  'uriurite. 
footprint  'a'ae,  peapea. 
forbid  ere  1.,  ere  luu'i,  ha'a'apu,  hadi. 
forefather  wauwe-. 
forefinger  'usu  henue. 
forehead  dara,  na'ona  dara. 
foreign  haka  3.,  matawa. 
forerun  hurulaa,  na'ona'o. 
forest  ma'usu,  me'esu,  mou  2. 
forget  pulongo,  sae  rorodo. 
forgive  ne'isae  'asi,  sae  'asi. 
fork  matanga,  tangatanga. 
form  lioha-,  liota-,  sape. 
former  holai  na'o. 
formerly  hola'i,  i  na'o,  'etc  di,  'oto  qani,  'oto 

waite,  waite. 
fornication  'ae'aeniolanga,  tarie'i  ni  wala. 
forsake  lae  mwaani,  tahi  mwaani,  toli'asi. 
forth  kei  ana,  ta'a  4.,  taha  1.,  'ure  ana. 
fortieth  haine  nga  awala. 
forty  hai  awala  ha'ahuu. 
forward  ada  wau,  ata  wau,  odo,  paro,  ta'au, 

taraasi,  tarao,  taraure'i. 
foster  sangoni. 

foundation,  poopoota,  qooqoota. 
fount  hulaa,  hulahula,  huuna  wai. 
four  hai  1., 
fourth  haine. 
fowl  kue. 


fragment  ahuhu'ei  ola,   ngangai  ola,  mjiapou, 

maholo. 
free     i'o     tohu,     mamaware,     sapemawa;     v., 

luhelolo,    luhesi,    toli'asi. 
freely  mola'a,  ni'i  suu,  ni'i  toto. 
freight  ludaa,  ludanga. 
frequent  ha'ahunga'a,  ha'ahunge,  hungehunga'a, 

purupuru'a'a,  rarapuupuu. 
fresh  ha'alu,  ha'olu. 
friend  ha'imalahu-,  malahu-. 
frighten  ha'amalu,  ha'amamakina,  ha'ama'usi. 
fringe  rawirimwiri,  ngoongoo. 
from  i  1.,  kei  2.,  mai  1.,  mwaani,  'ure. 
frond  akeake. 
front  maa,  na'o. 
froth  hutohuto. 
frown  'ala  ngingita. 
fruit  hoi   1.,  huani  'ei,  hue,  huehuei  dango; 

v.,  hungu. 
fuel  'ai,  dango. 
full-grown  rato,  repo. 
fungus  'alinge  2. 
furl  lulungi. 
further  adv.,  tarao,  taraasi,  taraure'i. 

gain  tari  1. 

gall  loka,  pulu  2. 

gapped  makere,  pilomo. 

gape  awanganga,  kakahite. 

garden  hohola,  lalo  4.,  qainaa,  qa'u  4.,  kalona. 

gargle  koukou  2. 

garland  mahe. 

gasp  ilele  malo,  mango  asa,  poepoe. 

gate  maai  para. 

gather  ahelidu,  loko,  ruru,  s'io  1. 

gaze  aonga'i,  lio  hahuroto,  maakahi,  to'oma'i. 

gentle  mahuru,  malumu,  rako. 

gently  anene. 

ghost  'akalo,  esi,  urelii. 

giddy  ta'iere. 

gift  ni'inge. 

gills  langasi-. 

ginger  aro  1.,  lie. 

gird  ho'o,  roro'i. 

girdle  lokoqaio,  roro  to'oni. 

girl  'ele  keni,  kele  keni,  keni,  pule. 

give  da,  ni'i,  ta,  toli'asi. 

glad  ilenimwa'e,  sae  diena,  sae  diana,  sae  rike, 

sae  ruke. 
glance  tasi. 
glide  nanamu. 

glisten  huhurere'a,  marare'a,  nuenuala. 
globe  hoi  1. 
glorious  manikulu'e. 
glory  manikulu'anga. 
glue  pulu  3.,  totonga  1. 
glutinous  toto'ala,  totonga'ala. 
gnaw  kolu  4.,  ngero'i. 
gnash  ngangadi,  rete  hau. 
go  ha'iteu,  la,  lae,  lau'ae,  tau'ae. 
go-between  ha'a'ureruru,  talama'i  wala. 
good  diana,  diena. 
gourd  hena,  hena  hoto,  sahu. 
graft  lado. 

grandchild  qa'aqa,  wauwe. 
grant  lua,  ni'i,  toli'asi. 
grasp  hele,  tapo,  toki. 


125 


HUMP-BACKED 


grass  hahalisi,  halisi. 

grasshopper  oru. 

grater  'usu  kara. 

gratis  mola'a,  mwakule,  qalaqala. 

grave  v.,  didi;  n.,  kalinge,  kilu,  kiliqe'u,  pa'u  3; 

adj.,  macnoto. 
gray  erete'a,  palapala. 
gray  hair  qa'u  palapala. 
grease  rakuhe.  rumu. 
greasy  madali,  rumu'e,  rumula. 
great  piiine,  paipeina'a,  paipeilesu'a,  raka. 
green     arawa,     araarawa'a,     kohu;     marawa, 

maramarawa'a. 
grief  sae  huunge. 
grin  sisi  niho. 
grip  puuhara,  rodi,  toki. 
groan  awasirahe,  la'alapa,  ngunguru. 
groin  tanga. 
grope  kakalo. 
grove  huu  1.,  lolo'a  ni  'ei. 
ground  'ano,  hanue,  mwado,  mwakano. 
grow  piiine,  pasu,  pito,  po'e  6.,  qito. 
growl  ngora  i  lue. 

grudge  sae  haahi,  saeni,  sae  unuhi. 
grumble  papangurungiiru,  uqe. 
grunt  ngongora. 
guard  kakali,  noko  1.,  rara  1. 
guest  awata'a. 
guide  na'ohi. 
gullet  konokono. 
gully  da'ideri'e. 
gum  hale  2.;  pulu  3.,  saie. 
gulp  'ono  pola. 
gush  hure'i,  pusu. 

habit  ha'anina,  nanoa'i,  manata  2. 

hades  hiinue  ni  'akalo;  Malapa.  'Olu  Malau, 

hair  ihu,  uhu,  waraihu. 

hairy  hulumota'a,  poso. 

half  'apa  1.,  'apolo,  po'o  4.,  ratawaari,  teu. 

ham  'apahee. 

hammer  tee  1. 

hand  nima,  nime. 

handful  rSu  4. 

handiwork  talana  nime,  usuusuana  nime. 

handle  kakata,  ki'iki'i;  v.,  helesi. 

handsome  hinoli'a,  kohi. 

hang  'aroro,  ha'akuku,  kuku  1.,  li'o  2..  repo  3., 

to'i,  'u'u  1. 
hanker  sae  hanali. 
happen  taqaosi,  tole,  to'o. 
happy  dahi  4.,  sae  rike,  sae  ruke. 
harass  ha'aahala'ini,  kotaahi,  sae  ahala'i. 
harbor  su'u  5.,  lade  2.,  namo. 
hard   hasipe'ule,    mauta'a,   nga'ingedi,    ngSsi, 

papau. 
hardly  asa,  asaasa'a. 
harm   dau   hu'isi,   ha'atata'alasi,   mala   masi, 

raroni,  si'o  hu'isi. 
harmless  manata,  maneko,  nanakumae. 
haste  ha'iteu,  lau'ae.  koke,  kokela'ini,  rorahi, 

rorora,  tau'ae. 
hat  para'imaa. 
hatchet  hau  2..  'lie  4..  masi  ngedi,  ngSdi,  nini 

ngcdi,  hama. 
hate  lio  qcru  ngidu,  ngidu  'upu,  ngora  'upu,  sae 

tata'ala. 


have  akauri,  akaurisi,  manata'ini,  to'o  2. 

hawk  arakau,  kiito,  qaohi,  tehe,  wakio. 

haze  laho'a,  waha. 

he  inge'ie,  nge'ie,  nge'i,  nge,  e. 

head  qa'u,  rarata. 

headlong  ladama'i,  marapute'i,  tataqeluqelu. 

heal  ha'auri,  mola  1.,  susu  4.,  to'o  2. 

heap  koru;  n.,  koruha,  korute. 

hear  rongo,  kawa'i. 

hearken  qa'arongo. 

heart  opu  2.,  sae. 

heat  madoronga. 

heaven  apai  lea  taa'u,  i  lengi,  maalau,  sale. 

heavy  hi'e. 

heedless  alunge'i. 

heel  huui  sata,  kolune  'ae,  poupou  ni  'ae'ae. 

heir  oliolite. 

help  lauhi,  maai  1.,  pe'i  2. 

helpless  i'o  ni  tec,  i'o  ni  leu  qala. 

helve  halo  3. 

hence  keikei  ilehu,  mwaani  ilehu,  'ure  ile'u. 

her  inge'ie,  nge'ie,  nge'i,  a  4. 

herd  haka  4.;  v.,  kakali. 

here  'ie  1.,  ilehu,  ile'u,  inihou. 

hesitate  'i'iloha,  marara. 

he^v  adu,  didi  2.,  diu  2.,  karu  4.,  tangi. 

hibiscus  leo,  reko,  tii'iteli. 

hiccough  ikule  2. 

hide  mumuni,  peinuhi;  n.,  te'ete'e. 

high  tetewa'a,  tewa,  uwola'ini. 

hill  hoiliwo,  houliwo,  toloi  henue,  tolona  hanue. 

hillock    hungehunga'a,    kokoho'a,    su'isungi'e, 

torokou'e. 
him  inge'ie,  nge'ie,  nge'i,  a  4. 
hinder  ape  hono,  ha'ahirusi,  hirusi. 
hinder  adj.,  i  puri. 
hinder  part  i  puri,  kolu-  2. 
hire  sahali. 

his  inge'ie,  ana,  'ana,  to'oto'olana. 
hit  dau  to'o,  horo,  kumu'i,  sauni,  to'o. 
hitch  maai  qaro;  v.,  qaro. 
hither  mai  1. 
hoarse  susu  4. 
hoary  palapala. 
hoist  hele  'ala'a,  ha'a'uresi,  sulu  la'a,  tahela'ini, 

wa'i  ilengi. 
hold  ako'i,  hele,  rao  2.,  tape 
hole   kiiUnge,    kilu,    kiliqe'u,    maa,   waawaata, 

poposane'a,  malamalau. 
hollo7u  karu'i,  waawaa;  n.,  da'ideri'e,  upe. 
holy  'apu,  kookoo,  maa'i.  maea,  ola  ni  mwane. 
hook  aroro.  hinou,  pasa,  te'i,  toohe'o,  tootoo  1. 
hop  tomwa. 

hope  ha'itotori,  susuto'o,  ma'ohi  susuto'o. 
hospitable  takuhi  'inoni,  tola  koni. 
hot  madoro,  raka,  sae  ni  pelupelu,  wana;  r., 
ha'adoro,  ha'amadoro,  ha'aopo,  mea  2. 
house  hale,  nima,  nume.  taoha.  toohi. 
household  'aeinume,  jiuhenue,  iiungani  nima. 
hover  arc  2.,  ha'adau. 
hcnti  e  'ue. 
how  many  nite. 
howl  ku  4.,  tea,  ulo. 
hug  ako  i  lue. 
hum  rou. 

huntble  masi  2.,  me'i;  i'o  ni  teo,  ra'u  8.,  raute'i. 
hump-backed  kosu. 


HUNDRED 


126 


hundred  'alo,  nao.  tangalau. 

hunger  hi'olonga,  mae  su'asu'ala'i. 

hunt  ha'awasi. 

hurry    ha'iteu,    koke,    rorahi,    rorora.    tau'ae, 

torangi. 
hurt  hi'ito'o,    salu   1.,    sauni,  wa'i  7.,  wa'eli, 

ware  1. 
husband  poro. 

husk  te'ete'e;  v.,  tasi  2..  uhu  2. 
hut  apaapa  2.,  hzile. 

/  ineu,  nou,  no,  ne;  inaii,  nau,  na,  ne. 

idle  akohe,  ka'alawa,  lalawa. 

if  ana  7.,  mune'i,  taume'i. 

ignorant  pu'o,  ulapo. 

ignore  rohute'ini. 

iguana  ihei  3.,  tatarisi. 

ill  daoha,  mae,  mamaela'a,  sape  'aela. 

illness  daohanga,  maelaa,  maenga. 

image  nunu  3. 

imitate  ha'amaani,  ha'imaani,  maani,  usuli. 

importune  'a'ada'ini,  dau  suu'i. 

impudent  raramaa. 

in  hai  2.,  i  1..  ilalona,  ila'ona,  la'ona,  wai  5. 

indistinctly  qa'ulunge'ini,  wasawasa'a. 

infect  sikihi. 

inferior  ta'ewau,  tauteu,  tale'i. 

inhabit  i'osi. 

inherit  hele  huu,  'oli. 

initiate  ha'amalaohu,  ha'ananau. 

injure  ha'atata'alasi,  mala  masi,  wa'eli.  ware. 

inland  i  henue,  ilengi,  ta'e  2..  ta'i  henue.  wai 

henue. 
inlay  toli  reoreo. 
inlet  'aqa'aqa. 
innocent  mwadalo. 
insect  manu  1. 

insert  dereha'ini,  deresi,  silihe'ini. 
inside  i  lalo;  hai  nume,  wai  nume. 
insipid  qaaqi'a. 
interchange  ha'ihe'i'oli. 
interrupt  ha'apona,  sio  honosi. 
interval  'apolo,  duuduu,  holoholo,  maholo. 
intervene  liu  bono,  talama'i  wala. 
intoxicated  mahiri. 
intricate  ta'ipupu'e. 
introduce  silihe'ini. 
involucre  uloulo'ite. 
involved  tatahiruhiru. 
inward  hoi  sae,  i  lalo,  i  sae,  paro  i  sae,  wai  lalo, 

wai  sae. 
iron  hjiu  2. 

irregular  holoholo,  talc  li'isi,  tangolili. 
irritate  'a'ada'ini,  ha'aahala'ini,  kotaahi. 
island  malau,  malau  mou. 
it  inge'ie,  e,  a  4. 
itch  aramu,  kakamu. 

jab  ladami,  totoro,  uhu'i. 
jagged  'alopi,  malopi. 
jaw  "aena  papali,  sasate. 
jealous  heota'ini,  rara  haahi. 
jeer  ku  3. 
jest  ha'aero,  koe. 
join  hataa'ini,  lado  1. 

joint  ladoha;  out  of  joint  'iidiu,  'iihisu,  duuna, 
hisuhisu,  li'i  2. 


joke  ha'aero,  koe. 

journey  aratoto,  'atx)  1..  lai  henue;  n.,  laeha, 

laenga. 
joy  ilenimwa'e,  rikanga,  rukenga.  sae  diananga. 

judge  'i'i,  leilei. 

juice  sulu,  totonga  1. 

jump  pola,  reke. 

just  ado,  odo,  odota'i;  adv.,  aani,  'ele,  kele,  si  1. 

keep  keneta'ini,  kineta'ini,  koni. 

kernel  nini. 

kick  koma. 

kidney  hoi  dango,  hou  'ei,  huesi  dango. 

kill  ha'amaesi  1.,  horo,  sauni. 

kind  sae  diana,  manata;  tolaha. 

kindred  takihe-. 

kinked  hirori. 

kiss  none,  nono'i. 

kite  sa'o  ni  'aholo. 

knee  'uru'uru. 

kneel  po'uru'uru,  qo'uru'uru. 

knife  nahi,  naihi. 

knob  qaqasu,  uhi  2. 

knock  hide,  'iki,  papa. 

knot  qaqasu,  qa'uroro;  v.,  qaro. 

know  manata'ini,  saai.  sae,  saumaatana. 

ladder  huruhuru. 

lagoon  haho  2.,  lama,  namo. 

lame  to'u. 

land  n.,  hanue;  v.,  sulu. 

landing-place  maalitawa,  suluha. 

landslip  ma'o'i,  rerede. 

large  loa  1.,  paine.  paipeilesu'a.  raka. 

lash  qaro,  qasu,  rapusi. 

last  alipuri,  ha'amangolana,  ha'ipuri,  oreta. 

late  ha'ahiru,  ha'ipuri. 

latrine  pusu  2. 

laugh  mwasi. 

Iau7ich  tari  3.,  oke  1.,  sulu  1. 

lay  ha'aqaha'ini,  koni,  no'i,  qela  2. 

layer  saoha'i,  saosaoha'i'a,  uku. 

law  ha'atolanga. 

lazy  akohe,  lalawa. 

lead  ha'alaelae,  mau  1..  na'ona'o. 

leaf  'apa'apa  1. 

leafy  lumwe. 

leak  huhu  1.,  tete  'uru'uru. 

lean  'akeu,  hatara.  nooru.  malingi.  malakeke, 
malakeu.  oroma'i.  orooro. 

leap  pola.  reke. 

leave  lae  mwaani.  toli'asi. 

lee  ra'irehi,  purine  hanue. 

left  maumeuli;  ore. 

leg  'a'ae,  'ae,  'ae'ae. 

lend  ni'i  ha'awali,  lihue'ini. 

lengthen  donga  2. 

lest  mwane  4. 

let  maai  1.,  toli'asi,  tolimaai,  toliaa. 

level  apedao,  apesada,  dadada'a.  ha'idada. 
ha'isada.  hu'idada.  manu  odo,  manu 
sad  a. 

lever  apo  3..  qii'i  1. 

lick  meali. 

lid  maa,  ponopono. 

lie  aqa  1.,  eno. 

lie  ero,  kae. 


127 


MOTH 


life  maurihe,  mauringe. 

lift   hele   langa'a,   sulu    1.,    tahela'ini,    totolo- 

nga'ini. 
light  n.,  dani,  dJingi;  v.,  ereha'ini,   ha'aakauni, 

koru  dunge,   tarauhe'ini;  adv.,   mwala- 

mwalaohe,       mwamwate,        mwamwa- 

kaula'a. 
lighten  sineli  1. 
lightning  nangali'a,  wa'ariri. 
like  ha'idadanga,  domana.  mala,  sada,  sadanga, 

urihana,  waruna. 
like  v.,  saeni,  sae  to'o. 

liken  alahuunge'ini,  alahuute'ini,  ha'amala. 
limb  sasara. 

limp  adj.,  akoako;  v.,  tomwa. 
line  ta'atala,  uku,  walo;  adi'o,  samu. 
linger  ha'ahiru,  no'iteu,  'oniteu. 
lintel  qa'une  maa. 
lip  ngidu,  ngora,  qeruqeru. 
liquid  sulu  5.,  wai  1.;  v.,  ewe;  adj.,  wSiwei'a'a. 
listen  qaarongo. 
listless  akohe,  ka'alawa,  mode. 
Ultle  haora,  mwaimwei. 
live  mauri;  i'o,  naku,  'o'o. 
liver  sae. 
living  'amauri-. 

load  n.,  ludaa,  ludanga;  v.,  lude. 
loathe  lalawasi,  sare'ini. 
locust  mapo  1. 
lodge  sulaapoe,  tari  2. 
lofty  langilengi'e,  tetewa'a,  tewatewa. 
log  hai  datigo,  hai  pou,  hau  3.,  pou  ni  'ei. 
loin  karokaro.  parapara,  rahoraho. 
lone  maraa-,  qaqaitengili. 
long  tewa. 
look    aonga'i,    ha'iade'i,    'iro,    lio    1.,     loosi, 

to'oma'i. 
loom  wakala'i. 
loop  maai  qaro;  v.,  qaro. 
loose  alo'i,  iinuenu,  amwada,  angire'i,  asuesu, 

asuoloolo,     kulekule,    luheta'i,    ponga- 

ponga;  v.,  luhesi,  siki,  toli'asi. 
lop  luhusi. 

lopsided  'akeu,  malakeke,  malakeu. 
lose  'ai'aa,  ha'atakalo,    takalo,    tale,    tekela'i, 

talahi. 
lot  hahuto'o,  ilala. 
loud  'i'ile'i,  pSine. 
louse  pote  3. 

love  manata  diana,  sae  paina. 
low  lai  'ano,  wai  'ano. 
lower  v.,  ha'asiholi,  ha'a'uku,  oohosi;    i  'ano. 

i  haha,  i  orohana. 
lump  'u'u  2.,  onanala. 
lungs  sae  ngisu. 

mad  herohero,  'oe'oe,  qe'u  1. 

madrepore  hau  haa,  kau  2. 

maggot  mwaamwaa. 

maiden  'ini'inlqaa,  raori'i. 

mainland  hiinue  huu. 

maimed  ko'u  2.,  to'u  3. 

maintain  susule'ini,  toli  susule'i. 

make  da,  dau  1.,  qao.  ta,  tau  1. 

male  mwane  1. 

malice  maapala,  sae'aela,  sae  ngora'upu. 

man  'inoni,  mwane  1. 


manifest  ha'ata'ini,  te'inge'ini. 

manner  tolaha-. 

many  ha'a  4.,  nite,  ta'e  5.,  to'o  6. 

mark  ha'ara,  hahuilala,  tolimaa. 

marriage  feast  aharota. 

marrow  lalawa  3. 

marry  tola  keni,  to'o  poro. 

marvel  ane;  n.,  anoa,  anoaraa. 

mash  ahuqa'i,  ha'apoe,  kara  5.;  v.,  sau  1. 

mast  hunu  2.,  wao. 

master  alaha,  aunge-;  v.,  pau  2. 

masticate  memela'ini,  mwadamwadamu,  sapoli. 

mat  ni'e.  qana,  rara;  v.,  ha'u  7. 

match  ha'idadanga,  sada;  maai  dunge. 

7nale  dama-,  oa  2. 

matter  aqalau;  holoholo  1.,  ola,  maholo. 

mature  mena,  qi'e,  repo. 

mawkish  qaaqi'a. 

me  inau,  ineu,  iiku  1.,  au. 

mealy  makahu. 

measure  tohotoho,  'uri  1. 

mediator  ha'a'ureruru,  talama'i  wala. 

medicine  wai  ni  maelaa. 

meddle  polahiroa. 

meek  mamaeko'a,  mwaadalo,  sae  mamae. 

meet  ha'iodo'i,  ha'isu'esu'e,  odo'i,  ruru. 

melt  'ahe  2.,  rakahi. 

member  sasara. 

mend  ponosi,  saumaa. 

merciful  'amasi,  ha'i'amasi. 

mere  hale'ite,  hah'ite,  ili  1.,  mola  4.,  mwakule. 

mesh  maa,  tau  2. 

messenger  ha'atola,  hurulaa. 

middle  danume,  'upu'upu  2. 

midrib  mudi;  wede  sa'o. 

midnight  rodohono  pupulu,  upui  rodo. 

midst  matola-. 

mildew  kauwa'a,  sahuru. 

mind  adoma'ini,  keneta'ini,  kineta'ini,  ne'isae; 

n.,  sae. 
mingle  aroqa'i,  qii'i,  roro  wjiaro. 
mirror  'iro'iro. 
mischief  lede  ola,  malamala. 
miserable  ha'a'amasi,  si'ohaa. 
mislead  ha'atakalo. 
miss  tala  4. 

missing  'ai'aa,  takalo,  tekela'i. 
mist  laho'a,  waha. 
mistake  djiu  pele,  pele,  takalo. 
ynix  aroqa'i,  qa'i. 
mixed  dodola. 
nioon  la'alapa. 
mock  ku  3. 
molest  taunge'ini. 
money  haa  1. 

month  moon,  waarowaaro. 
moonlight  sineli. 

moreover  ta'a  7.,  ta'e  6.,  ta'e  pe'ini. 
morning  dani,  diingi,  wa'ali'e. 
morrow  dani  ha'ahulee,  diingi  hoowa,  haudinga 

po'odanita'i,  i  deni,  i  dengi. 
morsel  ko'ukohu,  masi  2.,  me'i. 
mortar  hohoto,  pei  1.,  mota,  uli  'ei. 
mosquito  sime,  sume,  tahule. 
mossy  lumu,  lumu'e. 
mote  ngaangaa. 
moth  pepe. 


MOTHER 


128 


mother  nike,  teitei. 

mould  mwado,  mwakano;  sahuru,  kauwa'a. 

mountain  hoiliwo,  houliwo,  toloi  henue,  tolona 

hanue. 
mourn  ha'ahili,  tako,  toli  ngeulaa. 
mouth  dawa,  ngidu,  wawa. 
move  adaada,  ara,  arana,  dudu,  duu,  ha'itale  2., 

lae,  ngiili  2.,  nanamu,  su'u  6. 
much  hi'ito'o,  liuta'a,  paine,  wa'ewa'e,  wala- 

wala. 
mucus  qango  1..  uru  (usu)  qango. 
mud  lolongo,  mwado,  mvvakita'a,  qiqi. 
muddy  lolongo'a,  qiqi'e. 
multiply  ha'ahunge,  mwaera,  mwaora. 
multitude  mwala,  pulitaa,  ruruha. 
mumble  ngunguru. 
murder   horo    mwakule,    horo    ta'ewau,    tale'i 

horo. 
murmur  ha'itohe,  papangurunguru,  uqe. 
muscles  uleule. 

my  inau,  ineu,  aku  1.,  'aku  2.,  naku'e,  naku'i. 
mysterious  asa,  anoa,  anoaraa. 

nail  musi,  misi;  wa'arao. 

naked  mwakule,  qalaqala. 

name  sata;  a  ola;  v.,  ha'ara'ini,  haora'ini. 

namesake  malahu-. 

narrow  koko,  koko'ie'i,  kokohisi. 

nature  manata  2. 

nautilus  reoreo. 

navel  poo  2. 

neap  ta'i  'esi. 

near  duduhi,  du'u  mei,  kara'ini,  su'u  mei. 

neck  lue  1. 

needle  raapea,  suliteru. 

neglect  'aelulu,  akoheta'ini. 

neighbor  auhenue. 

nephew  uweli,  weli. 

nest  niui. 

net  'ape  2.,  hu'o,  kiilu,  moke. 

nettle  iipune  wai,  nunula'o. 

new  ha'alu,  ha'olu. 

newcomer  mahoo. 

news  tataloha,  tataroha. 

nibble  ngero'i. 

night  ha'irodo,  rodo. 

nine  siwe  1. 

ninth  siwana. 

nip  'ini. 

no  ha'ike,  qaake,  qa'ike. 

nod  'ala  qa'u. 

noise  awaawatana,  koukouhe;  v.,  awa  2.,  uwe 

raka,  mangulungulu. 
noisy  'e'engo,  hata  koula'a. 
none  ka'a,  qale;  ka'a  iteitana,  'oto  'o'o. 
noon  'upui  atowa. 
noose  qanu,  qaro. 
nose  qalusu. 
nostril  maana  qalusu. 

not  ka'a,  qa'ike,  qii'i,  qake,  qale;  sa'a,  si'e. 
notch  ahasi,  kere. 

nothing  ha'ike,  qa'ike;  ka'a  ola,  qale  ola. 
nourish  ha'angau,  sangoni. 
novice  mahoo,  tataku. 
ncTiv   'ie   1.,   inihou,   nihou,  hou;  'oto  'ie,  'oto 

inihou. 
numb  'ai  2.,  mae  1. 


number  idu  1. 

nut  hoi  1.,  'aitepi,  'alite  1.,  'e'e,  niu.  ngali,  pue. 

oar  bote. 

oath  ha'a'apunge,  hoasinge. 

obey  'ala  1.,  lulu  isuli,  tolai  suli. 

obsidian  ngadi. 

obstinate  ha'itohe,  hehesi. 

obstruct  ape  hono,  dau  sisinge'i. 

ocean  'asi  matawa,  matawa. 

occupy  launga'i. 

occur  to'o  2. 

odd  'a'atasi. 

o/ni  1.,  i  2.,  li  1.,  si  4. 

off  ha'atau,  horana,  mwaani;  i  odohaana. 

offend  dau  wala,  ha'amau'o,  ha'atataro;  mau'o, 

tataro. 
offer  ha'iare,  supungi,  teinge'ini,  uraa'i. 
offering  uraa'inge. 

often  ha'ahunge,  hungehunga'a,  rarapuupuu. 
oh  ai  7.,  ai'aa  2.,  hai  3. 
oil  rumu,  sulu. 

ointjnent  laqi  ni  suu,  rumu  ni  nue  maa. 
old  ina'o,  lahu,  lasu,  moka,  qara. 
omen  hahuto'o,  palapala  1.,  manu  poo,  hada, 

wisi. 
omit  dau  haahi. 

on  ilengi,  taraasi,  tarau,  taraure'i. 
once  hautaa'i,  hauta'e. 
one  'eta,  hue  1.,  ngaile,  ngaini,  maa  7.,  ta'ata'a, 

ta'e. 
only  hale'ite,  hali'ite,  hahaiteli. 
onward  tarau,  taraure'i,  susule'i. 
open    awangi,    lakata'ini,    mawa    ta'a,    suhu, 

taha  1.,  wa'awa'a. 
opening  maa,  wa'awa'ata,  maalitawa,  tahalaa. 
operculum  musi. 
opinion  sae. 

opossum  huto  1. 

oppose  haukama. 

opposite  i  odohaana,  sisinge'i. 

oppress  pili  tete,  taunge'ini. 

or  wa. 

orate  laelae  ni  wala,  laeli  wala,  saai  ere,  tea. 

oration  laeli  walanga. 

orchid  ito. 

ordain  ha'atolanga'ini,  qao,  qaona. 

ordeal  atoato,  hau,  dau  dunga,  dau  heu. 

order  ha'atola;  in  order  huni,  ta'atara  1. 

ordinary  ta'ewau,  tauteu;  mola. 

ordure  'ae  4.,  he'a  1. 

ornament  launihe. 

orphan  inemae,  ra'inge. 

osprcy  wakio. 

our  ka,  ka'elu,  iki'e,  'aka  2. 

ours  'aka,  'aka'elu. 

ourselves  i'emi  maraamanii,  iki'e  maraaka. 

out  kei  ana,  mwaani,  ta'a,  taha  1.,  'ura  ana. 

outlet  maa,  mau  1.,  usu  taha. 

outright  'o'o  4. 

outsail  talo  li'isi. 

outside  kolu-  2.,  'amaa,  i  su'e. 

outstretched  lala'i. 

oven  ha'ahite,  laqitaa,  ora  1.,  umu  1. 

over   haho,    la'ongi,    likite-,    li'ite-,    po'o   paro, 
po'o  wau. 

overcome  a'aila'asi,  hulesi. 


129 


PREGNANT 


overflow  honu  makeato.  kone,  malingi. 

overlap  dania  diu,  madiu,  sate  unu.  teroliu. 

overlook  lio  haahi. 

overmuch  hi'ito'o,  liuta'a. 

overthrow  hu'e  'asi,  hu'e  tekela'ini. 

overturn  kiiusi,  qaoha'ini. 

owe  roro'a. 

owl  'ahu'o. 

own  v.,  to'o  2. 

oyster  ile,  roma. 

Pardon  ne'isae  'asi,  sae  'asi. 

pare  ori. 

parent  ro  ha'i  mauana. 

Parrot  'a'a  2.,  iloilo'a,  kilekile  1.,  kirori,  siri. 

Parry  talohi. 

pari  n.,  'apa  1.,  'apolo,  holoholo,  maholo,  no'o 

5.,  roto;  v.,  ha'apiho,  hiteli,  wa'ahiteli. 
Partake  ado,  oa  1 . 
particularize  haha'itelinge'ini. 
Partition  'atohono. 
partner  dama-,  oa-. 
Party  alidanga,  laeha,  mae  5.,  pulitaa. 
pass   li'isi,    liu,    inahoro,    taro;    n.,    aliholo  1., 

ririholo. 
Past  liu,  mango  1.,  wiiite  1. 
Pastern  popo. 
patch  loamena,  pono. 
Path  tala. 
Paience  toli  rako. 
patrol  v..  kiili;  n.,  kakalihe. 
patttern  nunu  3..  ha'amalalana. 
Pay  hiri,  holi,  waai. 
peace  dailama,  hanuelama. 
peaceable  ha'amanola. 
peak  toloi  henue. 
pearl  'u'u  maai  dehi. 
pebble  hoi  heu,  'u'u  2. 
peck  tere. 
peel  ori. 
peep  maakahi. 
peer  aonga'i. 
pelt  'ato.  u'i. 
Peninsula  ngorangora. 
penitent  adoma'i  oli,  'onisae. 
people  apolo'a,  hiinua,  mwala. 
perceive  lio  saai,  lio  sae. 
perch  'o'a  5. 

perfect  ahu  1.,  ha'aahu,  manire'i,  menanga'i. 
perfume  haarana. 
perhaps  'ohe,  'ohi'a. 
peril  maelaa.  maenga. 
perish  ai  suu,  sun  1. 
permanent  ha'ahuu'e,  huu  2. 
permit  maai  1.,  toli'asi. 
Persecute  ha'aletehi.  taunge'ini. 
person  ile,  ini,  'inoni,  laa. 
perspire  madara'a. 
persuade  ere  ha'aola,  ta'irara. 
pervade  roro  waaro. 
pet  koni,  ra'i. 
photograph  talo  nunu. 
pick  hili,  'ini,  karo  2.,  soohi. 
piece   'apolo.    le'u.    maholo,    musii    'elili,    polo. 

qa'u  ulunga,  roto,  waawaata  2;  makaka. 

mamenamena,  mari'iri'i;  :•.,  tahu'i. 
pierce  halo,  mwakoli,  toronii. 


pig  poo  1.,  wasi;  ora  4.,  qaqa. 

pigeon  kolokolo,  kurukuru,  pine  ni  o'u.  toorao, 

uoru. 
pile  v.,  koru;  koruha,  korute. 
pillar  qii'u  ulunge,  ulunge. 
pinch  "ini. 

pioneer  hola'i,  tahangi. 
pip  lite. 

pipe  ipeipa,  simouke. 
pish  akuu. 
piss  mimi. 
pit  kiilinge,  kilu. 
pitch  pulu  3.,  totonga  1. 
pitchy  totonga'ala. 
pith  uto. 
pilled  pilomo. 
pity  'amasi. 
place  lehu,  le'u. 
plague  liunge. 
plain    apedao,     apesada;     ha'ada'i,     ha'ata'i, 

mwakule. 
plait  i'eli,  pao,  sikeri,  use. 
plan  'alaa'ini. 
plane  didi  2.,  susuru. 
plank  hapa,  rau  3.,  riiureu. 
plant  hiisi,  susu'i,  to'oni  4.;  n.,  'ai.  dango. 
platform  ha'a  3.,  tahe  1. 
play  qiini'o,  qarero,  tala'aela'a. 
pleasant  rako  diana. 
pledge  haa  i  mwe'i. 
Pleiades  'apurunge. 
plentiful  hunge,  hungehunga'a,  mwaera,  mwa- 

ora,  takara. 
pliable  mwadau,  mwaohe,  mwaeroero. 
plot  toli  loosi. 
pluck  do,  hisu,  'ini,  langu. 
plug  qaito,  suhu;  v.,  ponosi. 
plump  qi'e. 
plunder  liiu  1. 
plunge  dio. 
ply  liu. 

pocket  mwii'i  3. 

point  ngoongoo,  \vadu;  v.,  teinge'ini,  usu  8. 
poison  hunu  3. 
poke  toromi. 
pole  usue'ini. 
polish  ute. 
pond  iqe,  lama  2. 
pool  lopo. 
poor  maitale. 
porpoise  'iri'o. 
port  su'u  5. 
possess  akauri,  to'o  2. 
possible  mwadau,  'ura  mwarohi. 
pounce  polahi,  puuli. 
pound  ha'amae,  sau  1. 
pour  lingi,  utc  pii. 
pout  tcro  ngidu. 
powder  wahawaha. 
pcnvcr  nanamanga,  sakanga. 
practise  oho. 
praise  ha'amanikulu'e. 
prawn  ore  3. 
pray  are,  qao  ola. 
preach  laeli  wala.  tea. 
precipice  hauheu'e,  pie. 
pregnant  hi'e,  qiilu. 


PREMATURE 


130 


premature  kokela'i,  rorora. 

prepare  akau,  mwali,  talama'ini,  taule'ini. 

present  'ie  1.,  'ienini,  inihou. 

press  momo,  pili,  roro. 

pretence  dau  hahota,  lopo'i,  luqe'i. 

pretty  kohi,  mwane  diana,  rara'i. 

prevent  ape  bono,  dau  sisinge'i,  hadi. 

price  hoUte. 

prick  mwakoli,  sipengi,  susu'i. 

prickle  sike  2. 

prize  apo  3. 

proceed  isi  ta'a,  'ure  2.,  tSu  3.,  usu  taha. 

proclaim  ha'ahou,  hou  4.,  talo  6.,  taro. 

profane  ha'awa'a,  wa'a. 

proffer  ha'iare,  teinge'ini. 

promise  ha'alu  1.,  ha'iholota'i,  holota'i. 

prop  mudi  2.,  poo  3.,  tangatanga. 

proper  adona,  hii'idadanga. 

propitiate  tapa'oli. 

prosper  takara. 

prostrate  ladama'i. 

prostitute  heulao,  keni  qaqahe,  ulao. 

protect  lio  ahu'i,  rakapau.  sese  ahu'i,  talaahu'e. 

proud  ale,  toha'ini. 

proverb  alahuu. 

provide  ha'aakaurisi,  ne'ikoni,  talama'ini. 

provoke  ha'ahala'ini,  ha'atala'i. 

prow  haku  2.,  na'o,  toutou. 

puddle  ipata,  upeta. 

puff  ha'arangasi,  uhi  3. 

pull  aka  1.,  oke  1.,  wa'i  6.;  bote. 

pulp  memeso'a. 

pumice  hau  menu. 

punch  kumu. 

punish  ha'aletebi,  ba'aloo'i,  ha'ananau. 

pupil  qa'arongosuli. 

pure  manola,  manomanola'a. 

purge  ha'amanola,  laeli. 

purlin  suli  'ei. 

purple  melumelu'a'a. 

pursue  pee,  ohe  1. 

pus  'aqalao. 

push  usu  1. 

put  alu,  koni,  ne'i,  no'i,  to'oni. 

quake  asoso. 

quarrel  ha'isa'iri,  ha'aweweu,  halinge,  waiteu. 

quench  kumuri,  mwaasi. 

question  dolosi,  ha'iobi,  bari,  ledi,  soi. 

quick  ha'iteu,  lau'ae,  lauleu. 

quicken  ha'auri,  lau'ae,  tau'ae. 

quiet  malumu,  mwamwadoleta,  mwamwanoto, 

noto,  rako  2. 
quite  'o'o,  te'ela'i,  to'ohuungana. 
quiver  n.,  pupute. 

race  ba'ipani'i,  obera. 

raft  aqaqoi  sa'o. 

rafter  'ato  2. 

rage  sae  maleledi,  saewasu. 

rail  v.,  ere  maleledi;  n.,  raporapo. 

rain  nemo,  nimo. 

rainbow  buuraro. 

raise  bele  'ala'a,  sulu  la'a,  tabela'ini. 

rake  kara  4. 

ram  rori  1.,  sauni. 

ramrod  rori  1. 


rank  damaa. 

rap  'iki. 

rasp  n.,  usu  kara;  v.,  usu  4. 

rat  'asuhe,  likisi  to'i. 

rather  'ele,  kele. 

rattan  ue  3. 

rattle  'ikingi,  kole. 

rave  berobero,  o'e. 

ravel  qeli,  ta'ipupu'e. 

raw  arawa. 

ray  bali  3. 

razor  apo  2. 

reach  arapuu,  hule,  tero. 

read  sae,  saai. 

ready  akau,  mouqeli. 

real  ba'abuu'ana,  buu  2.,  to'obuungana. 

really  ba'ahuu'ei,  to'ohuunge'i. 

rear  puri. 

reap  tapa,  siokoni. 

rebound  pola,  posiki. 

recede  aha.  3.,  mapipi. 

receive  bele,  taku. 

reckon  idu  1.,  'unu  1. 

recognize  hahaitelinge'ini,  lio  saai. 

recoil  posiki. 

recollect  amasito'o. 

reconcile  ba'a'ureruru. 

recover  avvaa,  mauri. 

red  noro,  warn,  vvaruweru'a,  awalaa'i  'epule. 

redeem  tapa  'oli. 

reed  rade. 

reef  baho  2.,  mwalo;  lulungi. 

reel  'olo'oloa'i. 

reflect  alusae,  ne'isae;  nunu  3. 

refrain  nihisi. 

refresh  ha'amango. 

refuge  le'u  ni  su'e  puri  ana,  su'u  5. 

refuse  v.,  lalavva,  sare'i,  saeni. 

refuse  n.,  alitebu,  bero,  mamatekola,  oraora. 

reject  lalawasi,  sike. 

rejoice  ilenimwa'e,  rike,  ruke. 

relapse  'oli,  toliaa. 

relate  lado,  'unu  1. 

relish  'amadi. 

remain  i'o.  naku,  'o'o  3. 

remember  alusae,  amasito'o. 

remnant  oretai  ola. 

remove  ba'isuu,  sulu,  ta'asi,  ta'ela'i. 

rend  'a'ari,  haka  1. 

renew  ba'aha'alu,  ba'aha'olu. 

repair  dau  diana. 

repeat  ha'amaani,  ha'imaani,  'oni. 

repent  adoma'i  'oli,  'onisae. 

reply  'ala  1.,  ta  1.,  te. 

report  talo,  taro. 

reproach  isi  1.,  keta. 

reprove  'i'ite  2. 

reserve  adi. 

resist  baukama,  'ure  bonosi. 

resolve  sae  susu. 

resound  mwakulu,  ngara  loulou. 

respond  'ala  1.,  nguu. 

rest  mamalo;  ore. 

restrain  bele  haabi,  nihisi. 

result  au  ta'a. 

retire  duu'e,  ru'u,  su'e  5. 

return  aliho'i,  ba'apu'o,  'oli,  pu'o  2. 


131 


SHELTER 


reveal  ha'ata'inl. 

revenge  suraa'i,  suu  ola. 

reverse   aliho'isi,   alihu'isi,    aliu.    hi'usi,    hu'isi. 

liuliune,  qaoha'ini. 
revive  ha'i  meuri. 
revolve  hiro.  pu'opu'o. 
reward  waaite. 
rheumatism  lili'e. 
rib  lu8U. 

rich  mwa'i,  toora-. 
ridge  uwo. 

ridge-pole  qaoha,  suli  'ei  i  qaoha. 
right  odo,  qaloqalo. 
rigid  halasi,  sulahita. 
rim  keke,  kerekere,  wairo-. 
rind  te'ete'e. 

ringworm  huni  2.,  kiru  3. 
ripe  maelo,  rara  2. 
rise  ta'e,  ta'ela'i,  suu  ta'a. 
river  wai  peine. 
road  tala. 

roar  awa,  mwakulu,  ngunguru. 
roast  hahi,  su'isungi,  sule,  susungi,  uunu. 
rob  peli. 

rock  hau,  hau  mou. 
rod  'ai  nehunehu,  hau  welewele. 
roe  pile. 
roll  'akeu,  malakeke,  malakeu,  tataqelu;  ere  2.. 

ho'i     3.,     penasi,     qelusi;     ereerea'ile, 

ereereta'a;  n.,  hike. 
roof  koluhe,  qaoha,  saroha. 
room  'atohono,  duru. 
root  imiimi;  ine  1.,  sude. 
rope  'ali,  i'eli. 

rot  hou  3.,  kasu,  mapusu.  osa,  sane'a. 
rough  haule. 
round  ereerea'ile,  ereereta'a,  hotohotomolita'a; 

ahu'i,  haahi. 
rouse  ahala'i,  ha'alio,  Ho. 
row  hote,  hotela'ini;  n.,  ta'atala,  uku. 
rub  nanala'i,  rotoa'ini,  usuri,  ute. 
rubbish  alitehu,  mamatekola,  potJia. 
rudder  wiro- 

ruin  maana'o,  na'onga;  suuhe'ini,  wa'eli,  ware. 
rule  alaha  haahi. 
rump  moro-  2. 
run  huru. 

rush  pola,  nanamu,  tatahiruhiru. 
rust  he'a,  kauwa'a. 

sack  'anga,  mwa'i. 

sacred  maa'i,  maea,  mwane. 

sad  'ala  ngingite,  rahito'u,  sae  huu. 

safe  liiku,   mamanuto'o,   mamaware,  pupupu, 

sa'esape'a,  sapelaku,  sapemawa. 
safeguard  keneta'ini,  kineta'ini. 
sag  makuku. 
sago  sa'o. 

sake  'aena,  i  nooruhaana. 
saliva  ngisu. 
salt  'asi  1.,  hu'i  'esi. 
salty  'asile. 
sand  one. 

sandbank  rere,  saisai  rere. 
sandfly  nono  'asi. 
sandstone  hau  hana. 
sap  totonga. 


satisfy  ha'aahu,  mangoa'ini.  pote  1.,  saedami. 
savage  mama'ingi,  mamakola. 
save  ha'auri,  loloha'ini,  ne'i  koni. 
say  ere  1.,  ta  1.,  te,  'unu.  wala'a. 
scab  rau  5. 
scaffold  ha'ano. 
scales  unehi. 
scared  lete,  loo,  wala  4. 
scatter  ha'atatanga'ini.  koetana'a,  tatanga. 
scent  nono  wasu. 
scoff  mwasie'ini. 
scold  ere,  haa'ere,  ha'ore. 
score  aha  2. 

scorpion  hiiriheri,  ha'awarasi  kale. 
scrape  'arasi,  karasi,  ole. 
scratch  hai  5.,  karu  2. 
scream  awara,  ulo. 
screw  hiro. 
scum  hutohuto. 
sea  'asi  1.,  matawa. 
seam  tauteurite. 
search  ha'itale,  totola  ohi. 
'Seaside  i  one. 
season  halisi  2. 
seat  i'oi'oha,  na'unekume. 
second  ruana. 
secret  mumuni. 
secure    daidiena,    maramarape'a,    sa'esape'a; 

mauta'a,  papau. 
see  aade,  leesi,  lio,  loo  1. 
seed  lite. 

seek  ha'itale,  loohi. 

seem  lio  1.,  loo  1.,  domana,  mala,  urihana. 
seine  hu'o. 
select  hili. 
self  maraa-. 

sell  ha'aholi,  hohoro,  holi,  taho. 
send  usunge'ini. 
sensation  hii. 

separate  opa,  ohu  2.,  sio  aopa. 
serve  rareta'ini. 

set  ha'ai'osi,  ne'i,  no'i,  suu  1.,  tola  6. 
settle  i'osi,  'o'a  5. 
seventy  hiu  avvala. 
sever  holosi,  mousi,  tapali. 
sew  susu  3.,  tiiuri. 
shade  mamalu. 

shade  malu,  para'imaa,  mamalute. 
shadow  nunu  3. 
shaft  kakata,  ki'iki'i. 
shake  asoso,   asuoloolo,   hotohoto'l,   kulekule, 

mwaolaola,  olooloa'i,  tata'ini. 
shallow  too  1. 

sham  dau  hahota,  lopo'i  kae. 
shame  masa;  ha'amasa. 
shape  sape. 
share  ado,  oa  1. 
shark  pa'ewa. 
sharp  'ala  1.,  rere'a. 
sharpen  rere  1. 
shatter  memeso,  morumoru. 
5/iare  apo  1.,  suhi. 

sheathe  daraha'ini.  dereha'ini,  saini,  silihe'ini. 
shed  hale,  taoha,  toohi. 
slied  v.,  toli. 
shell  hinu.  te'ete'e. 
shelter  i'o  ra'irehi. 


SHEW 


132 


shew  'ae  5.,  ha'ata'ini,  hatonga'ini. 

shield  talo,  talaahu'e. 

shift  'olisi,  sikile'i. 

shin  wowo. 

shine  raa,  wanawana. 

ship  haka  3. 

shipureck  ape  1.,  qa'ata'ini. 

shiver  ariri. 

shoal  taalu,  tootoo. 

shoot  hana  2. 

iAore  i  kule,  i  one,  saini  one. 

short  koukoule,  'o'orii'e,  pulo  sa'asala. 

shorten  ape  hite,  kumwesi,  onu. 

shoulder  huui  lue,  qa'uli  'apala. 

shout  kakau,  tea,  totolo. 

shove  usu  1. 

shower  hoi  nemo,  hoi  nimo. 

shrink  'amasi  meuri,  niniko'a,  rarasi. 

shrivel  nuku,  rara  2.,  ruusi. 

shun  peinuhi. 

shut  hohono. 

shy  masa. 

sick  daoha,  mae,  maemae'a,  mamaela'a. 

sickness  maela,  maenga. 

side  parapara,  rahoraho. 

sigh  ahimawa,  mamango,  poepoe. 

sight  lionga. 

sign  ha'aluelu,  ha'ara,  hahuilala. 

silent  amute. 

sill  'aena  maa. 

silly  qe'uqe'u'a'a. 

similar  ha'idada,  sada. 

similarly  aitana,  alihana. 

simple  qe'u,  teo. 

sin  oraha'a. 

since  kei  ana,  mwaani,  'ura  ana. 

sinew  uleule. 

sing  kana. 

single  to'ota'e. 

sink  dodo,  'o'oni. 

sinker  ha'asihopulu. 

sinnet  mwaritei  niu. 

sip  tahe  tongo,  toto  aropu,  totohi  1. 

sister  'asi-  2.,  inie-. 

sister-in-law  ihe-. 

51/  dodonga'i,  i'o,  naku. 

six  ono. 

size  painaha,  painanga. 

skilful  saai  ola,  salema'i. 

skim  tarasi. 

skin  v.,  simwe,  tasi  2.,  uhu  2. 

skin  n.,  te'ete'e. 

skip  pola,  reke. 

skirt  kakamu,  ngoongoo. 

sky  apai  loa,  i  lengi,  maalau. 

slab  qa'ahida,  wa'ahite. 

slack  mwakuku. 

slander  heota'ini,  ta'utepunge. 

slap  daro,  hide. 

slay  horo,  suuhe'ini. 

sleep  ma'ahu,  ma'aru,  ma'uru. 

sleepiness  mama'uru'anga. 

slice  nisi,  wa'a. 

slide  rerede,  tasi. 

slip  awa  tahu,  dile,  rerede. 

slippery  mamauwa'a. 

slit  hakasi. 


slope  haneta'anga. 

slough  ruusi. 

slow  ha'ahiru. 

slumber  ma'ahunge  alisuu. 

small    haora,    hatonga,    momoru,    niwaimweJ, 

vverewere. 
smart  totongo. 

smash  makaka'a,  makasi,  potali,  qa'a. 
smear  punipuni,  raimaa. 
smell  nono  vvasu,  tola  haarea,  wasu. 
smile  mwasi. 
stnite  horo,  rapu. 
smoke  ha'asasu,  sasu;  omi. 
smooth  dadada'a,  maumau'a'a. 
snail  aropu,  qaateru. 
snake  mwaa  1. 
snap  mousi. 

snare  hune,  lolohuna,  qiinu,  qaro. 
snatch  liiu  1. 
sneeze  asihe,  asinge. 
sncyre  ngora  3. 
snout  qalusu. 
snuff  nono  vvasu. 
so  uri  2.,  urine. 
soak  to'ongi,  totohi,  totoqini. 
soar  aro  2. 
sober  maenoto. 
soever  ta'ana,  ta'ena. 
soft  malumu,  mwadau. 
soften  ha'amvvadausi. 
soil  'ano,  mwado,  mwakana,  mvvakano. 
sole  penatana  'ae. 

solid  ngara  welevvele'a;  hai  pou,  susu  4. 
some  halu,  muini,  mwaile,  mwaite. 
somehow  uritaa. 

something  holoholo,  le'u,  masi  ola,  me'i  ola. 
sometimes  halui  maholo,  to'ota'e  maholo. 
soti  'elekale,  kale,  mwela  mwane. 
song  kana. 

soon  lauleu,  lauleu'a,  molana. 
soothe  apu'i,  ha'arako. 
sore  apite'i,  hi'ito'o,  ini    2.,  malaka'a,  oropa, 

osa,  salu. 
sorrow  saehuunge. 
sort  uritaa;  komu,  manata  2.,  ta'ana,  ta'ena, 

walute-. 
soul  maurihaa'i. 
sound  ha'ileku,  laku;  awaawatana,  koukouhe, 

lolou. 
soup  piinge. 
sour  maladi,  tola  g. 
south  po'i  lengi.  qa'i  lengi,  taa'u,  ta'e. 
sow  hasi  1. 
sow  71.,  poo  qaqa. 
space  ahowa,  maalau,  maholo. 
spade  waato. 
span  tangaa. 
spare  ore,  ue  1. 
spare  'amasi,  saeni. 
spark  sii  dunge. 
sparkle  rangariro'a,  wana. 
spatter  qisi. 
spatula  idemu. 
spawn  pile. 

speak  ere,  ta  1.,  te,  wala,  wala'a. 
spear  lula,  noma,  qa'uli  'inoni,  ra'ei  tolo,  su'e  4. 
speckled  to'o  hi'uhi'ule. 


133 


SURROUND 


speech  erenga,  wala'anga. 

speed  nanamu. 

spew  'a'ana,  moa. 

spider  lawa,  pe'u. 

spill  huhu,  malakekcsi,  malingi. 

spin  hirohiro. 

spine  suli  odo. 

spirit  'akalo,  hi'ona,  li'oa,  urehi. 

spit  ngisu. 

spite  sae  ngora. 

splash  kilokilo,  qisi- 

splice  donga  2. 

split  hite,  tangi,  wa'a. 

spoil  wa'eta'ini,  ware. 

sponge  hulo  1. 

spontaneous  maraa-,  tohu-. 

spotted  pulu  nunu'e,  to'o  hi'uhi'ule,  to'o  nunu'e. 

spout  pusu. 

sprain  duuna,  li'ite'i. 

spray  'asi  1.,  naho. 

spread  'a'ala'i,   epasi,   holasi,    ngaangaa,   nga- 

ngau,  takara,  talau. 
spring  hulehule,  hulaa;  pola  liliki. 
spring  tide  lue  qera. 
sprinkle  tata'ini. 
sprout  pito,  qito. 
spurt  pusu. 

squabble  hii'isa'Lri,  waiteu. 
squall  dionga'i,  hoi  nemo. 
square  popopo'a. 

squash  makaka'a.  pili  memeso. 

squat  'o'a  5. 

squeak  ngangadi. 

squeeze  losi,  momo.  ni'i  losi. 

squint  lele. 

stab  toromi. 

staff  'aili'apaa,  'apaa. 

stage  tahe. 

stagger  'olo'oloa'i,  tatahiohio. 

stain  miiua,  o'a'i. 

stair  huruhuru. 

stalk  mwaramwcira. 

stammer  same. 

stamp  puu.  'uri  1. 

stand  'ure. 

star  hoi  he'u,  'u'ui  he'u,  'u'u  ni  he'u. 

stare  aonga'i,  to'oma'i. 

start  'aehota.  ta'e  5.,  ta'ela'i,  tala'ae. 

startle  apara'i,  asire'i,  ha'aapara'ini,  ha'asire'ini. 

starve  hi'olo.  maesi  hi'olonga,  mae  su'esu'ela'i. 

stay  i'o.  naku,  rauhe'i;  ha'asusu.  rape'i. 

stead  'olite-. 

steadfast  halahala,  mauta'a,  nga'ingedi,  papau. 

steal  peli. 

stealthy  ha'atoretore  maa. 

steam  sasu  ana  wai. 

steer  na'ohi. 

stem  kakata,  ki'iki'i. 

step  'uri'urite. 

stern  puri. 

stick    'ai    nehunehu.    'apaa.    dango    welewele, 
qire;  pau  1,  rao  2. 

sticky  totonga'ala. 

stiff  'Hi  2.,  halasi,  hiisipeule.  pasie'ili. 

still  maneko.  noto,  rako;  ue  1. 

sting  'ala  3..  nunuli. 

stingy  ha'ahehe. 


stink  wiisu,  wasu  'aela. 

stir  aroqa'i,  ngalingeli,  qa'i  2. 

stitch  susu  3.,  tiiuri  2. 

stock  iihu'ine. 

stomach  'ie  3.,  'oqa. 

stone  hau  1. 

stony  haule. 

stoop  mwaoroha'i,  oro. 

slop  noto,  rohu.  toli;  diiu  2.,  i'o,  i'o  konito'o. 

'o'o  3.,  susule'i. 
store   duru,    haangi,    loha'ini,    ne'i    koni,    no'i 

koni,   'onime'ini. 
storm  mawa,  mawasidengi. 
story  laladonga,  'oni'oninge. 
straggle  tongolill. 
straight  odo. 

strain  pii,  sasali,  wa'i  halahala. 
slrait  tahalaa. 

strand  akeake,  kalite'i'a,  kawe. 
strange  aopa,  ha'akolo,  kolokolo. 
stranger  awata'a,  miihuara. 
strangle  ha'ali'o,  li'o  2. 
stray  'e'eli,  liu  aopa,  takalo. 
strength  'a'aila'anga,  nanamanga,  sakanga. 
stretch  aheta,  kalu  3.,  lala'ini,  raradu,  susue'ini. 

tawari. 
strike    daro,    hide,    horo,    lupu,    rapu,    sauni. 

to'olupu.  \%ete. 
string  walo,  wili. 
strip  'aeli,  hu'esi,  ta'asi. 
stripe  hudidudi. 
stroll  awe,  qaqahe. 

strong  'a'aila'a,  malapau'a'a,  mauta'a,  ramo. 

stubborn  hii'itohe. 

stuff  susu  harehare. 

stumble  halidu'u'a,  mau'o,  tataro. 

stump  ahu'ine,  ruuqe'u,  uruqe'i  dango. 

stumpy  koukoule. 

stupid  papaku'a  qe'u. 

stutter  samo. 

subdue  ha'aooni,  hele  tolingi. 

subside  kumwe.  mapipi,  sasa  hetela. 

succeed  'oli,  'olisi. 

succor  anahi,  liiu  2. 

such  uri  2..  urine,  urinena. 

suck  omi,  susu  2. 

sucker  pi'e  3. 

suckle  ha'asusu. 

successive  ta'atara. 

sudden  lauleu.  maarusi  maa. 

suffer  sape  hi'ito,  sape  salu. 

suffice  ado,  ha'idadanga. 

sugar-cane  'ohu  3. 

suit  ado,  hatonga. 

sulk  saewasu. 

summer  oku  3. 

summerset  su'ai  honu,  su'esu'e  ni  honu. 

summon  ha'ara'i.  ha'arongo. 

sun  sato. 

sunrise  qa'alana  sato. 

sup  ilu,  inu. 

supple  qilo'a. 

support  poongi,  poopoota. 

sure  susu  4. 

surf  'a'aronga,  naho,  qa'aqa'ali  naho. 

surprise  ha'aapara'ini.  ha'akakahuru. 

surround  dau  keh.  kiili,  piru  keli. 


SUSPECT 


134 


suspect  hi'inge'ini,  sum  1. 

suspend  repo  3.,  to'i. 

swallow  'ono  2. 

swamp  lololo,  lolongo. 

swarm  huto  2. 

swaying  mwahiohio. 

swear  ha'aasa,  ha'a'apu,  h&'iuwesi,  hoasi. 

sweat  madara'a. 

sweet  malimeli. 

swell  'upu. 

swelling  epa,  likitaa,  qaqahinu,  'upu'e. 

stvift  lauleu;  n.,  'i'i  2. 

swim  olo. 

swoop  dio. 

taboo  adi,  tetelenga. 

/acfe  lili  qana. 

tackle  raisinge. 

tail  'u'u'i-. 

take  da,  dau  1.,  hele,  ooho,  rau  4.,  ta,  tete, 

tola,  tole. 
tale  laladonga,  'oni'oninge. 
talk  ere,  wala'a. 
tall  tetewa'a,  tewa. 
tally  ha'aawala. 
tame  koni,  ra'i. 

tangled  hiku,  ta'ihikuhiku,  tari. 
tap  siki  2.,  tee  1. 
tarry  i'o  ni  deunge. 
taste  mami,  meali,  nameli. 
tattoo  rapu. 

teach  ha'aloo'i,  ha'ananau,  ha'ausuli. 
tear  v.,  haka  1. 
tear  wai  ni  'akalo. 
tease  ha'aero,  ha'atalaa'i,  koe. 
teem  alielimui. 

tell  ha'ahou,  houle'ini,  lado  2„  siho,  'unu  1. 
tempest  mawa,  mawasidengi. 
temple  poopoo. 

tempt  mala  ahonga,  mala  ohonga. 
temptation  mala  ohonganga. 
ten    awala,    tangahulu;    aideri,    S'ulu,    walo, 

walo  pasa. 
tendril  kakawe,  waowao  2. 
tenth  tangahulu  ana. 
terrible  to'o  maumeutana. 
terrify  ha'ama'usi. 
tetanus  wa'i  7. 
tether  qaro,  qasu. 
than  mwaani. 

thank  ha'adahi,  ha'asaediena,  paalahe. 
that  holoholoni,  ine  3.,  le'une,  olana,  maholoni, 

ngeena. 
thatch  daure'lni,  tahera'ini;  raho. 
the  a  1.,  hai  4.,  hoi  1.,  hou  1.,  masi  2.,  me'i,  mui, 

mwai,  nga  1. 
theft  peliha,  pelinge. 
their  ada  1.,  'ada  2.,  ada'elu,  adaru'e,  'adaru'e 

ikire,  ikira'elu,  ikireru'e. 
thetn  ikire,  ikira'elu,  ra'elu,  ra;  dual,  raru'e, 

raru'i. 
then  maholoni,  si  1. 
thence  mwaanie  ile'une,  'urei  ile'une. 
there  ilehuna,  ile'une,  wau  1. 
thereby  ana  2.,  ani  2. 
therefore  'aena  le'une,  'aena  ngeena. 
therein  hai  la'ona,  hai  le'une,  ilalona. 


thereupon  hara.  hare,  r£iro,  saro;  mango  urine. 

these  ikira  inihou,  muini  'ie. 

they  ikire,  ikireru'e,  kire,  kireru'e,  koro'i. 

thick  ioqo,  piola,  poso;  pono. 

thicket  lolo'a  ni  'ei. 

thieve  peli. 

thigh  sasaha. 

thin  mwarau,  mwine. 

thine  i'oe,  namu'e,  namu'i. 

thing  ola,  le'u,  holoholo,  maholo. 

think  adoma'ini,  ne'isae. 

third  'olune. 

thirst  marou. 

thirteen  awala  mwana  'olu. 

thirty  'olu  awala. 

this  'ie  1.,  inihou,  mai  1..  mSine. 

thither  ileune. 

thorn  sike  2.,  walo  kakaru. 

thorny  kakau'e,  mwakomwako'a. 

those  muini  ngeena,  mwaileni. 

thou  i'oe. 

though  maala,  mala  1. 

thought  adoma'inga,  ne'isaenga. 

thousand  alo,  mola  3.,  qela  1.,  sinola,  to'o  7. 

thread  walo;  v.,  lii  1.,  wili. 

threaten  ha'apasuli,  marara'i. 

three  'olu. 

thresh  mwamwada. 

threshold  'aena  maa. 

thrice  ha'a'olu. 

throat  lue  1.,  hauliu. 

throb  tee  1. 

through  tahaunutara,  tapausu,  taraure'ini. 

throw  'a'a  5.,  dere,  'u'i. 

thrust  lada,  toro  3. 

thumb  'ini  hite. 

thump  kumu. 

thus  uri  2.,  urine. 

thwart  hapa,  lusu. 

thy  amu'e,  i'oe,  namu'e,  namu'i. 

tick  tee  1. 

tide  kumwe,  lue  2.,  mai  2.,  tongo;  lue  qera. 

mai  rara. 
tie  ho'o,  qaro,  taheri. 
tight  hanga,  koko,  popo. 
till  hulaana. 
tilt  kausi. 
timber  'ai,  dango. 

time  maholo;  takarurume'ini,  to'o  6. 
time-to-time  duuduu. 
tip  noonoo,  ngoongoo,  to'o  eleele,  wadu. 
tiptoe  mwaiki. 
tired  ha'awe'o,  we'o. 

to  huni.  muni,  i  1.,  ni  1.,  saa-,  sie-,  tako'i,  tale. 
tobacco  saho;  hasie'ie'i,  hiohio,  kori. 
together  ruru,  ta'ingelute,  takarurume'ini. 
tcmgs  ireki. 
tongue  mea. 
too  lo'u  5. 

tooth  niho,  to'o  na'o. 
toothless  dawa  2. 
top  lengi,  qango  2. 
torch  sine. 

torment  ha'aletehi,  kotaabi,  motaahi. 
torrent  dari  mwaa. 
tortoise-shell  hapa  2. 
totter  'olo'oloa'i. 


135 


WANT 


toucan  pine  awa. 

touch  hele  temweri,  kopi. 

tough  ngiisi  1. 

low  oke  1. 

toward  isuli,  tako'i,  tale. 

tovm  hanue,  huuilurae,  poona. 

toy  qanionga  roaroa. 

track  si'o  isuli. 

traitor  qelo. 

train  ha'aango. 

trample  'ure  puuli. 

translate  'olisi  wala. 

travel  Slide,  laehi,  lai  henue,  liu. 

tread  puuli,  'uri. 

tree  'ai,  dango. 

tree  fern  diniwe. 

tremble  ariri,  asoso,  nunurete. 

trench  Sliholo. 

irepang  mwamwaa  purl. 

trickle  mudimudi  'ura.  mwimwdi  'ure. 

trouble    hu'ihu'i,    kotaha,    mohinge,    rako 

'aela,  su'ehi. 
true  to'ohuu,  wala'imoli. 
trumpet  'Shuri. 
trust  noruto'o,  puuto'o. 
truth  wala'imolinge. 
try  ahonga,  dau  adonga,  dau  ahonga,  oho  1., 

ohongi. 
tub  nime  2. 
tug  oke  1.,  wa'i  6. 
tumble  a'oho,  domu,  'usu  11. 
tumult  ha'ipolanga,  kotaha, 
turn     alihu'isi,    alihu'ite'ini,    *allu,     'Stomaa, 

'atopuri,     hiro,     hi'usi,     'oil;     ha'i'oli, 

pulo,  pu'o  3.,  saro  1.;  lapi,  ha'alili. 
turn  tnena,  ne'i. 
turtle  honu  1. 
tusk  niho. 

twelve  awala  mwana  rue,  awala  mana  rua. 
twenty  ro  awala. 
twice  ha'aru'e. 
twig  akeake,  'ulu'ulu  ni  'ei. 
twilight  saulehi,  melumelu. 
twin  iu. 

twine  ha'a'angohi  hiku,  lolo  3.,  ta'ihikuhiku. 
twinkling  raa'aru  talahi. 
twirl  hiro. 

twist  'ango  2.,  kalite'i'a,  pulosi. 
two  rue. 

ugly  lio  mamataku,  loo  mama'u. 

ulcer  oropa,  osa. 

umbrella  ha'u  7. 

unarmed  to'o  ro  nime. 

unawakened  to'o  lelengana. 

unbind  luhesi. 

uncle  ama-,  uweli-,  well-. 

unclean  lo'u  3  ;  mada'a,  maipo. 

uncoiled  awa  tahu. 

uncover  'ae  5.,  hu'esi. 

under  haha.  oroha-, 

understand  rongo  saal,  rongo  sae. 

undo  luhe,  tahu'i. 

undone  'aela,  akera'i,  luheta'i. 

unfasten  sikite'ini. 

unfold  'aroka,  rokasi. 

unfurl  tata'ini. 


unhitch  siki  1.,  takarara. 

unhurt  sapemawa. 

unlace  takarasi. 

unless  'ai'aana,  wa  'ohe. 

unload  salenga'ini,  sangile'ini. 

unmarried  raori'i,  saanau. 

unravel  matakara. 

unripe  kohu,  mwaka. 

unruly  teroliu. 

unskilful  mSumeuli. 

untie  'aluhe,  luhe. 

until  hulaana,  lai  tell. 

untoward  po'opo'oli'ili'i. 

unwilling  lalawa,  sare'ini. 

up  'ala'a,  la'a,  i  haho,  i  lengi,  ta'e,  t&limaa, 

ta'au. 
upbraid  ere,  wala  mwamwasu. 
uplift  ha'a'ure,  sulu  1.,  tahela'ini;  adj.,  langi- 

lengi'e. 
upon  haho-,  lengi-. 
upright  odo,  odota'i. 
uprooted  aihu,  'a'uru. 
upset  kiiusi,  qaoha'ini. 
urge  torangi. 
urine  mimi,  wSi. 
us  ka'elu,  kolu;  aka,  aka'elu. 
use  helesi. 
useless  tototala. 
utterly  'o'o  4. 

vainly  mwakule,  tototala. 

valley  da'ideri'e. 

vanish  ahutata,  wa'a  4. 

vanity  'ai'aa,  'ahewa'a. 

vapor  laho'a,  waha. 

various  dodola,  ha'iaopa'i,  ngelute. 

vary  aopa,  hu'ite'i. 

verge  apiepi. 

verse  'alo'u,  lo'u'e. 

very  ha'ahuu'ei,   ha'ahuu'ana,  raka,  to'ohuu- 

ngana,  to'ohuunge'i. 
vex  'a'ada'ini,   ha'aaauni,   kotaahi,   waweta'a. 
village  huuilume,  outeni  nima,  poona;  met. ,'iola. 
vine  walo. 
violate  maha. 
virgin  keni  raori'i. 
visit  maakali,  maatoli,  maatoto. 
voice  wala. 
void  qala,  waawaa. 
vomit  'a'ana,  moa. 
vow  ha'a'apu. 
voyage  ^lldanga. 

wade  ulu  4. 

wag  hi'ute'ini,  teile'ini. 
wages  holite,  waaite. 

wagtail  hi'uhi'u  kape,  hi'uhi'u  qote,  kiukiu  rape. 
wail  ngarasi,  ulo  1. 
wait  i'o  loosi,  ma'ohi,  totori. 
wake  ha' alio,  lio  1. 
walk  awe,  qaqahe. 
wall  liliheu,  para,  tete. 
wallow  sude,  tataipeipe. 
wander  lae  ha'iliu,  takalo. 
wane  kumwe. 

want  'ai'aa,  meimeile'ini,|_tale;   sae  to'o.  sare 
to'o. 


WANTON 


136 


wanton  mvvamwaki,  tale'i. 

war  ipelunga,  ohotaa. 

ward  talaahu'e,  talohi. 

warm  madoro,  wawai,  osiosi. 

warn  aha  tahani,  ha'apasu. 

wart  uhi  2. 

wary  loo  2. 

wash  hoda,  loto. 

wasp  niniho,  puu  2. 

waste  totowa'e,  wa'e  1.,  wa'eta'ini,  ware;  sala. 

watch  ha'akale,  ha'amaesi  2.,  lio  isuli,  kakali. 

water  wai  1.;  v.,  hu'i  3.,  korukoru,  mimi. 

waterfall  pie  1. 

waterhole  kakalu,  kilu. 

waterspout  saisesu,  sa'usesu. 

wave  'a'aronga,  hai  naho,  hiiu  ni  'esi. 

wave  v.,  salo  2.,  waiwei  1. 

waver  sae  ruerua'a. 

way  tala  1. 

waylay  'aqata'ini,  toli  loosl. 

we  i'emelu.  ika'elu,  ikolu;  i'emere'i,  ikara,  ikure. 

weak  maleqeleqe,  mamaela'a,  qeto. 

weapon  mae  7.,  raisinge. 

wear  to'oni  1. 

weary  ha'awe'o,  we'o. 

weave  ha'u  9. 

weh  lawa. 

wed  tola  keni. 

wedding  aharota. 

weed  amu  4.,  ta'ahu. 

weep  ngara,  ulo  1. 

^vell  awaa,  mware'a. 

west  hao,  i  'ano,  suulana  sato. 

wet  ha'amedo,  ha'aqini;  medo,  qesa'a,  qini'a. 

whale  pusu  'esi. 

what  taa  2.,  taha. 

when  i  nganite,  maholona. 

whence  kei  hei,  'urei  tei. 

where  ihei,  itei,  lehuna,  le'une. 

whet  diinuhi. 

whether  'ohe,  'ohi'a. 

which  ihei,  itei. 

while  ha'awali,  maholo. 

whip  rapu. 

whisper  sawaru. 

whistle  wadi. 

while  erete'a,  mero,  rere'a;  haka,  poro  ni  haka 

who  atei. 

whole  ha'ileku,  laku.  pupupu. 

whose  atei,  'ana  atei,  nana  atei. 

why  ana  e  'ue,  e  'ue,  uritaa. 

wick  sikeri. 

wicked  'aela,  tata'ala,  tiilili. 

wickedness  oraha'a,  talilinge. 

wide  'aroka,  atalawa. 

widow  na'o  6. 

wife  hu'e  2.,  keni. 

wig  uhumae. 

wild  loo  2.,  looloo'a. 


idle  makemaketa,  raomae. 

wilful  tiilili,  raramaa. 

will  sae. 

willing  mwa'emwa'e. 

wince  niniko'a. 

xvind  diini,  dangi,  ooru. 

icindbound  noruhono. 

wing  'apa'apa. 

wink  ma'aru. 

winter  aau,  rara  4. 

wipe  'usuri. 

wise  saai  ola,  sae  nanau,  salema'i. 

wish  sae  to'o,  sare  to'o. 

witchcraft  saru'e,  si'onga. 

wither  heko,  nunulu,  rara  3.,  rarasi. 

with  ana  2.,  ani  2.;  mai  3.,  pe'i  2. 

within  hai  2.,  i  lalo,  ta'i,  vvjii. 

without  i  'amaa,  i  su'e;  'aho'a. 

withstand  dau  honosi,  haukama,  'ure  honosi. 

wizard  mvvane  kurekure. 

woman  hu'e  2.,  keni. 

womb  i'e  3. 

wonder  ane,  pangata'ini;  n.,  anoa,  hu'ihu'ite. 

7vood  'ai,  dango. 

word  wala. 

7vork  asu,  daumwa. 

7i-orld  walumalau. 

worm  niwaamwaa,  mvvaadule. 

worn  lahu. 

worship  palo,  qao  ola. 

worry  'a'ada'ini,  tolaa'i. 

wound  halata,  hilehile,  malaka. 

wrap  aluhi,  dele,  inehu'i,  ulo. 

wreath  mahe. 

wrestle  ako. 

wreck  qa'ata'ini. 

wring  losi,  ni'i  losi. 

wrinkle  nuku. 

write  usu  2. 

writhe  huhu  laolao. 

wrong  dau  hu'isi,   diiu  pele,   dau  wala;  aopa, 
takalo. 

yam  hana  1.,  olopa'i,  uhi  1. 

yard  qa'uli  'apala;  lolata;  i  'amaa. 

yawtt  ahimawa. 

yaws  alo'a. 

year  halisi. 

yellow  saosaola. 

yes  'a'u,  i'au,  'o  si'u'e,  si'ola. 

yesterday  nonola;  day  before  nonola  wau. 

yet  ue  1. 

yoke  tori. 

yonder  paro,  wau  1. 

you  i'oe,  i'amu,  I'omu,  i'omolu;  dual,  i'omoro'i, 

i'omoru'e. 
youth  saanau. 

zigzag  saro  ni  mwaa. 


APPENDICES 


A  BRIEF  GRAMMAR  OF  SA'A  AND  ULAWA. 

LINGUISTICS  IN  THE  WESTERN  PACIFIC. 

MELANESIA  AND  ITS  PEOPLE. 

HISTORICAL  NOTES  CONCERNING  THE  MELANESIAN  MISSION. 

"YACHTING"  IN  MELANESIA. 

THE  QUEENSLAND  LABOR  TRADE. 

SANTA  CRUZ. 


137 


A  BRIEF  GRAMMAR  OF  SA'A  AND  ULAWA. 
THE  ALPHABET. 

No  letters  are  used  in  this  dictionary  with  arbitrarily  assigned  values. 
In  all  the  books  printed  in  the  two  languages  for  the  use  of  native 
readers  two  italic  letters  are  used,  n  and  m;  n  is  printed  for  ng  the  palatal 
nasal  to  which  n  frequently  mutates,  and  vi  is  printed  for  mzv  which 
represents  a  lightly  vocalized  m.  In  this  grammar  and  in  the  dictionary 
these  two  letters  are  given  in  full  as  ng  andmw  which  are  to  be  under- 
stood as  representing  those  sounds  of  which  the  value  has  hitherto  been 
represented  in  Sa*a  and  Ulawa  texts  by  the  italic  letters  n  and  m. 

The  vowels  are  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  with  the  Italian  sounds.  All  of  these 
vowels  may  be  long  or  short,  the  long  sound  being  represented  by 
doubling  the  vowel.  Both  Sa*a  and  Ulawa  are  fond  of  vowel  sounds; 
many  words  consist  only  of  vowels.  The  habit  of  dropping  certain 
consonants  is  largely  responsible  for  this  excess  of  vowel  sounds. 
Closed  syllables  do  not  exist  and  every  word  ends  with  a  vowel. 

In  Sa'a  the  vowel  a  in  certain  words  changes  to  e  when  i  or  u  or  the 
verbal  particle  ko  precedes  it;  the  vowel  following  this  a  is  always 
either  i  or  u,  this  a  is  marked  in  the  grammar  and  in  the  dictionary  by 
the  employment  of  the  dieresis,  a.  In  many  words  where  the  differ- 
ence between  the  Sa'a  and  Ulawa  forms  consists  only  of  the  change  of 
this  a  to  e  the  Sa'a  form  is  the  only  one  recorded.  This  change  of 
vowel  is  known  to  the  people  of  Ulawa,  but  they  are  not  so  careful 
about  its  observance  as  are  the  people  of  Sa'a;  in  certain  words  they 
change  a  to  e  where  there  is  no  preceding  i  or  u,  thus  mat  hither,  Sa'a 
-po'o  mat  on  this  side,  Ulawa  po'o  met.  The  change  of  vowel  may  be 
made  in  Ulawa  at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  but  the  genius  of  the  lan- 
guage is  to  refuse  to  make  it  at  the  end  of  the  word;  U.  hdnua  village, 
i  henua  in  the  village,  S.  i  henuCy  but  in  Ulawa  the  addition  of  the 
demonstrative  ni  causes  the  final  a  to  change  to  ^,  i  henueni  in  that 
village.  The  suffixed  pronouns  du  of  the  first  singular  and  a  of  the  third 
singular  change  in  Sa'a  to  eu  and  e  respectively  after  i  or  w,  but  Ulawa 
does  not  observe  this  rule.  In  some  words  where  Sa'a  changes  final  e 
to  a  Ulawa  keeps  to  e;  nike  mother,  S.  nikana  his  mother,  U.  nikena. 

The  diphthongs  are  ae,  ai,  ao,  au,  ei,  ou,  as  in  sae,  mat,  hao^  rauy  meiy 
hou,  pronounced  respectively  as  in  the  English  words  eye,  iron,  hour, 
how,  hey,  oh. 

The  consonants  are  h;  k;  d,  t;  p,  q;  w;  1,  r;  s;  m,  mw,  n,  ng. 

The  k  is  hard  and  there  is  no  g;  where  the  Melanesian  g  occurs  in 
other  languages,  there  is  a  decided  break  in  the  pronunciation  of  the 
cognate  word  in  Sa'a  and  Ulawa;  <?.  g.,  Mota  iga  fish,  Sa'a  i'e,  Ulawa  i'a. 

Note. — This  grammar  has  been  compiled  from  the  larger  separate  grammars  published  by 
the  present  writer. 

139 


140  GRAMMAR    OF    SA  A    AND    ULAWA. 

There  is  no  preface  of  ;/  in  the  sound  of  d,  which  holds  of  all  the  lan- 
guages of  Malaita  and  is  in  contrast  with  the  principle  of  prefacing  the 
mutes  with  the  nasal  of  their  proper  series  which  extends  in  Melanesia 
as  far  as  Fiji.  The  nearest  English  equivalent  to  the  sound  of  d  in 
Sa*a  and  Ulawa  is  dr;  before  i  d  is  sounded  as  ch  in  church. 

To  pronounce  the  t  the  tongue  is  pressed  against  the  teeth  and  the 
breath  forced  outward,  the  teeth  being  kept  fairly  close  together,  then 
the  tongue  is  relaxed  and  dropped  and  the  breath  escapes  with  an 
explosive  sound.     Sa'a  often  prefers  d  where  Ulawa  has  t. 

The  sound  represented  by  q  is  pzv  and  p  and  q  are  interchangeable  in 
certain  words,  e.  g.,  pongi,  qongi  to  promise.  In  some  words  Ulawa  has 
p  where  Sa'a  prefers  q,  e.  g.,  U.  pito,  S.  qito  sprout. 

The  sounds  of  1  and  r  are  distinct,  and  both  are  trilled.  There  is  a 
changeof  Iton  in  Ulawa,  z  daluma  for  i  danuma  in  the  middle,  and  Ulawa 
at  times  has  1  where  Sa'a  has  r,  U.  tataloha,  S.  tataroha  news,  report. 

In  addition  to  the  three  nasals  ng,  n,  m  there  is  a  variant  upon  the 
labial  nasal,  mw  a  semivocalization  of  the  clear m.  The  pronunciation 
of  the  palatal  nasal  ng  is  that  of  ng  in  sing. 

Beside  the  loss  of  the  Melanesian  g,  as  shown  before,  the  t,  1,  k  and 
h  are  likewise  dropped  in  many  words  and  the  loss  of  the  letter  is  showTi 
by  a  break  in  the  pronunciation  and  indicated  to  the  eye  by  the  employ- 
ment of  inverted  comma  *;  'o'z  to  break,  Fl.  goti;  *aa  green  parrot,  San 
Cr.  kaka.  This  break  has  not  been  marked  in  the  books  used  by  the 
natives,  but  because  of  its  importance  in  comparison  of  the  languages  it 
has  been  indicated  in  this  dictionary.  In  the  reduplication  of  verbs 
the  inner  consonant  is  often  dropped  in  the  former  member  of  the  dupli- 
cated form  and  there  is  a  corresponding  break  in  the  pronunciation; 
Florida  also  drops  the  inner  consonant  in  reduplication  ,but  one  does 
not  hear  any  such  break  in  the  sound  as  in  Sa'a  and  Ulawa. 

Contractions  are  common,  especially  when  the  locative  i  is  used; 
lai  for  lae  i,  tai  for  tae  i,  ke'i  for  ke'u  i,  pe^e  for  pe^ie,  sdune  for  sdunie 

kill  him. 

ARTICLES. 

Sa'a      {a)  Demonstrative  Sing,  nga,  me'i,  mi,  hoi,  hou,  hdi. 

Plur.  mui,  mu,  mo. 

(b)  Personal  a. 

Ulawa  (a)  Demonstrative  Sing,  nga,  mdsi,  hoi,  hou,  hdi. 

Plur.  nizvai,  mzva,  mo. 

(b)  Personal  a. 

I .  In  Sa'a  nouns  in  the  singular  are  used  without  an  article,  in  Ulawa 
there  is  a  more  frequent  use  of  nga  in  the  singular,  and  parts  of  the  body 
are  preceded  by  nga,  which  is  not  the  case  in  Sa'a.  In  Sa'a  nga  signi- 
fies a  or  any  and  is  used  only  in  this  sense.  This  detail  is  characteristic 
of  the  language  as  a  whole,  Sa'a  is  far  more  particular  in  its  usages  and 
is  more  highly  specialized  than  Ulawa.  Nga  is  used  with  the  inter- 
rogative taa,  taha  what,  with  ihei  U.  where,  ngaihei  who?  The  nouns 
ini  S.,  He  U.,  both  meaning  one,  are  used  with  nga;  ta'ena  ngaini  S. 
ta*ana  ngaile  U.  every  one;  laa  U.,  a  person,  is  preceded  by  nga. 


GRAMMAR    OF    SA  A    AND    ULAWA.  I4I 

2.  me'i  and  mdsi  denote  a  part,  a  piece;  both  also  serve  as  diminu- 
tives in  either  a  depreciatory  or  an  endearing  sense,  7ne'i  keni  reu  3. 
handmaid,  7nasi  mzvane  inau  dear  hid.  The  form  mesi  may  be  used  even 
when  the  preceding  vowel  is  not  i  or  w,  mesi  kaleku  my  child.  Nga 
and  inwai  may  precede  mdsi;  nga  vidsi  taha  what  thing  is  it,  mzvai  mesi 
sae  different  minds. 

3.  mi  is  found  with  sala.,  mi  sala  a  piece  of  cloth. 

4.  hoi  is  used  of  things  spherical  in  shape,  hoi  niii  a  coconut,  hoi  kue 
a  hen's  egg,  7iga  hoi  tahani  what  fruit  is  that.^  Also  in  connection  with 
other  substantives  naming  objects  not  globular,  hoi  le  a  fish,  hoi  nemo 
a  rain  squall. 

hou  is  used  more  commonly  in  Ulawa,  hoi  hudi  S.,  hou  hiidi  U.  a 
banana;  houhi  a  yam,  hou  pua  an  areca  nut;  but  Sa'a  has  hou  'atea  a 
coconut  water  bottle,  hou  zvei  a  bamboo  water-carrier. 

5.  hdi  in  the  sense  of  a,  an,  one,  is  used  with  certain  words;  A^'z  seulehi 
an  evening,  hdidinge  a  day,  hdi  lama  a  pool,  nga  hdizvala  a  word,  hdi 
holaa  a  calm.  In  some  places  where  Sa'a  has  hdi  Ulawa  uses  hau; 
hdidinge  S.,  haudinga  U.  a  day;  and  this  hdi  may  be  a  contraction  of  hau 
i,  where  i  is  the  genitive  and  hau  denotes  a  period  of  time. 

6.  7naa  eye  or  point  is  used  with  nga  to  indicate  one,  of  sticks  or 
matches;  also  with  the  genitive  i  S.  or  ni  U.,  7naai  laenga,  a  going  (Ulawa 
generally  has  nga  preceding  maa);  'olu  maai  qaoolanga  three  prayings. 

7.  wwi,  mu,  mzuai,  mwa  all  show  plurality;  7iga  may  be  prefixed;  wm 
is  the  form  commonly  used  in  Sa'a,  and,  as  is  true  of  w«7Z,  is  always 
used  before  a  vowel  or  h;  mo  is  used  with  words  beginning  with  the 
vowel  0,  and  is  more  commonly  used  in  Sa'a  than  in  Ulawa. 

8.  The  personal  article  is  a.  This  is  used  with  all  proper  names,  male 
or  female,  native  or  foreign,  and  also  with  nouns  expressing  relationship 
or  kindred.  Any  common  noun  becomes  by  the  use  of  the  personal 
article  a  a  proper  noun;  a  palopalo  the  priest,  a  me'i  zcala  the  Word,  a 
porona  the  person,  so-and-so.  After  the  usage  common  to  the  Oceanic 
family  the  employment  of  the  personal  article  with  the  common  noun 
meaning  thing  supplies  the  locution  for  an  indefinite  personality,  a  ola 
so-and-so. 

NOUNS. 

I.  Nouns  with  possessive  suffixes:  Certain  nouns  take  the  suffixed 
pronouns  denoting  the  possessor.     These  are  nouns  denoting: 

a.  Parts  of  the  body:  maa  eye,  7naa7nu  your  eye;  niine  hand,  nimana 
his  hand;  qd^u  head,  qd^ukii  my  head. 

h.  Certain  states  or  doings  of  men,  life,  death,  speech,  custom,  goings : 
mae  to  die,  maetana  his  death;  zcala  word,  zvalaku  my  word;  lae  to  go, 
laehana  his  journey, 

c.  Position,  end,  middle,  top:  ngengedena  its  end,  danumeku  my 
waist,  i  hahona  on  top  of  it. 


142  GRAMMAR    OF    SA  A    AND    ULAWA. 

d.  All  the  words  expressing  relationship  or  kindred  except  those  for 
wife  and  husband  and  also  mzuela  S.  'elekale  U.  child. 

These  nouns  are  marked  in  the  dictionary  with  (ku).  Certain  of 
this  class  are  marked  with  {na,  ni)  which  denotes  that  the  pronoun  is 
suffixed  only  in  the  third  person,  and  in  the  case  of  ni  is  used  of  things 
only.  In  the  case  of  the  remaining  nouns  possession  is  denoted  by  the 
addition  of  the  ordinary  personal  pronouns. 

2.  Formation  of  nouns:  Nouns  which  have  a  special  termination 
showing  them  to  be  nouns  substantive  are  {a)  verbal  nouns,  and  {h) 
independent  nouns. 

a.  Verbal  nouns  are  formed  from  verbs  by  the  terminations  ngUy  tdy 
lay  lauy  hd,  hady  a:  mae  to  die,  maenga  death,  maeta  death  feast,  maelaa 
S.  maeha  U.  sickness;  si'o  to  harm,  siohaa  evil  plight;  hatale  to  go  along 
the  beach,  hatalea,  shore,  coast. 

The  form  Id  generally  denotes  the  gerundive  and  always  has  the 
suffixed  pronoun  attached.  Similarly  hd  generally  denotes  a  gerundive 
and  is  seldom  used  without  the  suffixed  pronoun.  In  the  dictionary 
words  ending  in  hd,  Idy  tdy  which  are  never  used  without  a  suffixed  pro- 
noun, have  the  hyphen  attached. 

There  are  certain  adjectives  to  which  the  termination  nga  is  attached, 
diana  good,  diananga  goodness;  *aela  bad,  'aelanga  badness,  pdine 
pdinanga  badness;  but  it  is  probable  that  these  adjectives  are  really 
verbs.     (See  diana.) 

b.  Independent  nouns:  The  only  termination  is  na,  and  this  is 
(i)  added  to  nouns  which  express  relationship  or  kindred,  and  (2) 
appears  also  to  be  attached  to  cardinal  numerals  to  form  ordinals. 

1.  Nouns  so  formed  are  always  preceded  by  certain  prefixes  which 
mark  reciprocity  of  relationship  or  of  kindred,  ma,  mwa,  hd'i,  the  nu- 
meral ro  two,  or  the  plural  articles  mu  and  mzva:  nike  mother,  ro  hdH 
nikena  mother  and  child,  ro  hd^i  nikana  ineu  my  wife  and  child;  mw 
mwa  'asine  brethren. 

2.  Numerals:  'o/m  three,  'olune  third. 

As  stated  before,  gerundives  are  formed  by  the  addition  of  the  suf- 
fixed pronouns  to  forms  in  Id,  hd.  Tala'ae  to  begin,  tala' aehana  its 
beginning;  ha^auri  to  save,  ha'aurileku  my  savior.  The  third  person 
possessive  is  added  to  noun  forms  in  hd:  repo  ripe,  repohaana  its  old 
age,  maturity.  To  neuter  verbs  the  suffix  ni  or  H  is  added:  horo  to 
kill,  horo'i  v.  tr.,  horo'ilana  the  killing  of  him,  sdu  to  kill,  sdu7ii  v.  tr., 
sdunilada  the  killing  of  them. 

In  Ulawa  certain  nouns  have  double  noun  termination:  weesi  to 
catch  fish,  zveesingaha  fishing;  alida  to  travel  by  sea,  alidangaha  a  voy- 
age; tale  to  be  short  of,  talengaha  a  shortage. 

3.  Genitive  relation:  The  genitive  relation  of  nouns  one  to  another 
is  efi^ected  by  the  use  of  the  preposition  ni  or  the  shorter  form  i,  the 
latter  being  used  more  commonly  in  Sa'a,  mzvane  ni  Sa'a  a  Sa'a  man, 
zvalo  ni  'a'a'o  a  fishing-line,  poloi  haa  a  piece  of  money,  *u^ui  he'u  a  star. 


GRAMMAR   OF    SA*A   AND    ULAWA.  I43 

Both  of  these  forms  are  also  used  to  denote  purpose:  noko  deu  ni  lae 
I  am  making  to  go,  *oke  lae  zvai  {wau  i)  leesie,  go  and  see  it. 

Other  forms  of  the  genitive  are  li,  si:  hdulihane,  maaliholo,  qd^usi 
hemie,  tangisi  hudi. 

A  genitive  relation  is  also  shown  by  the  use  of  the  suffixed  pronoun 
of  the  third  person  singular  or  plural  in  agreement  with  the  idea 
expressed  in  the  second  noun  of  the  pair;  i  reune  tala  by  the  side  of  the 
way,  ulolada  mditale  the  cry  of  the  poor.  The  suffixed  pronoun  may  be 
used  in  the  singular  when  the  idea  is  collective  or  the  second  noun  car- 
ries the  sense  of  totality,  ilengine  mu  nume  on  the  tops  of  the  houses. 

The  ordinar>^  possessive  idea  is  shown  by  simple  juxtaposition: 
nima  inau  my  house,  'usu  inge'ie  his  dog. 

The  instrumental  prefix  i  is  common:  kdu  to  hook,  ikeu  a  hook  for 
gathering  fruit;  ddnu  to  bale,  idenu  a  baler. 

4.  Plural:  Definite  plurality  is  marked  by  the  presence  of  the  arti- 
cles mui,  mUy  mzvai,  mwa,  used  of  both  persons  and  things;  nga  may  be 
prefixed  to  these  and  the  word  htinge,  many,  may  be  added:  mu  'inoni, 
nga  mil  'inoniy  men,  mzva  hdnua  hunga  the  crowd,  everybod3^ 

The  numeral  walu  eight  is  used  to  express  an  indefinite  number: 
walu  henue  all  the  lands,  walu  malau  all  the  islands,  the  world,  zvalu- 
tana  ola  S.,  waluteni  ola  U.  every  thing. 

To  a  noun  dhuta-  denoting  totality  {dhu  to  be  complete)  the  pro- 
noun of  the  third  person  singular  and  of  all  persons  in  the  plural  is 
suffixed  in  agreement  with  the  noun:  dhutana  sapeku  my  whole  body, 
dhutana  sapeda  all  their  bodies,  sapeda  dhutada  the  bodies  of  them  all, 
dhutakara'i  both  of  us,  dhutamelu  all  of  us. 

To  to'ohuu  S.  real,  nga  is  suffixed  and  the  personal  pronoun  na  is 
added:  to'ohuungana  nga  ola,  the  real  thing,  mu  to'ohuunge'i  ola  real 
things. 

To  itei  S.  which,  ta  is  suffixed  and  the  personal  pronoun  na  is  added: 
iteitana  one,  any.  This  is  used  only  with  the  negative  particles  ka'a, 
sa'a,  and  thus  comes  to  mean,  no  one,  nothing:  e  ka'a  iteitana  nga  meH 
ola  there  is  nothing  at  all.  With  this  may  be  compared  the  use  of 
isei  in  Mota  as  the  indefinite  pronoun,  some  one. 

A  noun  hike  is  used  with  the  suffixed  pronoun  to  express  of,  from 
among:  e  ro  ini  hikada  two  men  of  them. 

Two  nouns,  mwai  U.  mzvei  S.  and  kei,  are  used  with  the  adjective 
tata'ala  or  with  its  short  form  ta'a  to  express  an  endearing  or  a  commis- 
erating sense;  mwai,  mzvei  being  used  of  men,  kei  of  women:  m'u;ai 
tata'ala  inau  my  poor  fellow,  kei  taa  pdine  dear  lady. 

Sa'a  has  a  plural  in  maeni  which  is  generally  used  in  the  vocative: 
maeni  'inoni  sirs,  maeni  mivela  children. 

In  mwela  child  the  plural  is  formed  by  reduplication,  mwemzvela  S. 
children. 

A  unit  is  expressed  in  Sa'a  by  'ata:  'enite  'ata  how  many,  'e  ro  'ata 
two. 


144  GRAMMAR    OF    SA  A    AND    ULAWA. 

Certain  nouns  meaning  one,  tie  U.,  He  U.,  'eta  S.,  ini  S.,  are  used  with 
or  without  ngay  and  with  7iga  mu  or  nga  mwa:  ngaite  ola  a  different 
thing,  ta  mdi  ngaile  give  me  one,  nga  mwaite  'inoni  certain  persons,  nga 
mzvaile  some,  nga' eta  'inoni  another,  a  different  man,  nga  muini  some. 

Alai  U.,  ala  U.,  alei  S.  is  used  as  a  noun  of  multitude:  alai  Mwado'a 
you  people  of  Mwado'a,  alaile  inau  my  people,  ala  mwane  you  men, 
alei  'inoni  you  people,  alei  ola  the  persons,  alei  saanau  the  young  men. 

The  word  ngdu  is  used  familiarly  to  children  of  each  sex  as  a  voca- 
tive: ro  ngdu  you  two  children. 

5.  There  is  no  grammatical  gender:  The  words  mwane  male,  keni  and 
qaga  female,  are  added  when  the  noun  does  not  carry  a  sex  distinction. 

6.  Relationship  or  kindred:  With  the  two  exceptions  of  mama' ay 
ma'a  father  and  nike  mother  in  vocative  employment,  the  nouns  of 
relationship  are  always  used: 

a.  With  a  suffixed  pronoun,  'asiku  my  brother,  never  'asi; 

b.  With  the  termination  nd  and  with  a  reciprocal  prefix  hd'i  ovmzva: 
ro  hd'i  nikana  mother  and  child,  ro  mwa  'adine  brethren,  mu  mwa'asine 
brothers. 

The  terms  mama'a  father  and  teitei  in  the  vocative  are  addressed  by 
the  parent  hypocoristically  to  the  boy  or  girl. 

The  word  denoting  friend  is  always  used  with  the  suffixed  pronoun, 
malahuku  my  friend,  ro  hd'i  malahujie  the  two  friends. 

PRONOUNS. 
According  as  they  are  employed,   pronouns   may  be  classified   as, 
(a)  those  used  as  the  subject  or  object  of  a  verb;  (b)  those  suffixed  to 
a  verb  or  to  a   preposition   as  objects;   (c)  those  suffixed   to  nouns 
substantive. 

A.   PRONOUNS  USED  AS  SUBJECT  OR  OBJECT  OF  A  VERB. 
Sa'a.  Ulawa. 

Singular:  Singular: 

1.  ineu,  nou,  710,  ne.  i.  inau,  nau,  na,  ne. 

2.  i' oe,  '0.  2.  toe,  '0. 

3.  inge'ie,    nge' ie,    inge' i,    nge' i,  3.  inge'ia,  nge'ia,  nge,  e. 

nge,  e. 
Dual:  Dual: 

Inclusive:    i.  ikure,  kure.  Inclusive:    i.  ikara'i,  karat,  ikara,  kara. 

Exclusive:   l.  i' emere' i,    ' emere' i,   ' emeru' e.  Exclusive:  l.  i'emeTe'i,'emere'i,  mere'i,mere. 

meru^  e,  mere' i,  mere. 

2.  i'omoro'i,     '  omoro' i,     mora' i,  2.  i'omoro'i,   'omoro'i,   moro'i, 

moro,   i'omoru'e,   '  omoru  e,  moro. 

moru'  e. 

3.  ikireru  e,  kireru  e,  kereru'e.  3.  ikoro'i,  koro'i,  koro. 
Plural:                  ......                                       P'ural: 

Inclusive:    i.  iki'e,  ki'e,  ikolu,  kolu.  Inclusive:    i.  iki'a,  ki'a,  ika'elu,  ka'elu. 

Exclusive:  l.  i'emi,    'emi,    Vemelu,  'emelu.           Exclusive:   I.  i'ami,   'ami,    i'emelu,    'evielu, 
melu.                                                                            melu. 

2.  i'omu,  'omu,  i'omolu,  'omolu,                              2.  i'amu,  'amu,  i'omolu,  'omolu, 

molu.  molu. 

3.  ikire,  kire,  ikira'elu,  kira'elu.  3.  ikire'i,    ikira,   kira,   ikira'elu, 

kira'elu,  kelu,  kilu. 

I.  The  use  of  the  initial  i  gives  distinctness  and  force.  The  forms 
beginning  with  i  are  never  used  by  themselves  as  the  subject,  but  are 


GRAMMAR    OF    SA  A    AND    ULAWA.  I45 

always  accompanied  by  the  shorter  forms  without  i,  these  latter  are 
used  as  subject.     Similarly  inge'ie  is  always  followed  by  e. 

2.  The  forms  in  the  singular  are  never  used  as  the  object  of  a  verb  or 
of  a  preposition  with  the  single  exception  of  *o.  Forms  without  /are  used 
in  the  dual  and  plural  first  and  second  persons  as  the  object  of  a  verb. 

3.  The  forms  no  and  7ie  are  used  with  the  verbal  particles  of  the  same 
vowel  facies,  no  with  ko  of  general  time,  ne  with  ke  and  ke'i  of  future 
time,  na  with  ^a  of  general  time,  and  ne  with  'e  future. 

4.  Nge  is  used  before  proper  names,  and  the  personal  article  a 
coalesces,  ngea  Awao  e  lae  Awao  has  gone.  It  is  also  used  in  phrases: 
so  nge  well  then,  nge  ni  'oto  that  is  it,  e  mae  nge  he  is  done  for  now. 

5.  E  is  used  as  the  subject  of  a  verb.  It  is  also  used  following  the 
longer  forms  for  the  sake  of  emphasis:  inge'ie  nge'ie  e  'unue  he  said  it. 
It  is  equivalent  also  to  there  is,  it  is:  i?  madoro  it  is  hot,  e  gale  ola  there 
is  nothing.  It  follows  a  noun  as  a  secondary  subject:  nevio  e  nemo 
the  rain  rains,  mzva  hdnua  e  ruru  the  people  came  together;  similarly 
it  may  follow  a  pronoun,  kiratei  e  lae  who  went? 

6.  The  forms  in  -lu  denote  a  more  restricted  number  of  persons, 
but  they  are  not  used  to  form  a  trinal  number.  Sa*a  is  more  careful 
than  Ulawa  in  the  proper  use  of  these  different  forms. 

7.  The  pronouns  of  the  third  person  singular  and  plural  may  be  used 
of  impersonal  or  of  inanimate  objects.  Kire  is  used  to  form  a  passive: 
kire  'unue  it  has  been  said,  lit.  they  have  said  it,  mu  le  kire  hahi'i  'oto 
have  the  fish  been  cooked?  Kire  followed  by  the  personal  article  a 
and  ola  thing  or  a  proper  name  is  used  also  to  denote  a  company  or 
party:  kiraa  ola.  So-and-so's  party,  kiraa  Dora  Dora's  people. 

8.  The  forms  in  i  are  used  to  denote  possession:  poo  ineu  my  pig, 
*elekale  lemere'i  the  child  of  us  two,  poro  inge'ie  her  husband,  hu'e  i'oe 
thy  wife. 

9.  A  chief  or  person  of  importance  is  always  addressed  in  the  dual, 
moro  or  molu;  and  a  mother,  either  by  herself  or  with  her  child,  is 
addressed  as  moro. 

B.  PRONOUNS  SUFFIXED  TO  VERBS  OR  TO  PREPOSITIONS  AS  OBJECT. 
Sa'a.  Ulawa. 

Singular:  Singular: 


I. 

au. 

I. 

au. 

2. 

'0. 

2. 

'0. 

Dual: 
Inclusive: 

3- 
I. 

a. 

kure. 

Dual: 
Inclusive: 

3- 
I. 

a. 

kara'i,  kara. 

Exclusive: 

I. 

'enuTeH,  'emeru'e,  viere'i,  mere. 

Exclusive: 

I. 

'emere'i,  mere'i,  mere. 

2. 

'omoro'i,  moro'i,  vioro. 

2. 

'omoro'i,  moro'i,  moro. 

Plural: 
Inclusive: 
Exclusive: 

3- 

I. 
I. 

2. 

Tdru'e,  rdru'i. 

ki'e,  kolu. 

'emi,  melu. 

'oniu,  'omolu,  molu. 

Plural: 
Inclusive: 
Exclusive: 

3- 

I. 
I. 

2. 

raru'a,  raru'i. 

ki'a,  ka'elu. 
'ami,  melu. 
dmu,  'omolv,  molu. 

3- 

rd,  ra'elu,  'i. 

3- 

ra,  ra'elu,  'i. 

Examples  of  usage  are:  noko  leesi'o  I  see  thee,  e  'unue  hunieu  he  told 
me.     When  the  verb  ends  in  a  and  au  is  suffixed  only  one  a  is  sounded. 


146  GRAMMAR    OF    SA*A    AND    ULAWA. 

The  form  a  is  suffixed  to  a  transitive  verb  as  an  anticipatory  object: 
nou  kaa  leesie  nga  Hnoni  I  did  not  see-him  a  person,  ineh  helesie  'oto 
mil  old  we  have  done-it  the  things. 

The  forms  a,  rd  may  be  used  of  inanimate  or  impersonal  objects. 

The  form  *i  is  used  in  place  of  rd  when  things  and  not  persons  are 
the  object  of  the  verb:  lae  wau  hunii  go  and  fetch  them. 

C.   PRONOUNS   SUFFIXED   TO   NOUNS   OR    TO   VERBAL   NOUNS   USED   AS   PREP- 
OSITIONS,  OR  TO  GERUNDIVES. 

Sa'a.  Ulawa. 

Singular:  Singular: 

1.  ku.  I-  ku. 

2.  mu.  2-  "!«• 

3.  nd.  3-  ««• 
Dual:  Dual:  ,      <•   , 

Inclusive:    i.  kara'i.  Inclusive:    I.  karat,  kara. 

Exclusive:  i.  mere'i.  Exclusive:  i.  rnere'i,  mere. 

2.  moro'i,  moro.  2.  moro'i,  moro. 

3.  ddru'e.  3-  daru'i. 
Plural:  Plural:    . 

Inclusive:    i.  ka,  ka'elu.  Inclusive:    i.ka,kaelu. 

Exclusive:  i.  mdmt,  melu.  Exclusive:  i.  mdmt,  melu. 

2.  miu,  molu.  2.  mtu,  molu. 

3.  dd,  da'elu;  ni.  3-  da,  da'elu;  ni. 

1.  These  are  the  pronouns  denoting  possession  and  they  are  suffixds 
to  a  certain  class  of  nouns  only,  those  which  denote  the  names  of  paret 
of  the  body,  or  of  family  relationships,  or  of  things  in  close  relation- 
ship to  the  possessor;  in  all  other  cases  possession  is  denoted  by  the  use 
of  the  ordinary  personal  pronouns. 

2.  Of  the  plural  forms  those  ending  in  lu  denote  a  restriction  in  the 
number  of  the  persons  concerned. 

3.  When  things  are  in  question  ni  is  used  in  place  of  dd:  lai  ne'i  i 
talani  put  the  things  in  their  places. 

4.  Verbal  nouns  used  as  prepositions:  honotaku  opposite  me,  to 
meet  me,  honota  is  in  form  a  verbal  noun  but  it  is  not  in  independent 
use  as  a  word. 

5.  In  words  like  sieku  at  my  house,  saadaelu  at  their  house, 
maraamu  by  yourself,  sisingana  over  against  it,  the  roots  are  evidently 
nouns  but  they  do  not  occur  in  independent  use.  In  the  dictionary 
all  such  words  are  followed  by  a  hyphen,  e.  g.,  saa-. 

D.  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

These  are  'zV,  'ienini,  ni  S.,  inihou,  nihou,  ni  U.,  this. 

ngeeiia,  waune  S.;  inizvauy  niwaUy  wauni  U.,  that. 

1.  'ienini  is  more  forcible  than  'ie;  ni  is  used  suffixed  to  nouns,  to 
personal  pronouns,  to  uri  thus,  and  to  siiri  today,  in  Ulawa  it  is  also 
suffixed  to  adjectives  and  adverbs. 

2.  ena  is  used  by  itself  in  Sa'a  as  a  demonstrative,  nge  nou  lae  mdi 
ena  that  is  why  I  came;  wau  is  the  adverb  meaning  there.  In  certain 
villages  in  Ulawa  a  demonstrative  ini  is  used  in  the  sense  of  "that  is  it." 


GRAMMAR    OF    Sa'a    AND    ULAWA.  I47 

3.  nd  is  suffixed  to  nouns  and  pronouns  and  to  certain  adverbs  to 
give  point  and  directness,  its  use  is  more  common  in  Sa'a  than  inUlawa: 
mivalana  the  people;  a  mwaend  that  person,  mo  ola  'oko  qao'i  ne  the 
things  that  thou  doest;  taaune  over  there,  tirhie,  urinena  thus,  in  that 
manner. 

Na  is  also  used  after  the  negatives  ha  ike,  qaike,  ha  ike  na,  ha  ike  ena 
no,  not  that;  and  after  *oto,  inge'i  *oto  na  that  is  it. 

E.  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

The  words  used  are  tei  who;  iaa  S.,  taha  U.,  what.  The  personal 
article  a  makes  atei  who  (singular)  kiratei  plural.  Both  of  these  words 
are  nouns. 

1 .  atei  is  used  for  whose,  ola  atei  whose  thing,  atei  ola  'ie  to  whom  does 
this  belong?  Tei  stands  for  the  name  of  the  person  and  atei  means, 
what  is  the  name  ?  atei  moro  lae  mdi  who  came  with  you  ?  The  demon- 
strative ni  may  be  added:  atei  ni  satamu  what  (who)  is  your  nam.e? 

In  Sa'a  atei  has  an  indefinite  use,  atei  e  manata'inie  who  knows! 

2.  With  taa,  taha,  the  definite  article  nga  is  used;  nga  taa,  nga  ola 
taa,  7iga  taha  w^hat?  The  demonstrative  ni  may  be  added;  nga  taa  ni 
e  'unue  what  said  he?  Taa,  taha,  may  mean  of  what  sort?  hoi  la 
i  aha7ii  whiit  sort  offish?  With  the  adverb  uri  thus  taa,  taha,  make 
nritaa,  uritaha  of  what  sort?  how?  in  what  way?  In  Ulawa  assent  is 
shown  by  taha  with  'oto,  a  particle  denoting  completed  action;  inge'ia 
tahato  '0  'unueni  it  is  as  you  have  said. 

3.  In  Ulawa  the  interrogative  adverb  ihei  is  used  as  a  pronoun: 
nga  mzvane  ihei  ni  what  man  ?  ngaihei  nizveu  who  is  that  there  ?  When 
the  question  is  which  or  where  of  two  things  Sa'a  uses  itei  and  Ulawa 
ihei:  'oko  sare  ngdu  itei  what  (where)  will  you  eat?  In  Sa'a  nge  is 
prefixed  to  itei:  ngeitei  mzvane  what  man?  ngeitei  lioa  what  spirit? 

F.  INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 

The  uses  of  ini,  'eta  S.,  He,  ite  U.,  one,  have  been  dealt  with  under 
nouns.  With  the  exception  of  He  these  words  prefixed  by  7iga,  nga  mu, 
nga  mzvai,  are  used  as  signifying  some,  other,  different. 

1.  Hdlu  means  some.  In  Sa'a  the  genitive  i  is  suffixed:  nga  mu 
helui  'inoni  S.,  nga  mzva  hdlu  'inoni  U.,  some  men.  The  pronoun  na 
may  be  suffixed:  hdluna  ngaini,  hdluna  ngaile  one  here  and  there. 

2.  //nVawa  is  used  in  Sa'a  with  the  negative  particle  ka'a  as  meaning 
no  one:  e  ka'a  iteitana  ngaini  there  is  no  one. 

3.  Ta'ena,  ta* eta' ena  S.,  ta'ana,  ta'ata'aria  U.,  mean  every:  ta'ena 
ngaini  every  person.  Ola  thing  and  le'u  S.  lehu  U.  are  used  in  the 
sense  of  any:  ?Jow  ka'a  to'oana  nga  le'u  I  have  not  anything,  e  ta  nga 
lehu  ana  he  took  some  of  it. 

4.  Mzvamwanga  S.  manganga  U.  are  used  with  ini.  He,  to  express  the 
sense  of  a  few:  7nwamzvangaini  e  saaie  only  a  few  know  it. 


148  GRAMMAR    OF    Sa'a    AND    ULAWA. 

G.  RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

There  are  no  relative  pronouns.  Their  place  is  supplied  by  various 
locutions. 

1.  The  suffixed  pronoun:  ineu  'ie  kire  usunge'inieu  mei  I  am  he  whom 
they  sent.  The  addition  of  the  demonstratives  na  S.  7ii  U.  serves  to 
make  the  meaning  clearer:  inge'ie  a  porona  kire  ko  'unue  he  is  the  person 
whom  they  speak  of. 

2.  By  the  use  of  a  coordinate  clause :  lemi  'ie  mzvala  e  tahangie  'asi  we 
are  the  people  who  came  through  the  sea. 

H.  POSSESSIVES. 

There  are  three  possessives  in  Sa*a  and  Ulawa. 

I.  The  first  is  used  only  of  things  to  eat  and  drink,  with  the  stem  'a 
to  which  the  pronouns  are  suffixed.  In  the  first  and  second  person 
singular  V  S.  *a  U.  is  added,  and  this  V  or  *a  is  replaced  by  'i  when 
several  things  are  in  view  for  one  person  to  eat. 

Sa'a.  Ulawa. 


Singular:  Singular: 


I. 

'dku'e,  'dku'i. 

2. 

'dmu'e,  'dmu'i. 

Dual: 
Inclusive: 

3- 
I. 

'ana. 

'akara'i,  'akaru'e. 

Exclusive: 

I. 

'amere'i,  'ameru'e. 

Plural: 
Inclusive: 
Exclusive: 

2. 

3- 

I. 
I. 

2. 

3- 

'amoro'i,  'amoro. 
'adarue,  'adaru'i. 

'aka,  'aka'elu. 
'amami,  'amelu. 
'dmiu,  'amolu. 
'ada,  'ada'elu. 

1.  'aku'a,  'aku'i. 

2.  'amu'a,  'amu'i. 

3.  'ana. 


Dual: 

Inclusive:    I.  'akara'i. 
Exclusive:  I.  'amere'i. 

2.  'amoro'i,  'amoro. 

3.  'adaru'a,  'adaru'i. 
Plural: 

Inclusive:    i.  'aka,  'aka'elu. 
Exclusive:  l.  'amami,  'amelu. 

2.  'amiu,  'amolu. 

3.  'ada,  'ada'elu. 

Examples:  hoi  niu  'eku'e  a  coconut  for  me  to  eat,  *o  ta  *  amu'i  take 
them  to  eat. 

In  Ulawa  the  change  of  'a  to  V  after  i  or  u  in  the  first  and  second 
singular  is  optional. 

When  the  sense  relates  to  food  in  general  and  not  to  a  particular  meal 
the  ordinary  personal  pronouns  are  employed:  mu  ngeulaa  i'emelu  our 
food. 

2.  The  second  possessive  is  nd  with  which  a  suffixed  pronoun  is  used 
only  as  meaning  mine,  or,  for  me,  and  never  with  a  noun,  as  e.  g.y  Maori 
tokuy  toku  rima  my  hand.  It  is  declined  in  the  same  way  as  the  pre- 
ceding: moola  nana  atei  things  for  whom?  moola  ndmu'i  things  for  you, 
da  nakarai  take  for  you  and  me,  dsu  nemue  work  for  you.  In  the 
third  person  plural  an  additional  form  nani  is  used. 

3.  The  third  possessive  is  similar  in  form  to  the  first,  but  is  used 
without  the  final  a  in  the  first  and  second  persons  singular,  and  the 
stem  is  a  and  not  'd;  likewise  dni  is  found  in  place  of  ada  in  the  third 
person  plural  when  the  reference  is  to  things  and  not  to  persons.  The 
meaning  is  belonging  to,  with,  at:  nga  naihi  emu  have  you  a  knife  with 


GRAMMAR    OF    SA  A    AND    ULAWA.  I49 

(on)  you?    *o  ta  ana  atei  from  whom  did  you  get  it?    e  tono  ana  wdi 
inihou  he  drank  of  this  water.     This  possessive  is  also  used — 

a.  as  the  object  of  certain  verbs  to  which  the  pronoun  is  not  suffixed : 
nou  hiiwala'imoli  ana  I  believed  him. 

b.  when  the  object  is  separated  from  a  transitive  verb:  e  ha'ara'i 
mumuni  ana  he  called  him  secretly.  In  cases  where  a  verb  has  been 
rendered  transitive  by  the  addition  of  a  suffix  this  suffix  is  omitted  when 
the  third  possessive  is  used,  owing  to  the  object  being  separated  from 
the  verb:  horo  to  beat,  horo'i  transitive,  kire  ko  horo  tata'ala  aku  they 
beat  me  unmercifully.  Certain  verbs  also  employ  this  possessive  as 
the  object  instead  of  using  the  suffixed  pronoun.     Cf.  to'o  2. 

c.  to  show^  certain  differences  of  meaning:  e  ere  aku  he  forbade  me, 
e  ere  naku'e  he  spoke  for  my  benefit;  e  dolosieu  he  asked  my  name,  e 
dolosie  aku  he  asked  me  about  it;  also  idiomatically  ha'ata'inie  aku  show 
it  to  me.  The  adjective  'aho'a^  apart  from,  is  followed  by  this  posses- 
sive, 'aho'a  aku  apart  from  me.  So  also  is  the  preposition  liutaa  S. 
liutaha  U.  beyond:  e  lae  liuta'aku  he  went  beyond  me. 

d.  in  the  third  person  plural  dni  is  used  of  things:  mu  maholo  dni  the 
times  for  them,  neHsae  pdinadni  think  much  of  them.      Cf.  dni  2. 

ADJECTIVES. 

1.  Words  which  are  qualifying  terms  may  also  be  used  in  the  form  of 
verbs,  but  some  may  be  used  without  verbal  particles,  following  the 
qualified  word:  poro  pdine  big  man,  'elekale  haora  small  child. 

2.  Some  words  have  a  form  which  is  only  used  of  adjectives,  either  of 
termination  or  of  prefix. 

a.  Adjectival  terminations  are  'a.  Id,  la' a,  ta,  ta'a,  of  which  *d  and 
Id  are  suffixed  to  nouns  as  well  as  to  verbs  but  the  others  are  suffixed  to 
verbs  only. 

*d:  sane  white  ant  sane'd  infested  with  ants.  An  intensification  of 
meaning  is  given  to  certain  adjectives  by  doubling  the  first  syllable  or 
the  first  two  syllables  and  by  suffixing  'd:  manola  pure,  manomanola'd 
very  pure,  diena  good,  didiena'd  very  good. 

*ala:  sasu  to  smoke,  sasuala  smoky. 

Id:  'tuu  a  dog, 'wj-m/<?  possessing  dogs,  kohi  to  be  beautiful,  kohikohild 
beautiful. 

ta:  ta'ingelu  with  one  accord,  taHngelute  all  together. 

la*a:  mae  to  be  sick,  mamaela'a  weakly,  sickly. 

ta'a:  repa  to  be  curved,  rerepataa  curved. 

h.  Adjectival  prefixes  are  ma,  mwa,  mala,  taka,  tata,  toto. 

The  prefixes  7na  and  mzva  are  common  in  words  which  may  fairly  be 
called  adjectives;  like  mala  they  show  condition  and  are  prefixed  to 
verbs:  *o*z  to  break,  ma'o'i  broken,  hiohio  to  bend,  mzvahiohio  swayed  by 
the  wind,  keke  side,  malakeke  on  one  side. 

'a  is  prefixed  to  verbs  and  forms  participles:  Idngu  to  pluck  up,  'aldngu 
detached,  hdli  to  break,  'ahdlt  broken  off. 


150  GRAMMAR    OF    SA  A    AND    ULAWA. 

iaka  denotes  spontaneity:  luhe  to  loose,  takaluhe  come  adrift. 

tata,  toto  denote  condition:  qelii  to  roll,  tataqeluqelu  headlong,  ^mz  wet, 
totoqini  soaked. 

3.  Comparison:  Degrees  of  comparison  are  shown  by  the  use  of 
prepositions  or  adverbs,  or  by  a  simple  positive  statement.  The  prepo- 
sitions used  are  mwaani  from,  which  always  has  the  suffixed  pronoun, 
and  Ikitaa  S.  liutaha  U.  beyond,  in  excess,  which  is  followed  by  the 
third  possessive. 

The  adverbs  employed  are  kele  S.,  'ele  U.,  walazvala  U.,  waewae  U., 
hiito'o  S.,  haahuuei  S.,  haahuu^ani  U. 

A  positive  statement  carries  comparison  by  implication:  He  nihou  e 
dienaf  He  niweu  e  ^aela  this  is  good,  that  is  bad,  i.  <?.,  this  is  better  than 
that;  inihou  e  diena  this  is  best. 

VERBS. 

Almost  any  word  may  be  used  as  a  verb  by  prefixing  the  verbal  par- 
ticles, but  some  words  are  naturally  verbs  as  being  the  names  of  actions 
and  not  things.  There  are  also  verbs  which  have  special  forms  as  such 
by  means  of  a  prefix  or  termination.  Verbal  particles  precede  the  verb, 
they  have  a  temporal  force. 

1.  The  verbal  particles  are  koy  ke,  ke'i  S.;  'a,  V,  'anai  U.  The  par- 
ticles are  written  apart  from  the  verb,  but  the  speakers  like  to  join  them 
to  the  governing  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons  singular,  and 
the  'a  of  'anai  is  joined  in  the  same  way. 

a.  The  use  of  ko  S.  'a  U.  marks  the  time  as  present,  but  only  in  so  far 
as  the  action  is  not  regarded  as  past  or  future.  The  time  having  been 
shown  to  be  past  ko  and  ^a  take  up  the  narrative,  and  the  illative  si  may 
be  added.  After  ko  the  vowel  a  in  certain  words  changes  to  e  as  it  does 
after  a  preceding  i  or  u.     The  illative  si  may  replace  ko. 

b.  ke  expresses  a  certain  amount  of  futurity  in  the  action,  ke'i  is  used 
of  the  definite  future;  V  conveys  the  sense  of  let,  as  also  does  ke;  V  and 
ke  are  also  used  following  a  negative,  e  kaa  ola  neke  manata'inie  I  know 
nothing. 

The  adverb  muni  U.  to,  in  order  that,  is  used  as  a  subjunctive  or 
optative  and  is  followed  by  'e;  muni  V  contracts  to  mun'ey  and  similar 
contractions  occur  with  the  pronouns  kira  and  kaelu  when  followed 
byV 

c.  'anai  U.  denotes  the  time  as  more  or  less  future,  the  illative  si 
may  be  added. 

IS^o  particle  is  used  when  the  time  is  past,  but  'oto  and  kd'u  follow  the 
verb  to  denote  a  preterite.     For  the  imperative  no  particle  is  employed. 

2.  Times  and  moods:  A  subjunctive  is  formed  by  ana  if,  when,  used 
in  Sa'a  with  ko  or  ke,  in  Ulawa  with  'a.  Kosi  by  itself  also  denotes  the 
subjunctive. 

Conditional  affirmation  is  expressed  by  haalaa  S.  tdume'iy  mune'i  U. 


GRAMMAR    OF    SA*A    AND    ULAWA.  I5I 

Mune'i  U.  and  haro  S.  denote  subsequence  of  action,  the-  particles  'a 
or  ko  precede  them. 

The  illative  is  si  and  means  then,  thereupon,  in  that  case,  following 
on,  for  the  first  time;  the  verbal  particles  koy  key  'a,  'anai  may  precede  it. 

The  particle  kau  follows  the  verb:  (a)  it  denotes  a  preterite,  (b)  it 
gives  a  sense  of  incompleteness  to  the  action  described,  (c)  it  mitigates 
the  directness  or  harshness  of  a  request  or  of  a  command. 

3.  Negative  particles:  The  foregoing  particles  are  not  used  in  nega- 
tive sentences.  The  negative  particles  are  kaa,  saa  S.;  qa'ike,  qakcy 
qa'i,  gale,  si'e,  si  U. 

a.  Of  these  kaa,  ga'tke,  qake,  qai,  qale  may  be  used  either  of  present 
or  past  time. 

h.  saa,  si'e  are  used  of  future  time,  and  si'e  and  si  are  used  as  strong 
dehortatives. 

c.  A  negative  imperative  is  used  with  mivane  lest,  and  with  the  dehor- 
tative  su'uri  don't.  In  Ulawa  the  particle  'e  may  be  added  after  the 
subject.  Both  su'uri  S.  and  si'e  U.  are  used  in  negative  conditional 
sentences.  In  Sa*a  the  particle  ke  is  used  preceding  su'uri,  but  it  is  not 
used  before  mzvane. 

d.  The  genitives  ni,  i,  are  used  to  denote  purpose. 

4.  Suffixes  to  verbs:  There  are  certain  terminations  which,  when 
suffixed  to  neuter  verbs  or  to  verbs  active  in  only  a  general  way,  make 
them  definitely  transitive,  or  determine  their  action  upon  some  object. 
These  are  of  two  forms : 

a.  A  consonant  with  i:  hi,  li,  mi,  ni,  ngi,  si,  or  'i  by  itself;  e.  g., 
tonohi,  potali,  ddumi,  raangi,  maesi,  hoa'i. 

A  less  common  suffix  is  na:  ara,  arana;  this  suffix  may  possibly  be 
the  ending  of  the  word  diana  good  or  of  pdina  big,  to  each  of  which 
words  the  suffix  is  added. 

h.  The  termination  d'i  which  is  suffixed  by  itself  to  nouns  to  convert 
them  into  verbs,  sato  satod'i.  The  forms  in  'i  and  d'i  are  also  used 
intransitively:  pele  by  mischance,  pele'i  by  mischance,  'olo'oloa'i  to 
stagger.  When  d'i  is  suffixed  to  verbs  the  genitive  ni  is  also  added; 
su'u,  su'ue'ini;  and  d'ini  forms  a  transitive  suffix.  To  this  form  d'ini 
the  consonants  h,  I,  m,  n,  ng,  r,  t  are  prefixed;  e.  g.,  'urihe'ini,  taheld'iyii, 
onomd'ini,  loond'ini,  hi'inge'ini,  siker d'ini,  papatd'ini. 

c.  When  the  object  is  separated  from  the  verb  the  suffixes  'i,  hi,  etc., 
are  omitted  and  the  third  possessive  is  used  as  the  object. 

d.  When  the  verb  is  used  intransitively  the  ni  of  the  compound 
suffix  is  dropped. 

e.  Certain  participles  are  formed  from  verbs  by  the  addition  of  the 
compound  suffixes,  ni  being  omitted;  e.  g.,  oroma'i,  rdpute'i,  hiheta'i, 
moute'i.  The  compound  suffix  without  ni  is  used  intransitively,  ta'e, 
ta'ela'i. 

Some  verbs  take  both  forms  of  the  suffix:  rdpu,  rdpusi,  rdpute'ini; 
'ala,  'alami,  'alamd'ini;  siki,  sikihi,  sikihe'ini. 


152  GRAMMAR    OF    Sa'A    AND    ULAWA. 

/,  The  syllabic  suffix  ha'ini  is  used  with  certain  verbs  as  meaning 
with :  olo  to  swim,  olohaini  to  swim  with  a  thing. 

5.  Prefixes  to  verbs:  These  are  causative  and  reciprocal. 

The  causative  is  ha  a;  it  may  be  prefixed  to  almost  any  word,  and  it 
mav  be  used  with  verbs  which  have  a  transitive  suffix. 

The  reciprocal  is  hai.  This  sometimes  denotes  repetition  or  contin- 
uance of  an  action.  With  the  addition  of  the  adverb  /o'w  again,  hd'i 
denotes  a  change  or  an  addition.  In  haiamasi  to  have  compassionate 
feelings  hai  is  comparable  to  Florida  vei  in  veiarovi  to  take  pity  on. 

6.  Passive:  The  passive  is  expressed  by  the  use  of  the  third  personal 
pronoun  plural  kire  S.  kira  U.  as  subject  with  the  verb  and  the  adverb 
^oto  already;  kire,  kira,  are  also  used  impersonally. 

The  gerundive  is  used  with  the  verb  lae,  to  go,  in  expression  of  the 
passive:  sdunilana  e  lae  'oto  his  being  killed.  This  usage  is  more  com- 
mon in  Sa'a.     The  force  of  the  gerundive  is  either  active  or  passive. 

7.  Reflexive  verbs:  The  word  maraa- with  suffixed  pronouns  denotes 
reflexive  action:  e  sdunie  maraana  he  killed  himself. 

8.  Reduplication:  Verbs  are  reduplicated  in  three  ways.  There  is  no 
difl^erence  among  the  various  forms  beyond  an  intensification.  In  the  dic- 
tionary the  reduplicated  form  is  presented  under  the  entry  of  the  stem. 

a.  By  repetition  of  the  first  syllable  or  of  the  first  two  syllables: 
sulu,  susulu;  qdnio,  qdniqenio. 

h.  By  repetition  of  the  whole  word :  dsu,  dsuesu. 

c.  By  repetition  of  the  whole  word  with  the  omission  in  the  former 
member  of  the  inner  consonant:  domu,  do'udomu.  This  is  found  only 
in  Sa'a.  In  Ulawa  there  is  also  a  repetition  of  the  first  syllable  with 
the  addition  of  euphonic  i:  sdsu,  sdisesu. 

ADVERBS. 

There  are  pure  adverbs  in  Sa*a  and  Ulawa,  but  many  words  used  as 
adverbs  are  truly  nouns  and  others  are  verbs,  adjectives  also  may  be 
used  in  this  employment. 

The  locative  i  is  used  with  adverbs  of  place  and  time  and  it  precedes 
every  place  name.     The  demonstrative  nd  S.  ni  U.  is  suffixed. 

Place  where  is  regarded  as  place  whence,  after  the  habit  of  the  usual 
Melanesian  idiom;  'urei  standing  at,  has  the  force  of  from. 

PREPOSITIONS. 
I.  Simple  prepositions: 

Locative,  1.  Instrumental,  ana,  ani,  eni  S. 

Causation,  haahi.  Relation,  ana,  dni,  eni  S.,  fe^i  S.,  mdi  U.,  hike,  sie-,  saa-  S. 

Motion  to,  tako'i  S.,  tale  U.,  isuli,  'ohi.  Genitive,  ni,  i. 

Motion  from,  mwaani.  Position,  parasi,  U.,  sisinge  S.,  hora  U.,  honosi,  dhu'i. 

Dative,  huni  S.,  muni  U. 

The  locative  i  is  seen  compounded  in  itei,  ihei  where. 
With  the  exception  of  the  locative,  the  instrumental,  and  the  geni- 
tive all  the  foregoing  prepositions  are  used  with  a  suffixed  pronoun. 


GRAMMAR   OF    Sa'a   AND    ULAWA.  I53 

Of  the  two  instrumental  prepositions  ana  is  the  ordinary  one,  denot- 
ing with.  When  the  noun  denoting  the  instrument  is  not  preceded  by 
an  article,  or  when  the  noun  is  used  in  a  general  sense,  dni  is  used  in  the 
place  of  ana:  lae  dni  i  ola  to  go  by  canoe,  dni  eu  with  music,  ana  nga 
taa  why,  dni  iaa  with  what  things.  Ana  also  denotes  at,  in,  place 
where,  from  among;  dni  is  also  used  as  neuter  plural,  from  among,  da 
nga  muini  eni  take  some  of  them.  Ana  denotes  the  actual  instru- 
ment, dni  denotes  the  method  of  action:  sdunie  dni  noma  kill  him 
spear-wise.  In  Sa'a  dni  is  used  in  the  composition  of  nouns,  supi 
eni  heu  a  stone  club. 

From  meaning  at  saa-y  sie-  comes  to  have  the  meaning  of  motion  to. 
Cf.  'ure. 

2.  Compound:  These  are  mostly  nouns  used  with  the  locative;  the 
pronoun  is  suffixed  as  the  actual  object,  or  as  anticipatory  object  when 
a  noun  follows:  i  haho  above;  i  haha  S.,  i  oroha-  U.,  below;  i  lengi 
on  top,  above;  i  keke  U.,  by  the  side  of,  beside;  i  la' o-y  i  lalo  within. 

Some  are  constructed  from  verbal  nouns  to  which  the  suffixed  pro- 
noun is  always  added:  'oliteku  in  my  place,  in  place  of  me;  honotana 
on  his  behalf. 

Certain  verbs  are  used  as  prepositions:  loosi  to  await,  kara*ini  near 
to,  ha'ataidi  far  from. 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

Copulative,  na.  Disjunctive,  tva. 

Adversative  ta'e,  ta'e  -pe'ini  S.,  ta'a.  Conditional,  ana. 

na  ta'a  U.  Illative,  si. 
Connective,  'oto. 

A  mark  of  quotation  is  uri.  Neither  ....  nor  is  expressed  by  a 
negative  followed  by  wa.  The  reason  for  an  objection  is  introduced 
by  wa  uri.  Until  is  hula  ana  or  lai  hula  aria.  Saro  shows  consecu- 
tiveness  of  action. 

NUMERALSr 

The  numerical  system  is  decimal,  all  numbers  above  the  tens  are 
expressed  in  tens. 

The  cardinals  are: 


I. 

'eta,  ta'ata'a  S.,  ta'e  U. 

5- 

'e  lime  S., 

'e  lima  U. 

9.  V  siwe  S.,  'e  sizva  U. 

2. 

'e  rue,  *e  rua  U. 

6. 

'e  ono. 

10.  V  tangahulu,  awala. 

3- 

V  'olu. 

7- 

'e  hiu. 

4- 

'e  hai. 

8. 

V  walu. 

In  numbers  other  than  'eta  one  the  V  is  omitted  in  quick  counting; 
V  is  also  omitted  as  a  general  rule  with  ro. 

In  composition  one  is  ta'ata'ay  two  is  ro. 

The  prefix  to'o  forms  distributives,  to'ota'e  ola  one  thing  at  a  time. 

JFalu  eight  is  used  also  as  an  indefinite  number,  as  also  azvala  the 
tally  of  ten,     Tangahulu  is  the  tenth  of  a  series. 


154  GRAMMAR    OF    SA'A    AND    ULAWA. 

To  express  units  above  ten  mzvana  S.,  mana  U.,  is  employed:  four- 
teen awala  7nzvana  hai.     An  incomplete  tally  is  expressed  by  daadala. 

Special  words  are  used  as  nouns  for  tens  of  different  things:  aulu  lo 
coconuts,  dideri  lo  parrot-fish,  hike  lo  garfish,  walo  pasa  lo  flying-fish, 
zcalo  I o  native  moneys, 

Ta?igalau  is  loo.  The  sum  above  the  hundred  is  expressed  by 
mwana  S.,  mana  U.;  tangalau  e  hai  awala  mzvana  hai  144,  A  word  peH 
S.,  mdi  U.,  with,  in  addition  to,  may  be  used  following  tangalau. 
Occasionally  the  tens  over  one  hundred  are  expressed  simply  as  units: 
tangalau  mzvana  'eta  may  mean  one  hundred  and  ten. 

Special  words  are  used  for  hundreds  of  various  things:  nao  100 
yams,  ah  100  taro,  i'e  100  porpoise  teeth,  suli  hata  40  dogs'  teeth, 
iotola  400  dogs'  teeth. 

Sinola  is  1,000;  this  is  used  correctly  of  yams;  qela  1,000  coconuts. 

Mola  signifies  a  countless  number  when  used  of  men,  molai  uhi 
10,000  yams,  molai  hui  10,000  taro,  raui  helu  S.,  'apai  niu  U.,  10,000 
coconuts. 

2.  Ordinals:  The  cardinals  with  a  substantival  termination  nd  form 
ordinals. 

First,  'etana.  Fourth,  haine  S.,  haina  U.  Seventh,  hiune  S.,  hiuna  U. 

Second,  ruana.  Fifth,  limana.  Eighth,  walune  S.,  waluna  U. 

Third,  'olune  S.,  'oluna  U.  Sixth,  onona.  Ninth,  siwana. 

Ordinals  precede  the  noun:  ruana  nga  mzvane  the  second  man. 

Ordinals  are  used  to  express  the  number  of  times:  ruana  kira  'asi 
soea  they  asked  him  a  second  time. 

Tenth  is  expressed  by  tangahulu  ana;  the  twelfth  day  azvalai  he'idinge 
mwana  ruana;  one  hundred  and  tw^enty-first  tangalau  V  ro  awala  mwana 
'etana. 

'Enite  how  many  is  used  with  the  substantival  termination  na: 
'enitana  what  number,  howmanyeth. 

3.  Multiplicatives  are  formed  with  the  causative  ha' a:  ha'arue 
twice,  ha'atangalau  a  hundred  times;  hduta'a'i  S.,  hduta'e  U.,  once. 

The  word  ta'e  is  used  as  a  kind  of  descriptive  prefix  with  the  cardinals 
ta'e^  'olu,  haif  and  with  'enite,  when  the  holding  capacity  of  a  canoe  is 
in  question. 


THE  LORD'S  PRAYER. 


In   Twenty   Languages,   as   used   in   the   Diocese  of  Melanesia   among   the 

Islands  of  the  South  Pacific. 


ENGLISH. 

OUR  Father,  which  nrt  in  heaven,  HHlloweci  l'f> 
|hy  Namft.  Thy  kingdom  come.  Tliy  will  he 
■Jono  In,  earth,  As  it  i«  in  heaven.  Give  ns  this  day 
onr  daily  bread.  And  forgivo  u.f  onr  trespasBen,  As 
■we  forgivo  them  that  trespass  against  ns.  And  lead 
ns  not  into  temptation  ;  Bnt  deliver  us  from  evil  : 
For  thine  is  the  kingdom,  tho  power,  and  the 
glory,  For  ever  and  ever.     Amen. 

RAGA,  New  Hebrides. 

TATA  amare,  ihama  na  sabuga.  Nom  nte  na 
mai.  Nom  doron  ua  duni  ataa  kun  aniarc. 
Lai  gang  lalai  kamai  ginaganiana  vi  dadariha  linri 
^rigi.  Goi  binihi  kabni-ai  viicomai,  kun  kamai 
gam  binihi  kabnrai  vnrora.  Gftvav  Hii  te  kamai  k'l 
kalkaliana  ;  gov  lai  kamai  nin  qatigoro.  Hnri  nom 
nte,  i  roro?iO,  i  sariijari  vi  togo  vai  tuai.     Amen. 


LAKONA,   Banks  Island 

EM.\>1  mr.ken,  llahax  iii  ran.  Mo/(  vitiga  ni 
vail  ma.  Mou  mares  ni  wckIs  vaan  mere , 
maken.  liC  ma  qirig  mnn  game  en  siuag  ga  ta  eho 
qirig.  Ke  tretremwuto  pogeme,  mere  game  ga 
tcetremwute  en  poge.  Sao  nkakrag  game  le  gal- 
galve  ;  Ke  la  game  tren  eu  gasgasa.  En  moii  eu 
vitiga,  sa  eu  man,  sa  cu  henhvn,  ti  ti  tie.     Amen. 

TORRES    ISLANDS. 

MA  raina.  No  Ic  ni  luar.  Nc  gamili  ni  ven  m«. 
Ne  dutme  ni  mena  na  dawii  na  raina.  Ola 
me  dojiie  hi  kcmam  ne  hinega  ta  hinc  dome.  Ke 
duamvitii  ne  heme  kcniem  dawa  kemem  v«n  dnam- 
vitti  ne  hemehc.  Tat:'  vaiivana'Ke  kemem  li  dagare 
k'.mem  ;  "Wola  kemam  da  ne  liiwiiiw.  Nc  gamili, 
ni  mena  mek- .  mi  ixc  hcri  ni  toga  ni  toga,     Ameu. 


OPA,  New  Hebrides. 

MAMA  enln,  Nahemu  vi  gogona.  Nomn  nte 
vi  himei.  Nomn  tarani  vin  lei  lolovavagi 
mere  enln.  Lai  himei  gaqarigi  a  hinaga  vi  eno 
hnri  gaqarigi.  Gon  ladovohogi  nabngnmei,  mere 
gamai  gam  ladovohogi  nabngure.  Go  mese  siregi 
gamai  lolo  galegaleasi ;  gon  lai  gamai  dena  ginea  esi. 
Nomn  a  nte  ko  nomn  a  mnremnre  ko  uomu  a  vara- 
vara,  vi  eno  vi  eno.     Amen. 


SANTA   CRUZ. 

MELEliVGE  make  wnn,  Nep  ka  Tc.  Maboicl'-n 
na  om  Ma  tnti  detn<.m  naxida  maka  in  na 
apnie  wun.  Tnam  abunaga  ba^c  dakanano  na 
taplete  ma  abanaga.  Ava  aipteo  alne^c  apnle  mje 
aipteo  alueth,  Baku  vele  bame  ni;;e  mana  vaika ; 
Amilua  ni^e  mana  vaioajal.  Mabonielen,  ie  malct, 
if  nile,  ti  io  ti  io.     Amen, 


MAEWO,  New  Hebrides. 

TATA  a  -wonana,  Nasasawa  ua  roiiorono.  No^a 
tnnnqe  na  snmai.  Nom  tarani  na  lai  le  veina 
merea  wonana.  Lai  snmai  qariki  min  kami  na  sinaga 
n  tarisa  be  qariki.  Go  tigi  gina  btigumi,  mere  kami 
mo  tigi  gina  bngni-a.  Go  kare  tektekerag  kami  tea 
ale  galeana  ;  Go  lai^  kami  dani  na  anseseta.  Ano/ia 
a  tnnnqe,  ti  a  sori,  ti  n  sinara,  na  toga  na  toga. 
Amen. 


VANIKOLO. 

AHA  «an.  Ne»e»oetapn.  femie  mare  jaima. 
lemie  warne;io  ipiaiue  ino  lena  nerfe  uaa. 
Knma  neii  damoida  iemio  tore  nane  po  damoida. 
A^o  knlamena  yamitu,  tekaraanli  imetore  neiio 
i/amitn  nnpe  pianoa  tckaraaoli  iedietore.  Igai 
knreknre  f/amitn  nka  bo;/ila  ;  a^/o  kula  yamitn  mena 
mamane  fisale.  Icmie  mare,  ^a  anka,  <ja  iremare 
ilu  ila.     Amen. 


MOTA,  Banks  Islatid 

MAMA  avnnann,  Nasasamx  ni  roi^o.  Nom  o 
marana  ni  mnle  ma.  Nom  o  maros  r.i  lai 
alalanana  tama  avunana.  Le  ma  qarig  mnn  kamam 
o  sinjga.  we  tira  ape  qarig.  Ka  nomvitag  napuga- 
mam;  tama  ikamam  we  nomvitag  napngara.  Nipfa 
nkenkeg  kamam  ilo  galeva;  Ka  lav  kamam  nan  o 
ganganor.  Anoma  o  marana,  wa  o  mana,  wa  o  lenas 
ti  t«ga  ti  toga.     Amen. 


RUMATARI,  S.  Crrstoval. 

MAMA  hahalia,  Naatamn  ni  apuna.  Narahaua 
mu  ni  rao  mai.  Nahooqaniamu  ni  matakn 
mai  iano  mai/a  haha  tauwa  mai  rikini  ta;ia  gami  na 
liioro  ni  iiaa  ni  arari  rikini.  Kato  ka.<iia  uaginomi, 
mana  i  gami  me  kato  kasia  naginota.  Kasiana 
watea  gami  ohoni  gami;  go  teua  gami  tenia  na 
oraoraga.  Pasimn  narahaamn,  mana  meuaamn, 
mana  togatogaamu  tare  tare.     Ameu. 


WAMO,  S.  Crisioval. 

A  MA  .raami  noai  aro,  Naatamu  na  maaea.  Na- 
honramn  ai  boi.  Naheiirisiamn  ai  madan  noai 
ano  i  bahai  oua  noai  aro  ;  Hamai  deiui  tanaami  ta 
hereho  inan  ai  orana  i  deini  ;  Oi  adomai  nngasia  ni 
inomami,  oua  iami  mi  adomai  nngasia  ni  inoda;  Oi 
abni  wateami  ini  ohoniami ;  Oi  waiami  bania  i 
oraoraa.  Na  bonramn,  mana  meuaamn,  mana  rara- 
bamn,  ai  tai-o  orea  urea.     Amen. 


FlU,  A?ala. 

MAA  kami  ila.ii,  na  satamn  e  aabn.  Na  taloa 
oe  leka  mai.  Kami  sasii  rn  0  ko  o^ai,  iano 
diia  kira  sa.sii  ilaxi.  0  qatia  mai  taena  faamia  fa»a 
ki  bolo  fairtia  taena.  O  luje  uiauia  sasii  taaxa  kami 
ki,  diia  kami  In^e  uiauia  sasii  taana  kira  ki.  Alna 
daiia  ani  kami  saeua  oiia.  0  iialia  olitai  kami  fasia 
ra  taa.     Amen. 


155 


is6 


THE    LORD  S    PRAYER. 


FAQANI,   S.  Cristoval. 

MAMA  ami  afaafa  ;  r{a  atamu  ni  apuiia.  Ara- 
fa»a  amu  ai  rago  mai.  Faigirisii  ama  ai 
mataka  nogai  siora  niaiu  afaafa.  Tana  mai  itaini 
tanasrami  na  marego  iii»au  ai  goraiia  itaiui.  Go 
katomagi  kasia  na  ginomi,-niai-a  igaini  mi  katomagi 
kasia  na  piiiota.  Apnna  go  wategami  agi  ofo/iigami ; 
Go  tan  garni  bania  na  oraoraga.  Faginigo  arafai^a 
mana  mens,  mana  i-arafamu,  tewusia  tewasia. 
Amen. 

ULAWA. 

AMAMAMI  ilcni,  va.  Satamu  muni  macft.  A'a 
Alahai-a  ice  muni  lae  mai.  jVa  haihmiilama 
mnni  madau  oto,  mai  i  orohana  mala  oto  ilpjii.  O 
ta  mai  siu-i  mnniami  mai  iianlaa  ea  haidadajia  ana 
Biirini.  O  sae  asia  na  lu&i  roroa.ia  iami,  mala  iami 
a  sae  asia  »a  i«ai  rOroana  alaile  ami  haaroroaira  ani. 
O  eunri  totoliasiami  ilaona  malahojiana  ;  O  tole  ami 
Viiaania  /)a  laa  ni  orahaa.  Ana  o  tooana  na  alahaiia, 
na  u&  nanamaiia,  na  na  manikuluaua,  ua  esie  mano 
oto  00.     Amen. 

SAA,  Mala. 

AMAMAMI  ilei/i,  Satamu  ke  maai.  Alahana 
ioe  ke  lae  mai.  Mu  ola  saemn  eiu  denleni  ke 
inadan  oto,  iano  ileliu  mala  oto  iieia.  Da  mai  siiri 
huniemi  mn  neula  kc  adona  siiri.  Oke  sae  asie  mui 
roroaiia  iemi  mala  emi  ko  sai  asie  mn  roroa»a  hnuie 
jiiala  emi  haaroroaire  ani.  J/aanie  o  toiiasiemi  laona 
malaho?iana ;  Toleiemi  «(aania  orahaala.  Ana  o 
tooana  alahaiia  na  nanama/ta  na  raraa,  oto  di  oto  di. 
Amen, 


LAU,  Mala. 

MAA  igami  ilai.i.  ua  Satamu  ka  abn.  Na  ata- 
falaa  08  ka  lea  mai.  Na  doo  ragemu  nni 
adealana  ka  i/taluda  na,  iauo  ise  ili»ia  ilani.  Falea 
mai  teraina  fnagami  na  fauala  e  bobola  fai  taraina. 
O  manata  asia  na  /lalilaiia  gami  iliiti  gami  mi  manata 
asia  na  ,iallla),a  gera.  Fasia  lugasi  gami  laona 
ilitoola ;  0  lafua  gami  fasia  f uala/iaa.  Ana  do  oe 
na  alafalaa,  ma  na  mamana,  me  na  rara,  ka  too  ka 
taa.     Amen. 


VATURA/VA,  Gaudaleanar. 

MAMA  ihotu,  ke  ba  tabu  Nasoamii.  Ke  mai 
natotuinu.  Kc  mana  na  zajahamu  i  vavana 
ekoaza  ihotu.  Ko  tusu  vanihami  mai  ke  iteni.  Ko 
molotaliani  na  kibomami  e  koaza  iliami  ami  molota- 
hani  na  kibodira.  Ko  jika  na  mololuani  hami  tana 
na  gngure.  Ko  taho  taliani  Lamf  tani  na  ta»otobo. 
Anlmu  na  tototu,  ma  ua  pana,  ma  na  totora  ke  ba 
baa.     Amen, 


LOGU,  Guadalcanar. 

MAMA  i  Laf?i,  eabu  na  tViatamn.  Ge  lar/a  mai 
na  ilo  amu.  Ge  tanonama  na  uaoarau  i  vna 
elivana  i  lain.  Vnwatea  mai  i  iicne  na  vawa  ge  tha- 
danana  i  nene.  Go  nai  vatau  na  mola;  palumami 
elivana  i  amiami  nai  vatau  na  raolai  paluda.  Goge 
lu^ataini  ami  tana  tovotovo,  go  ade  ami  vatau  tana 
kiboa.  Namoa  na  vule'mana  jianama,  mana  lada, 
gQ  lae  me  lae.     Amen. 

FLORIDA. 

MAMA  i  kokon,  ke  tabu  na  abamn.  Ke  tona 
mai  nimua  na  kinakabu.  Ke  tanomana  na 
Horn  a  i  pari  te  vaga  i  Jcokon.  He  gami  mai  taeni 
na  vana  te  manana  i  taeni.  Mo  ko  talukehai  na  lei 
palnmami  ke  vaga  igami  kai  talukebai  na  lei  palu- 
dira.  Ko  bei  lubatigami  ta  na  fabotabo,  mo  ko  lavi 
gami  ta  na  tai(Ota/iedika.  Nimua  na  haba,  ma  na 
mana,  ma  na  lada,  ke  vaa  me  vaa.     Amen. 

BUGOTU. 

MAMA,  Ko  mono  i  popo ;  Keda  tabu  na  Ahamu ; 
Keda  mai  na  hngutamu  ;  Keda  legna  na 
hehemn  i  thepa  ke  vagagna  i  popo  ;  Hegami  mai 
legnmagavn  na  vana  ke  nftbamami  ikea;/aicni ;  Ko 
talntavoga  na  palnhamami  ke  vagagna  igami  kiti 
talntavoga  na  paluhadia  ;  Ko  sagoi  Inbatigami  kcri 
piapilan,  mo  Ko  liati  au  gami  kori  koakoa  ;  eigna 
na  nimua  na  hugnta,  ma  ua  thaba,  ma  na  silada,  ko 
hau  me  han.     Amen. 

MxLANESi.vN  Mission  Press,  Norfolk  Isla.so.     V-Hi. 


LINGUISTICS  IN  THE  WESTERN  PACIFIC. 

The  native  peoples  of  the  western  Pacific  (excluding  the  Australian 
aboriginals)  are  classified  ethnologically  in  four  divisions:  Polynesian, 
Micronesian,  Melanesian,  Papuan.  The  languages  of  the  first  two 
divisions  may  be  regarded  practically  as  one  and  may  be  called,  roughly, 
Polynesian.  In  Melanesia  there  are  certain  communities  who  do  not 
speak  Melanesian  and  whose  language  is  reported  to  be  allied  closely 
to  the  language  of  Tonga,  and  who  in  consequence  belong  to  the  Poly- 
nesian division  of  speech.  With  the  exception  of  these  communities, 
all  the  other  peoples  in  Melanesia  use  one  type  of  spech.  In  Papua, 
at  any  rate  on  the  south  and  north  coasts,  two  completely  different 
types  of  language  exist — the  one  closely  allied  to  Melanesian,  the  other 
separate  and  distinct  and  but  slightly  akin,  if  at  all,  to  the  languages 
even  of  the  peoples  in  the  neighboring  islands  of  Torres  Straits. 
This  latter  type  Mr.  S.  H.  Ray  has  named  Papuan. 

In  Polynesia  proper  there  is  but  one  type  of  language,  and  the 
Polynesian  peoples  inhabit  the  following  group  of  islands:  Hawaii, 
Marquesas,  Tahiti,  Paumotu,  Mangareva,  Niue,  Samoa,  Rarotonga, 
Tonga,  New  Zealand  (Maori),  Futuna  and  Uvea  (Horn  and  Wallis 
Island),  Tokelau  (EUice  Group).  In  Melanesia,  Polynesian-speaking 
peoples  are  found  at  Mele  and  Fila  in  Sandwich  Island  and  on  Fotuna 
and  Aniwa  in  the  southern  New  Hebrides;  on  Uea  in  the  Loyalties; 
on  Tikopia  and  Anuda;  on  Matema,  Pileni,  and  Nukapu  in  the  Reef 
Islands  off  Santa  Cruz;  on  Rennell  and  Bellona  south  of  San  Cristoval; 
on  Sikaiana  north  of  Ulawa;  on  the  coral  atoll  Ongtong  Java  north  of 
Ysabel,  and  on  Nukuoro  in  the  Carolines. 

Mr.  Ray  reckons  the  number  of  separate  forms  of  Polynesian  speech 
as  19  or  20.  With  the  Polynesians  each  group  or  each  separate  island 
has  practically  only  one  language,  and  the  languages  of  all  the  Poly- 
nesian peoples  (with  the  exception  of  those  in  Melanesia)  have  been 
reduced  to  writing  and  grammars  and  dictionaries  of  them  have 
been  published.  The  Presbyterian  missionaries  in  the  New  Hebrides 
have  made  certain  studies  of  the  four  Polynesian  languages  in  their 
sphere,  but  no  linguistic  work  has  been  done  on  the  other  Polynesian 
languages  in  Melanesia  and  there  is  no  way  of  knowing  what  peculiar 
characteristics  they  present,  if  any. 

It  would  be  of  considerable  interest  linguistically  to  know  whether, 
in  the  case  of  the  languages  of  Matema,  Pileni,  and  Nukapu,  the  influ- 
ence of  the  neighboring  Melanesian  peoples  has  in  any  way  altered  the 
characteristic  Polynesian  features  of  speech,  and  whether  there  is  any 
sign  of  a  mingling  of  Melanesian  peculiarities  of  speech  with  the  radical 
characteristics  of  the  Polynesian  stock — any  cross,  so  to  speak,  such 
as  was  effected  in  English  by  the  introduction,  e.  g.,  of  the  romance 

prefixes  and  suffixes. 

157 


1^8  LINGUISTICS    IN    THE    WESTERN    PACIFIC. 

However,  since  the  Melanesian  language  in  the  neighboring  island  of 
Nifilole  shows  no  sign  of  Polynesian  influence  at  work,  and  since  the 
tendency  always  is  for  the  later  and  the  more  decayed  types  of  speech 
to  affect  adversely  the  older  and  more  complicated  types,  it  can  hardly 
be  expected  that  the  Polynesian  languages  in  Melanesia  shall  have 
been  affected  by  the  Polynesian. 

Certain  Papuan  languages  in  New  Guinea  show  very  distinct  signs 
of  such  a  cross.  Thus,  Mr.  Ray  writes  of  Maisin  (Cambridge  Expedi- 
tion to  Torres  Straits,  vol.  in)  that  it  appears  to  be  a  Papuan  language 
w^iich  has  adopted  an  abnormal  number  of  Melanesian  words.  "It 
has  also  adopted  some  Melanesian  particles,  the  verbal  auxiliaries 
entirely,  and  the  use  of  possessives  with  post-positions;  but  in  other 
respects  its  grammar  is  Papuan."  The  language  of  Mailu  on  the  south 
coast  is  in  the  same  mixed  condition  as  regards  its  vocabulary.  Maisin 
may  represent  a  survival  of  a  former  Papuan  population  in  Eastern 
Papua. 

Micronesia  has  six  groups  of  islands,  Carolines,  Ebon-Marshall, 
Gilberts,  Nauru,  Palau,  Tobi,  and  with  the  single  exception  of  the 
Carolines  each  group  has  only  one  language.  Mr.  Ray  states  that  in 
the  CaroHnes  there  are  at  least  five  distinct  languages,  Ponape,  Kusaie, 
Mortlock  and  Ruk,  Yap,  and  Uluthi.  In  certain  parts  of  Micronesia 
a  jargon  called  Chamorro  is  spoken,  presumably  a  mixture  of  Spanish 
and  Micronesian. 

While  reckoning  the  approximate  number  of  Polynesian  languages 
as  19  and  of  Micronesian  as  15,  Mr.  Ray  says  that  Melanesia  has  180 
and  New  Guinea  (Papua)  certainly  150,  with  many  others  still  un- 
named. He  states  also  that  in  many  of  the  Papuan  or  non-Melane- 
sian  languages  of  New  Guinea  "the  extraordinary  difficulty  of  the 
grammar  and  the  limited  area  in  which  the  language  is  spoken  make  it 
extremely  impossible  that  any  one  will  ever  take  the  trouble  to  learn 
one."  As  an  example  of  a  difficult  language  Mr.  Ray  quotes  the 
Kiwai  of  the  Fly  River,  the  grammar  of  which  he  says  is  "awful," 
thus,  e.  g.,  supposing  that  three  people  share  a  coconut  between  them 
and  one  of  them  says  "we  three  are  eating  a  coconut,"  nimo-ihi  nao  oi 
n-oruso-ibi-duru-7no;  the  literal  translation  of  this  is  "we  three  one 
coconut  we-eat-three-now-we."  If  a  man  eats  three  coconuts  he  says 
mo  netowa  naohi  oi  potoro  n-iriso-ibi,  i.  e.^  "I  two  one  coconut  three  I- 
eat-three." 

As  to  the  New  Guinea  languages,  it  is  enough  for  our  present  pur- 
pose to  state  that  they  seem  to  be  of  two  types,  viz.  Melanesian  and 
Papuan,  i,  e.,  non-Melanesian.  The  Anglican  Mission  in  New  Guinea 
has  to  deal  with  both  types  of  these  languages.  The  language  used  at 
Wedau,  the  headquarters  of  the  Mission,  is  of  the  usual  Melanesian 
type,  and  Mr.  Copland  King,  the  original  investigator  of  Wedauan, 
has  also  published  a  translation  of  the  Gospel  according  to  St.  Luke  in 


LINGUISTICS    IN    THE    WESTERN    PACIFIC.  159 

Binandere,  an  extremely  difficult  non-Melanesian  language  spoken  on 
the  Mamba  River.  Mr.  King  has  stated  recently  that  on  the  coast  of 
German  New  Guinea  both  Melanesian  and  non-Melanesian  languages 
occur.  Both  types  also  occur  in  the  sphere  of  the  London  Missionary 
Society. 

Melanesian  languages  are  spoken  in  Fiji,  Rotuma,  the  Loyalties,  New 
Caledonia,  New  Hebrides,  Banks,  Torres,  Santa  Cruz,  Swallow  Group, 
Solomons,  New  Britain  and  New  Ireland,  Admiralties,  in  the  islands 
lying  off  New  Guinea  to  the  eastward,  and  in  New  Guinea  itself.  With 
the  single  exception  of  Savo  in  the  Solomons,  all  of  the  Melanesian 
languages  are  practically  of  the  same  type  and  the  grammars  of  all  of 
them  may  be  made  up  on  the  same  framework.  Santa  Cruz  contains 
the  greatest  number  of  exceptions  to  the  regular  type  and  is  confessedly 
the  most  difficult  of  the  Melanesian  languages.  Savo  is  regarded  by 
Dr.  Codrington  as  Melanesian,  but  of  a  more  archaic  type  than  the  rest, 
as  is  shown  by  the  absence  of  prepositions  in  it  and  by  its  failure  to 
distinguish  between  parts  of  speech  and  also  by  its  use  of  demonstra- 
tives as  both  pronouns  and  adverbs. 

PROMINENT  LINGUISTIC  PECULIARITIES. 

It  will  be  of  use  to  summarize  here  the  most  prominent  linguistic 
peculiarities  common  both  to  Melanesian  and  Polynesian  languages 
and  to  add  further  some  special  marks  whereby  the  differences  between 
these  two  types  of  the  Oceanic  languages  may  be  readily  recognized. 

1.  POSSESSIVES. 

Possession  is  shown  in  the  Melanesian  languages  by  suffixing  pro- 
nominal forms  in  ku,  mu,  na,  to  the  noun:  Mota  qatuk,  my  head;  Sa'a 
nimemuy  thy  hand;  Florida  tinana,  his  mother;  and  also  to  radicals  no 
(na),  moy  thus  forming  an  expression  answering  to  my,  thy,  his,  in 
English,  while  another  pair  of  radicals  ga,  ma,  with  the  pronouns 
suffixed,  represent,  respectively,  a  thing  belonging  more  closely  to  a 
person,  and  a  thing  for  a  person  to  drink. 

In  Melanesia  these  pronominal  forms  are  suffixed  only  to  nouns  of 
a  certain  class;  those,  namely,  which  signify  parts  of  the  body  and 
degrees  of  relationship  or  a  man's  belongings.  In  Malay  these  pro- 
nouns are  suffixed  to  nouns  without  any  distinction  of  class,  while  in 
Maori  they  appear  added  to  the  vowels  o  and  a  or  to  these  vowels  sup- 
plemented by  n  or  m:  no,  na,  mo,  ma,  and  are  used  preceding  the  noun. 
In  Maori  the  differences  in  meaning  of  these  possessives  are  shown  by 
the  changes  between  a  and  o,  a  signifying  that  the  thing  referred  to  is 
regarded  as  acted  upon  by  the  person  with  whom  it  is  in  relation,  o  that 
the  action  is  from  the  thing  on  the  person.  "What  the  Polynesians  do 
by  the  changes  of  a  and  o  the  Melanesians  do  by  the  use  of  four  dis- 
tinct words,  and  in  these  it  is  the  consonant  and  not  the  vowel  which 


l6o  LINGUISTICS    IN    THE    WESTERN    PACIFIC. 

gives  the  particular  difference  in  signification.  But  both  Polynesian 
and  Melanesian  have  a  stem,  a  noun,  to  which  identical  pronouns  are 
suffixed  to  give  a  possessive  sense."     (Mel.  Lang.,  p.  133.) 

2.  PRONOUNS. 

All  the  Oceanic  languages  have  inclusive  and  exclusive  forms  in  the 
first  person  plural  of  the  personal  pronoun;  in  one  case  the  person  or 
persons  addressed  are  included  with  the  speaker,  in  the  other  they  are 
excluded.  Polynesian  languages  have  no  trinal  number  as  apart  from 
the  plural;  indeed,  the  Polynesian  plural  is  practically  composed  of  a 
plural  to  which  the  numeral  tolu^  three,  has  been  added,  and  the  so- 
called  trinals  in  Melanesia  have  the  same  explanation.  All  Polynesian 
and  Melanesian  languages  use  a  dual. 

3.  VERBS. 

Verbal  particles  are  used  in  all  the  families  of  Oceanic  language.  It 
is  by  means  of  these  particles  (which  precede  the  verb)  that  a  word 
expresses  itself  as  a  verb  and  also  that  the  verb  exercises  its  power  of 
expressing  tense  and  mood.  Madagascar,  Polynesia,  and  Melanesia 
all  show  the  presence  of  these  verbal  particles  in  their  languages. 

(a)  In  Melanesia  the  pronoun  when  used  as  object  is  suffixed  to  the 
verb,  certain  shortened  forms  of  the  pronoun  being  used;  and  in  some 
languages  in  the  Solomons  the  regular  object  is  preceded  by  an  antici- 
patory object  consisting  of  this  suffixed  pronoun  in  the  third  person. 
Thus  in  Sa*a,  I  paddle  a  canoe,  noko  hotela  'inie  'iolay  i.  e.y  I  paddle  it 
canoe.  With  this  may  be  compared  the  "pidgin"  English  use  "How 
many  boy  you  catch  'im?" — where  'im  seems  reminiscent  of  the  native 
idiom. 

{h)  The  Melanesian  languages  freely  add  consonantal  and  syllabic 
suffixes  to  verbs  in  order  to  make  them  transitive  or  to  give  them  a 
more  definitely  transitive  force.  These  verbal  suffixes  can  be  found 
present  in  all  the  Oceanic  languages  with  the  possible  exception  of 
Malagasy.  Their  use  is  seen  in  fullest  force  in  Melanesia.  Many 
words  in  the  Polynesian  and  Micronesian  dictionaries  show  their 
presence,  but  Samoan  is  the  only  Polynesian  language  which  uses  them 
with  anything  like  the  fullness  and  freedom  that  obtains  in  Melanesia. 

ic)  In  all  the  Oceanic  families  of  language  a  causative  is  used  when 
a  verb  comes  to  signify  the  making  to  do  or  be.  In  Melanesia  the 
causative  prefix  is  va,  pa,  fa,  either  alone  or  with  a  second  syllable 
ka,  ga.  In  Polynesia  the  causative  is  zvhaka,  faka,  and  this  is  plainly 
the  same  as  the  Melanesian  forms.  Identically  the  same  forms  appear 
in  Malagasy,  but  Malay  does  not  possess  them. 

(d)  Reciprocity  of  relationship  or  of  action  is  marked  in  the  Mela- 
nesian languages  by  a  prefix  to  the  verb.  This  prefix  has  two  forms, 
var,  and  ha'i  {vag)  or  fe  (er),  and  the  latter  form  appears  in  Samoan, 
but  nowhere  else  in  Polynesia. 


LINGUISTICS    IX    THK    WESTERN    PACIFIC.  l6l 

(e)  The  adjectival  prefixes  showing  condition  ma,  ta,  are  almost 
universal  in  Melanesia,  and  the  dictionaries  show  them  as  appearing 
also  in  Fiji,  in  Polynesia,  in  Malagasy,  and  in  the  languages  of  the 
Malay  Archipelago,  though  the  grammars  of  the  various  languages 
do  not  recognize  them. 

4.  NOUNS. 

In  the  Oceanic  languages  generally,  Malagas}',  Malay,  Melanesian, 
Polynesian,  there  is  a  common  practice  of  forming  nouns  by  the 
addition  of  certain  suffixes:  }iga,  va,  an,  ana;  ha,  la,  a;  and  in  Mela- 
nesia nouns  are  formed  also  by  prefixing  i  to  the  verb;  Fiji  sele  to  cut, 
isele  a  knife.  Sa'a  damn  to  eat  areca  nut,  idemn  a  lime  spatula.  The 
only  noun  suffix  regularly  employed  in  Polynesia  is  nga,  but  several 
of  the  Polynesian  languages  show  examples  of  verbal  nouns  formed  by 
adding  a  oi  fa  or  la  to  the  verb.  Melanesia  regularly  employs  all  the 
noun  suffixes  stated  above. 

5.  ADJECTIVES. 

Melanesia  also  makes  an  extensive  use  of  adjectival  suffixes;  these 

are  added  both  to  nouns  and  verbs.     The  forms  are  ga,  g,  a,  ra,  la, 

la^a,  li,  ta,  na,  ina.      Malagasy  has  forms  in  na,  ana,  ina,  but  Malay 

shows  no  sign  of  them,  nor  does  the  Maori  of  Polynesia.     Tongan 

and  Samoan  both  show  the  use  of  a  as  an  adjectival  suffix  and  odd 

instances  occur  in  Polynesia  of  the  use  of  na,  and  Maori  has  a  few 

instances  of  «  thus  used. 

6.  GENITIVE. 

The  Melanesian  languages  employ  a  genitive  preposition  to  convey 
the  idea  of  possession  when  two  nouns  are  in  apposition,  e.  g.,  Ulawa 
*  apa  ni  menu  wing  of  bird,  or  else  they  suffix  the  pronoun  in  the  third 
person  to  the  first  noun:  Ulawa  ' apa' apana  manu  its  wing  bird,  i.  e.y 
bird's  wing. 

The  common  genitive  used  throughout  Melanesia  is  ni;  in  certain 
parts  of  Melanesia  ni  changes  to  li  and  si  appears  there  also  as  a 
genitive.  In  Melanesia  the  juxtaposition  of  two  nouns  also  conveys 
a  genitive  force:  Sa'a  nime  hau  house  (of)  stone,  and  in  certain 
languages  a  genitive  relation  is  conveyed  by  modification  of  the  final 
vowel  w^ien  two  nouns  are  in  juxtaposition:  Mora  ima  house,  ime 
vui  house  of  the  spirit.  In  Lau,  Malaita,  Solomons,  an  e  is  added  to 
the  first  of  two  such  nouns  giving  a  genitive  force:  tola  hill,  toloe  fera 
heights  of  the  land.  In  the  Polynesian  languages  genitive  relation  is 
expressed  by  nouns  in  apposition  or  by  the  use  of  the  possessive  as 
above  (i),  and  there  is  no  special  genitive  preposition. 

The  Polynesian  languages  on  their  side  have  a  large  and  varied  use 
of  prepositions  and  there  is  much  nicety  in  the  use  of  them;  this  is 
partly  owing  to  the  distinction  in  the  sense  of  a  and  o  already  men- 
tioned, a  being  used  as  active  and  o  as  passive. 


l62  LINGUISTICS    IN    THE    WESTERN    PACIFIC. 

7.  PASSIVE  FORMS. 

In  Melanesia  no  passives  are  found,  whereas  all  the  Polynesian 
languages  have  regular  passive  endings  to  their  verbs.  In  a  pamphlet 
entitled  "Certain  suffixes  in  Oceanic  languages"  the  present  writer 
has  shown  that  these  passive  suffixes  are  composed  of  adjectival  suf- 
fixes {na,  ina,  a)  added  to  transitive  suffixes. 

CERTAIN  DIFFERENCES  BETWEEN  THE  FORMS  OF  SPEECH. 

From  the  following  note,  supplied  by  Mr.  Ray,  it  will  be  seen  how 
great  is  the  difference  between  the  Polynesian  and  the  Melanesian 
forms  of  speech  and  the  Papuan  or  non-Melanesian  of  New  Guinea. 
In  the  Papuan  languages:  Nouns  and  pronouns  are  defined  by  means 
of  suffixed  particles,  e.  g.,  "my  hand"  is  not  "hand  my,"  as  in  Mela- 
nesia, but  "me  of  hand";  "bird's  wing"  is  not  "wing  of  bird"  or  "bird 
its  wing,"  as  in  the  Melanesian  examples  above,  but  "bird  of  wing." 

Similarly,  nouns  have  various  case  suffixes  instead  of  prepositions: 
house-to,  house-of,  house-at,  house-from. 

Adjectives  usually  precede  the  noun. 

Tenses  of  the  verb  are  expressed  by  means  of  suffixes,  not  as  in 
Melanesia  or  Polynesia  by  a  variation  in  a  preceding  particle. 

Number  and  person  in  the  verb  are  expressed  by:  (a)  a  prefix,  {b) 
a  change  in  the  suffix,  or  (c)  shown  only  by  the  pronoun. 

Number  and  person  of  the  subject  or  object  are  indicated  sometimes 
by  a  compound  prefix. 

METHOD  OF  LEARNING  A  MELANESIAN  LANGUAGE. 

To  learn  Mota  is  easy  enough,  since  both  a  dictionary  and  a  grammar 
have  been  compiled  by  Dr.  Codrington.  Ulawa  and  Sa'  a  are  the  only 
other  languages  in  the  sphere  of  the  Melanesian  Mission  which  have 
full  grammars,  and  probably  they  are  thus  the  easiest  to  learn  after 
Mota,  since  good  material  exists  for  study  in  the  shape  of  translations, 
etc.  In  learning  any  of  these  three  languages,  which  may  be  regarded 
as  typical  Melanesian  languages,  the  special  points  to  be  studied  are: 

PRONOUNS. 

The  personal  pronouns  should  be  written  out  and  learned  by  heart; 
the  inclusive  and  exclusive  forms  should  be  carefully  noted  in  the  first 
person  plural.  It  is  quite  easy  to  make  a  blunder  over  these  forms  and 
to  say,  e.  g.y  inina  in  Mota  for  ikaniam,  and  the  story  is  told  of  a 
certain  missionary  who  on  describing  his  experiences  in  England  to  a 
class  at  Norfolk  Island  kept  on  saying  inina  when  he  meant  either 
ikamam  or  possibly  ikara,  i.  e.,  presumably,  his  wife  and  himself.  ^  His 
hearers  protested  sotto  voce,  inina  tagai  amaia  "we  were  not  with  him." 
The  suffixed  pronouns  and  their  uses  must  be  carefully  studied. 


LINGUISTICS    IN    THE    WESTERN    PACIFIC.  163 


THE  VERB. 


Under  this  heading  come  verbal  and  negative  particles,  transitive 
suffixes,  the  native  view  of  time,  etc. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

A  list  of  these  should  be  made  in  Mota  according  to  whether  they  can 
be  followed  or  not  by  the  demonstrative  na  before  the  noun. 

GENERAL  DIRECTIONS. 

Many  missionaries  have  to  learn  new  Melanesian  tongues  and  have 
to  commit  them  to  writing  for  the  first  time.  It  is  always  important 
to  remember  that  practically  one  grammatical  framework  will  serve 
for  all  the  Melanesian  languages;  the  style  of  the  languages  is  the  same 
throughout. 

One  system  of  orthography  will  avail  throughout  and  special  pro- 
vision can  be  made  for  rare  or  exceptional  sounds.  Generally  it  will 
be  found  that  the  sounds  in  the  Melanesian  languages  are  not  very 
different  from  the  sounds  in  the  w^ell-known  European  languages,  and 
in  representing  them  it  will  be  sufficient  to  take  the  ordinary  sounds 
of  the  English  alphabet  and  by  the  additional  use  of  italic  letters 
make  provision  for  nasal  or  guttural  variations  of  well-known  sounds. 
Modifications  of  the  vowels  can  be  shown  by  the  use  of  the  diaeresis. 
The  points  noted  above  are  the  main  points  to  be  kept  in  view  in  the 
endeavor  to  acquire  any  new  Melanesian  language. 

As  will  be  noticed  farther  on,  familiarity  w4th  Mota  was  a  decided 
help  in  linguistic  study  in  Melanesia,  but  a  man  would  be  very  apt  to 
be  led  astray  if  he  made  Mota  a  rigid  standard. 

Too  much  stress  can  not  possibly  be  laid  on  the  value  of  learning 
lists  of  words  by  heart:  "Let  each  object  bring  some  native  sound 
ringing  in  your  ears,  so  that  the  sound  brings  the  object  before  your 
eyes.  Do  not  be  content  to  speak  as  a  European.  The  real  and  most 
stringent  test  of  the  knowledge  of  a  language  is  whether  you  can  under- 
stand the  natives  speaking  among  themselves.  To  know  thoroughly 
by  book  is  a  different  thing  from  knowing  by  ear.  I  believe  we  must 
learn  like  children,  through  the  ear,  not  by  books  much."  (Pilking- 
ton,  of  Uganda.) 

TRANSLATION  OF  SCRIPTURE. 

The  use  of  Melanesian  languages  by  a  missionary  is  confessedly  only 
the  preliminary  to  his  using  them  as  a  vehicle  for  conveying  the  divine 
message  of  salvation.  To  the  mind  of  the  missionary  the  end  and 
object  of  a  native  language,  the  very  reason  for  its  existence,  is  that  it 
should  be  used  for  the  worship  of  God  and  for  the  dissemination  of 
religious  ideas  among  the  people  who  use  it,  and  to  the  mind  of  the 
churchman  a  language  has  attained  to  the  height  of  its  glory  when  it 


164  LINGUISTICS    IN    THE    WESTERN    PACIFIC. 

has  been  used  as  a  medium  for  the  performance  of  the  highest  act  of 
worship,  the  celebration  of  the  holy  mysteries. 

It  may  be  predicated  of  all  Melanesian  languages  that  they  are  in 
themselves  fit  and  proper  instruments  for  use  in  God's  work.  The 
researches  of  scholars  go  to  show  that  all  languages  are  marvels  of 
perfection,  and  the  so-called  jargons  of  savages  are  in  their  degree  as 
perfect  a  creation  as  the  language  of  the  most  highly  civilized  people. 
To  question  whether  the  Gospels  can  be  translated,  e.  ^.,  into  one  of  the 
languages  of  Malaita  because  of  the  alleged  absence  from  it  of  certain 
words  and  ideas  which  are  the  equivalent  of  or  which  correspond  to 
certain  words  and  ideas  in  the  original  Greek  is,  among  other  things,  to 
forget  the  history  of  our  own  language.  One  has  only  to  look  at 
Coverdale's  Bible,  to  say  nothing  of  the  Douai  Bible,  to  see  the  immense 
number  of  foreign  words  expressive  of  religious  ideas  that  have  been 
imported  bodily  into  English  from  the  classical  languages.  In  some 
cases  it  may  be  that  the  idea  required  did  not  exist  in  English;  in  other 
cases,  though  the  idea  and  word  might  be  present,  yet  the  foreign  word 
prevailed,  e.  g.,  conscience,  where  the  English  equivalent  inwit  survived 
until  quite  recently.  Are  we,  then,  to  belittle  the  English  language 
because  either  it  lacked  certain  ideas  or  because  it  preferred  to  import 
bodily  foreign  words  expressive  of  certain  religious  terms  instead  of 
using  its  own  words  or  of  making  up  words  on  existing  lines? 

It  can  not  be  doubted  that  the  actual  foundation  exists  in  every 
language  whereon  can  be  laid  the  superstructure  of  words  necessary 
to  convey  the  message  of  the  Gospel.  Nor  can  any  existing  language, 
Latin  or  English,  be  considered  as  the  sacred  language.  The  Blessed 
Saviour  himself  spoke  in  Aramaic,  and  yet  the  knowledge  of  His  words 
and  acts  and  the  story  of  the  carrying  out  of  man's  salvation,  both  by 
His  words  and  also  by  His  life,  have  come  to  the  world  not  through 
Aramaic,  but  through  another  language,  Greek.  To-day  the  Roman 
Catholic  Church  looks  upon  Latin  as  the  sacred  language,  and  the 
English  Church  for  its  part  is  apt  to  regard  English  as  the  one  and  only 
language,  whereas  the  message  of  Pentecost  is  that  no  one  language  is 
above  another  in  this  respect,  and  that  every  man  has  a  right  to  look 
on  his  own  language  as  God-inspired  and  as  existing  for  the  purpose  of 
conveying  to  him  and  his  the  divine  message  of  salvation. 

To  doubt  that  the  languages  of  so-called  savages  contain  sufficient 
words  and  ideas  to  use  in  promulgating  the  Christian  religion  is  surely 
tantamount  to  denying  that  man  was  made  originally  in  the  image  of 
God  and  was  intended  to  seek  God  if  haply  he  might  feel  after  Him  and 
find  Him. 

Wherever  translations  of  the  Bible,  etc.,  have  been  made  in  Mela- 
nesia it  has  always  been  found  that  it  was  possible  to  provide  from  the 
native  tongue  words  and  terms  corresponding  to  the  root  ideas  of  the 


LINGUISTICS    IN    THE    WESTERN    PACIFIC.  165 

original;  thus,  in  the  Solomons  it  is  easy  to  render  salvation,  u  e.y 
health,  Sa'a  mauri  to  be  aUve,  mauringe  health,  ^naurihe  life;  truth, 
Sa'a  walaimolinge;  faith,  Sa'a  hii-zualaimolinge,  i.  e.,  feeling  to  be  true; 
atonement,  Sa'a  haaureruru,  i.  e.y  cause  to  have  friendly  relations 
with.  Similarly,  renderings  are  available  for  such  words  as  spirit, 
way,  light,  and  for  repent,  redemption,  /.  e.,  purchase,  grace,  i.  <?.,  gift, 
though  this  latter  rendering  is  confessedly  imperfect.  The  idea  of 
love  is  difficult  to  render  into  Melanesian;  the  word  used  in  Mota, 
tapeva,  denotes  propitiation  and  gift  as  well  as  love;  the  Sa'a  word  used 
means  kindly-natured;  the  root  of  the  Polynesian  aroha^  which  is 
rendered  as  love,  is  aro,  which  appears  in  Florida,  Solomon  Islands,  as 
arovi  to  pity,  and  in  the  Mota  ma-garo-sa  compassionate.  The  Maori 
of  New  Zealand  uses  the  quasi-English  ripeneta  for  repent,  but  no 
doubt  a  native  equivalent  could  have  been  found  corresponding  to 
the  radical  notion  of  change  of  mind.  In  Mota  and  in  many  Mela- 
nesian languages  the  word  used  as  a  translation  of  pray  is  tataro,  which 
really  implies  the  invocation  of  a  dead  person  and  which  was  used 
as  a  preHminary  utterance  before  the  real  words  of  invocation.  In 
the  Solomons  tataro  appears  in  San  Cristoval  and  in  Sa'a  'ataro  or 
*akalo  a  ghost,  and  in  Polynesia  Hawaiian  kalokalo  prayer;  Samoan 
tataloy  prayer. 

Some  difficulty  was  experienced  in  Sa'a  and  Ulawa  in  finding  a  word 
to  express  pray.  At  first  rihimga'i,  a  San  Cristoval  imported  word,  was 
used;  then  a  word  was  found,  are  to  invoke  a  spirit,  arenga'i  he'u  to 
perform  an  ordeal  with  hot  stones,  calling  on  the  name  of  certain 
ghosts  or  spirits,  but  no  verbal  noun  formed  from  this  arenga  or 
arengaHnga  met  with  approval.  Eventually  recourse  was  had  to  a 
verbal  noun  qao  olanga  formed  from  qao  ola  to  worship,  hold  communi- 
cation with  the  ghosts,  as  an  equivalent  for  prayer.  In  Sa'a  there  is 
also  a  word,  palo  which  means  to  act  officially,  to  worship,  and  its  verbal 
noun  palonga  is  either  an  act  or  worship.  The  word  used  so  largely  in 
Polynesia  as  an  equivalent  both  for  prayer  and  also  worship,  loin,  has 
been  imported  into  southern  Melanesia  and  also  into  New  Guinea  by 
the  missionaries.  Dr.  Codrington  considers  that  the  Sa'a  word  lo'u,  to 
contract  ceremonial  defilement,  is  the  same  as  this  word  lota.  The 
word  lot^i  is  said  to  mean  bowing  down  as  in  prayer,  and  Dr.  Codring- 
ton makes  the  Sa'a  lo'u  mean  to  fall  from  a  ceremonial  standard,  be 
brought  low.  (Mel.  Anthrop.,  p.  233.)  Maori  uses  the  quasi-English 
kororia  for  glory,  where  Mota  has  lengas  bright  radiance,  and  Sa'a  has 
maniknlu' anga  fame,  prestige,  and  a  similar  word  might  have  been 
found  in  Maori. 

The  translation  used  in  Sa'a  for  sin  is  oraha'a,  the  root  idea  of  which 
is  "excess,"  acting  contrary  to  the  accepted  standard  of  morality  of  the 
place.     The  word  conscience  is  extremely  difficult  to  render  into  Mel- 


l66  LINGUISTICS    IN    THE    WESTERN    PACIFIC. 

anesian,  and  in  Sa'a  it  was  done  by  a  periphrasis,  the  knowledge  one 
has  in  oneself.  But  possibly  the  most  difficult  thing  to  translate  into 
Melanesian  is  the  Lord's  Prayer.  The  very  first  phrase,  "Our  Father," 
presents  considerable  difficulty,  and  in  the  Mota  rendering  the  word 
"our"  has  been  omitted  altogether,  and  the  word  Mama  (vocative)  is 
used  by  itself.  Dr.  Codrington  defended  Mama  as  the  correct  voca- 
tive for  both  numbers,  but  nevertheless  tamamavi  our  father,  father  of 
us,  does  actually  occur  elsewhere  (Isaiah  63,  16)  as  a  vocative.  The 
Melanesian  is  not  accustomed  to  addressing  or  even  to  thinking  of  any 
person  as  father  in  a  corporate  relation  to  a  number  of  people  (beyond 
the  more  immediate  family  relationships);  to  his  mind  fatherhood  is  a 
personal  and  individual  thing;  nor  again  is  he  accustomed  to  think  of 
the  spiritual  beings  whom  he  worships  as  the  fathers  and  protectors  of 
their  worshippers.  Even  in  English  the  phrase  "Our  Father"  occurs 
rarely  as  a  vocative  except  in  the  biblical  use  or  rarely  in  a  poetic  sense. 
Kingdom  and  will  are  both  difficult  words  to  find  renderings  for.  A 
Melanesian  knows  nothing  of  a  king,  but  chiefs  occur  everywhere 
and  in  Sa'a  a  word  alaha^iga  was  adopted  from  alaha  chief.  For  will 
the  usual  rendering  is  by  a  word  equivalent  to  heart  (breast)  or  by  a 
periphrasis,  what  the  heart  is  fixed  on.  A  word  for  debt  is  common 
enough  everywhere.  In  southern  Melanesia  there  was  a  regular  prac- 
tice of  money-lending  or  usury.  Forgive  is  generally  rendered  by  the 
equivalent  for  think  away,  sae  'asi  in  Sa'a,  nom  vitag  in  Mota. 

Mr.  Copland  King  has  published  a  pamphlet  entitled  "Theological 
terms  in  native  languages,"  which  deals  with  this  whole  question  in  the 
sphere  of  the  Pacific. 

In  an  old  catechism  in  the  Mota  language,  printed  by  the  Mission  in 
the  very  early  days,  several  things  of  interest  occur,  and  light  is  thrown 
thereby  on  the  development  and  evolution  of  the  method  of  transla- 
tion now  in  use.  The  catechism  uses  two  English  words  for  which 
native  equivalents  have  since  been  found:  papataiso  for  baptism,  now 
rendered  in  Mota  vasug  rongo  holy  washing;  glori  for  glory,  now  ren- 
dered lengas  radiance.  Evidently  no  equivalent  for  kingdom  had  as  yet 
been  found;  in  the  Lord's  Prayer,  in  the  first  instance  where  the  word 
occurs,  "Thy  kingdom  come,"  the  Mota  renders  it  by  a  periphrasis, 
"Cause  men  to  become  Thy  people";  in  the  second  by  the  equivalent 
for  "Thine  are  all  things." 

Also,  curiously  enough,  in  the  Lord's  Prayer  there  is  a  rendering  of 
the  opening  word  Our,  taman  kamam,  i.  e.,  Father-our,  where  the  later 
books  have  only  Mama  Father;  the  relative  pronoun  "which"  has  been 
rendered  iniko  Thou,  whereas  the  later  books  in  Mota  do  not  attempt 
to  translate  it,  but  have  simply  Mama  avunana,  O  Father  in  heaven. 
In  the  Apostles'  Creed  the  word  now  used  as  equivalent  to  believe, 
nomtupy  had  not  come  into  use  at  the  time  of  this  catechism  {nomtup  = 
bring  thought  to  a  point,  cease  to  have  doubt,  believe),  nom  to  think 


LINGUISTICS    IN    THE    WESTERN    PACIFIC.  iGj 

being  used  alone.  In  the  modern  Mota  books  the  words  *'  from  thence" 
in  the  Creed  have  no  equivalent,  but  in  this  old  catechism  a  perfectly 
correct  rendering  nan  ia  is  given. 

It  is  quite  clear  that  in  the  teaching  of  religion  among  the  peoples  of 
the  western  Pacific  many  foreign  words  and  terms  must  necessarily  be 
employed.  Thus,  in  early  days  Bishop  Patteson  used  in  Mota  the 
Greek  word  basileia  as  an  equivalent  for  kingdom,  there  being  no 
native  word  available;  and  just  lately  Mr.  King  has  used  the  same 
word  in  the  Binandere  (Papuan)  Gospel  translation.  But  when  intro- 
ducing this  word  what  need  is  there  for  a  translator  to  disguise  it 
in  the  form  pasideia^  as  is  done  in  one  London  Missionary  Society 
translation? 

The  Melanesian  Mission,  when  importing  classical  words  and  New 
Testament  words  for  which  there  is  no  equivalent,  has  preferred  to 
write  them  in  their  English  rather  than  their  classical  form,  but  the 
London  Missionary  Society  in  New  Guinea  and  Torres  Straits  has  used 
imported  words  in  more  or  less  of  their  classical  form:  areto,  bread; 
karite,  barley;  satauro,  cross;  also  the  Hebrew  kohena  for  priest.  As  a 
rendering  for  church.  Bishop  Patteson  used  log-lue  in  Mota,  /.  e.,  called 
out;  and  similar  words  obtain  throughout  the  Melanesian  Mission. 
The  London  Missionary  Society  has  used  ekalesia  for  church. 

It  is  very  difficult  to  render  the  word  god.  The  Polynesian  missions 
have  all  used  the  word  atua,  and  this  has  also  been  imported  by  the 
Presbyterians  into  southern  Melanesia  among  Melanesian  peoples. 
This  word  atua  seems  to  be  on  a  level,  possibly,  with  the  Mota  vui,  as 
meaning  a  being  that  never  was  a  man;  or  it  may  be  that  just  as 
Fijian  kalou,  which  once  was  supposed  to  mean  god  but  now  has  been 
degraded  from  its  high  place — so  perhaps,  though  one  says  it  with 
fear  and  trembling,  atua  may  in  time  be  shown  to  be  equivalent  in  a 
measure  to  the  Fijian  kalou  or  to  the  Mota  tamate,  and  may  mean  a 
ghost  of  the  dead,  the  disembodied  spirit  of  a  person.  The  mission- 
aries of  the  eastern  Pacific  all  spoke  of  the  spiritual  beings  whom  the 
people  worshipped  as  gods,  just  as  in  the  same  way  they  found  idols 
everywhere;  but  however  this  may  be,  it  is  safe  to  say  that  in  the 
western  Pacific  there  are  neither  gods  nor  idols.  Even  in  Melanesian 
Fiji  it  was  the  custom  to  call  the  objects  of  the  old  worship  gods,  but 
Dr.  Codrington  wrote  that  Mr.  Fison  was  "inclined  to  think  all  the 
spiritual  beings  of  Fiji,  including  the  gods,  kalou,  simply  the  Mota 
tamate,  ghosts."  Mr.  Hocart  has  shown  the  truth  of  this  conjecture 
in  a  paper  in  the  Journal  of  the  Royal  Anthropological  Institute,  vol. 
XLii,  1912.  The  Presbyterians  of  the  New  Hebrides  also  spoke  of  the 
spirits  of  the  dead  t-7nat,  Mota  tamate,  worshiped  by  the  natives,  as 
gods. 

In  the  islands  of  Torres  Straits  the  word  god  was  translated  as  ad, 
the  meaning  of  which  was  "something  about  which  a  tale  was  told," 


l6S  LINGUISTICS    IN    THE    WESTERN    PACIFIC. 

or  as  augad,  which  meant  totem.  One  translation  in  New  Guinea  has 
adopted  the  word  god,  but  has  disguised  it  as  "kot."  In  Nguna, 
New  Hebrides,  the  word  used  for  god  is  suqe,  which  in  the  Banks 
Islands  is  the  well-known  secret  society.  When  the  stories  about  Qat 
in  Mota  first  became  known,  it  was  supposed  that  the  peoples  of  that 
part  of  the  Banks  Islands  regarded  Qat  as  creator  and  god.  The 
Polynesian  atua  is  given  as  meaning  god  in  the  dictionaries  of  the 
eastern  Pacific,  and  Hazelwood  gives  god  for  kalou  in  Fijian,  and  doubt- 
less suqe  and  t-mat  are  rendered  as  god  in  the  dictionaries  of  the  New 
Hebrides.  Even  if  the  suqe  of  the  New  Hebrides  (Codrington,  Mel. 
Anthrop.,  p.  102)  has  no  connection  with  the  suqe  club  of  the  Banks 
Group,  yet  the  meaning  is  at  any  rate  spirit  rather  than  god.  The 
Melanesian  Mission,  following  the  lead  of  Bishop  Patteson,  has  used 
everywhere  the  English  word  god  and  has  written  it  in  its  ordinary 
English  spelling. 

In  every  case  where  nothing  is  found  akin  to  the  idea  required,  and 
in  consequence  an  English  word  is  introduced,  it  seems  better  to  intro- 
duce a  foreign  word  whose  meaning  is  above  suspicion;  the  spelling  of 
such  word  is  a  matter  of  lesser  moment;  but  where  such  varieties  of 
pronunciation  prevail,  and  among  such  widely  different  languages,  it 
seems  better  to  write  the  word  in  its  original  form  and  then  let  each 
set  of  people  pronounce  it  in  their  own  way. 

There  is  no  need  to  make  a  concession  to  the  peculiarities  of  the 
native  alphabet  in  each  place,  for  it  will  generally  be  found  that  the 
peoples  can  make  a  sufficiently  good  attempt  at  the  new  sound  to 
justify  the  retention  of  the  old  speUing,  and  God,  e.  g.,  to  our  e\'es  at 
least,  looks  better  than  Koty  and  sheep  than  sipu.  Once  a  concession 
is  made  to  native  orthography  in  such  matters,  the  missionary  finds 
himself  writing,  e.  g.,  in  Florida  in  the  Solomons  Guilikokusi  for  Wilcox, 
and  Pulaneti  for  Plant.  Santa  Cruz  is  actually  the  only  place  in  the 
sphere  of  the  Melanesian  Mission  where  the  people  find  a  real  difficulty 
in  pronouncing  certain  letters  foreign  to  their  alphabet. 

The  possession  of  the  two  forms  of  the  personal  pronoun,  first  person 
plural  or  dual,  the  inclusive  and  the  exclusive,  enables  some  finer 
shades  of  meaning  to  be  set  forth  with  greater  clearness  than  is  possible 
in  languages  which  have  not  those  forms.  Thus  in  St.  Luke  7,  5,  the 
difference  betv/een  the  two  words  our  and  us  which  is  understood  only  in 
English,  is  clearly  expressed  in  Melanesian,  the  inclusive  form  being 
used  in  the  first  case,  since  He  to  whom  they  spoke  was  also  a  Jew,  and 
the  exclusive  in  the  second  case,  since  the  synagogue  had  been  built 
for  themselves,  the  people  of  Capernaum.  A  similar  case  occurs  in 
St.  Luke  24,  20,  where  the  word  "our"  applies  to  the  people  of  Judea 
only,  the  two  speakers  evidently  regarding  Him  to  whom  they  were 
speaking  as  a  stranger. 


LINGUISTICS    IN    THE    WESTERN    PACIFIC.  169 

THE  QUESTION  OF  STANDARD  LANGUAGES. 

In  Melanesia  every  island  has  its  own  distinct  speech.  These  can 
all  be  shown  by  the  grammarian  to  be  kindred  and  allied,  but  for  all 
practical  purposes  they  are  separate  and  distinct.  A  Mota  man  going 
to  Motalava,  8  miles  away,  unless  he  had  some  previous  knowledge  of 
the  language,  would  find  himself  unable  to  understand  the  speech  of 
the  people  there.  Many  words,  doubtless,  would  be  the  same,  but  the 
intonation  is  entirely  different,  the  consonants  and  vowels  are  strangely 
at  variance,  and  the  Motalava  words  are  clipped  and  chopped  about 
almost  be^'^ond  recognition.  With  more  frequent  communication 
bilingualism  is  getting  more  common,  but  it  is  a  curious  thing  that 
when  natives  from  various  islands  or  places  meet  communication  is 
held  by  each  person  or  group  of  persons  speaking  in  his  or  in  their  own 
tongue.  Thus,  a  party  from  Malaita  landing  on  Ulawa  will  speak  Sa'  a 
or  Lau  or  Tolo  and  will  be  answered  in  Ulawan,  and  the  general  drift 
of  the  conversation  seems  to  be  understood  quite  readily.  In  a  large 
measure  this  is  doubtless  due  to  that  quickness  of  understanding 
which  is  characteristic  of  the  Melanesian  peoples  generally. 

Whereas  smaller  differences  of  dialect  exist  on  every  island,  an 
island  of  quite  moderate  size,  like  Santa  Maria,  in  the  Banks  Group, 
has  two  separate  languages  which  vary  considerably  and  which  cause 
the  two  peoples  practically  to  be  unintelligible  to  one  another.  This 
sort  of  thing  is  multiplied  several  times  over  in  a  large  island  like 
Malaita.  The  language  at  the  south  end  of  Malaita  is  the  same  as 
that  spoken  at  the  village  of  Sa'a;  in  the  Mara  Masiki  Channel,  which 
divides  Malaita  in  two,  the  language  is  that  known  at  Sa'a  as  Tolo,  and 
to  this  belongs  the  language  spoken  at  Oroha  near  Sa'a,  the  sketch 
of  which  made  by  Bishop  Patteson  appears  in  Von  der  Gabelentz's 
"Melanesischen  Sprachen. "  The  language  round  the  coast  at  the 
north  end  is  known  as  Lau,  and  a  knowledge  of  Lau  will  carry  one 
from  Sinerago,  Diamond  Harbor,  on  the  northeast  coast,  to  Langa- 
langa,  Alite  Harbor,  on  the  northw^est  coast.  In  the  interior,  at  the 
north  end,  the  people  speak  a  language  much  like  Lau  but  having 
distinct  peculiarities.  Along  the  coast  there  will  be  found  variations 
of  these  three  main  types,  such  variations  amounting  almost  to  sep- 
arate languages.  Sa'a  shows  marked  affinities  to  the  Wango  and 
Heuru  languages  in  San  Cristoval,  whereas  Lau  has  many  points  of 
similarity  to  the  language  of  Florida,  and  the  inland  speech  of  the 
north  end  has  likenesses  to  the  language  of  Bugotu.  All  of  the  three 
main  languages  of  Malaita  have  very  decided  resemblances  to  one 
another  and  all  are  certainly  of  a  common  stock,  so  that  Sa'a,  e.  g., 
is  more  like  Tolo  than  it  is  like  Wango  or  Heuru. 

Up  to  the  present  time  the  missionaries  in  the  Melanesian  Mission 
and  in  the  Anglican  Mission  in  New  Guinea  have  been  allowed  to 
prepare  translations  of  the  Bible  and  prayer  book,  etc.,  in  whatever 


170  LINGUISTICS    IN    THE    WESTERN    PACIFIC. 

might  be  the  Linguage  of  their  particular  part,  without  any  regard  as 
to  whether  the  language  was  or  was  not  the  language  of  a  dominant 
people  and  as  such  likely  to  survive.  This  no  doubt  is  very  convenient 
for  the  people  concerned  and  is  also  advantageous  for  the  comparative 
philologist,  who  thus  has  valuable  material  provided  for  his  studies, 
but  where  languages  abound  and  translators  are  scarce  it  does  not  seem 
wise  to  let  men  labor  at  a  language  unless  there  is  some  chance  of  that 
language  surviving  or  being  of  use  in  more  than  its  own  limited  sphere. 
It  can  not  be  doubted  that  if  the  native  peoples  survive  the  shock  of 
civilization  certain  factors  will  cause  some  languages  to  be  used  in  the 
future  more  extensively  than  others;  such  factors  are  (i)  the  use  of  a 
language  by  government  or  b}^  traders,  or  (2)  the  dissemination  of  any 
language  by  reason  of  the  vigor  or  the  numbers  of  the  people  using  it. 

If  the  government  of  New  Guinea  were  to  adopt  certain  languages 
for  use  in  specified  areas,  say,  Motuan  and  Wedauan,  to  the  exclusion 
of  all  others  (at  present  the  government  officials  use  a  jargon),  then, 
although  a  certain  amount  of  hardship  would  be  imposed  on  the  native 
peoples  at  the  outset,  the  gain  to  the  missions  from  having  fixed 
languages  for  their  educational  work  would  ultimately  more  than  com- 
pensate for  any  temporal  hardships  in  that  all  linguistic  work  could  be 
focussed  on  given  languages  and  an  ample  literature  could  be  created, 
and  so  far  as  the  people  themselves  were  concerned  the  children  in 
one  generation  would  have  adapted  themselves  to  the  new  conditions. 
One  calls  to  mind  that  in  England  the  standard  Bible  fixed  the  language 
iust  as  Luther's  Bible  set  the  standard  in  Germany,  and  in  France  the 
language  of  the  King's  court  became  the  standard  language  for  the 
literature  of  the  whole  country. 

The  language  of  the  island  of  Florida,  where  the  seat  of  government 
of  the  Solomons  is  situated  and  where  there  is  a  vigorous  and  a  Chris- 
tian population,  if  taken  up  by  the  Government  might  be  made  to 
serve  for  all  the  eastern  islands.  The  spread  of  such  a  standard  literary 
language  would  be  slow,  and  pending  the  establishment  of  such  a  literary 
language  it  is  clearly  the  duty  of  the  missionaries  to  reduce  to  writing 
the  languages  of  the  various  parts  and  to  use  them  for  the  purpose  of 
teaching,  though  at  the  same  time  languages  likely  to  be  serviceable  by 
virtue  of  their  more  extended  use  should  be  carefully  selected.  Failing 
the  appointment  of  some  one  language  for  a  group  or  district,  the  missions 
should  develop  various  types  of  language  in  each  island  or  sphere  of 
work;  thus  for  the  greater  part  of  San  Cristoval  the  Heuru  and  Fagani 
languages  might  be  made  to  serve,  while  Sa'a,  Tolo,  and  Lau  are  also 
worthy  of  surviving  on  Malaita. 

Up  till  the  year  1917  the  Melaneslan  Mission  used  Mota  as  the  edu- 
cational language  in  all  its  central  schools.  There  was  a  time  when 
owing  to  the  congregating  of  all  the  members  of  the  staff  at  Norfolk 
Island  during  the  summer,  and  to  the  exclusive  use  of  Mota  in  the 
school,  all  the  other  languages  of  the  Mission  came  almost  to   be 


LINGUISTICS    IN    THE    WESTERN    PACIFIC.  lyi 

neglected.  Mota  was  in  a  fair  way  to  being  regarded  as  the  sacred 
language  of  the  Mission,  and  indeed  it  furnished  popularly  the  standard 
by  which  all  the  other  languages  were  supposed  to  be  measured,  and  the 
fact  that  these  languages  were  able  to  show  words  or  usages  that 
corresponded  to  those  of  Mota  was  apt  to  be  construed  philologically 
much  in  the  same  way  as  if  the  presence  in  the  other  Aryan  tongues  of 
words  similar  to  Latin  were  held  as  proving  that  Latin  was  the  root 
language  of  them  all  and  not  itself  a  branch  language. 

When  native  teachers  speaking  various  languages  have  an  education 
in  a  language  like  Mota,  which  is  foreign  to  most  of  them,  much  care 
must  be  exercised  in  order  that  the  ideas  given  in  the  course  of  teaching 
may  be  made  quite  clear  to  the  minds  of  the  pupils.  Dr.  Codrington 
used  to  get  his  pupils  to  write  down  the  gist  of  the  lesson  in  their  own 
tongues  that  he  might  test  thereby  their  understanding  of  it. 

At  the  conference  held  in  1916  the  staff  of  the  Mission  decided  to 
make  a  change  in  the  language  used  as  the  medium  of  instruction  in  the 
central  schools;  Motawas  to  be  abolished  and  English  substituted  in  its 
place.  Effect  has  already  been  given  to  this  determination.  The 
reasons  advanced  publicly  for  the  change  from  Mota  to  English  were: 

(i)  Mota  is  not  well  known  by  the  English  staff  in  the  Solomons  and 
the  languages  spoken  by  the  boys  at  the  two  central  schools  there  do 
not  bear  any  very  great  superficial  likeness  to  Mota,  so  that  Mota  may 
be  said  to  be  practically  a  foreign  tongue  to  all  concerned. 

(2)  Only  a  small  literature  is  available  in  Mota,  and  the  learning  of 
English  would  open  the  way  for  the  provision  of  a  larger  literature. 

(3)  English  is  likely  to  become  the  language  of  general  communica- 
tion. 

(4)  The  trained  teachers  ought  to  be  able  to  act  as  interpreters  for 
any  whites  who  might  visit  their  villages. 

Now,  there  is  undoubtedly  every  reason  why  English  should  be 
taught  as  a  part  of  the  curriculum  in  the  central  schools  (and  also  in  the 
village  schools  if  possible),  but  to  do  this  is  surely  a  different  thing  from 
making  it  the  only  means  of  communication  at  the  central  schools. 
While  not  contending  for  the  continuance  of  Mota  in  the  schools  of  the 
Solomons,  one  does  contend  strongly  for  the  principle  that  the  Mela- 
nesian  should  be  taught  Christianity  through  the  medium  of  one  of  his 
own  languages.  English  is  a  foreign  language,  but  when  all  is  said  and 
done  Mota  can  not  possibly  be  classed  as  foreign.  Outwardly  it  may 
present  many  dissimilarities  from  the  Solomon  Island  languages,  yet  it 
is  thoroughly  and  typically  Melanesian,  and  any  Melanesian  can  learn 
it  or  be  taught  it  without  any  trouble  whatever. 

Mota  has  hitherto  been  of  quite  extraordinary  value  for  purposes  of 
translation;  most  of  our  translations  into  the  other  Melanesian  lan- 
guages were  made  in  the  first  instance  from  Mota  as  a  basis,  and  in 
many  places  it  was  quite  possible  thereby  for  a  teacher  of  average 


172  LINGUISTICS    IN    THE    WESTERN    PACIFIC. 

ability  to  make  a  fair  rendering  of  psalms,  canticles,  and  hymns  for  the 
beginnings  of  his  work. 

Bishop  G.  A.  SeKvyn  advocated  the  teaching  of  the  Melanesians  at 
St.  John's,  Auckland,  in  English,  but  this  was  before  Patteson  came  on 
the  scene.  Selwyn  was  a  scholar,  but  it  is  doubtful  whether  he  could 
be  characterized  as  a  linguist,  nor  had  he  the  time  to  give  to  linguistic 
studies  as  Patteson  had.  His  Maoris  he  taught  in  Maori,  and  one 
hears  nothing  of  any  proposal  of  his  to  abolish  Maori  as  a  medium  of 
communication.  He  had  perforce  to  adopt  English  for  his  Melanesians, 
just  as  he  had  to  bring  them  away  from  their  own  country  in  order  to 
teach  them.  What  one  feels  about  the  substitution  of  English  for  a 
native  language  now  in  the  Mission  is  that  a  veritable  cardinal  principle 
is  in  danger  of  being  abandoned  thereby,  viz.,  the  principle  that  every 
man  should  "hear  the  Gospel"  in  his  own  language. 

THE  NEED  FOR  A  POLICY  IN  TRANSLATIONAL  WORK. 
The  whole  Bible  has  been  translated  into  almost  every  Polynesian 
language.  In  Melanesia  no  complete  Bible  exists  as  yet,  though  the 
Mota  Bible  is  practically  complete.  Certain  small  sections  of  the 
earlier  books  of  the  Old  Testament  were  omitted  purposely  from  it. 
In  Papua  no  complete  Bible  exists,  but  some  of  the  languages  have  a 
complete  New  Testament.  In  setting  out  to  translate  the  Bible,  what 
portion  is  the  missionary  to  start  on?  How  much  of  the  Bible,  or 
rather,  how  much  of  the  Old  Testament,  is  really  required?  These 
two  questions  must  have  occurred  to  the  minds  of  all  missionaries, 
yet  it  would  seem  that  no  one  mission  has  ever  formulated  a  definite 
scheme  in  the  matter  of  directing  or  controlling  biblical  transla- 
tions. With  regard  to  the  first  question,  as  to  what  part  of  the  Bible 
one  should  begin  on,  the  Rev.  Dr.  Macfarlane,  of  the  London  Mis- 
sionary Society  in  Torres  Straits,  wrote  asking  this  question  of  Dr. 
Codrington,  and  the  answer  given  was  that  it  seemed  best  to  make  a 
beginning  with  the  Gospel  according  to  St.  Luke.  In  the  Melanesian 
Mission  St.  Luke  and  the  Acts  were  the  first  translations  made  by 
Bishop  Patteson.  Dr.  Codrington  states:  "I  wrote  the  middle  of  St. 
Matthew  and  St.  Mark,  the  Passion  being  old.  Bishop  Patteson 
wrote  St.  John.     I  did  almost  all  the  Epistles." 

Even  apart  from  the  necessity  for  translating  the  Psalms  for  use  in 
the  daily  services,  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  a  translation  of  the 
Psalms  should  be  made  as  soon  as  possible  in  order  to  encourage  the 
devotional  life  of  the  people.  The  metrical  version  of  the  Psalms  in 
the  Indian  language  of  Massachusetts  was  the  first  part  of  the  Bible 
which  John  EHot,  the  apostle  of  the  American  Indians,  published,  and 
in  the  singing  of  the  Psalms  he  found  the  readiest  means  of  arresting 
attention  and  the  simplest  expression  for  the  religious  feelings  of  his 
child-natured  people. 


LINGUISTICS    IN    THK    WESTKRN     I'ALIFIC.  173 

No  choice  could  be  ninck-  in  the  Epistles  as  to  which  should  be  trans- 
lated in  preference  to  others,  but  the  translator  will  naturally  make 
what  progress  he  can  with  them  all.  If  a  people  is  to  receive  the 
honor  of  having  the  Gospel  message  written  in  its  own  tongue  the  four 
Gospels  and  the  Acts  must  surely  be  the  minimum  amount  of  trans- 
lation done,  and  it  is  hard  to  see  how  practical  religion  can  be  developed 
at  all  among  a  people  unless  they  have  a  copy  of  the  Epistles,  the 
application  of  the  Gospels,  ready  to  their  hands. 

In  very  few  cases  will  it  be  possible  for  much  of  the  Old  Testament 
to  be  translated,  either  in  the  languages  in  the  sphere  of  the  Mela- 
nesian  Mission  or  in  those  of  New  Guinea,  owing  to  the  multiplicity 
of  languages  and  co  the  comparative  dearth  of  missionaries  and 
to  the  need  of  working  in  the  first  place  on  the  New  Testament.  More- 
over, if  the  people  have  a  New  Testament  it  is  hard  to  see  what  need 
there  is  to  undertake  any  systematic  translation  of  the  whole  of  the 
Old  Testament. 

A  list  of  the  translations  and  of  books  published  for  use  in  the 
Melanesian  Mission  is  as  follows: 

(i)  New  Hebrides.  .      ,  _     .  „         , 

Raga:  Prayer  Book,  St.  Luke,  Genesis,  Harmonized  Scripture  Uuspel 

Lessons,  Hymns. 
Omba:  Prayer  Book,  Harmonized  Scripture  Gospel  Lessons,  Hymns. 
Maewo:  Prayer  Book  (small),  Harmonized  Scripture  Gospel  Lessons, 
Hymns. 

(2)  Banks  Islands. 

Lakona:  Prayer  Book  (small).  . 

Mota:  Prayer  Book,  New  Testament,  Old  Testament,  Harmonized 
Scripture  Gospel  Lessons,  Commentar}^  on  St.  Matthew,  Instruc- 
tions for  Catechumens,  English  Lesson  Book,  Codrington  on  the 
Miracles  and  Parables,  Hymns. 

(3)  Torres  Islands. 

Vava:  Prayer  Book,  Canonical  Gospels  and  Epistles,  Hymns. 

(4)  Santa  Cruz. 

Ndeni:  Prayer  Book,  Canonical  Gospels,  Hymns. 

(5)  Solomon  Islands.  .  ,     r>i  -i  j  c 

Ulawa:  Prayer  Book,  New  Testament,  Catechism  for  the  Children  ot 

the  Church,  Hymns. 

Sa'a:  Prayer  Book,  New  Testament,  Catechism  for  the  Children  ot 
the  Church,  Hymns. 

Lau:  Prayer  Book  (small),  Gospels,  Hymns  (few). 

Fiu:  Prayers  and  Hvmns  (small). 

Wango:  Prayer  Book  (small)  and  Hymns,  St.  Luke,  Harmonized 
Scripture  Gospel  Lessons. 

Guadalcanar:  Prayer  Book  (small),  St.  Luke,  Hymns.  .      .  ^    . 

Florida:  Prayer  Book,  Gospels,  Canonical  Epistles,  Harmonized  Scrip- 
ture Gospel  Lessons,  Catechism  for  the  Children  of  the  Church, 

Hvmns.  t,      •  r 

Bugotu:  Prayer  Book,  Book  of  Psalms,  New  Testament,  Portions  ot 
the  Books  of  the  Prophets,  Hymns. 


174  LINGUISTICS    IN    THE    WESTERN    PACIFIC. 

From  this  table  it  will  be  seen  that  much  translation  yet  remains  to 
be  done.  Florida,  which  is  by  far  the  most  important  language  in  the 
Solomons,  has  no  complete  New  Testament.  Dr.  Codrington  has 
included  a  small  grammar  of  the  Florida  language  in  his  "Melanesian 
Languages,"  but  naturally  he  was  not  able  to  do  for  it  what  he  did  for 
Mota  and  we  still  await  a  full  grammar  of  the  language. 

After  sixty  years  of  life,  the  Mission  has  only  three  complete  New 
Testaments  and  only  two  dictionaries,  including  the  present  dictionary 
of  Ulawa  and  Sa*a.  A  grammar  of  Wango  exists  in  manuscript. 
The  paucity  of  grammars  is  much  to  be  deplored.  Sketches  made  by 
Dr.  Codrington  might  conceivably  have  been  filled  up  even  if  no  new 
ones  were  made  independently,  but  the  grammars  of  Sa'a,  Ulawa,  and 
Lau  are  the  only  ones  that  have  been  printed  since  Dr.  Codrington's 
great  work  containing  grammars  of  38  Melanesian  languages  was 
published  in  1884. 

It  would  certainly  be  desirable  to  get  native  teachers  to  make 
initial  translations  of  the  Gospels  through  the  medium  of  Mota  or 
otherwise.  The  Mota  New  Testament,  however,  needs  revising.  It 
was  reprinted  a  year  or  two  ago  from  stereotype  plates  and  a  few 
of  the  printers'  errors  were  corrected,  but  the  Society  for  the  Promotion 
of  Christian  Knowledge  would  not  allow  any  alterations  that  ran 
over  two  lines. 

Any  translations  made  by  natives  would  serve  as  a  basis  for  future 
work  by  the  missionaries  themselves  and  would  also  provide  gram- 
marians with  valuable  material  for  comparative  study.  Thus  there 
seems  to  be  no  reason  why  in  the  case  of  the  Tolo  language,  e.  g.,  in 
Malaita,  some  of  the  teachers  at  Tawani'ahi'a  on  the  west  coast  who 
know  both  Tolo  and  Sa'a  should  not  use  the  Sa'a  translation  of  the 
Gospels  for  work  in  their  own  language.  Since  Bishop  Patteson's 
time  no  further  investigation  has  been  made  of  the  Tolo  language, 
though  it  is  an  important  language  both  on  Malaita  and  also  at  Marau 
Sound  on  the  south  end  of  Guadalcanar. 

THE  VALUE  OF  THE  STUDY  OF  MELANESIAN  LANGUAGES. 

The  study  of  Melanesian  languages  is  an  absolute  necessity  for  the 
elucidation  of  problems  of  language  in  the  western  Pacific,  and  one 
might  go  further  and  say  that  light  had  been  thrown  on  languages  so 
far  away  from  Melanesia  as  Madagascar  and  Malay  by  the  working 
out  of  the  details  of  the  grammars  of  the  Melanesian  languages.  What 
a  flood  of  interest  is  created  by  Dr.  Codrington's  discovery  of  the 
identity  of  the  Omba,  New  Hebrides,  word  heno  and  the  Florida  hanu 
with  the  Malagasy  ano!  In  these  three  languages  this  word  stands 
in  place  of  a  personal  name,  and  the  personal  article  is  prefixed,  so  that 
i  heno,  a  hanu,  i  ano,  are  identical  and  mean  "so-and-so."  The  two 
great  Melanesian  scholars,  Bishop  Patteson  and  Dr.  Codrington,  by 


LINGUISTICS    IN    THE    WESTERN    PACIFIC.  175 

their  analysis  of  words  and  by  comparative  studies,  have  shown  that 
the  structure  of  the  Polynesian  and  Melanesian  languages  is  prac- 
tically the  same.  They  have  shown  that  in  both  types  the  following 
features  occur: 

Adjectives  are  formed  by  prefix  or  suffix.  Time  particles  are  used 
with  verbs.  Transitive  suffixes  are  added  to  verbs.  Pronouns  are 
suffixed  to  nouns  to  denote  possession.  The  personal  pronouns  are 
preceded  by  the  personal  article  (Mota  i-nau^  I,  Maori  a-hau,  Malay 
a-ku). 

In  "Melanesian  Languages"  it  has  been  proved  conclusively,  by 
evidence  produced  from  languages  of  Melanesian  stock,  that  the  per- 
sonal pronouns  are  the  same  in  all  the  Oceanic  languages,  also  that  the 
interrogatives  are  radically  the  same  throughout  and  have  similar  uses. 
Polynesian  scholars  generally  have  paid  little  attention  to  Melanesia, 
yet  the  evidence  of  language  is  all  conclusive  of  the  close  relationship 
which  exists  between  Polynesian  and  Melanesian.  The  failure  on  the 
part  of  Polynesian  scholars  to  study  Melanesian  languages  has  caused 
them  to  make  considerable  mistakes  in  etymology  and  also  to  overlook 
several  very  patent  grammatical  characteristics  of  the  Polynesian  lan- 
guages. A  good  many  of  the  derivations  in  Tregear's  "Maori  Com- 
parative Dictionary"  are  shown  to  be  incorrect  on  comparison  with  the 
kindred  forms  in  Melanesia.  Also,  one  can  not  but  think  that  the 
tendency  to  philosophize  about  the  religion  of  the  Polynesian  and  his 
consequent  outlook  on  life  would  have  been  kept  within  more  moderate 
hounds  had  the  investigators  been  a  little  more  content  to  do  spade 
work  and  dig  into  the  matter  after  the  practical  fashion  of  Dr.  Cod- 
rington  in  his  book  on  Melanesian  anthropology. 

It  has  been  maintained  that  the  Melanesians  had  adopted  Polyne- 
sian forms  of  speech;  that  in  fact  the  Polynesians  were  like  the  Romans 
of  old  and  had  imposed  their  speech  upon  the  peoples  with  whom  they 
mixed;  but  the  facts  of  the  case  seem  to  be  that,  so  far  at  least  as  lan- 
guage is  concerned,  the  two  peoples  belong  to  one  family,  and  also  that 
of  the  two  types  the  Melanesian  is  the  older  and  is  less  worn  and  stands 
to  Polynesian  somewhat  as  Anglo-Saxon  does  to  modern  English; 
also  that  the  explanation  of  many  Polynesian  peculiarities  of  speech  is 
to  be  found  in  the  typical  Melanesian  usages. 

Thus  with  regard  to  the  use  of  the  passive  in  Polynesian,  a  use  which 
has  no  counterpart  whatever  in  Melanesian,  the  present  writer,  owing 
to  his  knowledge  of  Melanesian,  has  been  able  to  show  elsewhere  that 
the  Polynesian  passive  is  compounded  of  adjectival  suffixes  added  to 
verbal  suffixes,  and  that  the  gerundives,  so  common  in  Polynesia  but 
hardly  appearing  at  all  in  Melanesia,  are  composed  of  the  verbal 
suffixes  and  noun  endings.  These  verbal  suffixes  are  among  the 
commonest  features  of  the  Melanesian  languages,  but  with  the  single 
exception  of  Samoan  they  can  not  be  said  to  appear  at  all  prominently 


1/6  LINGUISTICS    IN    THE    WESTERN    PACIFIC. 

in  Polynesia,  though  on  Melanesian  analogies  their  presence  may  be 
detected  in  the  words  in  the  dictionaries.  Also,  curiously  enough,  one 
of  the  Melanesian  adjectival  suffixes,  na  (which  is  a  passive  ending  in 
Polynesia),  has  been  noticed  in  only  one  Polynesian  language  in  that 
capacit\',  and  that  only  by  deduction  from  a  Melanesian  example: 
Niue tavaiia  clear,  open ;  Mota  wawanay^'xde.  and  flat ;  Dyak  papan  plank ; 
Omba  zvawa  open  sea;  Sa'a  taha  to  be  open,  clear;  Maori  tazvha  chasm 
(^Sa'a  tahalaa  chasm),  tazvhai  to  stretch  forth  the  arms. 

Also  in  Malay,  another  example  of  a  late  language  with  much  decayed 
forms  of  speech,  Melanesia  again  supplies  a  means  whereby  correct 
deductions  may  be  made  as  to  the  construction  of  various  words  and 
possibly  also  of  various  forms  of  speech,  e.  g.,  the  presence  of  verbal 
suffixes  and  of  noun  suffixes. 

Apart  from  Dr.  Codrington's  study  of  the  Melanesian  forms,  who 
would  have  known  that  apa  in  siapa,  the  interrogative  pronoun  in 
Mala}^  apa  what?  siapa  who.^  is  a  form  of  the  word  which  in  Mela- 
nesia appears  as  sava,  hava,  etc.,  and  that  the  si  in  siapa  is  really  the 
personal  article  which  appears  in  Javanese  before  the  names  of  persons  ^ 
Since  in  many  words  which  are  common  to  Malay  and  Javanese  the 
Malagasy  suppresses  the  initial  j",  this  Javanese  si,  the  personal  article, 
is  shown  by  Dr.  Codrington  to  be  in  all  probability  the  Malagasy  i, 
which  is  a  personal  article  placed  before  the  proper  names  of  persons. 
Thus  siapa  who,  in  Malay  is  shown  to  correspond  to  the  Mota  i  sava 
who?  and  sa  matey  the  deceased,  in  Malay  is  i  mate  in  Mota. 

In  this  way,  through  the  study  of  Melanesian  linguistics,  "the  use  of 
a  personal  article — a  remarkable  feature  in  a  language — is  found  to 
prevail  in  Melanesia,  in  Polynesia,  in  Madagascar,  and  in  the  Malay 
Archipelago."  This  discovery  alone  is  surely  sufficient  to  establish  the 
importance  of  the  study  of  the  Melanesian  languages. 


MELANESIA  AND  ITS  PEOPLE. 

Melanesia  is  the  geographical  name  given  to  various  groups  of  islands 
in  the  Southwest  Pacific.  These  are  the  nearest  of  the  Pacific  Islands 
to  Australia  and  they  lie  in  a  semicircle  off  the  northeast  coast  of  that 
continent.  New  Caledonia,  the  southern  end  of  the  arc,  is  the  nearest 
to  Australia,  and  New  Britain  and  New  Ireland,  lately  acquired  hy 
the  Australian  Expeditionary  Forces,  form  the  northern  end  of  the  arc. 
The  groups  in  the  arc  are  five  in  number,  the  Bismarck  Archipelago 
and  the  Solomons  in  the  North,  Santa  Cruz  in  the  center,  the  New 
Hebrides  and  New  Caledonia  in  the  South.  The  Admiralty  Islands 
are  included  under  the  Bismarck  Archipelago;  the  New  Hebrides 
include  the  subgroups  of  Banks  and  Torres,  and  the  Loyalties  are  asso- 
ciated with  New  Caledonia.  The  term  Melanesia  belongs  properly 
to  all  of  these  groups  of  islands.  Certain  other  groups  lie  outside  the 
arc,  but  rank  as  Melanesian,  to  wit,  Fiji  and  the  islands  which  lie 
off  the  southeast  coast  of  New  Guinea,  the  Trobriands,  D'Entre- 
casteaux,  Woodlark,  and  the  Louisiades. 

Etymologically,  Melanesia  ought  to  mean  "black  islands,"  just  as 
Polynesia  means  "many  islands"  and  Micronesia  "small  islands," 
but  considering  the  wonderful  verdure  and  greenness  of  the  Melanesian 
islands  one  can  only  infer  that  those  who  named  them  originally  had 
in  their  minds  the  comparatively  dark  skins  of  the  inhabitants  and 
that  this  distinguishing  feature  of  the  people  was  used  as  a  means  of 
designating  the  islands  where  they  dwelt.  Doubtless  to  the  eye  of  any 
one  accustomed  to  the  lighter-skinned  peoples  of  Polynesia  these 
islands  of  the  Southwest  Pacific  would  seem  to  be  "islands  of  the 
blacks." 

Several  external  characteristics  of  the  Melanesian  peoples  serve  to 
distinguish  them  from  the  Polynesians:  (i)  Shortness  of  stature,  the 
average  height  of  the  males  being  possibly  5  feet  4  inches  and  of  the 
females  4  feet  io>2  inches;  (2)  a  chocolate-colored  skin;  (3)  bushy 
hair,  frizzed  and  tangled  and  standing  erect,  owing  probably  to  the 
incessant  teasing  of  it  by  the  native  combs. 

The  languages  spoken  in  Melanesia  vary  considerably  among  them- 
selves, but  on  examination  they  are  shown  to  possess  common  features 
and  to  have  a  very  large  underlying  sameness.  The  external  resem- 
blances, however,  between  the  Melanesian  languages  are  much  less 
than  those  between  the  languages  of  Polynesia;  e.  g.,  the  external 
resemblances  between  Maori  and  Samoan  are  far  greater  than  those 
between  Mota  and  Florida.  The  witness  of  language  would  enable 
us  to  decide  at  once  that  Fiji  belongs  to  Melanesia,  though  its  prox- 
imity to  Polynesia  has  largely  affected  the  customs  and  habits  and 
probably  also  the  religion  of  its  people.     Similarly  the  peoples  of  the 

177 


lyS  MELANESIA   AND    ITS    PEOPLE. 

islands  to  the  east  of  New  Guinea  can  be  shown  to  be  Melanesian  by 
reason  of  their  languages,  and  if  Melanesia  be  taken  as  a  starting- 
point  for  nomenclature,  the  Malagasy  language  of  Madagascar  might 
even  be  classed  as  Melanesian.  The  peoples  of  New  Guinea  have  the 
same  three  distinguishing  physical  characteristics  that  we  have  noted 
above,  and  the  languages  of  a  very  considerable  proportion  of  at  least 
the  coast  peoples  there  can  certainly  be  classed  as  Melanesian. 

Dr.  Codrington  has  shown  in  "Melanesian  Anthropology"  that  there 
is  a  large  general  resemblance  in  the  religious  beliefs  and  practices, 
the  customs  and  ways  of  life,  which  prevail  in  Melanesia  proper,  and 
further  research  on  the  lines  indicated  by  him  will  probably  reveal  the 
presence  of  similar  beliefs  and  conditions  of  life  among  the  Melanesian 
peoples  of  New  Guinea  and  the  neighboring  islands. 

A  distinguishing  social  condition  of  Melanesia  is  the  complete  ab- 
sence of  tribes,  if  the  word  tribe  is  to  be  applied  as  it  is  to  the  Maori 
people  of  New  Zealand,  or  as  used  in  Fiji.  Descent  in  nearly  every 
part  of  Melanesia  is  counted  through  the  m_other  and  the  people  are 
everywhere  divided  into  two  classes  which  are  exogamous.  This 
division  of  the  people  is  the  foundation  on  which  the  fabric  of  native 
societj'  is  built  up. 

THE  GOVERNMENT  OF  MELANESIA. 

Previous  to  1914  Germany  held  an  important  part  of  Melanesia, 
viz.,  the  Bismarck  Archipelago,  which  comprises  the  tw^o  large  islands 
kno^vn  prior  to  their  annexation  by  Germany  as  New  Britain  and  New 
Ireland,  with  many  smaller  islands  in  the  group,  notably  the  Duke  of 
York,  and  also  with  two  large  islands  in  the  Solomons,  Bougainville 
and  Choiseul,  and  the  small  island  Buka.  France  holds  New  Cale- 
donia and  the  Loyalties,  and  a  joint  British  and  French  protectorate, 
known  as  the  Condominium,  prevails  in  the  case  of  the  New  Hebrides, 
Banks,  and  Torres  groups,  with  the  center  of  government  at  Vila, 
Sandwich  Island.  The  Solomons  and  Santa  Cruz  are  a  British  pro- 
tectorate with  a  resident  commissioner  stationed  at  Tulagi,  Florida, 
Solomon  Islands,  and  under  the  orders  of  the  governor  of  Fiji,  who  is 
high  commissioner  for  the  Pacific. 

THE  PROGRESS  OF  THE  MELANESIAN  MISSION. 

The  nominal  field  of  work  of  the  Melanesian  Mission  is  all  the  Mel- 
anesian islands  from  and  including  the  Solomon  Islands  to  the  three 
northern  New  Hebrides,  Raga,  Omba,  and  Maewo,  but  excluding 
Fiji.  All  of  the  islands  in  this  sphere  as  far  north  as  Ysabel  (with  a 
few  exceptions  noted  below)  are  more  or  less  occupied  by  the  Mission. 
The  total  number  in  its  schools  in  1914  was  15,000,  of  whom  9,000  are 
baptized.  Many  of  the  smaller  islands  are  now  completely  Christian, 
but  even  on  islands  of  moderate  size,  like  Ulawa  in  the  Solomons  or 


MELANESIA    AND    ITS    PEOPLE.  179 

Santa  Maria  in  the  Banks,  a  certain  number  are  still  Heathen,  while  in 
the  large  islands  practically  85  per  cent  are  still  outside  the  Mission's 
influence. 

The  total  population  of  the  islands  in  the  sphere  of  the  Mission 
numbers  anything  between  100,000  and  150,000,  and  the  large  islands, 
Malaita,  San  Cristoval,  and  Guadalcanar,  contain  on  a  moderate 
estimate  70,000  of  the  total.  It  is  not  surprising  that  on  an  island 
like  Malaita,  which  is  100  miles  long  and  contains  a  scattered  popu- 
lation of  30,000  or  40,000  people,  comparatively  little  progress  has  been 
made,  but  it  is  especially  regrettable  that  there  are  still  three  Heathen 
villages  on  a  small  island  like  Ulawa,  and  that  tiny  places  like  Sikaiana, 
Rennell  and  Bellona,  and  Santa  Anna  are  still  unworked.  However, 
it  must  be  understood  that  the  evangelizing  of  Melanesia  is  a  pecul- 
iarly difficult  task,  as  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  in  Tanna  in  the  New 
Hebrides,  where  the  attack  on  Heathenism  has  been  incessant  and 
where  the  Presbyterian  missionaries  have  been  in  actual  residence 
from  the  very  start  of  the  work,  a  portion  of  the  island  is  still  Heathen. 
Nevertheless,  better  results  might  have  been  obtained  in  our  own 
sphere. 

OTHER  MISSIONARY  AGENCIES  IN  MELANESIA. 

The  Melanesian  Mission  is  not  the  only  evangelizing  body  in  its 
sphere  of  work.  Roman  Catholic  missionaries  settled  in  the  Solomons 
about  1897  and  made  their  headquarters  at  a  little  island  called  Rua 
Sura,  off  the  east  coast  of  Guadalcanar  and  fairly  close  to  the  trading 
station  at  Aola.  A  good  deal  of  their  work  has  been  done  on  the  west 
coast  of  Guadalcanar  near  Mole.  One  of  their  methods  of  progress  has 
been  to  adopt  children  from  the  Heathen  parts  and  to  rear  them  in 
Christian  surroundings.  They  made  settlements  also  along  the  north 
end  of  the  island,  often  in  the  villages  belonging  to  the  Melanesian  Mis- 
sion, and  have  begun  work  on  the  southeast  coast  of  San  Cristoval  and 
on  the  west  coast  of  Big  Malaita.  They  have  stations  also  at  the  south 
end  of  Raga,  New  Hebrides. 

The  Kanaka  labor  trade  was  responsible  for  the  advent  of  certain 
missionaries  of  Protestant  bodies  into  the  Solomons.  Most  of  the 
Melanesians  in  Queensland  who  attended  school  and  church  were 
cared  for  by  the  Queensland  Kanaka  Mission,  a  Protestant  body. 
At  Malu,  a  place  at  the  north  end  of  Big  Malaita,  some  returned  Chris- 
tians who  had  been  converted  by  the  agency  of  these  schools  of  the 
Queensland  Kanaka  Mission  and  some  devoted  white  missionaries 
came  to  the  Solomons  in  a  labor  vessel  and  settled  at  Malu.  But  the 
malarial  conditions  of  the  place  and  lack  of  proper  equipment  brought 
about  their  removal  and  two  of  them  eventually  died  of  malaria. 
When  the  Kanakas  were  all  deported  the  Queensland  Kanaka  Mission 
followed  their  old  pupils  and  made  regular  stations  on  Malaita.     Their 


l80  MELANESIA    AND    ITS    PEOPLE. 

mission  is  now  known  as  the  South  Sea  Evangelical  Mission.  Its 
operations  are  confined  mainly  to  Malaita. 

In  1902  the  veteran  Dr.  George  Brown  visited  the  western  Solomons 
and  made  preparation  for  beginning  a  mission  of  the  Methodist  body 
in  New  Georgia.  This  mission  is  now"  well  established  and  has  extended 
its  operations  in  New  Georgia  and  Vella  Lavella,  and  opened  a  school 
on  Liuaniua  (Ongtong  Java,  Lord  Howe  Island),  an  atoll  north  of 
Ysabel  inhabited  by  Polynesians. 

In  the  New  Hebrides,  on  Raga  and  Omba  in  the  sphere  of  the  Mel- 
anesian  Mission,  mission  work  is  being  done  by  missionaries  of  the 
Church  of  Christ. 

No  delimitation  of  territory  in  the  case  of  the  various  missions  has 
been  attempted  by  the  governments  concerned,  such  as  has  been  done 
in  New  Guinea,  and  undoubtedly  the  clashing  of  the  various  interests 
is  not  the  best  thing  for  the  natives.  The  marking  out  of  a  sphere  of 
operations,  with  possibly  a  time  limit  for  the  effective  occupying  of 
them,  would  be  the  fairest  for  all  concerned. 

SOME  PHYSICAL  FEATURES  OF  THE  ISLANDS. 

All  the  islands  in  the  sphere  of  the  Mission  have  a  certain  similarity 
of  appearance  from  the  sea  in  that  they  are  all  covered  with  dense 
forest.  Florida  and  the  east  coast  of  Guadalcanar  have  wide,  open 
spaces  covered  with  high,  rank  grass  and  with  a  few  trees,  but  in  all 
the  other  islands  dense  bush  covers  the  face  of  the  country  from  high- 
water  mark  to  the  tops  of  the  hills  miles  away  in  the  interior.  In  the 
islands  in  the  south  giant  creepers  twine  over  all  the  trees  and  form  a 
perfect  network,  almost  blotting  out  the  tops  of  the  individual  trees, 
and  when  seen  from  the  sea  the  huge  banyans  seem  to  tower  like 
observation  posts  above  the  flattened  tops  of  the  forest.  In  most  of 
the  islands  the  land  rises  abruptly  from  the  beach  and  access  to  the 
interior  is  by  narrow  forest  tracks  which  the  frequent  heavy  rainfalls 
have  converted  into  deep  ruts.  Tree  roots  cover  everything  and 
walking  is  extremely  difficult  in  consequence.  The  paths  are  never 
kept  clear  and  open  and  the  trees  that  fall  across  them  are  allowed  to 
lie  there,  and  a  new  track  is  made  round  or  under  or  over  the  obstacle. 

Dr.  Guppy,  in  his  book,  "The  Solomon  Islands,"  has  a  graphic 
description  of  the  experiences  of  the  white  man  when  travelling  ashore 
in  Melanesia: 

"Bush  walking  where  there  is  no  native  track  is  a  very  tedious  process. 
In  districts  of  coral  limestone  such  traverses  are  exceedingly  trying  to  the 
soles  of  one's  boots  and  to  the  measure  of  one's  temper.  After  being  pro- 
vokingly  entangled  in  a  thicket  for  some  minutes,  the  persevering  traveller 
walks  briskly  along  through  a  comparatively  clear  space,  when  a  creeper 
suddenly  trips  up  his  feet  and  over  he  goes  to  the  ground.  Picking  him- 
self up,  he  no  sooner  starts  again  when  he  finds  his  face  in  the  middle  of  a 


MELANESIA    AND    ITS    PEOPLE.  l8l 

Strong  web  which  some  huge-bodied  spider  has  been  laboriously  construct- 
ing. He  proceeds  on  his  way  when  he  feels  an  uncomfortable  sensation 
inside  his  helmet,  in  which  he  finds  his  friend  the  spider,  with  a  body  as  big 
as  a  filbert,  quite  at  his  ease.  Going  down  a  steep  slope,  he  clasps  a  stout- 
looking  areca  palm  to  prevent  himself  falling,  when  down  comes  the  rotten 
palm,  and  the  long-suft'ering  traveller  finds  himself  once  more  on  the  ground. 
To  these  inconveniences  must  be  added  the  oppressive  heat  of  a  tropical 
forest  and  the  continual  perspiration  in  which  the  skin  is  bathed." 

A  Melanesian  is  always  careful  to  turn  his  toes  in  as  he  walks,  and 
the  narrowness  of  the  bush  tracks  causes  him  no  inconvenience,  but 
the  white  man  is  not  so  careful  how  he  plants  his  feet  and  is  constantly 
striking  the  numerous  objects  which  lie  by  the  side  of  the  track  or  on 
its  surface.  Moreover,  a  native  person  keeps  his  hands  by  his  side  as 
he  walks,  whereas  the  white  man  does  not  know  the  necessity  for  care 
in  the  matter  and  he  frequently  hits  the  numerous  obstacles  with  his 
hands,  and  some  of  the  leaves  on  the  edge  of  the  track  are  studded  with 
sharp  thorns!  Every  Melanesian  carries  a  "scrub"  knife,  and  with 
it  he  cuts  away  the  limbs  that  fall  over  the  path,  but  he  cuts  them  at 
his  own  height  and  in  an  immediate  line  with  the  path;  this  suits  him 
well,  but  proves  awkward  for  any  person  who  is  taller  or  less  careful 
about  his  method  of  progression. 

It  can  hardly  be  said  that  the  Melanesian  islands  as  a  whole  are 
beautiful,  for  the  prevailing  colors  of  the  forest  are  too  somber  and  dull; 
brilliant-colored  shrubs  grow  round  the  houses,  but  none  of  the  forest 
trees  bear  such  flowers  as  one  sees  on  the  trees  in  North  Queensland, 
and  the  ground  is  a  tangled  mass  of  undergrowth  and  creepers.  Wide, 
open  views,  panoramic  scenes,  outlooks  over  mountain  or  glen  or  sea 
are  impossible  to  obtain,  since  the  bush  closes  in  everything.  But 
there  is  something  peculiarly  exhilarating,  both  to  mind  and  body, 
when,  after  struggling  along  through  the  numerous  obstructions 
of  the  paths  and  sweltering  under  the  oppressive  heat,  one  suddenly 
emerges  from  the  trees  on  the  weather  coast  of  an  island  and  feels  the 
invigorating  blast  of  the  trade  wind,  and  the  eye  rests  with  complete 
satisfaction  on  the  wonderful  blue  of  the  sea  and  the  red  of  the  shore 
reef,  and  the  creamy  whiteness  of  the  breakers  as  they  beat  against  it. 

Certain  places  in  the  Solomons,  however,  may  quite  easily  rank  as 
beauty  spots.  The  Ututha  Channel,  which  divides  the  two  eastern 
islands  in  the  Floridas;  the  channel  in  the  Rubiana  Lagoon;  and  the 
western  end  of  the  Mara  Masiki  Channel,  which  divides  Malaita  in 
two — all  have  delightful  vistas  and  charm  one  with  their  tortuous 
and  sharp  windings  opening  out  on  here  an  island,  there  a  cascade; 
the  giant  growths  of  the  coral  under  the  boat  fascinate  one's  gaze; 
beautifully  colored  fishes  of  vivid  greens  and  reds  dart  about  in  the 
shallows,  while  up  in  the  trees,  on  the  side  of  the  steep  hills,  innumer- 
able cockatoos  rend  the  air  with  their  harsh  cries,  or  the  big  wood 


lS2  MELANESIA    AND    ITS    PEOPLE. 

pigeons  boom  out  their  melancholy  note,  reminding  one  of  a  cow  lowing 
for  its  calf.  Often,  again,  the  course  of  a  river  (like  that  at  Mwadoa, 
Ulawa),  with  its  succession  of  cascades  and  its  deep,  clear  pools,  con- 
strains our  admiration. 

The  islands  of  the  Floridas  more  especially  appeal  to  the  eye.  They 
have  more  open  spaces,  the  coast  line  is  more  indented,  and  beautiful 
bays  abound;  there  are  more  islands  lying  off  the  coast,  the  beaches 
are  more  numerous,  and  the  landing  on  them  is  easy.  The  villages 
in  Florida  nestle  under  the  shade  of  innumerable  coconut  trees  just 
above  high-water  mark.  The  beaches  are  lined  with  the  feathery 
casuarina  and  here  and  there  are  coral  trees  {Erythrina  indica)  with 
their  brilliant  red  flowers,  or  the  gorgeous  red  leaves  of  the  salite 
{Catappa  terminalis)  light  up  the  whole  beach  with  the  glow  of  their 
dying  splendor.  The  huge  masses  of  the  vutu  {Barringtonia  speciosa) 
spring  right  out  of  the  saltwater  and  their  biretta-shaped  fruits  may  be 
seen  floating  on  every  tide.  Going  north  from  Norfolk  Island,  the 
sight  of  a  floating  fruit  of  the  vutu  was  generally  the  first  sign  of  our 
entrance  into  the  tropics.  Similarly  the  mighty  limbs  of  the  dalo 
(Fiji  dilo,  Calophyllum  inophyllum)  are  washed  by  every  wave  and  its 
small  ball-like  fruit  is  found  lying  on  every  beach.  The  smell  of  the 
sweet-scented  white  flowers  of  the  dalo  reminds  one  of  nothing  so  much 
as  of  an  orange  grove  in  flower. 

But  the  real  attraction  and  charm  of  Melanesia  lie  in  the  mystery 
of  the  people,  their  unwritten  past,  the  strangeness  of  their  languages, 
their  views  of  life,  their  habits  and  customs,  the  strange  flora  of  the 
country,  the  birds  and  butterflies,  some  of  these  latter  measuring  8  or 
9  inches  across,  the  excitement  of  a  landing  among  the  Heathen,  the 
yearnings  of  soul,  the  longing  to  do  them  good,  to  lead  them  out  of 
their  darkness  into  light,  to  give  them  som.ething  more  satisfying  than 
the  tobacco  or  calico  or  knife  which  they  are  clamoring  for — these 
are  the  things  that  grip  the  heart  of  the  m.issionary  and  constitute  for 
him  at  least  the  charm  of  Melanesia.  One  stands  on  a  beach  of  the 
great  island  Malaita,  and  all  the  fibers  of  one's  being  are  sarred  by 
the  sight  of  hill  rising  upon  hill,  cape  stretching  out  beyond  cape,  and 
by  the  knowledge  that  scattered  all  up  and  down  the  land  are  souls 
awaiting  the  enlightenment  of  the  spirit  of  God. 

THE  FOOD-STUFFS  OF  MELANESIA. 

The  Melanesians  may  be  called  an  agricultural  people  and  a  great 
deal  of  their  time  is  given  up  to  cultivation.  Their  two  main  crops 
are  yams  and  taro,  of  both  of  which  there  are  numerous  varieties.  The 
best  yams  are  grown  in  the  southern  part  of  Melanesia;  the  Solomon 
Islanders  never  have  enough  yams  to  carry  them  through  the  summer 
months  till  harvest  time  in  April,  all  the  yams  having  been  used  for 
planting.     But  in  the  larger  islands  there  is  extensive  cultivation  of 


MELANESIA    AND    ITS    PEOPLE.  I83 

taro  in  the  districts  on  the  hills,  and  this  food  carries  the  people  over 
the  hunger  times  of  the  summer  months.  A  yam  garden  is  a  sight 
worth  seeing;  the  ground  is  kept  perfectly  clear  of  weeds  (this  is  the 
women's  share  of  the  work),  the  yam  vines  are  trained  up  long  poles 
and  then  run  along  strings  which  are  tied  from  pole  to  pole.  The  vines 
are  of  various  shades  of  green,  and  when  the  leaves  are  dying  they  turn 
red  in  color  and  are  very  beautiful  to  look  on. 

Breadfruit  grows  readily,  and  the  trees  have  two  crops  a  year,  one 
coming  opportunely  during  the  summer.  The  canarium  (almond) 
bears  during  the  winter  months,  July  and  August.  The  nuts  are  put 
into  cane  baskets  and  are  smoked  ready  for  storing.  The  coconut 
is  in  bearing  all  the  year  through.  The  tree  is  at  its  best  at  the 
coast  and  just  above  high-water  mark.  The  large  islands  of  the 
eastern  Solomons — Malaita,Guadalcanar,  SanCristoval,  and  Ysabel — 
have  comparatively  few  coconuts,  and  the  only  extensive  coconut 
plantation  on  Malaita  is  along  the  coast  at  Sa'a,  at  the  southeast  end 
of  the  island.  The  scarcity  of  coconuts  is  largely  owing  to  the  fact 
that  the  trees  thrive  best  near  the  sea,  but  owing  to  fear  of  raids  the 
majority  of  the  people  on  these  large  islands  live  away  from  the  coast 
and  so  can  not  grow  the  trees  in  any  quantity. 

Of  so-called  tropical  fruits  Melanesia  has  but  few  indigenous  vari- 
eties. Of  the  common  native  fruits  by  far  the  most  important  is  the 
coconut,  and  one  is  inclined  to  question  whether  any  more  wonderful 
fruit  than  the  coconut  grows  on  this  earth!  The  fruit  is  obtainable 
all  the  year  round;  it  is  nutritious  whether  eaten  in  the  green  stage 
or  when  it  has  begun  to  sprout  and  is  ready  for  planting.  The  ripe 
nut  is  generall}'^  scraped  and  strained,  and  the  resultant  white  juice, 
the  only  real  coconut  milk,  is  boiled  in  the  half  shell  and  mixed  as  a 
paste  with  grated  yams  or  taro.  What  is  commonly  known  as  coconut 
milk,  the  fluid  in  the  dry  nut  so  dear  to  the  hearts  of  children  in  Euro- 
pean countries,  is  never  drunk  by  Melanesians,  but  if  opportunity 
offers  is  poured  into  a  basin  and  put  by  for  the  animals  to  drink. 

The  oil  of  the  coconut  is  extracted  by  the  old-time  process  of  stone 
boiling.  Needless  to  say,  dried  or  smoked  coconut  (copra)  is  by  far 
the  greatest  article  of  export  from  Alelanesia  to-day.  Ceylon  used  to 
be  reckoned  the  planters'  paradise  so  far  as  growing  coconuts  was 
concerned,  but  coconut  plantations  in  the  islands  of  the  Solomons 
come  into  bearing  quicker  than  in  any  other  part  of  the  world;  the 
nuts  are  as  good  as  the  big  Samoan  nuts  (indeed  seed  nuts  have  been 
imported  from  Samoa),  the  rainfall  is  abundant,  and  hurricanes  are 
almost  unknown.  The  oil  is  extracted  from  the  copra  and  goes  to  make 
some  of  our  best  soaps.  The  shell  of  the  nut  is  used  by  the  natives 
to  make  cups  and  bottles,  and  since  it  contains  oil  it  burns  fiercely  in 
the  fire.  From  the  outer  covering  of  the  nut  both  ropes  and  mats  are 
made — the  coir  of  commerce  (coir,  like  copra,  is  a  Singhalese  word); 


184  MELANESIA    AND    ITS    PEOPLE. 

and  the  natives  themselves  make  sennit  and  string  from  it.  The  dry- 
sheath,  the  covering  of  the  new  bunch  of  fruit,  serves  the  natives  both  as 
tinder  and  as  a  torch.  The  leaves  of  the  tree  make  the  very  strongest 
baskets,  and  in  some  islands  are  used  to  make  the  walls  of  the 
houses.  In  the  equatorial  Pacific  toddy  is  distilled  from  the  growing 
tree  and  the  topmost  shoots  form  a  veritable  king's  banquet,  but  the 
cutting  of  them  destroys  the  tree. 

Other  fruits  are  the  vi-apple  {Spondias  dulcis,  commonly  known  as 
vli  or  uri),  the  canarium  nut  (ngali),  the  nut  of  the  salite  tree,  which  is 
found  oftenest  growing  at  the  mouths  of  the  streams,  the  banana,  and 
the  breadfruit.  Both  the  banana  and  breadfruit  are  always  cooked. 
The  indigenous  banana  needs  cooking  to  make  it  eatable,  but  the  com- 
mon varieties,  Musa  cavendishii  or  gros  michel,  or  the  sugar  banana  of 
Queensland,  have  been  introduced  and  flourish.  Many  other  tropical 
and  subtropical  fruits  have  also  been  introduced — oranges,  mandarins, 
lemons,  limes,  granadilla,  soursop,  papaya,  pineapples,  mangoes,  cocoa, 
coffee;  most  of  these  need  careful  cultivation,  and  with  the  exception 
of  limes  and  papayas  they  all  tend  to  die  out  if  allowed  to  run  wild. 

Animal  food  is  but  rarely  partaken  of  by  Melanesians.  Pigs  they 
all  have,  but  they  keep  them  for  great  events,  for  death  feasts  or  for 
wedding  banquets.  Opossums  (cuscus)  and  the  large  fruit-eating  bats 
and  wood  pigeons  and  the  monitor  lizard  are  often  eaten  as  relishes 
with  the  vegetable  food.  The  coast  people  get  large  quantities  of 
shellfish  at  the  low  spring  tides,  and  on  an  island  like  Ulawa  a  great 
deal  of  fishing  is  done  both  from  the  rocks  and  also  out  of  canoes.  The 
people  make  all  their  own  fishing-lines  out  of  home-made  string  or  out 
of  strong  creepers  found  in  the  forest,  and  in  old  days  their  hooks  were 
cut  out  of  tortoise-shell  or  out  of  black  pearl-shell.  Even  to-day  the 
hooks  for  the  bonito  fishing  are  of  native  manufacture  and  the  tiny 
hooks  for  whiffing  sardines  are  exquisitely  made. 

Fishing  with  nets  is  followed  extensively  by  the  Lau-speaking 
peoples  who  live  on  the  artificial  islets  off  the  northeast  coast  of  Ma- 
laita.  These  peoples  and  the  people  of  the  Reef  Islands  at  Santa  Cruz 
live  almost  entirely  on  a  fish  diet.  The  flesh  of  the  porpoise  is  much 
prized  by  the  peoples  of  Malaita  and  regular  drives  of  porpoises  are 
held,  the  animals  being  surrounded  and  forced  ashore  into  muddy 
creeks,  where  they  are  captured.  The  main  value  of  the  porpoise  lies 
in  the  teeth,  which  form  one  of  the  native  currencies.  On  the  lee  side 
of  the  large  islands  in  the  Solomons  there  is  a  great  deal  of  fishing 
with  hand  nets;  men  stand  in  the  water  at  the  mouth  of  the 
streams,  holding  a  pole  to  which  two  bent  sticks  are  attached  with  a 
net  tied  to  the  four  ends  of  the  sticks,  and  lowered  to  the  bottom. 
The  small  fish  (sardines  and  others)  are  chased  inshore  by  large 
kingfish,  and  pass  over  the  net,  which  is  promptly  pulled  up  by  the 
fisherman.  The  fish  are  transferred  by  a  deft  movement  to  a  bag 
hanging  on  the  man's  back  and  suspended  from  his  head. 


MELANESIA    AND    ITS    PEOPLE.  185 

Bonito  and  flying-fish  are  esteemed  as  the  greatest  dehcacies.  The 
former  is  coarse,  but  the  latter  is  indeed  a  dainty.  The  bonito  is  a 
very  sacred  fish  to  the  mind  of  the  southern  Solomon  Islander,  and  the 
catching  of  it  was  intimately  connected  with  his  religion.  The  bonito 
is  caught  from  canoes,  either  by  a  hook  trailed  aft,  no  bait  being  used, 
or  by  a  hook  played  up  and  down  in  a  jerky  fashion  and  attached  to  a 
strong  rod  and  line.  The  flying-fish  are  caught  on  a  gorge  made  of 
tortoise-shell  or  of  the  midrib  of  the  rachis  of  the  sago  palm.  The  best 
bait  is  the  claw  of  the  robber  crab  [Birgus  latro).  The  hook  and  line  are 
made  fast  to  a  fishing  float  called  u'o  in  Ulawa  (Maori  uto  fish-float). 
Numbers  of  these  are  thrown  out  in  places  frequented  by  the  flying-fish 
and  the  owner  stands  by  in  his  canoe  and  watches  them. 

Sea  bream  are  the  most  delicate  fish  in  Melanesia.  They  are  caught 
with  hook  and  line,  and  live  white  ants  are  thrown  out  as  burly.  The 
bait  is  a  worm  found  in  the  sand  at  high-water  mark.  The  white  ant 
used  is  not  the  destructive  white  ant,  which  is  capable  of  giving  a  sharp 
bite,  but  is  of  a  brownish  color.  The  ignorant  bushmen  are  popularly 
supposed  to  use  the  wrong  ant,  with  the  result  that  the  bream  will 
disappear. 

THE  HOUSES  OF  THE  MELANESIANS. 

The  houses  are  mainly  of  one  t^pe,  one-roomed  buildings,  to  which 
annexes  may  easily  be  added.  Some  of  these  houses  are  large  enough 
to  accommodate  a  chief  and  his  twenty  wives,  small  chambers  being 
built  within  the  main  building.  The  commoners  have  their  own 
houses,  one  house  to  each  family,  and  it  is  rarely  that  two  families 
live  together.  The  roof  is  the  first  part  of  the  house  that  is  built. 
Three  rows  of  posts  are  erected  and  ridge  poles  are  set  on  them.  The 
poles  may  rest  in  a  groove  or  the  tops  of  the  posts  may  be  forked. 
Bamboo  rafters  are  tied  from  the  center  pole  to  the  side,  and  thatch 
is  laid  on  them  longitudinally.  The  thatch  is  made  of  leaves,  sago 
palm  or  nipa  palm,  or  the  leaves  of  sugar  cane  (this  latter  is  only  used 
in  the  south)  sewn  on  to  reeds  or  laths  of  bamboos  and  then  tied  in 
position.  The  people  of  Florida  and  of  Ysabel  put  their  thatch  on 
in  very  close  layers,  and  consequently  the  roof  lasts  very  well,  but  in 
the  other  islands  the  thatch  needs  a  good  deal  of  repair  after  the  second 
year.  The  smoke  of  the  wood  fires  used  in  cooking  hardens  the  thatch 
and  tends  to  preserve  it;  but  schools  and  churches,  buildings  where 
fires  are  not  lighted,  need  constant  repairs  to  the  thatch.  The  sides 
are  built  in  with  lattice-work  of  thin  bamboo,  and  a  small  doorway  is 
left  in  the  front  which  can  be  covered  by  a  shutter  of  leaves.  Orna- 
mental ridges  are  made  on  the  ground  and  are  hoisted  up  into  position, 
and  then  made  fast  with  creepers. 

The  Malaita  and  San  Cristoval  houses  have  a  platform  in  front, 
where  the  people  sit  in  the  evenings.      To  get  into  the  house  one  has 


l86  MELANESIA    AND    ITS    PEOPLE. 

to  mount  this  platform  and  then  drop  through  the  tiny  doorway.  The 
Florida  house  is  generally  built  upon  piles  and  the  floor  is  covered 
with  split  bamboos.  The  bed  place  may  be  raised  or,  as  in  Malaita, 
the  people  may  sleep  on  the  earth  with  no  better  mattress  than  one 
of  the  huge  coconut  leaves  plaited.  For  the  women  and  small  children 
a  platform  is  built  to  serve  as  a  bed.  Pillows  as  such  are  not  much  in 
use  except  in  Santa  Cruz,  and  a  log  or  billet  of  wood  makes  an  accept- 
able pillow  for  the  Melanesian. 

The  men  and  boys  in  the  Solomons  have  club-houses,  both  in  the 
villages  and  also  down  at  the  beach.  In  the  club-house  on  the  beach 
the  canoes  for  bonito  fishing  are  kept.  Strangers  are  entertained  in 
these  club  houses;  the  relics  of  the  dead  are  kept  in  them  and  religious 
rites  are  performed  in  them.  Women  are  excluded  from  the  club 
houses. 

The  cooking  is  all  done  at  a  fireplace  of  earth  set  inside  a  ring  of 
stones  on  the  floor.  On  a  stand  over  the  fire  are  the  household  cooking 
utensils,  wooden  bowls,  and  stores  of  smoked  almonds.  Yams  are  kept 
on  stages  built  in  the  rear  part  of  the  house  and  generally  screened  off. 
Every  house  has  its  inner  chamber  that  serves  as  a  bedroom  if  required. 
Life  is  lived  very  much  in  public,  and  privacy  is  a  thing  not  understood 
or  desired.  To  be  allov/ed  to  go  behind  the  partition  in  any  house  is 
significant  as  a  mark  of  close  acquaintanceship. 

CLOTHING. 

Bark  cloth  (tapa)  is  made  in  Melanesia,  but  it  never  figured  as  an 
article  of  clothing  and  its  main  use  was  to  form  a  kind  of  shawl  in  which 
the  baby  was  slung  when  carried  from  the  shoulder.  Before  the  coming 
of  the  white  man  clothing  of  any  sort  was  very  little  worn  by  Mela- 
nesians.  The  people  of  Santa  Cruz,  both  men  and  women,  were  indeed 
clad  sufl[iciently  to  satisfy  our  European  notions  of  decency,  and  in 
the  southern  New  Hebrides  and  in  Florida  and  Ysabel  the  women 
wore  petticoats  made  of  mats  or  of  grass,  but  in  very  many  of  the 
islands  the  women's  dress  was  of  the  scantiest,  and  the  men  wore 
nothing  but  a  section  of  a  leaf  of  a  large  pandanus.  In  the  southeast 
Solonions  the  men  commonly  were  quite  naked  and  the  women  wore 
but  a  scanty  fringe,  while  on  Big  Malaita  not  even  the  traditional 
fig  leaf  was  worn.  In  Santa  Cruz,  where  all  women  and  girls  are 
swathed  in  mats  and  are  kept  in  strict  seclusion,  there  is  more  immoral- 
ity, and  that  of  a  gross  and  shocking  sort,  than  in  the  Lau-speaking 
districts  of  Malaita,  where  the  women  wear  no  clothing  of  any  sort 
whatever.  Once  the  mind  gets  over  the  shock  experienced  at  the  idea 
of  the  unclothed  body,  it  will  be  obvious  to  the  unprejudiced  person 
that  the  absence  of  clothing  does  not  necessarily  imply  immodesty 
either  of  thought  or  action.  A  Heathen  woman  on  Malaita  knows  no 
shame  at  the  fact  that  her  body  is  unclothed. 


MELANESIA    AND    ITS    PEOPLE.  187 

Another  point  as  to  which  incorrect  ideas  exist  is  the  question  of 
cannibalism.  Doubtless  cases  of  anthropophagy  occurred  in  many 
of  the  Melanesian  islands,  but  it  was  never  characteristic  of  the  people 
as  a  whole,  and  the  man-eating  propensities  of  the  Fijian  people  could 
never  be  predicated  of  the  whole  people  of  any  single  group  in  the 
sphere  of  the  Mission.  So  local  and  confined  is  the  practice  that, 
while  portions  of  one  island  regularly  follow  it,  other  portions  of  the 
same  island  hold  it  in  abhorrence,  as  is  the  case  on  Malaita.  Joseph 
Wate,  of  Sa'a,  a  reliable  witness,  assured  me  that  the  Tolo  peoples  of 
Malaita  were  cannibals,  but  his  own  peoples  were  not,  nor  were  the 
shore  peoples  of  Big  Malaita.  The  latter  were  fish-eaters,  and  those 
who  lived  on  a  fish  diet  did  not  practice  as  a  regular  thing  the  eating 
of  human  flesh.  Cannibalism  is  the  regular  practice  on  San  Cristoval, 
but  is  held  in  abhorrence  on  Ulawa.  Yet  the  belief  in  cannibalism  is 
so  firmly  fixed  that  one  reads  in  the  reports  and  books  of  the  Mission 
that  the  two  Reef  Islanders  who  w^ere  held  captive  at  Port  Adam  in 
Bishop  John  Selwyn's  time  were  being  fattened  up  and  kept  for  eating, 
whereas  in  all  probability  they  were  regarded  as  "live  heads"  {lalamoa 
mori)  and  kept  for  killing,  should  any  necessity  arise  when  a  victim 
would  be  demanded,  as,  e.  g.,  at  the  death  of  any  important  person 
in  the  place,  or  they  might  be  sold  to  anyone  looking  for  a  person  to 
kill.     The  bodies  after  death  would  be  buried. 

THE  CLEANLINESS  OF  NATIVES. 

To  bathe  daily  is  the  common  practice  of  most  Melanesians,  but  the 
bath  is  taken  in  the  afternoon  and  usually  after  the  day's  work  in  the 
garden  is  over.  The  Melanesian  never  dreams  of  having  a  dip  in  the 
morning,  as  we  whites  do,  and  to  the  unthinking  his  failure  to  do  so 
might  seem  to  argue  want  of  proper  cleanliness.  But,  as  Dr.  Guppy 
says,  these  people  are  far  more  susceptible  to  a  rise  or  fall  in  the  tem- 
perature than  we  are,  and  he  quotes  Darwin  as  noticing  that  the 
Patagonians  when  over  a  fire  were  streaming  with  perspiration,  whereas 
the  white  men  with  thick  clothes  on  were  enjoying  the  pleasant 
warmth.  So  a  Melanesian  likes  to  bathe  when  the  day  is  warm;  on 
days  when  the  south  wind  is  blowing — a  strong  wind  with  cloudy 
days — bathing  is  not  much  indulged  in. 

Since  these  people  wear  no  clothes  and  have  no  seat  but  the  ground 
and  take  their  rest  on  mats  laid  either  on  or  just  above  the  floor,  and 
always  with  a  fire  going  beside  them,  their  bodies  soon  show  the  dirt,  but 
it  is  a  great  mistake  to  imagine  that  they  allow  their  bodies  to  go  dirty 
or  are  slack  about  bathing.  A  man  or  woman  with  fever  will  abstain 
from  washing  (even  in  cases  of  strong  fever  it  never  occurs  to  anyone 
to  sponge  the  patient)  and  to  bathe  is  a  sign  of  convalescence.  If  a 
person  stays  about  a  house  and  is  evidently  unwashed,  one  may  take 
it  for  granted  that  he  or  she  is  indisposed. 


l88  MELANESIA    AND    ITS    PEOPLE. 

THE  CHILDREN. 

Great  care  is  expended  in  bathing  small  children  and  shielding  them 
from  the  rays  of  the  sun.  A  3'oung  mother  is  excused  from  all  work 
and  she  has  the  best  time  in  all  her  life  when  her  first  baby  is  born. 
Her  whole  time  is  given  up  to  the  child,  and  it  is  seldom  out  of  her 
arms.  Owing  to  the  lack  of  nourishing  foods  children  are  suckled 
till  they  are  quite  large.  The  Melanesian  baby  seems  to  have  no 
natural  liking  for  water  and  one  often  hears  the  shrill  cries  of  small 
children  being  bathed  in  the  streams  or  being  washed  in  the  houses. 
In  the  latter  case  water  is  poured  from  a  bamiboo  into  one  of  the  wooden 
bowls  and  the  child  is  then  washed  by  hand. 

The  children  at  a  very  early  stage  of  their  existence  are  freed  from 
the  authority  of  their  parents.  They  have  no  household  duties  to 
perform;  there  is  no  set  time  for  meals;  in  the  morning  they  may  be 
given  something  cold  left  over  from  the  night  before,  or  the  mother 
may  roast  a  yam  on  the  fire,  but  as  a  rule  there  is  no  cooking  done  till 
the  late  afternoon,  when  the  women  return  from  their  gardens.  During 
the  day,  if  the  children  are  hungry  they  can  get  a  coconut  or  a  bread- 
fruit, or  shell-fish,  or  they  can  roast  a  yam  or  a  taro,  and  a  fire  can  be 
made  anywhere.  The  boys  can  get  themselves  an  opossum  or  an 
iguana  and  in  the  hill  districts  they  even  find  grasshoppers  to  eat. 
One  and  all  they  use  large  quantities  of  areca  nut  and  pepper  leaf  and 
lime.  These  seem  to  be  as  necessary  to  the  Melanesians  of  the  north- 
ern islands  as  is  a  pipe  to  a  confirmed  smoker. 

One  would  expect  that  children  freed  thus  early  from  any  depend- 
ence on  their  elders  would  run  riot  and  learn  licentious  ways  and 
habits,  but  such  does  not  seem  to  be  the  case.  There  is  but  little 
individuality  in  Melanesians,  and  they  are  not  "inventors  of  evil 
things."  They  are  bound  by  traditional  customs,  by  the  laws  of  the 
elders,  by  those  social  restrictions  that  the  people  have  evolved  for 
themselves  as  a  safeguard  against  the  breaking  up  of  their  society, 
and  free  agents  though  the  children  may  be,  and  lacking  parental 
control  from  our  point  of  view,  yet  there  is  no  such  thing  among  them 
as  the  organized  following  or  doing  of  evil,  and  the  ruling  moral  ideas 
of  the  people  are  found  as  the  guide  also  of  their  children. 

EVANGELIZATION. 

Apart  from  the  duty  and  privilege  which  every  Christian  feels  of 
winning  the  peoples  of  the  earth  for  Christ,  apart  also  from  the  prompt- 
ings of  the  Holy  Spirit  to  bring  the  peoples  of  Melanesia  to  a  knowl- 
edge of  the  power  of  Christ,  there  can  be  no  conceivable  reason  for 
holding  that  Melanesians  have  no  need  of  the  Christian  religion  or 
could  fail  to  grasp  it  when  presented  to  them.  In  the  first  place,  they 
certainly  lose  nothing  by  renouncing  their  old  Heathen  religion,  which 
was  the  worship  of  their  ancestors.     The  spirits  of  these  ancestors 


MELANESIA    AND    ITS    PEOPLE.  189 

provoke  fear  rather  than  love,  and  are  invoked  from  a  desire  that  their 
influence  should  be  used  to  stave  off  any  possible  evil  that  might  hap- 
pen rather  than  because  they  are  conceived  of  as  kindly  dispositioned 
beings  who  love  and  want  to  do  good  to  their  worshippers.  To  a 
people  with  such  a  religion  the  knowledge  of  the  Great  Spirit  God  as 
a  loving  Father  comes  with  the  utmost  force  and  power. 

Melanesians  on  the  one  hand  are  more  or  less  incapable  of  individual 
and  separate  action;  each  one  is  just  a  copy  of  his  neighbor,  and  every- 
thing is  done  by  concerted  agreement  among  the  whole  people;  on  the 
other  hand,  they  have  no  means  of  preserving  the  welfare  of  themselves 
as  a  whole.  They  have  no  tribes,  no  kingdoms,  no  laws  beyond  the 
unwritten  social  laws  relating  to  marriage,  etc.;  life  is  insecure,  accu- 
sations of  witchcraft  are  easily  made,  and  death  follows  as  a  matter  of 
course;  infanticide  is  a  common  practice,  big  families  are  almost  un- 
known, polygamy  is  a  recognized  thing.  So  Christianity  comes  to 
them  as  a  means  of  insuring  both  individual  and  social  vigor  and  only 
in  so  far  as  they  become  Christian  will  they  be  saved  from  extinction. 
If  only  from  a  humanitarian  point  of  view,  it  were  a  charity  to  enlighten 
the  darkness  of  these  benighted  people  and  to  give  them  something  to 
strive  for,  to  set  before  them  some  spiritual  end,  to  give  them  a  higher 
standard  of  existence  than  their  present  one. 

There  can,  however,  be  no  question  of  leaving  them  alone  now,  what- 
ever may  have  been  the  case  in  past  years;  civilization,  2.  e.,  trade,  is 
coming  in  fast  and  the  inevitable  consequence  will  be  that  the  white 
man's  view  of  life  will  alter  the  old  style  of  things.  Experience  has 
taught  us  that  wherever  a  people  without  a  settled  state  and  a  kingdom 
and  the  external  power  of  law  is  invaded  by  any  of  our  western  peoples, 
with  their  vigor  and  personality,  the  less-developed  people  lose  all  their 
pristine  distinctiveness,  all  bonds  are  loosed,  and  inevitable  decay  sets 
in;  in  other  w^ords,  the  w^hite  man  destroys  the  black.  Benjamin 
Kidd  shows  this  most  conclusively  in  his  book  ''Social  Evolution." 
In  the  case  of  Melanesia  the  process  may  take  time,  but  that  the 
result  is  certain  in  the  end  is  proved  by  the  disappearance  of  the  nomad 
Australian  aboriginal,  and  with  a  people  of  a  higher  culture  by  the  story 
of  the  capable  Maori  people  of  New  Zealand  under  modern  conditions. 

Drink  and  idleness  are  two  of  the  main  factors  that  have  tended 
to  the  downfall  of  both  the  Maori  and  the  Australian  aboriginal;  low- 
class  whites  have  done  much  to  ruin  the  latter,  nor  has  the  Maori 
been  free  from  their  influence.  There  is  no  fear  of  a  large  influx  of 
whites  into  Melanesia,  and  the  governments  have  it  in  their  power  to 
deport  any  undesirable  person,  but  in  the  south  of  Melanesia,  e.  g., 
on  Omba,  unscrupulous  traders  have  done  incalculable  harm.  Under 
the  Condominium  of  the  New  Hebrides,  drink  and  firearms  can  still 
be  obtained  by  natives,  but  the  Solomon  Island  government  entirely 
prohibits  the  sale  of  both. 


190  MELANESIA    AND    ITS    PEOPLE. 

In  the  more  settled  islands  and  districts  provision  can  be  made  quite 
easily  for  the  due  employment  of  the  people  at  regular  and  systematic 
work,  so  as  to  guard  against  the  danger  of  idleness.  There  is  ample 
land  available  everywhere  for  use  either  in  growing  the  crops  of  food  or 
for  planting  in  coconuts.  Hunger  ought  to  be  a  thing  of  the  past;  the 
islands  hardly  know  what  a  drought  is;  the  foodstuffs,  both  indigenous 
and  introduced,  are  many  and  varied,  and  it  needs  only  sufficient 
land  to  be  kept  under  cultivation  to  insure  a  plentiful  and  regular 
supply  of  food.  This  is  clear  in  our  experience,  for  in  our  own  garden 
at  Ulawa,  which  was  under  the  care  of  Elwin  Dume,  a  man  of  Mera- 
lava,  there  was  always  a  supply  of  food,  sweet  potatoes,  yamxS,  pana, 
pumpkins,  tapioca  (cassava),  and  even  taro  (which  the  people  of  the 
place  said  would  not  grow  in  Ulawa),  bananas,  and  pineapples.  It 
often  was  the  case  that  when  our  garden  was  bearing  well  others  were 
searching  for  food.  Elwin  used  to  return  home  through  the  village 
unconcernedly  smoking  his  pipe  and  with  the  tip  of  a  yam  showing 
out  of  his  bag.  "Oh!  look  at  these  white  men  {mwa  haka),"  the 
people  would  exclaim  as  he  passed,  "they  have  yams  while  we  have 
to  go  and  scratch  in  the  forest  for  food!" 

The  exercise  of  due  control  both  by  the  Mission  and  by  government 
ought  to  obviate  the  dangers  both  of  idleness  and  of  hunger.  As  more 
and  more  traders  come  in,  the  danger  will  be  that  pressure  is  put  on 
the  government  to  acquire  suitable  land  for  planting,  and  great  care 
will  have  to  be  taken  that  sufficient  land  is  left  in  the  neighborhood 
of  the  centers  of  population  for  the  use  of  the  people.  On  an  island 
like  Ugi  in  the  Solomons  very  large  tracts  have  been  alienated,  the 
original  owners  are  but  few,  and  possession  is  the  more  easily  acquired. 
It  is  recalled  that  in  the  case  of  the  sale  of  one  large  tract  near  the  orig- 
inal trading  station  at  Selwyn  Bay  the  land  was  said  to  have  been  sold 
by  a  man  who  had  only  the  very  flimsiest  right  to  it,  since  he  was  not 
an  Ugi  man  at  all  but  an  adopted  person. 

The  cure  for  the  existing  evils  and  the  means  of  staving  off  the 
threatened  extinction  of  the  people  do  not  lie  in  their  employment  on 
plantations,  as  some  hold.  The  moral  elevation  of  the  people  and 
their  advance  in  civilization  used  to  be  held  up  as  valid  reasons  for 
their  being  recruited  to  work  in  Queensland,  but  from  internal  evidence 
one  would  say  that  the  main  influence  which  the  labor  trade  has  had 
on  Melanesia  is  that  it  has  sadly  depopulated  the  islands.  There  has 
been  no  social  elevation  through  the  trade;  the  want  of  cohesion  among 
the  natives,  apart  from  all  other  considerations,  would  have  been 
sufficient  to  prevent  it.  The  thousands  of  men  who,  throughout  the 
years  the  trade  was  in  existence,  returned  from  civilization  did  nothing 
to  better  the  conditions  of  life  among  their  neighbors;  they  dissem- 
inated no  knowledge,  they  started  no  spiritual  movement  for  the 
uplifting  of  their  people,  they  stirred   up  no   divine  discontent  with 


MELANKSIA    AND    ITS    PEOPLE.  I9I 

the  old-time  conditions.  They  brought  back  in  a  measure  the  outer 
trappings  of  civiHzation,  but  were  ignorant  of  its  power.  While  their 
axes  lasted  they  made  it  easier  for  someone  else  to  work;  their  pur- 
chases gave  them  for  the  time  being  a  certain  amount  of  importance; 
but  once  their  stock  was  finished  their  influence  was  at  an  end. 

One  of  the  cures  for  the  present  state  of  things  in  Melanesia  is  un- 
doubtedly work,  but  work  on  plantations  for  wages  is  not  necessarily 
an  agency  that  makes  either  for  the  setting  up  of  the  influences  that 
have  made  nations  great  or  insures  the  end  which  all  desire  who 
have  the  welfare  of  these  child  races  at  heart,  viz,  the  ultimate  sur- 
vival of  these  peoples. 

The  comparative  scantiness  of  the  population  is  the  real  difiiculty 
in  the  evangelization  of  Melanesia.  There  must  be  an  assembling 
of  the  scattered  units  of  population  in  the  islands,  and  since  one  of 
the  first  results  of  the  propagation  of  Christianity  in  Melanesia  is 
the  gathering  together  of  the  people  in  a  community  where  hitherto 
they  have  been  living  as  scattered  units  all  over  the  face  of  the  land, 
it  seems  obvious  that  the  initiative  in  the  program  of  work  will  lie 
with  the  missions.  Once  Christianity  spreads,  and,  as  a  result  of  its 
spreading,  peace  is  established,  and  old  feuds  die  down  and  murder 
and  bloodshed  cease  and  villages  are  formed  in  these  large  islands 
with  their  scattered  peoples,  then  the  place  of  the  government  is  to 
see  that  oflFenses  against  life  and  moral  law  and  order  are  punished 
in  order  that  the  people  may  be  given  a  chance  to  grow  up  and  become 
settled  and  organized.  How  else  shall  it  come  to  pass  that  "that 
which  is  no  nation"  shall  become  a  nation?  There  can  be  no  ofi^ense 
felt  by  the  missionaries  at  the  government  thus  guarding  what  is  won; 
already  cases  of  witchcraft  among  the  Heathen  are  cognizable  by  the 
government  authorities,  and  they  punish  breaches  of  the  moral  law 
among  Christians  when  such  are  brought  under  their  notice.  The 
missions  can  still  exercise  their  own  discipline  and  the  secular  author- 
ities will  not  interfere  with  the  spiritual  side  of  the  work.  On  the  other 
hand,  since  the  missions  are  the  bringers  of  peace,  the  government 
can  feel  no  oflPense  in  serving  them  and  following  them  up  and  con- 
solidating the  results  of  their  work.  The  missions  have  the  first  and 
best  opportunity  in  the  matter;  they  are  thoroughly  in  touch  with 
the  natives  and  have,  or  ought  to  have,  an  abundance  of  first-class 
material  ready  to  their  hands  for  compelling  men  to  come  in  from  the 
highways  and  hedges  and  fill  the  House  of  God.  Nevertheless  the 
government  itself  is  doing  much  for  the  ultimate  salvation  of  the 
peoples;  head  hunting  has  been  stopped  completely,  and  wild  places 
like  the  north  end  of  Malaita  are  being  brought  into  order  by  the 
establishment  of  government  stations.  So  far  as  the  Melanesian  Mis- 
sion is  concerned  it  w'ould  seem  obvious  that  the  future  demands  a 
large  increase  of  native  clergy  if  the  ground  is  to  be  won. 


1^2  MELANESIA    AND    ITS    PEOPLE. 

NATIVES  OF  MELANESIA. 

Bishop  G.  A.  Selwyn  evidently  had  a  very  high  opinion  of  the  value 
of  the  work  likely  to  be  done  by  natives  in  the  propagation  of  the  Gos- 
pel in  Melanesia,  when  he  referred  to  them  as  the  ''black  net,"  the 
white  priests  at  the  same  time  forming  the  "corks"  of  the  gospel  net. 
The  Bishop's  idea  has  been  followed  faithfully  enough,  so  far  as  the 
mere  manning  of  the  Mission  with  native  teachers  goes,  and  the  work 
of  these  native  teachers  occupies  a  very  large  place  in  the  Melanesian 
Mission  to-day;  nor  can  there  be  any  doubt  whatever  of  their  ability, 
under  proper  circumstances,  to  do  what  the  founder  of  the  Mission 
planned  that  they  should  do.  Still,  it  can  not  be  questioned  that  up  to 
the  present  time  the  native  Christians,  teachers  and  people  ahke,  fall 
short  in  the  performance  of  their  part  in  the  casting  of  the  Gospel  net. 
The  truth  of  the  matter  would  seem  to  be  that  the  native  church  has 
not  yet  risen  to  a  sense  of  its  duty  in  the  work  of  evangelization;  Chris- 
tianity has  seemed  to  the  converts  to  be  more  a  thing  brought  from 
outside  and  to  be  accepted  along  with  the  rest  of  the  white  man's 
things  than  a  matter  vitally  concerning  themselves  and  depending  on 
their  cooperation. 

If  the  white  teachers  were  removed  from  Melanesia  to-day  the  prob- 
ability is  that,  though  the  daily  services  and  daily  school  would  still 
be  held  in  most  of  the  villages,  yet  there  would  be  no  advance  and  no 
enlargement  of  the  work,  no  widening  of  the  borders,  and  in  such  places 
as  were  manned  by  less  able  teachers  it  is  doubtful  whether  the  past 
gains  of  the  Mission  would  be  consolidated.  The  church  life  of  the 
villages  depends  almost  entirely  on  the  teacher  alone;  the  native  church 
has  not  been  trained  in  methods  of  self-government  and  no  legislative 
machinery  exists;  there  is  no  village  council  to  advise  or  strengthen  the 
hands  of  the  teacher,  and  should  he  fail  the  whole  work  would  probably 
come  to  an  end.  Nor  is  there  anything  in  the  way  of  self-support  in 
the  native  church.  The  Mission  supplies  the  teacher's  pay  and  the 
people  have  no  duties  incumbent  on  them  in  connection  with  the 
upkeep  of  religion. 

It  was  thought  originally  that  the  withdrawal  of  the  white  mission- 
ary for  four  or  six  months  every  year  would  tend  to  encourage  habits 
of  self-reliance  among  the  native  teachers  and  would  strengthen  their 
characters  and  would  foster  the  idea  that  eventually  the  native  church 
must  stand  alone.  But  it  certainly  seemed  as  if  the  time  when  one 
was  away  was  more  fruitful  in  cases  of  wrong-doing  than  when  one  was 
actually  present  among  the  people.  The  Mission  priest  on  returning 
to  his  work  in  the  islands  is  apt  to  be  faced  with  a  sad  account  of  what 
has  happened  "behind  his  back."  He  may  notice  the  absence  here 
and  there,  from  church  and  school,  of  certain  persons,  and  inquiry  may 
elicit  the  information  that   they  were  "outside  the  inclosure,"   the 


MELANESIA    AM)    ITS    PEOPLE.  193 

victims  of  sin,  mainly  of  impuntx ,  and  thougli  not  tormaliy  excom- 
municated yet  self-judged,  as  their  absence  proved.  Or  he  would 
hear  of  family  quarrels,  or  of  the  petulancy  of  the  chief  and  his  arbi- 
trary tabu  of  certain  things  and  of  a  consequent  staying  away  from 
church  and  school.  Or  a  Christian  girl  or  a  catechumen  may  have 
been  given  in  marriage  to  a  Heathen  and  so  lost  to  the  church,  or 
perchance  a  Christian  man  had  taken  a  heathen  woman  to  wife  and 
was  living  with  her  unmarried  or  even  had  taken  a  second  wife  and 
was  living  with  two  women.  Or  it  might  be  that  some  promising 
Christian  lad  had  gone  off  to  live  with  heathen  relatives.  Or  he 
might  hear  of  cases  of  exorcism,  of  approaches  made  to  the  spirits 
of  the  dead,  or  of  trials  by  fire  or  of  adjuration  of  the  spirits  of  the  dead 
on  the  part  of  the  Christians.  At  times  he  would  find  a  village  pre- 
paring to  go  and  avenge  the  cruel  murder  of  some  Christian  or  school- 
man wantonly  murdered  by  the  heathen.  In  addition  to  the  moral 
failures  which  occurred  in  his  absence,  he  might  find  that  the  school 
and  church  required  roofing,  that  the  fences  were  dow^n,  and  that  the 
village  pigs  had  made  a  shelter  inside  the  buildings  and  that  his  own 
"prophet's  chamber"  was  uninhabitable. 

What  would  happen  were  the  white  missionaries  removed  is  made 
plain  by  the  history  of  what  has  occurred  in  places  that  have  had  to 
do  without  the  services  of  a  w'hite  man  for  any  length  of  time.  Left 
to  themselves  and  without  the  help  of  a  native  deacon  or  priest,  the 
people  tend  to  become  very  slack  in  church  attendance  and  in  the  per- 
formance of  their  Christian  duties,  and  the  recent  struggle  that  Bishop 
Wilson  had  against  the  secret  societies  in  the  northern  Banks  Group 
shows  that  Christianity  there  failed  to  alter  fundamentally  the  original 
native  view  of  life. 

The  Banks  Islands  in  particular  have  lacked  for  many  years  past  the 
services  of  a  white  priest  and  with  a  few  notable  exceptions  it  may  be 
said  of  this  particular  group  that  wherever  the  native  teachers  have 
been  left  to  themselves  the  work  has  languished.  Since  Mr.  Adams 
went  to  Vureas  the  Banks  Islands  have  seen  very  little  of  the  presence 
of  a  white  missionary.  Of  the  work  at  the  Torres  Group,  once  so 
promising,  but  little  is  heard  now,  and  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  the 
continued  absence  of  a  white  man  or  of  a  native  priest  has  had  a  dele- 
terious effect  on  the  work  there. 

Where  the  people  are  strong  in  character  and  community  life  is  more 
developed,  as  in  the  northern  Banks  Group,  a  native  teacher  alone  can 
not  make  much  headway,  but  a  man  in  orders  exercises  a  great  deal 
more  power  and  will  be  listened  to.  When  the  white  man  is  present 
matters  that  had  been  wrong  right  themselves  very  quickly  and  there 
seem  to  be  far  fewer  cases  of  wrong-doing.  This  is  doubtless  due 
partly  to  respect  for  his  presence.  The  ordinary  native  teacher  does 
not  inspire  this  respect,  and  unless  he  were  a  man  of  strong  moral  fiber 


194 


MELANESIA    AND    ITS    PEOPLE. 


(as  some  of  them  are)  and  with  his  position  well  assured  he  could  hardly 
venture  to  rebuke  an  act  which  he  knew  to  be  wrong.  The  teacher 
is  in  most  cases  a  man  of  the  place,  and  village  and  home  associations 
and  family  relationships  would  prevent  him  uttering  his  protest 
against  a  meditated  wrong. 

There  is  very  little  that  goes  on  in  a  native  village  that  is  not  known 
to  most  of  the  people,  and  things  are  very  well  discussed  before  any 
action  is  taken,  and  generally  the  whole  village  knows  the  doings  and 
the  intentions  of  every  inhabitant.  If  the  teacher  did  know  before- 
hand the  chances  are  that  he  could  not  prevent  the  wrong.  Individual 
action  is  rare  among  Melanesians.  A  man  would  hardly  dream  of 
interfering  if  he  saw  another  doing  a  thing  which  was  inconsistent 
with  his  Christian  calling  and  no  one  thinks  of  the  iiecessity  of  setting 
a  standard.  Correction  or  direction  or  friendly  advice  is  scarcely  ever 
administered  by  one  ?\/lelanesian  to  another.  Even  parents  whose 
children  are  disobedient  will  bring  them  to  a  teacher  or  a  missionary  for 
reproof  or  correction  rather  than  administer  the  correction  themselves. 
The  last  thing  that  a  Melanesian  thinks  of  doing  is  the  preventing 
of  harm  or  interfering  in  a  matter  in  order  to  right  it. 

In  the  absence  of  the  white  missionary,  if  the  knowledge  of  a  medi- 
tated wrong  came  to  the  teacher's  ears  the  existence  of  a  village  council 
or  of  a  combined  council  of  all  the  neighboring  villages  would  avail  in 
all  probability  to  prevent  the  wrong  being  done.  The  nearest  thing 
to  such  a  council  is  the  Faukolu  of  Florida,  a  yearly  gathering  of  all 
the  chiefs  and  head  teachers  to  discuss  social,  ecclesiastical,  and  educa- 
tional matters.  But  these  gatherings  have  been  held  very  irregularly 
and  their  decisions  have  been  of  Httle  force  since  there  were  no  sub- 
sidiary councils  in  the  villages  to  assist  the  teachers  in  carrying  them 
out. 

The  isolation  of  the  peoples  in  most  of  the  Melanesian  islands  has 
in  all  probability  been  largely  responsible  for  the  lack  of  concerted 
action  hitherto  among  the  Christians.  Social  life  as  such  was  not 
known  in  Melanesia  before  the  advent  of  Christianity.  In  their  pre- 
Christian  days  these  natives  do  not  live  in  villages  or  hamlets,  but  in 
isolated  groups  with  two  or  three  houses  or  huts  in  a  group.  With  the 
exception  of  certain  places  in  Florida  and  also  of  the  artificial  islets  off 
the  northeast  coast  of  Malaita,  where  hundreds  of  people  live  on  tiny 
rookeries  of  stone  just  raised  above  the  level  of  the  tide,  there  was 
nothing  that  was  worthy  of  the  name  of  a  village  in  the  whole  of  the 
Mission's  area  in  the  Solomons.  Consultative  or  joint  action  in  a 
matter  was  practically  unknown.  Each  subdistrict  had  its  own  petty 
chief  with  a  following  of  half  a  dozen  men  in  some  cases.  Every  man 
knew  who  his  own  chief  was  and  would  support  him  when  called 
upon.  Each  main  district  had  also  its  head  chief  and  to  hirn  tribute 
was  paid  whensoever  he  demanded  it.     Even  these  head  chiefs  had 


MELANESIA   AND    ITS    PEOPLE.  I95 

no  State  or  surroundings.  Thus  at  Roasi,  on  I>ittle  Malaita,  Horo- 
hanue  was  the  alaha  paine,  the  main  chief,  but  he  had  no  immediate 
retinue  and  lived  alone  with  his  two  wives,  the  guardian  of  his  ances- 
tral spirits,  'akalo,  and  with  the  skulls  of  his  dead  in  the  house  along 
with  him. 

Roasi  was  composed  of  two  parts.  Upper  and  Lower,  Roasi  i  haho, 
Roasi  i  'ano.  A  teacher,  Johnson  Telegsem,  was  accepted  by  the  peo- 
ple of  Lower  Roasi,  acting  quite  independently  of  Horohanue,  as  they 
had  every  right  to  do.  After  two  moves  they  made  a  final  settlement 
at  Salenga  just  above  the  bay.  Then  two  years  later  Horohanue 
himself  also  asked  for  a  teacher  and  gathered  his  own  particular  people 
together  and  had  a  school-house  built. 

The  two  Christian  villages  of  Roasi  were  only  half  a  mile  apart,  with 
a  ravine  in  between,  and  yet  separate  teachers  had  to  be  found  for  them, 
owing  to  their  unwillingness  to  move  to  some  one  central  spot  where  a 
permanent  church  and  school  could  be  built.  The  Mission  went  so  far 
as  to  buy  a  site  down  on  the  beach  large  enough  to  accommodate  both 
sections  of  the  people,  who  numbered  something  over  200,  but  after 
Horohanue's  death  petty  jealousies  and  squabbles  completely  pre- 
vented any  concerted  action. 

At  Sa'a,  an  important  place  at  the  southeast  end  of  Malaita,  the 
titular  chief  Sinehanue  was  the  direct  descendant,  twelve  generations 
removed,  of  the  chiefs  who  had  shared  in  the  original  migration  from 
the  hills  of  Little  Malaita  (Codrington,  Mel.  Anthrop.,  p.  49).  He 
lived  apart  from  the  majority  of  the  people  with  just  his  own  immediate 
relatives  and  dependents  around  him.  Four  separate  villages,  huti  i 
lume,  collections  of  houses,  formed  what  was  known  to  the  neighboring 
peoples  as  Sa'a,  though  no  one  village  bore  the  name  as  such,  and  in 
each  of  these  there  was  at  least  one  person  who  was  reckoned  as  alaha 
chief. 

The  greatest  possible  difficulty  was  experienced  in  inducing  the  peo- 
ples of  these  four  villages  to  act  in  concert  and  assign  one  place  as  the 
site  for  the  church  and  school.  We  had  journeys  all  over  the  neigh- 
borhood looking  for  a  neutral  place  and  houses  were  begun  tentatively 
in  several  directions  in  order  to  accelerate  union. 

With  very  few  exceptions  the  people  inhabiting  any  particular  dis- 
trict are  always  a  mere  handful.  At  Sa'a  the  inhabitants  of  all  the 
four  villages  numbered  a  little  over  200,  and  the  population  of  an  aver- 
age Christian  village  in  any  of  the  large  islands  of  the  Solomons  when 
all  of  the  available  people  had  been  gathered  in  would  seldom  be  much 
over  60.  These  villages,  moreover,  are  several  miles  apart,  and  there 
is  nothing  in  the  nature  of  roads  joining  them,  so  it  is  plain  that  there 
must  necessarily  be  a  great  deal  of  unavoidable  isolation  between  the 
villages,  and  concerted  action  and  corporate  life  will  not  be  acquired 
easily. 


196  MELANESIA    AND    ITS    PEOPLE. 

CULTIVATION  OF  RESPONSIBILITY  AND    INDEPENDENCE    IN   THE 

NATIVE  CHURCH. 

The  native  church  in  Melanesia  has  never  really  been  asked  as  yet 
to  undertake  the  support  of  its  ov^n  clergy  and  teachers.  Bishop 
Wood's  charge  in  191 5  was  the  first  official  acknowledgment  of  the 
need  for  the  Melanesians  to  look  to  themselves  rather  than  to  the 
Mission  for  funds  to  pay  the  teachers.  In  191 4  the  amount  contributed 
for  the  support  of  the  Mission  by  the  native  church  was  £31.  This 
amount  certainly  seems  out  of  all  proportion,  since  at  the  same  time 
the  island  stations  cost  £1,300  and  most  of  this  was  for  teachers'  pay. 
Nor  is  it  that  an  excessive  wage  is  paid  to  the  teachers.  No  native 
priest  receives  more  than  £25  a  year,  and  some  of  the  junior  teachers 
are  rated  at  only  £1  a  year.  In  old  days  these  salaries  were  always 
paid  in  kind,  with  now  and  then  a  demand  for  a  little  cash,  but  nowa- 
days a  good  deal  of  payment  is  done  in  cash,  since  traders  and  stores  are 
found  in  almost  every  place. 

There  has  never  been  any  attempt  made  to  organize  a  system  of  local 
contributions.  If  a  village  wanted  to  buy  timber  or  iron  for  the  build- 
ing of  its  church,  copra  was  made  and  was  sold  for  the  purpose,  the 
Mission  ship  occasionally  carrying  the  copra  to  market,  or  curios  were 
made  and  were  sold  abroad.  At  various  times  during  Bishop  Wilson's 
episcopate  several  villages  gave  contributions  in  curios  and  these  were 
taken  and  were  sold  for  the  benefit  of  the  ^Mission.  But  this  never 
became  a  regular  thing.  There  seems  to  be  no  reason  why  the  support 
of  the  native  teachers  in  the  w^ell-established  Christian  villages  should 
not  be  laid  as  a  duty  on  the  native  church,  with  moreover  the  certainty 
of  success.  Until  the  time  of  Bishop  Wilson  no  such  thing  was  thought 
of,  and  one  looks  in  vain  for  any  hint  of  it  in  the  lives  of  the  first  two 
bishops.  In  their  time  the  making  of  copra  was  far  from  being  estab- 
lished as  an  industry  in  Melanesia,  and  with  the  exception  of  food 
and  curios  there  was  practically  nothing  that  could  serve  as  a  means  of 
raising  money.  The  native  money  (shell  money  or  the  teeth  of  por- 
poises or  dogs)  was  valueless,  since  there  was  no  means  of  changing  it, 
as  no  traders  would  take  it  as  a  means  of  exchange. 

THE  QUESTION  OF  MAKING  A  RETURN  FOR  SPIRITUAL  GIFTS. 

In  himself  the  Melanesian  knows  but  little,  if  anything  at  all,  of 
gratitude,  and  he  sees  nothing  incongruous  in  allowing  the  Mission  to 
pay  his  teachers.  Bishop  Wilson  tried  to  inculcate  the  idea  that  it 
was  the  duty  of  the  natives  to  convey  their  Mission  priests  about  in 
boats,  acting  as  crews  for  them  and  receiving  no  pay.  The  missionaries 
are  often  at  heavy  expense  in  obtaining  boats'  crews  (every  man  pays 
his  own  travelling  expenses),  and  in  the  Banks  Group  Mr.  Cullwick  con- 
stantly had  a  crew  of  six  men  with  him  for  three  months  at  a  stretch. 


MELANESIA    AND    ITS    PEOPLE.  197 

The  various  villages,  even  if  they  provide  any  food  at  all  lor  the  crews 
(and  most  of  them  will  do  a  little  to  that  end),  soon  tire  of  feeding 
strangers,  and  so  the  missionary  has  to  buy  food  for  his  crew  and  carry 
it  about  with  him  in  addition  to  paying  them. 

In  Malaita  and  San  Cristoval  there  never  was  any  difficulty  in  ob- 
taining crews,  nor  was  there  any  bargaining  about  price  (but  this  was 
before  the  return  of  the  Kanakas  from  Queensland  and  the  consequent 
introduction  of  a  very  different  set  of  ideas),  whereas  in  Florida  the 
missionary  has  had  regularly  to  hire  his  crew  and  appoint  a  fixed  rate 
of  wages  before  leaving.  In  places  other  than  Florida  half  a  crown  a 
week  was  reckoned  very  good  pay.  A  man  would  gaily  leave  on  a  six 
weeks'  tour  with  no  luggage  beyond  his  pipe,  shoulder-bag,  and  one 
loin-cloth.  On  the  morning  of  departure  our  yard  would  be  thronged 
w^ith  men  and  a  spokesman  from  among  them  would  approach  and  ask: 
"Are  many  going  with  you?"  "Why.?"  "Oh,  I  did  not  know  whether 
you  had  enough."  Our  own  experience  was  that  men  had  to  be  turned 
away  at  such  times,  and  a  double  crew  could  always  be  got.  But 
though  they  were  content  with  their  pay,  no  one  of  them  would  have 
been  willing  to  go  for  nothing,  while  at  the  same  time  the  home  duties  of 
them  all  were  practically  nil.  They  and  their  people  were  being  bene- 
fited very  materially  by  the  presence  of  the  missionary,  but  it  was  per- 
haps too  much  to  expect  them  to  give  their  services  free  in  carrying 
him  about;  moreover,  they  viewed  the  work  as  a  chance  of  earning  a 
little,  and  such  chances  w^ere  rare. 

The  Melanesian  attitude  with  regard  to  presents  is  peculiar.  A 
number  of  women  would  come  with  yams  in  baskets  for  sale;  one  special 
basket  would  be  reported  as  "not  for  sale,"  its  contents  (often  inferior 
yams)  were  a  gift — but  it  would  have  been  the  height  of  foolishness  to 
accept  such  a  gift  without  making  a  corresponding  return.  On  being 
discharged  from  hospital  a  man  would  ask  for  a  present  in  that  he  had 
been  cured!  Where  there  is  no  sense  of  debt  there  can  be  no  showing 
of  gratitude,  gratitude  being  a  spiritual  and  not  a  natural  gift,  a  sense 
of  the  need  to  try  to  make  a  return  for  favors  rendered.  A  Melanesian 
knows  nothing  of  social  duties;  his  life  is  lived  apart  from  that  of  his 
fellows;  he  has  no  social  sense,  no  dependence  on  his  fellows,  no  comrnon 
bonds  of  union  such  as  spring  up  in  community  life;  he  asks  nothing 
from  his  fellows  nor  they  anything  from  him;  he  owes  them  nothing, 
and  in  consequence  his  circumstances  have  never  been  such  as  would 
be  likely  to  encourage  the  growth  of  gratitude.  He  has  never  received 
anything;  he  has  nothing  to  return. 

The  average  Melanesian  is  a  person  of  few  worldly  possessions;  his 
house  furniture  consists  of  a  few  wooden  bowls,  a  mortar  for  pounding 
yams  or  taro,  a  supply  of  vegetables  smaller  or  larger  according  to  his 
energy,  an  axe  or  a  cane-knife;  also  a  little  stock  of  native  money  and 
perhaps  a  canoe.     Of  clothes  he  has  practically  none  and  the  mis- 


198  MELANESIA    AND    ITS    PEOPLE. 

sionary's  simple  wardrobe  seems  to  him  to  be  lavish  in  the  extreme; 
he  therefore  has  no  compunction  in  asking  for  what  he  knows  the  white 
man  to  possess.  If  a  person  has  practically  never  owned  anything  at 
all  and  if  all  his  fellows  are  in  the  same  condition  too  it  is  almost  impos- 
sible to  get  him  to  understand  that  he  should  feel  gratitude  towards 
those  who  give  him  anything,  since  from  his  point  of  view  they  have  so 
much  in  that  they  have  anything  at  all. 

RELATIONS  OF  NATIVES  WITH  WHITES. 

The  question  of  treachery  follows  on  that  of  gratitude.  It  is  a  matter 
of  common  belief  amongst  Europeans  that  natives  are  treacherous. 
This  idea  of  treachery  is  generally  founded  on  ignorance  of  the  point  of 
view  of  the  natives.  It  is  generally  supposed  that  one  can  not  trust 
oneself  to  them;  that  their  attitude  is  uncertain  and  that  they  are 
liable  to  turn  and  rend  one  without  any  provocation.  While  granting 
that  the  native  is  a  person  of  moods,  it  is  just  as  possible  to  foretell 
what  action  he  is  likely  to  take  in  a  given  case  as  it  is  with  Europeans. 
In  his  actions  he  follows  a  line  of  reasoning  quite  as  much  as  the  white 
man  does.  Many  attacks  on  and  murders  of  white  men  have  been 
ascribed  to  treachery  on  the  part  of  the  natives,  but  it  is  only  fair  to 
call  to  remembrance  the  awful  indignities  and  atrocities  perpetrated  on 
them  by  the  whites  and  to  put  these  in  the  scale  over  against  the  accu- 
sations of  treachery.  The  native  certainly  at  times  acts  wickedly  either 
on  the  impulse  of  the  moment  or  for  a  wicked  end,  but  in  most  cases  of 
wrong  done  to  whites  in  Melanesia  there  has  been  some  antecedent 
cause,  some  evil  associated  with  a  white  person  somewhere.  The  occa- 
sion may  have  been  remote  and  the  connection  faulty  from  our  point 
of  view,  but  in  the  mind  of  the  native  the  provocation  was  there.  With 
our  notions  of  direct  justice  and  of  the  necessity  for  the  punishment  of 
the  actual  wrong-doer  himself  we  can  not  understand  the  point  of  view 
of  the  native,  which  is  that  justice  is  satisfied  so  long  as  some  one  of  the 
same  people  who  did  the  real  or  fancied  wrong  is  made  to  suffer. 


IVKNS 


PLATE    1 


SOME  HISTORICAL  NOTES  CONCERNING  THE  MELANESIAN 

MISSION. 

The  founding  of  the  Melanesian  Mission  was  due  to  the  vigorous 
bodily  energy  and  the  apostolic  fervor  of  Bishop  George  Augustus 
Selwyn.  The  fact  that  the  founder  was  a  Bishop,  and  as  such  pos- 
sessed the  power  and  authority  to  insure  the  success  of  his  plans  and 
ideas,  and  had  in  addition  a  certain  assured  sum  of  money  at  his 
back,  caused  the  Mission  to  be  stamped  from  the  outset  with  a  definite 
style  and  imprinted  upon  it  a  traditional  method  of  work.  In  consid- 
ering this  style  and  tradition,  we  must  remember  that  the  founder 
of  the  Mission  was  Bishop  of  New  Zealand  and  was  thus  debarred 
from  settling  in  Melanesia  and  leading  the  attack  on  its  Heathenism 
from  within.  Since  his  home  and  his  main  interests  and  his  more 
regular  sphere  of  work  lay  outside  Melanesia,  and  since  also  the  carry- 
ing out  of  the  work  at  all  seemed  to  depend  on  himself,  it  is  obvious  that 
the  only  way  for  him  to  begin  the  evangelization  of  Melanesia  was 
by  taking  boys  from  it  to  some  place  where  he  could  have  them  trained 
with  a  view  to  their  becoming  the  future  missionaries  of  Melanesia. 

Quite  apart,  however,  from  the  fact  of  the  foundation  of  the  Mission 
by  a  bishop  and  from  its  receiving  thereby  a  definite  and  a  fixed  char- 
acter at  the  outset,  and  apart  also  from  the  difficulty  of  changing  a 
practice  once  firmly  established,  those  who  know  the  influence  which 
Bishop  Selwyn  exercised  in  the  matter  of  fixing  the  constitution  of  the 
Church  of  New  Zealand  would  naturally  expect  to  find  something  of 
the  same  rigidity  and  fixedness  in  the  traditional  methods  and  style  of 
work  in  the  Melanesian  Mission.  It  must  also  be  borne  in  mind,  when 
reviewing  the  style  and  methods  of  work  adopted  in  the  Mission,  that 
its  policy  herein  has  not  been  the  result  of  the  deliberations  of  the 
missionaries  themselves  and  has  not  stood  in  the  definite  following  of 
the  teachings  of  the  experience  of  the  many,  with  alterations  from  time 
to  time  to  suit  the  varying  needs,  but  has  been  in  eff'ect  the  regular  and 
one  may  say  almost  the  mechanical  following  of  the  lines  laid  down  by 
the  founder.  For  all  that,  the  Melanesian  diocese  was  an  off"shoot  of 
the  Church  of  New  Zealand  and  as  such  might  have  been  expected  to 
show  the  same  spirit  of  cooperation  in  religious  matters  between  clergy 
and  chosen  lay  representatives  consulting  together,  yet  the  Mission 
never  had  a  synod  (though  every  diocese  in  New  Zealand  has  one),  and 
the  conference  of  whites  and  natives  held  in  191 1  was  the  first  instance 
of  any  attempt  made  during  the  whole  history  of  the  Mission  to  gather 
the  workers  together  and  to  take  deliberative  measures  for  the  better 
carrying  on  of  the  work. 

Until  the  time,  about  12  years  ago,  when  the  missionaries  first 
tended  to  become  permanent  residents  in  the  spheres  of  work  in  the 

199 


200  NOTES    CONCERNING    THE    MELANESIAN    MISSION. 

islands,  practically  the  only  changes  made  in  the  original  plan  of  work 
in  the  Mission  were:  (i)  the  substitution  of  Mota  for  English  as  the 
language  of  the  central  school;  (2)  the  removal  of  headquarters  to 
Norfolk  Island  from  Auckland.  The  hand  of  the  founder  seemed  ever 
to  lie  on  the  Mission  which  his  strong  and  vigorous  nature  and  powerful 
personality  had  called  into  being  and  directed  along  its  path  of  life. 

In  the  Melanesia!!  Mission  the  bishop  theoretically  is  the  Mission; 
the  clergy  simply  are  the  bishop's  chaplains,  and  till  fairly  late  in  the 
episcopate  of  Bishop  Wilson  no  license  w^as  issued  to  them,  and  so  long 
as  it  was  the  tradition  that  the}'  should  return  every  summer  to  Nor- 
folk Island  it  is  evident  that  they  could  not  be  instituted  to  any  cure 
of  souls.  It  is  quite  plain,  moreover,  that  with  only  a  small  staff  and 
with  frequent  absences  or  departures  or  losses  entailing  a  considerable 
moving  round  of  the  men,  nothing  approaching  the  conditions  neces- 
sary for  the  holding  of  a  synod  of  the  Australasian  type  is  likely  to 
occur,  and  it  does  not  seem  that  the  Mission  is  likely  to  grow  quickly 
into  a  church  which  shall  be  self-governing  unless  (in  order  to  com- 
pensate for  the  few^ness  of  the  white  priests)  a  large  number  of  native 
priests  are  ordained. 

SUPPORT. 

The  bishop's  chief  intention  in  regard  to  the  support  of  the  Mission 
seems  to  have  been  that  it  should  be  a  first  charge  on  the  Church  of 
New  Zealand,  and  he  evidently  regarded  the  Mission  in  Melanesia 
as  part  and  parcel  of  the  w^ork  of  the  Church  of  New  Zealand.  He 
also  looked  forw-ard  to  the  native  Maori  church  as  a  source  whence 
missionaries  to  Melanesia  would  be  obtained.  With  the  division  of 
the  original  diocese  of  New  Zealand  into  six  and  the  consequent 
necessity,  owing  to  influx  of  population,  of  providing  for  its  own  in- 
ternal needs,  the  Church  of  New  Zealand  rather  failed  for  many  years 
to  fulfill  its  obligations  to  Melanesia.  A  resolution  of  General  Synod 
was  passed  to  the  effect  that  the  various  dioceses  be  asked  to  appoint 
a  missionary  Sunday  and  to  give  their  alms  on  that  day  to  Melanesia. 
Four  out  of  the  six  dioceses  have  now  fallen  into  line  with  this  reso- 
lution by  appointing  such  a  Sunday. 

The  Christian  Maoris  have  not  realized  as  yet  the  hope  that  Bishop 
SelwHy'n  entertained  of  them,  viz,  that  they  should  become  missionaries 
to  Melanesia  and  that  the  Maori  church  should  support  its  own  foreign 
missionaries;  but  now%  with  the  coming  of  the  Marsden  Centenary,  a 
definite  movement  has  been  set  on  foot  to  send  Maori  missionaries  to 
the  Polynesian-speaking  peoples  in  Melanesia. 

In  Australia  the  Melanesian  Mission  was  accepted  through  the  Board 
of  Missions  as  one  of  the  activities  of  the  church,  yet  in  1894  Australia's 
contribution  to  Melanesia  was  only  £1,600,  whereas  in  the  same  year 
New  Zealand  gave  £2,750  and  England  £3,800.     The  revival  of  the 


NOTES    CONCERNING    THE    MELANESIAN    MISSION.  20I 

Australian  Board  of  Missions'  interest  in  Australia  six  years  ago  caused 
a  great  improvement  in  the  local  contributions  to  the  Melanesian  Mis- 
sion, and  in  191 3  these  amounted  to  €2,928  as  against  £5,122  from 
New  Zealand. 

In  England,  up  till  the  time  of  the  episcopate  of  Bishop  Wilson,  all 
interest  in  Melanesia  was  confined  to  the  Eton  Association  and  to  the 
actual  friends  of  the  Mission — i.  e.,  those  in  close  touch  with  particular 
missionaries.  The  Rev.  Prebendary  Selwyn  had  discharged  all  duties 
connected  with  the  raising  of  the  English  income  of  the  Mission,  but 
in  1899  a  paid  secretary  was  appointed  and  an  office  was  taken  in 
the  Church  House,  Westminster.  The  Rev.  L.  P.  Robin  was  the  first 
secretary  and  he  was  succeeded  in  1905  by  the  Rev.  A.  E.  Corner, 
who  still  occupies  the  position  and  who  acts  in  an  honorary  capacity. 
For  the  last  twelve  years  the  Mission  has  had  a  regular  lecturer  touring 
in  England  and  in  191 3  the  English  income  was  £8,800. 

THE  LOG. 

Up  till  1895  the  Mission  had  no  way  of  making  its  needs  known  and 
of  spreading  the  knowledge  of  its  work,  except  by  its  annual  reports  or 
by  quarterly  papers  published  by  Bishop  J.  R.  Selwyn  in  England. 
The  first  number  of  the  "Southern  Cross  Log"  appeared  in  1895,  and 
now  for  twenty  years  the  "Log"  has  been  published  monthly,  and  an 
edition  is  also  published  in  England.  Undoubtedly  the  "Log"  has 
helped  greatly  in  the  augmentation  of  interest  in  the  Mission,  and  the 
fact  that  the  Mission  has  at  last  emerged  into  full  view  and  has  taken 
its  place  as  one  of  the  missions  of  the  whole  church  is  owing  largely  to 
services  rendered  by  the  "Log."  We  may  now  say  that  whereas  the 
Melanesian  Mission  started  its  life  as  the  creation  of  the  apostolic  zeal 
of  one  man  and  was  practically  a  private  mission  for  many  years,  it 
has  become  at  length  the  possession  of  the  whole  English  Church. 

Before  the  episcopate  of  Bishop  Wilson  the  leaders  of  the  Mission 
contributed  largely  to  its  funds.  In  the  building  of  the  ships  a  large 
amount  of  private  money  was  thus  expended  and  the  present  Southern 
Cross  is  the  only  one  built  by  public  subscriptions.  Bishop  Wilson 
saw  the  necessity  of  bringing  the  needs  of  the  Mission  to  the  minds  of 
the  people  of  the  Church  at  large  and  he  greatly  extended  the  already 
existing  policy  of  apportionmg  native  scholars  to  various  schools  and 
parishes;  he  also  inaugurated  the  "Island"  scheme,  whereby  a  person 
or  parish  guarantees  the  upkeep  of  a  mission  school  in  a  certain  place; 
by  this  means  he  practically  insured  regular  yearly  contributions. 

The  head  office  of  the  Mission  is  in  Auckland.  This  is  owing  to  old- 
time  associations  and  also  to  the  presence  there  of  Archdeacon  Dudley, 
who  was  for  so  many  years  the  treasurer  of  the  Mission.  Latterly  the 
organizing  secretary  for  New  Zealand  has  also  had  his  headquarters  in 
Auckland.     Bishop  Wilson  appointed  a  committee  of  business  men  in 


202  NOTES    CONCERNING    THE    MELANESIAN    MISSION. 

Auckland  to  advise  on  monetary  matters  and  to  look  after  the  Mis- 
sion's interest  in  the  matter  of  repairs  to  the  ship  and  the  ordering  of 
stores  for  the  islands.    Doubtless  much  money  was  saved  by  this  step. 

NORFOLK  ISLAND. 

It  is  in  the  matter  of  Norfolk  Island  that  the  lingai  of  the  Mission — 
i.  e.,  its  adherence  to  tradition — has  been  most  marked.  Bishop  G.  A. 
Selwyn  was  forced  at  the  outset  of  the  work  to  choose  a  base  of  oper- 
ations outside  Melanesia  itself.  His  policy  was  to  keep  the  w^ork  of 
the  Mission  under  his  own  eye  rather  than  to  call  for  workers  to  go 
and  settle  in  the  islands  and  develop  the  mission  work  from  within. 
It  was  assumed  that  for  the  development  of  the  Mission  the  base  of 
operations  must  necessarily  be  elsewhere  than  in  the  field  to  be  devel- 
oped, and  while  the  question  of  climate  has  always  been  supposed 
popularly  to  have  been  the  main  determining  factor  in  the  course  which 
was  pursued,  yet  in  all  probability  the  matter  was  settled  by  other 
considerations  than  those  of  climate.  The  climate  of  Melanesia  is 
bad  enough,  but  when  Bishop  Selwyn  began  his  work  in  the  islands 
white  missionaries  of  the  London  Missionary  Society  and  also  Presby- 
terian missionaries  were  settled  already  in  the  New  Hebrides,  the 
French  were  in  New  Caledonia,  and  the  Methodists  were  in  New 
Britain.  The  climate  of  the  New  Hebrides  is  but  little  better,  if  at 
all,  than  that  of  the  Banks  Islands,  where  most  of  the  early  work  of 
the  Mission  was  done,  and  New  Britain  has  almost  the  same  climate 
as  the  Solomons,  so  it  is  evident  that  missionaries  of  the  Melanesian 
Mission,  or  the  Northern  Mission  as  it  was  called  at  the  outset,  could 
have  settled  in  their  own  sphere  of  work  had  the  policy  allowed. 

The  report  of  1857,  written  probably  by  Mr.  Patteson,  puts  the 
matter  very  clearly  from  the  standpoint  of  that  time.  Speaking  of 
the  Melanesians  in  the  school  at  St.  John's,  Auckland,  he  writes: 

"They  are  delicate  subjects  and  require  careful  handling,  morally  and 
physically.  The  strength  of  passion  and  weakness  of  constitution  which 
belongs  to  their  tropical  nature  require  careful  training.  But  if  they  can  be 
acclimatized  mentally  as  well  as  physically,  and  taught  to  unite  the  energy 
and  perseverance  of  the  inhabitants  of  a  temperate  region  with  their  own 
fervor  and  impetuosity  of  character,  there  can  be  little  reason  to  doubt  but 
that  they  will  prove  most  efficient  teachers  and  missionaries  to  their  own 
people,  when  once  the  grace  of  God's  spirit  shall  have  shined  in  their  hearts. 
The  pupil  will  probably,  by  the  mere  force  of  association,  have  received 
impressions  and  experienced  a  change  of  character  which  will  prove  very 
beneficial  to  him  and  which  may  induce  him,  on  mixing  once  more  with  his 
own  friends,  to  contrast  their  customs  with  ours.  He  will  feel  the  sense  of  a 
want  now  created  in  him  of  something  better  than  his  own  land  supplies; 
he  will  desire  to  return  again  to  New  Zealand,  and  by  degrees  be  borne  along 
from  one  point  to  another  till,  under  God's  blessing,  he  emerges  from  his  old 
dark  Heathen  state  of  mind  into  a  state  of  conscious  apprehension  and  accept- 


NOTES    CONCERNING    THE    MELANESIAN    MISSION.  2O3 

ance  of  that  religion  which  has  presented  itself  to  him  as  modifying  every 
part  of  his  Hfe  and  character,  social,  moral  and  spiritual. 

"It  is  useless  to  suppose  that  the  78  islands  already  visited  by  the  Bishop  of 
New  Zealand  can  be  permanently  supplied  with  English  missionaries.  It  is 
indeed  beyond  the  bounds  of  all  probability  to  suppose  that  even  the  twenty- 
one  islands  which  have  already  yielded  scholars  to  the  Mission  can  be  pro- 
vided with  resident  English  teachers.  While  India,  China,  and  Africa  are 
now  at  length  opened  to  us,  and  need  every  help  which  Christian  zeal  and 
love  in  England  may  supply,  we  can  not  expect  any  large  number  of  mission- 
aries from  home  for  the  work  in  Melanesia.  The  only  method  now  open,  as 
we  have  said,  is  to  avail  ourselves  of  the  strange  curiosity  which  induces 
native  men  and  lads  to  trust  themselves  with  us,  and  to  hope  and  believe 
that  out  of  these  some  will  be  led  to  return  again  and  again  to  New  Zealand 
to  receive  direct  Christian  teaching. 

"In  every  case  the  attempt  would  be  made  to  raise  up  a  staff  of  teachers 
for  each  island  from  among  the  inhabitants  of  each  island,  and  the  English 
missionary,  or  any  native  teacher  qualified  for  the  work  who  might  be  asso- 
ciated with  him,  would  not  be  regarded  as  permanently  attached  to  the 
particular  island  with  which  they  were  at  any  given  time  brought  into  relation, 
but  only  until  such  time  as  the  teachers  trained  up  by  them  in  the  island 
during  a  part  of  the  year,  and  in  New  Zealand  during  the  remainder  of  it, 
could  be  taught  to  carry  on  the  work  under  the  superintendence  of  the 
Bishop  making  his  rounds  in  the  mission  vessel.  If  each  group  of  islands 
should  be  hereafter  placed  in  charge  of  an  English  missionary,  whose  duty 
it  would  be  in  his  small  boat  to  be  watching  over  the  native  clergy  in  each 
part  of  his  district,  and  the  Melanesian  Bishop  should  be  for  six  months 
visiting  the  islands,  bringing  back  and  taking  away  teachers  and  scholars, 
and  for  the  remaining  six  superintending  the  missionary  college  in  New  Zea- 
land; some  five  or  six  active  working  men  would  constitute  the  whole  of  the 
necessary  English  staff." 

It  M^as  really  Bishop  Selwyn's  strong  personality  and  his  vigor  of 
mind  and  body  that  caused  this  new  and  hitherto  untried  method  of 
evangelization  to  be  adopted.  The  Bishop's  method  was  a  new  one 
in  the  history  of  modern  missions,  though  in  a  measure  it  might  be 
regarded  as  an  adaptation  of  the  method  adopted  by  St.  Boniface 
in  founding  monasteries  and  in  using  them  to  educate  missionaries 
gathered  from  the  neighborhood.  The  ordinary  way  of  starting  and  of 
carrying  on  the  work  to  be  done  in  Melanesia,  viz.,  by  residential 
missionaries,  was  difficult  enough  at  that  time  owing  to  (i)  the  short- 
age of  men,  (2)  the  lack  of  regular  communication  other  than  by  the 
Mission  ship,  (3)  the  difficulty  of  climate,  (4)  the  multiplicity  of  lan- 
guages. But  it  must  not  be  forgotten  that  the  other  missions  in  Mela- 
nesia, by  their  policy  of  settling  residential  missionaries  from  the  very 
inception  of  their  work,  have  proved  that  (i)  men  will  offer  for  the 
work  and  (2)  climatic  conditions  can  be  overcome.  Of  the  other  two 
difficulties,  that  of  communication  has  already  been  solved  and  the 
language  difficulty  has  not  been  found  to  be  insuperable. 

The  native  teachers  of  the  Melanesian  Mission  trained  in  a  fairly 
cool  climate  at  Norfolk  Island  and  surrounded  by  the  things  of  civil- 


204  NOTES    CONCERNING    THE    MELANESIAN    MISSION. 

ization,  have  certainly  not  proved  any  more  useful  as  propagandists 
than  the  native  teachers  of  other  Missionary  bodies  in  the  Pacific 
who  were  trained  in  or  near  their  own  homes. 

It  was  during  the  episcopate  of  Bishop  Wilson  that  those  changes 
began  which  not  only  considerably  altered  the  original  plan  of  the 
Mission,  but  which  also  bid  fair  to  change  its  character  altogether. 
The  Rev.  H.  Welchman  was  actually  the  first  to  make  a  change  in  the 
original  plan  of  the  Mission  by  settling  with  his  wife  at  Siota,  Florida. 
Dr.  Comins  bought  Siota  with  the  idea  of  establishing  a  preparatory 
school  there  for  teachers,  and  he  and  Mr.  Welchman  had  undertaken 
to  conduct  it  in  turn,  Mr.  Welchman  taking  the  summer  months  and 
Dr.  Comins  returning  from  Norfolk  Island  during  the  southeastern 
trade  season,  when  Mr.  Welchman  went  back  to  his  own  work  in 
Bugotu,  Previous  to  this,  however,  Mr.  Forrest  had  been  living 
continuously  at  Santa  Cruz  all  the  year  through,  but  the  rest  of  the  staflF 
regularly  spent  the  summer  months  at  Norfolk  Island.  Bishop  J. 
Selwn.-n,  moreover,  had  long  been  desirous  of  doing  something  to  aid  the 
Christian  life  of  the  converts,  because  he  recognized  the  necessity  of 
building  them  up  in  their  Christianity.  He  also  wished  to  give  them 
something  to  do  in  order  to  replace  the  misdirected  efforts  of  the  old 
Heathenism  with  some  form  of  regular  employment.  His  idea  was  to 
furnish  a  small  vessel  for  trading  purposes  and  to  start  a  trading  com- 
pany, thus  providing  an  outlet  for  the  energies  of  his  people,  now  that 
the  old  avenues  of  their  Heathen  life  were  closed. 

FURTHER  CHANGES. 

During  Bishop  Wilson's  episcopate  there  were  many  new  develop- 
ments of  w^ork.  Preparatory  schools  were  built  at  Bongana  in  Florida, 
at  Pamua  on  San  Cristoval,  and  at  Vureas  in  the  Banks  Group.  The 
missionaries  began  to  reside  permanently  among  their  people  and  mis- 
sion houses  were  built  in  all  the  groups.  Men  took  their  wives  to  the 
islands  and  women  workers  were  placed  in  pairs  in  various  places. 
Still,  so  long  as  Norfolk  Island  remained  the  Bishop's  headquarters  it 
could  not  reasonably  be  said  that  these  doings  amounted  to  a  radical 
change  of  front;  they  were  only  what  might  be  expected,  owing  to 
the  changes  in  the  circumstances  of  the  islands  caused  by  the  advent  of 
trade  and  by  the  presence  of  other  missionary  bodies  in  the  Mission's 
area.  These  two  factors,  viz.,  trade  and  opposition,  have  worked  such 
a  change  in  the  Mission's  plan  that  it  may  be  said  that  practically 
all  the  missionaries  are  residential  in  the  islands,  i.  e.,  they  no  longer 
return  to  Norfolk  Island  during  the  summer. 

The  growing  importance  of  the  work  in  the  islands  so  impressed  the 
authorities  that  when  Bishop  Wilson  resigned  it  was  felt  that  his  suc- 
cessor must  be  prepared  to  have  his  headquarters  in  the  islands.     Nor- 


NOTES    CONCERNING    Till-     MKLANESIAN    MISSION.  2O5 

folk  Island,  however,  was  to  continue,  but  was  to  take  in  only  senior 
boys  and  no  girls  whatever;  its  numbers  would  thus  be  reduced  consid- 
erably and  special  attention  could  then  be  given  to  individuals  and 
special  facilities  afforded  for  the  training  of  ordinands.  Under  these 
conditions  it  is  obvious  that  the  Bishop  would  have  to  intrust  the  head 
of  the  Norfolk  Island  school  with  considerable  powers.  Hut  a  prece- 
dent might  have  been  found  for  this  in  the  fact  that  Bishop  Patteson 
had  previously  entertained  the  idea  of  locating  himself  in  Fiji  in  order 
to  conduct  work  among  the  Melanesian  laborers  there  and  of  intrusting 
to  others  the  care  of  St.  Barnabas;  Bishop  J.  R.  Selwyn,  also,  proposed 
leaving  Dr.  Codrington  in  charge  at  St.  Barnabas,  so  that  he  himself 
might  be  free  to  build  up  the  lives  of  the  Christians  in  the  islands. 

The  intention  at  the  beginning  of  the  episcopate  of  Bishop  W  ood  was 
to  modify  the  original  plan  of  work  by  providing  that  the  missionaries 
and  the  Bishop  look  upon  the  islands  as  their  main  field  of  operations 
and  should  definitely  make  their  home  in  the  islands,  but  that  the  chief 
training-school  should  be  away  from  the  islands,  i.  e.,  that  the  original 
plan  should  still  stand  in  part.  But  in  the  light  both  of  the  failure  of 
the  situation  of  the  school  (in  a  temperate  climate)  to  affect  materially 
the  mental  or  spiritual  vigor  of  the  scholars  as  was  hoped,  and  also 
having  in  consideration  the  imdoubted  fact  that  a  school  to  serve  the 
same  purposes  could  easily  be  established  in  these  days  in  the  Solo- 
mons or  in  the  New  Hebrides,  one  can  but  think  that  the  Norfolk 
Island  school  might  well  be  closed  altogether.  The  Presbyterians  have 
their  college  on  Tangoa  in  the  New  Hebrides  and  the  Anglicans  in 
Papua  have  theirs  at  Dogura,  and  both  of  these  colleges  can  turn  out 
teachers  every  bit  as  capable  of  doing  their  work  as  the  Melanesian 
teachers  from  Norfolk  Island  are  for  doing  theirs. 

Possibly  it  was  thought  that  to  close  St.  Barnabas  altogether  would 
entail  the  running  counter  to  a  vast  amount  of  sentiment,  and  even  it 
the  closing  of  it  could  be  shown  to  be  likely  to  effect  a  saving  financially 
considerations  of  sentiment  seemed  likely  to  rule  out  the  project  as 
impossible  or  as  unwise.  One  remembers  that  there  was  some  talk  a 
few  years  ago  of  making  Sydney  the  headquarters  for  the  ship,  but  inas- 
much as  the  doing  of  this  would  have  involved  the  changing  ot  the 
business  headquarters  also  (and  these  have  been  in  Auckland  from  the 
start),  it  was  deemed  inadvisable  to  make  any  change.  Sydney,  how- 
ever, is  the  metropolis  for  the  Pacific  and  caters  specially  for  the  island 
trade,  and  there  is  no  doubt  that  the  trade  requirements  of  the  Mission 
would  have  been  more  easily  satisfied  and  a  saving  in  price  would  also 
have  been  effected  by  dealing  in  Sydney;  but  old  associations  carried 
the  day.  The  history  of  the  monetary  contributions  to  the  mission  in 
New  Zealand  shows,  however,  that  propinquity  to  and  constant  asso- 
ciation with  the  Mission  and  its  work  are  not  the  all-important  factors 
in  determining  the  amount  of  money  likely  to  be  subscribed  in  a  place. 
The  Auckland  diocese  used  to  be  far  ahead  of  all  the  other  dioceses 


206  NOTES    CONCERNING    THE    MELANESIAN    MISSION. 

in  New  Zealand  in  its  support  of  the  Melanesian  Mission,  but  of  late 
years  Christchurch  has  been  a  considerable  rival  to  it.  Possibly  even 
a  change  of  the  headquarters  of  the  ship  to  Sydney  would  not  have 
affected  New  Zealand  contributions  over  much. 

It  can  hardly  be  said  that  the  Mission  has  any  explicit  or  definite 
policy  with  regard  to  the  requirements  of  the  life  of  its  missionaries  in 
the  islands,  i.  e.,  in  the  matter  of  food,  diet,  care  of  the  body,  medicine, 
clothing,  housing,  learning  of  the  local  language,  treatment  of  natives, 
method  of  propagation  of  Christianity.  In  the  old  days  the  newcomer 
did  certainly  get  impregnated  with  the  atmosphere  of  the  Mission  by 
living  at  Norfolk  Island;  he  learned  the  lingai  (a  Mota  word  meaning 
"use")  of  the  Mission,  but  nowadays  newcomers  go  straight  to  their 
work  in  the  islands  and  have  to  learn  the  lingai  of  the  Mission  as  best 
they  can.  It  would  seem  that  there  never  has  been  any  definite  policy 
with  regard  to  these  matters;  a  man  on  being  put  down  in  the  old  days 
in  charge  of  a  particular  place  was  left  there  quite  alone  and  presumably 
was  expected  to  know  how  to  live  his  life  without  warning  or  direction. 
When  Bishop  Wilson  at  the  outset  of  his  work  directed  attention  to 
the  need  of  a  set  of  directions  and  instructions  for  managing  a  whale- 
boat  the  opinion  which  found  favor  among  the  staff  was  that  it  was  best 
to  let  a  man  learn  by  experience.  And  the  question  of  linguistics  was 
treated  much  in  the  same  way — every  man  was  supposed  to  pick  up  the 
language  spoken  in  his  particular  district.  The  learning  of  Mota  was  a 
fairly  simple  problem,  owing  to  the  many  books  that  were  translated 
into  it  (the  Mota  dictionary  was  not  published  till  1896),  but  it  was 
quite  a  different  matter  when  faced  with  an  unknown  tongue  which  one 
was  supposed  to  learn,  while  at  the  same  time  no  help  or  directions 
were  provided  towards  enabling  one  to  set  about  the  study  of  it. 

The  common  use  of  Mota  tended,  moreover,  to  cause  a  depreciation 
in  the  estimate  of  the  value  of  the  other  languages  of  the  Mission. 
Mota  was  the  language  and  the  enlightenment  or  the  importance  of  a 
place  was  measured  at  times  by  the  ability  or  otherwise  of  its  people  to 
speak  Mota.  The  unquestioned  usefulness  and  the  predominance  of 
Mota  tended  to  put  all  the  other  languages  into  the  background  and 
had  a  prejudicial  effect  on  the  study  of  them.  Britishers  as  a  rule  are 
inclined  possibly  to  treat  sets  of  instructions  as  unnecessary  and  grand- 
motherly, and  the  non-provision  of  the  missionaries  of  the  Melanesian 
Mission  with  the  best  wisdom  of  the  day  with  regard  to  the  needs  of 
their  life  was  due  in  the  first  place  to  this  dislike  of  being  ordered  about 
and  of  having  to  live  according  to  rule  and  of  assimilating  their  ideas 
to  a  set  of  formal  conditions,  and  in  the  second  place  was  the  direct  con- 
sequence of  the  old  view  that  the  life  of  the  missionaries  in  the  islands 
was  an  incidental  break  in  the  regular  round  of  duties  at  Norfolk  Island. 


IVENS 


PLATE  2 


rholo  by  Heaitif.  Hobarl. 

A.  Recruiting  Boat  at  a  Market  in  Malaita.     The  Women  in  the  Canoes  are  waiting 

to  exchange  their  Fish  for  Garden  Produce. 

B.  Women  Traders,  etc.,  Malaita. 


"YACHTING"  IN  MELANESIA. 

It  did  not  need  the  mistake  of  a  clerk  in  drawing  out  the  letters 
patent  of  Bishop  G.  A.  Selwyn's  commission  to  act  as  bishop  from  lat. 
50°  S.  to  34°  N.  (2.  e.,  from  the  Auckland  Islands  to  the  Carolines)  to 
direct  the  Bishop's  attention  to  the  islands  of  Melanesia.  In  1847, 
when  Selwyn  first  went  to  Melanesia,  Fiji  had  already  been  partially 
Christianized,  Tonga  and  Samoa  were  practically  Christian,  the  French 
were  beginning  to  occupy  New  Caledonia,  and  the  London  Missionary 
Society  had  Rarotongan  teachers  in  the  southern  New  Hebrides  and 
the  Loyalties;  John  Williams  had  been  murdered  in  Erromango,  and 
a  French  Roman  Catholic  bishop  had  been  killed  at  Ysabel,  Solomon 
Islands.     Selwyn  wrote  in  1849: 

"While  I  have  been  sleeping  in  my  bed  in  New  Zealand,  these  islands, 
the  Isle  of  Pines,  New  Caledonia,  New  Hebrides,  New  Ireland,  New  Britain, 
New  Guinea,  the  Loyalty  Islands,  the  Kingsmills,  etc.,  have  been  riddled 
through  and  through  by  the  whale-fishers  and  traders  of  the  South  Sea. 
That  odious  black  slug  the  beche-de-mer  has  been  dragged  out  of  its  hole 
in  every  coral  reef  to  make  black  broth  for  Chinese  mandarins,  while  I, 
like  a  worse  black  slug  as  I  am,  have  left  the  world  all  its  field  of  mischief 
to  itself.  The  same  daring  men  have  robbed  every  one  of  these  islands  of 
its  sandalwood  to  furnish  incense  for  the  idolatrous  w^orship  of  the  Chinese 
temples,  before  I  have  taught  a  single  islander  to  offer  up  his  sacrifice  of 
prayer  to  the  true  and  only  God.  Even  a  mere  Sydney  speculator  could 
induce  nearly  a  hundred  men  to  sail  in  his  ships  to  Sydney  to  keep  his  flocks 
and  herds,  before  I,  to  whom  the  Chief  Shepherd  has  given  commandment 
to  seek  out  His  sheep  that  are  scattered  over  a  thousand  isles,  have  sought 
out  or  found  out  so  much  as  one  of  those  which  have  strayed  or  are  lost." 

Selwyn  first  reached  New  Zealand  in  1842  and  five  years  later  his 
great  mind  and  his  godly  strength  and  endurance  prompted  him  to 
join  H.  M.  S.  Dido  as  acting  chaplain  on  a  voyage  to  Tonga  and  Samoa 
and  to  the  southern  New  Hebrides  and  the  Isle  of  Pines.  It  was  at 
this  last  place  that  he  saw  a  sandalwood  trader,  Captain  Paddon, 
living  in  perfect  security  among  a  people  credited  with  every  evil 
passion  and  with  a  name  for  extreme  treachery  and  cunning.  Cap- 
tain Paddon  ascribed  his  safety  to  just  and  straight  dealing,  and  the 
Bishop  at  once  saw  the  value  of  this  lesson  and  called  Paddon  his 
tutor.  Just  dealing  seldom  fails  to  commend  itself  to  natives,  but 
the  Melanesian  Mission  had  sad  cause  later  on  to  know  that  disin- 
terested conduct  and  the  best  of  motives  will  not  avail  against  out- 
raged feelings  or  superstitious  beliefs  or  even  against  the  involuntary 
breaking  of  a  tabu  or  a  going  contrary  to  some  established  practice 
of  native  etiquette. 

On  August  I,  1849,  Selwyn  sailed  from  Auckland  in  his  own  college 
schooner,  the  Undine,  for  New  Caledonia  and  the  New  Hebrides,  and 

207 


208 


YACHTING       IN    MELANESIA. 


thus  began  what  his  detractors  in  New  Zealand  called  his  "yachting 
cruises."  The  Undhie  was  a  fore-and-aft  schooner  of  21  tons,  and  a 
square  sail  could  be  hoisted  on  the  foremast  when  t-he  wind  was  aft. 
The  Bishop  had  already  made  several  trips  round  New  Zealand  in  this 
little  vessel  with  Champion  as  master.  In  his  later  years  Champion 
lived  on  Norfolk  Island,  and  during  my  occupation  of  the  chaplaincy 
of  the  island  I  had  many  opportunities  of  converse  with  the  old  man. 
He  was  naturally  full  of  stories  about  the  Bishop  and  his  prowess.  One 
story  was  told  to  his  own  detriment.  On  one  occasion,  when  about  to 
leave  Auckland  for  Wellington,  the  Bishop  on  coming  aboard  found  his 
captain  drunk.     He  promptly  put  him  below,  shut  the  hatch,  got  sails 


The  Undine. 


set,  and  then  took  the  wheel  all  night  and  navigated  the  ship  past  the 
many  islets  into  open  water.  In  the  morning  the  Bishop  opened  the 
hatch  and  called  out,  "Champion,  are  you  sober?"  "Yes,  my  lord!  ' 
replied  Champion.  "Then  come  up  and  take  the  wheel  while  I  sleep." 
On  Selwyn's  first  voyage  to  Melanesia  he  had,  of  course,  no  modern 
charts  to  go  by;  all  that  he  had  were  some  old  Russian  and  Spanish 
charts,  the  latter  being  300  years  old.  Champion,  at  m.y  request,  made 
a  model  of  the  Uyidine  and  presented  it  to  the  Mission;  it  is  now  m  the 
museum  at  Norfolk  Island.  The  discomforts  of  life  on  a  20-ton  schooner 
in  the  tropics  must  have  been  very  great,  and  in  addition  the  Bishop  s 
cabin  was  often  occupied  with  sick  and  ailing  natives.  The  fare  on 
board  was  doubtless  composed  mainly  of  "bully"  beef  and  hard  bis- 


YACHTING       IN    MELANESIA.  209 

cuits,  but  one  is  inclined  to  think  that  the  following  story,  if  true,  shows 
hardness  run  to  the  death.  The  Bishop  had  called  in  at  Norfolk 
Island  and  on  Sunday  a  roast  turkey  appeared  on  the  table.  The  cook 
was  called  and  was  asked  by  the  Bishop  where  he  got  the  turkey. 
"Norfolk  Island,  my  lord,"  he  replied.  Then  said  the  Bishop,  "Have 
you  got  no  salt  beef  on  board?     Heave  that  thing  over  the  side." 

Perhaps  the  most  marvelous  feat  of  endurance  on  the  part  of 
Bishop  Selwyn  was  the  compilation,  while  at  sea  in  the  Undine  on  the 
Melanesian  trips,  of  his  "Verbal  Analysis  of  the  Bible,"  which  was 
intended  to  facilitate  the  translation  of  the  Scriptures  into  foreign 
languages.  Of  this  work  it  may  be  said  that  the  scope  of  it  is  as 
yet  too  great  for  our  present  standards  of  scholarship.  We  are  too 
parochial  and  confined  in  our  thoughts,  our  eflforts  are  too  small  and 
insignificant,  our  horizon  is  always  so  limited,  and  our  efforts  are  too 
puny  to  allow  us  to  work  on  such  broad  and  comprehensive  lines  as 
the  Bishop  suggests.  The  greatness  of  his  ideas  fairly  makes  us  stagger, 
so  accustomed  are  we  to  puddling  along  in  our  own  little  corners. 

The  book  had  a  twofold  object;  it  was  intended  to  act  as  a  manu- 
script note-book  to  assist  in  the  translations  of  the  Scriptures,  and  also 
to  provide  a  complete  course  of  annual  instruction  on  the  whole  subject- 
matter  of  the  Bible.  All  the  words  of  the  Bible  can  be  classified  under 
less  than  250  heads,  and  these  are  arranged  alphabetically  in  the 
analysis,  and  provision  is  made  for  60  subheadings  in  each  case.  Ref- 
erences are  given  showing  where  each  word  occurs,  either  in  the  Old 
or  in  the  New  Testament.  The  book  is  so  arranged  as  to  supply  a 
course  of  annual  lessons  on  the  Bible  for  every  Sunday  in  the  year  and 
two  or  more  of  a  less  strictly  religious  character  for  every  week.  These 
are  to  be  used  for  spelling  and  reading  lessons,  then  with  the  references 
as  lessons  on  the  words  of  the  Bible,  then  as  the  heads  of  catechetical 
instruction.  The  missionary  is  to  write  down  in  one  of  the  columns 
the  native  equivalents  for  the  various  English  words,  thus  enabling  him 
to  gain  an  accurate  knowledge  of  the  language  of  the  people  among 
whom  he  isworking,  so  that  the  translations  may  be  idiomatic  and  accu- 
rate, and  so  that  as  full  and  complete  a  list  of  words  may  be  compiled 
as  the  language  affords.  With  the  assistance  of  others  the  Bishop 
hoped  to  expand  the  book  into  a  complete  polyglot  dictionary  of  all 
languages  and  a  universal  cipher  for  international  communication. 
And  all  the  manuscript  was  prepared  in  the  cabin  of  a  20-ton  schooner 
in  the  tropics!     A  veritable  triumph  of  mind  and  spirit  over  matter! 

Bishop  Selwyn's  powers  of  body  were  equally  on  as  large  a  scale  as 
those  of  his  mind.  His  feat  of  diving  and  examining  the  copper  sheath- 
ing on  the  bottom  of  the  Undine,  after  she  had  been  aground  on  a  reef 
at  Noumea,  well  merited  the  generous  applause  of  the  British  and 
French  men-of-war's  men  anchored  near  by. 


2IO  ''yachting       in    MELANESIA. 

The  mission  carpenter  at  Norfolk  Island  told  rne  a  story  illustrating 
the  general  opinion  held  in  Auckland  as  to  the  Bishop's  ability  to  box. 
During  the  time  of  the  Maori  war  a  man-of-war's  man  and  a  marine 
were  fighting  in  Queen  Street  when  the  Bishop  happened  to  be  passing 
by.  An  onlooker  said  to  Kendall,  the  carpenter,  "Do  you  see  those 
two  fellows  fighting?  Well,  there  goes  someone  who  could  take  it  out 
of  the  two  of  them  with  one  hand ! "  Kendall  pretended  ignorance  and 
asked  who  was  meant,  "Why,  the  Bishop  of  course,"  said  the  other. 
Champion,  of  the  Undine,  used  to  recount  how  at  Tanna,  where  the 
Bishop  went  first  in  1849,  a  native  came  off  and  proceeded  to  air  his 
knowledge  of  English,  which  was  mostly  of  a  blasphemous  and  filthy 
nature.  The  Bishop  ordered  the  man  to  leave  the  ship  and  on  his 
refusal  bundled  him  over  the  side  into  the  water.  The  man  swam 
ashore  and  joined  a  group  on  the  beach,  and  then  the  Bishop  told 
Champion  to  lower  the  dinghy.  "  But,  my  lord,"  protested  Champion, 
"surely  you  are  not  going  to  venture  on  shore."  "Lower  the  dinghy" 
was  the  order.     The  Bishop  then  got  into  it  and  sculled  himself  to 

shore. 

Selwyn's  lack  of  conventionality  and  his  indifference  to  what  is 
generally  regarded  as  the  convenances  of  his  position  and  his  desire  to 
get  on  with  what  he  had  in  hand  are  well  exemplified  by  the  story  of  his 
carrying  ashore  from  the  ship  the  boxes  of  his  chaplain,  who  had  just 
arrived  from  England,  and  in  later  years  we  read  of  Selwyn  himself 
superintending  the  recoppering  of  tlie  mission  ship  at  Kawau. 

One  result  of  Bishop  Selwyn's  first  voyage  to  Melanesia  in  the 
Undine  was  that  he  obtained  five  native  boys  whom  he  took  up  to 
Auckland  and  thus  practically  started  the  Melanesian  Mission.  In  the 
following  year  a  voyage  was  made  to  the  same  islands  again  and  Tanna 
also  was  visited.  Some  Anaiteum  people  were  returned  from  Tanna 
and  owing  to  heavy  weather  the  crossing  took  two  days,  and  the 
Undine  had  35  people  on  board  all  that  time. 

In  1 85 1  the  Undine  was  replaced  by  the  Border  Maid,  a  schooner 
of  100  tons  and  costing  £1,200,  the  money  being  subscribed  in  Sydney 
and  Newcastle.  The  support  of  the  ship  was  guaranteed  in  Sydney 
and  by  the  Eton  Association  for  helping  the  Melanesian  Mission,  and 
ever  since  then  Eton  has  nobly  done  its  duty  by  the  Mission  year  after 
year.  The  founding  of  the  Austrahan  Board  of  Missions  was  another 
of  the  results  of  Selwyn's  visit  to  Sydney  that  year.  The  Bishop 
lamented  the  passing  of  the  little  Undine,  which  had  carried  him  so 
well  over  24,000  miles  of  sea. 

In  company  with  Bishop  Tyrrell  of  Newcastle,  a  voyage  was  made 
in  the  Border  Maid  to  the  southern  New  Hebrides,  to  New  Caledonia, 
to  Santa  Cruz,  and  to  the  Solomons.  At  Malekula  in  the  New  Hebrides 
the  whole  ship's  company  were  in  serious  peril  of  their  lives,  Bishop 


YACHTING       IN    MELANESIA.  211 

Selwyn  being  on  shore  filling  water-casks  and  Bishop  Tyrrell  minding 
the  ship.  Stones  were  thrown  and  arrows  were  shot,  but  the  calmness 
of  the  whole  party  undoubtedly  saved  them  from  being  massacred. 

The  Border  Maid  was  found  to  be  defective  in  gear  and  sails  and 
was  sold  the  next  year.  The  natives  who  had  been  brought  up  to 
Auckland  in  her  were  taken  to  Sydney  and  were  returned  to  their 
homes  in  a  chartered  brig  named  Gratitude.  A  voyage  was  made  in 
the  brig  Victoria  in  1853  as  far  as  Norfolk  Island  and  the  Loyalties, 
the  Bishop  being  accompanied  by  the  governor  of  New  Zealand,  Sir 
George  Gray.  Thus  Bishop  Selwyn  completed  seven  voyages  to  Mel- 
anesia. Anyone  who  has  visited  the  islands  of  Melanesia  and  has 
had  experience  with  the  tropical  heat  and  the  wet  and  muggy  atmos- 
phere, would  hardly  say  that  he  had  been  on  a  "yachting  cruise"; 
and  when  one  considers  the  smallness  of  the  Undine  and  the  confined 
space  in  which  the  Bishop  and  his  passengers  lived,  and  their  sen- 
sations in  being  hove-to  in  the  tropics  for  48  hours  during  a  hurricane, 
their  food  salt  beef  or  pork  and  biscuits,  one  marvels  at  the  courage 
and  determination  and  endurance  of  this  great  hero.  There  were  not 
wanting  those  who  viewed  with  great  disfavor  the  Bishop's  missionary 
voyages;  he  was  frequently  told  that  he  had  plenty  to  do  at  home 
without  taking  up  this  new  work;  but  who  can  dictate  to  a  St.  Paul? 
The  fruit  of  the  Bishop's  devoted  labor  is  seen  to-day  in  the  great 
missionary  diocese  of  Melanesia. 

When  Selwyn  visited  a  strange  place  his  habit  was  to  jump  out  from 
his  whaleboat  when  10  to  20  yards  from  the  shore,  and  then  to  wade  or 
swim  to  the  beach;  on  his  shoulders  he  strapped  numerous  presents, 
consisting  of  tomahawks,  fish-hooks,  handkerchiefs,  prints,  red  tape. 
To  the  people  who  stood  awaiting  him  on  the  beach  he  gave  presents; 
he  wrote  down  any  names  of  people  that  he  could  obtain  (how  did  he 
keep  his  notebook  dry?),  and  made  lists  of  words  for  future  use.  He 
bought  their  yams  or  coconuts  and  established  friendly  relations 
with  them.  In  some  places  he  produced  one  of  the  native  boys  who 
accompanied  him  and  used  him  as  a  tame  decoy,  hoping  to  get  a  lad  to 
accompany  him.  The  Sydney  Bulletin  pictures  to-day  of  missionaries 
in  top  hats  and  frock  coats  are  at  least  50  years  behind  the  times.  It 
was  a  common  report  in  the  Mission  and  it  is  an  indisputable  fact  that 
both  Selwyn  and  Patteson  often  went  ashore  in  such  regimentals, 
though  we  of  to-day  wonder  how  they  managed  to  endure  them.  In 
my  missionary  play  "Darkness  and  Dawn"  I  had  represented  Bishop 
Patteson  as  thus  attired,  but  rather  than  seem  to  give  countenance  to 
the  Bulletin  idea  I  changed  the  dress.  Bishop  Wilson,  on  looking  up 
his  diary,  wrote  me  that  George  Sarawia,  Bishop  Patteson's  deacon, 
had  informed  him  that  he  recollected  the  Bishop  so  dressed  when  he 
first  saw  him  in  the  islands.     The  London  Missionary  Society  also 


212  YACHTING       IN    MELANESIA. 

has  pictures  showing  John  Williams  at  Eromanga  clad  in  silk  hat  and 
frock  coat.  The  modern  missionary's  dress  is  of  a  peculiarly  non- 
descript character.  One  remembers  visiting  a  man-of-war  in  the 
Solomons  and  looking  rather  like  a  beachcomber  than  a  mission  priest, 
a  battered  straw  hat,  no  coat,  shirt  torn,  skin  burned  as  brown  as  any 
native's,  white  trousers  the  worse  for  wear,  and  no  boots  on  simply 
because  there  were  none  to  put  on;  all  were  worn  out  with  the  rough 
travelling.  We  had  just  returned  from  a  trip  round  Malaita  (240 
miles)  in  a  whaleboat. 

Some  of  the  most  pleasant  natives  one  has  known  have  been  pro- 
fessional murderers,  men  who  made  their  money  by  killing;  they  quite 
appreciate  the  value  of  Christian  work  among  their  neighbors.  Most 
of  the  popular  ideas  as  to  cannibalism  take  their  origin  from  descrip- 
tions of  old  Fijian  habits  or  in  a  measure  from  the  present-day  prac- 
tices of  certain  African  peoples,  but  cannibalism  was  never  universal 
in  Melanesia;  in  many  of  the  islands,  and  even  in  parts  of  islands  where 
it  is  known  to  be  practiced,  it  is  regarded  with  great  abhorrence.  Those 
of  them  who  do  eat  human  flesh  eat  it  as  a  matter  of  course,  associate 
it  with  no  superstitious  rites  or  ceremonies,  and  simply  eat  it  because 
they  learned  the  practice  from  their  forefathers.  The  good  old  idea 
of  the  lurking  savage  going  about  with  his  chops  watering,  seeking  whom 
he  may  devour,  has  no  foundation  in  fact,  and  all  writers  of  fiction  have 
in  the  main  abandoned  it  now  under  the  light  of  ethnological  research 
and  with  a  better  knowledge  of  the  habits  and  customs  of  people.  It 
may  safely  be  said  that  the  natives  in  Melanesia  do  not  kill  men  purely 
for  the  sake  of  eating  their  flesh.  Stories  of  ogres  are  common  enough 
in  the  islands,  men  and  women  who  have  developed  an  inordinate  taste 
for  human  flesh,  but  the  ordinary  native  in  a  cannibalistic  district  makes 
no  distinction  between  human  flesh  and  pork;  it  is  simply  flesh  meat. 

The  first  Southern  Cross  of  the  Mission  was  built  at  Blackwall  by 
Wigram's.  She  was  a  schooner  of  65  tons.  Miss  Yonge  had  sug- 
gested, when  Bishop  Selwyn  visited  England  in  1853,  that  funds  should 
be  raised  for  a  ship  among  the  readers  of  "The  Heir  of  RedclyflFe," 
then  just  published.  Mrs.  Keble  and  some  friends  raised  the  required 
sum  and  gave  it  to  the  Bishop.  The  Southern  Cross  sailed  in  1854 
from  London  on  the  same  day  that  Selwyn  and  Patteson  left  England 
in  the  Duke  of  Portland.  On  arrival  in  New  Zealand  the  ship  was 
utilized  for  a  trip  to  the  South  Island,  and  in  1856  Patteson  made  his 
first  voyage  to  Melanesia  in  company  with  the  Bishop.  After  the 
wreck  of  this  vessel  in  i860  on  the  Hen  and  Chickens,  the  schooner 
Zillah  was  chartered  for  the  Melanesian  voyages.  She  was  slow  and 
unsuitable,  after  the  smart  and  speedy  and  comfortable(?)  Southern 
Cross,  and  Patteson  said  that  she  was  guiltless  of  making  2  miles  an 
hour  to  windward  in  a  wind. 


"yachting"    in    MELANESIA.  2I3 

The  year  of  Bishop  Patteson's  consecration  the  Dunediriy  a  vessel  of 
60  tons,  was  chartered.  She  was  characterized  as  slow  but  sound.  On 
all  these  ships  the  missionaries'  practice  was  to  have  classes  for  the 
natives,  and  as  in  Patteson's  time  these  classes  were  conducted  in 
several  languages  which  he  alone  knew,  his  time  must  have  been  well 
occupied.  The  principle  on  which  he  worked  was  that  "to  teach 
Christianity  a  man  must  know  the  language  well."  Certainly  it  is 
easy  enough  to  acquire  a  few  words  and  phrases,  but  in  order  to  teach 
and  to  drive  truths  home  a  good,  solid,  idiomatic  knowledge  of  a  lan- 
guage is  required.  During  this  same  year  Patteson  made  a  voyage  to 
the  Solomons  in  H.  M.  S.  Cordelia  and  greatly  appreciated  the  comfort 
of  his  new  surroundings.  He  made  a  landing  on  Ysabel,  where  he 
acquired  a  list  of  200  words  and  phrases.  The  Bishop's  practice 
ever  was  to  leave  his  boat's  crew  and  go  ashore  wading  or  swimming. 
Patteson  and  Selwyn  were  both  good  swimmers,  and  it  surely  requires 
some  skill  to  swim  with  a  bundle  of  hatchets  and  adzes  tied  to  one's 
shoulders.  We  read  of  Bishop  Selwyn  swimming  out  in  a  surf  at 
Omba  and  of  Patteson  spending  two  days  and  a  night  in  the  Banks 
Group  in  an  open  boat  in  rain  and  wind  riding  to  an  anchor.  If 
sailors  do  things  of  this  sort  we  marvel  at  their  intrepid  behavior, 
but  how  much  greater  is  it  when  men  delicately  reared  act  thus  in  the 
performance  of  their  duty  for  Christ's  sake !  We  heard  also  of  a  mission 
priest  last  year  in  the  Solomons  who  left  an  island  at  daybreak  and  after 
continuous  rowing  against  wind  and  tide  reached  his  destination  the 
following  night.  And  what  shall  we  say  of  Dr.  Welchman  journeying 
across  from  Bugotu  to  Guadalcanar,  60  miles  in  an  open  boat,  to  visit 
the  sick,  and  then  returning  the  same  way?  **The  noble  love  of  Jesus 
impels  a  man  to  do  great  things." 

While  waiting  for  the  second  Southern  Cross  the  schooner  Sea 
Breeze  was  chartered  in  1862,  and  the  following  year  the  new  Mission 
ship  arrived  under  the  charge  of  Captain  Tilly,  who  had  been  navigat- 
ing lieutenant  on  the  Cordelia  and  had  volunteered  to  join  Patteson. 
In  later  years  we  remember  Captain  Tilly  as  the  Mission's  secretary  in 
Auckland.  The  second  Southern  Cross  was  a  yawl-rigged  brigantine 
of  93  tons  and  was  also  built  at  Wigram's.  Her  cost  was  £3,000,  a  large 
portion  of  which  was  contributed  by  Mr.  Keble.  Surely  if  Keble  Col- 
lege realized  the  part  Mr.  Keble  played  in  forwarding  the  work  of  the 
Melanesian  Mission,  some  of  their  men  would  consider  it  their  duty  to 
volunteer  for  service  in  that  Mission. 

No  steward  was  carried  on  the  Mission  ship  and  the  missionaries 
waited  on  themselves  until  some  of  the  native  boys  volunteered  to 
help.  This  was  ever  Patteson's  way,  and  Selwyn's  too;  they  were 
quite  ready  to  do  all  the  work  and  rather  preferred  to  stir  up  and 
quicken  their  boys  into  helpfulness  by  letting  the  idea  sink  into  their 


214 


YACHTING       IN    MELANESIA. 


minds  than  to  cause  them  to  help  through  being  commanded  to  do 
so;  but  this,  of  course,  presupposes  the  working  of  a  good  deal  of 
spiritual  force  in  the  mind  of  the  natives,  and  one  has  to  remember  that 
a  bishop  or  a  person  in  high  authority  will  often  get  attention  shown 
him  when  an  ordinary  person  may  easily  be  passed  over.  A  judicious 
mingling  of  the  power  of  example  and  of  the  assertion  of  authority 
would  seem  to  meet  the  case.  If  anything,  the  Mission,  in  following  the 
practice  of  its  great  leaders,  has  somewhat  failed  to  exercise  the  rights 
of  its  position,  in  trusting  that  the  natives  would  themselves  see  and 
reahze  their  duty  by  their  spiritual  fathers. 

Before  Tilly's  time  the  Bishop  used  to  see  to  all  the  provisioning  of 
the  ship  for  the  voyages,  hired  the  seamen,  kept  all  the  accounts,  and 
frequently  was  responsible  for  the  navigation.  0  temporal  0  mores! 
We  latter-day  missionaries,  when  clearing  from  Norfolk  Island,  so  far 
from  attending  to  navigation,  cared  little  in  our  agony  which  way  the 
ship's  head  was  pointed.  What  lively  times  we  used  to  have:  a  ship 
full  of  natives,  boys  and  girls,  the  decks  cumbered  with  livestock,  the 
hold,  the  cabins,  the  natives'  quarters  filled  with  stores  and  with  lug- 
gage. There  was  often  no  available  space  for  the  boys  to  lie  down  in; 
the  'tween  decks  was  littered  up  with  boxes,  tables,  furniture,  packages, 
all  piled  one  on  top  of  the  other.  Lucky  was  the  boy  who  could  curl  up 
on  the  underside  of  a  table  stowed  upside  down.  Some  people  seem 
to  fancy  that  Melanesians  never  suffer  from  the  same  ailments  that 
Europeans  do,  are  never  seasick,  never  get  malaria,  etc.  There  is  an 
equally  prevalent  belief  that  natives  do  not  mind  the  sun's  rays  at  sea, 
and  also  that  they  have  no  objection  to  getting  wet  with  salt  water, 
whereas  when  a  spray  comes  on  board  they  instinctively  try  to  dodge  it; 
possibly  this  is  owing  to  their  objection  to  having  the  salt  dry  on  the 
bare  skin;  and  also  they  will  always  congregate  when  possible  under 
the  shadow  of  the  sail  to  avoid  the  sun.  In  rain  natives  start  shivering 
and  their  teeth  begin  to  chatter  long  before  a  white  man  shows  any 
signs  of  feeling  cold. 

Between  Norfolk  Island  and  the  tropic  one  generally  expected  to 
have  a  bad  time  on  the  Southern  Cross.  The  weather  was  often  very 
rough,  with  a  cross  sea  running,  and  then  everything  started  rolling 
about.  The  8-pound  tins  of  meat  stored  in  the  lockers  in  the  cabin 
would  often  be  shot  violently  from  one  side  to  the  other;  the  book- 
case door  would  threaten  to  break  loose  from  its  hinges,  tumblers  fell 
off  the  stand  and  were  broken  to  pieces,  lamps  and  doors  swung  wildly 
about  with  the  rolling  of  the  vessel,  an  occasional  wave  would  dash 
into  the  side  cabins,  and  to  shut  the  doors  meant  suffocation.  The 
bunks  were  arranged  on  both  sides  of  the  cabin,  and  where  the  ship 
was  over  full  some  luckless  wight  had  to  camp  on  the  settee,  and  his 
experiences  at  night  in  a  gale  were  somewhat  exciting.     As  often  as  not 


YACHTING       IN    MELANESIA.  215 

one  of  the  bunks  was  occupied  by  some  boy  who  was  bein^  taken  home 
ill.  But  the  crown  of  it  all  was  making  up  the  teachers'  pay  in  the 
store-room,  commonly  known  as  "the  sweat-box,"  the  temperature 
between  95°  and  100°,  no  air,  a  rolling  ship,  and  the  smell  of  the  bilge 
water  over  all. 

The  old  Southern  Cross  had  no  bath  and  we  hailed  with  delight  a 
chance  -^f  standing  under  the  rush  of  water  that  came  off  the  deck- 
house in  a  shower.  Tradition  says  that  Bishop  John  Selwyn  used  to 
get  them  to  turn  the  salt-water  hose  on  him  when  they  were  washing 
down  the  decks. 

Captain  Tilly  resigned  in  1870  and  Captain  Jacob  succeeded  him 
and  was  in  charge  of  the  ship  at  the  time  of  the  Bishop's  murder.  The 
third  Southern  Cross  was  built  in  1874  and  Bongard  was  her  captain 
from  1875  till  she  was  sold.  Bongard  was  the  mate  who  took  in  the 
boat  at  Nukapu  and  picked  up  the  Bishop's  body.  He  had  previously 
been  mate  on  Henry  Kingsley's  yacht.  The  new  ship  was  built  in 
Auckland,  a  noted  place  for  building  good  schooners.  She  was  a  three- 
masted  topsail  schooner  of  180  tons,  with  a  24  horse-power  auxiliary 
engine;  her  cost  was  about  £5,000,  of  which  £2,000  came  from  the  Pat- 
teson  Memorial  Fund  of  the  Society  for  the  Propagation  of  the  Gospel. 
After  she  was  sold  she  was  renamed  Ysahel  and  was  noted  for  her  fast 
sailing. 

The  fourth  Southern  Cross  served  from  1891  to  1903.  She  was 
built  at  Wyvenhoe  in  Essex  by  a  noted  yacht-builder,  a  friend  of 
Bishop  Selwyn's.  Her  cost  was  £9,000  and  Bishop  Selw^^n  and  his 
friends  contributed  the  money.  In  rig  she  was  a  three-masted  fore- 
and-aft  schooner  with  yards  on  the  foremast,  and  still  bearing  her  old 
name  she  is  in  the  timber  trade  from  Hobart  to  Melbourne  and  may 
often  be  seen  in  the  Yarra  just  below  Queen's  Bridge.  Her  present 
owner  speaks  well  of  her  sailing  powers,  but  oh,  when  on  her  how  one 
longed  to  be  elsewhere!  Her  sail  area  was  much  reduced  after  she 
reached  New  Zealand,  owing  to  a  fear  that  the  hull  would  not  stand 
the  strain,  and  this  reduction  in  driving  force,  together  with  the  drag 
of  the  propeller,  made  it  very  difficult  to  keep  her  well  up  when  tacking. 
In  1901  the  Bishop  asked  me  to  go  to  Tikopia  in  the  ship  from  Mota,  a 
distance  of  about  100  miles.  On  a  previous  voyage  we  had  done  the 
same  journey  in  17  hours;  this  second  time  we  left  on  Monday  about 
noon  in  a  heavy  swell;  when  Tuesday  dawned  we  sighted  the  island 
a  long  way  to  windward  and  at  noon  we  were  20  miles  to  leeward  of  it, 
and  it  was  10  a.  m.  the  next  day  before  we  landed.  It  was  always  a 
struggle  to  get  from  the  Solomons  to  Santa  Cruz,  and  sometimes  it 
took  the  better  part  of  a  week,  but  the  last  stretch  of  600  miles  from 
Vila  to  Norfolk  Island  was  a  veritable  sea  of  growls.  It  was  generally 
a  case  of  making  less  than  100  miles  a  day  tacking  against  the  south- 


2i6  "yachting       in    MELANESIA. 

east  trade-wind,  and  on  one  occasion  we  actually  made  a  minus  quantity 
in  the  24  hours'  run,  so  far  as  actual  mileage  was  concerned,  though  we 
were  in  a  better  strategic  position  for  getting  south.  Coming  from  the 
hot  tropics,  we  felt  the  cold;  our  blood  was  thin  and  malaria  insistent; 
supplies  were  apt  to  run  short  and  we  were  perchance  but  poor  expo- 
nents of  Christian  or  even  of  Spartan  fortitude.  Captain  Bongard 
remained  in  charge  of  the  ship  till  1897,  and  then  he  was  succeeded  by 
the  mate,  Mr.  Huggett,  a  very  old  servant  of  the  Mission,  whom  Mr. 
Hammond  eventually  succeeded. 

The  present  Southern  Cross  arrived  in  1903.  Originally  she  had  sail 
power  as  well  as  steam,  but  the  sails  were  taken  off  and  the  masts 
reduced  in  number  and  size.  Her  tonnage  is  500,  her  speed  12  knots, 
and  she  cost  £21,000.  Captain  Sinker  commanded  her  for  nearly 
ten  years  and  wrote  a  descriptive  account  of  his  first  voyage  to  the 
islands,  which  is  entitled,  "By  Reef  and  Shoal." 


IVEXS 


PLATE  3 


I'lwlo  bv  l\\ill!i\  Ilol'iirl 


A.  Sea-going  Canoe,  Malaita. 

B.  Model  of  Canoe  used  for  Bonito  Fishing.   L  lawa. 

C.  Matema,   Reef  Group. 


THE  QUEENSLAND  LABOR  TRADE. 

The  first  laborers  imported  into  Queensland  from  the  Pacific  Islands 
arrived  there  in  the  year  1864.  They  were  imported  by  Captain 
Towns,  of  Brisbane,  for  work  on  the  cotton  plantations.  In  1847 
certain  pastoralists  of  New  South  Wales  had  requisitioned  ships  to 
procure  natives  from  the  islands  for  employment  as  shepherds  and 
drovers.  Two  ships  were  employed,  the  brig  Portania  and  the  schooner 
Velocityy  and  their  object  was  described  as  "trading  for  cannibals," 
and  when  the  so-called  cannibals  could  not  be  obtained  by  fair  means 
they  were  to  be  taken  by  force.  These  two  ships  called  first  at  the 
Loyalties  and  obtained  30  men,  who  were  far  from  being  cannibals 
and  who  certainly  had  not  the  least  idea  of  the  agreement  under  which 
they  were  supposed  to  serve,  but  thought  they  were  out  on  a  pleasure 
trip  to  see  the  world.  They  next  procured  men  from  the  Gilberts  and 
Kingsmills  and  then  made  for  Rotuma,  where  the  Loyalty  Islanders 
absconded.  An  affray  followed,  during  which  the  whites  fired  on  the 
natives,  and  one  native  was  killed  and  two  whites.  Thus  early  was 
that  traffic  begun  which  was  to  lead  to  the  death  of  so  many  men, 
both  white  and  brown. 

In  1867  there  were  taken  to  Queensland,  for  a  period  of  three  years, 
382  natives,  but  only  78  of  them  returned.  From  this  year  till  the 
end  of  1890  there  was  a  constant  stream  of  native  laborers  flowing  to 
Queensland  from  the  islands.  Then  for  a  few  months  the  trade  ceased, 
owing  to  legislation  passed  in  1885,  but  it  was  revived  in  the  following 
year  for  a  period  of  ten  years.  In  1901  provision  was  made  for  its 
complete  suppression  and  all  the  natives  were  ordered  to  be  deported 
by  December  1906. 

The  trade  has  generally  been  called  the  "Polynesian  labor  trade" 
or  the  "Pacific  Islands  labor  trade,"  and  the  laborers  have  been 
known  as  Polynesians  or  Kanakas,  or  occasionally  as  Papuans,  but 
never  once  by  their  real  name  of  Melanesians.  The  western  Pacific 
has  suffered  from  the  fact  of  its  late  development  and  from  the  inhos- 
pitable character  of  its  natives.  The  eastern  Pacific,  Polynesia 
proper,  was  well  known  to  white  people  early  in  the  nineteenth  century 
and  the  hospitality  of  its  natives  was  proverbial,  whereas  New  Guinea 
and  the  islands  of  Melanesia,  though  close  to  Australia,  long  remained 
unexplored  and  unknown,  the  ferocity  of  the  people  being  in  a  measure 
responsible  for  this.  Accordingly  everything  was  measured  in  white 
men's  minds  by  Polynesia.  Thus  Dr.  Codrington  had  a  long  fight  to 
gain  a  hearing  for  the  Melanesian  languages  and  to  convince  people 
that  they  were  real  independent  languages  and  not  mere  offshoots  of 
Maori  on  the  one  side  or  of  Samoan  on  the  other.  In  effect  he  has 
triumphantly  proved  that  Melanesian  languages  are  really  older  than 

217 


2i8  THE  QUEENSLAND  LABOR  TRADE. 

Polynesian  and  represent  a  much  more  primitive  method  of  speech, 
and  that  the  Polynesian  languages  might  possibly  be  described  as  much- 
worn  specimens  of  Melanesian  rather  than  the  Melanesian  as  crude 
forms  of  Polynesian,  and  one  would  not  be  in  error  in  saying  that  the 
key  to  the  study  of  the  Polynesian  languages  etymologically  is  found 
in  the  Melanesian  languages. 

It  is  curious,  however,  that  these  Melanesians  in  Queensland  should 
have  been  described  as  Kanakas.  Kanaka  is  an  Hawaiian  word  mean- 
ing man,  and  is  identical  with  the  Maori  tan^ata,  so  the  Kanaka  labor 
trade  means  really  the  trade  in  men.  Possibly  the  use  of  the  word  is 
reminiscent  of  the  labor  trade  carried  on  by  the  Spaniards  from  Lima 
for  laborers  in  the  mines.  Numbers  of  their  ships  went  kidnapping 
at  the  Sandwich  Islands  and  at  Samoa,  and  just  as  in  Melanesia  in 
later  days  the  labor  vessels  were  known  as  "men-buying"  or  "men- 
stealing"  ships,  so  the  Hawaiians  probably  named  them  "kanaka- 
stealers,"  but  it  is  not  certain  how  the  Hawaiian  word  first  came  to 
be  used  in  the  trade  in  the  western  Pacific. 

Pohmesians  as  such  were  but  little  recruited  for  Queensland  or  Fiji. 
In  1894  Bishop  Wilson  reported  on  a  number  of  Gilbert  Islanders 
(Micronesians)  who  had  just  been  recruited,  and  in  the  early  years 
raids  were  made  on  the  Polynesians  of  Uvea  in  the  Loyalties  and  on 
the  Micronesians  of  the  Line  Islands.  The  Rotuma  people  included 
in  that  early  raid  are  Polynesians  in  geographical  situation,  but  speak 
a  Melanesian  language.  Beyond  these  instances  Polynesians  as  such 
seem  not  to  have  been  recruited  at  all.  However,  a  few  were  recruited 
from  Rennell,  an  outlying  island  in  the  Solomons,  and  likewise  from 
Ongtong  Java  (Lord  Howe  Island),  north  of  the  Solomons,  and  from 
Tikopia.  Most  of  these  recruits  died  and  the  survivors  were  returned 
to  their  homes  before  completing  their  three  years. 

To  call  these  Melanesians  Papuans,  as  some  of  the  labor-vessel 
captains  did,  or  worse  still,  as  some  of  the  Presbyterian  missionaries 
in  the  southern  New  Hebrides  did,  is  really  inexcusable  from  a  lin- 
guistic point  of  view.  Everyone  in  this  part  of  the  Pacific  ought  to 
know^  that  the  term  Papuan  is  used  to  describe  the  peoples  of  New 
Guinea.  The  word  Papua  in  itself  is  said  to  be  a  Malay  word  meaning 
frizzly  or  fuzzy  and  was  applied  by  sea-going  Malays  to  the  frizzly- 
headed  natives  of  New  Guinea,  they  themselves  of  course  having 
straight,  long  hair.  So  far,  however,  as  the  character  of  the  hair  goes, 
Melanesians  might  well  be  called  Papuans.  The  Melanesian  teachers 
in  the  Anglican  Mission  in  Papua  to-day  are  always  called  South  Sea 
Islanders — a  name  imported  from  Queensland,  whence  they  were 
obtained.  All  the  legislation  concerning  the  imported  laborers  in 
Queensland  was  under  the  heading  of  Pacific  Islanders  or  Pacific 
island  laborers. 


THE  QUEENSLAND  LABOR  1 RADE.  2I9 

The  labor  trade  may  be  summed  up  as  having  had  three  stages  of 
development:  (i)  open  kidnapping;  (2)  recruiting  under  conditions 
somewhat  improved;  (3)  legitimate  recruiting.  \  essels  of  various 
sorts  had  been  sailing  in  the  Melancsian  islands  from  about  1840 — 
sandalwood  traders,  whalers,  beche-de-mer  curers.  Of  these  the 
whalers  had  perhaps  been  the  least  unsatisfactory,  in  that  they  at  anv 
rate  did  not  murder  the  natives,  though  they  certainly  left  terrible 
diseases  behind  them.  The  crews  of  two  ships  engaged  in  the  sandal- 
wood trade  in  1842  shot  down  26  men  in  one  of  the  southern  New 
Hebrides  and  suffocated  others  with  smoke  in  a  cave. 

The  regular  and  systematic  exploitation  of  Melanesians  as  laborers 
in  Queensland  and  Fiji  did  not  begin  before  1866-67.  ^ri  the  latter 
year  Bishop  Patteson  wrote: 

"Reports  are  rife  of  a  semi-legalized  slave-trading  between  the  South 
Sea  Islands  and  New  Caledonia  and  Fiji.  I  am  told  that  the  government 
sanctions  natives  being  brought  upon  agreement  to  work  for  pay,  etc.,  and 
passage  home  in  two  years.  We  know  the  impossibility  of  making  contracts 
with  New  Hebrides  or  Solomon  Island  natives.  It  is  a  mere  sham,  an 
evasion  of  some  law  passed,  I  dare  say,  without  any  dishonorable  intention 
to  procure  colonial  labor.  I  saw  a  letter  in  a  Sydney  paper  which  spoke 
strongly  and  properly  of  the  necessity  of  the  most  stringent  rules  to  pre- 
vent the  white  settlers  from  injuring  the  colored  men." 

In  1868  Bishop  Patteson  speaks  of  the  recruiting  from  Tanna  for 
Fiji  and  expresses  his  fears  that  natives  were  being  taken  under  false 
pretences  owing  to  the  impossibility  of  the  recruiters  understanding 
the  Tanna  language,  while  to  talk  of  making  a  contract  with  them  was 
absurd. 

In  1869  it  was  found  that  the  Noumea  and  Fiji  vessels  were  using 
the  Bishop's  name  in  the  Banks  Group  in  order  to  entice  people  on 
hoard,  pretending  that  they  were  his  emissaries  and  accounting  for 
his  absence  by  saying  that  his  ship  had  been  wrecked,  or  that  he  had 
broken  his  leg,  or  had  gone  to  England  and  had  sent  them  to  fetch 
natives  to  him.  As  yet  no  force  had  been  used,  but  the  people  feared 
the  recruiters.  Certain  English-speaking  natives  were  employed  as 
recruiting  agents,  and  some  of  these  had  learned  their  English  with 
the  Bishop.     In  regard  to  this  the  Bishop  wrote: 

"In  most  places  where  any  of  our  young  people  happened  to  be  on  shore, 
they  warned  their  companions  against  these  men,  but  not  always  with 
success.  This  is  a  sad  business,  and  very  discreditable  to  the  persons 
employed  in  it,  for  they  must  know  that  they  can  not  control  the  masters 
of  the  vessels  engaged  in  the  trade.  They  may  pass  laws  as  to  the  treatment 
the  natives  are  to  receive  on  the  plantations,  but  they  know  that  the  whole 
thing  is  dishonest.  The  natives  don't  intend  or  know  anything  about  any 
service  or  labor;  they  don't  know  that  they  will  have  to  work  hard.  They 
are  brought  away  under  false  pretences,  else  why  tell  lies  to  induce  them  to 
go  on  hoard  .f"     I  dare  say  that  many  young  fellows  go  on  hoard  without 


220  THE  QUEENSLAND  LABOR  TRADE. 

much  persuasion.  Many  causes  may  be  at  work  to  induce  thern  to  do  so, 
e.  g.,  sickness  in  the  island,  quarrels,  love  of  excitement,  the  spirit  of  enter- 
prise, but  if  they  knew  what  they  were  taken  for  I  don't  think  they  would  go." 

The  premium  offered  by  the  planters,  £io  to  £12  per  head,  was 
quite  sufficient  to  tempt  some  shipmasters  to  obtain  colored  labor  by 
foul  means,  if  fair  proved  impossible.  Accordingly  in  1869  and  1870 
we  begin  to  read  of  wholesale  kidnapping  and  of  outrageous  acts  of 
violence.  Two  cases  were  reported  and  the  captains  of  naval  vessels 
seized  the  schooners  Daphne  and  Challenge  on  charges  of  slavery. 
However,  their  zeal  for  righteousness  cost  them  dearly;  the  courts 
acquitted  the  accused,  and  the  naval  commanders  were  indicted  by 
the  owners  of  the  vessels  for  detention  and  unlawful  seizure,  and  a  bill 
of  £900  for  damages  was  sent  to  one  of  them.  It  is  recorded  of  the 
Challenge  that  she  decoyed  natives  of  the  Torres  Islands  into  the  hold 
by  means  of  gifts,  beads,  and  trinkets;  then  the  hatches  were  put  on 
and  a  boat  placed  over  the  hatchway.  The  natives  began  to  cut  a 
hole  in  the  ship's  side  and  eventually  were  allowed  to  jump  overboard 
when  the  ship  was  7  miles  off  the  shore.  Later  on,  the  schooner 
Helen  was  boarded  by  officers  and  was  found  to  have  no  clearance  and 
no  license,  but  the  fear  of  the  courts  had  made  the  naval  captains 
careful  and,  though  the  illegality  was  plain,  all  that  was  done  was  to 
make  the  master  of  the  Helen  sign  a  statement  of  the  illegality  of  the 
proceedings  and  then  the  vessel  was  allowed  to  proceed.  At  Vanua 
Lava,  in  the  Banks  Group,  two  natives  were  knocked  down  into  the 
hold  and  were  carried  to  Fiji,  and  the  captain  was  convicted  on  a 
charge  of  assault  and  sentenced  to  three  years'  imprisonment,  but  the 
charge  of  slavery  failed. 

The  most  notorious  case,  however,  was  that  of  the  brig  Carly  which 
left  Melbourne  in  1871  to  recruit  for  Fiji.  When  in  the  New  Hebrides 
she  was  overhauled  by  H.  M.  S.  Rosario  and  everything  seemed  to 
be  quite  in  order  and  all  straightforward,  whereas  an  awful  tragedy 
had  happened  on  her  a  few  days  previously.  In  addition  to  the 
English  crew  there  were  a  number  of  "passengers"  on  board,  and  one 
of  these,  a  Melbourne  doctor,  was  part  owner  of  the  ship.  At  Paarna 
they  dressed  up  one  man  as  a  missionary  and  endeavored  to  obtain 
recruits  on  the  plea  that  they  represented  the  Bishop.  As  canoes  came 
round  the  ship  the  captain  and  crew  threw  pig  iron  into  them  and  sank 
them;  then  the  "passengers"  lowered  the  boats  and  picked  up  the 
struggling  natives;  those  who  resisted  were  hit  with  clubs  or  with  pieces 
of  iron.  In  other  places  they  lowered  a  boat  on  top  of  the  canoes  and 
sank  them  and  then  picked  up  the  swimmers.  The  slaves  were  all 
stowed  under  hatches  and  an  armed  guard  placed  over  them.  The 
murder-lust  seems  to  have  maddened  the  white  men  and  (inflamed 
probably  with  drink)  they  imagined  that  the  slaves  were  about  to 
mutiny  and  overpower  them.     Someone  fired   a  shot  at  the  crowd 


THE  QUEENSLAND  LABOR  TRADE.  221 

below  and  then  the  madness  broke  forth  and  everyone  on  deck  started 
shooting  and  kept  it  up  all  night  long.  In  the  morning  they  made  an 
armed  reconnaissance  and  found  that  the  whole  place  was  a  shambles; 
some  50  had  been  killed  outright  and  blood  was  flowing  everywhere; 
16  were  badly  wounded  and  10  slightly.  The  dead  were  thrown  over- 
board and  the  legs  and  arms  of  the  badly  wounded  were  tied  and  they 
too  went  overboard.  The  doctor  is  described  as  a  "monster  in  human 
shape,"  the  instigator  and  ringleader  of  the  atrocities;  however,  he 
turned  Queen's  evidence  and  so  got  oflf"  scot-free,  while  the  master  and 
one  of  the  crew  were  sentenced  to  death,  but  the  sentence  was  com- 
muted. 

In  the  same  year  a  ship  called  the  Marion  Rennie  was  the  scene  of 
a  terrible  massacre.  She  had  kidnapped  men  all  over  Melanesia, 
among  them  being  Itei  of  Sa*a,  who  had  paddled  out  to  the  ship  and 
was  captured,  and  Amasia  of  Fuaga  near  Ataa  Bay,  north  IMalaita. 
Itei  was  baptized  by  me  in  1896  and  Amasia  after  returning  from  Fiji 
with  a  Fijian  wife  and  a  son  Inia,  now  a  teacher  in  the  Melanesian 
Mission,  settled  at  Qai  near  Cape  Astrolabe  and  shortly  afterwards 
was  killed  at  Ngore  Fou  on  a  trumped-up  charge  of  witchcraft.  The 
natives  on  the  Marion  Rennie  mutinied  and  killed  their  white  captors 
and  then  were  left  drifting  helplessly  about  at  sea.  The  Tanna  men 
on  board  fraternized  with  the  Solomon  Islanders  and  killed  and  ate 
the  natives  of  the  other  islands.  Eventually  a  man-of-war  fell  in 
with  the  ship  and  conveyed  her  to  Fiji. 

Four  Fijians  who  had  been  crew  on  another  ship  returned  without 
their  white  masters,  and  told  a  story  of  how  they  had  been  attacked 
by  natives  of  Anuda,  Cherry  Island,  near  Tikopia,  and  the  white  men 
murdered.  The  Rosario  investigated  the  case  and  decided  that  there 
was  no  truth  in  it;  probably  the  crew  had  themselves  murdered  the 
whites. 

At  the  island  of  Florida,  in  the  Solomons,  canoes  were  decoyed  under 
the  stern  of  the  recruiting  ship  and  then  boats  were  lowered  on  top  of 
them  and  the  struggling  natives  captured  in  the  water;  those  who 
resisted  had  their  heads  chopped  off  with  a  long  knife.  The  ships 
that  did  this  sort  of  thing  were  purchasing  tortoise-shell  and  were  in 
league  with  the  head-hunters  of  the  western  Solomons.  Desire  for 
trade  caused  the  canoes  to  put  out  to  the  ships,  which  fairly  swarmed 
in  these  years,  brigs,  schooners,  ketches,  recruiting  mainly  for  Fiji. 
Some  of  them  had  no  oflFicial  license  to  recruit,  some  had  painted  out 
their  names,  others  had  no  customs  clearance  from  their  last  port. 
In  some  cases  the  men  in  the  canoes  were  lassoed  round  the  neck  from 
the  ship  and  were  then  hauled  on  board.  In  other  cases  the  ship  was 
painted  to  resemble  the  Southern  Cross  and  a  man  in  a  black  coat  went 
on  shore  and  invited  the  natives  to  go  on  board  and  see  the  Bishop. 
Four  or  five  years  of  this  recruiting  had  practically  depopulated  some 


222  THE  QUEENSLAND  LABOR  TRADE. 

of  the  Banks  Islands,  and  to  make  it  worse  women  had  been  taken 
as  well  as  men,  thus  opening  up  an  infinite  possibility  of  wrong-doing 
and  confusion. 

Queensland  had  legislated  in  1868,  by  the  "Polynesia.!  laborers  act," 
with  a  view  to  prevent  kidnapping,  and  the  shipmasters  had  to  enter 
into  a  bond  of  £500  that  they  would  observe  the  provisions  of  the  act. 
Also,  the  employers  of  labor  entered  into  a  bond  of  £10  per  laborer  to 
provide  for  return  passages;  this  amount  was  afterwards  lowered  to  £5. 
The  act  of  1868  also  provided  a  form  which  was  to  be  read  in  the  pres- 
ence of  any  natives  who  desired  to  recruit  and  was  to  be  signed  by  the 
resident  missionary  of  the  place,  or  by  a  European  resident  or  a  chief 
interpreter,  to  the  effect  that  the  native  was  recruited  for  a  term  of 
3  years  or  39  moons  with  wages  at  £6  per  annum  and  with  clothes  and 
rations  provided,  and  with  supervision  by  the  Queensland  government 
in  his  sphere  of  labor.  Nothing  is  stated  in  this  act  about  the  official 
government  agent  who  accompanied  the  ship  to  supervise  the  recruit- 
ing, although  both  the  Queensland  and  the  Fijian  ships  seem  to  have 
carried  them  then.  The  Queensland  act  of  1880  provides  for  the  due 
appointment  of  fit  and  proper  persons  to  be  government  agents  to 
accompany  the  recruiting  vessels. 

The  Imperial  Government,  in  the  "Pacific  Islanders  protection 
act"  of  1872,  definitely  provided  against  any  repetition  of  the  Daphne 
case,  wherein  naval  officers  had  been  sued  for  damages,  by  ordering 
that  no  officer  or  local  authority  should  be  held  responsible,  either 
civilly  or  criminally,  in  respect  of  the  seizure  or  detention  of  any  vessel 
suspected  of  kidnapping,  and  the  act  of  1875  provided  for  the  appoint- 
ment of  a  high  commissioner  for  the  Pacific. 

In  the  act  of  1884  a  set  of  regulations  was  laid  down  for  the  trade 
which  might  be  regarded  as  ideal;  firearms  and  drink  were  not  to  be 
supplied  to  the  natives;  only  such  firearms  were  to  be  carried  as  were 
required  for  the  ship's  use;  the  ships  were  to  be  painted  a  distinguishing 
color,  light  slate  with  a  black  streak  6  inches  wide  running  fore  and  aft, 
and  were  to  carry  a  black  ball  at  the  masthead  when  recruiting.  All 
laborers  were  to  be  recruited  in  the  presence  of  the  government  agent, 
and  two  Europeans,  not  counting  the  agent,  were  to  accompany  every 
boat  when  ashore  recruiting.  If  an  islander  deserted  after  being 
recruited  he  was  not  to  be  taken  by  force  or  intimidated.  Women 
were  not  to  be  taken  without  their  husbands  or  without  the  consent 
of  their  chiefs.  All  interpreters  employed  in  the  trade  were  to  be  paid 
fixed  wages  and  all  bonuses  and  commissions  thus  ceased.  All  laborers 
returned  were  to  be  landed  at  their  own  "passages"  unless  they  them- 
selves expressly  desired  to  be  landed  elsewhere.  The  government 
agent  was  given  very  summary  powers,  and  if  the  regulations  were 
faithfully  carried  out  the  recruiting  would  be  unexceptionable. 


THE  QUEENSLAND  LABOR  TRADE.  223 

The  Stopping  of  the  practice  of  giving  commissions  and  the  paying 
of  fixed  wages  to  all  concerned  must  have  had  a  very  salutary  effect, 
but  like  the  rest  of  the  regulations  it  was  easily  evaded,  as  was  shown 
in  the  case  of  the  William  Manson.  This  vessel  in  1894  entered  into 
an  agreement  with  Qaisulia,  the  chief  of  Adagege,  one  of  the  artificial 
islets  off  the  northeast  coast  of  Malaita,  whereby  he  was  to  receive 
a  boat  in  payment  for  ten  men  recruited.  Qaisulia  and  his  braves 
violently  seized  a  number  of  bush  natives  for  his  masters  on  the 
William  Madison.  The  evidence  as  to  the  kidnapping  was  conclusive, 
but  the  white  men  concerned  in  it  were  acquitted  and  the  judges 
characterized  the  acquittal  as  a  miscarriage  of  justice.  The  value  of 
the  regulation  ordering  the  government  agent  to  supervise  the  recruit- 
ing and  of  the  stipulation  that  at  least  two  white  men  accompany  the 
boats  is  seen  in  the  contrast  presented  by  the  recruiting  for  Noumea, 
where  one  hears  even  now  of  the  French  boats  going  ashore  manned 
by  natives  only  and  of  cases  of  violence  continually  recurring. 

The  recruitingof  women  was  always  a  source  of  trouble  in  the  islands. 
Any  native  for  the  nonce  might  pose  as  a  chief  and  give  his  permission 
for  a  woman  to  leave,  provided  it  were  made  worth  his  while,  and  in 
most  of  the  Melanesian  islands  it  is  difficult  to  find  out  who  is  the 
chief,  since  there  are  practically  no  paramount  chiefs.  However,  the 
spirit  of  the  regulation  was  honest  enough,  for  white  men  always 
regard  it  as  a  sine  qua  non  that  there  must  be  of  necessity  regular 
chiefs  in  every  place.  One  has  frequently  known  cases  where  a  man 
has  persuaded  a  woman  to  recruit  with  him,  posing  as  his  wife,  or  vice 
versa,  and  no  one  in  authority  on  shore  was  questioned  as  to  their  real 
status.  On  returning  the  pair  were  in  difficulties  and  violence  and 
bloodshed  ensued.  Their  only  chance  of  safety  would  be  to  land  in 
a  foreign  place  on  the  plea  of  visiting  relations. 

Before  English  was  well  known  in  the  Pacific  the  spirit  of  the  regu- 
lations as  to  making  recruits  understand  the  terms  of  their  engage- 
ment was  undoubtedly  difficult  to  carry  out.  Indeed,  even  the  very 
letter  of  it  was  at  times  completely  evaded.  Pacific  Islanders  have 
no  term  corresponding  to  our  word  year,  and  cases  are  knov^n  where 
recruits  were  carefully  schooled  to  hold  up  three  fingers  and  say  "three 
yam,"  i.  e.,  three  harvests,  yams  being  planted  only  once  a  year. 

In  1884  certain  Queensland  ships  went  recruiting  in  the  islands  off 
New  Guinea,  and  several  cases  of  actual  kidnapping  occurred,  and 
many  gross  and  violent  murders  of  natives  took  place.  The  inter- 
preters acted  as  unscrupulous  and  uncontrolled  recruiting  agents  and 
were  rewarded  according  to,  or  were  promised  compensations  corre- 
sponding with,  the  number  of  recruits  obtained.  According  to  the 
evidence  given,  men  were  recruited  by  these  ships  in  complete  ignorance 
of  what  was  expected  of  them;  some  thought  they  were  going  for  "three 
moons,"  others   "to  go  to  white  men's  country  and  walk  about," 


224  THE  QUEENSLAND  LABOR  TRADE. 

Others  "to  go  and  work  on  the  ship,"  or  "to  sail  about."  And  doubt- 
less, even  in  Melanesia  itself,  the  actual  signing  of  the  recruits  was 
in  many  cases  a  mere  farce.  Men  filed  by  the  government  agent  and 
merely  touched  the  tip  of  the  pen  he  held  in  his  hand,  thus  in  the  par- 
lance of  the  trade  "marking  paper,"  and  often  with  no  explanation 
whatever  as  to  the  matters  involved.  However,  in  time  these  abuses 
came  to  an  end,  owing  to  an  extended  knowledge  among  the  natives 
of  what  were  the  processes  involved. 

In  later  years  the  regulation  that  interpreters  must  be  carried  on  the 
ships  involved  a  good  deal  of  heart-burning  among  the  islanders,  and 
also  necessarily  entailed  the  production  of  a  set  of  first-rate  humbugs 
as  interpreters,  men  who  were  cordially  detested  by  the  shore  people 
and  who  by  virtue  of  their  position  on  the  ship  gave  themselves  tre- 
mendous airs  when  ashore,  and  who  were  in  consequence  a  menace 
to  their  various  neighborhoods.  In  the  later  days  of  the  trade,  apart 
from  the  special  provisions  of  the  act,  there  was  really  no  need  for 
the  employment  of  these  interpreters,  as  there  were  people  in  every 
part  who  understood  EngHsh. 

The  practice  grew  up  of  recruits  being  obtained  by  means  of  a  present 
given  to  their  friends.  This  was  thoroughly  in  accord  with  native 
ideas  and  was  known  in  the  native  tongue  ever>^vhere  as  buying. 
Even  Bishop  Patteson  had  to  do  the  same  thing  when  he  wanted  to 
obtain  boys  as  scholars,  and  the  Mission  has  always  followed  his 
practice  when  dealing  with  people  in  Heathen  districts. 

Recruiting  ships  were  said  by  the  natives  to  buy  their  men  and  in 
the  Solomons  were  always  known  as  the  "ships  that  buy  men,"  but 
in  the  New  Hebrides  and  Banks  Group,  where  deeds  of  violence  had 
been  more  common,  they  were  known  as  "thief  ships."  The  giving 
of  a  present  when  recruiting  was  connived  at  by  the  authorities, 
though  in  itself  it  would  probably  have  been  held  to  be  contrary  to 
the  spirit  of  the  regulations.  So  long  as  this  present  consisted  of  harm- 
less things  like  tobacco  and  pipes  and  fish-hooks  and  print  and  axes 
and  knives,  no  exception  could  possibly  have  been  taken  to  the  prac- 
tice. In  later  years  gold  was  frequently  given,  even  as  much  as  £2 
or  £3  being  paid  for  a  recruit.  So  firmly  established  was  the  practice 
that  if  the  pay  were  not  given  for  a  recruit,  or  if  it  were  reserved  to 
be  handed  over  to  him  in  Queensland,  or  if  a  man  ran  away  and  got 
on  board  by  stealth,  and  no  pay  were  sent  on  shore  for  him,  he  was  said 
by  the  people  to  have  been  stolen,  and  angry  feelings  were  aroused  and 
reprisals  were  sure  to  be  made  later  on.  (The  English  words  sell  and 
pay  and  even  buy  are  frequently  rendered  by  a  single  word  in  the 
Melanesian  tongues.)  Before  the  annexation  of  the  Solomon  Islands 
men  were  frequently  bought  with  rifles.  This  of  course  was  contrary 
to  the  regulations,  but  undoubtedly  cases  of  gun-running  were  con- 
stantly occurring  in  the  Solomons  and  in  the  New  Hebrides. 


THE  QUEENSLAND  LABOR  TRADE.  225 

Many  a  native  went  to  Queensland  \vith  the  express  determination  to 
get  a  rifle  on  the  expiration  of  his  agreement.  No  one  in  Queensland 
was  allowed  to  sell  rifles  to  a  Kanaka,  and  yet  they  purchased  them 
by  the  thousands.  Snider  carbines  and  Tower  rifles  abounded  in  the 
islands.  1  he  Samoan  vessels  were  reputed  to  be  the  worst  oflenders 
with  regard  to  the  furnishing  of  rifles,  one  being  given  for  every  recruit, 
and  another  being  brought  back  by  the  recruit  on  his  return.  All 
vessels  leaving  Queensland  for  the  islands  were  examined  by  the 
customs  officials  and  were  searched  for  contraband  goods,  and  the 
returning  laborers  were  forced  to  adopt  devious  means  of  secreting 
their  guns  and  ammunition. 

The  regulation  box  given  to  returns  when  they  were  paid  oflF  was  a 
huge  affair,  36  by  18  inches,  and  sometimes  these  were  fitted  with  false 
bottoms  and  carbines  were  stowed  in  them,  the  barrel  being  cut  short 
or  the  stock  being  taken  off".  Innocent-looking  boxes  of  Queensland 
plants  were  found  to  have  earth  on  the  top  and  a  layer  of  cartridges 
underneath.  During  the  Government  inspection  rifles  were  sunk  in 
the  water  butts  or  stowed  away  in  the  sheep  pens  or  even  lowered  over 
the  side  into  the  sea.  The  native  crews  would  always  stow  away  the 
rifles  for  a  fee,  concealing  them  on  the  ship  or  up  aloft,  or  even  under 
the  ballast.  These  crews  were  mostly  Tanna  men  or  Loyalty  Islanders, 
hardened  ruffians,  most  of  them  grown  old  in  the  trade. 

When  the  Ivanhoe  was  wrecked  in  Florida  the  commissioner  had 
reason  to  think  that  the  returns  had  a  number  of  rifles  on  board,  but 
a  search  of  the  ship  revealed  nothing.  He  then  went  ashore  and  after 
digging  about  in  various  places  on  the  beach  came  across  a  whole 
consignment  of  rifles  buried  in  the  sand.  Should  the  ship's  company 
be  likely  to  refuse  to  allow  a  return  to  land  his  rifle  in  public,  a  friend 
would  come  out  in  a  canoe  by  night  and  the  rifle  would  be  lowered 
over  the  side.  It  was  a  common  practice  for  returns  to  bring  back 
charges  of  dynamite  with  fuse  and  cap  all  fixed  ready  for  firing. 
These  were  used  for  dynamiting  shoals  of  fish.  Such  charges  of  dyna- 
mite have  been  found  stowed  away  under  the  ballast  next  to  the  ves- 
sel's skin.  What  wonder,  then,  that  vessels  like  the  Sybil  and  others 
have  been  lost  at  sea  when  carrying  returned  laborers. 

All  boats  going  ashore  to  recruit  were  armed.  The  native  crew  had 
rifles  slung  under  canvas  covers  on  the  sides  of  the  boat  and  the  white 
men  carried  revolvers  and  had  rifles  also.  The  regulations  were  that 
no  boat  should  go  ashore  to  recruit  unless  accompanied  by  a  covering 
boat.  The  recruiting  boat  contained  the  white  recruiter,  who  was 
generally  the  ship's  boatswain  or  second  mate,  and  two  natives;  the 
covering  boat  had  two  white  men,  one  of  them  the  government  agent, 
and  three  natives.  In  the  recruiter's  boat  was  the  trade  box,  and  at 
times  murderous  attacks  were  made  by  the  shore  people  to  gain  pos- 
session of  this  box.     These  boats  always  landed  stern  first,  so  as  to 


226  THE  QUEENSLAND  LABOR  TRADE. 

be  able  to  get  away  quickly  in  the  event  of  a  quarrel  on  shore.  They 
turned  round  just  outside  the  breakers  and  then  backed  in.  This  is 
an  operation  requiring  considerable  skill,  but  most  of  the  native 
crews  had  served  a  long  apprenticeship  and  were  very  skilful  boatmen. 
The  boats  were  double-ended  and  were  steered  with  a  long  steer-oar 
run  through  a  strop. 

The  governor-in-council  reserved  the  right  of  forbidding  recruitmg 
in  any  certain  part.     For  many  years  but  little  recruiting  was  done 
at  Santa  Cruz;  the  kidnapping  there  in  the  early  years  had  been  the 
direct  cause  of  the  murder  of  Bishop  Patteson,  and  his  death  and  the 
death  of  Commodore  Goodenough,  coupled  with  the  known  hostile 
character  of  the  people,  caused  the  labor  ships  to  give  Santa  Cruz  a 
wide  berth.     Moreover,  in  the  other  islands  men  were  comparatively 
easy    to    obtain.     However,    one   or  two    adventurous    spirits    tried 
recruiting  at  Santa  Cruz  and  obtained  men  from  the  neighborhood  of 
Graciosa  Bay  and  also  in  considerable  numbers  from  the  Reef  Islands. 
In  the  year  1888  there  was  an  abnormal  mortality  among  these  Santa 
Cruz  recruits  in  Queensland  and  it  was  decided  to  forbid  recruiting 
there  altogether.  ~  The  poor  things  frequently  died  of  nostalgia  on 
their  way  to  Queensland;  they  never  learned  enough  English  to  enable 
them  to  communicate  their  needs,  either  to  the  whites  or  to  men  of 
their  own  color.     No  one  besides  themselves  could  talk  their  language, 
so  that  their  lot  in  Queensland  was  indeed  a  hard  one.     Yet  these 
laborers  were  so  profitable  to  the  state  that  in  1893  the  regulation  for- 
bidding recruiting  at  Santa  Cruz  was  rescinded  and  more  of  the  people 
were  taken  to  the  plantations,  but  with  the  same  sad  result.     In  one 
special  case,  the  island  of  Tongoa  in  the  New  Hebrides,  the  native 
chiefs  requested  that  their  island  be  exempt;  this  was  done,  but  their 
young  men  paddled  over  to  the  next  island  and  recruited  there. 

There  can  be  no  question  that  the  labor  trade  has  contributed  very 
largely  to  the  depopulation  of  the  islands.  We  have  the  witness  of 
Bishop  Patteson,  in  1871,  that  all  the  Banks  Islands,  with  the  exception 
of  Mota  and  part  of  Vanua  Lava,  were  depopulated.  Of  Mae,  in  the 
New  Hebrides,  he  wrote: 

"Nothing  can  be  more  deplorable  than  the  state  of  the  island— I  counted 
in  all  about  48  people  in  the  village  where  of  old  certainly  3°°  were  to  be 
seen.  Noumea,  Fiji,  Brisbane,  Tanna,  is  in  everybody's  mouth,  muskets 
in  everyone's  hand,  and  many  more  in  the  houses." 

A  very  small  percentage  of  these  men  ever  returned  home  and  many 
who  did  return  brought  contagious  diseases.  The  possession  of  rifles 
also  was  an  important  factor  in  hastening  the  decrease  of  the  popu- 
lation everywhere.  Doubtless  in  most  cases  a  spear  is  a  far  more 
deadly  weapon  in  the  hands  of  a  Melanesian  than  a  Snider  carbine,  for 
any  shot  at  a  moderate  distance,  but  as  a  rule  a  native  seldom  risks  a 
shot  from  far  oflF  and  prefers  fairly  to  scorch  his  enemy  with  the  powder 
of  the  cartridge,  sticking  the  barrel  right  up  against  him. 


THE  QUEENSLAND  LABOR  TRADE.  227 

Stories  are  told  of  men  of  Malaita  wrapping  up  old  pin-fire  rifle 
cartridges  in  a  bamboo,  binding  the  whole  with  string,  and  exploding 
the  cartridge  by  striking  the  pin  with  a  stone  or  a  billet  of  wood.  It 
had  got  to  such  a  pass  on  Malaita  in  later  years  that  for  a  man  to  be 
without  a  rifle  was  certain  death;  every  able-bodied  man  carried  a  gun. 
Ramofolo,  the  chief  of  Fuaga,  an  artificial  islet  by  Ataa  Cove,  Malaita, 
had  a  Winchester  which  he  informed  me  he  had  taken  from  a  bush 
chief  after  he  had  stalked  and  killed  him  in  order  to  obtain  it.  At 
Su*  u  Malou,  near  Aio,  on  the  east  coast  of  Malaita,  we  landed  once  in  the 
presence  of  a  great  crowd  of  armed  men,  and  it  was  only  after  they  had 
searched  our  boat  and  seen  for  themselves  that  there  was  no  weapon 
on  board  that  they  believed  our  statement  that  we  did  not  carry  fire- 
arms.    Their  test  of  being  a  man  was  the  possession  of  a  rifle. 

Queensland  was  a  veritable  refuge  for  wrong-doers  in  the  islands; 
murderers,  sorcerers,  adulterers,  wife-stealers,  thieves,  discontented 
wives,  rebellious  children,  all  hailed  the  coming  of  a  labor-vessel  as  a 
chance  to  be  freed  from  the  likelihood  of  punishment  or  from  the  irk- 
someness  of  home  restrictions.  However,  even  a  residence  of  30  years 
did  not  always  avail  to  protect  against  home  vengeance  for  wrong- 
doing, either  actual  or  imaginary,  as  was  seen  in  the  case  of  Amasia  of 
Qai,  Malaita,  who  was  shot  on  a  charge  (probably  false)  of  witchcraft 
committed  many  long  years  before.  Amasia  was  quite  the  Fijian 
when  he  returned;  he  wore  his  hair  and  his  sulu  in  the  Fijian  style  and 
had  notices  posted  up  in  his  house  in  Fijian  forbidding  people  to  eat 
areca  nut  there,  and  none  of  the  people  of  the  place  could  read.  One 
used  to  hear  of  cases  where  men  were  landed  elsewhere  than  at  their  owti 
homes,  owing  to  a  fear  of  reprisals  for  some  act  of  wrong-doing  which 
they  had  committed  and  which  had  led  to  their  recruiting.  In  due 
time  the  news  of  their  return  reached  their  home  and  their  friends 
paid  them  a  visit  which  would  result  in  a  request  that  they  return  home, 
and  all  would  be  overlooked.  If  the  man  were  persuaded  he  and  the 
woman  he  had  stolen  would  return  with  the  party  and  probably  the 
two  would  be  murdered  on  the  road  or  at  the  landing-place. 

The  acquiring  of  possessions  abroad  seldom  proved  of  any  benefit 
to  the  native  on  his  return.  The  native  law  everywhere  in  the  Pacific 
is  that  on  returning  a  voyager  shares  with  his  neighbors  all  that  he  has 
acquired.  This  is  absolutely  de  rigueur  and  the  man  quite  expects  it 
and  thinks  it  natural,  and  when  his  turn  comes  will  claim  a  share 
in  someone  else's  things.  In  Sa'a  a  return  was  not  allowed  to  open 
his  boxes  till  the  chief  gave  him  permission;  then  so  much  was  stipulated 
as  the  chief's  share  and  had  to  be  given  before  any  apportioning  was 
done.     In  one  case  the  chief  claimed  the  boxes  after  they  were  emptied. 

The  trade  in  later  years  was  carried  on  under  respectable  conditions, 
and  might  seem  to  have  justified  the  claims  of  those  who  extolled  it 
as  a  great  instrument  of  moral  and  physical  good  to  the  natives.  1  he 
laborers  were  employed  under  good  conditions  in  Queensland,  were  well 


228  THE  QUEENSLAND  LABOR  TRADE. 

fed,  well  housed,  and  well  protected  from  exploitation;  their  hours  of 
labor  were  not  too  long,  they  were  well  cared  for  w^hen  they  were  sick, 
and  practically  it  was  their  labor  that  built  up  the  sugar  industry  of 
Queensland.  Their  value  as  laborers  is  evinced  by  the  fact  that  in 
later  years  the  planters  paid  the  shipowners  £20  to  £25  per  head  for 
all  laborers  recruited,  and  also  paid  the  Government  a  capitation  fee 
of  £3  per  head,  and  deposited  £5  per  head  to  cover  the  cost  of  the 
return  passage.  Regular  food  and  regular  employment  under  decent 
conditions  made  fine  men  of  them  physically,  and  the  returns  always 
compared  favorably  in  physical  appearance  with  the  home  men.  But 
there  is  no  question  that  the  Queensland  return,  except  those  who 
had  been  at  some  mission  school,  was  as  a  rule  a  person  to  be  avoided; 
he  had  learned  something  of  the  white  man's  ways  and  had  a  certain 
amount  of  the  externals  of  civilization,  but  the  old-time  respect  for 
authority  had  all  vanished  and  its  place  w^as  taken  by  a  bold,  rough 
style  of  address  which  did  not  differentiate  between  a  high  commis- 
sioner or  a  bishop  and  a  recruiter  of  a  labor  vessel.  All  alike  were 
hailed  by  him  as  mate  and  all  would  be  asked  for  tobacco.  In  effect 
he  had  lost  the  charm  of  the  natural  state. 

Bishop  Patteson  stated  in  1871  that  these  returns  bore  a  bad  char- 
acter among  their  own  people  and  were  the  ringleaders  in  wrong-doing. 
The  general  average  of  morality  among  the  natives  seems  to  have  been 
lowered  by  their  Queensland  experiences.  Those  who  went  away 
undoubtedly  improved  in  their  physical  condition,  yet  this  was  a  poor 
compensation  for  the  loss  of  their  old  Heathen  surroundings  with  the 
air  of  mystery,  and  the  time-honored  etiquette  and  good  manners 
belonging  to  them,  and  with  nothing  whatever  to  replace  the  loss,  no 
new  set  of  rules  learned,  no  new  motive  provided  for  their  Hves,  no  new 
code  of  morals  taught,  no  new  outlook  given,  no  new  measure  of  man- 
kind impressed  upon  them  by  their  residence  in  Queensland  other 
than  that  of  physical  prowess  and  the  mere  gaining  of  money  or  the 
eating  of  food  of  a  different  character.  The  returns  from  Fiji  were 
often  improved  by  their  stay  in  civilization,  and  this  was  mainly  owing 
to  the  fact  that  they  had  either  been  employed  as  house  servants  in 
good  families  or  had  merely  changed  one  set  of  native  conditions  for 
another — living  on  a  plantation  and  learning  Fijian  or  mixing  almost 
entirely  with  natives  and  learning  but  little  English.  Practically  they 
still  were  natives  instead  of  being  bad  copies  of  a  certain  class  of  whites. 

A  very  great  number  of  lives  have  been  lost  in  and  owing  to  the 
labor  trade.  The  death  of  Bishop  Patteson  is  an  instance  of  the 
terrible  result  that  may  follow  when  men  are  determined  to  make 
money  by  acts  of  treachery  to  humanity  or  in  defiance  of  the  ordinary 
laws  of  hospitality.  Peaceful  traders  have  been  assaulted,  mission- 
aries have  been  killed,  the  boats  of  labor  vessels  have  been  attacked 
and  the  men  in  them  killed.    All  these  facts  can  be  directly  traced  to 


THE  QUEENSLAND  LABOR  TRADE.  229 

some  connection  with  the  labor  trade,  to  wrongs  done  to  natives  in 
Queensland,  to  judicial  punishment  for  crime  committed,  to  the 
abduction  or  the  recruiting  of  a  man's  relations,  to  their  deaths  or 
prolonged  absences  away  from  home  and  in  the  white  man's  country. 
In  addition  to  these  a  desire  to  gain  glory  and  reputation,  the  death  of 
a  chief  or  of  some  favorite  child,  any  one  of  these  may  be  the  motive 
that  leads  to  an  attack  upon  a  white  man;  many  sudden  and  seemingly 
unprovoked  attacks  on  a  labor  vessel's  boats  were  caused  by  the  mere 
fact  of  their  recruiting  women. 

Bishop  Patteson  was  quite  of  the  opinion  that  Melanesian  natives 
as  a  general  rule  would  respect  whites  and  would  not  treacherously 
make  attacks  on  them,  but  allowances  have  to  be  made  for  the  require- 
ments of  the  Heathen  superstition  and  for  the  peculiar  workings  of  the 
native  mind  and  to  the  feelings  of  revenge.  But  Melanesians  generally 
give  short  shrift  to  shipwTecked  people  and  to  strangers  who  come  among 
them  in  a  helpless  plight.  In  1867  a  crew  of  English  sailors  from  a 
whaleboat  landed  at  Maanaoba,  an  island  on  the  northeast  coast  of 
Malaita.  They  had  deserted  from  their  ship  in  the  Kingsmill  Islands 
and  had  been  drifting  for  weeks.  Only  one  of  the  crew,  a  boy  named 
Renton,  was  allowed  to  survive;  the  rest  were  killed.  A  chief  called 
Kabau  saved  Renton  and  took  him  across  to  the  mainland,  where  he 
lived  for  eight  years.  Ships  passed  inthe  interval,  but  he  could  not  com- 
municate with  them;  however,  a  labor  vessel,  the  Bobtail  Nag,  anchored 
near  and  he  was  able  to  send  off  to  her  a  message  scrawled  on  a  board, 
a  fragment  of  a  canoe.  This  piece  of  wood  is  preserved  in  the  Brisbane 
Museum.     Large  presents  were  given  and  Renton  was  rescued. 

The  accusation  of  treachery  so  often  brought  against  Melanesians 
has  a  certain  amount  of  foundation  from  our  point  of  view.  Attacks 
have  been  made  by  natives  on  white  men  merely  to  satisfy  a  blood  lust 
or  for  purposes  of  robbery,  as  in  the  case  of  the  massacre  on  board  of  the 
Young  Dick  at  Singerango,  Malaita;  but  it  is  indisputable  that  the 
white  man's  behavior  to  natives  in  Melanesia  has  tended  to  cause  an 
atmosphere  of  distrust  and  dislike,  and  in  most  cases  is  at  the  bottom 
of  every  attack  by  the  natives.  The  man  Rade,  who  chopped  the 
recruiter  of  the  Young  Dick  at  Mapo,  southeast  Malaita,  is  reported  to 
have  done  so  with  a  view  to  killing  him  in  revenge  for  the  death  of  the 
Mapo  chief  in  Fiji,  but  Rade  informed  me  that  the  man  was  making 
indecent  proposals  to  women;  possibly  both  versions  of  the  matter  are 
correct.  The  massacre  of  the  crew  of  the  Dancing  JJ'ave,  in  Florida,  in 
1876,  was  probably  caused  by  a  feeling  of  anger  on  the  part  of  natives 
who  had  been  sent  home  without  any  payment  of  their  wages,  owing  to 
the  estate  on  which  they  were  working  having  passed  into  the  hands  of 
mortgagees.  When  due  regard  is  had  to  the  circumstances  connected 
with  the  inception  of  the  trade,  one  can  not  wonder  at  the  amount  of 
bloodshed  and  crime  which  it  produced. 


230  THE  QUEENSLAND  LABOR  TRADE. 

Before  the  establishment  of  local  government  in  the  Solomons 
British  ships  of  war  were  employed  in  punishing  any  attacks  made  upon 
whites.  After  the  death  of  Bishop  Patteson,  H.  M.  S.  Rosario  went  to 
Xukapu  to  inquire  into  the  causes  of  his  murder.  The  natives  fired 
on  the  ship's  boats  and  the  fire  was  returned  both  b}"  rifles  and  by  the 
ship's  guns,  but  without  intending  to  kill  anyone.  A  party  was  landed 
and  the  native  village  was  burned  to  teach  the  savages  to  respect  white 
men.  A  sailor  who  was  wounded  by  an  arrow  afterwards  died  of 
tetanus.  The  whole  incident  was  unfortunate  in  that  it  embittered 
the  people  and  made  the  reopening  of  Santa  Cruz  all  the  harder  for  the 
Mission.  The  natives  of  course  thought  the  shooting  was  connected 
with  punishment  for  the  death  of  the  Bishop.  At  Raga,  New  Hebrides, 
the  paymaster  of  the  Rosario  was  attacked  and  twice  clubbed.  Shots 
were  fired  from  the  ship  in  revenge  and  four  villages  were  burned,  the 
idea  being  that  a  salutary  lesson  was  being  taught  to  the  natives,  and  in 
that  the  innocent  suffered  along  with  the  guilty  the  commander  argued 
that  owners  of  the  burned  property  would  have  to  get  their  compensa- 
tion out  of  the  guilty  ones,  as  if  the  act  would  not  have  incensed  them 
all,  and  a  hatred  for  the  whites  as  a  whole  would  result  in  consequence 
of  their  burned  homes,  while  they  themselves  rejoiced  over  the  fact  that 
no  life  had  been  taken  among  them! 

The  indiscriminate  shooting  of  shells  and  burning  of  villages  never 
impressed  the  natives;  the  only  thing  they  understand  in  the  way  of 
reprisals  is  the  actual  taking  of  life.  Time  and  again  ships  of  war 
fired  shells  into  the  bush,  some  of  them  entering  the  very  houses,  but 
due  notice  had  been  given  and  everybody  had  decamped.  At  Mapo 
one  of  the  shells  fired  into  the  bush  on  the  hills  was  dug  out  of  the  earth 
and  was  let  into  the  ground  and  used  as  a  seat.  To  fire  shells  thus  into 
the  bush  was  certainly  an  exhibition  of  power,  but  the  native  measured 
matters  otherwise,  and  it  was  not  long  before  the  power  of  naval  ships 
was  despised,  since  they  never  actually  killed  anyone  as  a  punishment 
for  these  attacks  on  the  labor-trade  vessels. 

The  last  legislation  on  the  labor  trade  to  Queensland  was  the  com- 
monwealth act  called  the  ''Pacific  Island  laborers'  act,  1901."  No 
Melanesians  were  to  enter  Queensland  after  March  31,  1904,  and  on 
December  31,  1906,  all  agreements  were  to  end  and  the  final  deporta- 
tion was  to  begin.  Exemptions  were  granted  to  any  who  had  been  five 
years  in  Queensland  before  September  i,  1884,  or  who  had  been  in 
Australia  before  September  i,  1879,  or  who  had  resided  in  Australia  for 
20  years  previous  to  December  31,  1906.  Also,  exemption  was  granted 
to  natives  who  were  registered  owners  of  freehold  in  Queensland  or  were 
married  to  women  not  natives  of  the  Pacific  Islands,  or  were  suffering 
from  bodily  infirmity  or  were  of  extreme  age. 

The  Melanesian  Mission  never  felt  it  its  duty  to  follow  the  natives  of 
these  islands  to  Queensland.     Bishop  Patteson  in  1871  was  planning  a 


THE  QUEENSLAND  LABOR  TRADF.  23  I 

visit  to  Fiji  for  the  express  purpose  of  devoting  himself  to  the  laborers 
there;  but  his  death  quite  put  Fiji  out  of  the  Mission's  thoughts.  In 
1876  Rev.  Edward  \\'ogale  went  to  Fiji  and  started  teaching  there,  but 
stayed  only  a  year  or  two  and  no  one  succeeded  him.  Bishop  John 
Selwyn  visited  Fiji  in  1880  and  made  arrangements  for  teaching  some 
of  the  laborers  on  Sundays.  Dr.  Comins  and  Luke  Masuraa  visited 
Fiji  in  1894  and  obtained  some  excellent  teachers  who  eventually  were 
responsible  for  the  opening  of  mission  work  in  the  Lau  district  of  north 
Malaita.  It  was  not  until  the  first  year  of  Bishop  Wilson's  episcopate 
that  any  of  the  authorities  visited  Queensland  with  the  definite  idea  of 
seeing  to  the  Christian  teaching  of  the  Melanesians  there.  1  he  church 
in  Queensland  as  a  whole  did  practically  nothing  for  them,  and  with  the 
exception  of  Mrs.  Robinson's  excellent  school  at  Mackay  and  Mrs. 
Clayton's  at  Bundaberg,  whatever  teaching  was  given  to  the  Melane- 
sian  laborers  was  undenominational  and  much  of  it  was  in  the  hands  of 
the  Queensland  Kanaka  Mission,  the  officials  of  which  were  Plymouth 
Brethren.  In  1896  Rev.  P.  T.  Williams  went  to  Queensland  to  organize 
work  there  for  the  Melanesian  Mission  among  the  laborers  on  the  Isis, 
and  Mr.  Pritt  was  also  at  work  on  the  Herbert  River  (called  by  the 
Melanesians  the  Albert  River). 

The  return  from  Queensland  of  so  great  a  number  of  Kanakas,  9,000 
in  all,  was  likely  to  have  varied  results.  The  actual  Christian  element 
among  them  would  be  sure  to  affect  the  Christian  life  in  the  Mission 
villages.  The  Heathen  element  was  likely  to  be  a  cause  of  ferment  and 
excitement  and  to  give  considerable  trouble,  both  to  their  fellows  and 
also  to  the  whites.  There  were  some  who,  in  their  ignorance  of  native 
life,  looked  for  a  great  material  advance  in  the  status  of  the  people  of 
the  islands,  owing  to  the  return  of  so  many  thousands  of  men  who  had 
been  taught  regular  habits  of  industry;  others  feared  that  a  great  out- 
break of  crime  might  follow  and  that  endless  feuds  and  desolating 
hatreds  would  be  stirred  up,  and  that  murders  would  be  rife.  The 
missionaries  themselves  were  glad  that  the  trade  had  ceased,  but  knew 
that  a  great  unsettlement  of  conditions  would  follow  the  repatriation. 

The  work  of  landing  the  returns  was  very  well  done  and  all  were 
landed  at  their  own  proper  "passages,"  as  the  landing-places  were 
termed.  Where  possible  they  were  encouraged  to  attend  the  Christian 
schools.  The  government  station  at  Tulagi  was  open  to  any  who  feared 
to  return  to  their  on\ti  homes.  However,  the  leavening  effect  on  the 
island  people  as  a  whole  has  been  practically  nil.  Even  those  who 
had  been  most  industrious  in  Queensland  made  but  little  attempt  to 
improve  the  agricultural  methods  of  their  countrymen.  For  months 
after  landing  none  of  them,  of  course,  did  any  work.  The  condi- 
tions were  so  totally  different,  the  restraint  of  the  plantation  life  was 
relaxed,  all  competition  had  ceased,  and  all  that  was  now  required  was 
to  get  enough  food  for  the  day's  needs.     Besides,  to  a  man  w^ho  had 


232  THE    QUEENSLAND    LABOR    TRADE. 

been  accustomed  for  years  to  a  regular  diet  of  beef  and  bread  or 
biscuit  and  sweet  potatoes  three  times  a  day,  the  haphazard  style  of 
feeding  which  the  islanders  follow  was  certain  to  prove  upsetting. 
If  work  was  to  be  done  in  Queensland  style,  then  a  great  deal  more  food 
must  be  forthcoming;  of  yams  and  taro  for  planting  there  never  is 
an  abundance,  and  though  a  man  might  have  returned  with  a  good 
round  sum  in  gold,  yet  this  would  profit  him  but  little  if  he  wanted  to 
use  it  to  give  himself  a  start  in  buying  stuff  to  plant.  The  large  colony 
of  returns  at  Fiu  on  Malaita  had  the  greatest  difficulty  for  years  to  get 
enough  food  to  supply  their  bodily  needs. 

Sewing-machines  and  gramophones  might  have  been  bought  up 
cheaply  a  week  or  two  after  the  returns  had  landed.  In  some  cases 
sewing-machines  were  actually  abandoned  on  the  beach,  for  no  one 
cared  to  carry  them  slung  on  a  pole  into  the  interior  over  razor-back 
ridges  and  up  the  bed  of  swollen  mountain  torrents.  Brown  boots 
and  bowler  hats  and  starched  shirts  and  collars  and  ties  were  seen 
adorning  the  persons  of  all  and  sundry  in  the  neighborhood  when  the 
trade  boxes  of  the  returns  had  been  opened.  Babies  that  were  brought 
ashore  in  all  the  glory  of  woolen  socks  and  bonnets  and  white  clothes 
were  rolling  about  naked  by  nightfall. 

The  pure  Heathen  amongst  the  returns  proved  generally  a  menace 
to  their  neighborhoods  by  opening  up  old  feuds  and  awakening  feelings 
of  malice  and  wickedness.  Some  of  them  in  fact  rejoiced  in  their 
reputation  as  "bad  fellow  alonga  Queensland"  and  boasted  of  their 
proficiency  in  evil  ways  and  stated  their  determination  to  cause  trouble. 
The  Christians  among  them,  in  proportion  to  their  zeal  and  earnest- 
ness, aided  the  mission  work,  but  in  many  cases  they  felt  completely 
at  sea,  owning  to  their  having  learned  their  Christianity  through  the 
medium  of  English  and  not  through  their  own  tongue,  and  unless  they 
were  sincere  and  well  instructed,  their  tendency  was  to  hold  aloof 
or  gradually  to  absent  themselves  from  the  services  of  the  Church. 

On  the  whole  it  may  be  said  that  the  results  of  the  repatriation  have 
caused  unrest  and  lawlessness  and  increased  difficulty  in  carrying  on 
any  work  whatever.  The  returns  expected  to  buy  goods  in  the  traders' 
stores  at  Queensland  prices;  they  demanded  Queensland  rates  of  pay, 
and  both  traders  and  missionaries  were  faced  with  labor  troubles,  and 
crude  socialistic  ideas  circulated  freely  everywhere.  In  fine,  while 
as  a  result  of  the  repatriation,  but  few  murders,  comparatively  speaking, 
were  committed  and  but  little  suffering  or  hardship  was  entailed,  yet 
the  main  result  was  unrest  and  disturbance,  difficulty  and  confusion. 


SANTA  CRUZ. 

The  grave  Spaniard  Mendana,  the  discoverer  of  the  Santa  Cruz 
group,  Httle  knew  how  prophetic  was  this  name  of  Holy  Cross,  which, 
in  his  rehgious  zeal,  he  had  bestowed  on  the  island  of  Ndeni.  lo-dav 
memorial  crosses  stand  in  Carlisle  Bay  and  in  Graciosa  Bay  on  Ndeni, 
and  on  the  beach  at  Nukapu,  facing  the  setting  sun. 

What  a  host  of  memories  the  name  Santa  Cruz  calls  up  to  the 
student  of  Melanesian  history!  The  ill-fated  Spanish  admiral  Don 
Alvaro  de  Mendana,  after  sailing  twice  across  the  Pacific,  found  his 
last  home  in  the  bay  which  he  had  named  Graciosa,  on  the  island  of 
Ndeni.  Three  hundred  years  later  the  noble-hearted  James  Good- 
enough,  commodore  of  Her  Britannic  Majesty's  squadron  on  the 
Australian  Station,  met  his  death  at  the  hands  of  the  natives  of  Ndeni. 
"  Poor  Santa  Cruz!  poor  people!"  was  the  exclamation  of  Edwin  Nobbs 
and  Fisher  Young,  the  faithful  Norfolk  Island  lads  in  the  company  of 
Bishop  Patteson,  as  they  writhed  in  the  agonies  of  tetanus  brought 
on  by  wounds  from  those  terrible  Santa  Cruz  arrows.  Mano  Wad- 
rokal,  the  native  deacon  from  the  Loyalty  Islands,  the  first  missionary 
to  Santa  Cruz,  braved  the  fury  of  these  excitable  people  time  and 
again  in  his  efforts  to  win  them  for  Christ  and  for  peace.  Mr.  Lister 
Kaye's  name  will  go  down  to  posterity  as  that  of  the  first  white  man 
to  live  on  Santa  Cruz  after  Mendana  and  his  company.  Mr.  Forrest 
w  as  the  next  white  man  to  live  there  and  for  the  whole  of  his  time  his 
life  was  constantly  in  danger.  Dr.  John  Williams  was  content  to 
sacrifice  his  worldly  prospects  and  to  devote  himself  to  the  healing  of 
ulcers  and  the  curing  of  ringworm  on  Santa  Cruz  bodies.  Mr.  O'Fer- 
rall  and  Mr.  Nind  endured  innumerable  dangers  and  perils  by  waters, 
visiting  the  islands  in  their  whaleboats.  The  last  victim  claimed  by 
Santa  Cruz  was  the  mission  priest  Guy  Bury,  who  died  in  191 1  after 
a  short  residence  of  a  few  months,  the  victim  not  of  poisonous  arrows, 
but  of  malignant  island  ulcers. 

Forty  miles  north  of  Santa  Cruz  lies  the  Swallow  Group,  commonly 
called  the  Reef  Islands,  and  on  the  smallest  of  these,  Nukapu,  there 
perished  the  great  mission  hero  Bishop  Patteson.  On  the  island  of 
Vanikolo,  60  miles  south  of  Santa  Cruz,  the  famous  French  explorer 
La  Perouse,  who  just  failed  of  annexing  Australia  to  the  French  crown, 
was  ingloriously  cast  away. 

A  brilliant  galaxy  of  names — explorers,  sailors,  missionaries,  admirals, 
bishops,  priests,  deacons — and  still  to-day  Santa  Cruz  and  its  neigh- 
boring islands  are  mainly  Heathen. 

Santa  Cruz  was  discovered  and  named  by  Mendafia  in  1595,  sailing 
from  Callao  in  his  endeavor  to  reach  again  and  colonize  the  isles  of 
Solomon,  which  he  had  himself  discovered  on  a  previous  voyage  in 

233 


234 


SANTA    CRUZ. 


1566.  The  night  before  the  expedition  sighted  land  the  yllmiranta,. 
the  fourth  ship  of  the  squadron,  disappeared,  being  wrecked  possibly 
on  one  of  the  Reef  Islands  or  on  the  Duff  Group,  95  miles  northeast 
of  Santa  Cruz.  Mendaiia  made  a  settlement  in  a  bay  at  the  north- 
east end  of  the  island,  which  he  named  Graciosa  Bay.  Here  the  expe- 
dition stayed  for  two  months,  their  ranks  being  gradually  thinned  by 
disease  and  by  the  arrows  of  the  natives.  Mendana  died  and  was 
buried  at  Santa  Cruz.  The  rest  of  the  company  abandoned  their 
ideas  of  colonization  and  set  out  for  Manila,  just  failing  to  sight  the 
Solomons  when  two  days'  sail  from  Santa  Cruz. 

The  Swallow  Group  was  discovered  and  named  by  Carteret  in  1766 
after  his  ship,  the  Swallow.  The  Duff  Group,  Taumako,  was  named 
after  the  mission  ship  of  the  London  Missionary  Society,  the  Duffy 
w^hich  sighted  them  when  on  a  voyage  returning  from  Tahiti  in  1797. 
The  fate  of  La  Perouse  was  discovered  by  Dillon,  who  landed  at  Van- 
ikolo  in  1826. 

The  Santa  Cruz  Group  lies  to  the  east  of  the  Solomons,  and  the 
large  island  Ndeni,  which  Mendafia  named  Santa  Cruz,  is  200  miles 
from  Ulawa  and  a  little  less  from  Santa  Anna,  the  small  island  at  the 
southern  extremity  of  San  Cristoval.  Ndeni  is  22  miles  long  and  IQ 
or  12  miles  broad.  Like  most  of  the  Melanesian  islands,  there  is  but 
little  flat  land  on  it;  the  center  ridge  rises  to  a  height  of  2,000  feet  and 
the  ridges  which  offset  from  it  terminate  right  on  the  coast.  The  whole 
island  is  covered  with  the  usual  dense  vegetation.  The  climate  is 
wet  and  steamy  and  very  trying  to  Europeans.  The  average  number 
of  days  on  which  rain  falls  is  probably  in  excess  of  the  number  of  rainy 
days  in  the  Solomons,  which  Dr.  Guppy  reckons  as  about  180.  There 
seem  to  be  hardly  any  bush  villages  at  all,  the  population  living  in 
large  villages  on  the  shore.  Graciosa  Bay  in  particular,  a  deep  inden- 
tation at  the  north  end,  has  a  large  number  of  populous  villages.  The 
total  population  may  be  8,000,  but  numbers  died  of  dysentery  in  1915. 

Agriculture  is  followed  to  some  extent,  yams,  and  what  are  known 
in  the  Solomons  as  "pana,"  being  grown.  The  "pana"  is  a  yam  that 
has  a  prickly  vine.  Coconuts  are  comparatively  few  in  number,  but 
Santa  Cruz  is  renowned  for  its  large  canarium  nut  (almond).  These 
are  smoked  and  preserved  in  leg-of-mutton-shaped  baskets  plaited 
out  of  a  coconut  leaf.  These  baskets  of  nuts  are  brought  off  to  the 
ships  for  trade,  but  the  Cruzians  are  quite  capable  of  filling  them  with 
rubbish  and  then  palming  them  off  on  the  unwary. 

The  weapons  of  the  peoples  in  all  the  islands  of  the  group  are  bows 
and  arrows.  The  bow  is  made  of  very  tough  wood,  is  of  great 
length,  and  exceedingly  hard  to  bend.  The  bowstring  is  twisted  out 
of  fiber  made  from  the  bark  of  a  garden  tree  which  in  Ulawa  is  called 
su  a.  The  su  a  tree  has  berries  of  the  size  and  appearance  of  coffee 
berries.     These  are  boiled  in  wooden  bowls  by  means  of  placing  hot 


SANTA    CRUZ.  235 

Stones  in  the  bowls  and  are  esteemed  a  great  relish.  Ihe  young  shoots 
of  the  su  a  are  eaten  as  spinach,  and  so  are  the  catkins  of  the  male 
tree.  Pishing-lines  are  made  from  the  same  bark,  and  some  of  the 
lines  are  strong  enough  to  hold  a  shark.  They  are  coated  with  a 
preparation  made  from  the  inner  skin  of  the  casuarina. 

The  arrows  of  Santa  Cruz  are  much  to  be  dreaded.  Dr.  Codrington 
writes  that  they  are  uniformly  4  feet  long  and  weigh  about  2  ounces. 
The  bone  point  is  7  inches  long  and  the  foreshaft  (of  hardwood  curi- 
ously carved  and  colored)  is  16  inches  long.  1  he  bone  head  (human 
bone)  is  covered  with  a  preparation  of  vegetable  ashes  which  is 
supposed  to  give  great  supernatural  power.  The  common  result  of  a 
wound  from  any  of  these  arrows  is  certainly  tetanus.  However,  it 
is  quite  certain  that  no  vegetable  poisons  are  consciously  used  in  the 
preparation  of  the  arrows,  but  all  the  preparation  is  done  while  charms 
are  being  said  to  fasten  supernatural  qualities  on  the  arrow.  What 
the  native  seeks  for  is  an  arrow  which  shall  have  inana  to  hurt.  The 
truth  of  the  matter  seems  to  be  that  while  the  arrows  are  poisonous, 
they  are  not  deliberately  poisoned.  A  punctured  wound  in  the  tropics 
may  easily  be  followed  by  tetanus,  especially  if  dirt  be  adhering  to 
whatever  caused  the  puncture;  and  the  breaking  off  of  a  fine  point  of 
bone  in  a  wound  is  sure  to  be  dangerous  and  likely  to  be  fatal.  The 
introduction  into  the  wound  of  an  acrid  or  burning  substance  will 
increase  the  inflammation  in  it.  In  the  case  of  natives,  it  is  always 
expected  that  tetanus  will  surely  follow^  and  the  expectation  may  go 
a  long  way  to  cause  the  symptoms.  One  would  think  that  the  rigidity 
of  the  bows  and  the  weight  of  the  arrows  would  militate  considerably 
against  the  accuracy  of  the  shooting;  the  Malaita  bow  is  much  more 
easily  bent  and  the  arrow  is  lighter,  though  a  little  longer. 

The  men  in  the  whole  of  the  group  wear  a  turtle-shell  ring  hanging 
from  the  septum  of  the  nose.  These  rings  are  made  out  of  the  tail- 
piece of  the  turtle  shell,  which  is  of  considerable  thickness  and  has  an 
aperture  where  it  fits  on  to  the  carapace.  This  particular  piece  of 
the  shell,  called  popo  (stern)  in  Ulawa,  is  much  sought  after.  When 
the  man  wishes  to  eat  he  has  to  lift  up  his  nose  ring.  Numbers  of 
rings  made  of  strips  of  turtle  shell  are  hung  in  the  ears,  the  lobe  of 
which  becomes  much  distended,  and  it  is  a  common  thing  for  the  rings 
to  touch  the  shoulder.  Great  heavy  discs  of  pure  white  clam-shell 
are  suspended  from  the  neck.  The  best  of  these  are  said  to  be  made 
from  clam  shells  of  immemorial  antiquity  found  inland  in  the  bush 
and  dating  back  to  the  time  when  the  land  was  upheaved.  On  these 
discs  (called  te  via,  moon)  a  piece  of  turtle  shell  is  tied,  cut  into  the 
conventional  shape  of  the  man-of-war  hawk.  Some  of  the  discs  are 
10  inches  in  diameter. 

The  boys  are  clad  in  a  native  mat  after  attaining  a  certain  age  and 
the  men  all  wear  the  native  mat  as  a  loin-cloth.     The  women  also 


236  SANTA    CRUZ. 

wear  the  native  mat.  In  the  Melanesian  islands  of  the  group  the 
women  are  kept  much  in  seclusion  and  do  not  mingle  freely  with  the 
men,  and  in  all  the  islands  alike  there  is  not  as  much  freedom  of 
intimacy  between  the  sexes  as  one  sees  in  the  Solomons.  Yellow 
ocher  is  much  used  and  everything  gets  stained  by  it.  The  men  plaster 
their  hair  with  lime,  thus  bleaching  it,  and  one  often  sees  the  hair  done 
up  by  wrapping  a  piece  of  paper  mulberry  bark  round  it.  The  women's 
heads  are  shaven. 

Some  20  miles  north  of  Graciosa  Bay,  and  in  full  view,  there  towers 
the  active  volcanic  cone  called  Tamami  by  the  Ndeni  people  and 
Tinakula  by  the  Reef  Islanders.  This  volcano  is  about  2,000  feet 
high  and  rises  straight  out  of  the  sea.  Its  top  is  generally  covered 
with  a  cloud  which  is  half  mist  and  half  steam,  and  at  nights  the  red 
lava  is  often  seen  coursing  down  the  steep  face  to  the  sea  on  the  north- 
west side  of  the  island.  On  his  last  voyage,  as  he  lay  becalmed  near 
the  volcano,  Bishop  Patteson  noticed  that  it  was  in  action,  and  Bishop 
John  Selwyn  saw  pumice  and  gravel  descending  the  sides.  The 
earthquakes  which  are  so  common  in  the  neighborhood,  and  which  are 
felt  so  frequently  at  Ulawa  in  the  Solomons,  are  probably  caused  by 
disturbances  at  this  volcanic  center.  The  weather  coast  of  Ulawa 
is  frequently  covered  with  pumice-stone  carried  there  by  the  southeast 
winds.  Tinakula  is  uninhabited,  but  coconuts  appear  round  the 
coast  and  the  neighboring  peoples  of  Nupani  are  said  to  be  in  the  habit 
of  visiting  it  to  collect  what  food  it  offers.  There  is  a  striking  likeness 
between  Tinakula  and  Meralava  in  the  Banks  Group,  and  were  Tina- 
kula to  cease  its  activity  the  fertility  of  its  soil  would  doubtless  equal 
that  of  Meralava. 

The  Swallow  Group,  or  Reef  Islands,  lie  about  40  miles  northeast  of 
Graciosa  Bay.  These  islands  are  all  small  and  low-lying,  the  largest 
of  them,  Fenua  Loa,  is  6  or  8  miles  in  length  and  very  narrow,  while 
others  (like  Pileni  and  Nukapu)  are  tiny  places  which  one  could  walk 
round  in  half  an  hour.  There  is  a  deep-water  passage  on  the  east 
side  of  Fenua  Loa,  between  it  and  the  cluster  of  islands  marked  Lomlom 
on  the  chart.  Lomlom  is  really  the  name  of  a  village  on  Fenua  Loa, 
and,  so  far  from  the  Lomlom  of  the  chart  being  one  island,  it  is  really 
a  group  of  five  clustered  round  a  lagoon.  The  largest  of  these  is  named 
Ngailo,  and  the  entrance  to  the  lagoon  is  by  a  passage  facing  Fenua 
Loa.  The  lagoon  is  dotted  with  villages  and  the  people  of  each  island 
maintain  their  separate  lives,  often  being  at  war  with  their  next-door 
neighbors.  There  is  a  passage  through  to  the  south,  but  owing  to 
the  prevailing  southeast  wind  this  is  negotiable  only  in  calm  weather. 
Two  small  islands  lie  off  Ngailo,  called  Bange  Netepa  and  BangeNinde. 
These  differ  from  the  rest  of  the  group  in  having  no  encircling  reef  and 
rise  precipitously  to  150  feet,  with  no  beach  and  with  bad  landings. 


SANTA    CRUZ.  237 

Fenua  Loa  is  separated  only  at  high  water  from  its  northern  neighbor 
Nifilole.  Huge  reefs  stretch  out  west  in  a  great  arm  from  Fenua  Loa, 
and  inside  the  encirchng  reef  Hes  Matema.  When  journeying  from 
Ndeni  by  whaleboat  to  the  Reef  Islands  the  missionaries  made  for  an 
opening  in  the  reef  opposite  Matema  and  then  sailed  or  rowed  up  in 
the  quiet  water  under  the  lee  of  Fenua  Loa.  The  little  island  Pileni 
lies  3  miles  away  from  Nifilole,  and  there  is  a  deep-water  passage 
between  the  two;  Pileni,  like  Nifilole,  Nukapu,  and  Nupani,  is  raised 
only  a  few  feet  above  sea-level,  but  it  differs  from  them  in  having  no 
encircling  coral  reef.  Nukapu  is  15  miles  west  of  Pileni  and  Nupani 
20  miles  still  farther  west.  All  the  islands  are  covered  with  dense 
forest. 

The  population  of  the  Reefs  is  probably  now  not  much  more  than 
500  all  told,  and  two  distinct  types  of  language  are  spoken — Mela- 
nesian  and  Polynesian — each  type  being  split  up  again  into  what 
almost  amounts  to  local  dialects.  On  Fenua  Loa  and  Nifilole  and  the 
islands  to  the  eastward  the  language  is  Melanesian  and  is  akin  to  that 
spoken  on  Ndeni;  on  Matema,  Pileni,  Nukapu,  and  Nupani  the 
language  is  a  much-decayed  form  of  a  Polynesian  language.  It  is 
probable  that  these  four  Polynesian-speaking  islands  do  not  differ  to 
any  very  great  extent  in  language,  but  that  the  differences  in  the  Mela- 
nesian-speaking  islands  of  the  group  are  far  more  noticeable.  It  is 
worthy  of  note  that  of  the  Melanesian  islands  Fenua  Loa  (Long  Island) 
has  a  distinctly  Polynesian  name,  and  Nifilole  is  almost  certainly  of 
the  same  language  stock. 

On  the  Reef  Islands  there  is  but  little  food  and  no  good  fresh  water. 
The  people  live  largely  on  fish,  coconuts,  and  breadfruit.  Frequent 
journeys  are  made  to  Ndeni  in  the  sailing  canoes  to  get  food,  which  is 
bartered  for  fish,  dried  breadfruit,  and  woven  mats.  The  breadfruit 
is  dried  and  made  up  in  little  plaited  packets  of  cane  or  is  kept  in  a 
silo  in  the  ground  and  eaten  when  required.  The  smell  of  the  bread- 
fruit thus  preserved  is  too  much  for  European  nostrils.  Fish  abound 
in  the  shallow  waters  of  the  lagoons  and  are  shot  with  arrows  or  caught 
with  nets  or  hooks.  The  shells  found  in  these  waters  are  particularly 
numerous  and  beautiful. 

The  Santa  Cruz  group  claims  particular  notice  for  three  reasons: 
its  languages,  its  looms,  its  canoes.  There  has  never  been  any  attempt 
made  to  learn  the  Polynesian  language  spoken  in  the  Reefs.  Bishop 
G.  A.  Selwyn  and  Bishop  Patteson  were  both  Maori  scholars  and  were 
able  to  hold  converse  with  the  Nukapu  people.  Dr.  Codrington  has 
published  a  small  grammar  of  the  Nifilole  language  and  one  a  little 
fuller  of  the  Ndeni  language. 

The  eating  of  areca  nut  with  pepper  leaf  and  quicklime,  which  is 
characteristic  of  all  the  groups  from  the  Solomons  westward  to  India, 
proceeds  no  farther  eastward  than  Santa  Cruz  and  Tikopia.     In  the 


238  SANTA    CRUZ. 

rest  of  Melanesia,  the  New  Hebrides,  Banks,  Torres,  Fiji,  and  in  the 
whole  of  Polynesia  there  is  no  eating  of  areca  nut,  but  kava-drinking 
is  found  instead.  In  the  Solomons  and  in  New  Guinea  the  lime  is 
conveyed  to  the  mouth  from  the  lime  gourd  or  the  bamboo  by  means 
of  a  spatula  or  a  stick,  but  the  Cruzian  scorns  such  delicate  ways 
and,  wetting  his  first  finger,  plunges  it  into  the  lime  and  thence  into 
his  mouth.  As  a  result  of  this  excessive  use  of  lime  the  lips  of  the 
elders  are  caked  quite  hard  and  distinct  articulation  becomes  impos- 
sible, so  that  it  is  from  the  lips  of  the  children  that  the  languages 
must  be  learned. 

The  Melanesian  languages  of  the  group  have  vowels  which  in  cer- 
tain parts  of  speech  are  inconstant,  being  attracted  to  the  sound  of 
the  neighboring  vowels.  Thus  a  certain  preposition  may  be  wfl,  me, 
mo,  according  to  the  vowel  in  the  word  which  it  governs.  All  the  vowels 
except  i  have  a  secondary  or  modified  sound.  The  consonants  also 
vary  greatly;  k  and  g  constantly  interchange,  also  k  and  ng,  and  d  and  t; 
p,  b,  and  v  are  used  indifferently  in  the  same  word;  /  and  n  also  inter- 
change. The  personal  pronouns  diflPer  materially  from  those  in  ordi- 
nary use  in  Melanesia,  there  being  only  one  set  (instead  of  two  or  three) 
which  is  suffixed  to  nouns  as  possessive,  to  verbs  as  objects,  to  a  stem 
ni  as  subjects.  With  the  verbs  the  same  use  prevails  as  in  the  Solo- 
mons, the  personal  pronouns  being  suffixed  as  objects,  the  sense  con- 
veyed being,  however,  rather  participial  or  gerundival.  The  tran- 
sitive termination  of  verbs  so  common  elsewhere  in  Melanesia  does  not 
seem  to  appear  in  Santa  Cruz. 

But  very  little  of  the  Bible  has  ever  been  translated  into  any  of  the 
Santa  Cruz  tongues.  Parts  of  the  Prayer  Book  were  rendered  by  Mr. 
Forrest  into  the  language  of  Ndeni,  but  the  translation  is  reported  to 
be  very  faulty  and  has  practically  been  set  aside.  There  is  a  great 
and  honorable  work  awaiting  someone  who  shall  set  himself  to  learn 
one  of  these  tongues,  to  use  it  for  the  dissemination  of  Christian 
truths,  to  ascertain  its  rules  and  methods  of  speech,  to  produce  its 
grammar  and  dictionary.  Dr.  Codrington  has  laid  the  foundations 
for  such  study  in  his  specimen  grammars  of  Ndeni  and  Nifilole.  The 
main  requisites  for  learning  a  native  language  are  a  good  ear  to  catch 
the  sounds  and  a  good  memory  to  be  able  to  repeat  the  words  and 
phrases,  and  a  sympathetic  mind  that  can  put  itself  e7i  rapport  with 
the  minds  of  the  natives. 

In  view  of  the  special  difficulty  of  the  languages  spoken  in  the  Santa 
Cruz  islands,  the  Melanesian  Mission  would  be  well  advised  to  set 
one  of  its  scholars  to  work  on  some  one  particular  language  in  order 
to  impart  the  information  thus  gained  to  others  not  so  well  qualified 
to  work  on  a  new  language.  The  Rev.  H.  N.  Drummond  was  of  the 
opinion  that  one  of  the  Polynesian  tongues,  say  that  of  Pileni  or 
Matema,  should  be  made  the  standard  tongue  for  the  Reef  Islands, 


SANTA    CRUZ.  239 

and  that  it  should  be  used  as  the  basis  for  all  linguistic  work.  The 
peoples  speaking  Polynesian  never  learn  the  Melanesian  tongues, 
whereas  those  who  speak  Melanesian  are  nearly  always  bilingual. 
It  would  be  advisable  to  take  the  language  of  some  one  island  and 
definitely  adopt  it  as  the  standard  language  for  all  translational  work. 
To  learn  one  language  well  and  to  make  that  the  lingua  franca  seems 
a  feasible  project. 

Undoubtedly  one  of  the  chief  reasons  for  the  present  religious  stag- 
nation in  Santa  Cruz  is  the  Mission's  failure  to  learn  any  one  of  the 
languages  and  to  make  translations.  Many  boys  have  been  taken 
from  the  neighborhood  to  Norfolk  Island  and  have  returned  home  in 
order  to  impart  to  their  fellows  what  they  had  learned  of  Christianity. 
They  might  have  done  much  even  without  assistance  from  the  whites 
had  they  been  provided  with  books,  but  with  the  exception  of  good 
Henry  Leambi  hardly  one  of  them  has  risen  to  a  sense  of  the  duties 
of  his  high  calling  and  has  kept  to  his  post.  A  Matema  bov,  Ben 
Teilo,  has  done  excellent  work  on  Vanikolo  and  Utupua,  and  has 
lateh'  been  ordained  deacon. 

The  Santa  Cruz  boys  never  throve  when  taken  to  Norfolk  Island. 
As  a  whole  they  failed  to  show  much  sign  of  intellectuality,  though 
some  of  them  were  sharp  enough;  they  were  always  the  first  to  fall  ill, 
and  during  any  epidemic  they  were  a  constant  source  of  anxiety.  It 
is  reported  that  during  one  epidemic  of  meningitis  five  Cruzians 
died  within  a  few  days  of  one  another,  some  sickening  and  dying  within 
the  day.  In  former  years  vessels  endeavored  to  recruit  laborers  at 
Santa  Cruz  for  Queensland,  but  the  recruiting  was  stopped  owing  to 
the  heavy  mortality  which  occurred  through  nostalgia,  men  simply 
giving  up  the  ghost  in  their  homesickness.  In  later  years  the  Mission 
has  been  taking  Santa  Cruz  boys  for  training  as  teachers  to  the  central 
school  at  Vureas,  Banks  Islands.  There  they  seem  to  have  kept  in 
better  health,  but  nevertheless  they  have  been  a  source  of  great  anxiety 
and  some  have  died. 

Santa  Cruz  can  also  claim  distinction  as  being  the  only  place  in 
Melanesia  where  the  people  use  a  hand  loom.  Looms  do  not  appear 
in  Polynesia  at  all,  but  the  one  used  at  Santa  Cruz  has  great  likeness 
to  those  used  in  the  Carolines.  Looms  also  appear  in  the  Philippines 
and  in  Borneo.  The  Spaniards  in  1595  remarked  on  the  presence  of 
these  looms.  The  fiber  used  in  the  weaving  is  derived  from  the  stem  of 
a  certain  banana  and  is  made  into  mats  for  wearing  as  dresses  and  into 
kits  for  men's  use  to  carry  their  lime-boxes,  etc.  The  weaving  is  done 
by  the  men. 

The  wonderful  sailing  canoe  of  the  Cruzians  is  called  loju  01  tepukri. 
These  are  made  principally  in  the  Duff  Group,  laumako.  The  foun- 
dation of  the  canoe  is  a  large  hollowed-out  log,  the  aperture  being 
covered  eventually  to  keep  out  the  water.     On  this  log  a  big  stage  is 


240 


SANTA    CRUZ. 


built  up  with  cross-timbers  projecting  on  both  sides,  the  timbers  being 
tied  with  sennit.  To  keep  the  log  upright  there  is  a  float  of  light  wood 
into  which  strong  stakes  are  driven;  these  are  then  fastened  with  sennit 
lashings  and  the  other  ends  are  made  fast  to  the  timbers  of  the  stage. 
On  the  outrigger  side  of  the  stage  there  is  a  little  apartment  with  walls 
and  roof  of  sago  palm,  where  a  fire  can  be  made,  and  on  the  opposite 
side  is  a  sloping  platform  where  the  steersman  stands  holding  his  long 
paddle  and  where  the  merchandise  is  carried. 

The  sail  of  these  canoes  is  shaped  Hke  that  of  the  New  Guinea  sailing 
canoes,  a  swallow  tail,  and  is  made  of  sago-palm  leaf.  The  canoes  sail 
either  end  first.  The  Cruzians  make  great  voyages  in  these  canoes, 
the  Matema  people  journeying  to  Vanikolo,  the  better  part  of  100 
miles  away.  At  times  the  sailing  canoes  are  driven  out  of  their  course 
and  reach  the  Solomon  Islands.  In  one  of  the  schools  at  Ulawa  a 
large,  wide  plank,  which  was  part  of  the  well  of  one  of  these  canoes, 
served  as  a  table  in  the  school-house.  The  wood  was  that  beautiful 
rosewood  known  in  Ulawa  as  liki  and  had  been  cut  from  the  big  flanges 
of  the  tree;  it  was  a  rich  red  in  color  and  the  graining  was  beautiful. 
The  plank  was  sawed  up  to  make  the  credence  in  the  Mwadoa  Church, 
Ulawa. 

The  voyagers  in  these  canoes  experience  great  hardship  at  times 
when  driven  out  of  their  course  by  rough  winds.  The  Southern  Cross 
rescued  recently  some  natives  out  of  a  tepukei  far  out  of  sight  of  land. 
They  had  been  at  sea  for  a  fortnight.  A  case  is  reported  of  a  canoe 
with  Christians  on  board  returning  from  Taumako.  The  wind  proved 
unfavorable  and  for  ten  days  they  were  out  of  sight  of  land.  Then 
water  gave  out  and  in  their  despair  they  prayed  for  rain.  The  next 
day  a  favorable  wind  sprang  up  accompanied  by  heavy  showers,  and 
they  were  able  to  catch  some  water,  and  then,  marvellous  to  relate, 
they  knew  their  position  and  steered  for  home. 

Ulawa  has  frequently  received  these  tempest-driven  canoes.  In 
former  days  the  crews  were  killed,  but  during  Christian  times  their 
lives  have  been  preserved.  Some  of  them  have  married  and  settled 
down  in  Ulawa;  Ngorangora  village  had  a  Reef  Island  woman  who 
had  married  there.  Some  of  these  castaways  have  built  small  out- 
rigger canoes  and  set  ofl^  for  home  paddling.  At  night  they  steered  by 
the  stars  and  they  generally  managed  to  reach  home.  Bishop  Selwyn 
in  1878  wrote  of  a  Nupani  man  who  had  paddled  his  way  back  from 
Ulawa.  Some  years  ago,  on  the  weather  coast  of  Ulawa,  just  as  the 
darkness  w^as  coming  on,  we  sighted  two  Cruzians  in  one  of  their  small 
canoes.  Fires  were  lighted  and  every  attempt  was  made  to  induce 
them  to  land,  but  they  evidently  were  afraid  of  the  reception  which 
might  be  awaiting  them  and  they  paddled  away  into  the  darkness. 
Their  power  of  locating  their  position  is  wonderful.  Captain  Bon- 
gard,  of  the  old  Southern  Cross,  used  to  tell  the  story  of  Te  Fonu,  one 


SANTA    CRUZ.  24I 

of  the  two  Nifilole  men  driven  away  from  Nupani,  whom  Bishop 
Selwyn  rescued  from  Port  Adam  on  Malaita  in  1877  and  returned  to 
their  homes  and  thus  opened  up  the  way  again  to  Santa  Cruz.  In 
order  to  test  Te  Fonu's  knowledge  of  the  direction  of  Santa  Cruz  the 
captain  used  to  call  him  up  at  night  as  they  were  sailing  and  ask  him 
where  Santa  Cruz  lay.  Te  Fonu  would  look  at  the  stars  and  then 
would  point  unerringly  in  the  direction  of  his  home,  no  matter  on 
what  course  the  ship  was  lying.  Santa  Anna,  one  of  the  two  small 
islands  at  the  east  end  of  San  Cristoval,  has  a  considerable  number  of 
Cruzians,  who  after  being  shipwrecked  made  their  home  there. 

The  smaller  paddling  canoe  of  Santa  Cruz  is  well  worthy  of  mention; 
it  is  called  jaolo  in  Ndeni.  It  is  built  in  the  same  way  as  the  sailing 
canoe,  a  hollow  log  with  an  outrigger  and  with  a  platform  joining  the 
two  parts.  The  aperture  in  the  log  is  very  narrow  and  the  paddlers 
sit  on  the  lip  and  have  their  legs  crossed.  Both  the  small  canoes  and 
the  sailing  ones  are  coated  with  lime.  The  paddles  have  a  large,  heavy 
blade  and  a  long  handle,  and  look  very  clumsy  in  comparison  with  the 
long,  tapering  blades  used  in  the  eastern  Solomons.  ^r.-jfc 

When  the  coming  of  the  ships  was  somewhat  of  a  rare  event,  it  was 
a  great  sight  to  see  the  numbers  of  canoes  that  came  flocking  out  to 
barter  their  goods  at  the  ship's  side.  Two  men  sat  in  each  canoe, 
one  on  each  side  of  the  platform,  and  often  a  boy  would  be  squatting 
on  the  platform  among  the  goods  brought  for  barter.  These  goods 
consisted  of  bow^s  and  bundles  of  arrows,  paddles,  dancing  clubs,  mats, 
kits,  looms,  fishing  nets  and  lines,  lassoes  for  shark  catching,  flying- 
fish  floats,  shell  armlets,  shells  and  shell  spoons  for  scraping  coconut, 
bundles  of  smoked  canarium  nuts,  coconuts,  dried  and  green  bread- 
fruit, a  few  yams  and  pana,  areca  nuts  and  pepper  leaves,  wild  wood 
pigeons,  parrots,  and  native  fowls.  The  scene  alongside  the  ship  was 
one  of  the  wildest  excitement,  the  men  all  shouting  their  loudest,  some 
holding  up  various  articles  of  barter  and  hissing  to  attract  the  atten- 
tion of  the  people  on  the  ship,  some  maneuvering  for  place  alongside, 
canoes  getting  foul  of  one  another  and  occasionally  one  filling.  To 
be  capsized  is  no  hardship  for  a  Cruzian;  his  canoe  may  even  turn  turtle, 
but  owing  to  the  outrigger  it  will  never  sink.  They  are  quite  able  to 
right  an  overturned  canoe;  then,  catching  hold  of  the  end,  they  pull 
the  canoe  backward  and  forward,  jerking  the  water  out,  and  finally, 
jumping  on  board,  they  bail  furiously  till  the  craft  is  afloat  again. 

To  allow  the  Cruzians  to  come  on  board  is  fatal  to  the  peace  of  the 
ship.  They  pester  everyone  to  buy,  thrusting  their  wares  into  one's 
face  and  muttering  tamhaika  (tobacco).  The  price  is  arranged  by  the 
buyer  holding  up  as  many  fingers  as  he  thinks  the  article  to  be  worth 
in  sticks  of  tobacco,  whereupon  the  Cruzian  says  mondu,  i.  e.,  more, 
and  the  buyer  airs  his  knowledge  of  the  language  by  saying  i'ege  kalinge, 
"no,  my  friend,"  and  so  the  process  goes  on.     Great  hands  are  laid 


242  SANTA    CRUZ. 

on  one's  arm;  huge  mouths  red  with  areca  nut  and  Hme  are  thrust  in 
one's  face;  the  scent  of  strong-smelUng  herbs  worn  in  the  shell  armlets 
almost  overpowers  one;  clothes  are  marked  with  stains  of  yellow  ocher; 
an  unmistakable  odor  of  natives  pervades  everything,  and  keen  eyes 
follow  every  movement;  great  heads  bleached  with  lime  or  wrapped  up 
in  bark  cloth  are  thrust  into  the  windows;  everything  movable  has  to 
be  put  out  of  reach,  and  portholes  have  to  be  shut.  Captain  Bongard 
told  the  story  of  a  Cruzian  who  endeavored  to  purloin  one  of  the  iron 
ringbolts  fastened  to  the  deck,  returning  time  and  again  to  have  a  pull 
at  it.  Cats  are  much  prized  by  these  peoples,  and  the  ship's  cat  has 
to  be  guarded  carefully  when  they  are  on  board. 

As  soon  as  the  ship  begins  to  move  ahead  and  the  decks  are  cleared 
the  confusion  becomes  appalling.  Men  hang  over  the  ship's  side 
waiting  for  their  canoes  and  expostulating  furiously  with  the  ship's 
company;  others  have  to  be  forced  to  leave,  offering  their  wares  all 
the  time.  The  ship's  people  throw  tobacco  into  the  water  alongside 
the  canoes  and  instantly  men  dive  over  (the  white  soles  of  their  feet 
showing  up  plainly),  seize  the  tobacco,  and  come  up  shaking  the  water 
out  of  their  mops  of  hair  and  wiping  the  salt  off  their  faces;  then,  leap- 
ing aboard  and  grasping  their  paddles,  they  start  off  after  the  rest  of 
the  flotilla.  Tobacco  wet  with  salt  water  would  not  tempt  a  white 
man,  but  the  Nupani  men  are  reported  to  have  smoked  tobacco  mixed 
with  dried  shark  fins!  It  requires  skill  to  extricate  the  legs  from  the 
narrow  openings  in  the  canoe,  and  occasionally  as  the  man  goes  to  leap 
overboard  his  leg  is  caught  and  broken  bones  are  the  result. 

Those  who  are  the  last  to  leave  the  ship  calmly  drop  into  the  water 
over  the  side,  holding  their  wares  extended  in  the  left  hand.  So  quietly 
do  they  slip  into  the  water  that  the  left  hand  is  seldom  submerged; 
then,  swimming  with  the  right,  they  make  their  way  to  their  friends. 

The  catching  of  sharks  by  the  Cruzians  deserves  a  word  of  notice. 
Each  canoe  carries  a  number  of  half  coconut  shells  strung  on  a  length 
of  rattan  cane.  On  arriving  at  a  place  frequented  by  sharks  this  hoop 
of  cane  is  jerked  up  and  down  in  the  water  and  a  kind  of  gurgling 
noise  is  produced  by  the  shells  which  certainly  attracts  the  sharks. 
The  noise  is  popularly  supposed  to  imitate  the  sound  made  by  a  shoal 
of  bonito  leaping  out  of  the  water,  and  sharks  are  always  found  where 
there  are  bonito.  As  soon  as  a  shark  is  seen,  a  bait  (usually  consisting 
of  a  fish)  is  thrown  out;  this  is  tied  to  a  string  and  is  pulled  in  towards 
the  canoe.  The  shark  becoming  bold  follows  the  bait  until  (after  a 
few  throws)  he  gets  right  alongside  the  canoe.  A  man  is  sitting  ready 
holding  a  noose  in  his  hand  and,  as  the  shark  passes  him,  the  end  of 
the  noose  is  slipped  over  the  shark's  nose.  The  noose  gradually 
tightens  as  the  shark  turns  and  then  the  battle  begins.  Eventually 
the  shark  is  pulled  alongside  the  canoe  and  is  dispatched  with  blows  on 
the  head  from  a  heavy  club.     The  shark  lines  are  twisted  out  of  fiber 


SANTA    CRUZ.  243 

made  from  the  bark  of  the  tree  su' a.,  described  previously.  Shark 
is  esteemed  a  great  delicacy,  but  Europeans  would  be  well  advised 
if  they  refrained  from  visiting  the  villages  where  the  flesh  or  the  fins 
are  being  prepared,  for  the  odor  is  almost  unbearable. 

Mr.  O'Ferrall  noted  that  the  Pileni  men  were  sorry  for  themselves 
in  that  no  sharks  were  left  round  their  island! 

In  1906  Rev.  H.  Hawkins,  now  archdeacon  in  charge  of  the  Maoris 
in  the  diocese  of  Auckland,  went  on  the  Southern  Cross  with  a  Maori 
priest  round  the  Polynesian-speaking  islands  of  the  Mission  to  inquire 
into  the  prp  .ticability  of  sending  Maori  missionaries  to  work  on  these 
islands.  In  addition  to  Matema,  Pileni,  Nukapu,  and  Nupani  in  the 
Reefs,  there  is  Tikopia  to  the  southeast,  and  in  the  Solomons  Rennell 
and  Bellona,  west  of  San  Cristoval,  and  Sikaiana,  north  of  Ulawa, 
islands  all  lying  out  of  the  ordinary  track.  They  were  able  by  talking 
Maori  to  make  themselves  understood  in  all  these  islands,  and  were 
quite  confident  that  Maori  missionaries  would  be  able  to  get  on  there 
from  the  very  first  without  much  hindrance.  However,  the  isolation 
in  which  they  would  have  been  compelled  to  live  their  lives  was  felt 
to  be  a  complete  barrier  against  the  Maoris  taking  up  the  work.  The 
only  chance  of  their  being  visited  was  during  the  biennial  trips  of  the 
Southern  Cross.  For  white  men  thus  to  be  isolated  is  hard  enough, 
but  in  the  case  of  Maoris  such  isolation  would  be  quite  fatal.  Never- 
theless, several  Maoris  volunteered  for  the  work,  and  now  that  the 
Marsden  Centenary  has  been  celebrated  the  project  is  being  revived 
and  Maoris  of  the  diocese  of  Waiapu  are  raising  funds  to  support  some 
of  their  own  number  as  missionaries  in  Melanesia. 

But  it  can  not  be  said  that  the  problem  of  frequent  communication 
with  these  islands  has  yet  been  solved.  A  small  auxiliary  schooner, 
the  Selzvyn,  was  built  for  the  purpose  of  intercommunication  between 
the  various  stations  in  the  Solomons,  but  so  far  she  has  not  proved  a 
success  and  has  spent  a  great  deal  of  her  time  lying  up  in  harbor, 
owing  to  engine  defects.  A  new  engine  has  now  been  installed,  and 
better  things  are  expected  of  the  Selzvyn,  but  her  small  size  would 
militate  against  her  making  frequent  and  regular  voyages  to  the  out- 
lying Polynesian  islands  in  the  Solomons,  and  it  would  be  quite  out 
of  the  question  to  think  of  her  visiting  Santa  Cruz.  If  the  Maoris 
are  to  go  as  missionaries,  then  they  must  be  regularly  visited,  for 
their  health's  sake  as  well  as  for  the  supervision  of  their  work,  and  this 
would  demand  the  presence  of  a  powerful  auxiliary  schooner  stationed 
possibly  in  the  Solomons. 

In  any  case,  it  is  quite  out  of  the  question  for  the  work  at  Santa  Cruz, 
when  it  is  revived,  to  go  on  any  longer  without  the  missionaries  being 
provided  with  some  better  means  of  locomotion  than  a  whaleboat. 
Mr.  Nind's  breakdown  in  health  was  caused  by  prolonged  journeys 
bv  boat.     With  their  boats  fitted  with  a  small  dipping  lug-sail,  when 


244  SANTA    CRUZ. 

crossing  over  to  the  Reefs  from  Ndeni  they  had  to  get  up  as  far  east  as 
possible,  their  sail  being  small  and  the  westerly  set  very  strong,  and  it 
was  often  doubtful  whether  they  could  make  Matema  or  not;  if  they 
failed,  they  had  to  risk  the  reefs  in  the  night  and  make  for  Nukapu. 
On  the  return  journey  they  were  lucky  if  they  could  make  land  at  the 
west  end  of  Ndeni,  at  Te  Motu,  and  should  the  wind  fail  them  or  veer 
round  there  was  the  prospect  of  a  steady  pull  for  hours,  often  with  an 
inferior  crew,  against  wind  and  tide  and  current.  With  the  settling 
of  white  missionaries  again  in  the  group,  it  will  be  absolutely  necessary 
to  provide  a  launch  for  the  purpose  of  work  round  Ndeni  itself,  and  in 
order  to  insure  regular  and  easy  voyages  to  the  Reefs,  even  if  no  Maoris 
are  sent.  Utupua  and  Vanikolo  lie  too  far  away  to  be  reached  from 
Santa  Cruz  in  a  launch,  but  were  there  a  powerful  auxiliary  schooner 
in  the  eastern  Solomons  regular  visits  could  be  paid  to  all  these  places. 

The  Heathen  religion  in  the  Santa  Cruz  group  consists  of  the  worship 
of  the  dead.  The  people  of  importance  become  ghosts,  duka^  after 
death,  and  a  stock  of  wood  is  set  up  in  their  houses  to  represent  them. 
Offerings  of  pigs'  flesh  and  of  the  first  fruits  of  the  crop  are  made  to 
the  duka  from  time  to  time  and  are  laid  in  front  of  the  stock.  These 
offerings  are  not  allowed  to  lie  there  long,  and  are  soon  eaten  by  the 
offerers  on  the  plea  that  the  duka  having  now  eaten  the  immaterial 
substance  of  the  gifts,  the  offerers  are  free  to  eat  the  fleshy  part. 

The  duka,  when  offended,  causes  sickness,  and  the  doctor  called  in 
is  one  who  possesses  spiritual  power,  malete,  and  who  owns  a  duka  him- 
self. These  wizards,  mendeka,  control  the  weather  on  a  sea  journey, 
taking  the  stock  of  their  duka  with  them  and  setting  it  up  in  the  deck- 
house; they  also  control  the  sunshine,  the  rain,  and  the  wind.  In  the 
large  villages  on  Ndeni  and  in  the  island  of  Nupani  a  number  of  these 
stocks  are  set  up  in  one  house,  manduka^  and  the  ghost-house  is  often  a 
building  showing  some  considerable  artistic  taste  in  the  decoration  of 
the  pillars  or  in  the  carvings.  The  fear  of  the  duka  controls  every 
department  of  life. 

Feather  money  is  peculiar  to  Santa  Cruz;  it  is  made  of  the  red 
breast-feathers  of  a  small  honey-eater,  a  bird  of  the  glossiest  black 
plumage  all  over  save  for  the  breast-feathers;  the  bill  is  long  and 
curved.  The  birds  are  caught  with  birdlime,  and  they  are  sometimes 
worn  alive  tied  by  the  legs  to  a  man's  waist-belt.  The  red  feathers 
are  gummed  to  pigeon's  feathers,  and  these  are  bound  on  a  prepared 
foundation  in  rows,  so  that  only  the  red  is  seen.  A  length  of  this  money 
is  about  15  feet. 

Bishop  G.  A.  Selwyn  visited  Santa  Cruz  in  1852,  but  did  not  land. 
Four  years  later  he  visited  the  place  again  and  endeavored  to  make 
friends  with  the  people.  Mr.  Patteson  and  the  Bishop  in  the  same 
year  landed  at  Utupua,  Vanikolo,  and  Nukapu.  At  the  latter  place 
their  knowledge  of  Maori  stood  them  in  good  stead.     In  1862  Bishop 


SANTA    CRUZ.  245 

Patteson  went  ashore  in  several  places  at  Santa  Cruz  and  was  well 
received.  Two  years  later  an  attack  was  made  upon  his  boat  in 
Graciosa  Bay,  and  Edwin  Nobbs  and  Fisher  Young  were  shot  with 
arrows  and  died  of  tetanus.  The  reason  for  the  attack  was  that  they 
probably  were  taken  for  ghosts,  duka,  and  ghosts  being  really  unsub- 
stantial could  not  be  harmed  by  arrows.  The  natives  have  short- 
lived memories  and  are  slow  to  receive  impressions,  and  have  no 
power  of  making  comparisons  or  of  drawing  inferences,  and  though 
the  news  of  the  white  men's  coming  must  have  been  generally  spread 
abroad,  yet  it  would  be  long  before  it  got  into  the  minds  of  the  people 
that  these  were  real  men  like  themselves,  and  came  from  a  real  country 
in  a  real  canoe  like  their  own  sailing  canoes,  loju,  and  were  not  merely 
unsubstantial  ghostly  figures,  embodied  spirits  of  their  ancestors. 

In  1870  Bishop  Patteson  landed  at  Nukapu,  and  in  the  following 
year  he  was  killed  there,  Mr.  Atkin  and  Stephen  Taroaniaro  being 
shot  at  the  same  time  and  dying  afterwards  of  tetanus.  The  reason 
for  the  attack  was  to  avenge  the  abduction  and,  to  their  mind,  death, 
of  five  natives  who  had  been  kidnapped  by  a  labor  vessel  a  few  days 
previously.  In  1875  Commodore  Goodenough  was  killed  at  Carlisle 
Bay,  on  Ndeni,  a  few  miles  east  of  Nelua.  The  attack  on  him  seems 
to  have  been  caused  by  jealousy  between  two  villages,  the  attacking 
party  being  unfriendly  to  his  guides  and  resenting  his  approaching 
them  from  the  enemy's  village,  whereas  had  he  not  thus  gone  through 
the  villages  no  attack  would  have  been  made. 

In  1877  communications  were  opened  up  again  with  the  group  after 
these  two  murders.  Bishop  John  Selwyn  was  rescued  and  returned 
to  Nupani  with  Te  Fonu,  one  of  two  men  who  had  been  blown  away 
and  who  were  being  kept  at  Port  Adam,  Malaita,  as  "live  heads," 
ready  for  killing  when  needed.  Mano  Wadrokal,  the  native  deacon 
from  Nengone,  with  his  wife,  Carrie,  volunteered  the  next  year  to  leave 
Bugotu,  where  he  had  settled,  and  begin  a  school  on  Nifilole,  Te  Fonu's 
home.  Wadrokal  reported  that  the  population  of  Nukapu  had  been 
greatly  reduced  by  sickness;  he  himself  was  ill  owing  to  want  of  food 
and  of  good  water  and  was  taken  away  from  the  Reefs.  The  follow- 
ing year  the  Bishop  took  a  party  of  men  from  Nifilole  accompanied  by 
Wadrokal,  and  thus  made  friends  with  the  people  of  Ndeni.  While 
Wadrokal  was  at  Nifilole  a  number  of  people  from  the  mainland  crossed 
over  to  the  Reefs  and  visited  him  and  made  friends,  and  at  his  own 
request  he  was  set  down  at  Nelua  to  endeavor  to  start  a  school.  All 
honor  must  be  paid  to  the  brave  Wadrokal  settling  thus  alone  in  the 
midst  of  these  excitable  and  warlike  people.  His  own  spirit  seems  to 
have  been  a  mettlesome  one,  and  his  white  fathers  found  him  hard  to 
control,  but  he  was  ever  a  pioneer,  and  he  paved  the  way  for  gentler 
and  less  fiery  successors. 


246 


SANTA    CRUZ. 


In  1 88 1  Mr.  Lister  Kaye  joined  Wadrokal  at  Nelua,  and  thus  was 
the  first  white  man  after  Mendafia's  party  to  Hve  on  Santa  Cruz. 
Wadrokal  had  made  friends  with  the  people  and  they  had  built  him 
a  good  house,  and  a  few  of  them  were  coming  for  instruction.  The 
natives  were  found  to  be  hospitable  and  friendly,  and  the  attitude 
of  suspicion  and  distrust  with  which  they  had  been  regarded  owing  to 
their  attacks  on  the  whites  now  seemed  likely  to  be  dispelled.  Wad- 
rokal was  withdrawn  in  1883  owing  to  illness,  and  the  Bishop  lamented 
that  he  had  no  native  volunteer  helper  to  place  at  Santa  Cruz.  One 
or  two  attempted  to  stay,  but  the  excitable  character  of  the  people 
and  the  loneliness  proved  too  much  for  them.  Wadrokal  returned  in 
1884,  and  was  present  at  Nukapu  when  the  Bishop  and  Mr.  Kaye 
erected  Bishop  Patteson's  cross  there.  Boys  were  taken  the  same  year 
to  Norfolk  Island  from  Santa  Cruz  for  the  first  time,  but  some  of  them 
died.  Little  progress  was  made  with  the  mission  work  in  these  years, 
and  there  were  no  baptisms  except  those  of  scholars  at  Norfolk  Island. 

The  son  of  the  chief  of  Nelua,  Natei,  and  his  affianced  bride  were 
allowed  to  go  up  to  Norfolk  Island,  where  they  were  afterwards  bap- 
tized and  given  the  names  of  James  Goodenough  and  Monica.  James 
was  named  after  the  Commodore,  and  Mrs.  Goodenough  was  respon- 
sible for  the  cost  of  his  education,  but  he  never  seemed  to  be  satis- 
factory, and  eventually  had  to  be  disrated.  His  wife  was  a  very  good 
woman  and  proved  very  helpful  in  keeping  the  women  together. 
Santa  Cruz  has  all  along  suffered  from  a  want  of  firm  and  reliable  head 
teachers,  though  Daniel  Melamakaule  did  good  work  at  Te  Motu  and 
Henry  Leambi  was  ever  a  gentle  and  quiet  Christian  gentleman. 

In  1887  Mr.  Forrest  replaced  Mr.  Kaye,  and  the  Bishop  also  spent  a 
short  time  ashore  and  visited  the  villages  on  the  north  coast.  By  this 
time  the  school  at  Nelua  was  fairly  well  attended,  but  the  teaching 
had  been  intermittent.  A  small  school  was  started  on  Nifilole  by  a 
lad  named  Moses  Tepukeia,  who  had  been  baptized  at  Norfolk  Island. 

In  1889  Mr.  Forrest  started  a  school  at  Te  Motu,  a  village  on  the 
island  Guerta,  at  the  west  entrance  to  Graciosa  Bay,  and  he  had  Dr. 
Welchman  to  assist  him.  Mr.  Forrest  and  Daniel  Melamakaule 
were  shot  at  near  Te  Motu,  on  account  of  jealousy  between  two 
villages,  they  having  had  occasion  to  cross  from  one  village  to  another, 
thus  incurring  the  enmity  of  their  attackers.  Their  courage  and 
firmness  alone  saved  them.  The  first  adult  baptisms  were  also  held 
this  year,  six  people  being  baptized  at  Nelua.  The  separation  of  the 
sexes  is  very  closely  observed  in  Santa  Cruz,  and  separate  schools  had 
to  be  kept  for  the  women;  the  one  at  Nelua  was  ably  managed  by 
Monica  and  Fanny.  At  Nifilole  the  men  and  the  women  are  never 
together  in  public,  not  even  in  the  gardens  or  in  performing  any  house- 
hold work,  and  the  absence  of  capable  women  teachers  in  the  Reefs 
has  proved  a  great  hindrance. 


SANTA    CRUZ.  247 

Sixteen  adults  were  baptized  in  1890  at  Nelua,  and  a  small  begin- 
ning was  made  on  Nukapu.  Natei,  the  Heathen  chief  of  Nelua,  caused 
a  great  deal  of  trouble  by  attempts  to  blackmail  some  of  the  teachers. 
The  following  year  baptisms  were  held  both  at  Nelua  and  1  e  Motu, 
and  a  beginning  was  made  on  Pileni.  In  1894  Mr.  Forrest  made  a 
journey  in  a  sailing  canoe  to  the  DufF  Group,  and  George  Domo  con- 
sented to  stay  and  start  a  school  there.  In  1895  ^^^^  baptized  Christians 
in  the  group  numbered  116.  Schools  had  been  started  at  three  places 
on  Ndeni  and  the  Reef  Islands  had  two  struggling  schools. 

Dr.  J.  Williams  was  in  charge  during  1896  and  he  staid  at  Santa 
Cruz  for  a  while  with  Mr.  O'Ferrall  during  the  following  year.  Daniel 
had  done  good  work  at  Te  Motu,  and  in  1896  Bishop  Wilson  conse- 
crated a  new  church  there.  The  first  baptism  in  the  Reef  Islands  was 
held  in  1897  at  Nifilole;  there  were  two  candidates.  The  next  year  both 
of  the  schools  on  Ndeni  were  closed,  the  one  owing  to  the  teacher's  sin, 
the  other  owing  to  the  complete  indiflference  and  the  practical  lapse 
into  Heathenism  of  the  male  teachers.  The  two  women,  Monica  and 
Fanny,  still  persevered  and  saved  the  place  from  complete  spiritual  death. 

The  Te  Motu  school  was  reopened  in  1898  on  the  teacher's  repent- 
ance, but  nothing  could  be  done  at  Nelua,  and  from  then  on  till 
about  191 5  Christianity  practically  ceased  at  Nelua.  Te  Motu  has 
somewhat  relieved  the  darkness  of  the  picture,  but  even  there  the  work 
proceeded  but  fitfully.  School  work  in  the  Reef  Islands  was  greatly 
interrupted  by  the  constant  absences  of  the  men  on  trading  and  fish- 
ing expeditions;  there  was  also  a  lack  of  good  teachers,  the  boys  who 
were  sent  to  Norfolk  Island  having  to  return  before  their  time  on 
account  of  ill  health.  During  this  year  the  British  Protectorate  was 
proclaimed  over  the  group,  but  the  resident  commissioner  was  stationed 
in  the  Solomons.  Traders  were  now  being  established  on  Ndeni  and 
steamers  were  making  occasional  calls.  The  following  year  French 
vessels  recruited  illegally,  but  were  ordered  to  return  the  natives  and 
to  pay  a  heavy  fine.  It  does  not  appear  that  the  punishment  was 
enforced,  but  all  recruiting  ceased. 

In  1899  George  Domo  reopened  the  school  on  Pileni  and  a  school 
was  begun  in  one  of  the  villages  on  Fenua  Loa.  Nothing  much  ever 
came  of  this,  and  the  death  of  one  of  the  school  people  brought  the 
work  to  an  end.  A  boy,  Govili,  was  sent  from  Nukapu  to  Norfolk 
Island,  but  had  to  be  returned  owing  to  ill  health.  In  1900  there 
were  120  baptized  people  in  the  group.  In  this  year  Mr.  Nind  arrived 
to  assist  Mr.  OTerrall.  A  new  school  was  opened  on  Matema  b\'- 
Andrew  Veleio,  but  the  Reef  Islands  had  no  teachers  for  the  women 
and  the  men  were  forever  travelling  about. 

In  1901  the  first  confirmation  was  held  in  Santa  Cruz,  at  Te  Motu, 
there  being  14  candidates.  Nimbi,  a  village  close  to  Te  Motu,  sent 
four  boys  to  Norfolk  Island  and  new  boys  were  obtained  from  Ngailo 


248 


SANTA    CRUZ. 


in  the  Reefs.  In  1904  Mr.  Drummond  was  relieving  at  the  Reefs. 
Ben  Teilo,  a  Matema  boy,  made  good  use  of  the  trading  connection 
existing  between  his  home  and  Vanikolo,  visiting  the  latter  place  and 
beginning  a  school  there.  George  Domo  also  started  a  school  on 
Nukapu,  but  died  soon  after.  By  the  end  of  1905  the  Christians 
numbered  127.  In  1906  a  house  was  built  for  the  missionaries  in 
Graciosa  Bay,  for  the  purpose  of  starting  a  central  training  school  for 
teachers.  The  site  was  easy  of  access,  but  proved  to  be  too  much  on 
the  highway  for  canoes  passing  up  and  down  to  allow  of  any  quiet. 

A  few  small  schools  were  opened  on  Ndeni,  but  the  supply  of  teachers 
was  not  sufficient.  Henry  Leambi  was  the  only  one  of  the  past  who 
was  still  holding  on.  At  Nililole  the  people,  never  many  in  number, 
were  nearly  all  dead;  Pileni  was  in  an  unsatisfactory  state,  and  the  two 
teachers  at  Matema  were  making  gallant  efforts  to  hold  their  own. 
Teilo  opened  a  new  school  on  Utupua  in  1908,  having  several  Reef 
Island  assistants,  one  of  them  being  Govili  of  Nukapu.  While  home 
for  a  holiday  Teilo  had  done  good  work  in  preaching  and  exhorting  in 
Matema,  Nukapu,  and  Pileni.  A  number  of  Reef  Island  boys  were  now 
at  Vureas.  The  statistics  for  1908  show  the  Christians  as  numbering 
only  TJ.     No  white  missionary  was  available  now  for  the  group. 

The  following  year  an  attempt  was  made  to  work  the  group  by 
means  of  a  brotherhood,  consisting  of  Rev.  H.  N.  Drummond,  Rev. 
C.  Turner,  and  Mr.  Blencowe;  Mr.  Drummond  had  left  his  work  on 
Raga  for  this  purpose.  Taumako,  in  the  Duff  Group,  was  visited 
and  a  boy  was  obtained,  and  an  attempt  was  made  to  start  a  school. 
Nupani,  which  had  asked  in  vain  in  former  years  for  a  teacher,  was 
now  found  closed  against  Christianity,  owing  to  the  devotion  and 
respect  paid  to  the  ghosts,  who  had  given  them  great  success  in  fishing. 
Some  catechumens  on  Nukapu  were  being  instructed  for  baptism. 
Meanwhile  nothing  much  was  doing  at  Ndeni,  except  at  Te  Motu; 
the  church  at  Nelua  had  fallen  into  ruins,  and  the  people  were  content 
to  lapse  into  heathenism.  At  the  end  of  the  year  Mr.  Drummond 
returned  to  Raga,  and  the  next  year  Mr.  Blencowe  was  the  only  mis- 
sionary left.  Rev.  G.  Bury  had  come  to  assist,  but  died  after  only 
three  months'  work,  the  victim  of  malignant  ulcers  caused  by  scratches. 
In  his  ignorance  he  had  healed  them  over  with  iodoform  and  subse- 
quently died  of  blood-poisoning.  Despite  the  mission's  long  history, 
and  the  fact  that  all  the  missionaries  suffered  more  or  less  from  these 
ulcers  on  the  legs,  no  certain  means  was  known  of  preventing  the 
scratches  caused  by  coral,  etc.,  from  festering  and  turning  into  these 
ulcers.  Corrosive  sublimate,  lysol,  witch  hazel,  poulticing,  iodoform, 
carbolic  acid,  all  these  had  been  tried  in  vain.  No  satisfying  treatment 
was  known,  but  the  writer  eventually  found  that  antiphlogistine  is  a 
remedy  and  safeguard  in  the  event  of  the  legs  being  scratched. 

In  1910  the  first  baptisms  were  held  on  Nukapu,  one  of  the  persons 
baptized  being  the  sister  of  Bishop  Patteson's  murderer.     Volunteers 


SANTA    CRUZ.  249 

from  the  Reef  Islands  offered  for  work  in  Tikopia,  Utupua,  Vanikolo, 
Taumako,  and  Santa  Cruz.  Mr.  Blencowe  left  for  England  to  read  for 
holy  orders,  and  the  group  was  left  in  charge  of  a  San  Cristoval  native 
teacher,  Ben  Monongai.  Ben  Teilo  was  taken  in  1913  to  the  Solomons 
to  read  for  deacon's  orders,  and  Bishop  Wood  ordained  him  the  same 
year. 

For  the  present  all  active  mission  work  has  ceased  in  Santa  Cruz. 
It  is  the  intention  of  Bishop  Wood  to  make  an  attempt  to  open  up 
things  there  again  with  Mr.  Blencowe  in  charge,  and  with  that  object 
in  view  he  is  asking  all  the  friends  of  the  Mission  to  unite  in  prayer 
that  the  reproach  of  Santa  Cruz  may  be  wiped  away.  Already  the 
prayers  are  being  answered.  On  the  main  island,  Ndeni,  school- 
houses  have  been  put  in  order  and  the  people  have  shown  themselves 
desirous  of  returning  to  Christian  ways.  In  the  Reef  Islands  vol- 
unteers have  offered  to  go  as  teachers  wherever  they  may  be  sent. 
Up  to  the  present,  however,  no  white  men  are  available  to  act  as  leaders. 
Mr.  Blencowe  is  serving  as  an  army  chaplain  and  the  smallness  of  the 
Mission's  staff  precludes  the  idea  of  anyone  being  delegated  for  this 
special  work.  We  can  only  wait  in  the  certainty  that  our  prayers  will 
be  answered  and  that  leaders  will  be  forthcoming. 

The  difficulties  to  be  overcome  are  undoubtedly  great — climate, 
language,  isolation,  indifference,  instability  on  the  part  of  the  people. 
However,  the  Christian  influence  of  the  past  will  have  made  itself  felt, 
and  there  will  no  longer  be  the  fear  of  the  missionaries'  lives  being 
endangered  by  attacks  from  the  natives.  Volunteers  are  being  called 
for  among  the  native  Christians  in  other  parts  of  the  Mission,  and  if 
picked  men  are  sent  and  provision  made  for  their  instruction  in  the 
various  languages,  and  also  for  a  regular  visitation  of  the  stations,  then 
it  is  quite  certain  that  the  success  which  has  attended  the  work  else- 
where will  also  attend  it  in  Santa  Cruz. 


Prayer  for  Santa  Cruz. 

^'0  God,  our  loving  Father,  we  humbly  ask  Thee  to 
send  priests  and  teachers  full  of  the  Holy  Ghost  and 
of  power  to  revive  Thy  Church  in  Santa  Cruz;  that  the 
faithful  may  he  strengthened,  the  lapsed  restored,  and 
the  Heathen  converted,  through  Jesus  Christ  our  Lord.*' 
Amen. 


I  YENS 


IM.AI  1-:   -1 


A.  Carved  Food-bowls  and  Porpoise. 

B.  Food-bowls  from  Ulawa. 


I  YENS 


PLATE  5 


o 


ni;.\"s 


in.ATE  6 


A.  Carvings  from  L  lawa     Man,  Pig,  and  Dog. 

B.  Ulawa  Hair-combs. 

C  C.     Forehead  Ornaments  made  of  Clam  and  Turtle  Shell,  Florida. 


I  YENS 


PLATE 


IVFA'S 


IM.ATi:  s 


IVENS 


PLATE  9 


i\i:.\.>' 


IM.ATi:   10 


IVENS 


PLATK  U 


c/ 


3 

z 


c 

O 
>- 


8748 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 

This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


SEP  5      1958 


'  '^Bd  URL-tjff 

yUL2  11967 


REC'D  10- [JW 


MAR  2  8 


i9 


\M 


c 

rorm  Ly-50i«ll,"oO(2534)444 


t-.-.  ,...?1 


■'•••"f-y/?/ 


1991^ 


UNIVERSITY  of  CALIFORNIA 


(JELES 

^ARY 


3  1158  00155  5431 


I 


PLEACt  DO   NOT    REMOVE 
THIS    BOOK  CARD-J 


^^^•llBRARYc^ 


r-n 


University  Research  Library 


UC  SOUTHt 


AA    000  694  041     5 


